No.11 6) DRYPIX7000 Service Manual

FUJI MEDICAL DRY LASER IMAGER
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
Document No. 006-259-08

First Edition Oct. 15, 2002
Revised Edition May 15, 2007
Printed in Japan
0.1
Copyright © 2002-2007 by FUJIFILM Corporation
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,

stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
006-259-08
02.15.2007 FM5077 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual 0.1
0.2
1. HANDLING THIS SERVICE MANUAL
1.1 About This Service Manual

This Service Manual applies to the Fuji Medical Dry Laser Imager DRYPIX 7000.
Notation of Unit Symbols

For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units
(SI) are used, as a rule. However, some metric units that are not allowed in the SI but
are permitted under the Measurement Law are partially used.
Notation of Cautions, Warning, etc.

The notation formats of “WARNING”, “CAUTION”, “INSTRUCTIONS”, “NOTE”,
“REMARKS” and “REFERENCE” are shown below.
WARNING
Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in death or
serious injuries.
CAUTION
Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in light or moderate
injuries, or serious malfunction (unrecoverable or difficult to recover) of the equipment.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in damage to the
equipment, or other problems.
<NOTE>
Indicated where special attention is required during a work procedure.
<REMARKS>
Indicated where description of the term used or supplementary explanation is given.
Used to indicate the relevant reference.
006-259-03
0.3
1.2 Service Manual Appropriations

1. All rights are reserved by the FUJIFILM Corporation (FUJIFILM).
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service
personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is
therefore proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.
4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following.
• Manual copying in whole or in part.
• Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
• Manual uses for purposes other than technical service.
5. The contents of this manual are subject to changes for product improvement.
1.3 Software Version in This Manual

This manual describes the functions of main unit software version A02/A03/A04/V4.1/
V5.0/V6.0/V7.0 or later/V10.0/V11.0/V12.0/V13.0 or later for DRYPIX 7000. It also
describes functions of software version V3.0 of the service tool DI Tool.
006-259-08
0.4
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTION
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION .............................................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
1.1 General Precautions...................................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation .......... SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
2. LABELS....................................................................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-8
2.1 Laser Caution Labels .................................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-8
2.2 Other Labels................................................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-12
3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR LASER
RADIATION EXPOSURE PREVENTION.................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-20
4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS ............................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-22
5. CLASSIFICATION ..................................................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-23
SPECIFICATIONS
1. SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................... SPECIFICATIONS-2
1.1 Part Names ............................................................. SPECIFICATIONS-2
1.2 List of Optional Parts ............................................ SPECIFICATIONS-3
1.3 General Specifications .......................................... SPECIFICATIONS-4
1.4 Equipment Dimensions and Weight .................... SPECIFICATIONS-7
1.5 Means to Move and Secure Equipment ............... SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.6 Environmental Requirements............................... SPECIFICATIONS-9
1.7 Electrical Requirements...................................... SPECIFICATIONS-11
1.8 Equipment Installation Space ............................ SPECIFICATIONS-12
1.8.1 Installation Space ....................................... SPECIFICATIONS-12
1.8.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work...... SPECIFICATIONS-13
1.9 Disposing the Equipment ................................... SPECIFICATIONS-14
006-259-04
0.5
DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)

1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT .......................................................................... MD-2
1.1 Functions of Equipment ................................................................ MD-2
1.2 System Configuration .................................................................... MD-4
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts .................................. MD-6
1.3.1 External View ....................................................................... MD-6
1.3.2 Operation Panel ................................................................... MD-8
1.3.3 Layout of External Interface Connector ................................ MD-9
1.3.4 Layout of Units ................................................................... MD-10
1.3.5 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions ............... MD-12
1.3.6 Layout of Boards ................................................................ MD-22
1.3.7 Layout of Rollers/Guide Boards ......................................... MD-25
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING THE EQUIPMENT ..................................... MD-28
2.1 Power ON Operations .................................................................. MD-28
2.2 Error Processing .......................................................................... MD-29
2.3 Power OFF Operations ................................................................. MD-31
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL OPERATIONS ................................... MD-32
3.1 Tray Loading Unit ......................................................................... MD-32
3.2 Removal Unit ................................................................................. MD-35
3.3 Upper Conveyor Unit .................................................................... MD-40
3.4 Sub-scanning Unit ........................................................................ MD-46
3.5 Scanning Optics Unit ................................................................... MD-47
3.6 Heat Development Unit ................................................................ MD-50
3.7 Film Release Unit .......................................................................... MD-51
3.8 Sorter ............................................................................................. MD-52
006-259-03
0.6
4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL ........................................... MD-56

4.1 System Block Diagram................................................................. MD-56
4.2 Outline of Power Supply .............................................................. MD-57
4.3 Interlock Control ........................................................................... MD-58
4.4 Functions of Boards..................................................................... MD-60
4.4.1 PC Board ............................................................................ MD-60
4.4.2 PRN Board ......................................................................... MD-61
4.4.3 MCT Board ......................................................................... MD-62
4.4.4 SNS Board ......................................................................... MD-64
4.4.5 DRV Board ......................................................................... MD-66
4.4.6 PNL Board, VR Board ........................................................ MD-68
4.4.7 Power Supply Unit .............................................................. MD-70
4.4.8 SRT Board.......................................................................... MD-72
5. MECHANISM CONTROL FLOW ............................................................... MD-74
5.1 Reading the Mechanism Control Flow ....................................... MD-74
5.2 Initialization Flow.......................................................................... MD-75
5.2.1 Upper/Middle/Lower Removal Unit Initialization ................. MD-76
5.2.2 Cleaning Roller Grip Initialization ....................................... MD-77
5.2.3 Conveyance Grip Roller Initialization ................................. MD-78
5.2.4 Upper Film Positioning Section Initialization ...................... MD-79
5.2.5 Lower Film Positioning Section Initialization....................... MD-80
5.2.6 Remaining Film Discharge ................................................. MD-81
5.3 Normal Processing ....................................................................... MD-86
5.3.1 Film Removal ..................................................................... MD-87
5.3.2 Film Conveyance ................................................................ MD-91
5.3.3 Pre-recording Conveyance/Recording Conveyance ........... MD-95
5.3.4 Heat Development Conveyance ......................................... MD-97
5.3.5 Film Release Conveyance.................................................. MD-98
6. PRINTING FORMATS .............................................................................. MD-100
6.1 Reading the Format Name ......................................................... MD-100
6.2 Standard Formats ....................................................................... MD-101
6.3 Mixed Formats ............................................................................ MD-102
006-259-03
0.7
TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD ................................................................. MT-2
2. ERROR CODE.............................................................................................. MT-4
2.1 Checking Error Codes .................................................................... MT-4
2.2 Format of Detailed Information ..................................................... MT-6
2.2.1 FLH (Conveyance) Related Detailed Error Information ......... MT-7
2.2.2 MFC (Data Setting/System Related) Related Errors
Detailed Information ............................................................ MT-13
2.2.3 DEN (Internal Densitometer) Related Errors Detailed
Information .......................................................................... MT-15
2.2.4 DEV (Temperature Control) Related Errors Detailed
Information .......................................................................... MT-15
2.3 Error Code Table ...........................................................................MT-18
2.3.1 Printer .................................................................................. MT-22
2.3.2 Formatter ............................................................................. MT-63
2.4 Troubleshooting Flow .................................................................. MT-86
2.4.1 How to Read the Troubleshooting Flow ............................... MT-86
2.4.2 Troubleshooting Flow .......................................................... MT-90
021A ........................................................................................ MT-90
2282 ........................................................................................ MT-90
2283 ........................................................................................ MT-90
22BC ........................................................................................ MT-90
0226 ........................................................................................ MT-94
0228 ........................................................................................ MT-94
2225 ........................................................................................ MT-94
2227 ........................................................................................ MT-94
0230 ........................................................................................ MT-98
0232 ........................................................................................ MT-98
2229 ........................................................................................ MT-98
2231 ........................................................................................ MT-98
0234 ...................................................................................... MT-102
0236 ...................................................................................... MT-102
2233 ...................................................................................... MT-102
2235 ...................................................................................... MT-102
006-259-03
0.8
0238 ...................................................................................... MT-106

0299 ...................................................................................... MT-106
2237 ...................................................................................... MT-106
2298 ...................................................................................... MT-106
0240 ...................................................................................... MT-110
2239 ...................................................................................... MT-110
0242 ...................................................................................... MT-114
0246 ...................................................................................... MT-114
2241 ...................................................................................... MT-114
2245 ...................................................................................... MT-114
0244 ...................................................................................... MT-118
0248 ...................................................................................... MT-118
2243 ...................................................................................... MT-118
2247 ...................................................................................... MT-118
0250 ...................................................................................... MT-122
0256 ...................................................................................... MT-122
2249 ...................................................................................... MT-122
2255 ...................................................................................... MT-122
0252 ...................................................................................... MT-126
0258 ...................................................................................... MT-126
2251 ...................................................................................... MT-126
2257 ...................................................................................... MT-126
0254 ...................................................................................... MT-130
0260 ...................................................................................... MT-130
2253 ...................................................................................... MT-130
2259 ...................................................................................... MT-130
0262 ...................................................................................... MT-134
2279 ...................................................................................... MT-134
0264 ...................................................................................... MT-138
2280 ...................................................................................... MT-138
0266 ...................................................................................... MT-142
2281 ...................................................................................... MT-142
006-259-03
0.9
0291 ...................................................................................... MT-146

0293 ...................................................................................... MT-150
0295 ...................................................................................... MT-154
02BD ...................................................................................... MT-158
02BF ...................................................................................... MT-158
2284 ...................................................................................... MT-158
2285 ...................................................................................... MT-158
2287 ...................................................................................... MT-158
2288 ...................................................................................... MT-158
1268 ...................................................................................... MT-162
2267 ...................................................................................... MT-162
1270 ...................................................................................... MT-166
2269 ...................................................................................... MT-166
1272 ...................................................................................... MT-170
2271 ...................................................................................... MT-170
1273 ...................................................................................... MT-174
221B ...................................................................................... MT-174
1274 ...................................................................................... MT-178
221C ...................................................................................... MT-178
1276 ...................................................................................... MT-182
1277 ...................................................................................... MT-186
1278 ...................................................................................... MT-190
12A3 ...................................................................................... MT-194
12A4 ...................................................................................... MT-198
12A5 ...................................................................................... MT-202
12A6 ...................................................................................... MT-206
12A7 ...................................................................................... MT-210
12A8 ...................................................................................... MT-214
12A9 ...................................................................................... MT-218
12E2 ...................................................................................... MT-222
2289 ...................................................................................... MT-226
2290 ...................................................................................... MT-230
006-259-03
0.10
3. ABNORMAL IMAGES .............................................................................. MT-234

3.1 Troubleshooting from Abnormal Images ................................. MT-234
3.2 Scratches and Streaks Caused by Guide Plate ....................... MT-252
4. ABNORMAL OPERATIONS .................................................................... MT-262
4.1 System Freezes without Displaying Error Code Normally ..... MT-262
4.2 Error Message at the Startup Sequence .................................. MT-263
5. CLEARING FILM JAMS ........................................................................... MT-264
6. TROUBLESHOOTING REFERENCE ...................................................... MT-266
6.1 Fuse System Diagram ................................................................ MT-266
6.2 Layout of Fuse ............................................................................ MT-268
6.3 LED Lighting Information .......................................................... MT-272
6.4 Checking the DC Voltage ........................................................... MT-278
6.5 Inspecting I/O Parts .................................................................... MT-282
6.6 Electrical Parts Interchangeability ............................................ MT-284
6.7 Print Position of Board Serial Number ..................................... MT-285
7. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ........................................................................ MT-290
006-259-03
0.11
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, REPLACEMENTS, AND
ADJUSTMENTS .................................................................................................. MC-2
HOW TO READ REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT VOLUME ............................. MC-4
CONTENTS ......................................................................................................... MC-6
1. COVERS ..................................................................................................... MC-10
1.1 Covers ........................................................................................... MC-10
2. FRAME ....................................................................................................... MC-12
2.1 BCR Assembly .............................................................................. MC-12
3. TRAY LOADING UNIT ............................................................................... MC-14
3.1 Tray Loading Unit ......................................................................... MC-14
3.2 Tray ................................................................................................ MC-18
3.3 Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor (SA11, SA21, SA31) ........ MC-22
3.4 Tray Detection Switch (SA12, SA22, SA32) ................................ MC-24
3.5 Tray Lock Assembly ..................................................................... MC-26
3.6 Tray Loading Unit Rail ................................................................. MC-27
3.7 Tray Rail ........................................................................................ MC-30
3.8 Squeezing Roller .......................................................................... MC-32
3.9 Special Screw ............................................................................... MC-34
4. REMOVAL UNIT......................................................................................... MC-36
4.1 Removal Unit ................................................................................. MC-36
4.2 Removal Drive Cam ...................................................................... MC-40
4.3 Suction Cup Arm .......................................................................... MC-44
4.3.1 Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................... MC-44
4.3.2 Changing Film Size to 20 x 25 cm ..................................... MC-46
4.3.3 Changing Film Size to 25 x 30 cm ..................................... MC-48
4.4 Suction Cup .................................................................................. MC-53
4.5 Bellows .......................................................................................... MC-54
5. CONVEYOR UNIT ...................................................................................... MC-56
5.1 Upper Conveyor Unit .................................................................... MC-56
5.2 Film Positioning Motor (Lower) (MD6) ........................................ MC-64
5.3 Upper Conveyor Unit Exit Motor (MD2) ...................................... MC-66
5.4 Cleaning Roller Grip Release Motor (MD4) ................................ MC-68
5.5 Film Positioning Assembly (Lower)............................................ MC-70
006-259-03
0.12
5.6 Film Positioning Motor (Upper) (MD5) ........................................ MC-72

5.7 Film Positioning Assembly (Upper) ............................................ MC-74
5.8 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide ............................................................ MC-78
5.9 Conveyance Driving Roller (Upper) ............................................ MC-80
5.10 Conveyance Driving Roller (Lower) ............................................ MC-84
5.11 Conveyor Unit Guide .................................................................... MC-86
5.12 Grip Idle Gear ................................................................................ MC-87
5.13 Lower Conveyor Unit ................................................................... MC-88
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT............................................................................... MC-90
6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit ....................................................................... MC-90
6.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation ....................................................... MC-90
6.1.2 Adjusting the Sub-Scanning Unit Positioning Screw .......... MC-95
6.2 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1) ........................................................ MC-100
6.2.1 Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................... MC-100
6.2.2 Adjustment When Replacing Sub-scanning Motor ........... MC-101
6.3 Sub-Scanning Roller .................................................................. MC-102
6.4 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1) ............................. MC-106
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT ....................................................................... MC-112
7.1 Scanner Unit ............................................................................... MC-112
7.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation ..................................................... MC-113
7.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit .................. MC-115
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT .................................................................. MC-118
8.1 Cooling Fan Assembly ............................................................... MC-118
8.2 Filter Section Cooling Fan ......................................................... MC-120
8.3 Film Cooling Section .................................................................. MC-122
8.4 Heat Development Unit .............................................................. MC-124
8.5 Heat Development Rack Assembly........................................... MC-126
8.6 Heat Development Roller ........................................................... MC-130
8.7 Thermal Protector.................................................................... MC-131.1
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT .............................................................................. MC-132
9.1 Film Release Unit........................................................................ MC-132
9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board (LED15A) .......... MC-134
006-259-08
0.13
10. CONTROLLER ......................................................................................... MC-136

10.1 Operation Panel .......................................................................... MC-136
10.2 Controller Assembly .................................................................. MC-138
10.3 HDD .............................................................................................. MC-140
10.4 PC Board ..................................................................................... MC-142
10.5 MCT Board .................................................................................. MC-144
10.6 DRV Board................................................................................... MC-146
11. SORTER ................................................................................................... MC-148
11.1 Film Conveyance Timing Belt ................................................... MC-148
11.2 Jam Removing Guide Plate Magnet.......................................... MC-151
12. VERSION UPGRADE AND FULL INSTALLATION OF MAIN UNIT
SOFTWARE ............................................................................................. MC-152
12.1 Preparations (Same for Version Upgrades and Full
Installation) ................................................................................. MC-153
12.2 Version Upgrade ......................................................................... MC-154
12.3 Full Installation ........................................................................... MC-158
12.4 Upgrading Main Unit Software Version from A02 to A04 ....... MC-168
12.5 Upgrading Main Unit Software Version from A01 to A04 ....... MC-172
12.6 Upgrading Main Unit Software Version from [A03 to
V4.2/V10.2 or Earlier] to [V5.0/V11.0 or Later] .......................... MC-180
12.7 Upgrading Main Unit Software Version from A00, A01, A02
to V5.0 or Later ........................................................................... MC-184
006-259-08
0.14
SERVICE MODE (MU)

1. OUTLINE OF SERVICE MODE.................................................................... MU-2
1.1 Transition of Modes in DRYPIX 7000 ............................................ MU-2
1.2 Note on Executing Service Mode .................................................. MU-2
1.3 Operations of Each Utility.............................................................. MU-3
2. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY) ........................................................................ MU-4
2.1 U-Utility Menu Tree ......................................................................... MU-4
2.2 Starting and Ending the U-Utility .................................................. MU-6
2.3 Details of U-Utility Commands ................................................... MU-7.3
[1] AUTO F.D.C. ...................................................................... MU-7.3
[2] TEST PATTERN ................................................................ MU-7.4
[3] UNLOCK TRAY .................................................................. MU-10
[4] PRINT QUEUE ................................................................... MU-10
[5] SET COUNTERS ............................................................... MU-11
[5-1] SET COUNTERS ........................................................... MU-11
[5-2] DISPLAY LIST................................................................ MU-11
[6] ECONOMY MODE ............................................................. MU-12
[6-1] SAVE POWER ............................................................... MU-12
[6-2] CALENDAR.................................................................... MU-13
[6-3] DETAIL ........................................................................... MU-13
[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED ................................... MU-13
[6-3-2] TRANSITION TIME ................................................ MU-14
[6-3-3] SCHEDULER ......................................................... MU-14
[7] SET ALARM ....................................................................... MU-15
[7-1] SET ALARM ................................................................... MU-15
[7-2] KEY TOUCH .................................................................. MU-15
[8] AUTOMATED F.D.C. ........................................................... MU-16
[9] SET DATE/TIME ................................................................. MU-16
[10] ECONOMY MODE ............................................................. MU-17
[10-1] SET TIME....................................................................... MU-17
[10-2] SCHEDULER ................................................................. MU-18
[10-3] SAVE POWER ............................................................... MU-18
[11] SOFTWARE VERSION ...................................................... MU-18
006-259-08
0.15
[12] REPRINT ........................................................................... MU-19

[13] ANIMATION ........................................................................ MU-20
[14] QC ...................................................................................... MU-21
[14-1] QC TEST PATTERN ....................................................... MU-21
[14-2] HISTORY ....................................................................... MU-22
[14-2-1] EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER ............................... MU-22
[14-2-2] FORMAT ................................................................. MU-22
[14-2-3] ARTIFACTS ............................................................ MU-22
[14-3] SETTINGS ..................................................................... MU-23
[14-3-1] BUILT-IN DENSIOMETER ...................................... MU-23
[14-3-2] EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER ............................... MU-23
[14-3-3] FORMAT ................................................................. MU-24
[15] MAMMO.QC ....................................................................... MU-24
2.4 Other Functions ............................................................................ MU-26
2.4.1 Displaying Printing Jobs and Job Operations..................... MU-26
2.4.2 Acquisition of Log Data by User ......................................... MU-27
006-259-08
0.16
3. M-UTILITY (MAINTENANCE UTILITY)...................................................... MU-28

3.1 M-Utility Menu Tree ...................................................................... MU-28
3.2 Starting and Ending the M-Utility ................................................ MU-32
3.3 Details of M-Utility Commands.................................................... MU-34
[1] System Management ......................................................... MU-34
[1-1] System Config. ............................................................... MU-34
[1-1-1] Set Date/time.......................................................... MU-34
[1-1-2] Set Parameters....................................................... MU-34
[1-1-2-1] Set Tray............................................................. MU-34
[1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting ................................................... MU-35
[1-1-2-3] Reprint Function ............................................... MU-35
[1-1-2-4] Option ............................................................... MU-36
[1-1-2-5] Select Dmax .................................................. MU-37.1
[1-1-2-6] Set ML Dmax ................................................. MU-37.2
[1-1-3] Initialize ............................................................... MU-37.3
[1-1-3-1] Recover ......................................................... MU-37.3
[1-1-3-2] Save Config. ..................................................... MU-38
[1-1-3-3] Initialization ....................................................... MU-38
[1-1-4] Check Files ............................................................. MU-39
[1-1-5] Check Version ........................................................ MU-39
[1-1-6] Set Counters .......................................................... MU-40
[1-1-7] Reboot .................................................................... MU-40
[1-1-8] Reload Software ..................................................... MU-41
[1-2] Print Queue .................................................................... MU-41
[1-3] Log Files ........................................................................ MU-42
[1-3-1] Display Error Log .................................................... MU-42
[1-3-2] Clear ....................................................................... MU-42
[1-3-3] Store Log Files ....................................................... MU-43
[1-3-4] Logging by User ..................................................... MU-43
006-259-08
0.17
[1-4] Network .......................................................................... MU-44

[1-4-1] Set Network ............................................................ MU-44
[1-4-1-1] AE-title .............................................................. MU-44
[1-4-1-2] Fine PRT AE-title .............................................. MU-45
[1-4-1-3] Port No. ............................................................ MU-45
[1-4-1-4] IP Address ........................................................ MU-46
[1-4-1-5] SubNetMask ..................................................... MU-46
[1-4-1-6] Gateway ........................................................... MU-47
[1-4-1-7] Hostname ......................................................... MU-47
[1-4-2] Test Network........................................................... MU-48
[1-4-3] Set DICOM ............................................................. MU-48
[1-5] Set Main Panel ............................................................... MU-49
[1-5-1] Select Language .................................................... MU-49
[1-5-2] Size Information ..................................................... MU-50
[1-5-3] Set Alarm ............................................................... MU-50
[1-5-4] Set Key Touch Tone ................................................ MU-50
[1-5-5] ANIMATION ............................................................ MU-50
[1-5-6] Sound Test.............................................................. MU-50
[1-5-7] Icon Positioning ...................................................... MU-51
[1-5-8] Show Position ......................................................... MU-51
[1-6] Economy Mode .............................................................. MU-51
[2] Output Film ......................................................................... MU-52
[2-1] 24-Steps ......................................................................... MU-52
[2-2] 17-Steps ......................................................................... MU-53
[2-3] Flat ................................................................................. MU-54
[2-4] Cleaning ......................................................................... MU-54
[2-5] Grid ................................................................................ MU-55
[2-6] Film out to Sorter ........................................................... MU-56
[2-7] Uniformity ....................................................................... MU-57
[2-8] SMPTE ........................................................................... MU-58
[2-9] User Settable ................................................................. MU-59
[2-10] Spatial Resolution .......................................................... MU-60
006-259-05
0.18
[3] F.D.C. .................................................................................. MU-61

[3-1] AUTO F.D.C. ................................................................... MU-61
[3-2] Check Density ................................................................ MU-62
[3-3] 24-Steps ......................................................................... MU-63
[3-4] Manual F.D.C. ................................................................. MU-63
[3-5] Densitometer .................................................................. MU-64
[3-5-1] 24-Steps ................................................................. MU-64
[3-5-2] Calibration .............................................................. MU-64
[3-5-3] Clear Calib. Table .................................................... MU-65
[3-5-4] DM Sensor Monitoring ........................................... MU-65
[3-6] Uniformity ....................................................................... MU-66
[3-6-1] Clear Table ............................................................. MU-66
[3-6-2] Input ....................................................................... MU-66
[4] Check Scanner ................................................................... MU-67
[4-1] Polygonal Motor ............................................................. MU-67
[4-2] LD .................................................................................. MU-67
[4-3] Adjusting Main Scanner ................................................. MU-68
[4-3-1] Scanning Width ...................................................... MU-68
[4-3-2] Scanning Position ................................................... MU-70
[4-3-3] Display Adjustment ................................................. MU-72
[4-3-4] Initialize Scanner .................................................... MU-72
[4-4] Diagnosis ....................................................................... MU-73
[4-4-1] Initial Check ............................................................ MU-73
[4-4-2] PRN Board Test ...................................................... MU-74
[5] Check Mechanism .............................................................. MU-76
[5-1] Film Removing ............................................................... MU-76
[5-1-1] Unlock Tray ............................................................. MU-76
[5-1-2] Set Remain. Films .................................................. MU-76
[5-1-3] Unit Operation ........................................................ MU-77
[5-2] Motor Operation ............................................................. MU-78
[5-2-1] Motor Operation ..................................................... MU-78
[5-2-2] Adjusting Subscanner ............................................ MU-80
[5-3] Grip ................................................................................ MU-82
006-259-05
0.19
[5-4] Other Actuators .............................................................. MU-82

[5-5] Positioning Film .............................................................. MU-83
[5-6] Sensor Monitor ............................................................... MU-84
[5-7] Other .............................................................................. MU-86
[5-7-1] Board FAN .............................................................. MU-86
[5-7-2] Serial I/F ................................................................. MU-87
[5-7-3] HDD Test ................................................................ MU-88
[5-7-4] DPRAM Test ........................................................... MU-88
[5-7-5] Inter Board Test ...................................................... MU-89
[5-7-6] Barcode Test ........................................................... MU-90
[5-8] Sorter Unit ...................................................................... MU-92
[5-8-1] Motor MT1 .............................................................. MU-92
[5-8-2] Solenoids................................................................ MU-93
[5-8-3] Sensor Monitor ....................................................... MU-93
[6] Heat-Developer .................................................................. MU-94
[6-1] Temperature ................................................................... MU-94
[6-2] Heating ........................................................................... MU-95
[6-3] Fan Operation ................................................................ MU-96
[6-4] Temp. Control ................................................................. MU-96
[6-5] Set Heater Temp. ........................................................... MU-97
[7] Skip Initialize ...................................................................... MU-98
[7-1] Eject Film Remaining ..................................................... MU-98
[7-2] Initialize & Heating Up .................................................... MU-98
[7-3] Initialize Developer ......................................................... MU-99
006-259-03
0.20
4. DPX7 PC Tool .......................................................................................... MU-100

4.1 DPX7 PC Tool Operations.......................................................... MU-102
4.1.1 Outline of Operations ....................................................... MU-102
4.1.2 Operations of the Configuration Setting Screen ............... MU-103
4.2 Preparations for Using the DPX7 PC Tool ............................... MU-104
4.2.1 PC Environment Required for Installing the DI Tool ......... MU-104
4.2.2 Installing/Uninstalling/Version Upgrading the DI Tool ....... MU-105
4.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC.......................... MU-108
4.2.4 Setting Grouping Symbols ............................................... MU-110
4.3 Flow of DPX7 PC Tool Operations ............................................ MU-112
4.3.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network .............. MU-112
4.3.2 Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool)................................. MU-113
4.3.3 Connecting DPX7 PC Tool to the Equipment ................... MU-114
4.3.4 Importing Individual Data .............................................. MU-115.3
4.3.5 Setting/Changing/Checking Individual Data Using
the DPX7 PC Tool ......................................................... MU-115.4
4.3.6 Sending Individual Data to the Equipment ....................... MU-116
4.3.7 Ending the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool) .................................. MU-118
4.4 Registering and Deleting the Establishments and Printers ... MU-120
4.4.1 Registering Establishments .............................................. MU-120
4.4.2 Registering Printers.......................................................... MU-122
4.5 Registering and Deleting Clients .............................................. MU-124
4.6 DPX7 PC Tool Menu Tree........................................................... MU-128
006-259-05
0.21
4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Command Details .............................................. MU-136

[PC1] Setting .............................................................................. MU-136
[PC1-1] Network ................................................................. MU-136
[PC1-1-1] HostName...................................................... MU-136
[PC1-1-2] IP Address ..................................................... MU-137
[PC1-1-3] SubnetMask................................................... MU-137
[PC1-1-4] Default Gateway ............................................ MU-137
[PC1-2] Config .................................................................... MU-138
[PC1-2-1] Version ........................................................... MU-138
[PC1-2-2] Protocol Information ...................................... MU-139
[PC1-2-2-1] AE-title ..................................................... MU-139
[PC1-2-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title ..................................... MU-139
[PC1-2-2-3] Port No. .................................................... MU-140
[PC1-2-2-4] Data Transfer Timeout.............................. MU-140
[PC1-2-3] Association Count.......................................... MU-141
[PC1-2-4] Logging DICOM ............................................. MU-141
[PC1-2-5] Default Client ................................................. MU-142
[PC1-2-6] Real Dmax on film ......................................... MU-142
[PC1-2-7] Requested Dmax less than 3.6 ..................... MU-143
[PC1-2-8] Printer ............................................................ MU-143
[PC1-2-9] Option ......................................................... MU-143.1
[PC1-2-9-1] 17-Steps Pattern ................................... MU-143.1
[PC1-2-9-2] Auto FDC .............................................. MU-143.1
[PC1-2-9-3] Set Alarm .............................................. MU-143.2
[PC1-2-9-4] Set Alarm Tone ..................................... MU-143.2
[PC1-2-9-5] Set Key Touch ....................................... MU-143.3
[PC1-2-9-6] Set Key Touch Tone .............................. MU-143.3
[PC1-2-9-7] Language .............................................. MU-143.4
[PC1-2-9-8] Sorter .................................................... MU-143.4
[PC1-2-9-9] Step Type ................................................. MU-144
[PC1-2-9-10] Size Information ....................................... MU-144
[PC1-2-9-11] User Settable ........................................... MU-145
[PC1-2-9-12] BackupLog ............................................... MU-145
[PC1-2-9-13] QC ........................................................... MU-146
[PC1-2-9-14] Warning at system start ........................... MU-147
[PC1-2-9-15] Spatial Resolution.................................... MU-148
006-259-08
0.22
[PC1-2-9-16] MammoQC .............................................. MU-148

[PC1-2-10] Tray1/Tray2/Tray3 ........................................... MU-149
[PC1-3] Clients ................................................................... MU-150
[PC1-3-1] Protocol ......................................................... MU-151
[PC1-3-1-1] Attribute List Error (0107H Warning) ....... MU-151
[PC1-3-1-2] Attribute Value Out of Range
(0116H Warning) ..................................... MU-151
[PC1-3-1-3] Image Size is Larger than Imagebox
(B604H Warning) ..................................... MU-151
[PC1-3-1-4] N-Event-ReportRQ .................................. MU-152
[PC1-3-1-5] Use Extention format ............................... MU-153
[PC1-3-1-6] Change Film ............................................ MU-154
[PC1-3-1-7] Use System Timeout ............................... MU-155
[PC1-3-1-8] Presentation LUT..................................... MU-155
[PC1-3-1-9] Precede Picking Up ................................. MU-156
[PC1-3-1-10] Use Max/Min Density ............................... MU-156
[PC1-3-1-11] Logging Client .......................................... MU-157
[PC1-3-1-12] Reprint ..................................................... MU-157
[PC1-3-2] Magnify .......................................................... MU-158
[PC1-3-2-1] Procedure ................................................ MU-158
[PC1-3-2-2] Default Smoothing Type ........................... MU-158
[PC1-3-2-3] Adjustment Parameter ............................. MU-159
[PC1-3-2-4] Default Requested Decimate/Crop
Behavior .................................................. MU-160
[PC1-3-3] LUT ................................................................ MU-162
[PC1-3-3-1] Procedure ................................................ MU-162
[PC1-3-3-2] Default LUT ............................................. MU-162
[PC1-3-3-3] Adjustment Parameter ............................. MU-163
[PC1-3-3-4] Dmax 3.6 ................................................. MU-164
[PC1-3-4] Output Format ............................................... MU-165
[PC1-3-4-1] Border Density ......................................... MU-165
[PC1-3-4-2] Polarity(Pos./Neg.) ................................... MU-165
[PC1-3-4-3] Trim Density ............................................. MU-165
[PC1-3-4-4] Trim .......................................................... MU-166
[PC1-3-4-5] Trim Width ................................................ MU-166
[PC1-3-4-6] Number of Copies .................................... MU-166
006-259-08
0.23
[PC1-3-4-7] Margin between Image ............................ MU-167

[PC1-3-4-8] Image Layout ........................................... MU-167
[PC1-3-4-9] Film Size .................................................. MU-168
[PC1-3-4-10] Medium Type(base color) ........................ MU-168
[PC1-3-4-11] Film Orientation ....................................... MU-168
[PC1-3-4-12] Mirror ....................................................... MU-169
[PC1-3-4-13] Processing Type ...................................... MU-169
[PC1-3-4-14] Film Destination .................................... MU-169.1
[PC1-3-5] Annotation ..................................................... MU-170
[PC1-3-5-1] Annotation Height .................................... MU-171
[PC1-3-5-2] Annotation Font ....................................... MU-171
[PC1-3-5-3] Annotation Size ....................................... MU-172
[PC1-3-5-4] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/
Lower Left/Lower Center/Lower Right ..... MU-172
[PC2] Data Transfer .................................................................... MU-174
[PC2-1] Indv ....................................................................... MU-178
[PC2-2] Operation .............................................................. MU-180
[PC2-3] Log ........................................................................ MU-183
[PC2-4] Files ....................................................................... MU-184
[PC2-5] User Settable ........................................................ MU-188
[PC3] Upgrading ......................................................................... MU-190
[PC3-1] Load System Files ................................................. MU-190
[PC3-2] Install ..................................................................... MU-192
[PC4] Analyzer ........................................................................... MU-194
[PC5] DICOM Print ..................................................................... MU-196
[PC6] OutPutFilm ....................................................................... MU-198
[PC6-1] 24-Steps ................................................................ MU-199
[PC6-2] 17-Steps ................................................................ MU-200
[PC6-3] Flat ........................................................................ MU-201
[PC6-4] Cleaning ................................................................ MU-202
[PC6-5] Grid ....................................................................... MU-203
[PC6-6] Film out to Sorter .................................................. MU-204
[PC6-7] Uniformity .............................................................. MU-205
[PC6-8] SMPTE .................................................................. MU-206
[PC6-9] User Settable ........................................................ MU-208
[PC6-10] Spatial Resolution ................................................. MU-209
006-259-08
0.24
[PC7] F.D.C. ................................................................................ MU-210

[PC7-1] Auto F.D.C. ............................................................ MU-211
[PC7-2] Check Density ....................................................... MU-212
[PC7-3] 24-Steps ................................................................ MU-214
[PC7-4] Manual F.D.C. ........................................................ MU-215
[PC7-5] Calibration ............................................................. MU-216
[PC7-6] Uniformity .............................................................. MU-217
[PC7-6-1] Unit data Reading .......................................... MU-217
[PC7-6-2] Clear Table ..................................................... MU-217
[PC7-6-3] Input............................................................... MU-218
[PC7-7] DM sensor monitor ................................................ MU-219
[PC8] Check ............................................................................... MU-220
[PC8-1] Check Scanner ...................................................... MU-220
[PC8-1-1] Initialize Scanner ........................................... MU-220
[PC8-1-2] Adjusting Main Scanner................................. MU-221
[PC8-1-3] Polygonal Motor LD ....................................... MU-226
[PC8-1-4] Initial Check ................................................... MU-227
[PC8-1-5] PRN Board Test ............................................. MU-228
[PC8-2] Check Mechanism ................................................. MU-229
[PC8-2-1] Moving ........................................................... MU-229
[PC8-2-1-1] Unit Operation ......................................... MU-229
[PC8-2-1-2] Motor Operation ....................................... MU-230
[PC8-2-1-3] Grip .......................................................... MU-232
[PC8-2-1-4] Positioning Film ....................................... MU-233
[PC8-2-1-5] Adjusting Subscanner .............................. MU-234
[PC8-2-1-6] Other Actuators ....................................... MU-236
[PC8-2-1-7] Sorter Unit ............................................... MU-237
[PC8-2-1-8] Solenoids ................................................. MU-238
[PC8-2-1-9] Sensor Monitor ........................................ MU-239
[PC8-2-2] Sensor Monitor .............................................. MU-240
[PC8-2-3] Other.............................................................. MU-243
[PC8-2-3-1] Board Fan ................................................ MU-243
[PC8-2-3-2] Serial I/F .................................................. MU-244
[PC8-2-3-3] HDD Test ................................................. MU-246
[PC8-2-3-4] DPRAM Test ............................................ MU-247
006-259-03
0.25
[PC8-2-3-5] Inter Board Test ....................................... MU-248

[PC8-2-3-6] LAN Base Test ......................................... MU-249
[PC8-2-3-7] Patrol Lamp Test ...................................... MU-249
[PC8-3] Heat-Developer ..................................................... MU-250
[PC8-3-1] Temperature .................................................. MU-250
[PC8-3-2] Heating .......................................................... MU-251
[PC8-3-3] Fan Operation ................................................ MU-252
[PC8-3-4] Temp. Control................................................. MU-253
[PC8-3-5] Set Heater Cond. Temp. ................................ MU-254
[PC9] Control .............................................................................. MU-256
[PC9-1] File Save/Load ...................................................... MU-256
[PC9-1-1] Log Data ........................................................ MU-256
[PC9-1-2] Error Log........................................................ MU-257
[PC9-1-3] Indv. data ....................................................... MU-258
[PC9-2] System Config ....................................................... MU-259
[PC9-2-1] Set Date/Time. ............................................... MU-259
[PC9-2-2] Save Config. .................................................. MU-260
[PC9-2-3] Initialize .......................................................... MU-261
[PC9-2-4] Reboot ........................................................... MU-262
[PC9-2-5] Set Counters.................................................. MU-263
[PC9-2-6] Set Remain. Films ......................................... MU-264
[PC9-3] Set Main Panel ...................................................... MU-265
[PC9-3-1] Sound Test ..................................................... MU-265
[PC9-3-2] Motion Speed ................................................ MU-266
[PC9-4] Set Parameter ....................................................... MU-267
[PC9-4-1] Patrol Lamp ................................................... MU-267
[PC10] Film Counter ..................................................................... MU-268
[PC11] Print Queue ...................................................................... MU-270
[PC12] Tool ................................................................................... MU-274
[PC12-1] GetLog .................................................................. MU-274
[PC12-2] HW AutoCheck ...................................................... MU-275
006-259-08
0.26
5. SETTING METHOD BY PURPOSE ......................................................... MU-276

5.1 Registering User ID .................................................................... MU-276
5.2 Setting the Image QC Function ................................................. MU-279
5.3 Setting Reprint ............................................................................ MU-280
5.4 Setting Annotation ..................................................................... MU-282
5.5 Setting Output of User Settable Images ................................... MU-290
5.6 Displaying Logs by Client (Filtering DICOM
Communication Logs)................................................................ MU-292
5.7 Adjusting LUT Using SAR MAKER ........................................... MU-294
5.8 Acquiring Logs when Equipment is not Started ..................... MU-298
5.9 Adjusting the Leading Edge Margin ......................................... MU-302
5.10 Copying Weekly Settings........................................................... MU-303
5.11 Acquiring Log Files .................................................................... MU-305
5.12 Creating a New Gamma Table ................................................... MU-308
5.13 Full Installation of Main Unit Software with Equipment
not Started ................................................................................... MU-312
5.14 Settings for Using MammoQC Function After Upgrading
Main Unit Software Version from V6.0/V12.0 or Earlier to
V7.0/V13.0 .................................................................................... MU-314
APPENDIX 1 PRECAUTIONS AND SETTINGS IN THE USE OF
Windows XP PC FOR SERVICING ...................................... MU-316
006-259-08
0.27
SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

HOW TO USE THE SERVICE PARTS LIST...................................................... SP7-2
HOW TO READ THE PARTS DIAGRAMS ........................................................ SP7-4
INDEX ................................................................................................................. SP7-6
01A COVER 1 ....................................................................................... SP7-10
01B COVER 2 ....................................................................................... SP7-12
02A FRAME 1 ....................................................................................... SP7-14
02B FRAME 2 ....................................................................................... SP7-16
03A LOADING UNIT 1 .......................................................................... SP7-18
03B LOADING UNIT 2 .......................................................................... SP7-20
04A REMOVAL UNIT 1 ........................................................................ SP7-22
04B REMOVAL UNIT 2 ........................................................................ SP7-24
05A CONVEYOR UNIT 1 ...................................................................... SP7-26
05B CONVEYOR UNIT 2 ...................................................................... SP7-28
05C CONVEYOR UNIT 3 ...................................................................... SP7-30
05D CONVEYOR UNIT 4 ...................................................................... SP7-32
05E CONVEYOR UNIT 5 ...................................................................... SP7-34
06 SUB-SCANNING UNIT ................................................................. SP7-36
07 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT ............................................................ SP7-38
08A HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 .................................................... SP7-40
08B HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2 .................................................... SP7-42
08C HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3 .................................................... SP7-44
08D HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 .................................................... SP7-46
08E HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 5 .................................................... SP7-48
08F HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 6 .................................................... SP7-50
09A FILM RELEASE UNIT 1 ................................................................ SP7-52
09B FILM RELEASE UNIT 2 ................................................................ SP7-54
10 CONTROLLER .............................................................................. SP7-56
11A SORTER 1..................................................................................... SP7-58
11B SORTER 2..................................................................................... SP7-60
11C SORTER 3..................................................................................... SP7-62
11D SORTER 4..................................................................................... SP7-64
11E SORTER 5..................................................................................... SP7-66
11F SORTER 6..................................................................................... SP7-68
11G SORTER 7..................................................................................... SP7-70
006-259-03
0.28
12 CABLE .......................................................................................... SP7-72

13 CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM ............................................... SP7-73
14 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ................................................... SP7-84
15 TABLE OF SCREWS/WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS........ SP7-90
16 LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS............................................. SP7-91
006-259-03
0.29
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS........................................................ PM-2
1.1 List of Preventive Maintenance Items .......................................... PM-2
1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle .................................................... PM-5
1.3 Precautions on Periodic Maintenance .......................................... PM-5
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW ........................................................ PM-6
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................................... PM-8
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs ................................. PM-8
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images .................... PM-10
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function ................................................. PM-13
3.4 Checking Fan Operations ............................................................ PM-16
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery ....................................................... PM-18
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller,
Removing the Cover ..................................................................... PM-19
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing Filters .......................................................... PM-20
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside the
Equipment ..................................................................................... PM-22
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the SUS Belt, Cleaning Sub-scanning
Conveyance Roller ....................................................................... PM-23
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section .............................. PM-27
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit .......................................... PM-28
3.12 Greasing ........................................................................................ PM-31
3.13 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers ...................................................... PM-33
3.14 Checking the DC Voltage ............................................................. PM-34
3.15 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images ................................. PM-38
3.16 Setting Date and Time .................................................................. PM-40
3.17 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding ........................... PM-41
3.18 Work Completion Report ............................................................. PM-42
006-259-04
0.30
INSTALLATION (IN)
1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS ...................................................................... IN-2
1.1 Equipment Dimensions and Weight ............................................... IN-2
1.2 Means to Move and Secure Equipment .......................................... IN-3
1.3 Environment Conditions .................................................................. IN-4
1.4 Electrical Specifications .................................................................. IN-5
1.5 Other Specifications......................................................................... IN-5
1.6 Installing Space and Maintenance Work Space ............................ IN-6
1.6.1 Installation Space ................................................................... IN-6
1.6.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work.................................. IN-7
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW .......................................................... IN-8
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION ............................................................... IN-16
3.1 Precautions on Installation............................................................ IN-16
3.2 Preparing the DPX7 PC Tool ......................................................... IN-18
3.2.1 PC Environment Required for Installing the DI Tool ............. IN-18
3.2.2 Installing and Uninstalling the DI Tool .................................. IN-19
3.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC.............................. IN-21
3.2.4 Setting Grouping Symbols ................................................... IN-24
3.3 Preparations.................................................................................... IN-26
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION.................................................................... IN-28
4.1 Unpacking and Unloading ............................................................. IN-28
4.2 Carrying ........................................................................................... IN-30
4.3 Temporary Placement .................................................................... IN-31
4.4 Checking Components .................................................................. IN-32
5. INSTALLATION............................................................................................ IN-36
5.1 Removing External Packaging of the Equipment Main Body .... IN-36
5.2 Removing Covers ........................................................................... IN-37
5.3 Removing Fixtures ......................................................................... IN-38
5.4 Installing Separately Packaged Items .......................................... IN-44
5.4.1 Installing the Cleaning Roller ............................................... IN-44
5.4.2 Affixing the Caution Label for the Lever Operation
of the Cleaning Roller Set .................................................... IN-44
5.5 Changing the Film Size .................................................................. IN-45
5.5.1 Changing the Film Tray Size ................................................. IN-45
5.5.2 Changing the Installed Position of the Barcode Reader ....... IN-46
5.5.3 Affixing the Film Labels ........................................................ IN-47
006-259-05
0.31
5.6 Installing Options ........................................................................... IN-48

5.7 Connecting Interface Cables ......................................................... IN-49
5.7.1 Connecting Network Cable .................................................. IN-49
5.7.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing .......................................... IN-50
5.8 Setting the Power Supply .............................................................. IN-51
5.9 Connecting the Power Cable ......................................................... IN-52
5.10 Installing Covers ............................................................................. IN-53
6. INSTALLING OPTIONS ............................................................................... IN-54
6.1 Installing the Additional Removal Unit ......................................... IN-54
6.1.1 Remove the Cushioning Materials, Changing the Film
Tray Size ............................................................................... IN-54
6.1.2 Installing the Barcode Reader .............................................. IN-54
6.1.3 Installing the Removal Unit................................................... IN-55
6.1.4 Installing the Film Loading Unit ............................................ IN-57
6.1.5 Installing the Conveyor Unit.................................................. IN-59
6.1.6 Securing the idle gear .......................................................... IN-59
6.1.7 Internal Wiring ...................................................................... IN-63
6.1.8 Inserting the Film Trays ........................................................ IN-64
6.2 Installing the 20 x 25 cm Size Suction Cup Arm Assembly........ IN-65
6.2.1 Changing the Film Tray Size ................................................. IN-65
6.2.2 Removing the Film Loading Unit .......................................... IN-65
6.2.3 Removing the Removal Unit ................................................. IN-67
6.2.4 Replacing the Suction Cup Arm Assembly .......................... IN-68
6.2.5 Changing the Installed Position of the Film Release Plate ... IN-69
6.2.6 Changing the Installed Position of the Barcode Reader ....... IN-70
6.2.7 Reassembling the Equipment .............................................. IN-70
6.3 Installing Additional Image Memory Boards................................ IN-71
6.4 Installing Sorter .............................................................................. IN-74
006-259-03
0.32
7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT .................................................................. IN-82

7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility ............................................. IN-82
7.1.1 Power ON ............................................................................. IN-82
7.1.2 Starting the M-Utility ............................................................. IN-84
7.2 System Settings.............................................................................. IN-85
7.2.1 System Management/System Config. .................................. IN-85
7.2.2 System Management/Network/Set Network ........................ IN-88
7.2.3 System Management/Set Main Panel .................................. IN-92
7.3 Ending System Settings ................................................................ IN-94
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS.................................................... IN-96
8.1 MD1 Operations When Adding Expansion Film Trays................ IN-96
8.2 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance
Operations....................................................................................... IN-96
8.3 Checking Density ........................................................................... IN-97
8.4 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image
Unevenness and Scratches ........................................................... IN-98
8.5 Checking Conveyance and Scratches on Film Image
When the Sorter is Connected .................................................... IN-100
8.6 Checking the Interlock Function ................................................. IN-101
8.6.1 Checking the Jam Clear Cover Interlock ............................ IN-101
8.6.2 Checking the Front Cover Interlock .................................... IN-102
8.6.3 Checking the Film Tray Interlocks ....................................... IN-103
8.6.4 Checking the Sorter Interlock ............................................. IN-103
8.7 Checking Fan Operations ............................................................ IN-104
8.8 Settings for U-Utility ..................................................................... IN-105
9. INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLE SETS ...................................................... IN-106
10. SETTING CLIENTS .................................................................................... IN-108
10.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network ...................... IN-109
10.2 Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool)/Connecting
DPX7 PC Tool to the Equipment ................................................. IN-110
10.2.1 Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool)................................... IN-110
10.2.2 Connecting DPX7 PC Tool to the Equipment ..................... IN-112
10.3 Importing Individual Data ............................................................ IN-114
006-259-05
0.33
10.4 Settings by Client ......................................................................... IN-116

10.4.1 Registering Clients ............................................................. IN-116
10.4.2 Client Settings .................................................................... IN-119
10.4.3 Settings by Client ............................................................... IN-125
10.4.4 Setting Client [MammoQCTest] .......................................... IN-125
10.5 Adding and Registering Printers ................................................ IN-126
10.6 Sending Data on Setting to the Equipment ................................ IN-127
10.7 Settings for U-Utility ..................................................................... IN-128
10.8 Ending the DI Tool and the Equipment ...................................... IN-129
11. CHECKING NETWORK CONNECTION .................................................... IN-130
11.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment .................................... IN-130
11.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected
Equipment ..................................................................................... IN-130
11.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment ............................. IN-130
12. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT ................................................................ IN-132
12.1 Backing Up Individual Data ......................................................... IN-132
12.1.1 Saving Individual Data in the Equipment HD ..................... IN-133
12.1.2 Saving Individual Data in the PC for Servicing ................... IN-134
12.1.3 Saving Individual Data on the FD ....................................... IN-135
12.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur
at Installation ................................................................................ IN-138
12.2.1 Checking the Error Log ...................................................... IN-139
12.2.2 Saving Error Logs .............................................................. IN-140
12.2.3 Deleting Error Logs ............................................................ IN-141
12.3 Installing the Equipment .............................................................. IN-142
12.3.1 Installing the Equipment and Securing with Fixtures ......... IN-142
12.3.2 Installing the Equipment Without Using Fixtures ................ IN-143
12.4 Cleaning the Equipment .............................................................. IN-144
006-259-08
0.34
PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX 7000 - Checklist........................................... PC-2
006-259-03
0.35
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY PRECAUTION
SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
10/15/2002 00 New release (FM3343) All pages

11/10/2002 01 Revised (FM3601) 1, 11-16
07/15/2004 02 Revised (Revision for main unit software version All pages
A04, DPX7 PC Tool version A06, etc.)(FM4324)
09/20/2004 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 3-23
V4.1, V10.0 and V10.1, DPX7 PC Tool version
A08, etc.)(FM4447)
11/30/2005 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1-3, 8, 12, 20
V5.0 and V11.0, DI Tool version V2.0, etc.)
(FM4690)
10/02/2006 07 Revised (Change of corporate name and 1, 10, 15
corporate logo) (FM4992)
006-259-07
10.02.2006 FM4992 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION
To avoid accidents, observe the following precautions.
1.1 General Precautions

■ Power Supply
• Be sure to turn OFF the power of the main power switch and switch board before
starting operation. Starting operations with the power ON may result in electric
shock, fire hazards, or machine malfunction. Some parts are not fully discharged and
other parts (e.g. heater) remain heated immediately after power OFF. Be careful not
to touch such parts. When performing steps (e.g. voltage measurement) that cannot
be completed with the power OFF, observe the instructions set forth in this manual
and operate with care to avoid electric shock and other hazards.
• When restarting the machine, turn OFF the power, wait for more than 5 seconds, and
then turn it ON. If the interval from power OFF to ON is too short, the machine may
not be properly started.
■ Drive Section Inspection

To avoid accidents, be sure to turn OFF the power before initiating inspection or
adjustment procedures. When performing an inspection or adjustment procedure that
cannot be completed with the power OFF, operate carefully while observing the
instructions set forth in this manual.
■ Heavy Weights
When installing or removing heavy weights, complete it with an assistant or a hoisting
or other appropriate device.
■ Safety Devices
Ensure that the accident prevention functions of fuses, interlock switches, panels,
covers, and other safety devices are always operative. Also refrain from introducing
such modifications which may impair the safety device functions.
■ Adjustable Foot Anchorage

As an earthquake measure for the equipment, fasten the adjustable feet to the floor
surface.
■ Optical Parts Handling Precautions

When handling any optical parts, observe the following precautions. Failure to observe
these precautions may result in a deterioration in image quality.
• Never touch the surfaces of optical parts.
• When removing dirt from optical parts, use the specified procedure only.
• Scanning optics unit removal must be carried out in a clean environment. Also do
not remove the scanning optics unit protective housing.
006-259-05
SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
■ Heat Development Unit Handling Precautions

A heater is used for the rack. Touching it during operations may result in burns. Turn
the power OFF and wait until the heater temperature drops before handling the unit.
■ Ventilation of Installation Site

The ventilation of the equipment and film is accompanied by a slight smell. Be sure to
ventilate the room during and after operation.
■ Grounding
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts with retaining
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon installation. After the parts
and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the
procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are
securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
■ Other General Precautions

• When servicing the board for maintenance, be sure to wear a wrist band to ground
yourself.
Failure to do so may result in damage of electronic components on the board due to
static electricity from your body.
• Do not stain or peel off the product nameplates, labels of safety standards, or product
No. indications attached on the machine, and do not attach other labels over them.
• After completion of operation, return the protective enclosure, fixing screws, or cover
earth and other removed components to the original positions and fix fully.
006-259-05
SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
■ Interlock Release Jig

To operate the equipment with the jam clear cover and front cover of the equipment
opened, use the dedicated jig provided with this equipment to release the interlock. To
avoid danger, do not touch rotating parts. Also take precautions against getting your
hands, feet, hair, and clothes caught by the equipment.
After completing servicing return the jig back to its original position.
Jam clear cover

interlock release jig
BR3x8
BR3x8
Front cover
Lower front cover interlock release jig
FP7I0101.EPS
006-259-04
SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
BLANK PAGE
006-259-04
SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation

As indicated in the Certification and Identification Label attached on the right cover of
the machine for overseas use, the machine complies with the “Laser Products –
Conformance with IEC 60825-1, Am. 2; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser
Notice No. 50)”. Although a laser (Class 3B, semiconductor laser having a wavelength
of 660 nm and emitting visible red light) having a maximum output of 50 mW is
incorporated in the image recorder, exposure to any hazards can be avoided by
following the instructions set forth in this manual.
■ How to Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure

To avoid laser radiation exposure, observe the following precautions.
● Steps Requiring Precautions Against Laser Radiation Exposure

When performing the following procedures, thoroughly comply with the instructions set
forth in this manual to avoid laser radiation exposure.
• Removing the scanning optics unit and accomplishing its reassembly
• Replacing or cleaning the components of the upper conveyor unit , entrance of
the heat development unit or the sub scanning unit
After completion of the above procedures, restore the removed protective housing and
retaining screws to their original states to prevent the laser beam from leaking out from
the equipment.
● Periodical Maintenance for Keeping Equipment Conditions Compliant with

Standards
To keep the equipment compliant with the laser safety requirements, perform the
preventive maintenance programs at specified intervals (See “Preventive Maintenance
(PM)” Volume.)
● Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure

When performing installation procedures, observe the following precautions to avoid
laser radiation exposure.
• Do not attempt to perform any steps other than those stated in this manual
because laser radiation exposure may result.
• Do not position a mirror or other reflective article in the laser beam optical path.
• Do not change the laser beam optical path.
• Optical axis adjustments must not be made in the field. Although the
semiconductor laser beam is visible red light, no one is allowed to make optical
axis adjustments in the field.
006-259-04
SAFETY PRECAUTION-7
■ Front Cover Interlock

An interlock function is provided for this equipment for turning OFF the laser output
circuit to prevent laser exposure when the front cover is opened.
Before turning ON the power with the front cover open and performing services, be
sure to release the interlock with the special jig provided. After completion of the
service procedures, return the jig to the original position.
FP7I0102.EPS
006-259-04
SAFETY PRECAUTION-8
2. LABELS
2.1 Laser Caution Labels

■ Locations of Laser Caution Labels
The following illustrates the locations of the protective housing and laser caution labels
specified in “Laser Products – Conformance with IEC 60825-1, Am. 2; Final Guidance
for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No. 50)”.
● DRYPIX 7000
IEC/EN60825-1: 2001
class 3B panel label #1
FP7I0201.EPS
HHS certification and

identification label
IEC/EN60825-1: 2001
class 1 product label
IEC/EN60825-1: 2001
FP7I0202.EPS
006-259-05
SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
IEC/EN60825-1: 2001
FP7I0203.EPS
IEC/EN60825-1: 2001
FP7I0204.EPS
● Scanning Optics Unit

IEC/EN60825-1: 2001
warning label
FP7I0205.EPS
006-259-04
SAFETY PRECAUTION-10
■ List of Laser Caution Labels
● HHS Certification and Identification Label
❍ Old Label ❍ New Label
FP7I0221.EPS FP7I0241.EPS
● IEC/EN60825-1:2001 Class 1 Product Label
FP7I0222.EPS
006-259-07
● IEC/EN60825-1:2001 Class 3B Panel Label #1
FP7I0223.EPS
● IEC/EN60825-1:2001 Class 3B Panel Label #2
FP7I0224.EPS
● IEC/EN60825-1:2001 Warning Label
FP3B0110.EPS
006-259-04
2.2 Other Labels

■ Locations of Other Labels
● DRYPIX 7000
Manufacturer label
Rating indication label
FP7I0206.EPS
High temperature caution label
Watch out hand label
Caution label for the lever operation

of the cleaning roller set 1
Caution label for the lever operation

of the cleaning roller set 2
FP7I0212.EPS
006-259-05
High temperature label
Watch out hand

caution label (Sorter)
(When mounted with
the optional sorter)
Jam removing label 1
FP7I0228.EPS
● Scanning Optics Unit
Scanning optics unit

manufacturer label
FP7I0211.EPS
● Power Supply Unit
Neutral indication Protective earth

label mark
L
N
PE
L
N
PE
FP7I0299.EPS
006-259-04
● Sorter
Sorter jam removing label
Sorter serial No. label
FP7I0207.EPS
006-259-04
■ List of Labels
● Rating Indication Label
❍ Old Label ❍ New Label
FP7I0227.EPS
FP7I0243.EPS
● Manufacturer Label
FP7I0237.EPS
● Scanning Optics Unit Manufacturer Label
Manufactured by : F.I.T. CO., LTD.

Model NO. 839Y0056 (LD Assembled)
FP7I0225.EPS
● High Temperature Caution Label
FP7I0214.EPS
006-259-07
● Watch Out Hand Caution Label
FP7I0213.EPS
● Watch Out Hand Caution Label (Sorter) (When mounted with the optional
sorter)
FP7I0229.EPS
● Caution Label for the Lever Operation of the Cleaning Roller Set 1
FP7I0215.EPS
006-259-04
● Caution Label for the Lever Operation of the Cleaning Roller Set 2
FP7I0239.EPS
006-259-04
● Earth Mark
FP7I0230.EPS
● Neutral Indication Label
FP7I0231.EPS
● Sorter Serial No. Label
FP7I0232.EPS
006-259-04
● Jam Removing Label 1
FP7T0503.EPS
● Jam Removing Label 2
FP7T0504.EPS
● Sorter Jam Removing Label
FP7T0505.EPS
006-259-04
3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR LASER RADIATION

EXPOSURE PREVENTION
Even if the protective housing is removed for servicing purpose, the laser beam will not
possibly leak out of the equipment unless its optical path is intentionally changed.
However, if the optical path is inadvertently changed during optical system installation,
the service engineer or other persons near the equipment may be exposed to laser
radiation.
Optical system related installation procedures must be carefully performed while
observing the instructions set forth in this manual. After completion of installation,
thoroughly restore the removed protective housing to its original state.
Before turning the power ON with the front cover open to operate services, be sure to
release the interlock with the special jig provided. After completion of the service
procedures, return the jig to the original position.
■ Protective Housing of Equipment

The following shows the removable laser exposure protective housing parts of the
equipment.
Front cover
Right cover
FP7I0210.EPS
006-259-05
Left inside cover
Rear cover
FP7I0208.EPS
■ Protective Housing of Scanning Optics Unit
Upper cover
FP7I0209.EPS
006-259-04
4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS
Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950 for data processing
equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations
shall comply with the system standard IEC60601-1-1. Everybody who connects
additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part configures a medical
system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of
IEC60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local
representative.
006-259-04
5. CLASSIFICATION
1) According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
2) According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
NO APPLIED PART
3) Protection against harmful ingress of water
IPXO
4) According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of a flammable
anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5) According to the mode of operation
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
006-259-04
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS-1
CONTROL SHEET

11/10/2002 01 Revised (FM3601) 1, 4, 7, 9-11
09/20/2004 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 9
A08, etc.)(FM4447)
11/30/2005 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 2, 4, 5, 9, 10
(FM4690)
07/31/2006 06 Revised (DI-ML film)(FM4949) 1, 4, 5
006-259-06
07.31.2006 FM4949 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-1
SPECIFICATIONS-2
1. SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 Part Names

Product Code Contents Parts No. Remarks
DRYPIX 7000 200V E Overseas specification main unit 000Y5396
(VFOR/VF1)
Film tray: 1 tray Tray can be extended up to

Tray setting 3 trays. (Optional tray)
• Tray 1: 35x43 cm size
Buffer memory board: 1 113S0185 256 MB

Memory can be extended up to
512 MB. (Optional memory)
Individual data FD: 2
Main unit software CD-R: 1
Operation Manual
DRYPIX 7000 200V 2T E Overseas specification main unit 000Y5396

(VFOR/VF2)
Film tray: 2 tray Tray can be extended up to

Tray setting 3 trays. (Optional tray)


Operation Manual
DRYPIX 7000 200V 3T E Overseas specification main unit 000Y5396

(VFOR/VF3)
Film tray: 3 tray

Tray setting


Operation Manual
TP7I7401.EPS
006-259-05
SPECIFICATIONS-3
1.2 List of Optional Parts

Check the components against the PACKING LIST contained in the carton box. Note
that the interface is hereafter sometimes referred to as I/F and the diagnostics units as
HOST or image generator.
Lists of components are described below.
Product codes ending in # are for domestic use in Japan while those ending in E are for
overseas use.
<NOTE>
The following List of Components enumerate items required for each configuration, so they do
not correspond to units (quantities) of orders or packages.
Use the product codes (Product Code) indicated only as a reference for unpacking and follow
the order lists provided separately when placing orders.
● List of Options for DRYPIX 7000

Product Code Product Parts No. Remarks
DPX TRAY #/E Additional option tray 898Y0881 For 35x43 and 26x36 cm size
DPX TRAY 8x10 E Additional option tray 898Y0896 For 20x25 cm size
DPX ARM 8x10 #/E Suction cup arm 898Y0883 For 20x25 cm size
DPX SRT #/E Optional sorter 000Y5398
DPX BASE FBM 256MB Expanded frame buffer memory 113S0185 256MB
#/E
TP7I0402.EPS
006-259-02
SPECIFICATIONS-4
1.3 General Specifications

■ Recording Method
Laser exposure heat development method
■ Laser Light Source

Red semiconductor source (660 nm, 50mW x 1)
■ First Printing Time

Approximately 65 seconds
■ Processing Ability
35 x 43 cm size: Approximately 180 films/hour
■ Start-up Time
Approximately 15 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 °C)
■ Image Quality
● Exposure Resolution
14 bits
● Maximum Density (Dmax)

DI-HL, DI-HLc : Select from 2.64, 3.0, 3.3, 3.6
DI-ML : Select from 3.6, 4.0 (for mammography)
● Recording Pixel Size

100 µm (standard), 50 µm (optional)
● Maximum Number of Recording Pixels

35 x 43 cm size : 3520 x 4280 (in 100 µm recording)
: 7040 x 8560 (in 50 µm recording)
26 x 36 cm size : 3600 x 2540 (in 100 µm recording)
: 7200 x 5080 (in 50 µm recording)
006-259-06
SPECIFICATIONS-5
■ Film
● Applicable Types
DI-HL (blue base)
DI-HLc (clear base)
DI-ML (High density film for mammography) (26 x 36 cm, 20 x 25 cm, 25 x 30 cm
film sizes only)
● Applicable Film Size/Number of sheets in One Pack

35 x 43 cm size : 101 sheets (including one sheet for reducing
dusts)
26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm sizes : 151 sheets (including one sheet for reducing
dusts)
● Number of Supplies
Maximum 3 trays
(Data input from DRYPIX Link is applicable to three film sizes for A/D-I/F and two
for E-I/F.)
● Loading Method
Daylight conditions loading
■ Input I/F
DICOM Network input only
■ Network Connection
● DICOM Protocol
Direct connection (standard)
● TOSHIBA Protocol
Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link
● FINP Protocol
Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link
■ Modality Connection
● Analog/Digital I/F Connection

Connection via DRYPIX Link
Applicable equipment: Diagnostic devices such as CT/MRI
● E-I/F Connection
Network connection via DRYPIX Link
Applicable equipment: Image reader after FCR 7000, MF-300/L, FN-PS
006-259-06
SPECIFICATIONS-6
■ Image Processing
● Interpolation
SSM interpolation, A-VR interpolation
● Tone Processing
BAR method, SAR method
● Format
❍ Standard Format (for all film sizes)

1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40, 42, 48, 49, 54,
56, 63, 64, 70, 72, 80
❍ Mixed Format
35 x 43 cm size portrait mix : six types
26 x 36 cm size portrait mix : one type
26 x 36 cm size landscape mix : four types
■ Memory Capacity
Standard 256 MB, maximum 512 MB
■ Image Spooling
Spooled to HD (in IDE connection)
■ HDD Capacity
20 GB or above
■ Density Correction
Automatic density correction function
■ Optional Sorter (DP-LS 452)
● Number of Bins
10 bins
● Maximum Number of Films Storable per Bin

50 films
■ Noise
Standby : Approximately 45 dB
Printing : Approximately 53 dB
006-259-02
SPECIFICATIONS-7
1.4 Equipment Dimensions and Weight

■ Dimensions
● DRYPIX 7000
735 mm x 680 mm x 1240 mm (W x D x H)
1240 mm
m
0m
68
73
5m
m
FP7I0302.EPS
● Sorter
385 mm x 590 mm x 1190 mm (W x D x H)
1190 mm
m
38 0m
5m 59
m
FP7I0303.EPS
■ Weight
● DRYPIX 7000
Approximately 203 kg (including two trays)
● Sorter
Approximately 63 kg
006-259-02
SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.5 Means to Move and Secure Equipment

■ Move
● DRYPIX 7000
Four wheel caster (omni-directional, with no brake)
● Sorter
Six wheel caster (Four are omni-directional, two are for preventing from turning
over, with no brake)
■ Securing
Adjustable feet x 2 (front) and fixtures x 4
006-259-02
SPECIFICATIONS-9
1.6 Environmental Requirements

■ Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure
● Operating
Temperature/Relative humidity : 15 °C (40 to 70%RH) to 30 °C (15 to 70%RH)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 to 1060 hPa
Heat generation : 400 kcal/hr
[%]
70
Relative humidity
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5 10 15 20 25 30 [°C]
Temperature FP5I0115.EPS
● Non-operating
Temperature : 0 to 45 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
● Transit or Storage
Temperature : -10 to 50 °C
■ Exhaust Air of Equipment
● Exhaust Air in Standby State

40 m3/hour
● Average Exhaust Air When Processing 100 Films (35 x 43 cm)

54 m3/hour per equipment
■ Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement

Frequency: 10 to 55 Hz
Amplitude: 0.0075 mm or less
006-259-05
SPECIFICATIONS-10
■ Floor Levelness
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around
■ Floor Flatness
10 mm or less
■ Static Magnetic Field

DC 100 Gauss or less
006-259-05
SPECIFICATIONS-11
1.7 Electrical Requirements

■ Frequency
50/60 Hz ±3%
■ Line Voltage
200/ 220/ 230/ 240 VAC ±10% (By tap changing)
Single-phase (2 lines)
■ Capacity
2.2 kVA
■ Rated Current
11 A/ 10 A/ 9.5 A/ 9 A
■ Power Consumption
Maximum 2.2 kW
■ Electric Energy
Printing : 570 Wh
Standby : 320 Wh
Power save mode : 200 Wh
Sleep mode : 120 Wh
Remote standby mode : 20 Wh
■ Maximum Heat Generation

Printing : 580 W
Standby : 330 W
■ Overload Protection
15 A
006-259-02
SPECIFICATIONS-12
1.8 Equipment Installation Space
1.8.1 Installation Space

■ When Not Fixed with Fixtures
• Without sorter • With sorter
20 or more
50 or more
50 or 20 or 50 or 350 or
more more more more
800 or more 800 or more

Unit: mm
FP7I0401.EPS
■ When Fixed with Fixtures

20 or more
80 or more
80 or 80 or 80 or 350 or
more more more more
Unit: mm
FP7I0402.EPS
006-259-02
SPECIFICATIONS-13
1.8.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work

<REMARKS>
To rotate the equipment, one side requires more than 1000 mm of space.

800 or 800 or
more 800 or 800 or more
more more
Unit: mm
FP7I0403.EPS
● Space for Removing Fixtures

80 or more
250 or 250 or 250 or 350 or

more more more more
Unit: mm
FP7I0404.EPS
● Maintenance Space after Removing Fixtures

The same space as “■ When Not Fixed with Fixtures” is required.
006-259-02
SPECIFICATIONS-14
1.9 Disposing the Equipment

When disposing the equipment, remove the PC board first. Be sure to return the
removed PC board to the Service Parts Center.
006-259-02
SPECIFICATIONS-15
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)

MD-1
CONTROL SHEET

11/10/2002 01 Revised (FM3601) 1, 2, 5, 8, 15, 20, 25, 28, 32, 35-38,
40-42, 44, 47, 48, 50, 51, 56-60, 62,
63, 65, 68-70, 75-99
04/01/2003 02 Revised (FM3978) 1, 42, 50
09/20/2004 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 2, 33, 77
A08, etc.)(FM4447)
11/30/2005 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 2, 28-31, 33
(FM4690)
006-259-06
07.31.2006 FM4949 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual MD-1
MD-2
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT
1.1 Functions of Equipment

■ Outline of Equipment
• The DRYPIX 7000 is a network printer dedicated to DICOM protocol, and adopts the
laser exposure heat development method.
• Film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 26 x 36 cm, and 25 x 30 cm can be used. Mounting the
optional 20 x 25 cm removal/loading unit allows use of 20 x 25 cm size films.
• By installing the optional removal/loading unit, trays for supplying films can be
increased to three. This allows three types of film sizes and film base colors to be
used together, as well as use of the same film on all three trays.
• The image resolution is compatible with 20 pix/mm outputs for all film sizes.
However, this will require optional memory to be added.
• The following DICOM protocols are supported.
• Verification SOP Class (SCP)
• Basic Grayscale Print Management SOP Class (SCP)
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class (SCP)
• Print Job SOP Class (SCP)
• Print Queue Management SOP Class (SCP)
• User Preference LUT SOP Class (SCP)
• The following services can be set using the service tool software installed in the
externally connected PC.
This equipment uses the DPX7 PC Tool of the Fuji Medical Dry Imager integrated
service tool software DI Tool.
• Clients settings
• Setting sorting conditions
• Save/load individual data files and files of data inside the equipment, save log
files, install/upgrade version of software, etc.
<NOTE>
Equipment with the following serial numbers can be used 25 x 30 cm size film.
• #21936, #22687, #23291 or later
Also, to use 25 x 30 cm size film, main unit software version A03/A04/V4.1 or later/V10.0 or
later is required.
006-259-06
MD-3
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MD-4
1.2 System Configuration

● System Configuration Example 1 (When Connecting with Dicom Compatible
Devices)
Network inside hospital
FCR XG-1
DRYPIX 7000
CR-IR346RU
CR-IR346CL
FCR5000 plus
FCR9000 QA-WS771
CT (DICOM)
FP7D0111.EPS
006-259-03
MD-5
● System Configuration Example 2 (When Connecting with Non-dicom

Compatible Devices)
Network inside hospital
FCR5000
(FINP) DRYPIX 7000
CT
(DICOM)
MRI
(TOSHIBA)
DRYPIX Link 10Base-T/
E-I/F 100Base-TX
FN-PS551 FIX90A
CT
(Digital) MF-300L
US
(Analog)
MRI
(Digital video)

E-I/F 100Base-TX
FIX90A

E-I/F 100Base-TX
FCR9000 FIX90A
Remote
panel DRYPIX Link
10Base-T/
100Base-TX
HAV90A/HAV90B
CT/US/MRI DPI90A/DVI90A
AD-I/F
FP7D0112.EPS
006-259-03
MD-6
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts
1.3.1 External View

■ Equipment Main Body
Upper left cover

Operation panel Jam clear cover
Upper right cover
Front cover
Side ejection cover

Upper tray (Tray 1)
Middle tray (Tray 2)
Right cover
Lower tray (Tray 3)
Main power switch

FP7D0101.EPS
Rear cover
Left cover
FP7D0102.EPS
006-259-03
MD-7
■ Sorter
Upper cover
Sorter release lever
Rear cover
1 bin
Front cover
10 bin
FP7D0326.EPS
Jam removing guide 1
Jam removing guide 4
Control board cover
FP7D0327.EPS
006-259-03
MD-8
1.3.2 Operation Panel

1
2
5
3
4
FP7D0116.EPS
6 FP7D0103.EPS
No. Name Function
1 ERROR LED • When lit: Indicates that level 0 error has occurred.
• When OFF: Normal
• When blinking: Indicates transitioning to level 0 error state.
2 SAVE ENERGY MODE • When lit: At sleep mode

LED • When blinking: At power save mode
• When OFF: Normal
3 POWER LED • When lit: Main power switch is ON.

• When OFF: Main power switch is OFF.
4 Power ON switch Pressing when the equipment is not ON starts the equipment.
5 Touch panel 320 x 240 dot color touch panel (LCD)
6 Contrast adjustment Used for adjusting the touch panel contrast.

volume (Located at the bottom of the operation panel)
TP7D0110.EPS
006-259-03
MD-9
1.3.3 Layout of External Interface Connector

Network cable connector
Operation panel connector
Sorter connector
PC board
FP7D0121.EPS
006-259-03
MD-10
1.3.4 Layout of Units

Heat development Film cooling section Density measurement Film release unit (J)
unit (G) section
Scanning optics unit
Sub-scanning unit (E)
Conveyor unit
Upper conveyor unit (D)
Upper removal unit (B1)

Upper film loading unit (A1)
Middle conveyor unit

Middle removal unit (B2)
Middle film loading unit (A2)
Lower conveyor unit

Lower removal unit (B3)
Lower film loading unit (A3)
Controller
Frame (K)
FP7D0104.EPS
006-259-03
MD-11
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MD-12
1.3.5 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions

■ Film Loading Unit
SA12
SOLA11
SA13
SA11
Upper film loading unit
SA14
SA22 SA32
SOLA21 SOLA31
SA21 SA31
SA23 SA33
SA24 SA34
Middle film loading unit Lower film loading unit

FP7D0105.EPS
006-259-03
MD-13
Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Upper film SOLA11 Tray lock solenoid (Upper) Linear solenoid Releases tray lock
loading unit
SA11 Film pack/shutter detection Reflection type OFF in presence of film
(A1)
sensor (Upper) sensor pack/shutter
SA12 Tray detection switch (Upper) Microswitch ON when tray is pushed in
SA13 Tray lock detection sensor Penetration type ON when tray is locked
(Upper) sensor (Pl: 5 mm)
SA14 Barcode reader (Upper) – Detects film lot number
Middle film SOLA21 Tray lock solenoid (Middle) Linear solenoid Releases tray lock
loading unit
(A2)
sensor (Middle) sensor pack/shutter
SA22 Tray detection switch (Middle) Microswitch ON when tray is pushed in
(Middle) sensor (Pl: 5 mm)
SA24 Barcode reader (Middle) – Detects film lot number
Lower film SOLA31 Tray lock solenoid (Lower) Linear solenoid Releases tray lock
loading unit
(A3)
sensor (Lower) sensor pack/shutter
SA32 Tray detection switch (Lower) Microswitch ON when tray is pushed in
(Lower) sensor (Pl: 5 mm)
SA34 Barcode reader (Lower) – Detects film lot number
TP7D0101.EPS
<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following.
• Penetration type sensor: Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor: Film present
• Microswitch: Switch actuator is pressed
006-259-03
MD-14
■ Removal Unit
MB11
Upper removal unit
SB12
SB11
SB13
MB21 MB31
SB22 SB32
SB21 SB31
SB23 SB33
Middle removal unit Lower removal unit

FP7D0106.EPS
006-259-03
MD-15
Upper removal MB11 Film removing motor (Upper) Stepping motor Drives suction cup arm
unit (B1)
SB11 Suction cup arm HP detection Penetration type ON when suction cup arm is at
sensor (Upper) sensor (Pl: 5 mm) film suction side than home
position
SB12 Film surface detection sensor Penetration type ON when suction cup reaches on
(Upper) sensor (Pl: 5 mm) film
SB13 Removal unit exit sensor Reflection type ON when film is at removal unit
(Upper) sensor exit
Middle removal MB21 Film removing motor (Middle) Stepping motor Drives suction cup arm
unit (B2)
sensor (Middle) sensor (Pl: 5 mm) film suction side than home
position
(Middle) sensor (Pl: 5 mm) film
(Middle) sensor exit
Lower removal MB31 Film removing motor (Lower) Stepping motor Drives suction cup arm
unit (B3)
sensor (Lower) sensor (Pl: 5 mm) film suction side than home
position
(Lower) sensor (Pl: 5 mm) film
(Lower) sensor exit
TP7D0102.EPS
<REMARKS>
006-259-03
MD-16
■ Upper Conveyor Unit 1
CLD1
MD2
MD4
MD3
MD1
MD6
MD5
FP7D0107.EPS
Upper MD1 Film conveyance motor Stepping motor Drives removal unit rollers and
conveyor unit conveyor unit rollers, and conveys
(D) film
MD2 Upper conveyor unit exit Stepping motor Drives conveyor unit exit roller,
motor and conveys film
MD3 Gripping release motor Stepping motor Releases grip of upper conveyor
unit gripping roller
MD4 Cleaning roller grip release Stepping motor Releases grip of cleaning roller
motor
MD5 Film positioning motor Stepping motor Positions film to the center
(Upper)
MD6 Film positioning motor Stepping motor Positions film to the center
(Lower)
CLD1 Upper conveyor unit exit Electromagnetic Transfers MD2 drive to conveyor
clutch clutch unit exit roller
TP7D0103.EPS
006-259-03
MD-17
■ Upper Conveyor Unit 2
SD2
SD5
SD3
SD6
SD4
SD1
SD7
FP7D0108.EPS
Upper SD1 Upper conveyor unit entrance Reflection type ON when film is at U-turn guide
conveyor unit sensor sensor entrance
(D)
SD2 Upper conveyor unit exit Reflection type ON when film is at upper
sensor sensor conveyor unit exit
SD3 Upper grip position detection Penetration type Detect the upper and lower
sensor sensor (Pl: 5 mm) conveyance grip roller grip state
by the ON/OFF combination of
SD4 Lower grip position detection Penetration type
SD3 and SD4
sensor sensor (Pl: 5 mm)
SD5 Cleaning roller grip position Penetration type ON when cleaning roller is at
detection sensor sensor (Pl: 5 mm) gripping position
SD6 Positioning guide HP Penetration type ON when film positioning guide
detection sensor (Upper) sensor (Pl: 5 mm) plate (upper) is at home position
SD7 Positioning guide HP Penetration type ON when film positioning guide
detection sensor (Lower) sensor (Pl: 5 mm) plate (lower) is at home position
TP7D0104.EPS
<REMARKS>
006-259-03
MD-18
■ Sub-scanning Unit/Heat Development Unit
FANG1 - 3 3rd rack
2nd rack
ThG10
MG1
1st rack
ME1
SE1
1st rack
TpG1
TpG2
TpG3 ThG1
TpG4 2nd rack
ThG2
ThG3 TpG5
H1 - H3
TpG6 ThG4
TpG7 3rd rack
ThG5
ThG6 TpG8
H4 - H6
TpG9 ThG7
ThG8
ThG9
H7 - H9 FP7D0109.EPS
006-259-03
MD-19
Sub-scanning ME1 Sub-scanning motor DC motor Sub-scans and conveys film

unit (E)
SE1 Film leading edge Laser detection Detects leading edge and trailing
detection sensor sensor edge of film by detecting laser
light
Heat MG1 Heat development unit Stepping motor Heat develops and conveys film
development conveyance motor
unit (G)
FANG Filter section cooling fan DC fan Cools film and ventilates near
1-3 heat development unit
HG1 - 3 Heaters 1 - 3 Silicon rubber Heat develops film (1st rack)
heater
HG4 - 6 Heaters 4 - 6 Silicon rubber Heat develops film (2nd rack)
heater
HG7 - 9 Heaters 7 - 9 Silicon rubber Heat develops film (3rd rack)
heater
ThG1 - 3 Heat development Thermistor Detects 1st rack heater
thermistors 1 - 3 temperature
ThG4 - 6 Heat development Thermistor Detects 2nd rack heater
ThG7 - 9 Heat development Thermistor Detects 3rd rack heater
ThG10 Film cooling section Thermistor Detects film cooling section
thermistor temperature
TpG1 - 3 Thermal protectors 1 - 3 Manual recovery Shuts off power supply in
type overheating of 1st rack heater
type overheating of 2nd rack heater
type overheating of 3rd rack heater
TP7D0105.EPS
006-259-03
MD-20
■ Film Release Unit/Frame
SK1
Thk1
MJ1
SOLJ1
SJ1
SK2
SK3
FANK1
FP7D0110.EPS
Film release MJ1 Film release unit conveyance Stepping motor Ejects film
unit (J) motor
SOLJ1 Changeover guide solenoid Linear solenoid Switches changeover guide
(When mounted with the optional
sorter)
SJ1 Film release unit film Reflection type ON when there is film in film
detection sensor sensor release unit
Frame (K) FANK1 Ventilation fan DC fan Ventilates and cools controller
SK1 Jam clear cover interlock Microswitch ON when jam clear cover is
switch closed
SK2-3 Front cover interlock switch Microswitch ON when front cover is closed
ThK1 Recording section thermistor Thermistor Detects sub-scanning unit
temperature
TP7D0106.EPS
<REMARKS>
006-259-03
MD-21
■ Sorter
ST1
SOLT1
SOLT2 ST2
SOLT3
ST3
SOLT4
SOLT5 ST4
SOLT6
ST5
SOLT7
SOLT8
SOLT9
ST6
MT1
FP7D0117.EPS
Unit Name Type Function/Remarks

ST1 Film detection sensor 1 Reflection sensor ON when there is film
ST6 Sorter interlock switch Microswitch ON when connected to the printer
MT1 Sorter conveyance motor Stepping motor Conveys film
SOLT1 Changeover guide solenoid 1 Linear solenoid Switches changeover guide
TP7D0111.EPS
<REMARKS>
006-259-03
MD-22
1.3.6 Layout of Boards

VR board
LDD16A
PNL16A
LED15A
PDD15A
DRV16A/B
SNS16A HDD
MCT16A Power supply

unit fan
PRN16A
Power supply unit
PC board
DIMM Main power switch

(memory)
FP7D0113.EPS
006-259-03
MD-23
Name Main function
PNL16A (Operation panel board) LCD display/non-display control, touch panel control, operation panel
LED
VR board (Volume board) Touch panel contrast adjustment
LDD16A (Laser drive board) Scanner laser drive
LED15A (Density measurement Light is emitted for density measurement
section light-emitting board)
PDD15A (Density measurement Receives penetrating light for density measurement
section light-sensing board)
HDD Image data spool
Power supply unit Supplies DC power to the equipment/AC power for heat development
unit heater
Main power switch Supplies to AC power to the power supply unit
DIMM (Memory) Main memory of PC board
PC board Overall control of equipment, network input, image processing
PRN16A (Print control board) DA converts processed image signals from PC board and sends to
scanner, laser power strength control, exposure output timing control
MCT16A (Mechanical control board) Mechanism control, heat development control
SNS16A (Sensor board) I/O part control, thermistor signal/density measurement section data
AD conversion, barcode reader communication
DRV16A/B (Driver board) Mechanical drive parts drive
TP7D0107.EPS
006-259-03
MD-24
■ Sorter
SRT16A
FP7D0118.EPS
Name Main function
SRT16A (Sorter control board) Performs communication with printer, and controls/drives each I/O
parts
TP7D0112.EPS
006-259-03
MD-25
1.3.7 Layout of Rollers/Guide Boards

● Layout of Rollers
18 22 21
16 17
20
19
15
12 11 10
9
13
8
14 7
6
5
1
4
1
3
1
FP7D0119.EPS
No. Name No. Name
1 Removal conveyance roller (Upper/Lower) 12 Pre-recording roller

2 Removal unit exit roller (Upper/Lower) 13 Sub-scanning conveyance driven roller
3 Lower conveyance roller (Left/Right) 14 1st rack heat development roller
4 Middle conveyance roller (Left/Right) 15 2nd rack heat development roller
5 Conveyance grip roller (Lower) 16 3rd rack heat development roller
6 Conveyance driving roller (Lower) 17 Film cooling section roller
7 Conveyance grip roller (Upper) 18 Film cooling section exit roller (Upper/lower)
8 Conveyance driving roller (Upper) 19 Film release unit roller (Upper/lower)
9 Cleaning roller 20 Film release guide roller
10 Conveyor unit exit roller 21 Film release roller (Lower)
11 Sub-scanning conveyance driving roller 22 Film release roller (Upper)
TP7D0108.EPS
006-259-03
MD-26
● Layout of Guides
17
19
18
14 13 12 11
10
9
8
5
16 15 3
2
1 4
7
6
3
2
1 4
7
6
3
2
1 4
FP7D0120.EPS
No. Name No. Name
1 Removal unit guide 11 Conveyor unit U turn guide (Lower)

2 Conveyor unit entrance guide (Lower) 12 Conveyor unit exit guide (Upper)
3 Conveyor unit entrance guide (Upper) 13 Conveyor unit exit guide (Lower)
4 Conveyor unit relay guide (Left) 14 Sub-scanning unit entrance guide
5 Conveyor unit relay guide (Right) 15 Heat development unit entrance guide
(Upper)
6 Conveyor unit open/close guide
16 Heat development unit entrance guide
7 Conveyor unit vertical path guide
(Lower)
8 Conveyor unit guide (Right)
17 Film release unit entrance guide
9 Conveyor unit guide (Left)
18 Film release unit upper guide
10 Conveyor unit U turn guide (Upper)
19 Changeover guide
TP7D0109.EPS
006-259-03
MD-27
■ Sorter
1 2 3 4
5
18
6
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
7
10
9 8
FP3F0S03.EPS
No. Name No. Name
1 Entrance roller 1 10 Changeover guide 9
2 Entrance roller 2 11 Conveyance roller 5 (Right)

3 Entrance roller 3 12 Conveyance roller 5 (Left)
4 Conveyance roller 1 (Right) 13 Jam removing guide 4
5 Bin 1 discharge roller (Upper) 14 Jam removing guide 1
6 Bin 1 discharge roller (Lower) 15 Changeover guide 1
7 Bin 10 discharge roller (Upper) 16 Conveyance roller 1 (Left)
8 Bin 10 discharge roller (Lower) 17 Sorter entrance guide (Lower)
9 Changeover guide 10 (Fixed to equipment) 18 Sorter entrance guide (Upper)
TP7D0113.EPS
006-259-03
MD-28
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING THE EQUIPMENT
2.1 Power ON Operations

The equipment starts up in the following conditions when the main power switch is ON.
Method Conditions Remarks
Power ON switch on Press power ON switch on operation –

operation panel panel.
Interlocking of power Turn ON power of device externally Responds only when external device
supplies of externally connected. power status signal changes from
connected device (Connect with optional cable) OFF to ON.
External timer Generation of power ON signal by Responds only when external signal
timer changes from OFF to ON.
(Connect with optional cable)
WakeOnLAN function Receive WakeOnLAN packet from The network equipment needs to
network connected device correspond to the WakeOnLAN
function.
TP7D0201.EPS
The following screen appears when DICOM input is enabled during initialization.
While this screen is displayed, image inputs are accepted but keys cannot be entered.
<REMARKS>
In the above screen example, the gray in the number of film display area indicates DI-HLc
loaded, blue indicates DI-HL loaded, and pink indicates DI-ML film loaded. If displayed as “4.0”
below the film tray number, it means that Dmax 4.0 is set.
006-259-06
MD-29
2.2 Error Processing

When errors occur during initialization or in the routine mode, this equipment performs
the following processes.
■ When Films Run Out

When the remaining number of films counter becomes 0, the equipment determines
that films have run out and shows a display prompting replenishing of films. However, if
the equipment has several trays, and trays other than the one that has run out of films
have films of the same size and same base color, the display prompting that films be
replenished will be shown while printing continues.
Information that films have run out will be sent to externally connected devices at the
point a printing request is made.
The replenishing of films by the user is determined by the opening/closing of film trays,
and by the ON/OFF of the film pack/shutter detection sensor.
■ When Level 1 Errors Occur

When level 1 errors occur, for errors which can be recovered by the user, displays on
user recovery operations are shown. Initialization was performed after recovery by the
user, and if printing is currently being performed printing will be continued.
If recovered by retry operations of the equipment, only error logs are performed. Error
logs are also only performed for reference information for design analysis.
● Cover Open/Tray Open/Shutter Detection

When these errors are detected, operations of the equipment are stopped, the error
notification display is shown on the operation panel, and operations of the equipment
are continued after errors have been removed by the user.
● When Films Jam

When films jam, printing of films ahead of the jammed position are completed, and the
film jam display is shown.
When films jam in the sorter, films continuing from the jammed position are switched to
be released to the equipment, and the display to cancel use of sorter appears. If
cancellation of use of sorter is selected, the sorter is taken to have degenerated.
Images which have not been printed will be re-output automatically after recover.
● When Sorter is Abnormal

When sorter errors occur during printing, the place of ejecting films proceeding the
sorter is switched to the equipment. At the same time, the display to select canceling of
use of sorter appears. If cancellation of use of sorter is selected, the sorter is taken to
have degenerated.
006-259-05
MD-30
■ When Level 0 Errors Occur

When level 0 errors occur, the equipment completes the current process as much as
possible, stops temperature control, and lights up ERROR.
The equipment then becomes system down and the power must be turned ON/OFF. It
is possible to shift to the M-Utility in this state.
Level 0 errors consists of the following.
• Conveyance system fatal error
• Temperature control system fatal error
• Scanner system fatal error
• Image processing fatal error
• Fatal errors determined by the software
• Failed in reading external files when equipment is started.
• Discovered contradiction of various software environment when equipment is
started.
• Discovered contradiction in service settings when equipment is started.
• Discovered malfunction of various electric parts when equipment is initialized.
• Malfunctions of all trays.
• Communication error of formatter (PC board) and printer (MCT board)
■ Degeneration
When the following units malfunction, this is taken as degeneration, and operations are
continued without using the function.
• Tray (only when there are usable trays)
• Density measurement section
• Sorter
■ Film Replacement Output

If films with the size and base color specified by externally connected equipment have
not been replenished, films are output from trays which can be used according to
configuration settings of the M-Utility.
006-259-05
MD-31
2.3 Power OFF Operations

When the power of this equipment is ON, it can be ended in the following conditions.
Method Conditions Remarks
Shut down button on touch Touch the shut down bottun on the –
Operates when no interlocking with
panel touch panel. external devices.
Main power switch Turn OFF the main power switch. All power supplies are cut off
regardless the state of the equipment.
Interlocking of power Turn OFF the power of device Responds only when the external
supplies of externally externally connected. device state signal changed from ON
connected device (connected by the optional cable) to OFF.
TP7D0202.EPS
<REMARKS>
Shut down the software before turning off the power when ending the equipment.
006-259-05
MD-32
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL OPERATIONS
3.1 Tray Loading Unit

<NOTE>
The following descriptions are based on the upper film loading unit. They also apply to the
middle film loading unit and lower film loading unit, but A1 is A2 and A3 respectively.
<In the case of film pack/shutter detection sensor>
Upper tray loading unit: SA11
Middle tray loading unit: SA21
Lower tray loading unit: SA31
■ Film Sizes
This equipment is compatible with film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 26 x 36 cm, 20 x 25 cm, and 25
x 30 cm. The following figure shows the arrangement of guide pins and guide plates for
each film size.
Guide plate
35x43 26x36
Guide pin
25x30
20x25
Film tray
FP7B0519.EPS
The following procedures are required to change the film size.

• Change the position for attaching the guide pin and guide plate in the film tray
• Change the position for attaching the barcode reader
• To use the 20 x 25 cm film size, replace with the optional 20 x 25 cm size suction
cup arm, and change the position for attaching the film release plate of the
removal unit
• To use the 25 x 30 cm film size, change the positions for attaching the suction cup
and film release plate of the removal unit
• Change the film size in the configuration setting of the M-Utility
006-259-03
MD-33
<NOTE>
Equipment with the following serial numbers can be used 25 x 30 cm size film.
• #21936, #22687, #23291 or later
later is required.
■ Film Pack/Shutter Detection

To prevent exposure of films in trays when trays are opened, this equipment is
equipped with sensors to detect film packs in the trays and shutters. Trays can be
opened only when reflected light from the film pack or shutter is detected by the film
pack/shutter detection sensor (SA11: reflection type sensor).
■ Barcode Reader (BCR)

A barcode label is pasted to the base of the film pack. The barcode reader (BCR) reads
barcode information such as film production lot, etc. from this label when film is loaded.
If change in the film production lot is detected from this barcode information, density
measurement is performed automatically according to the U-Utility setting, and density
difference is corrected by updating the density correction table. If films are not loaded
correctly, error message is displayed.
If barcode information is not read correctly, it is determined as BCR malfunction and
previous density correction tables are used continuously. Or it is determined as other
brand film.
Barcode
BCR
FP7D0302.EPS
● Example of Error Message when Wrong Type of Film is Loaded
006-259-05
MD-34
■ Tray Detection/Tray Lock

Film tray detection is performed by the tray detection switch (SA12). When a film tray is
inserted, SA12 turns ON so that film tray presence is detected.
SA12 also serves as an interlock function. In the tray open state, it cuts off the +24V
power of the film removing motor (MB11), film conveyance motor (MD1), and tray lock
solenoid (SOLA11).
Tray lock is released by SOLA11, and the SOLA11 state is detected by the tray lock
detection sensor (SA13).
SOLA11 turns ON by tray open operations on the operation panel, and the tray lock is
released. When SOLA11 turns ON, SA13 goes OFF by the actuator attached to the
hook. SA13 prevents the tray lock from being continuously set when SOLA11
malfunctions.
When the tray lock is released, and the film tray is pulled out, SOLA11 is turned OFF by
SA12 interlock mechanism.
SA12
COM
SOLA11
NC
SA13
OP
EN
CL
OS
E
FP7D0303.EPS
DRV board
Upper tray detection switch (SA12)
+24V
K1
SOLA11
K1
MB11
+24V
MD1
K1: Relay
FP7D0304.EPS
006-259-03
MD-35
3.2 Removal Unit

<NOTE>
The following descriptions are based on the upper removal unit. They also apply to the middle
removal unit and lower removal unit, but B1 is B2 and B3 respectively.
<In the case of suction cup arm HP detection sensor>
Upper removal unit: SB11
Middle removal unit: SB21
Lower removal unit: SB31
■ Suction Cup Arm Home Position

In the standby state, the suction cup arm is positioned at the suction cup arm home
position. The suction cup arm home position is the position at which the suction cup
arm HP detection sensor (SB11) turns OFF from ON and the removal conveyance
roller (upper) touches the removal conveyance roller (lower).
Suction cup arm
SB11: OFF
Removal unit
Removal conveyance
roller (upper)
Removal conveyance
roller (lower)
FP7D0305.EPS
006-259-03
MD-36
■ Film Suction
The film removing motor (MB11) rotates at high speed in the normal direction by the
removal enable signal, and the suction cup arm starts moving. The suction cup arm
curves according to the groove on the removal unit frame, and the suction cup
descends onto the film. When the suction cup reaches the film surface, the film surface
detection sensor (SB12) turns ON, and MB11 switches to low speed rotation.
SB12: ON
Film
Suction cup
FP7D0306.EPS
After MB11 switches to low speed rotation, it continues to rotate in the normal direction
until SB12 goes OFF. At this time, the suction cup arm pushes the bellows in, and
generates negative pressure so that the film is suctioned to the suction cup.
SB12: OFF
FP7D0307.EPS
■ Film Flapping Operations

With the suction cup suctioning the film, MB11 rotates in the reverse direction for the
specified pulse at low speed, the suction cup arm rises and stops once. From this
position, MB11 switches to middle speed, and performs flapping operations which
repeat rising/lowering of suction cup arm five times.
Flapping operations supply air to the trailing edge of the film by moving the leading
edge up and down, to prevent improper conveyance due to adherence of the trailing
edge of the films. The distance moved by the suction cup arm during flapping
operations differ according to the number of films remaining on the film tray.
006-259-03
MD-37
■ Film Separation
After flapping operations complete, MB11 rotates in the reverse direction, and moves
the film to the removal conveyance roller (lower).
If SB11 turns ON while it is moving, MB11 switches to low speed, and continues
rotating in the reverse direction for the specified number of pulses. After the film
reaches the removal conveyance roller (lower), the bellows is pushed in even further,
which pushes the air inside out. The film separates from the suction cup, and is held by
the removal conveyance roller (upper) and removal conveyance roller (lower).
Film
FP7D0308.EPS
006-259-03
MD-38
■ Removal Conveyance
After film separation, the film conveyance motor (MD1) rotates, conveying film to the
removal unit exit conveyance roller via the removal unit exit sensor (SB13) and stops.
The film conveyance roller of the removal unit is rotates by the drive of MD1 of the
upper conveyor unit.
At this time, if SB13 does not turn ON within the specified time, the film is determined to
have dropped, and an error code is displayed.
When the trailing edge of the preceding film passes the upper conveyor unit exit sensor
(SD2) and gripping operations of the cleaning roller start, film can be conveyed to the
upper conveyor unit.
SD2 Preceding film
Upper conveyance unit
SB13 Middle conveyance unit

FP7D0310.EPS
■ Return to Home Position

When conveyance starts and SD1 detects the leading edge of conveyed film, MB11
reverses, the suction cup arm returns to the home position, and MB11 waits for the next
film removing enable signal.
006-259-03
MD-39
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MD-40
3.3 Upper Conveyor Unit

■ Setting the Conveyance Grip Roller State
There are two conveyance grip rollers, one upper and one lower. In the conveyance
and film positioning operations of the upper conveyor unit, the roller used differs
according to the film size. Therefore the grip state is set according to the film size after
the specified time at which the film leading edge passed SD1.
For 26 x 36 cm, 20 x 25 cm, or 25 x 30 cm film, if the preceding film is also the same
size, since this means that the grip state has already been set, no re-settings are
required.
For 35 x 43 cm film, the upper and lower conveyance grip rollers are gripped before the
start of the next film conveyance.
In the setting of the grip state, the upper and lower conveyance grip rollers move to the
grip position/release position individually by the drive of the grip release motor (MD3).
The positional relation between the upper and lower grip rollers is detected by the ON/
OFF combination of the upper grip position detection sensor (SD3) and lower grip
position detection sensor (SD4).
Conveyance grip roller (upper)
Conveyance grip roller (lower)
FP7D0325.EPS
Conveyance grip
roller (upper) CCW CW
MD3
Conveyance grip
roller (lower)
SD3
SD4
FP7D0309.EPS
006-259-03
MD-41
The following table shows the grip roller to be used according to film size, and
combination of SD3 and SD4 in the setting of the grip state.
35 x 43 cm size 26 x 36/20 x 25/25 x 30 cm size
Film Film
Grip Gripping
release
Grip Grip
release release
SD3: ON SD3: OFF
SD4: ON SD4: ON
TP7D0300.EPS
The upper and lower grip rollers differ in the distance between the grip roller and cam
shaft. Although the upper and lower cam shafts are attached at the same phase,
because the lower once has a smaller distance, when MD3 rotates, the upper grip roller
releases the grip first.
Front view

Cam shaft
Wide
Narrow

FP7D0311.EPS
006-259-03
MD-42
■ Conveyance 1
When gripping opetation of the upper and lower conveyance grip rollers are gripped,
film conveyance from the removal unit starts.
If the preceding film is currently passing through the conveyor unit exit roller, MD1
stands by until the preceding film passes through the conveyor unit exit, after which
operations are performed in the following order “■ Cleaning Roller Grip Release”, “■
Cleaning Roller Re-grip”, “■ Conveyor Unit Exit Clutch ON”, and “■ Conveyance 2”.
If the preceding film has already passed the conveyor unit exit roller, it means that the
grip of the cleaning rollers has been released, so no grip release operations are
performed. Instead operations are performed in the order of “■ Conveyance 2”, “■
Cleaning Roller Re-grip”, and “■ Conveyor Unit Exit Clutch ON”.
SD2
Conveyor unit exit roller
Film
Preceding film
SD1
FP7D0312.EPS
006-259-03
MD-43
■ Cleaning Roller Grip Release

When the trailing edge of the film passes the upper conveyor unit exit sensor (SD2), the
cleaning roller grip release motor (MD4) rotates in the normal direction (CCW) and
releases the cleaning roller grip.
The cleaning roller is moved to the grip position/release position by MD4. The position
is detected by the cleaning roller grip position detection sensor (SD5).
Cleaning roller
maintenance arm
One-way gear
Cleaning roller
CW
SD5
MD4
FP7D0313.EPS
The idle gear transmitting the MD4 drive is a one-way gear. This gear is freed when the
user lowers the cleaning roller by hand.
On the other hand, the spring attached to the cleaning roller maintenance arm functions
to raise the cleaning roller. The position of the cleaning roller is maintained by the worm
gear attached to MD4.
<REMARKS>
At times other than film conveyance, the cleaning roller is in the grip release state. This is to
prevent deformation by setting the cleaning roller into the grip state, and prevent disabling of
grip release by the adhering of cleaning roller to the conveyance roller.
■ Cleaning Roller Re-grip

MD4 rotates in the reverse direction (CW) for the next film, and moves the clean roller
to the grip position again.
006-259-03
MD-44
■ Conveyor Unit Exit Clutch ON

The conveyor unit exit clutch (CLD1) is turned ON. The conveyor unit exit roller rotates
from the drive of MD2, but the driving force is transferred to the roller when CLD1 turns
ON.
Conveyor unit
exit roller
Cleaning roller
MD2 CLD1
FP7D0314.EPS
■ Conveyance 2
MD1 rotates in the normal direction and conveys leading edge of the film to the upper
conveyor unit exit. When the film leading edge passes SD2, MD2 starts rotating in the
reverse direction. At this time, the rotation of MD1 in the normal direction conveys the
film to the discharge side. However because MD2 is rotating in the reverse direction,
the leading edge of the film is pressed into the conveyor unit exit roller.
Film positioning operations are started 1.2 seconds after SD2 turns ON, and allowing
removal of the next film.
SD2
;;;;
;
;
: Rollers driven by MD1

;;
;
: Rollers driven by MD2
FP7D0315.EPS
006-259-03
MD-45
■ Film Positioning Operations

In film positioning operations, the positioning motors (upper/lower) (MD5/MD6) repeat
rotation in the normal direction/reverse direction twice, and also restricts the film
position to the center of the conveyance path.
During film positioning operations, the conveyance drive roller moves in the normal
direction, while the conveyor unit exit roller moves in the reverse direction for smooth
positioning operations.
When positioning operations end, MD1 and MD2 stop, and set into the pre-recording
conveyance standby.
When pre-recording conveyance starts, MD5 and MD6 rotate reverse direction and
return the guide plate to the home position. Detection of the home position of the guide
plate is carried out by the positioning guide HP detection sensor (SD6/SD7).
Film
MD5/MD6
SD6/SD7
Guide plate
FP7D0316.EPS
■ Pre-Recording Conveyance
After transfer of image data to the print buffer in the formatter, film conveyance (pre-
recording conveyance) to the sub-scanning unit is started (pre-recording conveyance).
In pre-recording conveyance, after MD2 is rotated in the normal direction at high speed
for the specified number of pulses, it is switched to the low speed normal direction. The
same sync transfer as the sub-scanning conveyance roller is performed, and film is
sent to the sub-scanning unit.
After conveying the film for the specified time, CLD1 and MD2 are turned OFF to free
the conveyor unit exit roller.
When SD2 goes OFF, the cleaning roller grip is released.
006-259-03
MD-46
3.4 Sub-scanning Unit

■ Sub-scanning Conveyance
At the same time film is conveyed from the upper conveyor unit, the sub-scanning
motor (ME1) drives and the sub-scanning conveyance roller rotates.
The sub scanning unit conveyance driving roller receiving the driving force from ME1
transmits the drive to the sub-scanning unit conveyance driven roller by the SUS belt.
Using the SUS belt prevents stretching of the belt, etc., and transmits the speed from
ME1 accurately.
Driving roller
ME1
SE1
Driven roller
SUS belt FP7D0317.EPS
■ Recording Conveyance
When the leading edge of film is detected by the film leading edge detection sensor
(SE1), image recording starts from the laser light from the scanner unit.
Image recording ends, and after it has been conveyed according to the length of the
film, ME1 stops.
SE1 FP7D0321.EPS
006-259-03
MD-47
3.5 Scanning Optics Unit

■ Outline
The scanning optics unit is composed of the LDD board (laser diode drive board), LDA
board, SYN board (start-point detection board) of the scanner unit, SED board of the
sub-scanning unit (film leading edge detection sensor: SE1), polygon driver, LED
board and PDD board of the density measurement section.
The LDD board, LDA board, SYN board, and SED board are controlled by the PRN
board, while the polygon driver and density measurement section are controlled by the
MCT board. These controls are synchronized with film conveyance to record images.
The digital data sent from the PC board is D/A converted in the PRN board, and sent to
the LDD board as the analog image signal.
006-259-03
MD-48
■ Description of Units
● Scanner Unit
The Max. 50 mW/660 nm red laser is reflected to the 6-face polygon mirror by the
laserdiode mounted to the laser unit of the scanner unit.
The laser light scanned in the main scanning direction by the polygon mirror is
synchronized by the detection of the scan start timing by the main scanning sync
sensor of the SYN board.
Laser unit
Mirror
Reflection LDA board
mirror
LDD board
Scanning lens
SYN board
Polygon mirror
(Start-point detection)
FP7D0318.EPS
The laser light reflected from the polygon mirror is passed through the scanning lens
and irradiated to the surface of the film at the bottom of the scanning optics unit by the
reflection mirror. The exposed film is conveyed to the heat development unit and heat-
developed.
Film
Laser unit
Reflection LDA board

mirror
LDD board
Scanning lens
Polygon mirror
FP7D0319.EPS
006-259-03
MD-49
● Density Measurement Section

The density measurement section measures film density after development, and
compiles density correction tables to correct image density.
The film (17-steps pattern/24-steps pattern) printed by the density measurement menu
on the operation panel is read for the light penetration amount when it passes between
the light-emitting side of the LED board and light-sensing side of the PDD board of the
film release unit to measure the density data.
LED board
PDD board
Film release unit
Film
FP7D0320.EPS
● Temperature Correction
Film image density varies according to cooling temperature after heat development
and temperature of the equipment. For this reason, the temperature of the film cooling
section and temperature near the sub-scanning unit are detected by the thermistor, and
based on this temperature data, image data before D/A conversion are corrected.
006-259-03
MD-50
3.6 Heat Development Unit

■ Heat Development
The exposed image on the film conveyed from the sub-scanning unit is heat developed
by passing through the heat plate and heat development roller of the heat development
unit.
Temperature control of the heat plate is performed by the temperature detection signal
from the thermistor attached to each heat plate.
At the same time, thermal protectors are attached to each heat plate as a protection
against overheating of the heat plate.
The heat development unit conveyance motor (MG1) starts rotating at the same time
as removal operations start.
When heat development completes, films are uncurled while cooled by the film cooling
section, and conveyed to the film release unit.
After the last film is discharged, MG1 stops.
Film
Heat plate Film cooling section
Heat development
conveyance roller
FP7D0322.EPS
006-259-03
MD-51
3.7 Film Release Unit

■ Film Discharge 1
After heat development, films are conveyed to the film release unit and discharged
outside the equipment.
When the film release unit film detection sensor (SJ1) turns ON, the film release unit
conveyance motor (MJ1) starts rotating in the normal direction at low speed.
Film
SJ1
FP7D0323.EPS
■ Film Discharge 2
When the film trailing edge passes the last roller of the film cooling section, MJ1
switches to movement in the normal direction at high speed, and discharges film at high
speed.
■ Changeover Guide Switching

For equipments with the optional sorter, the changeover guide is at the sorter discharge
position from the force of the spring. To switch to upper discharge, the changeover
guide solenoid (SOLJ1) is turned ON at the same time MJ1 starts moving in the normal
direction at low speed, and the direction of the changeover guide is switched.
Changeover guide
Film
SOLJ1: OFF
To sorter
FP7D0324.EPS
006-259-03
MD-52
3.8 Sorter
■ Sorter Power ON/OFF
The power of the sorter turns ON when the power of the printer turns ON.
The sorter then performs self-diagnosis (about 30 seconds). If normal, it sets into the
standby state.
The power of the sorter goes OFF when the power of the printer goes OFF.
In the following conditions, the sorter performs the reset sequence, and performs the
same process as when the power is ON.
• When the reset signal is output from the printer
• When the +5V output from the sorter power board drops below the specified voltage
while the sorter power is ON due to some reason. (When below approximately 4.3V)
■ Film Conveyance from Printer

The sorter prepares for film storage when it receives the sorter film discharge signal
from the printer.
When film is conveyed to the sorter and the film detection sensor 1 (ST1) turns ON, the
sorter conveyance motor (MT1) rotates and conveys the film inside the sorter.
Film
ST1
FP3F0S06.EPS
006-259-03
MD-53
■ Film Conveyance/Switching of Changeover Guides

When the film detection sensor (ST1 to ST5) corresponding to the bin storing the film
turns ON, the corresponding changeover guide solenoid (SOLT1 to SOLT9) turns ON
to form the conveyance path to the bin.
Film detection
sensor
Changeover
guide
FP3F0S07.EPS
■ Solenoid Control of Film Detection Sensors

The five film detection sensors provided on the sorter control the ON/OFF of the nine
changeover solenoids. After the sensor corresponding to the discharge bin turns ON,
the corresponding solenoid is turned ON after the specified time.
• Time to Solenoid ON
Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10
Corresponding Sensor ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 ST5 –
Solenoid ON 0.67 sec. 3.99 sec. 0.67 sec. 3.99 sec. 0.67 sec. 3.99 sec. 0.67 sec. 3.99 sec. 0.67 sec. –
TP7D0301.EPS
■ Film Discharge
Films are discharged onto the bins. When the film detection sensor goes OFF, the
solenoid and sorter conveyance motor are turned OFF after the specified time, and the
end signal is sent to the printer.
• Solenoid, Motor Stop Time

Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10
Corresponding sensor ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 ST5
Solenoid OFF 2.67 Sec. 5.99 Sec. 2.67 Sec. 5.99 Sec. 2.67 Sec. 5.99 Sec. 2.67 Sec. 5.99 Sec. 2.67 Sec. –
Motor OFF 6.92 Sec. 10.90 Sec. 6.92 Sec. 10.90 Sec. 6.92 Sec. 10.90 Sec. 6.92 Sec. 10.90 Sec. 6.92 Sec. 10.90 Sec.
TP7D0302.EPS
006-259-03
MD-54
■ Film Jam Detection/Film Jam Processing

If a sensor does not go OFF even after more than 39 seconds after it turned ON, it is
determined as film jam, and the solenoid and motor are turned OFF.
At this time, films which have not been recorded are discharged to the top of the printer.
On the other hand, if film jam occurs inside the printer, films before the jammed film are
processed normally and discharged to the corresponding bin.
■ Error Processing
The sorter is able to detect the following six errors.
When an error occurs, the error is sent to the printer if communication can be carried
out, and at the same time, the LED2 (red) on the SRT board lights up.
When the printer receives the error from the sorter, it displays an error message on the
operation panel, and logs the error information,
• Self-diagnosis error (ROM, RAM check error)
• Film jam
• Detection if disconnection of printer (Interlock cut off detection)
• Mechanism error
• Communication error
• Command processing error
■ Sorting Operations
The sorting operations of this equipment differ according to the version of the main unit
software.
● Main unit software version A02 or earlier

Bins are switched for every print. If printing several copies, films are output to the same
bin.
● Main unit software version A03 or later

Start using the selected bins from the one with the smallest number, and switch to the
next bin when the number of copies output with the current bin totals 50.
Bins are switched only when output bin number is not specified by the client and bin
settings were performed using the DPX7 PC Tool.
If the output bin has been specified by the DICOM tag, images are output to this bin.
Main unit software version A02 or earlier Main unit software version A03 or later
FP7D0330.EPS
006-259-03
MD-55
The total number of films is managed for every bin, therefore bins are not always
switched for every 50 prints as seen from the client side, as shown in the following
examples.
Example 1 (Overlapping of selected bins)

When set as follows:
• Client A: Bin 1, 2, 3
• Client B: Bin 3, 4, 5
As bin 3 is overlapping, bins may be switched even if 50 copies have not been output as
seen from the client.
Example 2 (When the output bin is specified by DICOM tag)

When set as follows:
• Client A: Bin 1, 2, 3
• Client B: Bin 1 specified by DICOM tag
As bin 1 is overlapping, bins may be switched even if 50 copies have not been output as
seen from client A.
006-259-03
MD-56
4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL
4.1 System Block Diagram

AC input
Operation panel
Power supply unit Power ON switch
+5VS
Main power switch POWER LED LEDs
Buzzer
Controller
fan Touch panel
+5VS
+5V
+12VD VGA
+12V HDD
-12V
+3.3V Scanner unit
+24V
±12VITLK PC board SIO PRN (Leading edge) (Start-point)
SED SYN LD PD
LDD LDA
SNS
Sensor
ADC Density measurement

section sensor
MCT Thermistor
SIO Barcode reader

DRV
Interlock SW
ATX control
Motor
LAN SIO SIO Solenoid

Controller fan
Heater control Clutch
Remote power
supply control Fan
Interlock
Heater power Heat development

heater
External timer LAN compatible Modem External Sorter

devices devices
(Including (Remote power
(For servicing)
WakeOnLAN) supply control) External connection
FP7D0406.EPS
006-259-03
MD-57
4.2 Outline of Power Supply

AC input
Operation panel
Power supply unit Power ON switch
+5VS +5V
Main power switch POWER LED LEDs
Controller +5V,
fan +12VD Touch panel
+5VS
+5V +5V,
+12VD +12VD
+12V HDD
-12V Scanner unit
+3.3V (Leading edge) (Start-point)
+24V
±12VITLK PC board SED SYN LD PD
PRN
+5V
±12V +5V
+5VS, LDD ±8V LDA
+5V +5V
+3.3V +5V +12V→±8V
+12VD
-12V
±12V,
+3.3V SNS
+5V
Sensors
±12V,
+5V ±12V Density measurement
section
MCT +5V
Barcode reader
Signal
+5V
+5V
+5V→+3.3V
Auto-transformer +5V→+2.5V
DRV
+5V→+1.9V
Signal +24V
200V Drive parts
+5V, +24V
HTC Polygon motor
+24V
AC200V
Heat development
heater
FP7D0407.EPS
AC power is supplied to the power supply unit when the main power switch is turned
ON. The power supply unit outputs the following power based on this AC power.
• When AC power is input, the power supply unit outputs +5VS to the PC board and for
the POWER LED on the operation panel.
• The power supply unit outputs +5V, ±12V, +12VD, +24V, and +3.3V when the power
ON switch is pushed.
• The power supply unit outputs AC200V to the heat development unit heater by the
heater control signal from the MCT board.
The PC board has a lithium batter for the clock and backup RAM.
<REMARKS>
Each output block of the power supply unit of this equipment has a protection circuit for
overvoltage and overcurrent. When problems are detected, the present DC output is stopped.
006-259-03
MD-58
4.3 Interlock Control

The drive power supply cutoff by the interlock switch of this equipment is shown below.
Power supply unit DRV board Upper tray detection switch
+24V (SA12)
+5V
F1
+24V K1
MB11
K1
SOLA11
Middle tray detection switch

+24V (SA22)
F2
JP
K2
MB21
K2
SOLA21
Lower tray detection switch

+24V (SA32)
F3
JP
K3
MB31
K3
SOLA31
Front cover interlock

+12V -12V switch (SK2, SK3)
+24V
K12 F9
K12
K5 K6
+24V
F8 MD1
K1 K2 K3
F6 MD4 to MD6, CLD1
K5
F5 MD2, MD3, MG1
Scanner unit
(LDD) F7 ME1
K6
FP7D0408.EPS
006-259-03
MD-59
Power supply unit DRV board
+24V MS1,
FANG1 to FANG3
Jam clear cover

+24V interlock switch (SK1)
F4
K4
MJ1
K4
SOLJ1
FP7D0409.EPS
F: Fuse
JP: Short-circuit connector for supplying power to the MD1 drive circuit in
equipments without the middle and lower film loading units.
K1 to K3: Relays which prevent the flow to the DRV board of counter-electromotive
power generated when motors are rotated in jam removing in the opening
of trays. At the same time, these relays cut off +24V power to the MD1 drive
circuit.
K4: Relay which prevents the flow to the DRV board of counter-electromotive
power generated when motors are rotated in jam removing in the opening
of the jam clear cover.
K5, K6: Relay which cuts off power to motors and clutch in the opening of the front
cover. At the same time, these relays prevent the flow to the DRV board of
counter-electromotive power generated when motors are rotated in jam
removing.
K12: Relay which cuts off the ±12V (for driving the laser) to the LDD board when
the front cover is released.
The ON/OFF states of interlock switches, relays, and fuses are converted to the ON/
OFF signal by the photocoupler, sent to the SNS board, and used for software control.
006-259-03
MD-60
4.4 Functions of Boards
4.4.1 PC Board
■ Outline
The PC board performs overall control of the equipment, network input, and image
processing.
■ Main Functions
● CPU
733 MHz (FSB = 133 MHz)
● LAN
10/100BASE, with Link/Speed LED, Wakeup On LAN function
<REMARKS>
The Wakeup On LAN function is activated after the power is turned ON, the system starts, and
setup has been performed.
When power supply stops, it is activated after the power is turned ON again and the system
starts.
● IDE-I/F
Ultra ATA 100 compatible
● DIMM
168 pin, 3.3V Unbuffered DIMM, Non-ECC, SPD, PC133/PC100 compatible
Maximum capacity: 512 MB
Slots: 2
● SIO-I/F
2 ch
● CRT-I/F
Display mode: Resolution 320 x 240 to 1600 x 1200
● PCI-I/F
PCI2.2 compatible, 4 slots (of which, 2 slots are for the PRN board and MCT board)
● Lithium Battery
For RTC and backup RAM, replaceable
006-259-03
MD-61
4.4.2 PRN Board
PRN board
Frame memory Line memory
PCI socket 32 bit 16 bit
Image data (1) LBC 16 bit (2) CTG 14 bit (3) DAC
32 bit Scanner unit
Coaxial I/F
PLL synthesizer
(4) Start-point/Leading
edge detection signal FP7D0405.EPS
■ Outline
The PRN board converts image data stored in the main memory on the PC board from
digital to analog via the following blocks, and sends analog image data to the scanner
unit using the coaxial cable.
■ Main Function
(1) LBC block
Performs DMA transfer of image data via the PCI bus, and controls transfer to the
frame memory.
(2) CTG block
Performs image data transfer from the frame memory to line memory, and
controls transfer to the DAC based on the start-point/leading edge detection
signal.
(3) DAC block
Converts image data from the line memory from digital to analog, and controls the
laser light power.
(4) Start-point/leading edge detection signal
Takes in film leading edge detection sensor (SE1) outputs, and generates output
timing to the exposure area. To accurately obtain start-points in the scanning
direction, a PLL synthesizer is mounted.
006-259-03
MD-62
4.4.3 MCT Board
MCT board
External remote input
External remote output
LED Heater ON/OFF

CPU Power supply OFF
PCI (7709A)
Controller fan ON/OFF
BUS DipSW (Power supply)
Board RS-232C Sorter I/F

FPGA version transeiver Debugging
SNS
I/F
Main memory Boot program FlashROM
(SDRAM) FlashROM for application
4M x 32 512k word 1M word
FP7D0401.EPS
■ Outline
Performs mechanical control. Connected to the PCI bus of the PC board.
Has interface with the SNS board and DRV board which control and drive the I/O parts.
■ Main functions
● Power ON Reset IC
Generates reset signals when the power is turned ON.
● Hard Reset Switch

Generates the same reset signal as power ON reset.
● Self-reset Circuit
Generates reset signals by reset sequence access.
● CPU
SH3: 7709A (133 MHz)
● Main Memory
8M word SDRAM (32 bit width), SH3 CKIO: 33.3 MHz access
● Boot Program ROM

Can read/write by flash memory and sector, 512K words
● Application ROM
Can read/write by flash memory and sector, 1M word, program is expanded on SDRAM
and run.
006-259-03
MD-63
● FPGA
Bus error monitoring, decoding, bus control, self-reset register, LED, version register,
soft SW reading, SNS board I/F, 2-port memory (256B x 2) function
● RS232C
Connected to the sorter and PC for debugging.
● PCI Interface
PCI connection in the FPGA. Performs communication between the SH3 and PC board
via the 2-port memory in the FPGA.
● SNS Board Interface

Accesses the address/data 8-bit multiplexer via the FPGA.
In data reading from the SNS board, takes in data when confirmed as the same data
sent continuously twice. Bus error results when access is delayed because data cannot
be confirmed.
● Heater
Performs ON/OFF control of the heater for the power supply unit.
Mounts the LED for checking operations,
● Controller Fan Control

Outputs the ON/OFF signal of the controller fan to the power supply unit.
● External Remote Input/Output

Outputs the power ON signal to the power supply unit and power OFF signal to SH3 by
the signal from the external remote terminal.
006-259-03
MD-64
4.4.4 SNS Board
SNS board
5 mm GAP
sensor
Sensor input I/F
Reflection
type sensor
Reflection type sensor
LED individual
ON/OFF control
MCT Heat development unit thermistor
board Film cooling section thermistor
AD coverter
Recording section thermistor
Density measurement PD
Interlock state signal

+5V (DRV board)
+12V
-12V
Power FUSE open detection
supply signal (DRV board)
FUSE open detection
Pulse motor drive

Pulse motor control
(DRV board)
FPGA
Solenoid drive
Solenoid control
(DRV board)
DC motor drive
DC motor control
(DRV board)
Clutch drive
Clutch control
(DRV board)
Fan drive
Fan control
(DRV board)
Volume board LED

LED control (Volume board)
Operation panel
Operation panel
display control
Serial communication
Barcode reader
control
FP7D0402.EPS
006-259-03
MD-65
■ Outline
The SNS board performs I/O parts control of the equipment by controlling the MCT
board.
Control signals from the MCT board are accessed by the address/data 8-bit multiplexer
via the FPGA.
The sensor input block is controlled by the SNS board directly, but the drive block I/O is
controlled via the driver of the DRV board. This board generates only the control
signals.
■ Main Functions
● Sensor Input Function
❍ Input system
• PI 5 mm GAP type x 14 systems
• PI reflection type x 10 systems
• Interlock state detection x 5 systems
❍ Control system
• LED pulse lighting control (Reflection type) x 10 systems
● Drive System Functions

• Pulse motor control x 11 systems
• Solenoid control (Power down control) x 4 systems
• DC motor control x 2 systems
• Electromagnetic clutch control x 1 system
• Cooling fan control x 2 systems
● Analog Input System Function
❍ Input system (A/D conversion)

• Heat development unit thermistor x 9 systems
• Recording section thermistor x 1 system
• Film cooling section thermistor x 1 system
• Density measurement photodiode x 1 system
❍ Control system
• Density measurement LED lighting control x 1 system
● Volume Board LED Control

• LED lighting control x 2 systems
● Operation Panel Display Control

• Setting data output x 5 systems
● RS-232C Communication
• Barcode reader x 3 systems
006-259-03
MD-66
4.4.5 DRV Board
DRV board
Interlock state
Interlock
signal Photocoupler Interlock circuit
switch
(SNS board)
FUSE open
FUSE open
detection signal Photocoupler detection
(SNS board)
Pulse motor control

Pulse motor drive Pulse motor
(SNS board)
Solenoid control
Solenoid drive Solenoid
(SNS board)
DC motor control
DC motor drive DC motor
(SNS board)
Clutch control
Clutch drive Clutch
(SNS board)
Fan control
Fan drive Fan
(SNS board)
Power supply +5V

+24V
FP7D0403.EPS
■ Outline
Drives actuators using the control signal from the SNS board.
Connected to the SNS board by the board to board connector.
006-259-03
MD-67
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MD-68
4.4.6 PNL Board, VR Board
PNL board
Analog RGB A/D conversion LCD controller

input • Analog AMP LCD
• Tone control
• A/D converter • Timing conversion output
DDC • PLL, etc. • Timing control
• Memory control
PHASE
CTL H.V. image
Hard SW Memory
position CTL
Display CTL
Controller INV power
ON/OFF SW
supply output
Contrast CTL
DC - DC
5.0V, 3.3V, 30.0V
DC12V
FUSE
DC5V
RS232C RS232C Touch panel Touch panel

output decoder controller input
VR board
VR ERROR LED
Contrast adjustment
volume
Power supply unit Save energy mode LED
Power ON
SNS board switch POWER LED
PC board
Buzzer
FP7D0404.EPS
006-259-03
MD-69
■ Outline
The PNL board and VR board are user operation boards installed on the operation
panel.
Panel displays are controlled by the SNS board.
■ Main functions
● LCD
• 5.7” passive color LCD (STN)
• 320 (RGB) x 240 dots, COB LCD module
• Built-in inverter drive backlight and inverter
● Touch Panel
Analog resistance touch panel
● PNL board (LCD and Touch Panel Controller)

• Analog RGB input from PC board (VGA)
• VGA/LCD conversion function
• Backlight ON/OFF function
• LCD display/non-display function
• Touch panel controller
● VR Board (Volume Board)

• LCD contrast adjustment volume
• POWER LED/ERROR LED/SAVE ENERGY MODE LED (controlled by SNS
board)
• Power ON switch (Momentary)
● Touch Sound Speaker

Operation buzzers (Beep from PC board only)
006-259-03
MD-70
4.4.7 Power Supply Unit

■ Outline of Power Supply Specifications
● Input Voltage
AC 200/208/220/230/240 V ±10%
<REMARKS>
Voltage is switched by tap switching.
● Output Voltage
AC180 to 220V/(2500W), +5VS/0.5A, +5V/4A and 10A, ±12V/2A, +12VD/6A,
+24V/8A, +3.3V/5A
(However, only +5VS is output when the main power switch is turned ON)
● Input Frequency
50/60 Hz ±3 Hz
● Input Capacity
Below 2.5 KVA
● Leakage Current
Below 4 mA
■ Main Functions
● +5V Power Supply Monitor

Output of +5VS power supply is started when the main power switch is turned ON.
After +5V power is supplied, the POK signal (DC5V) is output for 100 to 500 ms by
the control of the power SW controller. (For PC board)
● Power SW controller
• Input signal 1 <TIMRQ, EXTRQ, STARTRQ>
Receives logic LOW level start request signal using the +5VS voltage
• Output signal 1 <START>
Outputs starts signals within signal pulse width 1 to 3 seconds or continuous logic
LOW level start signals (for PC board) by input signal 1
• Input signal 2 <PS-ON>
Outputs power supply voltage (5V, ±12V, +12VD, 24V, 3.3V) other than +5VS by
receiving logic LOW level (ground level) power supply ON request signal. Also
cuts off power by opening grounding.
006-259-03
MD-71
● Heater Controller
Signal from controller for turning heater AC output ON/OFF.
● Interlock Circuit
Turns ±12VITRLK ON/OFF by the 24VITRLK signal input via the interlock switch
from 24V.
006-259-03
MD-72
4.4.8 SRT Board

■ Main Functions
● Communication Control
Serial communication control
● Status Display for Maintenance

When power is supplied to the CPU, LED1 (green) on the SRT board is lit. When
errors occur, LED2 (red) is lit.
● Film Conveyance
• The stepping motor (MT1) is rotated by the pulse motor driver to convey film.
• The motor is stopped promptly when film jams are detected.
● Film Detection
• When films pass by in front of the reflection sensor, film is detected as present.
• Five film detection sensors are provided and used for switching two bins each.
● Changeover Guide Switching

• The bin storing the film is specified by the command from the printer.
• After the sensor corresponding to the specified bin detects that there is film, the
solenoid is turned ON to switch the changeover guide.
● Detection of Disconnection
When the sorter is disconnected and separated from the printer, +24V is cut off by
the interlock switch. This cut off is detected by the software on the SRT board.
006-259-03
MD-73
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MD-74
5. MECHANISM CONTROL FLOW
5.1 Reading the Mechanism Control Flow

■ Meaning of Symbols
START Start of sequence
5.3.1 Main routine
5.3.2 Fig. 1 Sub routine
SD4: ON? Judgment
0215 Error processing
Display of message
END End of sequence

FP7D0520.EPS
■ ON/OFF Notation
• Penetration type sensors (SA13, SA23, SA33, SB11, SB21, SB31, SB12, SB22,
SB32, SD3, SD4, SD5, SD6, SD7)
ON: Blocked OFF : No blocked
• Reflection type sensors (SA11, SA21, SA31, SB13, SB23, SB33, SD1, SD2, SJ1)
ON : Film is present OFF : No film FP7D0521.EPS
■ Time/Conveyance Parameter Notation

The time indicated in the MECHANISM CONTROL FLOW is the operation standby
time or operating time.
006-259-03
MD-75
5.2 Initialization Flow

■ General Flow
START
All motors stops
All reflection type sensors LED OFF
Sorter initialization
5.2.1 Upper Removal Unit Initialization
5.2.1 Middle Removal Unit Initialization
5.2.1 Lower Removal Unit Initialization
5.2.2 Cleaning Roller Grip Initialization
5.2.3 Conveyance Grip Roller Initialization
5.2.4 Upper Film Positioning Section Initialization
5.2.5 Lower Film Positioning Section Initialization
Clutch initialization
5.2.6 Remaining Film Discharge
END
FP7D0500.EPS
006-259-03
MD-76
5.2.1 Upper/Middle/Lower Removal Unit Initialization

START <NOTE>
Middle removal unit: SB21
ON (Not at suction cup HP)
SB11 : OFF?
OFF (At suction cup HP)

MB11 : CW
(Deviates from HP)
SB11 : NO NG
OFF→ON? Retry?
YES OK
2225 0226 Upper removal unit

MB11 : STOP 2229 0230 Middle removal unit
2233 0234 Lower removal unit
Removal unit HP deviation

detection error
MB11 : CCW
(Returns to HP)
SB11 : NO NG
ON→OFF? Retry?
YES OK
(HP)
2231 0232 Middle removal unit
Removal unit HP return

detection error
MB11 : STOP
MB11 : CCW (Mute drive)
MB11 : STOP
END
FP7D0501.EPS
006-259-03
MD-77

START
ON
SD5 : OFF?
OFF
MD4 : CCW
SD5 : NO NG
OFF→ON? Retry?
YES OK
(Cleaning roller grip)
2298 0299
Delay : 1sec Cleaning roller grip
detection error
SD5 : YES
ON→OFF?
NO
Main unit software version
02BB A02 or earier
12BB Main unit software version
A03/A04/V4.1 or later/V10.0 or later
MD4 : STOP No cleaning roller detection error
MD4 : CW
SD5 : NO NG
ON→OFF? Retry?
YES OK
(Cleaning roller grip
release)
Delay 2237 0238
Cleaning roller grip HP
MD4 : STOP detection error
END
FP7D0503.EPS
006-259-04
MD-78

START
MD3 : CW
SD4 : NO NG
OFF→ON? Retry?
YES OK
(Completed setting grip
state to 35 x 43 cm)
2239 0240
Size grip HP detection error
MD3 : STOP
END
FP7D0502.EPS
006-259-03
MD-79
5.2.4 Upper Film Positioning Section Initialization

START
OFF (Not at HP)

SD6 : ON?
ON (At HP)
MD5 : CCW
(Deviates from HP)
SD6 : NO NG
ON→OFF? Retry?
YES OK
MD5 : STOP 2243 0244

Upper positioning guide HP
deviation detection error
MD5 :CW
(Returns to HP)
SD6 : NO NG
OFF→ON? Retry?
<NOTE>
YES OK
Perform together with lower
(HP) film positioning section
2247 0248
return detection error
MD5 : STOP
END
FP7D0504.EPS
006-259-03
MD-80
5.2.5 Lower Film Positioning Section Initialization

START
OFF (Not at HP)

SD7 : ON?
ON (At HP)
MD6 : CCW
(Deviates from HP)
SD7 : NO NG
ON→OFF? Retry?
YES OK
MD6 : STOP 2241 0242

Lower positioning guide HP
deviation error
MD6 :CW
(Returns to HP)
SD7 : NO NG
OFF→ON? Retry?
<NOTE>
YES OK
Perform together with upper
(HP) film positioning unit
2245 0246
return error
MD6 : STOP
END
FP7D0505.EPS
006-259-03
MD-81
5.2.6 Remaining Film Discharge

START
All reflection type sensor LED ON
CLD1 : ON
MD4 : CCW (Cleaning roller grip)
SD5 : NO
OFF→ON? 0299
Cleaning roller grip detection error
YES (Grip)
Delay : 1 sec
MD4 : STOP
<NOTE>
Upper removal unit: MB11
MB11 : CW
Middle removal unit: MB21
(Removal conveyance roller Lower removal unit: MB31
grip)
MB11 : STOP
MB11 : CW (Mute drive)
MB11 : STOP
All tray setting NO

completed ?
YES
SOLJ1 : ON (Discharge to upper cover

of the equipment)
A
FP7D0524.EPS
006-259-03
MD-82
MD2 : CW (Low speed)

Delay
ME1 : CW
MG1 : CCW
MJ1 : CW (Low speed)

CLD1 : OFF
SJ1 : NO
OFF→ON?
MD2 : STOP
YES
2
SJ1 : NO
ON→OFF? 12A9
MD3 : CCW (20 x 25 cm setting) Film release unit
YES jam error
SD4 : NO
OFF→ON? 02BD 1
Size grip detection error

YES
MD3 : STOP
MD4 : CW (Cleaning roller grip HP)
SD5 : NO
ON→OFF? 0238 1

YES detection error
Delay : 0.4 sec
MD4 : STOP
B
FP7D0525.EPS
006-259-03
MD-83
MD1 : CW (Start of discharge of film remaining at conveyor unit)
ON
SD2 : ON?
OFF Delay
MD1 : STOP
SD2 : YES
OFF→ON?
MD4 : CCW (Cleaning roller grip)
NO
(End of discharge of film
remaining at conveyor unit)
SD5 : NO
OFF→ON? 0299 1
MD1 : STOP
Cleaning roller grip
YES detection error
Delay : 1 sec
C
MD4 : STOP
MD3 : CW (35 x43 cm setting)
SD4 : NO
OFF→ON? 0240 1

YES
MD3 : STOP
MD2 : CW (Low speed)
SD2 : NO
ON→OFF? 12A7 1
Sub-scanning unit jam error

YES
CLD : OFF
MD2 : STOP
2
FP7D0526.EPS
006-259-03
MD-84
ON
SB33 : OFF? 12A5 1
Lower tray removal unit jam error
OFF
ON
SB23 : OFF? 12A4 1
Middle tray removal unit jam error
OFF
ON
SB13 : OFF? 12A3 1
Upper tray removal unit jam error
OFF
ON
SD1 : OFF? 12A6 1
Front conveyor unit jam error
OFF
1
Has SD2 NO
detected film?
YES
SJ1 : NO
OFF→ON? 12A8
Heat development
YES unit jam error
Delay
All reflection type sensor LED OFF
SOLJ1 : OFF
D
FP7D0527.EPS
006-259-03
MD-85
ME1 : STOP
MG1 : STOP
MJ1 : STOP
5.2.1 Upper Conveyor Unit Initialization

5.2.1 Middle Conveyor Unit Initialization
5.2.1 Lower Conveyor Unit Initialization
END
FP7D0528.EPS
006-259-03
MD-86
5.3 Normal Processing
■ General Flow
START
5.3.1 Film Removal
5.3.2 Film Conveyance
5.3.3 Pre-recording Conveyance
5.3.4 Recording Conveyance
5.3.5 Heat Development Conveyance
5.3.6 Film Release Conveyance
END
FP7D0506.EPS
006-259-03
MD-87
5.3.1 Film Removal

START
5.3.1 Fig. 1 Tray check
MD3 : CW or CCW <NOTE>

Rotating direction differs according to
grip state of current position.
Combination NG
of SD3/SD4 2284 20 x 25 cm size
OK?
OK
1
MD3 : STOP
5.2.1 Upper Removal Unit Initialization
MB11 : CCW/High sped <NOTE>

(Film removal start) Upper removal unit: SB12, MB11
Middle removal unit: SB22, MB21
Lower removal unit: SB32, MB31
SB12 : NO NG
OFF→ON? Retry?
YES OK
(Film surface detection)
MB11 : STOP
Film surface detection error

MB11 : CCW/Low speed
(Film suctioning)
1
A
FP7D0507.EPS
006-259-03
MD-88
<5.3.1 Fig. 1 Tray Check>
START
SOLA11 : OFF (Tray lock)
Tray open <NOTE>

Tray check :
Upper removal unit: SA11, SA12, SA13, SOLA11
SA12
Middle removal unit: SA21, SA22, SA23, SOLA21
Tray close Lower removal unit: SA31, SA32, SA33, SOLA31
1214 Upper removal unit
1218 Middle removal unit
1222 Lower removal unit
Tray open error
Shutter check : Shutter present

SA11
No shutter
Shutter present error
OFF (Film tray lock error)

SA13 : ON?
ON
(Film tray lock normal)
Tray open error
END
FP7D0523.EPS
006-259-03
MD-89
A
SB12 : NO NG
ON→OFF? Retry?
YES (Film suction position) OK
MB11 : STOP 2255 0256 Upper removal unit


Delay : 0.5 sec.
(Completion of film suction) Film suction detection error
MB11 : CW/Low speed 1

(Movement of flapping position)
MB11 : STOP
Delay 20 x 25 cm : 1.0 sec.

(Film separation) 26 x 36 cm : 0.5 sec.
35 x 43 cm : 2.5 sec.
25 x 30 cm : 1.0 sec.
MB11 : CW/Middle speed
(Rise of flapping operation)
MB11 : STOP
MB11 : CCW/Middle speed

(Descent of flapping operation)
MB11 : STOP
Operation Less than 5 times <NOTE>

: 5 times? Distance moved differ according to film size.
5 times
MB11 : CW/High speed

(Moves film to conveyance roller)
B
FP7D0508.EPS
006-259-03
MD-90
<NOTE>
SB11 : NO NG Middle removal unit: SB21
OFF→ON? Retry?
YES OK
(Suction cup arm HP)
MB11 : STOP 2263 0264 Middle removal unit
MB11 : CW/Middle speed Removal unit HP rise detection error

(Film separation)
1
MB11 : STOP
MB11 : CW (Mute drive)
MB11 : STOP
MD1 : CW/10mm
MD1 : STOP
<NOTE>
OFF NG Middle removal unit: SB23
SB13 : ON? Retry?
ON OK
Removal unit jam error
END 1
FP7D0510.EPS
006-259-03
MD-91
5.3.2 Film Conveyance

START
Is cleaning NO (Precedent film currently passing cleaning roller)

roller gripping?
g ipping?
YES (Precedent film passed cleaning roller)
20 x 25 cm NO
setting?
YES MD3 : CW or CCW <NOTE>

Rotating direction differs according
to grip state of current position.
Combination of NG
SD3/SD4
OK?
OK 2284 20 x 25 cm size
MD3 : STOP Size grip detection error
MD1 : CW
1
SD1 : NO NG
OFF→ON? Retry? 1273
Conveyor unit removal unit
YES OK jam error
(SD1 detects film leading edge)
221B
5.2.1 2 Delay
Removal Unit Initialization
A
FP7D0509.EPS
006-259-03
MD-92
SD2 : NO NG
OFF→ON? Retry? 1274
Conveyor unit jam error
YES (SD2 detects film leading edge) OK
Delay 221C
Delay
MD1 : STOP
MD1 : CW
Next removal enable signal ON

<NOTE>
If film size is the following:
35x43 cm (those removed from middle and lower film tray)
Is film
positioning NO
possible?
<NOTE>
YES
End of precedent film recording
5.3.2 Fig. 1 Film Positioning
END
FP7D0512.EPS
006-259-03
MD-93
<5.3.2 Fig. 1 Film Positioning>
START
MD2 : CCW
MD1 : CW
Delay : 1.2 sec
MD5 : CCW
MD6 : CCW
(Close guide according to film size)
MD5 : STOP
MD6 : STOP
MD5 : CW
MD6 : CW
(Open guide)
MD5 : STOP
MD6 : STOP
MD5 : CCW
MD6 : CCW
(Close guide)
MD5 : STOP
MD6 : STOP
Film positioning Less than 2 times

operation: 2 times?
2 times
MD1 : STOP
MD2 : STOP
MD5 : CW
MD6 : CW
(Open guide slightly)
MD5 : STOP
MD6 : STOP
END
FP7D0513.EPS
006-259-03
MD-94
MD4 : CCW
(Cleaning roller grip)
CLD1 : ON
SD5 : NO
OFF→ON? 2282
YES detection error
Delay : 1 sec (End of gripping)
MD4 : STOP
END
Different size as film

What is currently conveyed
current setting?
Same size as film MD3 : CW or CCW <NOTE>

Rotating direction differs according
currently conveyed
to grip state of current position.
Combination of NG
SD3/SD4
OK?
OK 2284 20 x 25 cm size
2285 26 x 36 cm size
MD3 : STOP 35 x 43 cm size
2287
2288 25 x 30 cm size
END
FP7D0514.EPS
006-259-03
MD-95
5.3.3 Pre-recording Conveyance/Recording Conveyance

START
Recording conveyance enable signal ON
Next removal enable signal ON <NOTE>

If film size is the following:
• 35x43 cm (those removed from upper film tray)
• 26x36/20x25/25x30 cm
MD2 : CW/High speed

ME1 : CW
1
MD2 : STOP
Delay (End of recording)
Next film positioning enable

MD2 : CW/Low speed
signal ON
ME1 : STOP
Delay : 0.6 sec
END CLD1 : OFF
MD2 : STOP
SD2 : NO
ON→OFF?
YES
Delay : 0.2 sec

1276
Sub-scanning unit jam error
MD4 : CW
SD5 : NO
ON→OFF?
YES
Delay : 0.4 sec

2283
MD4 : STOP detection error
Delay : 0.39 sec

(End of cleaning roller grip HP return)
Next film conveyance enable signal ON FP7D0515.EPS
006-259-03
MD-96
Delay : 1 sec
MD5 : CW
MD6 : CW
(Open to front of HP)
MD5 : STOP
MD6 : STOP
MD5 : CW
MD6 : CW
SD6 : NO
OFF→ON?
YES (HP)
2290
detection error
SD7 : NO
OFF→ON?
YES (HP)
2289
detection error
MD5 : STOP
MD6 : STOP FP7D0516.EPS
006-259-03
MD-97
5.3.4 Heat Development Conveyance

START
Heat development drive command <NOTE>

First film from idling
MG1 : CCW
Heat development stop command <NOTE>

Transfer to idling
MG1 : STOP
END
FP7D0522.EPS
006-259-03
MD-98
5.3.5 Film Release Conveyance

START
SJ1 : NO
OFF→ON? 1277
Heat development unit jam error
YES
MJ1 : CW/Low speed Discharge to

upper cover of
the equipment
YES
Is film trailing
tr NO SOLJ1 : ON
edge passed
film cooling section?
YES
High speed NO SJ1 : NO

discharge? ON→OFF? 1278
Film release jam error
YES YES
Normal
Nor mal film NO
or 1 <NOTE>
MJ1 : STOP cleaning film? High speed discharge performed
•Normal film
YES (Film cooling section low temperature)
High speed discharge not performed
MJ1 : STOP •Normal film
MJ1 : CW/High speed (Film cooling section high temperature)
•Density measurement film
MJ1 : CW/High speed •Cleaning film
•Sorter discharge
SJ1 : NO
ON→OFF? 1278
Film release jam error
YES
1
Delay
MJ1 : STOP
SOLJ1 : OFF
END
FP7D0517.EPS
006-259-03
MD-99
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MD-100
6. PRINTING FORMATS
This chapter describes printing formats such as format names, standard formats, and
mixed formats.
6.1 Reading the Format Name

In “STANDARD\c, r”, c and r indicate the following values.
C (Column) : No. of frames in the horizontal direction
R (Row) : No. of frames in the vertical direction
For example, they are as shown in the following for “STANDARD\3, 4”.
Column
Row
FP7D0607.EPS
006-259-03
MD-101
6.2 Standard Formats

This equipment supports the following standard formats for all film sizes.
No. of frames/film: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40,
42, 48, 49, 54, 56, 63, 64, 70, 72, 80
Portrait Landscape
STANDARD\1,1 STANDARD\5,5 STANDARD\1,1 STANDARD\6,6

TP7D0601.EPS
006-259-03
MD-102
6.3 Mixed Formats

The following shows the frame layout of the mixed formats of each film size supported
by this equipment.
● 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT
ROW\1,2 ROW\1,3,3 ROW\3,3,3,2
1 2 3
1
1
4 5 6
2 3 4 7 8 9
2 3
5 6 7
10 11
HPM1 HPM2 HPM3

ROW\3,2,2 ROW\4,4,4,4,2 ROW\4,4,2,2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
4 5 9 10 11 12
9 10
13 14 15 16
6 7
17 18 11 12
HPM4 HPM5 HPM6

FP7D0601.EPS
ROW\1,3,3
2 3 4
5 6 7
BPM1
FP7D0603.EPS
006-259-03
MD-103
● 11” x 14” (26 cm x 36 cm) LANDSCAPE MIXED FORMAT
ROW\2,3 ROW\3,2 ROW\2,4,4
1 2 3 1 2
1 2
3 4 5 6
3 4 5 4 5
7 8 9 10
BLM1 BLM2 BLM3
ROW\4,4,2
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10
BLM4 FP7D0604.EPS
ROW\1,3,3
1
2 3 4
5 6 7
BPM1 FP7D0605.EPS
ROW\2,3 ROW\3,2 ROW\2,4,4 ROW\4,4,2

1 2 3 4
1 2 1 2 3 1 2
5 6 7 8
4 5 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 9 10
7 8 9 10
BLM1 BLM2 BLM3 BLM4
FP7D0606.EPS
006-259-03
MD-104
ROW\1,3,3
2 3 4
5 6 7
FP7D0608.EPS
ROW\2,3 ROW\3,2 ROW\2,4,4
1 2 3 1 2
1 2
3 4 5 6
3 4 5 4 5
7 8 9 10
ROW\4,4,2
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10
FP7D0609.EPS
006-259-03
MD-105
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
MT-1
CONTROL SHEET

11/10/2002 01 Revised (FM3601) 1, 4-8, 10, 11, 13, 15-17, 19, 31-34,
46, 49-120
09/20/2004 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 30, 48, 52, 77, 80, 263
A08, etc.)(FM4447)
11/30/2005 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 72-75
(FM4690)
10/02/2006 07 Revised (Change of corporate name and 1, 290-301
006-259-07
10.02.2006 FM4992 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual MT-1
MT-2
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD
When malfunctions occur in the equipment, analyze them from error codes, abnormal
image, and abnormal operation and perform the required corrections.
■ Troubleshooting Methods
The following three troubleshooting methods are available.
● Troubleshooting from Error Codes

When an error code is displayed on the screen, analyze the malfunction from that error
code.
When no error codes are displayed, the malfunction can be analyzed if an error
message is logged in the error log.
When analyzing malfunctions from error codes, refer to “2. ERROR CODES”.
● Troubleshooting from Abnormal Images

When analyzing malfunctions from abnormal images, refer to “3. ABNORMAL
IMAGES”.
● Troubleshooting from Abnormal Operations

When analyzing malfunctions from abnormal operations, refer to “4. ABNORMAL
OPERATIONS”.
When checking the unit in troubleshooting, refer also to “6. TROUBLESHOOTING

REFERENCE”, “7. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS”.
006-259-02
MT-3
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
MT-4
2. ERROR CODE
2.1 Checking Error Codes

■ Display Example
FP7T0226.EPS
■ Checking Error Logs

The following describes how to check error logs.
(1) Start the M-Utility.
(2) [System Management] → [Log Files] → [Display Error Log]
→ The following error log display appears.
006-259-02
MT-5
(3) For details on error codes, refer to “2.3 Error Code Tables” for the meaning of the
error which has occurred, suspected cause, and remedy.
When analyzing an error code, also refer to the detailed code provided.
To differentiate the place of error (printer or formatter), look up the name
displayed under “Source” on the error log display in the following table.
Source Error Type Place of Error

FLH Film conveyance related error
MFC Data setting/system related error
DEN Internal densitometer related error
DEV Temperature control system related error Printer error
POL Polygon motor control related error
PNL Panel control related error
SIF Sorter related error
DICOM DICOM error
Spooler Spooler error
ImgPrc Image processing error
Output Output control error
GUI Operation error
JobMake Test pattern generation error
Main MAIN control error Formatter error
Decode Decoder error
File transfer error
PCUTL
(Using the DPX7 PC Tool in normal state)
File transfer error
Satelite (Using the DPX7 PC Tool during
initialization error)
TP7T0201.EPS
006-259-02
MT-6
2.2 Format of Detailed Information

Perform this check only for analyzing error codes of the printer.
In the usual troubleshooting, find the corresponding error code from the error code
tables, and refer to the suspected causes and remedy methods indicated to resolve the
problem.
However if the problem persists, or to investigate the problem in further detail, check
the following detailed information to analyze the problem.
■ Checking Detailed Information of Error Codes

(1) Check the corresponding error code and its detailed information at the error
message display, or at [Display Error Log] of the M-Utility.
(2) Check the detailed information format number at “2.3 Error Code Tables” and
refer to the corresponding format.
(3) Find the format information from the 4-digit detailed information, and analyze the
problem.
(3)
(1)
Detailed
Error Code Error Name Significance Probable cause and remedy information
format
Malfunction of the SD5 sensor or MD4 motor.
Attempted to set cleaning roller grip to HP Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD5 port of the
Cleaning roller SNS board, or malfunction of the MD4 controller.
(home position) in initialization, but SD5
0238 grip HP detection
does not become OPEN. 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-4
error mechanism adjustments.
(Retryover)
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SNS/DRV board.
(2)
■2-A-4 (Conveyance Related Information(Type S4))
REDY LOCK SK2 SK1 SJ2 SB33 SB23 SB13 SJ1 SD7 SD6 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1
4 0 7 8
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
FP7T0227.EPS
006-259-02
MT-7
2.2.1 FLH (Conveyance) Related Detailed Error Information

■ 2-A (Sensor Related Errors)
Convert the hexadecimal 4-digit code to binary, compare the bit maps, and investigate
the input state corresponding to each bit.
1=ON (Close), 0=OFF (Open)
Detailed error code

(4-digit hexadecimal)
a b c d
FP7T0201.EPS
● 2-A-1 (Conveyance Related Information(Type S1))

Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
[Bit map]
a b c d
0 0 SK2 SK1 0 SY23 SY22 SY21 SY12 SB13 SB12 SB11 SY11 SA13 SA12 SA11
Cover Spare Upper removal Upper film

unit loading unit FP7T0202.EPS

[Bit map]
a b c d
Cover Spare Middle removal Middle film

006-259-02
MT-8

[Bit map]
a b c d
Cover Spare Lower removal Lower film


[Bit map]
a b c d
REDY LOCK SK2 SK1 SJ2 SB33 SB23 SB13 SJ1 SD7 SD6 SD5 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD1
Polygon/ Removal unit Upper conveyor unit/

Sub-scanning unit/cover Sub-scanning unit/
Film release unit
FP7T0205.EPS
● 2-A-5 (Electric Related Information (Type E1))

[Bit map]
a b c d
0 F05 F24 F24 F24 F24 F24 F24 F24 F24 F24 F24 F05 F12 F12 VCCS
VM VJ VH VG VF VE VD VC VB VA VP VP VM VP
Fuse Power supply

FP7T0206.EPS
006-259-02
MT-9
■ 2-B (File I/O Error)

Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the number of
the file causing the error and the causes.
Detailed error code

2 0 X X
File number Cause FP7T0207.EPS
■ 2-E (M-Utility Operation Error)

Displays the M-Utility command number and parameter of errors which occur when the
removal operation of the M-Utility was not executed as specified.
Detailed error code

X X 0 Y
M-Utility Parameter
command number number FP7T0208.EPS
006-259-02
MT-10
■ 2-F-1 (Sorter Conveyance Error)

Hardware errors/mechanism errors/film errors which occur during conveyance
in the sorter. Two sets of detailed information are displayed.
● Detailed Information 1/2

Displays the sensor number and sensor state immediately after the error has occurred.
Detailed error code

(4-digit hexadecimal
0 X Y Y
display)
Sensor Sensor
number information
FP7T0221.EPS
Code details
Sensor number
• 0: Hardware error, or when the error cannot be specified
• 1 to 5 (ST1 to ST5): Mechanism error or film error
Sensor information
• The OFF/ON state of sensors is displayed by 0/1.
[Bit map]
0 0 ST6 ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 ST5
FP7T0222.EPS
“FF” will be displayed when the data cannot be specified due to faulty
communication with the sorter.
● Detailed Information 2/2

Displays the mode, tray number, and bin number discharged to when the error has
occurred.
Detailed error code 8 X Y Y
Mode/tray Bin number (Decimal)

“00” when discharging remaining film
during initialization
0 0 Mode Tray
Mode (0:During initialization, 1: During normal recording)

Tray (0:Tray 1, 1:Tray 2, 2:Tray 3)
FP7T0224.EPS
006-259-02
MT-11
■ 2-F-2 (SIO Related Error)

Displays details of errors related to sorter SIO.
Detailed code Details Location Detected

(Hexadecimal)
0100 Task ID error API detection error
0101 Queue ID error
010C Address error
010D Queue table full
0200 Parameter error Intermediate task detection
0201 BCC check error error
0202 Sequence error
0203 Task unregistered error
0208 Parity error
0210 Overrun error
0220 Flaming error
0240 Brake detection
7FFF Time-out error FLH detection error
TP7T0211.EPS
■ 2-F-3 (Sorter I/F Error)

Displays errors related to commands which failed in transmission/reception of the
sorter I/F. However, includes SIO reception timeout, etc. due to sorter power OFF.
Detailed code (Hexadecimal)

Details Main Transmission
Transmission Reception
50 D0 Status request/response All the time when sorter is normal
(Excluding utility)
51 D1 Initialization self-diagnosis request/ During initialization
response
52 D2 Film storage request/response During sorter conveyance
53 - Storage canceled notification When sorter conveyance is
canceled
70 F0 Sensor status request/response During M-Utility
When compiling detailed error
information
71 F1 Motor operation request/response During M-Utility
72 F2 Solenoid operation request/response During M-Utility
73 F3 Motor speed setting request/ During initialization
response During M-Utility
TP7T0212.EPS
■ 2-F-4 (Sorter motor speed setting error)

Displays the error speed (decimal value) outside the specification during sorter motor
speed setting.
006-259-02
MT-12
■ 2-G (Software Data Error)

Displays software data error using the following three detailed codes.
● 2-G-1
Detailed codes are common information of the printer and are displayed as
“conveyance management print ID (XXXX)”.
Because they are internal control codes in software control, they cannot be used for
analysis during servicing.
● 2-G-2
Displays errors related to failure in detecting the discharge bin number.
Displays the discharge bin number detection error by the number of information
registered in the film management number table and bin number to be searched
(parameter in sorter discharge response).
Because this is the internal control code in software control, it cannot be used for
analysis during servicing.
X X Y Y
No. of Bin no.

registered searched
information FP7T0225.EPS
● 2-G-3
FLH information displayed as “SIO transmission number (0XXX)”.
■ 2-H-1 (No Detailed Information)

Displayed when no detailed information.
F F F F
FP7T0209.EPS
006-259-02
MT-13
2.2.2 MFC (Data Setting/System Related) Related Errors Detailed

Information
■ 3-A (File Transfer/Creation Error)
Displays errors which occur while transferring files or creating files. Displays the file
number with the error.
3000: IOT data file
3010: ISC log file
3020: Printer individual information file
30A0: ROM image file (Printer load module)
30B0: OS file (OS load module)
30C0: Installer file (Installer load module)
■ 3-B (File Write Error)

Displays error occurring while writing in the FLASH ROM. Displays the type of error
which occurred and installation method.
Detailed error code

X X A B
Type Installation
of error method
FP7T0210.EPS
Code details
Type of error
1: Writing size error
2: Installation method error
3: Erase error
Installation method
0: PRT application
1: OS
2: Installer
■ 3-C (General Error Details)

F F F F
FP7T0209.EPS
006-259-02
MT-14
■ 3-D (SIO Communication Error)

Error which occurs during SIO communication test. Displays the type of port causing
the error and film tray number.
Detailed error code

X X A B
Type of Tray number

port (Only port
for barcode
reader) FP7T0220.EPS
006-259-02
MT-15
2.2.3 DEN (Internal Densitometer) Related Errors Detailed

Information
■ 4-A (File I/O Error)
Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes.
Detailed error code 1 B X X
Cause FP7T0215.EPS
2.2.4 DEV (Temperature Control) Related Errors Detailed

Information
■ 9-A (Temperature Error)
Displays the temperature when the temperature is outside the specified range in heater
temperature control. (Unit: 1°C)
However, if the temperature is minus (-1 to -99°C), “F” will be displayed at the second
digit from the left.
Detailed error code

(When temperature is
X X X X
plus)
Heater number Temperature FP7T0211.EPS
Detailed error code

(When temperature is
X F X X
minus)
Heater number Temperature FP7T0212.EPS
006-259-02
MT-16
■ 9-B (Heater Thermistor Disconnection Error)

Error which occurs when the heater thermistor is disconnected. Displays the heater
number and thermistor temperature (A/D value).
Detailed error code

X X X X
Heater number A/D value FP7T0213.EPS
■ 9-C (Film Cooling Section, Recording Section Thermistor Disconnection Error)

Error which occurs when the thermistor of the film cooling section or recording section
is disconnected. Displays the thermistor temperature (A/D value).
Detailed error code

0 X X X
A/D value FP7T0214.EPS
■ 9-D (File I/O Error)

Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes.
Detailed error code 1 B X X
Cause FP7T0215.EPS
■ 9-E (Heater Control Task Start Error)

Displays the heater number when the heater temperature control task start ends in
error.
Detailed error code 0 0 0 X
Heater number FP7T0216.EPS
006-259-02
MT-17
■ 9-F (General Error Details)

F F F F
FP7T0209.EPS
■ 9-H (Heater Control Task Start Error)

Displays the causes when heat development unit control parameter value errors are
detected.
Detailed error code 0 0 0 X
Fan number Cause FP7T0218.EPS
Code details
Cause
0001: Target temperature setting error
0003: Heater control TCYC1 value error
1004: A system fan control TCYC2 value error
1005: A system fan control DUTY value: fr1 error
0009: Heater control DUTY value error
000A: Photosensing material correction parameter SBC1 value error
000B: Photosensing material correction parameter KBC value error
000C: TRAY number error at photosensing material correction parameter setting
000D: Photosensing material correction parameter SBC4 value error
2004: B system fan control TCYC2 value error
2005: B system fan control DUTY value: fr1 error
006-259-02
MT-18
2.3 Error Code Table

Names abbreviated in error code tables are as follows.
Abbreviated Name Formal Name
SNS board SNS16A board
DRV board DRV16A/B board
MCT board MCT16A board
PRN board PRN16A board
PNL board PNL16A board
LDD board LDD16A board
LED board LED15A board
PDD board PDD15A board
SRT board SRT16A board
PRT Printer/print mechanism
FMT Formatter
DSP Image processor
HDD Hard disk drive

TP7T0202.EPS
006-259-02
MT-19
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
MT-20
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
MT-21
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
2.3.1 Printer
Detailed
format
Conveyance system related external file
access error
Incorrect software installation, malfunction of MCT board,
• File read error
DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual
Conveyance system file inappropriate data, or insufficient data.

0201 error
• File write error
1. Re-install the software.
2-B-1
• File conversion error
2. Replace the MCT board.
• File line specification error
• File column specification error
Malfunction of SA12 sensor or malfunction of SA12 port of SNS
board.
Attempted to check the upper tray 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Upper tray detection
0213 sensor error
open/close state in initialization and mechanism adjustments. 2-A-1
removal, but failed. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SNS board.
board.
Attempted to check whether the upper 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Upper tray shutter
0215 detection sensor error
tray shutter is present in initialization and mechanism adjustments. 2-A-1
board.
Attempted to check the middle tray
Middle tray detection 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0217 sensor error
open/close state in initialization and
mechanism adjustments.
2-A-2
removal, but failed.
board.
Attempted to check whether the middle 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Middle tray shutter
tray shutter is present in initialization and mechanism adjustments. 2-A-2
MT-22
MT-22
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SNS board SD5 port or
MD4 controller.
Cleaning roller grip The cleaning roller attempted to move 1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check,
021A detection error from the HP to the grip state, but SD5 did mechanism adjustment. 2-A-4
(M-Utility function) not detect CLOSE.
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.

Refer to “2.4.2 Troubleshooting Flow”.

board.
Attempted to check the lower tray
Lower tray detection 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0221 sensor error
open/close state in initialization and
2-A-3

board.
Attempted to check whether the lower
Lower tray shutter 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
tray shutter is present in initialization and
2-A-3
Attempted to deviate the removal arm Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Upper tray removal unit
from upper deadpoint in initialization, but
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SNS
0226 HP deviation detection
SB11 does not become CLOSE. board, or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
2-A-1
error
(Retryover) 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Attempted to return the removal arm from mechanism adjustments.
Upper tray removal unit upper deadpoint in initialization, but SB11 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
0228 HP return detection error does not become OPEN. 3. If the problem still persists, replace the SNS/DRV board. 2-A-1
(Retryover) Refer to “2.4.2 Troubleshooting Flow”.
Middle tray removal unit
from upper deadpoint in initialization, butOr mechanism error, malfunction of the SB21 port of the SNS
2-A-2
error
Attempted to return the removal arm from 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
0232 HP return detection error
upper deadpoint in initialization, but SB21 3. If the problem still persists, replace the SNS/DRV board. 2-A-2
does not become OPEN.(Retryover) Refer to “2.4.2 Troubleshooting Flow”.
MT-23
MT-23
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Lower tray removal unit
2-A-3
error
Lower tray removal unit upper deadpoint in initialization, but SB31 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
(Retryover) Refer to “2.4.2 Troubleshooting Flow”.

Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD5 port of the SNS
Attempted to set cleaning roller grip to HP board, or malfunction of the MD4 controller.
Cleaning roller grip HP (home position) in initialization, but SD5 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0238 detection error does not become OPEN. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
Malfunction of the SD3/SD4 sensor or MD3 motor.

Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3/SD4 port of the
Attempted to set size grip to HP (home SNS board, or malfunction of the MD3 controller.
Size grip HP detection position) in initialization, but SD3/SD4 do 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0240 error not become the specified values. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4

Attempted to deviate positioning guide board, or malfunction of the MD6 controller.
Positioning guide
from HP (home position) in initialization, 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0242 entrance HP deviation
but SD7 does not become mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
detection error
OPEN.(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
Positioning guide exit 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
from HP (home position) in initialization,
but SD6 does not become OPEN. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4
error 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
MT-24
(Retryover)
MT-24
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Attempted to return positioning guide to board, or malfunction of the MD6 controller.
Positioning guide
HP (home position) in initialization, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0246 entrance HP return
SD7 does not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
detection error

Positioning guide exit HP (home position) in initialization, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0248 HP return detection error SD6 does not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4
Malfunction of the SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.

Attempted to move suction cup unit from board, or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
upper deadpoint to surface detection 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Upper tray film surface
0250 detection error
position in removal, but SB12 does not mechanism adjustments. 2-A-1
become CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
(Retryover) 3. If the problem still persists, replace the SNS/DRV board.

Middle tray film surface

Lower tray film surface
MT-25
MT-25
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Attempted to push in suction cup unit
board, or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
from surface detection position into
Upper tray film suction 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
bellows in removal, but SB12 does not
2-A-1
become OPEN.

(Retryover)
Attempted to push in suction cup unit board, or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
from surface detection position into 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Middle tray film suction
bellows in removal, but SB22 does not mechanism adjustments. 2-A-2
become OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.

Lower tray film suction
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.

Attempted to move from film suction to board, or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Upper tray removal unit upper deadpoint in removal, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0262 HP rise detection error SB11 does not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-1

Middle tray removal unit upper deadpoint in removal, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
MT-26
(Retryover)
MT-26
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Lower tray removal unit upper deadpoint in removal, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform

Malfunction of the SA13 sensor, or SOLA11 solenoid.

Or malfunction of the SA13 port of the SNS board, or
malfunction of SOLA11.
Upper tray lock release Attempted to open the upper tray, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0291 error SA13 did not become OPEN. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-1

Middle tray lock release Attempted to open the middle tray, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0293 error SA23 did not become OPEN. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-2

Attempted to open the lower tray, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Lower tray lock release
0295 error
SA33 did not become OPEN. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-3

Attempted to set the cleaning roller at HP board, or malfunction of the MD4 controller.
Cleaning roller grip (home position) in initialization, but SD5 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
0299 detection error did not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4
MT-27
(Retryover)
MT-27
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Disconnection of the VCCS sensor power fuse (F3).
1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Sensor power supply Disconnection of SNS board sensor
02AA fuse disconnection power fuse
adjustments 2-A-5
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
F5VP DRV board 5V disconnection.

DRV board 5V 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
02AD disconnection
Disconnection of DRV board 5V
adjustments
2-A-5
2. If the problem persists, replace the board.
F24VP DRV board 24V disconnection.
DRV board 24V
02AE disconnection
Disconnection of DRV board 24V adjustments 2-A-5
2. If the problem persists, check connectors and cables.
Disconnection of the F24VA upper tray power fuse (F1).
Upper film tray power 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Disconnection of DRV board upper film
02AF supply fuse
tray power fuse
adjustments 2-A-5
disconnection 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
Disconnection of the F24VB middle tray power fuse (F2).
Middle film tray power 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Disconnection of DRV board middle film
02B0 supply fuse
tray power fuse
adjustments 2-A-5
Disconnection of the F24VC lower tray power fuse (F3).
Lower film tray power 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Disconnection of DRV board lower film
02B1 supply fuse
tray power fuse
adjustments 2-A-5
Disconnection of the F24VD MD1 power fuse (F8).
MD1 power supply fuse Disconnection of DRV board MD1 power
02B2 disconnection fuse
adjustments 2-A-5
Disconnection of the F24VE MD2, MD3, MG1 power fuse (F5).
MD2,3 MG1 power 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Disconnection of DRV board MD2, MD3,
02B3 supply fuse
MG1 power fuse
adjustments 2-A-5
MT-28
MT-28
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Disconnection of the F24VF MD4, MD5, MD6 CLD1 power fuse
(F6).
MD4,5,6 CLD1 power 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Disconnection of DRV board MD4, MD5,
02B4 supply fuse
MD6 CLD1 power fuse adjustments 2-A-5

Disconnection of the F24VG ME1 power fuse (F7).
ME1 power supply fuse Disconnection of DRV board ME1 power
02B5 disconnection fuse
adjustments 2-A-5
Disconnection of the F24H upper cover fuse (F4).
Upper cover related fuse Disconnection of DRV board upper cover
02B6 disconnection related fuse
adjustments 2-A-5
Disconnection of the F24VJ front cover fuse (F9).
Front cover related fuse Disconnection of DRV board front cover
02B7 disconnection related fuse
adjustments 2-A-5
Set film trays or check files.
All film trays not- Error when all film trays were set as
02BA mounted error unmounted
1. Using the M-Utility, check settings of film used. FFFF
2. If no problem, check the files.
Attempted to set the cleaning roller grip
position into the grip state from the home
No cleaning roller
02BB detection error
position (HP) during initialization, but after Check that cleaning roller is inserted. 2-A-4
SD5 closes, SD5 further opens.
(Main unit software version A02 or earlier)
Attempted to move to the HP, but Malfunction of the SD3/SD4 sensor or MD3 motor.
02BD (Detection of remainder)
SD3/SD4 did not become the required Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SNS board SD3/SD4 2-A-4
value. port, or MD3 controller.
1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check,
20x25/26x36 size grip Attempted to move to the left size, but mechanism adjustment.
02BF detection error SD3/SD4 did not become the required 2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor. 2-A-4
(M-Utility function) value. 3. If the problem still persists, replace the SNS board.
Setup error of sensor driver, FPMC driver
MT-29
Error which essentially does not occur caused by software bug

02FF
MT-29
Device set error • FPMC time monitoring setting error 2-D-1
and incorrect settings.
• Message ID specification error
09.20.2004 FM4447
006-259-04
Detailed
format
No response from DEV-SS that it has Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
0332 DEV-SS start timeout completed start even after a certain 1. Re-install the software. 3-C
period of time. 2. Replace the MCT board.
No response from FL-SS that it has Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
0333 FLH-SS start timeout completed start even after a certain 1. Re-install the software. 3-C
period of time. 2. Replace the MCT board.

Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction
(DPRAM, FLASH-ROM, etc..), PC hardware error (PCI bus,HDD,
etc.)
FMT unit communication Communication with FMT unit not
0334 timeout possible.
1. Re-install the software. 3-C
3. Replace the MTH board.
4. Replace the HDD.
Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
0361 ISC log file writing error Failed in creating ISC log file. 1. Re-install the software. 3-A
0362 IOT data file writing error Failed in creating IOT data file. 1. Re-install the software. 3-A
Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction
(DPRAM, FLASH-ROM, etc..), PC hardware error (PCI bus,HDD,
etc.)
Failed in transferring file between
0370 File transfer error
MCT <-> PC.
1. Re-install the software. 3-A
3. Replace the MTH board.
4. Replace the HDD.
FLASH-ROM writing Failed in writing in FLASH-ROM when
0371 error installing.
1. Re-install the software. 3-B
SIO communication test Failed in data transmission to the serial
0380 transmission error port during SIO communication test.
3-D
Data sent to/received from the serial port Malfunction of the test tool, MCT board, or SNS board
SIO communication test
0381 compare error
during SIO communication test was 1. Replace the test tool. 3-D
incorrect. 2. Replace the SNS board. (When BCR port is specified)
SIO communication test Failed in receiving data from the serial
0382 3-D
MT-30
reception error port during SIO communication test.
MT-30
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Malfunction of the MCT board, SNS board, or DRV board
Inter-board Port read value in inter-board 1. Replace the MCT board.
0385 communication test error communication test was not correct. 2. Replace the SNS board.
3-D
3. Replace the DRV board.
Malfunction of sensor or SNS board.
Detected tray error during printing 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors and perform mechanism
0390 Tray error during printing (changes in tray lock sensor/shutter adjustments. 3-C
detection sensor). 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor.
Density measurement Software installation error, malfunction of the MCT board
Failed in reading density measurement
0401 control parameter file
control parameter files at system start.
1. Re-install the software. None
read error 2. Replace the MCT board.
Software installation error, malfunction of the MCT board
Polygon control Failed in reading the polygon control
0501 parameter file read error parameter file during system start.
Malfunction of the scanner unit, PRT16A board, or LDD16A
Detected polygon rotation error during 1. Replace the scanner unit.
0510 Polygon error
scanner initialization diagnosis. 2. Replace the PRT16A board. None
3. Replace LDD16A.
Heat development Failed in reading the heat development
0901 control parameter file control parameter file when the system 9-D
reading error was started up.
Failed in TMS driver (temperature
0902 TMS driver setup error measurement task) setup when system 9-F
was started up.
Heat development Failed in reading the heat development
0903 calculation parameter control parameter file when the system
9-D
file reading error was started up.
Failed in reading the temperature
Temperature conversion
0904 table file reading error
conversion table file when the system was 9-D
started up.
Failed in starting the plate control task
0905 Plate setup error
when the system was started up.
9-E
Failed in starting the fan control task

0906 Fan setup error
when the system was started up.
9-E
MT-31
MT-31
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Disconnection of the I/F cable between the SNS board and
thermistor, or malfunction of the thermistor or thermistor port of
Detected that the current temperature of the SNS board.
a heater dropped below -20°C for three 1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable to the
Plate thermistor
0911 disconnection error
times continuously (detection interval: 600 thermistor, and connector of the SNS board are set correctly. 9-B
ms), and determined that the thermistor
2. Replace the thermistor.

has disconnected. 3. Replace the SNS board.
4. Replace the cable between the thermistor and SNS board.
The plate temperature is low.

Malfunction of the temperature detection thermistor,
disconnection of the heater, disconnection of the cable between
the heater and power supply unit, reset of heater by the thermal
protector, or malfunction of the heater port of the MCT board.
1. Check that the heater connector, cable to the heater, and
connectors of the power supply unit and MCT board are set
correctly, and check that the thermal protector reset has been
cleared.
2. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the
The temperature of all plates did not
hand.
become the appropriate temperature
If hot, the heater is OK.
(within target temperature ±1°C) even
The thermistor/MCT board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
after 25 minutes from the start of
If not hot, the heater/MCT may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
initialization.
3. Check the operations of the filter section cooling FAN using
the M-Utility.
Note:
0920 Initialization time timeout
1. Generally, as the low temperature error
The FAN is OK if operations are normal. 9-F
The film cooling section and recording section
(2911) and heater disconnection error
thermistors/MCT board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
(0961), etc. occur before this error, the
If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
rate of occurrence of this error is low.
Replace the connector and filter section cooling FAN.
2. The target temperature (approx. 90°C
4. Replace the heater.
to 130°C) varies according to internal
conditions.
7. Replace the SNS board.
8. Replace the thermistor for the internal FAN.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and power supply
unit or I/F cable between the MCT board and power supply
unit.
10. Replace the power supply unit.
MT-32
MT-32
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the MCT board.
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the MCT board, temperature detection thermistor,
filter section cooling FAN, heater, or heater port of the MCT
board.
1. Check if the MCT board is controlled properly according to the
state LEDs, etc. (hang up, bus error, etc.).

2. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and
connector of the MCT board are set correctly.
the M-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The heater/thermistor may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
Detected that the current temperature of Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the
0951 Overheat 2 error a heater exceeded 138°C for three times hand. 9-A
continuously (detection interval: 600ms). If not hot, the heater is OK.
The thermistor may be faulty. Proceed to step 7.
If hot, the heater/MCT may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
Replace the thermistor.
9. Replace the internal temperature detection thermistor.
10. Replace the cable between the heater and power supply unit
or I/F cable between the MCT board and power supply unit.

MT-33
MT-33
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Disconnection of the heater, malfunction of the temperature
detection thermistor, disconnection of the cable between the
heater and power supply unit, reset of heater by the thermal
The temperature of a heater remained
cleared.
lower than the target temperature even
temperature control (detection interval:
hand.
600ms, measured 2000 times
Heater disconnection continuously) and did not become the
0961 error appropriate temperature.
The thermistor/MCT may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
If not hot, the heater/MCT may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
Note:
conditions.
unit.

Heat development Abnormal heat development control Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
09A0 control parameter value parameter was detected when the system 1. Re-install the software. 9-H
error was started up. 2. Replace the MCT board.
MT-34
MT-34
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Incorrect DipSW setting of the MCT board, connector
malfunction, malfunction of the temperature detection thermistor,
disconnection of the heaters, disconnection of the cable
between the heater and power supply unit, reset of heater by
thermal protector, or malfunction of heater port of the MCT

board.
1. Check that the DipSW settings of the MCT board are correct,
the heater connector and cable to the heater, and
Average rise temperature of plate is less correctly. Also check that the thermal protector reset has
than 10˚C even after 5 minutes after been cleared.
system start. 2. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
09B0 Cold start TimeOut error Note: hand. 9-F
This error occurs due to incorrect DipSW If hot, the heater is OK.
setting of the MCT board or heater control The thermistor/MCT board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
failure caused by electrical malfunction, If not hot, the heater/MCT board may be faulty. Proceed to
etc. step 3.
7. Replace the cable between the heater and power supply unit,
or the cable between the MCT board and power supply unit.

1211 Upper cover open The upper cover is open. Close the upper cover. 2-A-4
1212 Front cover open The front cover is open. Close the front cover. 2-A-4
The upper tray was open in initialization
1214 Upper tray open error
and removal.
Close the upper tray. 2-A-1
Upper tray shutter The shutter was inserted in the upper tray
1216 present error in initialization and removal.
Remove the shutter of the upper tray. 2-A-1
The middle tray was open in initialization

1218 Middle tray open error
and removal.
Close the middle tray. 2-A-2
MT-35
MT-35
Middle tray shutter The shutter was inserted in the middle
1220 present error tray in initialization and removal.
Remove the shutter of the middle tray. 2-A-2
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The lower tray was open in initialization
1222 Lower tray open error
and removal.
Close the lower tray. 2-A-3
Lower tray shutter The shutter was inserted in the lower tray
1224 present error in initialization and removal.
Remove the shutter of the lower tray. 2-A-3
Film dropped during removal.

Or malfunction of SB11, SB12, SB13 sensors or MB11motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11, SB12, SB13 ports
At completion of removal, did not detect of the SNS board, or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Upper tray removal unit normal SB13 CLOSE 1. Check if film has dropped.
1268 jam error (film leading edge detection). 2. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-1
(Retryover) mechanism adjustments.

Middle tray removal unit normal SB23 CLOSE 1. Check if film has dropped.

Or malfunction of SB31, SB32, SB33 sensors or MB31 motor.
Lower tray removal unit normal SB33 CLOSE 1. Check if film has dropped.
MT-36
MT-36
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Conveyor unit removal
Jam occurred during conveyance.
unit jam error
Open the front cover and tray (for upper tray), and remove the
<Reference>
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, but jammed film.
Upper tray :
did not detect SD1 CLOSE 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
1273 Removal jam
(film leading edge detection). mechanism adjustments. SD1, MD1
2-A-4
Middle tray :
Conveyance jam
Lower tray :
Conveyance jam

Open the front cover, and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, but
1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
did not detect SD2 CLOSE
1274 Conveyor unit jam error
(film leading edge detection).
mechanism adjustments. SD2, MD1 2-A-4
(Retryover)
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SNS/DRV board
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning unit, 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Sub-scanning unit jam
1276 error
but did not detect SD2 OPEN mechanism adjustments. SD2, MD1, MD2, ME1, laser 2-A-4
(film trailing edge detection). 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SNS/DRV/MCT board.
Jam occurred during heat development conveyance.
Conveyed film to the heat development 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Heat development unit
1277 jam error
unit, but did not detect SJ1 CLOSE mechanism adjustments. SJ1, MG1 2-A-4
(film leading edge detection). 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
Jam occurred during heat development conveyance.
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
1278 Film release jam error did not detect SJ1 OPEN mechanism adjustments. SJ1, MG1, MJ1 2-A-4
(film trailing edge detection). 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
MT-37
Upper tray shutter Attempted to open the upper tray, but the
1292
MT-37
After inserting the shutter, open the upper tray. 2-A-1
uninserted error shutter was not inserted.
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Middle tray shutter Attempted to open the middle tray, but
1294 uninserted error the shutter was not inserted.
After inserting the shutter, open the middle tray. 2-A-2
Lower tray shutter Attempted to open the lower tray, but the
1296 uninserted error shutter was not inserted.
After inserting the shutter, open the lower tray 2-A-3
The remainder is not discharged normally from the removal

unit.Or malfunction of the
SB11, SB12, SB13 sensors, or MB11 motor.
Failed to detect SB13 OPEN at Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11, SB12, SB13 ports
completion of remainder front of the SNS board, or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
12A3 jam error (Discharge
conveyance 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2-A-1
remainder)
(detected no film). mechanism adjustments.

Middle tray removal unit of the SNS board, or malfunction of the MB21 controller.
completion of remainder front
conveyance 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-2
remainder) mechanism adjustments.
(detected no film).

Lower tray removal unit of the SNS board, or malfunction of the MB31 controller.
completion of remainder front
conveyance 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-3
remainder) mechanism adjustments.
(detected no film).
MT-38
MT-38
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The remainder is not discharged normally from the front
conveyor unit.Or malfunction of the
SD1 sensor, or MD1 motor.
Failed to detect SD1 OPEN at completion board, or malfunction of the MD1 controller.
Conveyor unit jam error
12A6 (Discharge remainder)

of remainder conveyance 1. Check if film has dropped. 2-A-4
(detected no film). 2. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
The remainder is not discharged normally from the sub-scanning

SD2 sensor, or MD2 or ME1 motor.
Sub-scanning unit jam Failed to detect SD2 OPEN at completion board, or malfunction of the MD2 or ME1 controller.
12A7 error of remainder front conveyance 1. Check if film has dropped. 2-A-4
(Discharge remainder) (detected no film). 2. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
The remainder is not discharged normally from the heat

development unit.Or malfunction of the
SJ1 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ1 port of the SNS
Failed to detect SJ1 CLOSE at
Heat development unit board, or malfunction of the MG1 controller.
completion of remainder recording
12A8 jam error
conveyance
1. Check if film has dropped. 2-A-4
(Discharge remainder) 2. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
(detected film).
MT-39
MT-39
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The remainder is not discharged normally from the film release
SJ1 sensor, or MG1, MJ1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ1port of the SNS
Film release unit jam Failed to detect SJ1 OPEN at completion board, or malfunction of the MG1, MJ1 controller.
12A9 error of remainder recording conveyance 1. Check if film has dropped. 2-A-4
(Discharge remainder) (detected film). 2. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Attempted to set the cleaning roller grip Check that cleaning roller is inserted.
position into the grip state from the home
No cleaning roller
12BB detection error
position (HP) during initialization, but after <Supplementary information> 2-A-4
SD5 closes, SD5 further opens. If re-installation is performed without inserting after error
(Main unit software version A03 or later) detection, fatal error (0299) will result due to the mechanism.
Malfunction in the periphery of the sorter unit SIO.
Failed in registering SIO for 1. Check that the cable between the sorter unit and MCT board
12C0 SIO registration error
communication with the sorter unit. is connected properly.
2-F-2
Malfunction in the periphery of the sorter unit SIO.

Failed in SIO channel initialization for 1. Check that the cable between the sorter unit and MCT board
12C1 SIO initialization error
communication with the sorter unit. is connected properly.
2-F-2
Malfunction in the sorter unit and periphery of the sorter unit.
1. Check that the power of the sorter unit is ON.
2. Check that the cable between the sorter unit and MCT board
Detected error during transmission of
12C2 SIO transmission error
message to the sorter unit.
is connected properly. 2-F-2
3. Replace the cable.
4. Replace the sorter unit.
Detected error during reception of
12C3 SIO reception error
message from the sorter unit.
MT-40
MT-40
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format

Waited for reception of message from the is connected properly.
12C4 SIO reception timeout sorter unit, but did not receive the waited 3. Replace the cable. 2-F-3
message within a certain period of time. 4. Replace the sorter unit.

If the problem still persists, it is due to causes which usually do
not occur such as software bug, communication timing error, etc.
Sorter unit detection

12D1 interlock error
The sorter unit detected interlock error. 1. Check that the sorter unit is connected properly. -
The sorter unit detected sensor error.

1. Using the maintenance utility, check the sensor by sensor
Sorter unit detection • Sensors which must turn ON did not
12D2 sensor error turn ON, and the downstream sensor
monitoring of the sorter unit. 2-F-1
2. Replace the sorter unit parts/board.
turned ON first in film conveyance.
The sorter unit detected motor error.

1. Using the maintenance utility, check the motor in individual
Sorter unit detection • After motor driving, safe speed reach
12D3 motor error interrupt was not generated even after
motor operations of the sorter unit. 2-F-1
a certain period of time.
The sorter unit detected solenoid error.
• A downstream sensor of the targeted
1. Using the maintenance utility, check the motor in individual
bin turned ON.
Sorter unit detection solenoid operations of the sorter unit.
12D4 solenoid error
• Before the sensor corresponding to the
2-F-1
targeted bin turned ON, there was only
one ON sensor, but this was not sensor
error.
1. Check that the sorter unit is connected properly.
The sorter unit detected film jam. 2. Check if the film is curled, etc.
Sorter unit detection film
12D5 jam
• After the sensor turned ON, it did not go 3. Using the maintenance utility, check the operations of the 2-F-1
OFF even after a certain period of time. motor/sensor/solenoid of the sorter unit.
The sorter unit determined that the

Sorter unit detection message command parameter is
12D6 command parameter inappropriate. Errors due to software bug, etc. which usually do not occur. 2-F-3
error As a result, the required command (see
MT-41
detailed information) cannot be executed.
MT-41
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The sorter unit received a message
Invalid sorter unit
command at an unacceptable timing. After initializing the sorter unit again, execute sorter film release
12D7 detection
As a result, the required command (see conveyance or utility command.
2-F-3
command
detailed information) cannot be executed.
While storing in the sorter unit, the storing

Not a problem because sorter conveyance was stopped
Sorter unit detection process was forcibly stopped.
12D8 storage stop As a result, film may remain in the sorter
intentionally due to film jam in the heat development unit. 2-G-1
unit.
1. Check if the changeover guide solenoid (SOLJ1) of the film
release unit is operating normally.
During sorter conveyance, attempted to 2. Check if the sorter unit is connected properly.
12E2 Sorter entrance film JAM convey to the sorter unit, but the sorter 3. Check the ST1 and motor of the sorter unit. 2-F-1
unit sensor 1 (ST1) did not turn ON. 4. Replace the sorter unit parts/board.
During sorter conveyance, because the
sorter unit exceeded the upper limit for
Over sorter number of High possibility of film jam in the sorter unit.
the number of films which can be
12E3 simultaneous
conveyed, the output destination of the
Check for defects of the sorter unit before and after this log. 2-G-1
conveyance films
film was switched to the upper cover of
the equipment.
During sorter conveyance, attempted
sorter conveyance even sorter
conveyance has been disabled by errors
Sorter conveyance Occurred due to influence of other sorter problems. Check for
12E4 preparations NG
of the sorter unit which just occurred, so
detects of the sorter unit before and after this log.
2-G-1
the output destination of the film was
switched to the upper cover of the
equipment.
During sorter conveyance, attempted to
convey to the sorter unit, but because Occurred due to influence of other sorter problems. Check for
12E5 Sorter conveyance stop errors had just occurred in the sorter unit, detects of the sorter unit before and after this log. 2-G-1
sorter conveyance was canceled. Only
when could not output to the film tray.
Occurred due to influence of other sorter problems. Check for
Sorter storage During sorter conveyance, requested detects of the sorter unit before and after this log.
12E6 command reception storage in the sorter unit, but the unit did
• SIO transmission error (12C2)
2-G-1
failure not accept the storage command.
• SIO reception error (12C3)
MT-42
MT-42
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
While attempting to initialize the sorter,
the sorter unit was found to have been Check the power supply state of the sorter unit.
Sorter unit initialization initialized unintentionally. Can be recovered by operating according to displayed
12E8 execution failure Occurs when the sorter unit power is instructions.
2-H-1
turned from ON to OFF during
maintenance utility.
Sorter motor speed Attempted to set the sorter motor speed, Check the sorter motor speed in the external file (sif_unt.fil)
12E9 setting error but was not in the settable range. installed.
2-F-4
During sorter idling or sorter conveyance,

the sorter unit was found to have been
initialized unintentionally. Can be recovered by operating according to displayed
12EF Sorter Power Off error
Occurs when the sorter unit power is instructions.
2-H-1
turned from ON to OFF during normal
operations.
Reception of prohibited Internal communication timing error. No correction is required if
2104 command
Internal I/F error
no abnormal phenomenon seen in particular.
3-C
Conveyor unit removal

unit jam error
Open the front cover and tray) for upper tray, and remove the
<Reference>
Upper tray:
did not detect SD1 CLOSE (film leading 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
221B Removal jam
edge detection). mechanism adjustments. SD1, MD1
2-A-4
Middle tray:
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
Conveyance jam
3. If the problem still persists, replace SNS/DRV board.
Lower tray:
Refer to "2.4.2 Troubleshooting Flow".
Conveyance jam

Open the front cover and tray) for upper tray, and remove the
did not detect SD2 CLOSE (film leading 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
221C Conveyor unit jam error
edge detection). mechanism adjustments. SD2, MD1 2-A-4
MT-43
MT-43
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Malfunction of the SJ1 sensor or MD2, ME1, MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ1 port of the SNS
board, or malfunction of the MD2, ME1, MG1 controller.
As the film reached the sensor (SJ1) 1. Using M-Utility, check sensor, motors, and perform mechanism
Density measurement
221D starting point error
earlier than normal sequence, density adjustments. 2-A-4
measurement was started.

2-A-1
error
(Currently retrying) 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Upper tray removal unit upper deadpoint in initialization, but SB11 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
(Currently retrying) Refer to “2.4.2 Troubleshooting Flow”.
2-A-2
error
Middle tray removal unit upper deadpoint in initialization, but SB21 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
2-A-3
error
Lower tray removal unit upper deadpoint in initialization, but SB31 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
MT-44
MT-44
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Attempted to set cleaning roller grip to HP board, or malfunction of the MD4 controller.
Cleaning roller grip HP (home position) in initialization, but SD5 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2237 detection error does not become OPEN. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4


Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3/SD4 port of the
Attempted to set size grip to HP (home SNS board, or malfunction of the MD3 controller.
Size grip HP detection position) in initialization, but SD3/SD4 do 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2239 error not become the specified values. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4

Positioning guide
from HP (home position) in initialization, 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2241 entrance HP deviation
but SD7 does not become OPEN. mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
detection error
Positioning guide exit 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
from HP (home position) in initialization,
but SD6 does not become OPEN. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4
error 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
(Currently retrying)
MT-45
MT-45
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Positioning guide
HP (home position) in initialization, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2245 entrance HP return
SD7 does not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
detection error

Positioning guide exit HP (home position) in initialization, but 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2247 HP return detection error SD6 does not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4

Attempted to move suction cup unit from
upper deadpoint to surface detection
Upper tray film surface 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
position in removal, but SB12 does not
2-A-1
become CLOSE.
Middle tray film surface
(Currently retrying) 3. If the problem still persists, replace the SNS/DRV board.
MT-46
MT-46
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Lower tray film surface
become CLOSE.


Attempted to push in suction cup unit
from surface detection position into
Upper tray film suction 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
bellows in removal, but SB12 does not
2-A-1
become OPEN.
Middle tray film suction

Lower tray film suction
MT-47
MT-47
09.20.2004 FM4447
006-259-04
Detailed
format
Upper tray removal unit normal SB13 CLOSE 1. Check if film has dropped.
2267 2-A-1
exit detection error (film leading edge detection). 2. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
(Currently retrying) mechanism adjustments.

Middle tray removal unit normal SB23 CLOSE 1. Check if film has dropped.
2269 exit detection error (film leading edge detection). 2. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-2

Or malfunction of SB31, SB32, SB33 sensors or MB31 motor.
Lower tray removal unit normal SB33 CLOSE 1. Check if film has dropped.
2271 exit detection error (film leading edge detection). 2. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform 2-A-3

Attempted to move from conveyance board, or malfunction of the MB11 controller.
Upper tray removal unit roller position to upper deadpoint in grip 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2279 HP detection error release, but mechanism adjustments. 2-A-1
SB11 did not become OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
MT-48
MT-48
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Attempted to move from conveyance 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2280 HP detection error
roller position to upper deadpoint in grip mechanism adjustments. 2-A-2
release, but SB21 did not become OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.


Attempted to move from conveyance 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
roller position to upper deadpoint in grip mechanism adjustments. 2-A-3
release, but SB31 did not become OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
Attempted to move cleaning roller from Malfunction of SD5 sensor or MD4 motor.
Cleaning roller grip Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD5 port of the SNS
HP to grip state, but SD5 did not become
board, or malfunction of the MD4 controller.
2-A-4
CLOSE.
Attempted to move cleaning roller from 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
grip state to HP, but SD5 did not become 3. If the problem still persists, replace the SNS/DRV board. 2-A-4
OPEN. Refer to “2.4.2 Troubleshooting Flow”.
Attempted to move to left size, but
20x25 cm size grip
SD3/SD4 did not become the specified 2-A-4
values.
Attempted to move to left size, but Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD3/SD4 port of the
26x36 cm size grip
SD3/SD4 did not become the specified SNS board, or malfunction of the MD3 controller. 2-A-4
values. 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Attempted to move to left size, but mechanism adjustments.
35x43 cm size grip 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
SD3/SD4 did not become the specified
2-A-4
values.
Attempted to move to left size, but
25x30 cm size grip
SD3/SD4 did not become the specified 2-A-4
values.
MT-49
MT-49
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Positioning guide Attempted to return the positioning guide
2289 entrance HP detection to HP(home position), but
2-A-4
error SD7 did not become CLOSE.

Attempted to return the positioning guide 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
Positioning guide exit
to HP(home position), but mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4
SD6 did not become CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
Attempted to perform the following items
using the M-Utility, but failed.
Be sure to perform homing first, or implement according to the M-
2297 Incorrect operations 1. Unit operations
Utility tree.
2-E-1
2. Individual grip operations
3. Positioning operations
Attempted to set the cleaning roller at HP board, or malfunction of the MD4 controller.
Cleaning roller grip (home position) in initialization, but SD5 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform
2298 detection error did not become CLOSE. mechanism adjustments. 2-A-4
Disconnection of the F12VP density measurement sensor power
fuse (F1).
Density measurement 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Disconnection of SNS board density
22AB sensor power supply
measurement sensor power fuse adjustments 2-A-5
fuse disconnection 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
MT-50
MT-50
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Disconnection of the F12VM density measurement sensor power
fuse (F2).
Density measurement 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism
Disconnection of SNS board density
22AC sensor power supply
measurement sensor power fuse adjustments 2-A-5
fuse disconnection 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
Disconnection of the FUSE sorter fuse (F1).

Sorter fuse
22B9 disconnection
Disconnection of MCT board sorter fuse adjustments 2-A-5

Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SNS board SD5 port or
MD4 controller.
Cleaning roller grip HP The cleaning roller must be at the HP, but 1. Using M-Utility, perform sensor check, motor check,
22BC absent error could not detect OPEN of SD5. mechanism adjustment. 2-A-4
2. If problems are detected, replace the sensor/motor.

Detected errors during transmission of
22C2 SIO transmission error
messages to the sorter unit (Rewrite).
Detected errors during reception of
22C3 SIO reception error
messages from the sorter unit (Rewrite).
MT-51
MT-51
09.20.2004 FM4447
006-259-04
Detailed
format
detects of the sorter unit before and after this log.
• SIO transmission error (12C2)
Sorter storing process The sorter unit was in the middle of
22E7 mismatch storing when initialized.
• SIO reception error (12C3) 2-H-1
• Sorter unit detection command parameter error (12D6)
• Invalid sorter unit detection command (12D7)

• Sorter conveyance stopped (12E5)

detects of the sorter unit before this log.
The storage response information from • SIO transmission error (12C2)
Failed to detect storage the sorter unit does not match the data of • SIO reception error (12C3)
22EA place bin number the equipment software.
2-G-2
• Sorter unit detection command parameter error (12D6)
• Invalid sorter unit detection command (12D7)
• Sorter conveyance stopped (12E5)
Register value reading

Failed in reading register values properly MCT board malfunction
2300 error when resetting
when resetting MCT side. Replace the MCT board.
3-C
equipment
Leading edge detection Did not receive leading edge detection
2310 communication notification which must be received in 3-C
reception error printing other than clean printing. Internal communication timing error. No correction is required if
Recording completion Did not receive recording completion no abnormal phenomenon seen in particular.
2311 notification reception notification which must be received in 3-C
error printing other than clean printing.
Density measurement Failed in software control sequence
2402 sequence error during density measurement.
MT-52
MT-52
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The density value measured by the density measurement
section is abnormal.
1. Check if the density measurement sections such as density
measurement LED, LED board, PDD board, connectors
between boards, density measurement sensor power fuse,
The density value measured by the etc. are normal.

Density measurement
2403 data error
density measurement section is 2. Check if the film sensitivity is normal. None
abnormal.
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SNS, MCT
boards.
4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SNS board.

Density measurement Failed in creating density measurement
2404 data write error AD data files.
1. Re-install the software. 4-A
No density measurement data as density measurement was not
No density No density measurement AD data in the
2405 measurement data printer.
performed. None
After performing density measurement, acquire AD data.
1. Check if the density pattern of the film is normal.
2. Check if the film conveyance position and speed are correct.
Failed to detect starting point of the
Density measurement Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SNS, MCT
density pattern from the number of
2406 starting point detection
effective AD data measured by the boards. None
error 3. Re-install the software.
density measurement section.
1. Check if the density pattern of the film is normal.

Failed to detect the ending point of the
Density measurement Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SNS, MCT
density pattern from the number of
2407 ending point detection
effective AD data measured by the boards. None
error 3. Re-install the software.
density measurement section.
MT-53
MT-53
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The number of effective AD data measured by the density
measurement section is less than the minimum number of
effective data (Note).
1. Check if the density of the film is normal.
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SNS, MCT

The number of effective density boards.
Insufficient number of
measurement data measured by the
2408 effective density
density measurement section is
3. Re-install the software. 4-B
measurement data 4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SNS board.
insufficient. 5. Replace the MCT board.
Note:
The number of effective data is 90% of the number of data
logically measured. The number of effective data required for 24-
steps pattern is above 6717, that for 17-steps pattern is above
4976, and that for QC pattern is above 1555.
Malfunction of scanner unit, PRN board, LDD board.
Check again by scanner check using the M-Utility, and perform
the following for malfunctioned parts.
Detected polygn rotation error during 1. Check the connectors between the scanner unit, LDD board, Times of
2510 Polygon error
scanner initialization diagnosis. etc. and PRN board, and replace as necessary. diagnosis
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
4. Replace the LDD board.

Panel control parameter Failed in reading the panel control
270B file read error parameter file during system start.
MT-54
MT-54
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The plate temperature measurement is abnormal.
Malfunction of plate temperature detection thermistor,
disconnection of the I/F cable between the thermistor and SNS
board.
1. Check that the connectors of the thermistor and SNS board
are set properly.

At system start, the initial measured value
2. Check the temperature of each thermistor using the M-Utility.
(average of four) of the temperature of a
Check the temperature of each thermistor visually.
Temperature heater was outside the -15°C to 150°C
2907 measurement error range approximately 5 seconds after the
If the temperature is a feasible value (about 0°C to 130°C). 9-A
If it is, the thermistor/SNS may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
setup of the TMS driver (temperature
measurement task).
5. Replace the I/F cable between the thermistor and SNS board.

MT-55
MT-55
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
detection thermistor,
disconnection of the cable between the heater and power supply
unit, reset of heater by the thermal

The temperature of a heater remained
cleared.
lower than the target temperature even
temperature control (detection interval:
hand.
continuously) and did not become the
2911 Low temperature error
appropriate temperature.
The thermistor/MCT may be faulty. Proceed to step 4. 9-A
If not hot, the heater/MCT board may be faulty. Proceed to
step 3.
Note:
conditions.
unit.

Film cooling section The film cooling section thermistor has Disconnection of the I/F cable between the SNS board and
thermistor, or malfunction of the thermistor or thermistor port of
2918 thermistor disconnection disconnected (Detected temperature
the SNS board.
9-C
error dropped below -20°C.).
1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable to the
thermistor, and connector of the SNS board are set correctly.
Sub-scanning section The sub-scanning section thermistor has 2. Replace the thermistor.
2919 thermistor disconnection disconnected (Detected temperature 3. Replace the SNS board. 9-C
error dropped below -20°C.). 4. Replace the cable between the thermistor and SNS board.
MT-56
MT-56
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
detection thermistor,
disconnection of the heater or I/F cable between the heater and
power supply unit, reset of heater by the thermal protector, or
malfunction of the heater port of the MCT board.
During temperature control, the connectors of the power supply unit are set correctly, and
temperature of a heater dropped below check that the thermal protector reset has been cleared.
the appropriate temperature range (within 2. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
target temperature ±1°C), and did not Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the
return to the appropriate temperature hand.
even after 5 minutes (detection interval If hot, the heater is OK.
Temperature control
2921 abnormally low error
600ms, measured 500 times The thermistor/MCT may be faulty. Proceed to step 4. 9-A
continuously). If not hot, the heater/MCT may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
Note: 4. Replace the MCT board.
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C 5. Replace the thermistor.
to 130°C) varies according to internal 6. Replace the SNS board.
conditions. 7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and power supply
unit.

MT-57
MT-57
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The plate temperature is abnormal.
Disconnection of the plate temperature detection thermistor,
disconnection of the heater of I/F cable between the heater and
power supply unit, reset of heater by the thermal protector, or
malfunction of the heater port of the MCT board.
connectors of the power supply unit are set correctly, and
check that the thermal protector reset has been cleared.
The temperature of all plates did not hand.
become the appropriate temperature If hot, the heater is OK.
(within target temperature ±1°C) even The thermistor/MCT may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
after 20 minutes from the start of If not hot, the heater/MCT may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
initialization. 3. Check the operations of the filter section cooling FAN using t
the M-Utility.
Note: The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
2930 Temperature timeout 1. Generally, as the temperature control The film cooling section and recording section thermistor/MCT 9-F
abnormally low error (2921) and heater board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
disconnection error (0961), etc. occur If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
before this error, the rate of Replace the connector and film section cooling FAN.
occurrence of this error is low. 4. Replace the heater.
2. The target temperature (approx. 90°C 5. Replace the MCT board.
to 130°C) varies according to internal 6. Replace the thermistor.
conditions. 7. Replace the SNS board.
8. Replace the film cooling section and recording section
thermistor.
unit.

MT-58
MT-58
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
During temperature control, the
temperature of a heater exceeded the
appropriate temperature range (within
target temperature ±1°C), and did not
return to the appropriate temperature The plate temperature is high.
even after 5 minutes (detection interval Malfunction of the MCT board, filter section cooling FAN, heater,
Temperature abnormally
2931 high error
600ms, measured 500 times temperature detection thermistor, heater, or heater port of the 9-A
continuously). MCT board.
Note: connector of the MCT board are set correctly.
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C 2. Check the operations of the filter section cooling FAN using
to 130°C) varies according to internal the M-Utility.
conditions. The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
During temperature control, the
temperature of a heater exceeded the
appropriate temperature range (within
target temperature ±1°C), and did not
return to the appropriate temperature
hand.
even after 10 minutes (detection interval
Temperature control If not hot, the heater is OK.
2932 abnormally high 2 error
The thermistor may be faulty. Proceed to step 6.
9-A
continuously).
If hot, the heater/MCT board may be faulty. Proceed to step
4.
Note:
conditions.
8. Replace the temperature detection thermistor.
The temperature of a heater remained 9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and power supply
higher than the target temperature even unit or I/F cable between the MCT board and power supply
after 5 minutes from the start of unit.
temperature control (detection interval: 10. Replace the power supply unit.
continuously) and did not become the
2941 Overheat 1 error
appropriate temperature.
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the MCT board. 9-A
Note:
conditions.
MT-59
MT-59
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the MCT board, filter section cooling FAN, heater,
temperature detection thermistor, heater, or heater port of the
MCT board.
connector of the MCT board are set correctly.

the M-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The temperature of a heater remained If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
higher than the target temperature even Replace the connector and filter section cooling FAN.
after 10 minutes from the start of 3. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
temperature control (detection interval: Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the
600ms, measured 1000 times hand.
continuously) and did not become the If not hot, the heater is OK.
2942 Overheat 1-2 error
appropriate temperature. The thermistor may be faulty. Proceed to step 6.
9-A
If hot, the heater/MCT board may be faulty. Proceed to step
Note: 4.
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C 4. Replace the heater.
to 130°C) varies according to internal 5. Replace the MCT board.
conditions. 6. Replace the thermistor.
8. Replace the temperature detection thermistor.
unit.

MT-60
MT-60
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
The plate temperature measurement is abnormal.
Malfunction of the plate temperature detection thermistor,
dsiconnection of the I/F cable with the SNS board.
1. Check that the connectors of the thermistor and SNS board
are set properly, and if the AD converter for temperature
measurement is affected by unidentifiable noise.

2. Check the temperature of each thermistor using the M-Utility.
Check the temperature of each thermistor visually.
Temperature Difference between two continuous Check that the measured value becomes the feasible value
2971 measurement noise temperature measurements (detection (about 0°C to 130°C) and if there is a difference of 2°C within 9-A
(Level 2) interval: 600 ms) > 2°C one second.
The thermistor/SNS may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
5. Replace the I/F cable between the thermistor and SNS board.

Failed in creating data file when acquiring
temperature data.
Temperature data Note:
2991 writing error 1. As "Acquiring temperature data" is a
1. Re-install the software. 9-D
function for design and evaluation
(DPX7 PC Tool only), this error does
not occur in actual user operations.
The target temperature is abnormal or the film compensation

information parameter is abnormal, or malfunction of the
barcode reader.
1. If the target temperature is abnormal, set the target
temperature using the M-Utility again.
Heat development The target temperature (individual data) 2. If the film compensation information parameter (SBC) is
29A0 control parameter value or film compensation information value abnormal, enter the correct barcode. 9-H
error obtained from the barcode are abnormal. 3. If the barcode reader has malfunctioned, replace the barcode
reader.

MT-61
MT-61
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
format
Error which essentially does not occur caused by software bug
3202 FPMC error (At start) FPMC motor drive failure
and incorrect control timing.
2-C-1
The targeted information could not be

Conveyance
found in the SIO transmission Errors due to software bug, control timing error, etc. which usually
32EB management table error
information. do not occur.
2-G-3
(Sorter information)
As a result, it became no-response.
Conveyance The targeted information could not be
management table error found in the heat development unit Errors due to software bug, control timing error, etc. which usually
33EC (Heat development unit conveyance information. do not occur.
2-G-1
information) As a result, it became no-response.
SIO transmission buffer The table storing SIO transmission Errors due to software bug, control timing error, etc. which usually
33ED over error information has become full. do not occur.
2-F-3
MT-62
MT-62
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
2.3.2 Formatter
■ DICOM
Detailed
Error code Log Significance Remedy Detailed information
code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
Failed in starting DICOM main

0001 0001 DPM Invoke fail
thread. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Save equipment individual data (requires

0001 0002 Invalid Dicom.dat Invalid Dicom.dat contents
Dicom.dat analysis).
Tag number with error
Failed in starting DICOM Save equipment individual data (requires

0001 0003 DPC Invoke fail
communication main thread. Netinf.prm analysis).
Port number
1:No file
0001 0004 Invalid Netinf.prm Invalid Netinf.prm contents
Netinf.prm analysis).
2:Non existing keyword
3:Non existing value

0001 FFFF Insufficient memory Insufficient virtual memory individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
MT-63
MT-63
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
■ Spooler
Detailed
code
Error occurred with creating Failed in creating thread. (Internal Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment Place of occurrence in source
0002 0001 thread.%n%1 error) individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Error occurred with posting Failed in sending messages. Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
Place of occurrence in source
0002 0002 message to thread.%n%1 (Internal error) individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Failed in securing memory. Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0002 0003 Insufficient memory.%n%1
(Internal error) individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Creation of PrintJob dispatch Failed in creating Print Job

Acquire error job information ( requires Place of occurrence in source
0002 0004 driver failed.%n%1 objects in recovering
xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis) code
unprocessed JOBs.
Acquire error job information ( requires Place of occurrence in source

0002 0005 PrintJob file read error.%n%1 Failed in reading PrintJob files.
xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis). code
0002 0007 Getting to item data failed.%n%1 Failed in acquiring PrintJob and Acquire error job information ( requires
FILM object data. xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis). code
Addition of spooler queue Failed in registering spooler Acquire error job information ( requires Place of occurrence in source
0002 0008 failed.%n%1 queue. xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis). code
Invalid film object, or insufficient Acquire error job information ( requires Place of occurrence in source
0002 0009 Film Object is invalid.%n%1
data xxx.job/xxx.flm analysis). code
Save equipment individual data (requires log

0002 000A Deleting raw file is failed.%n%1 Failed in deleting RAW data file. analysis), reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.

0002 000B Status is invalid.%n%1 Invalid status analysis), reboot system, and observe
code, status
conditions.
PrintJob dispatch pointer is Save equipment individual data (requires log

0002 000C invalid.%n%1 Failed in accessing PrintJob. analysis), reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Film Object Number is Save equipment individual data (requires log

0002 000D invalid.%n%1 Specified Film number is invalid. analysis), reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
PrintJob was not found for Could not find Print Job deleted Save equipment individual data (requires log
MT-64
0002 000E analysis), reboot system, and observe
MT-64
Delete.%n%1 when requesting queue deletion. code
conditions.
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
code
Specified change priority level is Save equipment individual data (requires log
0002 0010 Change priority is invalid.%n%1
invalid. analysis), reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.

0002 0013 PrintID is invalid.%n%1 Requested print ID is illegal. analysis), reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.

0002 0014 Moving File failed.%n%1 Failed in moving file. analysis), reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.

0002 0015 Invalid Case Happen.%n%1 Unexpected case occurred. analysis), reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Failed in opening and creating Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in source
2002 0012 File error.%n[%1]
files. analysis). code, file name
MT-65
MT-65
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
■ ImgPrc
Detailed
code
0003 0001 System call has failed. %n[%1] Error occurred due to system call. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.

0003 0002 Memory allocate failed.%n[%1] Failed in acquiring memory. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Failed in creating image Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0003 0003 Object create failed.%n[%1]
processing objects. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Data to be acquired was not Save equipment individual data (requires

2003 0004 Data not found.%n[%1] found in PrintJOB, FILM object, imginf.prm analysis), acquire error job information
code
nor image processing parameter. (requires xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Failed in opening and creating Save equipment individual data (requires

2003 0005 File error.%n[%1]
files. imginf.prm analysis), acquire error job information
code, file name
(requires xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Execution of image processing Save equipment individual data (requires

2003 0006 Image process error.%n[%1]
resulted in error. imginf.prm analysis), acquire error job information
code
(requires xxx.job/xxx.flm).
As the leading edge margin

Equipment individual data save
2003 0007 Invalid margin value.%n[%1] parameter is outside the range,
(PRT_MARGIN.txt) analysis is required.
Type, outside range value
use the default value.
MT-66
MT-66
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
■ Output
Detailed
code
Output Invoke failed when Create Failed in starting output main Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 1EB1 main thread. thread. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Output Invoke failed when Create Failed in starting output transfer Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 1EB2 transmit thread. thread. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Output Invoke failed when Create Failed in starting output Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 1EB3 mct16drv thread. mechanical driver thread. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Output Invoke failed when Create Failed in starting output scanner Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 1EB4 prn16drv thread. driver thread. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Failed in initializing mechanical Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0004 1EB5 Cannot Initialize device mct16drv.
driver. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.

0004 1EB6 Cannot Initialize device prn16drv. Failed in initializing scanner driver. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Cannot Set event to device Failed in registering events in Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 1EB7 mct16drv. mechanical driver. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Cannot Set event to device Failed in registering events in Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 1EB8 prn16drv. scanner driver. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Response Timeout in device Command response timeout from Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 1F15 mct16drv. mechanical driver. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Response Timeout in device Command response timeout from Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 1F16 prn16drv. scanner driver. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Position in state transition table

Matrix Action failed. Invalid state transition occurred Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
(line, col)
0004 1F79 Position=(%d, %d) internally individual data, reboot system, and observe
line : (0~6)
conditions.
col : (0~37)
MT-67
MT-67
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
code
Unexpected results code was Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0004 1F7A Invalid Parameter received.
returned. individual data, reboot system, and observe Results code
conditions.
Level 0 error occurred in Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0004 1F7C FMT Fatal error.
formatter. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.

0004 1F7D PRT Run Timeout. Start timeout of printer. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Timeout of command request for Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0004 1F7E Printer/Driver Request Timeout.
printer and driver. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Unmatch Print ID at Print-Request No print ID for print request which Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 1F7F and Print-Reqponse. matches print ID for print end individual data, reboot system, and observe None
response. conditions.
Error occurred with start printer
0004 1F80 PRT Run request failed.
command.
Install the printer from the M-UTL. None
Memory Information failed at Invalid state transition occurred Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 1F81 Transmit request. internally individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Could not acquire filename in Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 1F82 No File Name when file trans.
image transfer. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Failed in storing automatic Save equipment individual data (requires log

0004 1F83 Density Result File save error.
density results file. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Density correction calculation Save equipment individual data (requires log

0004 1F84 Density Calculate Process Failed.
results are abnormal. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Unable to continue operations Save equipment individual data (requires log

0004 1F85 Internal Error. Detail=%s
due to internal error. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Value set is outside specified Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E201 Invalid Value.
value (range). analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.

MT-68
Received unsupported
0004 E202
MT-68
Invalid Command. analysis), reboot system, and observe Command name
command.
conditions.
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
code
0004 E203 Print-ID is not Exist Specified print ID does not exist. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Error occurred in file transfer to Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E204 Send File Error.
printer. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Error occurred in file reception Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E205 Receive File Error.
from printer. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Error occurred in file transfer Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E206 File Transmit sequence Error.
sequence to printer. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Received other commands during Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E207 File Transmit Error.
file transfer to printer. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Could not secure required volume Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 E264 Cannot Allocate memory block.
(block) for transfer memory block. individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Communication error with
0004 E265 MCT16A Communication error.
MCT16A.
Replace the MCT board, or SNS board. None
Top detection fault in scanner self-

Failed in Top detect when diagnosis.
0004 E266 scanner diagnosis (Main unit software version A02
analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
or earlier)
Failed in Start detect when Starting point detection fault in Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E267 scanner diagnosis scanner self-diagnosis. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Failed in Top search power when Top search power setting in Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E268 scanner diagnosis scanner self-diagnosis. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.

0004 E269 File I/O Error in Setting file No setting file or could not read it. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.

0004 E26A File I/O Error in Image file No image file or could not read it. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
MT-69
MT-69
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
code
Cannot Receive temperature Did not receive temperature Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E26B Information. information after instructing start analysis), reboot system, and observe None
of sub-scanning. conditions.
Did not detect top interruption Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E26C Cannot Detect top interrupt. after instructing start of sub- analysis), reboot system, and observe None
scanning. conditions.
Did not detect record completion Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E26D Cannot Detect complete interrupt.
interruption after detecting top. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.

0004 E26E Image Transmit timeout Image transfer timeout. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Command Timeout when File Command timeout occurred in file Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E26F transmitting. transfer to printer. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Hardware Error occurred during Hardware error occurred during Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E270 record. recording. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Laser could not emit as Laser could not emit as Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E271 expected. expected. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Cannot attach print control Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0004 E2C8 Cannot execute mct16drv. driver(prnmng.sys) to mecha- individual data, reboot system, and observe None
driver (mct16drv.sys). conditions.
Cannot attach the print control Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 E2C9 Cannot execute prn16drv. driver (prnmng.sys) to scanner individual data, reboot system, and observe None
driver (prn16drv.sys). conditions.
Connection Failed in PRN16A Faulty connection of PRN16A Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 E2CA board. board individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.

0004 E2CB PRN16A Print buffer error. PRN16A print buffer error individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.

0004 E2CC PRN16A line memory error. PRN16A line memory error individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
MT-70
MT-70
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
code
Connection Failed in MCT16A Faulty connection of MCT16A Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0004 E2CD board. board individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
PRAM error for MCT16A Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0004 E2CE MCT16A DPRAM error
communication individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Insufficient memory under Insufficient mounted memory Check SDRAM capacity. Cannot output film
0004 E2CF 256MB. (less than 256MB) normally. However, M-Utility operations can be None
performed.
Insufficient mounted memory Check SDRAM capacity. Cannot output film

0004 E2D0 Insufficient memory under 64MB.
(less than 64 MB) normally. However, M-Utility operations other None
than recording can be performed.
0004 E2D1 Fuse disconnection. Disconnection of PRN16A fuse Check the fuse on PRN16A board. None

0004 E2D2 Communication Error. PRN16A communication error individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Failed in acquiring ISC log of Save equipment individual data (requires log
2004 0002 PRT Log Get Error.
PRT. analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Failed in Top detect when Failed in leading edge detection Save equipment individual data (requires log
2004 E266 scanner diagnosis when scanner diagnosis analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Failed in Start detect when Failed in start point detection Save equipment individual data (requires log
2004 E267 scanner diagnosis when scanner diagnosis analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Failed in Top search power when Failed in leading edge search Save equipment individual data (requires log
2004 E268 scanner diagnosis power setting when scanner analysis), reboot system, and observe None
diagnosis conditions.

2004 E271 Laser could not emit as expected Laser could not emit as expected analysis), reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Ejected remaining films number
3004 0001 of sheets = %d
Number of ejected films None Number of ejected films
MT-71
MT-71
11.30.2005 FM4690
006-259-05
■ GUI
Detailed
code
It is logic error generating at Save equipment individual data (requires log

Internal codes of current window
0005 0001 ActionForm.%n%1 [GUI] Theoretical error 1 analysis), reboot system, and observe
and newly displayed window
conditions.
It is logic error generating at Save equipment individual data (requires log

Internal codes of current window
0005 0002 TreatForm.%n%1 [GUI] Theoretical error 2 analysis), reboot system, and observe
and newly displayed window
conditions.
individual data, reboot system, and observe
conditions.
Memory insufficient [T2GUIFile.dll] Insufficient If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting
0005 0003 generating.%n%1 memory the system after checking the individual data, Function name of DLL with error
replace the memory or HDD.
In this case, log cannot be collected from the PC
for servicing.
individual data, reboot system, and observe
conditions.
If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting
0005 0004 Parameter error.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] Parameter error
the system after checking the individual data, Function name of DLL with error
replace the memory or HDD.
for servicing.
analysis), reboot system, and observe
conditions.
Function name of DLL with error
0005 0005 There is no file.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] File does not exist If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting
File name attempting to access
the system, replace the HDD.
for servicing.
analysis), reboot system, and observe
conditions.
[T2GUIFile.dll] Failed in accessing Function name of DLL with error
0005 0006 File access goes wrong.%n%1
file (reading, writing).
for servicing.
MT-72
MT-72
11.30.2005 FM4690
006-259-05
Detailed
code
Save equipment individual data (requires log or
configuration file analysis), reboot system, and
observe conditions. Function name of DLL with error
The contents of description unjust [T2GUIFile.dll] Invalid description If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting File name attempting to access
0005 0007 generating of a config file.%n%1 of configuration file the system despite no illegal description in the Row number, column with illegal
configuration files, replace the HDD. description
for servicing.
observe conditions.
Opening of a file goes Function name of DLL with error
0005 0008 wrong.%n%1
[T2GUIFile.dll] File open error If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting
for servicing.
observe conditions.
Deletion of a file goes Function name of DLL with error
0005 0009 wrong.%n%1
[T2GUIFile.dll] Deletion failure If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting
for servicing.
observe conditions.
0005 000A Copy failure of a file.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] Copy failure If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting
for servicing.
observe conditions.
0005 000B Move failure of a file.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] Move failure If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting
for servicing.
Reboot system, and observe conditions.
0005 000C Internal error.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] Internal error the system, replace the HDD. Function name of DLL with error
for servicing.
MT-73
MT-73
11.30.2005 FM4690
006-259-05
Detailed
code
[T2GUIFile.dll] Failed in securing
0005 000D Malloc error.%n%1
memory
the system, replace the HDD. Function name of DLL with error
for servicing.

Domain reservation [GUI] Failed in securing common If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting
0005 000E (OpenFileMapping) of a common memory space the system, replace the HDD. System error code
memory goes wrong.%n%1 (OpenFileMapping) In this case, log cannot be collected from the PC
for servicing.

Mapping (MapViewOfFile) of the If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting
[GUI] Failed in mapping common
0005 000F address of a common memory
memory address (MapViewOfFile)
the system, replace the HDD. System error code
goes wrong.%n%1 In this case, log cannot be collected from the PC
for servicing.
0005 0010 utlRequest ID Error.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] None Command ID

[GUI] Illegal printRequest
0005 0011 printRequest ID Error.%n%1
command ID
None Command ID
[GUI] Illegal
0005 0012 utlResponse ID Error.%n%1
utlResponsecommand ID
None Command ID

The start of Beep cannot be [T2GUIBeep.ocx] Can not start
0005 0013 performed. Beep
the system, replace the HDD. None
for servicing.

The value of frequency is [T2GUIBeep.ocx] Abnormal configuration file analysis). After correcting
0005 0014 unusual. frequency value configuration file, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.

The value of time to sound is [T2GUIBeep.ocx] Abnormal beep configuration file analysis). After correcting
0005 0015 unusual. time value configuration file, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
MT-74
MT-74
11.30.2005 FM4690
006-259-05
Detailed
code
analysis of logs, various configuration files, and
resource files). Reboot system, and observe
A character sequence is out of [ResourceControl.ocx] Specified conditions.
0005 0016 range.%n%1 character string ID is illegal If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting Character string ID
for servicing.
A character was not found in the [ResourceControl.ocx] Could not conditions.
0005 0017 resource.%n%1 find character string in resource If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting Character string ID
for servicing.
A picture sequence is out of [ResourceControl.ocx] Specified conditions.
0005 0018 range.%n%1 image ID is illegal If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting Image ID
for servicing.
A picture was not found in the [ResourceControl.ocx] Could not conditions.
0005 0019 resource.%n%1 find image in resource If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting Image ID
for servicing.
0005 001A infoNotify ID Error.%n%1 [GUI] Illegal infoNotify ID None Command ID
conditions. Error code, function name
0005 001B Program Error.%n%1 Execution error
If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting detecting error, error massage
for servicing.
Specified measured length is
0006 0001 -
illegal.
Re-enter the measured length, and re-execute. None
MT-75
MT-75
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
code
[GUI]Could not find specified job
2005 2001 job ID Error.%n%1 when notified status was other None JobID, status
than unprocessed (registered)
[GUI]Could not find job specified

2005 2002 Delete Job Error.%n%1
to be deleted
None JobID
[GUI]Cleared information on Film tray number, number of films

2005 2003 Film Count Clear.%n%1
number of films used
None
when cleared
The specified measurement Specified measuring length is Re-enter the measuring length, and execute
2006 2F01 length is inaccurate. illegal again.
None
Normal range is -118 to 120

Re-enter the start point pixels, and execute
2006 2F02 Starting Position Length Error. Input number of pixels is illegal
again.
However the inputtable range is
-120 to 120
2006 2F03 Make Uniformity S1 Table Failed. Failed in creating Uniformity S1 Check that E:\Param\UniSm.dat exists. None
table
Failed in initializing Uniformity S1
2006 2F04 Clear Uniformity S1 Table Failed.
table
Execute again. None
2006 2F05 Make Uniformity S2 Table Failed. Failed in creating Uniformity S2 Check that E:\Param\UniSm.dat exists. None
table
Failed in initializing Uniformity S2
2006 2F06 Clear Uniformity S2 Table Failed.
table
Execute again. None
Film Count Clear.

Information on number of films Tray number,
3005 3001 [Tray Number ] S1
used was cleared. None
number of films
[Film number of sheets] S2
Reprint.
[UserID] 1111
User ID,
[Date] 2003/06/23 20:55
date, print ID,
3005 3002 [PrintID] 2121 Reprinted. None
AE title,
[AETitle] AE TITLE
number of films, number of prints
[FilmNum] 1
[PrintNum] 1
Login it was done.

User ID function
3005 3003 [UserID] 1111 Logged in. None
(reprint, QC)
[Function] Reprint
MT-76
MT-76
09.20.2004 FM4447
006-259-04
■ JobMake
Detailed
code
Error occurred with creating Failed in creating thread (internal Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0007 0001 thread.%n%1 error). individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Error occurred with posting Failed in sending message Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0007 0002 message to thread.%n%1 (internal error). individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Failed in securing memory Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0007 0003 Insufficient memory.%n%1
(internal error). individual data, reboot system, and observe
code, request size
conditions.
Error occured with file Failed in opening and creating Save equipment individual data (requires log
0007 000A access.%n%1 files. analysis), reboot system, and observe
code, file name
conditions.

0007 000B Status is invalid.%n%1 Invalid status analysis), reboot system, and observe
code, status
conditions.
MT-77
MT-77
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
■ Main
Detailed
code
Failed in securing area for Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0008 0001 Shared memory not allocated.
communication processing. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
The mounting memory does not Mounted memory does not

0008 0002 fulfill the operation conditions of a satisfy operating conditions of the Check SDRAM capacity.
code
system. system.
The inaccurate parameter was Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0008 0003 specified. Invalid parameter was specified. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'PortOpen' method Failed in DICOM control Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0004 failed.%n%1 execution start request. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'PortClose' method Failed in communication end Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0005 failed.%n%1 request to DICOM control. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.

0008 0006 Calling GUI method failed.%n%1 Failed in calling GUI method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'OnEndPrint' method Failed in JOB completion Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0007 failed.%n%1 communication processing. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'AnsOnPrintRequest' Failed in calling the print request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0008 method failed.%n%1 method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'Initialize' method Failed in image initializing Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0009 failed.%n%1 request. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'ExeImageProcess' Failed in calling image processing Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment Place of occurrence in source
0008 000A method failed.%n%1 request method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'ReLoadLut' method Failed in re-reading instruction of Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 000B failed.%n%1 concentration correction table. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
MT-78
MT-78
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
code
Calling 'MakeTestPattern' method Failed in calling JOB generation Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 000C failed.%n%1 request (SMPTE/execution) individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
method. conditions.
Calling 'MakeScanerPattern' Failed in calling JOB generation Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 000D method failed.%n%1 request (scanner diagnosis) individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
method. conditions.
Calling 'MakeBetaPattern' Failed in calling JOB generation Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 000E method failed.%n%1 request (flat pattern) method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'MakeCleaning' method Failed in calling JOB generation Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 000F failed.%n%1 request (cleaning) method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'AnsSetPrintPriority' Failed in JOB completion Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0010 method failed.%n%1 notification. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'RunRequest' method Failed in initializing output control Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment Place of occurrence in source
0008 0011 failed.%n%1 unit. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'UTLRequest' method Failed in calling utility request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0012 failed.%n%1 method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'PowerSaveRequest' Failed in calling energy-saving Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0013 method failed.%n%1 instruction method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'PrintRequest' method Failed in calling print request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
code
conditions.
Calling 'TransmitRequest' method Failed in calling transfer request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
code
conditions.
Calling 'PowerOffRequest' Failed in calling output control Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0016 method failed.%n%1 end instruction method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'NextPrintAvailable' Failed in calling removal Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0017 method failed.%n%1 permission notification method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
MT-79
MT-79
09.20.2004 FM4447
006-259-04
Detailed
code
Calling 'EndPrc' method Failed in calling end request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
code
conditions.
Calling PC-UTL method Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0008 0019 failed.%n%1 Failed in calling PC-Utility method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'SetImgPrcEndStatus' Failed in calling image processing Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 001A method failed.%n%1 completion setting request individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
method. conditions.
Calling 'GetPickupPrcJOB' Failed in calling removal process Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 001B method failed.%n%1 JOB acquisition request method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'GetImgPrcJOB' method Failed in calling image processing Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment Place of occurrence in source
0008 001C failed.%n%1 JOB acquisition request method. individual data, reboot system, and observe code
conditions.
Calling 'GetRawDataJOB' method Failed in calling RAW data Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 001D failed.%n%1 transfer JOB acquisition request individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
method. conditions.
Calling 'trayNotify' method Failed in calling tray information Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 001E failed.%n%1 renewal notification method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'SetFilmPrintEndStatus' Failed in calling output processing Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment Place of occurrence in source
0008 001F method failed.%n%1 completion notification method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Failed in spooler control Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0008 0020 Calling 'Run' method failed.%n%1
execution start request. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'SetRawDataEndStatus' Failed in spooler control transfer Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0021 method failed.%n%1 completion notification. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'DoSpool' method Failed in calling JOB spool Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0022 failed.%n%1 request method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'RestorPrintJOB' method Failed in calling unprocessed Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0023 failed.%n%1 JOB recovery request method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
MT-80
MT-80
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
code
Calling 'SetJOBPriority' method Failed in calling JOB priority order Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment Place of occurrence in source
0008 0024 failed.%n%1 change request method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'DeleteJOB' method Failed in calling deletion request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0025 failed.%n%1 deletion request method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'initializeRequest' method Failed in calling initialization Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0026 failed.%n%1 method of output control individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'AnsDeleteQueue' method Failed in calling Queue deletion Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0027 failed.%n%1 request results notification individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
method conditions.
Calling 'OnStartPrint' method Failed in calling JOB start Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0028 failed.%n%1 notification method individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'AnsOnPrintPrepare' Failed in calling preprint response Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment Place of occurrence in source
0008 0029 method failed. notification method individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'AnsPrinterInfo' method Failed in calling printer Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 002A failed.%n%1 information request response individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
method conditions.
Calling 'SetImgRcvEndStatus' Failed in calling image reception Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 002B method failed.%n%1 completion notification method individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'MakeSystemInfo' method Failed in calling system Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 002C failed.%n%1 information printing method individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.

0008 002D Utility-Mode is unexpected.%n%1 Request in unexpected mode individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'ReLoadUniformityTbl' Failed in calling uniformity table re- Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment Place of occurrence in source
0008 002E method failed.%n%1 reading method individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'SetCalibMode' method Failed in calling printer image Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 002F failed.%n%1 correction mode setting method individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
MT-81
MT-81
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
Detailed
code
Calling 'TrayStatusChanged' Failed in calling tray state change Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment Place of occurrence in source
0008 0030 method failed.%n%1 notification method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'DeleteAllJOB' method Failed in calling delete all JOB Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0031 failed.%n%1 request method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'JobCheckRequest' Failed in reprint verification Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 0038 method failed. request. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.

0008 0039 Calling 'DoReprint' method failed. Failed in reprint spool request. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'MakeQCPattern' method Failed in calling QC test pattern Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 003A failed. output method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Calling 'PrintStatusChange' Failed in calling printer state Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0008 003B mehtod failed. change notification method. individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Number of films in each tray after

3008 0032 The film was set. Film has been loaded. None
loading
The number of films was Number of films has been Number of films in each tray after
3008 0033 changed. changed.
None
changing
3008 0034 The tray was opened. Tray has been opened. None Tray number which was opened.
3008 0035 The tray was closed. Tray has been closed. None Tray number which was closed.
Solenoid number which was
3008 0036 The solenoid was ON. Solenoid has been turned ON. None
turned ON.
3008 0037 The solenoid was OFF. Solenoid has been turned OFF. None None
MT-82
MT-82
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
■ Decode
Detailed
code
Error occurred with creating Failed in starting decode main Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0009 0001 thread.%n[%1] threading individual data, reboot system, and observe None
conditions.
Error occurred with posting Failed in sending messages Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment
0009 0002 message to thread.%n[%1] (internal error) individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Failed in securing memory Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment

0009 0003 Insufficient memory.%n[%1]
(internal error) individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.

0009 0004 Status is invalid.%n[%1] Own status is illegal individual data, reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Error occured with file Failed in opening and creating Save equipment individual data (requires log
0009 0005 access.%n[%1] files analysis), reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Error occured with create Save equipment individual data (requires log
0009 0006 object.%n[%1] Failed in creating COM objects analysis), reboot system, and observe
code
conditions.
Invalid barcode from film Detected illegal barcodes (film
2009 000B pack.%n[%1] pack)
None Detected barcode
2009 000C Invalid barcode from GUI.%n[%1] Detected illegal barcodes (GUI None Detected barcode
input)
Loaded with film pack with base

2009 0010 BaseColor unmatched.%n[%1]
whose color differs from setting. None Tray number
Can't read barcode from film Failed in reading barcodes, but

3009 000D pack, but reuse previous using results of previous reading None Previous read barcode
barcode.%n[%1] because one-time error
OK barcode from film Detected normal barcode (film
3009 000E pack.%n[%1] pack)
Detected normal barcode (GUI

3009 000F OK barcode from GUI.%n[%1]
input)
MT-83
MT-83
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
■ PCUTL
Detailed
code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, start the

200A 0001 FTPTransfer failed.%n%1 Failed in FTP data transfer
equipment, and observe conditions. Name of file which failed transfer
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check

200A 0002 FTPOpen failed.%n%1 FTP port does not open the path and user of the FTP directory of the PC None
for servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file

200A 0003 File not found.%n%1
but did not exist Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed search
MT-84
MT-84
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-02
■ Satelite
Detailed
code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, start the

200B 0001 FTPTransfer failed.%n%1 Failed in FTP data transfer
equipment, and observe conditions. Name of file which failed transfer
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check

200B 0002 FTPOpen failed.%n%1 FTP port does not open the path and user of the FTP directory of the PC None
for servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file

200B 0003 File not found.%n%1
but did not exist Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed search
MT-85
MT-85
MT-86
2.4 Troubleshooting Flow
2.4.1 How to Read the Troubleshooting Flow

Display Example 1
In the Troubleshooting Flow, problems are corrected while analyzing the causes. For
some states, parts may need to be disassembled, replaced, or adjusted.
The following describes how to read the Troubleshooting Flow.
Output voltage check (Voltage value)
To check the specified voltage value,
measure the output voltage using the tester.
MT-90
Troubleshooting Flow
Check error generation state.

Check error details at [Display Error Log] of M-Utility.
Turn OFF power supply. Insert shutter.
Remove covers.
Turn ON power supply and start M-Utility during initialization.
Are +5V, +24V output normally from power supply unit?

“6.4 Checking the DC Voltage”
+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
Measure the voltage again at the check pin in front of the power supply unit. Is the voltage
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No
Replace power supply unit. 10 2
Turn OFF power supply.

Are the connectors of the power supply unit and those of each board connected properly?
Or are connector pins damaged?
+5V : Power supply unit CN4/ SNS board CN2
+24V: Power supply unit CN12/ DRV board CN1
Yes No
Reconnect or repair.
Replace the corresponding board.

+5V : SNS board 10 16
+24V: DRV board 10 6
Is MD4 operating normally?

Check at [Check Mechanism/Grip] of M-Utility.
Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of cleaning roller grip mechanism normal?
Rotate MD4 gear with hand, and check that cleaning roller moves up and down smoothly.
Yes No
After checking the attached state, and for presence of damages, wear, and
foreign particles on the drive gears and grip gears, be sure to replace or adjust
the required parts.
Is the D cut side of the shaft of the one-way gear assembly attached facing up?
“REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT Volume, 5.4 Cleaning Roller Grip Release Motor (MD4)”
Yes No
Re-attach
Are CN9 connector of DRV board and relay connector MD4 connected properly?
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C10.EPS
006-259-02
Suspected cause
Check the state of the equipment according to the description given.
If “YES”, proceed according to the arrow and perform the check in the next step.
If “No”, implement the correction below. FP7T0228.EPS
006-259-02
MT-87
Display Example 2
In case disassembly, replacement, or adjustment is required in the Troubleshooting
Flow, symbols indicating where to refer in the SP Volume and MC Volume are shown.
The following describes where to refer.
<REMARKS>
REF Numbers enclosed indicate that details are provided in the MC Volume.
Where to refer (SP Volume/MC Volume) (If REF No. is enclosed)

Indicates that parts corresponding to “ 05D 4 ” in the SP Volume and that details are
provided in “ 05D 4 Cleaning Roller Grip Release Motor (MD4)” of the MC Volume.
MT-91
A B
Is MD4 normal?
“6.5 Inspecting I/O Parts”
Yes No
Replace MD4. 05D 4
Replace in the following order.

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
Is SD5 operating normally?

Check at [Check Mechanism/Sensor Monitor] of M-Utility.
Yes No
Is attaching state of SD5 normal?
Yes No
Re-attach SD5.
Are CN7 connector of SNS board, relay connector CND1, and connector of sensor
connected properly? Or are connector pins damaged?
Yes No
Is SD5 normal?
Replace with a same sensor and check.
“6.6 Electrical Parts Interchangeability”
Yes No
Replace SD5. 05D 18
Replace SNS board. 10 16
Does error occur again?

Yes No
End
Check again. FP7T0D10.EPS
006-259-02
Where to refer (SP Volume) (If REF No. is not enclosed)

Indicates that parts corresponding to “ 05D 18 ” in the SP Volume
are shown.
FP7T0229.EPS
006-259-02
MT-88
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
MT-89
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
MT-90
2.4.2 Troubleshooting Flow
021A Cleaning roller grip detection error (M-Utility function)
The cleaning roller attempted to move from the HP (home position) to the grip state,
but SD5 did not detect CLOSE.
2282 Cleaning roller grip detection error
Attempted to move cleaning roller from HP (home position) to grip state, but SD5 did
not become CLOSE.
2283 Cleaning roller grip HP detection error
Attempted to move cleaning roller from grip state to HP (home position), but SD5 did
not become OPEN.
22BC Cleaning roller grip HP absent error
The cleaning roller must be at the HP (home position), but could not detect OPEN of
SD5.
■ Error Related I/O Layout
SD5
MD4
FP7T0A10.EPS
006-259-02
MT-91
■ Error Related System Block Diagram

CN9 MD4
1 1
TP1 2 4
CN12 CN1 F6 Interlock circuit
1 1 +24V 3 2
2 2 4 5 MD4
3 3 5 3
SNS board Driver 6 6
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND1
1 1 +5V 13 +5V 7 1
14 Signal 8 2
To software control
15 GND 9 3 SD5
7-segment LED
FP7T0B10.EPS
■ SNS Board 7-segment LED
D14 D15
MD4
SD5
D20 FP7T0F10.EPS
006-259-02
MT-92
■ Troubleshooting Flow

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
the required parts.
Yes No
Re-attach
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C10.EPS
006-259-02
MT-93
A B
Is MD4 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD4. 05D 4

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SD5.
Yes No
Is SD5 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD5. 05D 18

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-94
0226 Upper tray removal unit HP deviation detection error (Retryover)
Attempted to deviate the removal arm from upper deadpoint in initialization, but SB11
does not become CLOSE.
0228 Upper tray removal unit HP return detection error (Retryover)
Attempted to return the removal arm from upper deadpoint in initialization, but SB11
does not become OPEN.
2225 Upper tray removal unit HP deviation detection error (Currently retrying)
2227 Upper tray removal unit HP return detection error (Currently retrying)
MB11
SB11
FP7T0A07.EPS
006-259-02
MT-95

CN6 MB11
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB11
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN4 CNB1
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB11
7-segment LED
FP7T0B07.EPS
D14 D15
MB11
SB11
D20 FP7T0F07.EPS
006-259-02
MT-96

Turn OFF power supply. Insert shutter and pull out film tray.
NOTE: If the suction cup arm is inside the shutter insertion path, release the tray lock, and insert the shutter
while pulling out the film tray.
Remove film, and push tray back into its original position.
Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

Is MB11 operating normally?

Check at [Check Mechanism/Film Removing/Unit Operation] of M-Utility.
Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of removal unit normal?
Rotate removal drive gear with hand, and check that suction cup arm moves smoothly.
NOTE: Execute all stroke when checking up/down movements of removal unit.
Yes No
Check the following items, replace and adjust the required parts.
• Are there foreign particles on drive unit?
• Attaching state, damage, wear of drive gear
• Damage of slider rail of two edges of suction arm
Are CN6 connector of DRV board and relay connector MB11 connected properly?
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C07.EPS
006-259-02
MT-97
A B
Is MB11 normal?
Yes No
Replace MB11. 04A 16

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
Is SB11 operating normally?

Yes No
Is attaching state of SB11 normal?
Yes No
Re-attach SB11.
Are CN4 connector of SNS board, relay connector CNB1, and connector of sensor
Yes No
Is SB11 normal?
Yes No
Replace SB11. 04B 21

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-98
0230 Middle tray removal unit HP deviation detection error (Retryover)
0232 Middle tray removal unit HP return detection error (Retryover)
2229 Middle tray removal unit HP deviation detection error (Currently retrying)
2231 Middle tray removal unit HP return detection error (Currently retrying)
MB21
SB21
FP7T0A08.EPS
006-259-02
MT-99

CN5 MB21
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB21
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN5 CNB2
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB21
7-segment LED
FP7T0B08.EPS
D14 D15
MB21
SB21
D20 FP7T0F08.EPS
006-259-02
MT-100

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C08.EPS
006-259-02
MT-101
A B
Is MB21 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB21.
Yes No
Is SB21 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-102
0234 Lower tray removal unit HP deviation detection error (Retryover)
0236 Lower tray removal unit HP return detection error (Retryover)
2233 Lower tray removal unit HP deviation detection error (Currently retrying)
2235 Lower tray removal unit HP return detection error (Currently retrying)
MB31
SB31
FP7T0A09.EPS
006-259-02
MT-103

CN4 MB31
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB31
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN6 CNB3
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB31
7-segment LED
FP7T0B09.EPS
D14 D15
MB31
SB31
D20 FP7T0F09.EPS
006-259-02
MT-104

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C09.EPS
006-259-02
MT-105
A B
Is MB31 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB31.
Yes No
Is SB31 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-106
0238 Cleaning roller grip HP detection error (Retryover)
Attempted to set cleaning roller grip to HP (home position) in initialization, but SD5
0299 Cleaning roller grip detection error (Retryover)
Attempted to set the cleaning roller at HP (home position) in initialization, but SD5 did
not become CLOSE.
2237 Cleaning roller grip HP detection error (Currently retrying)
Attempted to set cleaning roller grip to HP (home position) in initialization, but SD5
2298 Cleaning roller grip detection error (Currently retrying)
Attempted to set the cleaning roller at HP (home position) in initialization, but SD5 did
not become CLOSE.
SD5
MD4
FP7T0A10.EPS
006-259-02
MT-107

CN9 MD4
1 1
TP1 2 4
1 1 +24V 3 2
2 2 4 5 MD4
3 3 5 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND1
1 1 +5V 13 +5V 7 1
14 Signal 8 2
To software control
15 GND 9 3 SD5
7-segment LED
FP7T0B10.EPS
D14 D15
MD4
SD5
D20 FP7T0F10.EPS
006-259-02
MT-108

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
the required parts.
Yes No
Re-attach
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C10.EPS
006-259-02
MT-109
A B
Is MD4 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD4. 05D 4

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SD5.
Yes No
Is SD5 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD5. 05D 18

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-110
0240 Size grip HP detection error (Retryover)
Attempted to set size grip to HP (home position) in initialization, but SD3/SD4 do not
become the specified values.
2239 Size grip HP detection error (Currently retrying)
Attempted to set size grip to HP (home position) in initialization, but SD3/SD4 do not
become the specified values.
MD3
SD4
SD3
FP7T0A11.EPS
006-259-02
MT-111

CN8 CND4 MD3
4 7 1
TP1 10 8 4
1 1 +24V 5 9 2
2 2 11 10 5 MD3
3 3 6 11 3
SNS board Driver 12 12 6
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND2
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 1 1
8 Signal 2 2
To software control
9 GND 3 3 SD3
7-segment LED
CN7 CND2
10 +5V 4 1
11 Signal 5 2
To software control
12 GND 6 3 SD4
7-segment LED
FP7T0B11.EPS
D14 D15
MD3
SD4
SD3
D20 FP7T0F11.EPS
006-259-02
MT-112

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

Is MD3 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Grip] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of upper conveyor unit grip mechanism normal?
Rotate MD3 gear with hand, and check that grip rollers move smoothly.
Yes No
the required parts.
Are CN8 connector of DRV board, and CND4 and MD3 relay connectors connected
properly? Or are connector pins damaged?
Yes No
Is MD3 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD3. 05D 22

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C11.EPS
006-259-02
MT-113
Is SD3/SD4 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Sensor Monitor] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is attaching state of SD3/SD4 normal?
Yes No
Re-attach SD3/SD4.
Yes No
Is SD3/SD4 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD3/SD4. 05D 18

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-114
0242 Positioning guide entrance HP deviation detection error (Retryover)
Attempted to deviate positioning guide from HP (home position) in initialization, but

SD7 does not become OPEN.
0246 Positioning guide entrance HP return detection error (Retryover)
Attempted to return positioning guide to HP (home position) in initialization, but SD7

2241 Positioning guide entrance HP deviation detection error (Currently retrying)

2245 Positioning guide entrance HP return detection error (Currently retrying)

MD6
SD7
FP7T0A12.EPS
006-259-02
MT-115

CN9 CND3 MD6
13 7 1
TP1 14 8 4
1 1 +24V 15 9 2
2 2 16 10 5 MD6
3 3 17 11 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND2
1 1 +5V 19 +5V 7 1
20 Signal 8 2
To software control
21 GND 9 3 SD7
7-segment LED
FP7T0B12.EPS
D14 D15
MD6
SD7
D20 FP7T0F12.EPS
006-259-02
MT-116

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

Is MD6 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Positioning Film] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Turn OFF power supply and remove film positioning assembly (lower).
Is drive system mechanism of film positioning mechanism normal?
Rotate MD6 gear with hand, and check that film positioning guides move smoothly.
Yes No
After checking the attached state, and for presence of damages, wear, and foreign
particles on the drive gears and film positioning guide, be sure to replace or adjust
the required parts.
Yes No
Is MD6 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD6. 05B 2

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C12.EPS
006-259-02
MT-117
Is SD7 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Sensor Monitor] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SD7.
Yes No
Is SD7 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD7. 05B 7

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-118
0244 Positioning guide exit HP deviation detection error (Retryover)

0248 Positioning guide exit HP return detection error (Retryover)

2243 Positioning guide exit HP deviation detection error (Currently retrying)

2247 Positioning guide exit HP return detection error (Currently retrying)

MD5
SD6
FP7T0A13.EPS
006-259-02
MT-119

CN9 CND3 MD5
7 1 1
TP1 8 2 4
1 1 +24V 9 3 2
2 2 10 4 5 MD5
3 3 11 5 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND1
1 1 +5V 16 +5V 10 1
17 Signal 11 2
To software control
18 GND 12 3 SD6
7-segment LED
FP7T0B13.EPS
D14 D15
SD6 MD5
D20 FP7T0F13.EPS
006-259-02
MT-120

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Turn OFF power supply and remove film positioning assembly (upper).
Yes No
the required parts.
Yes No
Is MD5 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD5. 05B 6

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C13.EPS
006-259-02
MT-121

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SD6.
Yes No
Is SD6 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD6. 05B 7

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-122
0250 Upper tray film surface detection error (Retryover)
Attempted to move suction cup unit from upper deadpoint to surface detection position
in removal, but SB12 does not become CLOSE.
0256 Upper tray film suction detection error (Retryover)
Attempted to push in suction cup unit from surface detection position into bellows in
removal, but SB12 does not become OPEN.
2249 Upper tray film surface detection error (Currently retrying)
2255 Upper tray film suction detection error (Currently retrying)
MB11
SB12
FP7T0A14.EPS
006-259-02
MT-123

CN6 MB11
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB11
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN4 CNB1
1 1 +5V 10 +5V 10 1
11 Signal 11 2
To software control
12 GND 12 3 SB12
7-segment LED
FP7T0B14.EPS
D14 D15
MB11
SB12
D20 FP7T0F14.EPS
006-259-02
MT-124

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C14.EPS
006-259-02
MT-125
A B
Is MB11 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB12
Yes No
Is SB12 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-126
0252 Middle tray film surface detection error (Retryover)
0258 Middle tray film suction detection error (Retryover)
2251 Middle tray film surface detection error (Currently retrying)
2257 Middle tray film suction detection error (Currently retrying)
MB21
SB22
FP7T0A15.EPS
006-259-02
MT-127

CN5 MB21
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB21
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN5 CNB2
1 1 +5V 10 +5V 10 1
11 Signal 11 2
To software control
12 GND 12 3 SB22
7-segment LED
FP7T0B15.EPS
D14 D15
MB21
SB22
D20 FP7T0F15.EPS
006-259-02
MT-128

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C15.EPS
006-259-02
MT-129
A B
Is MB21 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB22.
Yes No
Is SB22 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-130
0254 Lower tray film surface detection error (Retryover)
0260 Lower tray film suction detection error (Retryover)
2253 Lower tray film surface detection error (Currently retrying)
2259 Lower tray film suction detection error (Currently retrying)
MB31
SB32
FP7T0A16.EPS
006-259-02
MT-131

CN4 MB31
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB31
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN6 CNB3
1 1 +5V 10 +5V 10 1
11 Signal 11 2
To software control
12 GND 12 3 SB32
7-segment LED
FP7T0B16.EPS
D14 D15
MB31
SB32
D20 FP7T0F16.EPS
006-259-02
MT-132

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C16.EPS
006-259-02
MT-133
A B
Is MB31 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB32.
Yes No
Is SB32 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-134
0262 Upper tray removal unit HP rise detection error (Retryover)
Attempted to move from film suction to upper deadpoint in removal, but SB11 does
not become CLOSE.
2279 Upper tray removal unit HP detection error
Attempted to move from conveyance roller position to upper deadpoint in grip release,
but SB11 did not become OPEN.
MB11
SB11
FP7T0A07.EPS
006-259-02
MT-135

CN6 MB11
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB11
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN4 CNB1
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB11
7-segment LED
FP7T0B07.EPS
D14 D15
MB11
SB11
D20 FP7T0F07.EPS
006-259-02
MT-136

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C07.EPS
006-259-02
MT-137
A B
Is MB11 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB11.
Yes No
Is SB11 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-138
0264 Middle tray removal unit HP rise detection error (Retryover)
not become CLOSE.
2280 Middle tray removal unit HP detection error
MB21
SB21
FP7T0A08.EPS
006-259-02
MT-139

CN5 MB21
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB21
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN5 CNB2
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB21
7-segment LED
FP7T0B08.EPS
D14 D15
MB21
SB21
D20 FP7T0F08.EPS
006-259-02
MT-140

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C08.EPS
006-259-02
MT-141
A B
Is MB21 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB21.
Yes No
Is SB21 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-142
0266 Lower tray removal unit HP rise detection error (Retryover)
not become CLOSE.
2281 Lower tray removal unit HP detection error
MB31
SB31
FP7T0A09.EPS
006-259-02
MT-143

CN4 MB31
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB31
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN6 CNB3
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB31
7-segment LED
FP7T0B09.EPS
D14 D15
MB31
SB31
D20 FP7T0F09.EPS
006-259-02
MT-144

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
A B
FP7T0C09.EPS
006-259-02
MT-145
A B
Is MB31 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB31.
Yes No
Is SB31 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-146
0291 Upper tray lock release error
Attempted to open the upper tray, but SA13 did not become OPEN.
SOLA11
SA13
FP7T0A17.EPS
006-259-02
MT-147
TP1
CN12 CN1 F1 Interlock circuit CN6 SOLA11
1 1 +24V 8 3
2 2 3 2
SOLA11
3 3 9 1
SNS board
controller Driver
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN4
1 1 +5V 13 +5V 1
14 Signal 2
To software control
15 GND 3 SA13
7-segment LED
FP7T0B17.EPS
D14 D15
SA13
SOLA11
D20 FP7T0F17.EPS
006-259-02
MT-148

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

Is SOLA11 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Other Actuators] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of tray lock mechanism normal?
Release tray lock manually, and check that plunger of SOLA11 moves smoothly.
Yes No
Check that the spring is normal, and there are no foreign particles at mechanism.
Are CN6 connector of DRV board and relay connector SOLA11 connected properly?
Yes No
Is SOLA11 normal?
Yes No
Replace SOLA11. 03A 11

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C17.EPS
006-259-02
MT-149
Is SA13 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Sensor Monitor] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is attaching state of SA13 normal?
Yes No
Re-attach SA13.
Are CN4 connector of SNS board and connector of sensor connected properly?
Yes No
Is SA13 normal?
Yes No
Replace SA13. 03A 7

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-150
0293 Middle tray lock release error
Attempted to open the middle tray, but SA23 did not become OPEN.
SOLA21
SA23
FP7T0A18.EPS
006-259-02
MT-151
TP1
1 1 +24V 8 3
2 2 3 2
SOLA21
3 3 9 1
SNS board
controller Driver
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN5
1 1 +5V 13 +5V 1
14 Signal 2
To software control
15 GND 3 SA23
7-segment LED
FP7T0B18.EPS
D14 D15
SA23
SOLA21
D20 FP7T0F18.EPS
006-259-02
MT-152

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is SOLA21 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C18.EPS
006-259-02
MT-153

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SA23.
Yes No
Is SA23 normal?
Yes No
Replace SA23. 03A 7

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-154
0295 Lower tray lock release error
Attempted to open the lower tray, but SA33 did not become OPEN.
SOLA31
SA33
FP7T0A19.EPS
006-259-02
MT-155
TP1
1 1 +24V 8 3
2 2 3 2
SOLA31
3 3 9 1
SNS board
controller Driver
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN6
1 1 +5V 13 +5V 1
14 Signal 2
To software control
15 GND 3 SA33
7-segment LED
FP7T0B19.EPS
D14 D15
SA33
SOLA31
D20 FP7T0F19.EPS
006-259-02
MT-156

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is SOLA31 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C19.EPS
006-259-02
MT-157

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SA33.
Yes No
Is SA33 normal?
Yes No
Replace SA33. 03A 7

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-158
02BD Size grip detection error (Detection of remainder)
Attempted to move to the HP (home position), but SD3/SD4 did not become the
required value.
02BF 20x25/26x36 size grip detection error (M-Utility function)
Attempted to move to the above size, but SD3/SD4 did not become the required
value.
2284 20x25 cm size grip detection error
Attempted to move to above size, but SD3/SD4 did not become the specified values.
MD3
SD4
SD3
FP7T0A11.EPS
006-259-02
MT-159

CN8 CND4 MD3
4 7 1
TP1 10 8 4
1 1 +24V 5 9 2
2 2 11 10 5 MD3
3 3 6 11 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND2
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 1 1
8 Signal 2 2
To software control
9 GND 3 3 SD3
7-segment LED
CN7 CND2
10 +5V 4 1
11 Signal 5 2
To software control
12 GND 6 3 SD4
7-segment LED
FP7T0B11.EPS
D14 D15
MD3
SD4
SD3
D20 FP7T0F11.EPS
006-259-02
MT-160

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

Is MD3 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Grip] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of upper conveyor unit grip mechanism normal?
Rotate MD3 gear with hand, and check that grip rollers move smoothly.
Yes No
the required parts.
Yes No
Is MD3 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD3. 05D 22

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C11.EPS
006-259-02
MT-161
Is SD3/SD4 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Sensor Monitor] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is attaching state of SD3/SD4 normal?
Yes No
Re-attach SD3/SD4.
Yes No
Is SD3/SD4 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD3/SD4. 05D 18

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-162
1268 Upper tray removal unit jam error (Retryover)
At completion of removal, did not detect normal SB13 CLOSE (film leading edge detection).
2267 Upper tray removal unit exit detection error (Currently retrying)
MB11
SB12
SB11
SB13
FP7T0A20.EPS

CN6 MB11
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB11
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN4 CNB1
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB11
7-segment LED
CN4 CNB1
10 +5V 10 1
11 Signal 11 2
To software control
12 GND 12 3 SB12
7-segment LED
CN4 CNB1
4 +5V 4 1
5 Signal 5 2
To software control
6 GND 6 3
SB13
7-segment LED
FP7T0B20.EPS
006-259-02
MT-163
SB11 D14 D15

SB12
MB11
SB13
D20 FP7T0F20.EPS
Check error generation state. Check error details at [Display Error Log] of M-Utility.
Turn OFF power supply. Check film stop position and state.
Insert shutter and pull out film tray.

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

A
FP7T0E20.EPS
006-259-02
MT-164
Is MB11 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Film Removing/Unit Operation] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MB11 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
Is SB11 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Sensor Monitor] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB11.
Yes No
Is SB11 normal?
Yes No
B FP7T0C20.EPS
006-259-02
MT-165

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB12
Yes No
Is SB12 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
Yes No
Is SB13 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-166
1270 Middle tray removal unit jam error (Retryover)
2269 Middle tray removal unit exit detection error (Currently retrying)
MB21
SB22
SB21
SB23
FP7T0A21.EPS

CN5 MB21
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB21
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN5 CNB2
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB21
7-segment LED
CN5 CNB2
10 +5V 10 1
11 Signal 11 2
To software control
12 GND 12 3 SB22
7-segment LED
CN5 CNB2
4 +5V 4 1
5 Signal 5 2
To software control
6 GND 6 3
SB23
7-segment LED
FP7T0B21.EPS
006-259-02
MT-167
D14 D15 MB21
SB21
SB23
SB22
D20 FP7T0F21.EPS

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

A
FP7T0E21.EPS
006-259-02
MT-168

Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MB21 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB21.
Yes No
Is SB21 normal?
Yes No
B
FP7T0C21.EPS
006-259-02
MT-169

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB22.
Yes No
Is SB22 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB23.
Yes No
Is SB23 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-170
1272 Lower tray removal unit jam error (Retryover)
2271 Lower tray removal unit exit detection error (Currently retrying)
MB31
SB32
SB31
SB33
FP7T0A22.EPS

CN4 MB31
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB31
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN6 CNB3
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB31
7-segment LED
CN6 CNB3
10 +5V 10 1
11 Signal 11 2
To software control
12 GND 12 3 SB32
7-segment LED
CN6 CNB3
4 +5V 4 1
5 Signal 5 2
To software control
6 GND 6 3
SB33
7-segment LED
FP7T0B22.EPS
006-259-02
MT-171
D14 D15
SB31
MB31
SB32
SB33
D20 FP7T0F22.EPS

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

A
FP7T0E22.EPS
006-259-02
MT-172

Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MB31 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB31.
Yes No
Is SB31 normal?
Yes No
B
FP7T0C22.EPS
006-259-02
MT-173

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB32.
Yes No
Is SB32 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
Yes No
Is SB33 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-174
1273 Conveyor unit removal unit jam error (Retryover)
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, but did not detect SD1 CLOSE (film leading edge
detection).
221B Conveyor unit removal unit jam error (Currently retrying)
detection).
MD1
SD1
FP7T0A23.EPS
006-259-02
MT-175

CN8 CND4 MD1
1 1 1
TP1 7 2 4
1 1 +24V 2 3 2
2 2 8 4 5 MD1
3 3 3 5 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND1
1 1 +5V 1 +5V 1 1
2 Signal 2 2
To software control
3 GND 3 3
SD1
7-segment LED
FP7T0B23.EPS
D14 D15
MD1
SD1
D20 FP7T0F23.EPS
006-259-02
MT-176

Insert shutter and remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

Is MD1 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Motor Operation/Motor Operation] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of conveyor unit normal?
Rotate jam removing handle with hand, and check that film conveyance rollers move smoothly.
Yes No
particles on the drive gears, be sure to replace or adjust the required parts.
Yes No
Is MD1 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD1. 05D 20

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C23.EPS
006-259-02
MT-177

Yes No
Yes No
Is SD1 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD1. 05A 8

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-178
1274 Conveyor unit jam error (Retryover)
detection).
221C Conveyor unit jam error (Currently Retrying)
detection).
MD1
SD2
FP7T0A24.EPS
006-259-02
MT-179

CN8 CND4 MD1
1 1 1
TP1 7 2 4
1 1 +24V 2 3 2
2 2 8 4 5 MD1
3 3 3 5 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND1
1 1 +5V 4 +5V 4 1
5 Signal 5 2
To software control
6 GND 6 3
SD2
7-segment LED
FP7T0B24.EPS
D14 D15
MD1
SD2
D20 FP7T0F24.EPS
006-259-02
MT-180


+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MD1 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD1. 05D 20

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C24.EPS
006-259-02
MT-181

Yes No
Is attaching state of the sensor bracket normal?
Yes No
Re-attach the sensor bracket.
Yes No
Is SD2 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD2. 05D 19

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-182
1276 Sub-scanning unit jam error
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning unit, but did not detect SD2 OPEN (film trailing
edge detection).
ME1
CLD1
MD2
SD2 MD1 FP7T0A25.EPS

CN8 CND4 MD1
1 1 1
TP1 7 2 4
1 1 +24V 2 3 2
2 2 8 4 5 MD1
3 3 3 5 3
controller
SNS board 7-segment LED CN10 MD2
2 1
F5 Interlock circuit 6 4
3 2
7 5 MD2
4 3
controller
SNS board 7-segment LED
F6 Interlock circuit CN10 CLD1

1 1
5 2 CLD1
SNS board Driver

controller
F7 Interlock circuit CN12 ME1

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
SNS board
ME1
5 5
controller 6 6
7 7
GND
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND1
1 1 +5V 4 +5V 4 1
5 Signal 5 2
To software control
6 GND 6 3
SD2
7-segment LED
FP7T0B25.EPS
006-259-02
MT-183
MD2
D14 D15
MD1
SD2 CLD1
ME1
D20 FP7T0F25.EPS

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

A
FP7T0E25.EPS
006-259-02
MT-184

Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MD1 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD1. 05D 20

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of conveyor unit exit normal?
Rotate MD2 gear with hand, and check that roller moves smoothly.
Yes No
Yes No
Is MD2 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD2. 05C 3

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
Is CLD1 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/ Other Actuators] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is the stopper of CLD1 secured by the bracket?
Yes No
Re-attach.
B C
FP7T0C25.EPS
006-259-02
MT-185
B C
Are CN10 connector of DRV board and relay connector CLD1 connected properly?
Yes No
Is CLD1 normal?
Yes No
Replace CLD1. 05C 4

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
Is ME1 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Motor Operation/Motor Operation] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Turn OFF power supply. Are CN12 connector of DRV board and connector on ME1
Yes No
Is the problem corrected when ME1 is replaced with normal one? 06 2

Yes No
End

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Turn OFF power supply. Is attaching state of the sensor bracket normal?
Yes No
Yes No
Is SD2 normal? Replace with a same sensor and check.

Yes No
Replace SD2. 05D 19

• SNS board 10 16
• Scanner unit 07 1
• MCT board 10 5

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-186
1277 Heat development unit jam error
Conveyed film to the heat development unit, but did not detect SJ1 CLOSE (film
leading edge detection).
MG1
SJ1
FP7T0A26.EPS
006-259-02
MT-187

CN15 MG1
1 1
TP1 4 4
1 1 +24V 2 2
2 2 5 5 MG1
3 3 3 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN9 CNJ1
1 1 +5V 1 +5V 1 1
2 Signal 2 2
To software control
3 GND 3 3
SJ1
7-segment LED
FP7T0B26.EPS
D14 D15
MG1
SJ1
D20 FP7T0F26.EPS
006-259-02
MT-188


+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

Is MG1 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Motor Operation/Motor Operation] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of heat development unit normal?
Yes No
Are CN15 connector of DRV board and relay connector MG1 connected properly?
Yes No
Is MG1 normal?
Yes No
Replace MG1. 08A 10

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C26.EPS
006-259-02
MT-189
Is SJ1 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Sensor Monitor] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Are CN9 connector of SNS board, relay connector CNJ1, and connector of sensor
Yes No
Is SJ1 normal?
Yes No
Replace SJ1. 09B 3

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-190
1278 Film release jam error
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but did not detect SJ1 OPEN (film trailing edge
detection).
MG1
MJ1
SJ1
FP7T0A27.EPS
006-259-02
MT-191

CN11 CNJ2 MJ1
4 7 1
TP1 10 8 4
1 1 +24V 5 9 2
2 2 11 10 5 MJ1
3 3 6 11 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED CN15 MG1
1 1
2 2
5 5 MG1
3 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN9 CNJ1
1 1 +5V 1 +5V 1 1
2 Signal 2 2
To software control
3 GND 3 3
SJ1
7-segment LED
FP7T0B27.EPS
D14 D15
MJ1
MG1
SJ1
D20 FP7T0F27.EPS
006-259-02
MT-192

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MG1 normal?
Yes No
Replace MG1. 08A 10

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C27.EPS
006-259-02
MT-193
Is MJ1 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Motor Operation/Motor Operation] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of film release unit normal?
Rotate MJ1 gear with hand, and check that film conveyance rollers move smoothly.
Yes No
Are CN11 connector of DRV board, and CNJ2 and MJ1 relay connectors connected
Yes No
Is MJ1 normal?
Yes No
Replace MJ1. 09A 13

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Is SJ1 normal?
Yes No
Replace SJ1. 09B 3

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-194
12A3 Upper tray removal unit jam error (Discharge remainder)
Failed to detect SB13 OPEN at completion of remainder front conveyance (detected

no film).
MB11
SB12
SB11
SB13
FP7T0A20.EPS

CN6 MB11
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB11
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN4 CNB1
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB11
7-segment LED
CN4 CNB1
10 +5V 10 1
11 Signal 11 2
To software control
12 GND 12 3 SB12
7-segment LED
CN4 CNB1
4 +5V 4 1
5 Signal 5 2
To software control
6 GND 6 3
SB13
7-segment LED
FP7T0B20.EPS
006-259-02
MT-195
SB11 D14 D15

SB12
MB11
SB13
D20 FP7T0F20.EPS

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

A
FP7T0E20.EPS
006-259-02
MT-196

Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MB11 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB11.
Yes No
Is SB11 normal?
Yes No
B FP7T0C20.EPS
006-259-02
MT-197

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB12
Yes No
Is SB12 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
Yes No
Is SB13 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-198
12A4 Middle tray removal unit jam error (Discharge remainder)

no film).
MB21
SB22
SB21
SB23
FP7T0A21.EPS

CN5 MB21
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB21
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN5 CNB2
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB21
7-segment LED
CN5 CNB2
10 +5V 10 1
11 Signal 11 2
To software control
12 GND 12 3 SB22
7-segment LED
CN5 CNB2
4 +5V 4 1
5 Signal 5 2
To software control
6 GND 6 3
SB23
7-segment LED
FP7T0B21.EPS
006-259-02
MT-199
D14 D15 MB21
SB21
SB23
SB22
D20 FP7T0F21.EPS

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

A
FP7T0E21.EPS
006-259-02
MT-200

Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MB21 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB21.
Yes No
Is SB21 normal?
Yes No
B
FP7T0C21.EPS
006-259-02
MT-201

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB22.
Yes No
Is SB22 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB23.
Yes No
Is SB23 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-202
12A5 Lower tray removal unit jam error (Discharge remainder)

no film).
MB31
SB32
SB31
SB33
FP7T0A22.EPS

CN4 MB31
4 1
TP1 10 4
1 1 +24V 5 2
2 2 11 5 MB31
3 3 6 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN6 CNB3
1 1 +5V 7 +5V 7 1
8 Signal 8 2
To software control
9 GND 9 3 SB31
7-segment LED
CN6 CNB3
10 +5V 10 1
11 Signal 11 2
To software control
12 GND 12 3 SB32
7-segment LED
CN6 CNB3
4 +5V 4 1
5 Signal 5 2
To software control
6 GND 6 3
SB33
7-segment LED
FP7T0B22.EPS
006-259-02
MT-203
D14 D15
SB31
MB31
SB32
SB33
D20 FP7T0F22.EPS

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

A
FP7T0E22.EPS
006-259-02
MT-204

Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MB31 normal?
Yes No

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB31.
Yes No
Is SB31 normal?
Yes No
B
FP7T0C22.EPS
006-259-02
MT-205

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SB32.
Yes No
Is SB32 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
Yes No
Is SB33 normal?
Yes No

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-206
12A6 Conveyor unit jam error (Discharge remainder)
Failed to detect SD1 OPEN at completion of remainder conveyance (detected no

film).
MD1
SD1
FP7T0A23.EPS
006-259-02
MT-207

CN8 CND4 MD1
1 1 1
TP1 7 2 4
1 1 +24V 2 3 2
2 2 8 4 5 MD1
3 3 3 5 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND1
1 1 +5V 1 +5V 1 1
2 Signal 2 2
To software control
3 GND 3 3
SD1
7-segment LED
FP7T0B23.EPS
D14 D15
MD1
SD1
D20 FP7T0F23.EPS
006-259-02
MT-208


+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MD1 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD1. 05D 20

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C23.EPS
006-259-02
MT-209

Yes No
Yes No
Is SD1 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD1. 05A 8

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-210
12A7 Sub-scanning unit jam error (Discharge remainder)
Failed to detect SD2 OPEN at completion of remainder front conveyance (detected no film).
ME1
CLD1
MD2
SD2
FP7T0A28.EPS

CN10 MD2
2 1
TP1 6 4
1 1 +24V 3 2
2 2 7 5 MD2
3 3 4 3
SNS board 8 6
controller Driver
F6 Interlock circuit CN10 CLD1

1 1
5 2 CLD1
SNS board Driver

controller
F7 Interlock circuit CN12 ME1

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
SNS board
ME1
5 5
controller 6 6
7 7
GND
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND1
1 1 +5V 4 +5V 4 1
5 Signal 5 2
To software control
6 GND 6 3
SD2
7-segment LED
FP7T0B28.EPS
006-259-02
MT-211
D14 D15
MD2
SD2 CLD1
ME1
D20 FP7T0F28.EPS

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No

A
FP7T0E28.EPS
006-259-02
MT-212

Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of conveyor unit exit normal?
Rotate MD2 gear with hand, and check that roller moves smoothly.
Yes No
Yes No
Is MD2 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD2. 05C 3

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
Is CLD1 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/ Other Actuators] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is the stopper of CLD1 secured by the bracket?
Yes No
Re-attach.
Are CN10 connector of DRV board and relay connector CLD1 connected properly?
Yes No
Is CLD1 normal?
Yes No
Replace CLD1. 05C 4

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
B FP7T0C28.EPS
006-259-02
MT-213
Is ME1 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Motor Operation/Motor Operation] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Are CN12 connector of DRV board and connector on ME1 connected properly?
Yes No
Is the problem corrected when ME1 is replaced with normal one? 06 2

Yes No
End

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Is attaching state of the sensor bracket normal?
Yes No
Yes No
Is SD2 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD2. 05D 19

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-214
12A8 Heat development unit jam error (Discharge remainder)
Failed to detect SJ1 CLOSE at completion of remainder recording conveyance

(detected film).
MG1
SJ1
FP7T0A26.EPS
006-259-02
MT-215

CN15 MG1
1 1
TP1 4 4
1 1 +24V 2 2
2 2 5 5 MG1
3 3 3 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN9 CNJ1
1 1 +5V 1 +5V 1 1
2 Signal 2 2
To software control
3 GND 3 3
SJ1
7-segment LED
FP7T0B26.EPS
D14 D15
MG1
SJ1
D20 FP7T0F26.EPS
006-259-02
MT-216


+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MG1 normal?
Yes No
Replace MG1. 08A 10

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C26.EPS
006-259-02
MT-217

Yes No
Yes No
Is SJ1 normal?
Yes No
Replace SJ1. 09B 3

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-218
12A9 Film release unit jam error (Discharge remainder)
Failed to detect SJ1 OPEN at completion of remainder recording conveyance

(detected film).
MG1
MJ1
SJ1
FP7T0A27.EPS
006-259-02
MT-219

CN11 CNJ2 MJ1
4 7 1
TP1 10 8 4
1 1 +24V 5 9 2
2 2 11 10 5 MJ1
3 3 6 11 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED CN15 MG1
1 1
2 2
5 5 MG1
3 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN9 CNJ1
1 1 +5V 1 +5V 1 1
2 Signal 2 2
To software control
3 GND 3 3
SJ1
7-segment LED
FP7T0B27.EPS
D14 D15
MJ1
MG1
SJ1
D20 FP7T0F27.EPS
006-259-02
MT-220

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Is MG1 normal?
Yes No
Replace MG1. 08A 10

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C27.EPS
006-259-02
MT-221
Is MJ1 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Motor Operation/Motor Operation] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of film release unit normal?
Rotate MJ1 gear with hand, and check that film conveyance rollers move smoothly.
Yes No
Are CN11 connector of DRV board, and CNJ2 and MJ1 relay connectors connected
Yes No
Is MJ1 normal?
Yes No
Replace MJ1. 09A 13

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16

Yes No
Yes No
Is SJ1 normal?
Yes No
Replace SJ1. 09B 3

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-222
12E2 Sorter entrance film JAM
During sorter conveyance, attempted to convey to the sorter unit, but the sorter unit
sensor 1 (ST1) did not turn ON.
SOLJ1
ST1
MT1
FP7T0A29.EPS
006-259-02
MT-223
TP1
CN12 CN1 F4 Interlock circuit CN11 CNJ2 SOLJ1
1 1 +24V 8 4 3
2 2 3 5 2
SOLJ1
3 3 9 6 1
SNS board
controller Driver
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
CN17 SNS board

24Vaux 1
PC board
Sorter unit
SRT board
MCT board CN3 MT1
1 1
24V 2 2
DC24V CN8
+24V Fuse 3 3
3
4 4 MT1
5 5
6 6
SORTER CN5
CN6 IN CN8 5V 1 1
F1 Fuse 2 2
1 1 +5V
3 3 ST1
4 4
FP7T0B29.EPS
D14 D15
SOLJ1
D20 FP7T0F29.EPS
006-259-02
MT-224

Check error details at [Display Error Log ] of M-Utility.
Remove covers.

Measure the voltage at the check pin on the SRT board.
+5V : +5V± 2%/ 5V(+) – GND (-)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ 24V (+) – GND (-)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: 24Vaux
Yes No

Are three fuses on SRT board normal? Check them visually.
Yes No
Replace SRT board. 11G 1
Are sorter related connectors connected properly? Or are connector pins damaged?
+5V : MCT board CN6/Relay connector on sorter unit/SRT board CN8
+24V: Power supply unit CN17/Relay connector on sorter unit/SRT board CN8
Yes No
Replace SRT board. 11G 1
Is SOLJ1 operating normally? Check at [Check Mechanism/Other Actuators] of M-Utility.

Yes No
Is drive system mechanism of the film changeover guide normal?
Push the plunger of SOLJ1, and check that the film changeover guide moves smoothly.
Yes No
Are CN11 connector of DRV board, and CNJ2 and SOLJ1 relay connectors connected
Yes No
Is SOLJ1 normal?
Yes No
Replace SOLJ1. 11F 13

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C29.EPS
006-259-02
MT-225
Is MT1 operating normally?

Check at [Check Mechanism/Sorter Unit/Motor MT1] of M-Utility.
Yes No
Are CN3 connector of SRT board and relay connector MT1 connected properly?
Yes No
Are sorter timing belts normal?

Yes No
Adjust the belt tension. Or replace the timing belt.
Is the problem corrected when MT1 is replaced with normal one? 11E 9
Yes No
End

• SRT board 11G 1
• MCT board 10 5
Is ST1 operating normally?

Check at [Check Mechanism/Sorter Unit/Sensor Monitor] of M-Utility.
Yes No
Are CN5 connector of SRT board and connector of sensor connected properly?
Yes No
Is ST1 normal?
Yes No
Replace ST1. 11C 39

• SRT board 11G 1
• MCT board 10 5

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-226
2289 Positioning guide entrance HP detection error
Attempted to return the positioning guide to HP (home position), but SD7 did not
become CLOSE.
MD6
SD7
FP7T0A12.EPS
006-259-02
MT-227

CN9 CND3 MD6
13 7 1
TP1 14 8 4
1 1 +24V 15 9 2
2 2 16 10 5 MD6
3 3 17 11 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND2
1 1 +5V 19 +5V 7 1
20 Signal 8 2
To software control
21 GND 9 3 SD7
7-segment LED
FP7T0B12.EPS
D14 D15
MD6
SD7
D20 FP7T0F12.EPS
006-259-02
MT-228

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Turn OFF power supply and remove film positioning assembly (lower).
Yes No
the required parts.
Yes No
Is MD6 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD6. 05B 2

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C12.EPS
006-259-02
MT-229

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SD7.
Yes No
Is SD7 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD7. 05B 7

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-230
2290 Positioning guide exit HP detection error
Attempted to return the positioning guide to HP (home position), but SD6 did not
become CLOSE.
MD5
SD6
FP7T0A13.EPS
006-259-02
MT-231

CN9 CND3 MD5
7 1 1
TP1 8 2 4
1 1 +24V 9 3 2
2 2 10 4 5 MD5
3 3 11 5 3
controller
SNS board
7-segment LED
Control signal
SNS board
CN4 CN2 TP1

F3 CN7 CND1
1 1 +5V 16 +5V 10 1
17 Signal 11 2
To software control
18 GND 12 3 SD6
7-segment LED
FP7T0B13.EPS
D14 D15
SD6 MD5
D20 FP7T0F13.EPS
006-259-02
MT-232

Remove covers.

+5V : +5V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (SNS board)
+24V: +24V± 2%/ TP1 (+) – TP2 (-) (DRV board)
Yes No
output normally?
+5V : +5V (2)
+24V: +24V
Yes No

Yes No


Yes No
Turn OFF power supply and remove film positioning assembly (upper).
Yes No
the required parts.
Yes No
Is MD5 normal?
Yes No
Replace MD5. 05B 6

• DRV board 10 6
• SNS board 10 16
A
FP7T0C13.EPS
006-259-02
MT-233

Yes No
Yes No
Re-attach SD6.
Yes No
Is SD6 normal?
Yes No
Replace SD6. 05B 7

Yes No
End
006-259-02
MT-234
3. ABNORMAL IMAGES
3.1 Troubleshooting from Abnormal Images

<Possible Causes>
No. 1 Stripes (1.5 mm from leading edge) The sub-scanning unit guide (driven roller side) is
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm defective.
Sub-scanning unit guide
Stripe at the 1.5 mm position from the leading edge.
Stripe width is approximately 0.3 mm.
1.5mm
Sub-scanning
unit
<Remedies and References>

Replace the sub-scanning unit.
“MC 6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit”
FP7T0301.EPS
006-259-02
MT-235
<Possible Causes>
No. 2 Stripes (2.5 mm from leading edge) • The film is defective.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm • The sub-scanning unit guide (driven roller side)
is defective.
Stripe at the 2.5 mm position from the leading edge. Sub-scanning unit guide
2.5mm
Sub-scanning
unit

• Replace the film.
• If the problem persists even after film is
replaced, replace the sub-scanning unit.
FP7T0302.EPS
Stripes (18 to 22 mm area from <Possible Causes>

No. 3 leading edge) • The film is defective.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm • The sub-scanning unit guide (driven roller side)
is defective.
Stripe in the 18 to 22 mm area from the leading edge. Sub-scanning unit guide
18 to 22mm
Sub-scanning
unit

• If the problem persists even after film is
replaced, replace the sub-scanning unit.
FP7T0303.EPS
006-259-02
MT-236
Stripes (24 mm, 25 mm, 27 mm <Possible Causes>

No. 4 from leading edge) The sub-scanning unit guide (driven roller side) is

Stripe at the 24 mm, 25 mm, or 27 mm position from
the leading edge.
Stripe width is approximately 1 mm.
24mm, 25mm, 27mm
Sub-scanning
unit

Replace the sub-scanning unit.
FP7T0304.EPS
Stripes (Within 27 mm area from <Possible Causes>

No. 5 leading edge) • The cleaning roller is dirty.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm • The upper conveyor unit exit clutch (CLD1) is defective.
• The sub-scanning conveyance driving roller is defective.
Stripes concentrating within the 27 mm area from the Sub-scanning
Sub-scanning unit
leading edge. conveyance driving roller
Upper
conveyor
Within 27 mm unit
Cleaning roller

• Clean the cleaning roller.
“PM 3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller”
• Replace the upper conveyor unit exit clutch (CLD1).
“SP 05C CONVEYOR UNIT 3”
• Replace the sub-scanning conveyance driving roller.
“MC 6.3 Sub-Scanning Roller”
FP7T0305.EPS
006-259-02
MT-237
Stripes (Within 27 mm area from leading edge, <Possible Causes>

No. 6
or 20.5 to 27 mm area from trailing edge) The pre-recording roller is dirty.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm
Pre-cording roller
Stripes concentrating within the 27 mm area from the
leading edge, or within the 20.5 to 27 mm area from
the trailing edge.
Within 27 mm 20.5mm
27mm
Sub-scanning
unit

Clean the pre-recording roller.
FP7T0306.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 7 Stripes (25 mm apart) The pre-recording roller is dirty.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm
Pre-recording roller
Stripes 25 mm apart over the whole film, up to the
6.5 mm position from the trailing edge.
25mm 6.5mm
Sub-scanning
unit

Clean the pre-recording roller.
FP7T0307.EPS
006-259-02
MT-238
<Possible Causes>
No. 8 Stripes (32 mm from leading edge) The sub-scanning unit guide is dirty.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm
Stripe at the 32 mm position from the leading edge.
Stripe width is approximately 1 mm.
32mm
Sub-scanning
unit

Clean the sub-scanning unit guide surface.
FP7T0308.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 9 Stripes (101 mm from leading edge) • The conveyor unit U-turn guide (upper) is
Film size 35 x 43 cm defective.
• The upper conveyor unit is defective.
Conveyor unit U-turn guide (Upper)
101mm Upper
conveyor
unit

• Replace the conveyor unit U-turn guide (upper).
“SP 05A CONVEYOR UNIT 1”
• If the problem persists even after replacing the
U-turn guide, replace the upper conveyor unit.
“MC 5.1 Upper Conveyor Unit”
FP7T0309.EPS
006-259-02
MT-239
<Possible Causes>
No. 10 Stripes (145 mm from leading edge) The heat development unit entrance guide
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm (upper) is dirty.
145mm

entrance guide (upper)

Clean the heat development unit entrance guide
(upper).
FP7T0310.EPS

No. 11
from leading edge) • Installation fault of sub-scanning unit.
Film size 35 x 43 cm • Installation fault of removal unit idle gear.
Stripe at the 175 mm, 180 mm, or 230 mm position Removal unit
from the leading edge.
230mm
180mm
175mm
Conveyor unit Idle gear

• Check that the fixture for transportation of the
sub-scanning unit is removed.
“IN 5.3 Removing Fixtures”
• Check that the sub-scanning is installed
normally.
• Check that the idle gear of the removal unit is
installed normally.
“MC 4.1 Removal Unit”
FP7T0311.EPS
006-259-02
MT-240
<Possible Causes>
No. 12 Stripes (208 mm from leading edge) • The sub-scanning unit is defective.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm • The heat development unit is defective.
Stripes near the 208 mm position from the leading Heat development unit
edge.
208mm
Sub-scanning
unit

• Replace the sub-scanning unit.
• Replace the heat development unit.
“MC 8.4 Heat Development Unit”
FP7T0312.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 13 White spots (Leading edge) • The sub-scanning unit is dirty inside.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm • The sub-scanning conveyance driving roller is
dirty.
White spots occur randomly at the leading edge. • The pre-recording roller is dirty.
Sub-scanning conveyance
driving roller
Sub-scanning
unit

• Clean the inside of the sub-scanning unit.
• Clean the sub-scanning conveyance driving
roller.
“PM 3.9 Cleaning Sub-scanning Conveyance
Roller”
• Clean the pre-recording roller.
FP7T0313.EPS
006-259-02
MT-241
<Possible Causes>
No. 14 Stripes (27 mm from trailing edge) • The SUS belt is dirty.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm • The sub-scanning conveyance driven roller is
defective.
Stripe at the 27 mm position from the trailing edge. • The sub-scanning motor (ME1) is defective.
• The sub-scanning unit is defective.
Sub-scanning conveyance driven roller
27mm
SUS belt
Sub-scanning unit
Sub-scanning motor (ME1)

• Clean the SUS belt.
“PM 3.9 Checking/Cleaning the SUS Belt”
• Replace the sub-scanning conveyance driven
roller.
• Replace the sub-scanning motor.
“MC 6.2 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1)”
• If the problem persists even after the above,
replace the sub-scanning unit.
FP7T0314.EPS
006-259-02
MT-242

No. 15 trailing edge) • The SUS belt is dirty.
defective.
Stripes within the 27 mm area from the trailing edge.
Stripe width is approximately 1 to 27 mm.
Sub-scanning
unit
Within 27 mm
SUS belt

• Clean the SUS belt.
“PM 3.9 Checking/Cleaning the SUS Belt”
roller.
FP7T0315.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 16 Stripes (6.5 mm from trailing edge) • The film is defective.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm • Installation fault of sub-scanning unit.
Stripe at 6.5 mm position from the trailing edge.

6.5mm
Sub-scanning
unit

• If the problem persists even after replacing the
film, adjust the position of the sub-scanning unit.
“MC 6.1.2 Adjusting the Sub-Scanning Unit
Positioning Screw”
FP7T0316.EPS
006-259-02
MT-243

No. 17 trailing edge) • The pre-recording roller is dirty.
defective.
Stripes within the 27 mm area from the trailing edge.
Within 27 mm
Sub-scanning
unit

• Clean the pre-recording roller.
roller.
FP7T0317.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 18 Stripes (110 mm from trailing edge) Installation fault of upper conveyor unit exit
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm sensor (SD2).
Upper conveyor unit Upper conveyor unit

Stripe at the 110 mm position from the trailing edge. exit sensor (SD2)
110mm

Check the installed state of the upper conveyor
unit exit sensor (SD2).
FP7T0318.EPS
006-259-02
MT-244

No. 19 trailing edge) The sub-scanning motor (ME1) is defective.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm
Sub-scanning unit
Stripes that are 0.8 mm apart within the 27 mm area
from the trailing edge.
Within 27 mm

Replace the sub-scanning motor.
FP7T0319.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 20 White spots Dispersal of molykoat applied to gear of conveyor
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm unit into film conveyance route.
White spots occurring within the 15 mm wide area

from the leading to trailing edges. Upper
conveyor
unit
Within
15 mm
Middle
conveyor
unit
Lower
conveyor
unit
• Apply an appropriate amount of molykoat to the
gears of the conveyor unit.
“PM 3.12 Greasing”
• Clean the film conveyance route of the conveyor unit.
FP7T0320.EPS
006-259-02
MT-245

No. 21 trailing edge) The sub-scanning motor (ME1) is defective.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm
Sub-scanning unit
Stripes that are 0.8 mm apart within the 60 mm area
from the trailing edge.
Within 60 mm

FP7T0321.EPS
Stripes (0.8 mm apart, 2.0 mm apart, <Possible Causes>

No. 22
3.8 mm apart, 8.5 mm apart) The sub-scanning motor (ME1) is defective.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm
Sub-scanning unit
Stripes that are 0.8 mm apart, 2.0 mm apart, 3.8 mm
apart, or 8.5 mm apart over the whole film.
0.8 mm apart, 2.0 mm apart, 3.8 mm apart,

or 8.5 mm apart

FP7T0322.EPS
006-259-02
MT-246
<Possible Causes>
No. 23 Stripes (11 mm apart, 15 mm apart) The sub-scanning conveyance driven roller is

Stripes that are 11 mm or 15 mm apart over the
whole film.
11 mm or 15 mm apart
Sub-scanning
unit

Replace the sub-scanning conveyance driven
roller.
FP7T0323.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 24 Black spots Conveyance rollers are dirty.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm Sub-scanning Conveyor unit exit roller
conveyance Sub-scanning unit
Black spots occurring randomly. driving roller
Conveyor unit
Conveyance
grip roller
(upper)
Conveyance
grip roller
(lower)
Removal Middle
unit Conveyance
roller (right)
Lower
Conveyance
Removal unit exit roller (Lower) roller (right)

Clean each conveyance roller.
FP7T0324.EPS
006-259-02
MT-247

No. 25 leading edge) Foreign particles such as dirt on the
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm sub-scanning unit guides.
Stripes within the 63 mm area from the leading edge.
63mm
Sub-scanning
unit

Check that there are no foreign particles such as
dirt on the sub-scanning unit guides.
FP7T0325.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 26 White spots (72 mm apart) Foreign particles such as dirt on the film cooling
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm section roller.
Film cooling section roller

White spots occurring randomly 72 mm apart.
Film cooling
section
72mm

Check that there are no foreign particles such
as dirt on the film cooling section roller.
FP7T0326.EPS
006-259-02
MT-248
White or black stripes in the <Possible Causes>

No. 27 The mirror or lens of the scanner unit is dirty.
vertical direction
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm
Scanner unit
White or black stripes occurring randomly in the
vertical direction.

Replace the scanner unit.
“MC 7.1 Scanner Unit”
FP7T0327.EPS
White or black stripes in the <Possible Causes>

No. 28 vertical direction The film is damaged.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm
A 10 mm black stripe occurring randomly in the

vertical direction.
10mm

Replace the film.
FP7T0328.EPS
006-259-02
MT-249
<Possible Causes>
No. 29 White stripes in diagonal direction The film is defective.
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm
White stripe occurring randomly in the diagonal

direction.

Replace the film.
FP7T0329.EPS

No. 30 from leading edge) The fixture for transportation of the sub-scanning
Film size 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 20 x 25, 25 x 30 cm unit is not removed.
Sub-scanning unit
Stripe at the 160 mm, 215 mm, or 220 mm position
from the leading edge.
220mm
215mm
160mm
Fixture for transportation

Remove the fixture for transportation of the
sub-scanning unit.
“IN 5.3 Removing Fixtures”
FP7T0330.EPS
006-259-02
MT-250
<Possible Cause>
No. 31 Left and right margins differ
Incorrect settings of the leading edge
Film size 26 x 36 cm margin.
Margin width differs between the left and
right for 26 x 36 cm films.
26 x 36 cm

Correct the individual data “PRT_MARGIN.txt”.
“MU 5.9 Adjusting the Leading Edge Margin”
FP7T0347.EPS
006-259-02
MT-251
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
MT-252
3.2 Scratches and Streaks Caused by Guide Plate

The guide plate can cause scratches and streaks on film.
If this occurs, measure the distance from the film conveyance reference face, and
locate the guide plate causing the defect.
■ Checking Film
Refer to the following diagram, and check the state of scratches occurring on film to
determine the faulty location.
Problem Film Cross-Section Refer to

White streaks on surface Scratches (White streaks) No. 1 to No.7
applied with emulsion.
PC layer
Em layer
PET (Base)
* Scratches are thought to have occurred

prior to exposure.
Black streaks on surface Scratches (Black streaks) No.8 to No.10
applied with emulsified
agent.
PC layer
Em layer
PET (Base)
* Scratches are thought to have occurred

after exposure.
If scratches reach the Em layer, black
streaks result even before exposure.
(Very clear black streaks)
Scratches on base No.11 to No.15
PC layer
Em layer
PET (Base)
Scratches
FP7T0331.EPS
006-259-02
MT-253
■ Scratches and Streaks

<Possible Causes>
No. 1 Scratches (White streaks) The conveyor unit entrance guide (lower) is
Location Em surface defective.
Scratches measuring about 10 mm from the leading

edge or about 20 mm from the trailing edge (white
streaks).
Upper
conveyor unit
26 x 36 cm Conveyor unit
35 x 43 cm Middle
352mm entrance guide
332mm
conveyor unit
25 x 30 cm (lower)
269mm
249mm Lower
conveyor unit
165mm
145mm
• Check that the conveyor unit entrance guide
(lower) is normal.
49mm • Replace the conveyor unit entrance guide
29mm
(lower).
Reference surface 20 x 25 cm “SP 05E CONVEYOR UNIT 5”
FP7T0332.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 2 Scratches (White streaks) The conveyor unit open/close guide is defective.
Location Em surface
Long scratches over the whole film.

Middle
conveyor unit
Conveyor unit
open/close
26 x 36 cm guide
35 x 43 cm Lower
352mm
332mm conveyor unit
25 x 30 cm
269mm
249mm

165mm • Check that the conveyor unit open/close guide
145mm
is normal.
• Replace the conveyor unit open/close guide.
“SP 05E CONVEYOR UNIT 5”
49mm
29mm
Reference surface 20 x 25 cm
FP7T0333.EPS
006-259-02
MT-254
<Possible Causes>
No. 3 Scratches (White streaks) The conveyor unit U-turn guide (upper) is
Scratches measuring about 4 mm from the trailing Conveyor unit U-turn guide (upper)
edge, or scratches measuring 20 mm to 100 mm
near the center (white streaks).
Upper
35 x 43 cm 26 x 36 cm conveyor
350mm unit
328mm
25 x 30 cm
278mm
256mm
187mm
165mm
103mm • Check that the conveyor unit U-turn guide
81mm
(upper) is normal.
26mm
• Replace the conveyor unit U-turn guide (upper).
4mm “SP 05A CONVEYOR UNIT 1”
FP7T0334.EPS
006-259-02
MT-255
<Possible Causes>
No. 4 Scratches (White streaks) The conveyor unit U-turn guide (upper) is
Scratches measuring about 4 mm from the trailing Conveyor unit U-turn guide (upper)
edge, or scratches measuring 20 mm to 100 mm
near the center (white streaks).
As these scratches occur after film positioning
operation, their positions differ according to the film
size. Upper
35 x 43 cm conveyor
353mm unit
334mm
284mm
262mm
193mm
171mm
109mm • Check that the conveyor unit U-turn guide
87mm
(upper) is normal.
32mm • Replace the conveyor unit U-turn guide (upper).
10mm “SP 05A CONVEYOR UNIT 1”
Reference surface
26 x 36 cm
350.75mm
328.75mm
278.75mm
256.75mm
187.75mm
165.75mm
103.75mm
81.75mm
26.75mm
4.75mm
Reference surface
20 x 25 cm
185.5mm
163.5mm
108.5mm
86.5mm
Reference surface
FP7T0335.EPS
006-259-02
MT-256
<Possible Causes>
No. 5 Scratches (White streaks) The removal unit guide is defective.
Location Em surface
Upper removal
Scratches measuring about 10 mm from the leading unit
edge (white streaks).
Middle removal
unit Lower
35 x 43 cm 26 x 36 cm removal
344mm unit
25 x 30 cm 324mm Removal unit
279mm guide
259mm
194mm
174mm
112mm • Check that the removal unit guide is normal.
92mm • Replace the removal unit guide.
“SP 04B REMOVAL UNIT 2”
6mm
20 x 25 cm 0mm
Reference surface
FP7T0336.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 6 Scratches (White streaks) The conveyor unit guide (right) is defective.
Location Em surface
Upper conveyor unit
Scratches (white streaks) occurring randomly over
the whole film. Conveyor unit guide (right)
35 x 43 cm 26 x 36 cm
25 x 30 cm

• Check that the conveyor unit guide (right) is
normal.
• Replace the conveyor unit guide (right).
FP7T0337.EPS
006-259-02
MT-257
<Possible Causes>
No. 7 Scratches (White streaks) The conveyor unit exit guide (upper) is defective.
Location Em surface
Conveyor unit exit guide (upper)
Scratches (white streaks) occurring randomly over
the whole film.
Upper
unit
25 x 30 cm

• Check that the conveyor unit exit guide (upper)
is normal.
• Replace the conveyor unit exit guide (upper).
FP7T0338.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 8 Scratches (Black streaks) The heat development unit entrance guide
Location Em surface (upper) is defective.
Scratches (black streaks) occurring randomly from
the leading edge to near the center.
35 x 43 cm 26 x 36 cm
25 x 30 cm
entrance guide (upper)

• Check that the heat development unit entrance
guide (upper) is normal.
• Replace the heat development unit entrance
guide (upper).
“SP 08A HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1”
FP7T0339.EPS
006-259-02
MT-258
<Possible Causes>
No. 9 Scratches (Black streaks) The changeover guide is defective.
Location Em surface
Film release unit
Scratches (black streaks) occurring from the leading Changeover guide
edge to the trailing edge.
As these scratches occur after film positioning
operation, their positions differ according to the film
size.
35 x 43 cm
353mm
337mm
272mm
252mm
187mm <Remedies and References>

167mm • Check that the changeover guide is normal.
• Replace the changeover guide.
102mm “SP 09A FILM RELEASE UNIT 1”
82mm
17mm
0mm
Reference surface
26 x 36 cm
362.25mm
342.25mm
277.25mm
257.25mm
192.25mm
172.25mm
107.25mm
87.25mm
22.25mm
2.25mm
Reference surface
20 x 25 cm
195.5mm
175.5mm
110.5mm
90.5mm
25.5mm
5.5mm
Reference surface
FP7T0340.EPS
006-259-02
MT-259
<Possible Causes>
No. 10 Scratches (Black streaks) The film release unit entrance guide is defective.
Location Em surface
Film release unit
Scratches (black streaks) occurring randomly over
the whole film.
Film release unit
entrance guide
35 x 43 cm 26 x 36 cm
25 x 30 cm

• Check that the film release unit entrance guide
is normal.
• Replace the film release unit entrance guide.
“SP 09B FILM RELEASE UNIT 2”
FP7T0341.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 11 Scratches The sub-scanning unit guide is defective.
Location Base
Scratches occurring randomly over the whole film.
35 x 43 cm 26 x 36 cm
25 x 30 cm Sub-scanning unit

• Check that the sub-scanning unit guide is
normal.
• Replace the sub-scanning unit.
FP7T0342.EPS
006-259-02
MT-260
<Possible Causes>
No. 12 Scratches The heater assembly is defective.
Location Base
35 x 43 cm 26 x 36 cm Heater assembly
25 x 30 cm

• Check that the heater assembly is normal.
• Replace the heater assembly.
“SP 08D HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4”
FP7T0343.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 13 Scratches The conveyor unit entrance guide (upper) is
Location Base defective.
Upper
Scratches occurring from the leading edge to the conveyor
trailing edge. unit
Middle
conveyor
35 x 43 cm 26 x 36 cm
unit
344mm
25 x 30 cm 324mm Conveyor unit
entrance guide Lower
279mm (upper) conveyor
259mm
unit
194mm
174mm
112mm <Remedies and References>

92mm • Check that the conveyor unit entrance guide
(upper) is normal.
6mm • Replace the conveyor unit entrance guide
Reference surface 20 x 25 cm 0mm (upper).
“SP 05E CONVEYOR UNIT 5”
FP7T0344.EPS
006-259-02
MT-261
<Possible Causes>
No. 14 Scratches The conveyor unit exit guide (lower) is defective.
Location Base
Conveyor unit exit guide (lower)
Upper
unit
25 x 30 cm

• Check that the conveyor unit exit guide (lower)
is normal.
• Replace the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
FP7T0345.EPS
<Possible Causes>
No. 15 Scratches The conveyor unit U-turn guide (lower) is
Location Base defective.
Conveyor unit U-turn guide (lower)
Upper
unit
25 x 30 cm

• Check that the conveyor unit U-turn guide
(lower) is normal.
• Replace the conveyor unit U-turn guide (lower).
FP7T0346.EPS
006-259-02
MT-262
4. ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
4.1 System Freezes without Displaying Error Code Normally

<NOTE>
A Japanese window will be displayed when the following error occurs even if “[1-5-1] Select
Language” is set to other languages.
● Network Conflict Error

Example of display Cause Remedy
Network settings (IP (1) Turn OFF/ON the main power

address) are overlapping switch, and reboot the
with other devices. equipment.
(2) Change the network settings
of this equipment or other
devices.
TP7T0401.EPS
● Watson Error
The equipment is unable (1) Turn OFF/ON the main power

to operate normally due switch, and reboot the
to software errors. equipment.
TP7T0402.EPS
006-259-02
MT-263
● FMTMAIN Executing Error

The equipment is unable (1) Turn OFF/ON the main power

to operate normally due switch, and reboot the
to software errors. equipment.
TP7T0403.EPS
4.2 Error Message at the Startup Sequence

If the equipment does not start up due to some reason, “Failed to Startup...” will be
displayed together with error information (6-digit code number). The error information
means as follows.
<NOTE>
This error information is displayed by main unit software version V4.1 or later/V10.0 or later.
When the “Failed to Startup...” error is displayed, replace the HDD.
Error Information Meaning

0x1000 Failed in acquiring Windows version information
0x2000 to 0x2B08 Error occurred in disk check processing
0x3000 Failed in parameter file check
0x4000 to 0x4002 Failed in creating required directory
0x5000 to 0x5002 Failed in changing software version
0x6000 Registry registration (When version is changed)
0x7000 Registry registration (Normal)
0x8000 to 0x8006 Failed in printer driver start
0x9000 to 0x900F Failed in acquiring IP address/subnet mask/gateway address
0x9100 Failed in setting IP address/subnet mask/gateway address
0xA000 to 0xA001 Failed in starting network driver
0xB000 to 0xB003 Failed in acquiring MAC address
0xC000 Failed in starting main unit application
TP7T0404.EPS
006-259-04
MT-264
5. CLEARING FILM JAMS

Refer to the labels pasted on the equipment and remove the jammed films.
FP7T0501.EPS
• Jam removing label 1
FP7T0503.EPS
• Jam removing label 2
FP7T0504.EPS
006-259-02
MT-265
Sorter jam removing label
FP7T0502.EPS
• Sorter jam removing label
FP7T0505.EPS
006-259-02
MT-266
6. TROUBLESHOOTING REFERENCE
6.1 Fuse System Diagram

Power supply unit DRV board Tray detection switch
+24V 48V/5A (Upper) (SA12)
+5V
F1
+24V K1
MB11
K1
SOLA11
Tray detection switch

+24V (Middle) (SA22)
48V/5A
F2
JP
K2
MB21
K2
SOLA21

+24V (Lower) (SA32)
48V/5A
F3
JP
K3
MB31
K3
SOLA31
Front cover interlock

+12V -12V switch (SK2, SK3)
+24V 48V/1A
K12 F9
K12
K5 K6
+24V 48V/5A
F8 MD1
K1 K2 K3
48V/5A
F6 MD4 to MD6, CLD1
48V/5A K5
F5 MD2, MD3, MG1
Scanner unit 48V/5A

(LDD) F7 ME1
K6
FP7T0615.EPS
006-259-02
MT-267
+24V
FANG1 to FANG3
Jam clear cover interlock

switch (SK1)
+24V 48V/5A
F4
K4
MJ1
K4
SOLJ1
SNS board
+12V +12V 48V/2A

F1
Density measurement
-12V -12V 48V/2A sensor (PDD board)
F2
+5V +5V 48V/2A

F3 Sensors
PC board PRN board
+5V +5V +5V 48V/1A Film leading edge

F1 detection sensor
(SE1)
MCT board
+5V +5V 48V/2A

F1 Sorter
FP7T0616.EPS
006-259-02
MT-268
6.2 Layout of Fuse

■ PRN Board
F1
No. Rating Purpose of use

F1 AC/DC48V1A +5V power supply fuse for SED, LDD
FP7T0606.EPS
■ MCT Board
F1

F1 AC/DC48V2A +5V power supply fuse for sorter
FP7T0607.EPS
006-259-02
MT-269
■ DRV Board
F9 F4
F7 F5 F6 F8
F1
F2
F3

F1 AC/DC48V5A +24V power supply fuse for upper tray
F2 AC/DC48V5A +24V power supply fuse for middle tray
F3 AC/DC48V5A +24V power supply fuse for lower tray
F4 AC/DC48V5A +24V power supply fuse for jam clear cover relation
F5 AC/DC48V5A +24V power supply fuse for MD2, MD3, MG1
F6 AC/DC48V5A +24V power supply fuse for MD4, MD5, MD6, CLD1
F7 AC/DC48V5A +24V power supply fuse for ME1
F8 AC/DC48V5A +24V power supply fuse for MD1
F9 AC/DC48V1A +24V power supply fuse for front cover relation
FP7T0608.EPS
006-259-02
MT-270
■ SNS Board
F3
F1 F2

F1 AC/DC48V2A +12V power supply fuse for density measurement sensor
F2 AC/DC48V2A +5V power supply fuse for sensors
F3 AC/DC48V2A +5V power supply fuse for sensors
FP7T0609.EPS
006-259-02
MT-271
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
MT-272
6.3 LED Lighting Information

■ PRN Board
D4
D10 D3
D5 D9
D8
D6 D7
No. Purpose Lit OFF Remarks

D3 Film leading edge Film leading edge Not detected Momentarily lights up
detection detected when detected
D4 L_DMA (Reception) Currently starting L_DMA currently Lights up when CTG
L_DMA stopped reception is OK
D5 Start point detection Currently detecting Start point currently –
start point stopped
D6 Leading edge Currently detecting Leading edge currently –
detection leading edge stopped
D7 Local reset Currently implementing Currently clearing local –
local reset reset
D8 SDRAM access Currently accessing SDRAM not accessed –
SDRAM
D9 L_DMA Currently starting L_DMA currently stopped Lights up during actual
(Transmission) L_DMA transfer
D10 FPGA configuration Normal end Executing/Failed –
FP7T0610.EPS
006-259-02
MT-273
■ MCT Board
D5~D14 D15, D16
D18
D17
No. LED Function

D5 HT1 Light up when Heater 1 is ON.
D14 FAN Light up when FANK1 is ON.
D15 M1 For checking software operations, M1 and M2 blink
alternately during CPU operations.
D16 M2 For checking software operations, M1 and M2 blink
alternately during CPU operations.
D17 US3 For software debugging
D18 M3 For software debugging
FP7T0611.EPS
006-259-02
MT-274
■ SNS Board
D14 D15
D16 D17
D18 D19
D20 D21
No. Function
D14~D20 For checking the operation of I/O parts
D21 For checking software operation of MCT board, D21 blinks during
CPU operations.
FP7T0612.EPS
006-259-02
MT-275
<D14 lighting information> <D15 lighting information>

Position Status at Lighting Position Status at Lighting Position Status at Lighting Position Status at Lighting
SA11 ON SA31 ON Not used MD1 drive signal ON
SA13 ON SA33 ON MB11 drive signal ON MD2 drive signal ON
SA21 ON SB11 ON MB21 drive signal ON MD3 drive signal ON
SA23 ON Not used MB31 drive signal ON Not used

SB12 ON SB23 ON MD4 drive signal ON MJ1 drive signal ON
SB13 ON SB31 ON MD5 drive signal ON SOLA11 drive signal ON
SB21 ON SB32 ON MD6 drive signal ON SOLA21 drive signal ON
SB22 ON Not used MG1 drive signal ON Not used

SB33 ON SD4 ON SOLA31 drive signal ON CLD1 drive signal ON
SD1 ON SD5 ON SOLJ1 drive signal ON FANG1, 3 drive signal

ON
SD2 ON SD6 ON ME1 drive signal ON FANS drive signal ON
SD3 ON Not used Polygonal motor FANG2 drive signal ON

drive signal ON
<D20 lighting information>

Position Status at Lighting Position Status at Lighting
SD7 ON Not used
SJ1 ON Not used
Not used Not used

SN
Not used Not used S
FP7T0427.EPS
006-259-02
MT-276
■ SRT Board
LED2
LED1
LED Function
LED1 Lights up during SRT board operations (Green)
LED2 Lights up when an error occurs (Red)

FP7T0613.EPS
006-259-02
MT-277
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
MT-278
6.4 Checking the DC Voltage

Using a tester, measure each DC output voltage. If outside the specification,
adjust with the adjusting volume on the power supply unit.
CAUTION
Observe the following to prevent electrical hazards.
• Use the tester lead to prevent short-circuiting.
• Do not touch the voltage terminal and tester lead.
■ Procedure
(1) Pull the board attaching plate where MCT board can be seen.
#1
[Release] Clamp
#2
[Remove] BR3x8
FP7M0315.EPS
#3
[Release] Clamp
#4
[Remove] BR3x8
#5
[Pull] Board attaching plate
FP7M0316.EPS
006-259-02
MT-279
(2) Attach the interlock release jig to the front cover interlock (SK2/SK3).
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
(4) Measure the voltage at the voltage measuring points.
If the voltage differs from the specified value, turn the voltage adjusting volume in front
of the power supply unit and adjust.
(5) After checking/adjusting the DC voltage, turn OFF the power of the equipment,
and remove the interlock release jig.
(6) Reinstall the board attaching plate to its original position.
(7) Reinstall the lower front cover.
● Specified Voltage Values
Measured Adjusting volume

Voltage Check Pin Specified range
board
+3.3V ±2%
+3.3V PRN board TP14 (+3.3V) – TP15 (GND) +3.3V
(+3.23 to +3.37V)
+5V ±2%
+5V SNS board TP1 (+5V) – TP2 (GND) (+4.90 to +5.10V) +5V 2
Power supply +5V ±2%

+5V unit check pin – (+4.90 to +5.10V) +5V 1
Power supply +12VD ±2%

+12VD unit check pin – (+11.76 to +12.24V) +12VD
-12V ±2%
-12V SNS board TP4 (-12V) – TP2 (GND) (-11.76 to -12.24V) -12V
+12V ±2%
+12V SNS board TP3 (+12V) – TP2 (GND) (+11.76 to +12.24V) +12V
+5VS MCT board TP2 (+5V) – TP1 (GND) +5VS ±2% +5VS
(+4.90 to +5.10V)
+24V ±2%
+24V DRV board TP1 (+24V) – TP2 (GND) (+23.52 to +24.48V) +24V
TP7M0201.EPS
006-259-02
MT-280
● Voltage Measuring Point

• DRV Board/SNS Board
TP2
TP1
TP4 TP1 TP2

TP3
FP7M0317.EPS
006-259-02
MT-281
• PRN Board
TP15 TP14
FP7M0318.EPS
• MCT Board
TP2
TP1
FP7M0319.EPS
● Adjusting Volume
FP7M0314.EPS
006-259-02
MT-282
6.5 Inspecting I/O Parts

Inspect each I/O part for defects in troubleshooting as follows.
I/O parts not listed below may be difficult to inspect alone, or may be easier to inspect
by replacing.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Before inspecting each I/O part, check the following first.
• Are the DC power output normally from the power supply unit?
• Are connectors connected properly?
• Is the driving section adhered with foreign particles or assembled incorrectly in the
motor.
After checking the above, check if I/O parts operate normally at “[5]. Check
Mechanism” of the M-Utility.
● Pulse Motor (MB11, MB21, MB31, MD1) (118SX063)

Check the conduction between the terminals at the relay connector. If 0 Ω or ∞ Ω,
malfunction may be suspected.
• Pin 1 (red) – Pin 2 (black)
• Pin 3 (yellow) – Pin 2 (black)
• Pin 4 (blue) – Pin 5 (white)
• Pin 6 (orange) – Pin 5 (white)
● Pulse Motor (MD2, MD3, MD4, MD5, MD6, MJ1) (118SX171)

● Pulse Motor (MG1) (118SX162)

● Pulse Motor (MT1) (118SX164)

006-259-02
MT-283
● Solenoid (SOLA11, SOLA21, SOLA31) (107Y0179)

• Pin 1 (black) – Pin 3 (red)
• Pin 2 (yellow) – Pin 3 (red)
● Solenoid (SOLJ1) (107Y0181)

• Pin 1 – Pin 3
• Pin 2 – Pin 3
● Solenoid (SOLT1 to SOLT9) (107Y0170)

Check the conduction at the relay connector (2-pins). If 0 Ω or ∞ Ω, malfunction may be
suspected.
● Clutch (CLD1) (106S0029)

suspected.
● Fan (FANG1, FANG3) (119Y0056)

suspected.
● Fan (FANG2, FANK1) (119Y0008)

suspected.
● Thermiator (ThG10, ThK1) (115Y0041)

suspected.
006-259-02
MT-284
6.6 Electrical Parts Interchangeability

The following shown common parts for electrical components used in this equipment.
● Sensor (Photo-interrupter) (146S0029)

SA13, SA23, SA33, SB11, SB21, SB31, SB12, SB22, SB32, SD3, SD4, SD5, SD6,
SD7
● Sensor (Reflection type) (146N0010)

SA11, SA21, SA31
● Sensor (Reflection type) (146S0052)

SB13, SB23, SB33, SD1, SD2, SJ1, ST1 to ST5
● Microswitch (128S0258)
SA12, SA22, SA32, SK1, SK2, SK3
● Pulse Motor (118SX063)

MB11, MB21, MB31, MD1
● Pulse Motor (118SX171)

MD2, MD3, MD4, MD5, MD6, MJ1
● Solenoid (107Y0170)
SOLT1 to SOLT9
● Solenoid (107Y0179)
SOLA11, SOLA21, SOLA31
● Fan (119Y0056)
FANG1, FANG3
● Fan (119S0008)
FANG2, FANK1
● Thermistor (115Y0041)
ThG10, ThK1
006-259-02
MT-285
6.7 Print Position of Board Serial Number

■ PRN Board
Serial number
FP7T0602.EPS
■ MCT Board
Serial number
FP7T0601.EPS
■ DRV Board
Serial number
FP7T0603.EPS
006-259-02
MT-286
■ SNS Board
Serial number
FP7T0604.EPS
■ LDD Board
Serial number
FP7T0605.EPS
■ LED Board
Serial number
FP5T0437.EPS
■ PDD Board
Serial number
FP5T0438.EPS
006-259-02
MT-287
■ PC Board
Rxxxxxxxx-xxxxxx
Serial number FP7T0614.EPS
006-259-02
MT-288
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
MT-289
BLANK PAGE
006-259-02
MT-290
7. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
DRYPIX 7000
006-259-07
MT-291
006-259-07
MT-292
006-259-07
MT-293
006-259-07
MT-294
006-259-07
MT-295
006-259-07
MT-296
006-259-07
MT-297
006-259-07
MT-298
006-259-07
MT-299
006-259-07
MT-300
006-259-07
MT-301
006-259-07
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

MC-1
CONTROL SHEET

11/10/2002 01 Revised (FM3601) 1, 3-11, 13-17, 20, 22, 23, 26, 27,
33-39, 44, 46-149
04/01/2003 02 Revised (FM3978) 1, 10, 11, 15, 16, 22, 23, 28, 31, 35,
37, 44, 54-57, 60, 75-77, 90-94,
107-109, 118, 120, 135, 141-149
09/20/2004 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1-3, 9, 48, 141, 142, 152, 153, 155,
V4.1, V10.0 and V10.1, DPX7 PC Tool version 159, 162-168, 172
A08, etc.)(FM4447)
11/30/2005 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 2, 9, 115, 116, 141, 152-154,
V5.0 and V11.0, DI Tool version V2.0, etc.) 157-159, 163, 165, 166, 168, 171,
(FM4690) 173, 177, 180-187
10/02/2006 07 Revised (Change of corporate name and 1, 142
02/15/2007 08 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 8, 9, 131.1-131.4, 141, 152, 153,
V7.0 and V13.0, DI Tool version V3.0, etc.) 155-157, 159, 160, 162-165, 169,
(FM5077) 170, 174, 176, 180, 182, 184
006-259-08
02.15.2007 FM5077 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual MC-1
MC-2
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, REPLACEMENTS,

AND ADJUSTMENTS
This chapter does not describe parts which require no special note or adjustments in
removal and installation.
For details on the removal of these parts, refer to the Parts List.
Also follow the precautions below when performing inspections, replacements, and
adjustments of parts.
WARNING
To prevent electrical shocks, be sure to turn OFF the power of this equipment
before starting work.
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warnings and cautions described in “SAFETY PRECAUTION”.
CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of boards and
optical units. Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic
parts on the boards and optical units.
CAUTION
Never remove the screws painted in red.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
The screws painted in yellow must be adjusted after the installation of parts.
When installing parts, follow the check/adjustment procedure provided.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
006-259-05
MC-3
<NOTE>
When removing the covers, insert shutter into the film tray to prevent exposure of film to light.
The diagrams in this manual displays the CHECK and FIT ON icons where necessary.
When removing/reinstalling, following these icons.
• CHECK icon: When reinstalling removed parts, this is indicated if reinstalling

positions must be checked or adjusted.
This symbol is shown inside illustrations of parts removal
CHECK procedures. Whenever this is shown, be sure to refer to "■ CHECK/
Adjusting procedure".
• FIT ON icon: When installing parts, this is indicated if alignment to the boss is
required.
006-259-04
MC-4
HOW TO READ REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT VOLUME

The REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) Volume is constructed in such a way that it
can be referred together with the SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) Volume.
The following describes how to refer to this REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)
Volume.
■ Example (REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT Volume)
Chapter No.
(1)
5 3 Upper Conveyor Unit Exit Motor (MD2)
Section. No.
(2)
FP7C0523.EPS
■ Removing Procedure
(1) Remove the following cover.
• Rear cover
(2) Remove the conveyor unit exit clutch (CLD1)
(3) Remove the exit conveyance motor (MD2).
(3) #3
[Disconnect]
Connector MD2
(3) #3
[Disconnect]
(3) #3 Connector CLD1
[Release] Clamp
(3) #4
[Disconnect]
Clutch connector
(3) #1
[Remove] 2-DT3x6
(3) #2
[Remove]
Upper conveyor unit exit motor (MD2)
(2) #1
[Remove] E5 (2) #2
[Pull out]
Upper conveyor unit exit clutch (CLD1)
FP7C0504.EPS
■ Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
006-259-01
11.10.2002 FM3601 MC-58
FP7C0005.EPS
(1) Chapter No. .. The Chapter No. in the REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT Volume is related to
the INDEX No. of the SERVICE PARTS LIST Volume.
(2) Section No. ... The Section No. in the REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT Volume indicates
enclosed REF. No. (example 3 ) in the SERVICE PARTS LIST Volume
(exploded view).
For the above example, the item to be referred for “MC 5 3 Upper
Conveyor Unit Exit Motor (MD2)” is “SP 05C 3 ”.
006-259-03
MC-5
■ Example (SERVICE PARTS LIST Volume)
INDEX No.
(1)
05C
E6
FP7Z0513.EPS
15
REF. No.
(2) 16 2
3
2-BR3X8
1
E6
4
6
E4
E3
DT3X6
14 5
E6
8 6
13
10
E6
17 7
6
6
E6
9
DT3X6
10
3-BR3X10
11
18
12
FP7Z0503.EPS
006-259-01
11.10.2002 FM3600 SP-30
FP7C0006.EPS
To refer to the service parts information on “MC 5 3 Upper Conveyor Unit Exit Motor
(MD2)”, refer to “SP 05C 3 ”.
006-259-03
MC-6
CONTENTS
1. COVERS 1.1 Covers MC-10
2. FRAME 2.1 BCR Assembly MC-12
3. TRAY LOADING UNIT 3.1 Tray Loading Unit MC-14

3.2 Tray MC-18
3.3 Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor MC-22
(SA11, SA21, SA31)
3.4 Tray Detection Switch (SA12, SA22, MC-24
SA32)
3.5 Tray Lock Assembly MC-26
3.6 Tray Loading Unit Rail MC-27
3.7 Tray Rail MC-30
3.8 Squeezing Roller MC-32
3.9 Special Screw MC-34
FP7C0001.EPS
006-259-03
MC-7
4. REMOVAL UNIT 4.1 Removal Unit MC-36

4.2 Removal Drive Cam MC-40
4.3 Suction Cup Arm MC-44
4.4 Suction Cup MC-53
4.5 Bellows MC-54
5. CONVEYOR UNIT 5.1 Upper Conveyor Unit MC-56

5.2 Film Positioning Motor (Lower) (MD6) MC-64
5.3 Upper Conveyor Unit Exit Motor (MD2) MC-66
5.4 Cleaning Roller Grip Release Motor
(MD4) MC-68
5.5 Film Positioning Assembly (Lower) MC-70
5.6 Film Positioning Motor (Upper) (MD5) MC-72
5.7 Film Positioning Assembly (Upper) MC-74
5.8 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide MC-78
5.9 Conveyance Driving Roller (Upper) MC-80
5.10 Conveyance Driving Roller (Lower) MC-84
5.11 Conveyor Unit Guide MC-86
5.12 Grip Idle Gear MC-87
5.13 Lower Conveyor Unit MC-88
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT 6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit MC-90

6.2 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1) MC-100
6.3 Sub-Scanning Roller MC-102
6.4 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor MC-106
(SE1)
FP7C0002.EPS
006-259-03
MC-8
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 7.1 Scanner Unit MC-112
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT 8.1 Cooling Fan Assembly MC-118

UNIT 8.2 Filter Section Cooling Fan MC-120
8.3 Film Cooling Section MC-122
8.4 Heat Development Unit MC-124
8.5 Heat Development Rack Assembly MC-126
8.6 Heat Development Roller MC-130
8.7 Thermal Protector MC-131.1
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT 9.1 Film Release Unit MC-132

9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting MC-134
Board (LED15A)
10. CONTROLLER 10.1 Operation Panel MC-136

10.2 Controller Assembly MC-138
10.3 HDD MC-140
10.4 PC Board MC-142
10.5 MCT Board MC-144
10.6 DRV Board MC-146
FP7C0003.EPS
006-259-08
MC-9
11. SORTER 11.1 Film Conveyance Timing Belt MC-148

11.2 Jam Removing Guide Plate Magnet MC-151
12. VERSION UPGRADE AND 12.1 Preparations (Same for Version Upgrades MC-153
FULL INSTALLATION OF and Full Installation)
MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE 12.2 Version Upgrade MC-154
12.3 Full Installation MC-158
12.4 Upgrading Main Unit Software Version MC-168
from A02 to A04
from A01 to A04
from [A03 to V4.2/V10.2 or Earlier] to
[V5.0/V11.0 or Later]
from A00, A01, A02 to V5.0 or Later
FP7C0004.EPS
006-259-08
1 COVERS
FP7Z0111.EPS
1 - 1 Covers
FP7C0105.EPS
(1) Remove the following covers.
• Jam clear cover
• Upper left side cover
• Upper right side cover
• Side ejection cover
Upper left side cover 2-T4x12
Jam clear cover

Operation panel
fixing screw
2-T4x12
Upper right side cover

Side ejection cover
2-T4x8
BR3x12
3-BR3x8
FP7C0100.EPS
006-259-03
MC-11

• Film release unit cover
• Right side cover
• Left side cover
• Rear cover
• Lower front cover
8-T4x25
Film release unit cover

Left side cover
BR3x8
Rear cover
8-T4x16
Front cover
8-T4x16
8-BR3x8
Right side cover
Lower front cover
FP7C0101.EPS
006-259-03
2 FRAME
FP7Z0211.EPS
2 - 1 BCR Assembly
FP7C0201.EPS
• Rear cover
(2) Remove the trays
“3.2 Tray”
006-259-03
MC-13
(3) Remove the BCR assembly.
BCR assembly
#3
[Remove] 2-TP3x8
#2
[Release] Clamp
#1
[Disconnect] Connector
FP7B0541.EPS
<REMARKS>
Attaching position of the BCR
BCR Shield plate Shield plate BCR
FP7B0542.EPS
006-259-03
3 TRAY LOADING UNIT
FP7Z0311.EPS
3 - 1 Tray Loading Unit
FP7C0322.EPS
<NOTE>
The following describes the procedure for the upper tray loading unit. Perform the same
procedure for the middle and lower tray loading units. Steps that differ between the three units
are indicated separately.
• Rear cover
(2) Remove the trays.
“3.2 Tray”
006-259-03
MC-15
(3) Remove the tray inside cover.
Tray inside cover
[Remove] 4-TP4x8
FP7C0301.EPS
006-259-03
MC-16
(4) Remove the bracket.

(5) Remove the tray loading unit.
(5) #2
[Disconnect]
(5) #2 Connector
[Disconnect] SA12-COM
Connector
SA12-NC
(5) #2
[Disconnect]
Connector
SOLA11
(5) #1
(5) #2 [Release] Clamp x 5
[Disconnect]
Connector (4) #2
SA13 [Release] Clamp
Bracket
(4) #1
[Remove] 2-BR4x8
FP7C0302.EPS
(5) #4
[Disconnect]
Connector SA11
(5) #3
[Release] Clamp x 2
(5) #5
[Remove] 3-BR4x8
Tray loading unit
Film pack/shutter detection sensor
FP7C0303.EPS
006-259-03
MC-17
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Bind the extra length of the cable so that it does not come out of the tray insertion
portion.
Clamp
#1
[Bind] Cable
FP7B0552.EPS
006-259-03
3 - 2 Tray
FP7C0323.EPS
• Rear cover
<NOTE>
When pulling out the tray from the equipment, insert shutter in the tray to prevent exposure of
film to light.
006-259-03
MC-19
(2) Remove the tray.
#2
[Push slightly] Tray
#1
[Release manually] Tray lock
FP7B0506.EPS
#3
[Push] Stopper
#4 #3
[Pull out] Tray Tray [Push] Stopper
FP7C0304.EPS
006-259-03
MC-20
CAUTION
After removing the tray, return the rail back into the equipment as it will come in the way
of the job and is also dangerous.
#2 L R
[Push] Rail (Left)
#1 #3 #4
[Release] Latch [Release] Latch [Push] Rail (Right)
FP7C0305.EPS
However, there is no need to pull out the rail pushed into the equipment.
006-259-03
MC-21
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
3 - 3
Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor
(SA11, SA21, SA31)
FP7C0324.EPS
“3.2 Tray”
Tray inside cover
[Remove] 4-TP4x8
FP7C0301.EPS
006-259-03
MC-23
(3) Remove the film pack/shutter detection sensor (SA11, SA21, SA31).
#2
[Disconnect]
Connector SA11
#1
[Release] Clamp x 2
#3
[Remove] BR4x8 Film pack/shutter detection sensor
FP7C0306.EPS
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Bind the extra length of the cable so that it does not come out of the tray insertion
portion.
Clamp
#1
[Bind] Cable
FP7B0552.EPS
006-259-03
3.4
3 - 4
Tray Detection Switch (SA12, SA22,
SA32)
FP7C0325.EPS
(1) Temporarily secure the tray detection switch with the two screws.
(2) While pushing the switch in the arrow direction (A) shown in the figure, tighten the
screws completely.

A
Screw
FP7C0335.EPS
<NOTE>
Check that the connectors are connected at the correct positions.

SA12-NC
SA12-COM
FP7C0307.EPS
Reinstalling in the reverse order of removal.
006-259-03
MC-25
■ CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
If the tray detection switch has been removed or installed, check as follows.
(1) Turn ON the power of the equipment, and start the M-Utility during initialization.
(2) Set the sensors (SA12, SA22, SA32) into the monitoring state using [Sensor
Monitor] of [Check Mechanism].
(3) Shake the tray to and fro, and check that no tray open occurs.
006-259-03
3 - 5 Tray Lock Assembly
FP7C0326.EPS
• Rear cover
(2) Pull out the tray.
(3) Remove the tray lock assembly.
#2 #3
[Disconnect] [Remove] 2-BR4x8
Connector
#2 SOLA11
[Disconnect]
Connector
SA13
#2
SA12-COM
#1
[Release] Clamp
#2
SA12-NC
Tray lock assembly
FP7C0308.EPS
Tray lock assembly
Back side
FP7C0309.EPS
006-259-03
3 - 6 Tray Loading Unit Rail
FP7C0327.EPS
(2) Remove the tray lock assembly.
“3.5 Tray Lock Assembly”
<NOTE>
When removing the tray loading unit rail, while sliding the inner rail and inner slide rail, remove
the screws.
Outer rail Inner slide rail Inner rail Inner slide rail
FP7C0320.EPS
(3) Remove the tray loading unit rail.

#1 #2
[Push to rear] Inner slide rail [Remove] 4-T4x4
#3
[Remove] 4-T4x4
Tray loading unit rail

Auxiliary plate

#4
[Remove] 2-T4x4
FP7C0310.EPS
006-259-03
MC-28
(1) While pressing the tip in front and behind the left rail of the tray loading unit
against the aperture of the tray loading unit, secure the rail with the screws.
#2
[Press] Rail
#4
[Press] Rail #1
[Temporarily tighten]
2-T4x4
#3
[Tighten] 2-T4x4
#1
2-T4x4 aperture
#5
[Tighten] 2-T4x4
aperture
FP7C0311.EPS
(2) Secure the auxiliary plate to the tray loading unit right rail using the screws.
(3) Place the tip in front and behind the right rail of the tray loading unit on the
aperture of the tray loading unit, tighten the rail temporarily with the screws.
Auxiliary plate
(3)
2-T4x4 Tray loading
unit rail (right)
(2)
[Tighten] 2-T4x4
Aperture (3)
2-T4x4
Aperture
FP7C0312.EPS
006-259-03
MC-29
(4) Push the protrusion in front and behind the auxiliary plate secured to the tray
loading unit right rail against the part for attaching on the tray loading unit, and
while pressing the rail against the aperture, tighten the temporarily tightened
screws firmly.
(4) #2
[Press] Rail
(4) #1
[Push] Rail
(4) #5
(4) #4 [Press] Rail
[Push] Rail
Auxiliary
plate
(4)#3
Tray loading
[Tighten] 2-T4x4
unit rail (right)
(4)#6
[Tighten] 2-T4x4 FP7C0334.EPS
• After reinstalling the tray loading unit rail, insert the tray into the tray loading unit, and
check that it moves smoothly.
• Apply bonding to the ten screws securing the tray loading unit rail.
006-259-03
3 - 7 Tray Rail
FP7C0328.EPS
“3.2 Tray”
(2) Remove the tray rail.
#1
[Remove] 5-T4x4
Tray rail
Tray rail
CHECK
#2
CHECK [Remove] 5-T4x4
FP7C0313.EPS
006-259-03
MC-31
(1) Temporarily secure the tray rail to the tray.
(2) While pressing the tray rail downwards, tighten the screws.
(1)
[Temporarily tighten] 5-T4x4 (2) #2
(2) #3 [Push against]
[Tighten] 5-T4x4 Tray rail Tray rail
(2) #1
[Press downwards] Tray rail
FP7C0314.EPS
• After reinstalling the tray rail, insert the tray into the tray loading unit, and check that
it moves smoothly.
• Apply bonding to the ten screws securing the tray rail.
006-259-03
3 - 8 Squeezing Roller
FP7C0329.EPS
“3.2 Tray”
<NOTE>
When removing the squeezing roller, be careful not to damage the bearing of the tray,
(2) Remove the squeezing roller.

#2
[Remove] Squeezing roller
#1
[Pull] Bearing
FP7C0315.EPS
006-259-03
MC-33
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
3 - 9 Special Screw
FP7C0333.EPS
“3.2 Tray”
(2) Remove the upper rear cover of the tray.
(3) Remove the special screws.
Upper rear cover
(3)
[Remove] Special Screw
(2) #1
[Remove] 3-Q4x6
FP7C0318.EPS
006-259-03
MC-35
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Attach the special screws so that only the ball bearing at the tip of the special screw
protrudes from the tray surface.
REMARKS>
These special screws are producing the click sound when inserting shutters.
Shutter Ball bearing
Tray surface
Special screw
FP7C0319.EPS
006-259-03
4 REMOVAL UNIT
FP7Z0411.EPS
4 - 1 Removal Unit
FP7C0412.EPS
“3.1 Tray Loading Unit”
006-259-03
MC-37
(2) Remove the shield cover.

(3) Remove the removal unit.
<NOTE>
• Remove the screws (4-BR4x8) securing the removal unit while supporting the removal unit
with the hand.
• To remove the removal unit, slide it to the left until the pins dislocate from the frame, then tilt
the removal unit to remove. Make sure that the removal unit does not touch the BCR
assembly at this time.
(3) #1
[Disconnect]
Connecter
CNB1
(3) #2
[Remove] 4-BR4x8 (3) #1
[Disconnect]
Connecter
MB11
(2) #2
[Remove]
Shield cover
Removal unit
CHECK (2) #1
Pin [Remove]
Shield cover BR3x8
FP7C0401.EPS
006-259-03
MC-38
<NOTE>
When reinstalling the removal unit, return the suction cup arm to the home position.
• When reinstalling the removal unit, insert the pins on the removal unit into the holes
on the equipment.
• Perform the following adjustment if the idle gear of the removal unit has been
removed or if the idle gear has been loosened.
(1) Secure the gear while pressing the flange of the idle gear against the gears in the
arrow direction shown below.
Upper removal unit
Idle gear
Upper conveyor unit
Middle removal unit
Middle conveyor unit Idle gear
Lower removal unit
Lower conveyor unit Idle gear
FP7C0402.EPS
006-259-03
MC-39
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
4 - 2 Removal Drive Cam
FP7C0413.EPS
“4.1 Removal Unit”
<NOTE>
When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm assembly to the home
position first.
(2) Remove the gear fixing cover.

(3) Remove the gear 1 and gear 2.
(3)
[Remove] Gear 1
Gear fixing cover
(2) #1
[Release] Clamp
(3)
[Remove] Gear 2
Bearing (2) #2
(2) #1 [Remove] E6
[Release] Clamp (2) #3
[Remove] 4-DT3x6 FP7C0403.EPS
006-259-03
MC-41
(4) Remove the removal drive cam together with the crank.
Crank
Crank
#1
[Remove] E3
#1
[Remove] E3
Removal drive cam
Removal drive cam

FP7C0404.EPS
<NOTE>
When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm assembly to the home
position first.
(1) Reinstall the removal drive cam to the removal unit together with the crank.
(2) Insert pins such as hexagonal wrench into the two holes on gear 1, and adjust the
phase of the removal drive cam.
(3) Reinstall gear 2.
Gear 1
(3) (2) #1
[Insert] Pin
[Reinstall]
Gear 2 FP7C0405.EPS
006-259-03
MC-42
(4) Align the gear fixing cover to the attaching position, and pull out the pin.
(5) Align the rib positions of gears 1 and 2.
(5) #1
[Align] Rib
Gear 2 Gear 1
Gear 1
Gear 2
(4)
[Pull out] Pin
Gear fixing cover (5) #2

[Reinstall] Bearing
FP7C0406.EPS
(6) Secure the gear fixing cover with the screws.

(7) Secure the cable with the clamp.
After reinstalling the removal drive cam, check that the suction cup arm assembly
moves smoothly.
006-259-03
MC-43
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
4 - 3 Suction Cup Arm
FP7C0414.EPS
4.3.1 Removal/Reinstallation
“3.2 tray”
Tray inside cover
[Remove] 4-TP4x8
FP7C0301.EPS
006-259-03
MC-45
(3) Remove the suction cup arm.

(3) #2
SB2
Suction cup arm
(3) #1
[Release] Clamp (3) #3
[Remove] 4-BR3x8
FP7C0407.EPS
006-259-03
MC-46
4.3.2 Changing Film Size to 20 x 25 cm

Perform the following procedure to change the film size of the current film tray (35 x 43
cm, 26 x 36 cm, or 25 x 30 cm) to 20 x 25 cm size.
(2) Remove the suction cup arm, and replace with the 20 x 25 cm size suction cup
arm.
#3
[Remove] suction cup arm
#4
[Replace] 20 x 25 cm size
suction cup arm
#2
[Remove] 4-BR3x8
#5
[Secure] 4-BR3x8
Removal unit
#1
#6
[Connect] Connector FP7C0542.EPS
(3) Change the attaching position of the film release plate.

#1
[Remove] 4-DT3x6
#3
[Secure] 4-DT3x6
For 20 x 25 cm size
Mark
#2
[Move] Film release plate x 2
FP7C0543.EPS
006-259-03
MC-47
(4) To change the film size from 35 x 43 cm to 20 x 25 cm, change the attaching
position of the barcode reader.
“2.1 BCR Assembly”
FP7B0542.EPS
(5) Reinstall the removed parts in the reversed order of the removing procedure.
<REMARKS>
The attaching position of the film release plate of the removal unit is marked with the
respective film sizes. To return the film size from 20 x 25 cm to other sizes, refer to the
following figure and change the attaching position of the film release plate.
For 35x43, 26x36 For 25x30 cm size

cm size
For 20x25 cm size
For 35x43, 26x36,

25x30 cm size
FP7C0420.EPS
006-259-03
MC-48
4.3.3 Changing Film Size to 25 x 30 cm

Perform the following procedure to change the film size of the current film tray (35 x 43,
26 x 36 cm) to 25 x 30 cm size.
<NOTE>
• Equipment with the following serial numbers can be used 25 x 30 cm size film.
• #21936, #22687, #23291 or later
later is required.
• As the suction cup arm of the removal unit for 20 x 25 cm is different, it cannot be changed
to the 25 x 30 cm size.
■ Changing Procedure
“4.3.1 Removal/Reinstallation”
(3) Remove the suction cup unit at the rear side.
#1
[Remove] 2-E3
#2
[Remove] Bracket
#3
[Remove] 2-E3
#5
[Remove] Bearing x 2
#4
[Remove] Suction cup unit
FP7C0417.EPS
006-259-04
MC-49
(4) Attach the rear side suction cup unit at the 25 x 30 cm position.
Mark
FP7C0418.EPS
(5) Remove the removal conveyance roller (upper) assembly and film surface
detection sensor.
#4
#3
[Remove] Removal conveyance
roller (upper) assembly
#2
[Remove] Bracket
#6
[Remove] Film surface
#1 #5 detection sensor
[Remove] 2-PS3x8 [Remove] DT3x6
FP7C0421.EPS
006-259-03
MC-50
(6) Attach the removal conveyance roller (upper) assembly and film surface detection
sensor at the 25 x 30 cm size position.
Mark
For 25x30 cm size
For 35x43,
26x36 cm size
Mark
#2
#1 [Reinstall] Bearing x 4
[Reinstall] Film surface
detection sensor
DT3x6
#3
[Reinstall] Removal conveyance
#4 roller (upper) assembly
[Reinstall] Bracket
2-PS3x8
FP7C0422.EPS
(7) Reinstall the suction cup arm

<NOTE>
Check that the connector of the film surface detection sensor is connected properly.
006-259-03
MC-51
(8) Change the attaching position of the film release plate.
#1 For 25x30 cm size

[Remove] 2-DT3x6
#3
[Secure] 2-DT3x6
Mark
#2
[Move] Film release plate
FP7C0419.EPS
(9) Return the suction cup arm to the home position.

(10) To change the film size from 35 x 43 cm to 25 x 30 cm, change the attaching
position of the barcode reader (BCR).
“2.1 BCR Assembly”
FP7B0542.EPS
(11) Reinstall the removed parts in the reversed order of the removing procedure.
006-259-03
MC-52
■ Settings, Checks, and Adjustments after Changing to 25 x 30 cm Film Size

After changing to the 25 x 30 cm film size, perform the following settings, checks, and
adjustments.
(1) Set the film size (25 x 30 cm) and base color.
[System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Set Tray]
“SERVICE MODE (MU) 3. M-UTILTIY [1-1-2-1] Set Tray”
(2) Set the film count of the film tray changed to 25 x 30 cm film size to zero.
[Check Mechanism] → [Film Removing] → [Set Remain. Films]
“SERVICE MODE (MU) 3. M-UTILTIY [5-1-2] Set Remain. Films”
(3) If [QC] is set to “Enable”, perform [FORMAT] settings only for the film tray
changed to the 25 x 30 cm film size.
“SERVICE MODE (MU) 2. U-UTILTIY [14-3-3] FORMAT”
(4) Reboot the equipment to validate the settings.
(5) Check that the equipment is in the standby state, touch [UNLOCK TRAY] of the U-
Utility, and pull out the film tray.
(6) Load 25 x 30 cm film on the tray and push in.
(8) Print grid patterns from 25 x 30 cm film size tray, and check the format of the
recording images.
“8.4 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and
Scratches”
<NOTE>
If film skew occurs, adjust the sub-scanning unit position.
“REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 6.1.2 Adjusting the Sub-Scanning Unit
Positioning Screw”
006-259-03
4 - 4 Suction Cup
FP7C0415.EPS
“4.3 Suction Cup Arm”
(2) Remove the suction cup.
#2
[Remove] Suction cup
#1
[Remove] Nozzle
FP7C0408.EPS
006-259-03
4 - 5 Bellows
FP7C0416.EPS
“4.3 Suction Cup Arm”
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Rotate the bellows in the tightened state to remove.
(2) Remove the bellows.
CHECK
#3
[Remove] Bellows #2
[Pull out] Bellows
#1
[Lower] Plate
O ring
Stopper
FP7C0409.EPS
006-259-03
MC-55
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• If the bellows has been removed, be sure to replace the O ring.
• To reinstall, insert the second groove on the top of the bellows into the plate.
• When reinstalling, screw in the bellows completely.
2nd groove
Bellows
Stopper
FP7C0410.EPS
Check for air leakage as follows.
(1) Push down the plate, and with an approximately 50 mm space between the plate
and stopper, push the suction cup against the film.
(2) Two minutes later, check that the space is still 50 mm.
[Push down] Plate
50mm
Stopper
Film
FP7C0411.EPS
006-259-03
5 CONVEYOR UNIT
FP7Z0511.EPS
5 - 1 Upper Conveyor Unit
FP7C0521.EPS
(1) Insert the shutter into the film tray.
• Rear cover
(3) Remove the cleaning roller.
006-259-03
MC-57
(4) If the equipment mounts film tray 2, loosen the screws securing the idle gear of
the middle conveyor unit.
Upper removal unit
Upper conveyor unit
Middle removal unit
#1
[Loosen] 2-BR3x6
Lower removal unit
Lower conveyor unit
FP7C0540.EPS
006-259-03
MC-58
(5) Remove the sub-scanning unit fixing bracket.
Sub-scanning unit fixing bracket
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
FP7C0613.EPS
(6) Reinstall the sub-scanning unit fixing bracket at the position shown below.
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
FP7C0546.EPS
006-259-03
MC-59
(7) Remove the screws securing the sub-scanning unit.
#1
[Remove] BR4x8
Sub-scanning unit
FP7C0535.EPS
(8) Remove the upper conveyor unit removing jig.
[Remove] TP4x8
Upper conveyor unit removing jig

FP7C0533.EPS
006-259-03
MC-60
(9) Insert the upper conveyor unit removing jig below the sub-scanning unit.
Turn the upper conveyor unit removing jig clockwise direction to lift the sub-
scanning unit.
Insert a jig such as hexagonal wrench, and secure.
Sub-scanning unit
#2
[Lift] Sub-scanning unit
#1
[Turn]
Upper conveyor unit #3
removing jig [Insert] Hexagonal wrench
FP7C0534.EPS
(10) Remove the upper conveyor unit.

#1 [Disconnect] #1 [Disconnect]
#1 [Disconnect] Connector CND1 Connector CND3
Connector CND2
Connector CND4
Connector CND4
Connector MD4 Connector MD2
#1 [Disconnect]
Connector CLD1
#3 Shield cover
[Remove] BR3x8

[Remove] BR3x8
#4
[Remove] 5-BR4x8
#2 #1 [Disconnect]
[Release] Clamp Connector CND6 FP7C0501.EPS
006-259-03
MC-61
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When reinstalling the upper conveyor unit, check that:
• The pin on the upper conveyor unit is inserted into the groove of the sub-scanning
unit rail.
• The bent portion of the rear frame of the upper conveyor unit is inserted into the plate
spring.
Sub-scanning unit rail
Upper conveyor unit
Pin FP7C0545.EPS
Plate spring
Rear frame of
upper conveyor unit
FP7C0550.EPS
006-259-03
MC-62
Perform the following adjustment if the idle gear of the middle conveyor unit has been
Upper removal unit
Upper conveyor unit
Middle removal unit

Idle gear
FP7C0541.EPS
006-259-03
MC-63
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
5 - 2 Film Positioning Motor (Lower) (MD6)
FP7C0522.EPS
(2) Remove the film positioning motor (lower) (MD6).
#2
[Disconnect] Connector MD6
#1
[Release] Clamp
#3
[Remove] 2-DT3x6
Film positioning motor (lower) MD6

FP7C0502.EPS
006-259-03
MC-65
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Open the left and right positioning guides of the positioning guide assembly until they
touch the sides when installing the film positioning motor (MD6).
[Push] Positioning guide Positioning guide assembly

Positioning guide
[Push] Positioning guide

FP7C0503.EPS
006-259-03
5 - 3 Upper Conveyor Unit Exit Motor (MD2)
FP7C0523.EPS
• Rear cover
(2) Remove the conveyor unit exit clutch (CLD1).
(3) #3
[Disconnect]
Connector MD2
(2) #3
[Disconnect]
Connector CLD1
(3) #3
[Release] Clamp
(3) #4
[Remove]
Clutch connector
(3) #1
[Remove] 2-DT3x6
(3) #2
[Remove]
(2) #1
[Remove] E5 (2) #2
[Pull out]
FP7C0504.EPS
006-259-03
MC-67
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
Cleaning Roller Grip Release Motor
5 - 4 (MD4)
FP7C0524.EPS
• Rear cover
(2) Rotate the worm gear of the cleaning roller grip release motor (MD4) in the arrow
direction shown in the figure with the hand so that it grips the cleaning roller.
#1
[Rotate] Worm gear
FP7C0539.EPS
006-259-03
MC-69
(3) Remove the cleaning roller grip release motor (MD4).

<NOTE>
Remove the one-way gear assembly making sure not to drop the bearing.
Bearing
One-way gear
assembly
Bearing
CHECK
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector MD4
#2
[Remove] 2-DT3x6
release motor (MD4)
FP7C0505.EPS
Reinstall the motor with the D cut side of the one-way gear assembly shaft facing up.
006-259-03
5 - 5 Film Positioning Assembly (Lower)
FP7C0525.EPS
“5.1 Upper Conveyor Unit”
(2) Remove the grip position detection sensor bracket.
(3) Remove the connector bracket.
(2) #2
[Disconnect] Connector SD3
(2) #1
[Remove] DT3x6
(2) #2 Grip position detection sensor bracket

[Disconnect]
Connector SD4
(3) #1 Connector bracket

[Remove] BR3x8
FP7C0506.EPS
006-259-03
MC-71
(4) Remove the film positioning assembly (lower).
Flange gear #1
[Remove] E6
#2
[Release] Clamp
#3
[Disconnect] Connector MD6
Film positioning assembly (lower)

#4 #3
[Remove] 3-DT3x6 [Disconnect] Connector SD7
FP7C0507.EPS
006-259-03
5 - 6 Film Positioning Motor (Upper) (MD5)
FP7C0526.EPS
(2) Remove the film positioning motor (upper) (MD5).
#2
[Disconnect] #1
Connector MD5 [Release] Clamp
Film positioning assembly

(upper) #3
[Remove] Film positioning motor
2-DT3x6 (upper) (MD5)
FP7C0508.EPS
006-259-03
MC-73
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Open the left and right positioning guides of the positioning guide assembly until they
touch the sides when installing the film positioning motor (MD5).

Positioning guide

FP7C0503.EPS
006-259-03
5 - 7 Film Positioning Assembly (Upper)
FP7C0527.EPS

(2) Remove the film positioning motor (upper) (MD5).
“5.6 Film Positioning Motor (Upper) (MD5)”
(3) Remove the conveyance guide.
#1 Conveyor guide
[Remove] Guide #3
[Remove] 2-DT3x6
#4
[Release]
Clamp
#2
[Disconnect]
Connector SD1
FP7C0509.EPS
006-259-03
MC-75
(4) Remove the turn guide.

(5) Remove the connector bracket.
(4) #2
Turn guide [Remove] Bearing
(4) #1
[Remove] E4
(5) #1
[Remove] DT3x6
Connector bracket
(4) #2
[Remove]
Bearing
(4) #1 (5) #1
[Remove] E4 [Remove]
DT3x6
Connector bracket
FP7C0510.EPS
(6) Remove the stay.

(7) Remove the screws of the conveyor unit exit guide.
(8) Remove the film positioning assembly (upper).
(6) #1
[Remove] 4-DT3x6
Stay
(7) #1
[Remove] 2-DT3x6
Conveyor unit exit guide
(8) #1
[Release] Clampx6
(7) #2
[Remove] 2-BR3x8
(8) #3
[Remove] 3-DT3x6 (8) #2 Film positioning assembly (upper)
FP7C0511.EPS
006-259-03
MC-76
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Open the left and right positioning guides until they touch the sides when installing the
film positioning motor (MD5).

Positioning guide

FP7C0503.EPS
006-259-03
MC-77
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
5 - 8 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide
FP7C0528.EPS
(2) Remove the conveyor unit exit clutch (CLD1).
“5.3 Upper Conveyor Unit Exit Motor (MD2)”
(3) Remove the conveyor unit exit roller.
#3
[Remove] Conveyor unit exit roller
#1
#2 [Remove] E6
FP7C0551.EPS
006-259-03
MC-79
(4) Remove the sensor bracket.

(5) Remove the conveyor unit exit guide.
(4)#1
[Release] Clamp
Sensor bracket
(4)#2
[Remove] DT3x6

(5)#1
[Remove] 2-DT3x6
(5)#2
[Remove] 2-BR3x8
FP7C0512.EPS
<NOTE>
When reinstalling the conveyor unit exit guide, fit the guide to the bearing of the conveyor unit
exit roller first before tightening the screws.
Bearing
FP7B0552.EPS
006-259-03
5 - 9 Conveyance Driving Roller (Upper)
FP7C0529.EPS

(2) Remove the knob.
(3) Remove the handle.
Knob
(3) #1
[Remove]
BR3x10
(2) #1
[Remove] BR3x8
Handle
FP7C0513.EPS
006-259-03
MC-81
(4) Remove the grip idler gear.

(5) Remove the grip arm.
(6) Remove the spring.
(6) [Remove] Spring
Grip arm
(6) [Remove] Spring
(5) #3
[Remove] E6
(5) #1
[Remove]
Conveyor drive gear
(5) #3
[Remove] E4
(4) #1
(5) #2 [Remove] E6
Grip arm [Remove] E6
(5) #2
[Remove] E4 Grip idler gear
FP7C0514.EPS
(7) Remove the conveyance grip roller (upper).

(8) Remove the conveyance driving roller (upper).
(8) #2
[Remove] Bearing
(8) #1
[Remove] E6
(7) #1
[Remove] Bearing
(8) #2
[Remove] Bearing
(8) #1
[Remove] E6
(7) #1
[Remove] Bearing
Conveyance driving roller (upper)
FP7C0515.EPS
006-259-03
MC-82
<REMARKS>
The taper of the roller edge of the conveyance driving roller (upper) differs according to the
parts number and version.
334N3566
For 35x43, 26x36 cm size
334N3610
For 35x43, 26x36,
20x25 cm size
334N3610A
For 35x43, 26x36,
20x25, 25x30 cm size
The shape of this taper is different. FP7C0553.EPS
006-259-03
MC-83
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
5 - 10 Conveyance Driving Roller (Lower)
FP7C0530.EPS
(2) Remove the upper conveyor unit lower bracket.
(3) Remove the drive transmission gear.
(3) #2
[Remove] E6
Bearing
(2) #3
[Remove] 4-DT3x6 (3) #1
[Remove] E6
Upper conveyor unit lower bracket
(2) #1 Shield cover Drive transmission

[Disconnect] (2) #2 gear
Connector [Release] Clamp
FP7C0517.EPS
006-259-03
MC-85
(4) Remove the grip idler gear.

(5) Remove the grip arm.
(6) Remove the spring.
Grip idler gear
(4) #1
[Remove] E6
(6) [Remove] Spring

(6) [Remove] Spring Grip arm
(5) #3
[Remove]
(5) #5 Conveyor drive gear
[Remove] E6
(5) #4
(5) #5 [Remove] E6
[Remove] E4
(5) #2
[Remove] (5) #1 (5) #4
Grip arm
Idler gear [Remove] E6 [Remove] E4
FP7C0518.EPS
(7) Remove the conveyance grip roller (lower).

(8) Remove the conveyance driving roller (lower).
(8) #2
[Remove] Bearing
(8) #1
[Remove] E6
(7) #1
[Remove] Bearing
Conveyance driving roller

(lower)
(8) #2
[Remove] Bearing
(8) #1 (7) #1
[Remove] E6 [Remove] Bearing
FP7C0519.EPS
006-259-03
5 - 11 Conveyor Unit Guide
FP7C0531.EPS
(2) Remove the film positioning assembly (lower).
“5.5 Film Positioning Assembly (Lower)”
(3) Remove the conveyance driving roller (upper).
“5.9 Conveyance Driving Roller (Upper)”
(4) Remove the conveyance driving roller (lower).
“5.10 Conveyance Driving Roller (Lower)”
(5) Remove the conveyor unit guide.
Boss
Conveyor unit guide
Boss
#1
[Release] Conveyor unit guide
#2
[Remove] 2-BR3x8
FP7C0520.EPS
006-259-03
5 - 12 Grip Idle Gear
If the grip idle gear of the upper conveyor unit has been removed, reinstall the gear as
following.
■ Adjusting Procedure
(1) Align the holes on the upper and lower grip release gears with the holes on the
side frame, insert the pins of a hexagonal wrench into the holes to adjust the
upper and lower arm phases, and then reintall the grip idle gear.
Pin
#1
[Reinstall] Grip idle gear
Grip release gear
#2
[Attach] E6
Pin FP7C0516.EPS
006-259-03
5 - 13 Lower Conveyor Unit
FP7C0536.EPS
• Rear cover
(2) Remove the lower conveyor unit.
Idle gear
Middle
conveyor unit
#1
[Loosen] 2-BR3x6
#4
[Remove]
Lower conveyor unit
Shield cover
#2
#3 [Remove] 2-BR3x8
[Remove] 4-BR4x8 FP7C0537.EPS
006-259-03
MC-89
Perform the following adjustment if the idle gear of the middle conveyor unit has been
Upper removal unit
Upper conveyor unit
Middle removal unit
Idle gear
Lower removal unit
Lower conveyor unit
FP7C0538.EPS
006-259-03
6 SUB-SCANNING UNIT
FP7Z0611.EPS
6 - 1 Sub-Scanning Unit
FP7C0609.EPS
• Rear cover
006-259-03
MC-91
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
FP7C0613.EPS
#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
#1
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
FP7C0614.EPS
006-259-03
MC-92
(5) Remove the shield plate.

(6) Remove the connector cover.
(7) Remove the sub-scanning unit.
(7) #1
LDD16A-CN1
(7) #1
LDD16A-CN3
(7) #1
LDD16A-CN7
Shield plate (7) #1
(5) #1 (6) #1 LDD16A-CN9
[Remove] 2-BR3x8 [Loosen] 2-BR4x12
Connector cover
FP7C0601.EPS
(7) #2
[Disconnect]
Connector ME1
(7) #2
[Disconnect]
Connector CNS2
(7) #3
[Remove]
BR4x12
(7) #3
[Remove] 2-BR4x8
Sub-scanning unit
FP7C0602.EPS
006-259-03
MC-93
(1) Insert the sub-scanning unit into the equipment, and temporarily secure with the
screws.
#1 #1
[Temporarily tighten] [Temporarily tighten]
2-BR4x8 BR4x12
#1
2-BR4x8
FP7C0616.EPS
006-259-03
MC-94
(2) Press the positioning screw against the rail, and secure the sub-scanning unit.
#2 #2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8 [Tighten] BR4x12
#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
#1
[Press against] Positioning screw
Positioning screw Rail of equipment

FP7C0603.EPS
(3) Remove the sub-scanning unit fixing bracket, and reinstall it to its original
position.
CAUTION
When removing the sub-scanning unit fixing bracket, be careful never remove the
screws painted in red.
Check that connectors are connected properly.
006-259-03
MC-95
6.1.2 Adjusting the Sub-Scanning Unit Positioning Screw

When adjusting the sub-scanning unit positioning screw, or if the positioning screws
has been turned accidentally, perform the following procedure.
(1) Print the grid pattern.
“Service Mode, [2-5] Grid”.
(2) Measure the “D” and “E” on the printed film and check that they meet the specified
values.
For 35 x 43 cm size
20 20
D E
Film conveyance
direction
(Unit: mm)
Position 35 x 43 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 20 x 25 cm size 25 x 30 cm size
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0
|D-E| ≤ 1.2 ≤ 1.2 ≤ 1.2 ≤ 1.2 FP7C0622.EPS
006-259-03
MC-96
(3) If the measured values are not the specified values, loosen the screws securing
the sub-scanning unit.
#1
[Loosen] 2-BR4x8
#1
[Loosen] 2-BR4x8
FP7C0617.EPS
006-259-03
MC-97
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
FP7C0613.EPS
#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
#1
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
FP7C0614.EPS
006-259-03
MC-98
(6) Rotate the positioning screw in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction and
adjust.
<NOTE>
Rotating once in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction changes the “D” and “E” on the
printed film by about 0.5 mm.
[Rotate] Positioning screw

FP7C0615.EPS
Film conveyance direction
A B FP7C0624.EPS
006-259-03
MC-99
#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
#1

FP7C0618.EPS

(9) Measure the “D” and “E” on the printed film and check that they meet the specified
values.
(10) If the measured values are not the specified values, repeat steps (3) to (9).
006-259-03
6 - 2 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1)
FP7C0610.EPS
“6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit”
(2) Remove the sub-scanning motor (ME1).
#1
[Remove] Q4x14
#2
[Remove] 4-TP4x8
FP7C0604.EPS
006-259-03
MC-101
6.2.2 Adjustment When Replacing Sub-scanning Motor

If the sub-scanning motor (ME1) has been replaced, check/adjust the film conveyance
amount as follows.
(2) Measure “F” on the printed film and check that it meets the specified value.
For 35 x 43 cm size
20
Film conveyance
F
direction
(Unit: mm)
F 413.0 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.0 ±1.0 225.0 ±1.0 FP7C0623.EPS
(3) If the measured values are not the specified values, adjust the film conveyance
amount.
“Service Mode, [5-2-2] Adjusting subscanner”.
006-259-03
6 - 3 Sub-Scanning Roller
FP7C0611.EPS
(2) Remove the scanner unit.
“7.1 Scanner Unit”
(3) Remove the sub-scanning motor (ME1).
“6.2 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1)”
(4) Remove the handle.
(5) Remove the belt cover.
(6) Remove the SUS belt.
(6) #1
[Remove] Spring
(5) #1
[Remove] BR4x8
Belt cover
(4) #1
[Remove] BR3x10
SUS belt
(6) #2
[Lower] SUS belt tensioner Handle
FP7C0605.EPS
006-259-03
MC-103
(7) Remove the sub-scanning roller (left).
#2
[Pull out]
Sub-scanning roller (Left)
Waveform washer
#1
[Remove] BR4x8
Sub-scanning roller (left)
W5
FP7C0606.EPS
(8) Remove the sub-scanning unit entrance guide.

(9) Remove the sub-scanning roller (right).
Sub-scanning unit entrance guide
(9) #3
[Pull out]
Sub-scanning unit roller (Right)
(8) #1
Waveform washer [Remove] BR4x8
Sub-scanning roller (right) W5 (9) #1

[Remove] BR4x8
(9) #2
[Lower] SUS belt tensioner
FP7C0607.EPS
006-259-03
MC-104
<NOTE>
• When installing the sub-scanning roller, be sure to reinstall the waveform washer.
• After reinstalling the sub-scanning roller, rotate the roller four or five times with the hand, and
check that it turns smoothly.
006-259-03
MC-105
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor
6 - 4 (SE1)
FP7C0612.EPS
• Rear cover
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
FP7C0613.EPS
006-259-03
MC-107
#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
#1
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
FP7C0614.EPS
006-259-03
MC-108

(7) Draw the sub-scanning unit.
(7) #1
LDD16A-CN1
(7) #1
LDD16A-CN3
(7) #1
LDD16A-CN7
Shield plate (7) #1
(5) #1 (6) #1 LDD16A-CN9
Connector cover
FP7C0601.EPS
006-259-03
MC-109
(7)#2
[Disconnect] Connector ME1
(7)#2
[Disconnect] Connector CNS2
(7)#3
[Remove] 2-BR4x8
Sub-scanning unit
FP7C0619.EPS
(8) Remove the film leading edge detection sensor (SE1).
#1
SED
Film leading edge detection sensor (SE1)
#2
[Remove] 2-BR3x8
FP7C0608.EPS
006-259-03
MC-110
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. However, perform the following when
securing the sub-scanning unit into the equipment.
(1) Insert the sub-scanning unit into the equipment, and temporarily secure with the
screws.
#1
2-BR4x8
#1
2-BR4x8
FP7C0620.EPS
006-259-03
MC-111
#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
#1

FP7C0621.EPS
(3) Remove the sub-scanning unit fixing bracket, and reinstall it to its original
position.
CAUTION
When removing the sub-scanning unit fixing bracket, be careful never remove the
006-259-03
7 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
FP7Z0711.EPS
7 - 1 Scanner Unit
FP7C0703.EPS
CAUTION
• The LD/IC may damage due to static electricity. When removing/reinstalling it, take
anti-static measures by wearing a wrist band, etc.
• Do not remove the upper cover of the scanner unit.
• Do not place your finger inside the laser beam window (at the bottom of the scanner
unit).
• Handle the optical unit gently, making sure not to subject it to shock.
006-259-03
MC-113
“6.1 Sub-scanning Unit”
(2) Remove the scanner unit.
#1
[Remove] 4-BR4x12
Scanner unit
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK
FP7C0701.EPS
006-259-03
MC-114
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure. However perform the
following when installing the scanner unit to the sub-scanning unit.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When pushing the scanner unit against the positioning plate, push gently without
subjecting it to shock.
(1) Align the scanner unit to the reinstalling position of the sub-scanning unit, and
secure temporarily with the screws.
(2) Push the two positioning brackets and protruded part on the scanner unit against
the sub-scanning unit at the positions shown in the following figure.
(3) Secure the scanner unit with the screws.
(2) Scanner unit (1)

[Push] Scanner unit [Secure temporarily] 4-BR4x12
(3)
[Tighten] 4-BR4x12
(1)
[Secure temporarily] 4-BR4x12
(2)
(3) [Push] Scanner unit
[Tighten] 4-BR4x12
FP7C0702.EPS
• Make sure that there is no gap between the sub-scanning unit positioning plate and
scanner unit positioning parts.
• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.
006-259-03
MC-115
7.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit

If the scanner unit has been replaced, the data in the scanner unit data FD provided
with the scanner unit needs to be sent to the equipment.
(2) Prepare the PC for servicing.
“SERVICE MODE, 4.3.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network”, “4.3.2
Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool)”, “4.3.3 Connecting DPX7 PC Tool to the
Equipment”
<NOTE>
Check that the directory setting of the FTP site is “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX”.
“SERVICE MODE, 4.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC”
(3) Import the individual data.

“Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Printer => PC]
#1 #2 #4 #3
#5 FP7C0F34.EPS
→ The individual data is sent to the PC for servicing. When the data transfer is
completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
006-259-05
MC-116
(4) Insert the scanner unit data FD provided with the scanner unit into the FDD of the
PC for servicing.
(5) Copy scanner unit data to the PC for sevicing.
“Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Restore]
→ The [Restore] window for selecting the folder containing the scanner unit data
appears.
(6) Select “Drive A” → [OK]
→ Scanner unit data is copied to the PC for servicing.
#1
#2
FP7C0F38.EPS
→ When completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.

(7) Send the individual data containing the scanner unit data copied to the
equipment.
“Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [PC => Printer]
→ The individual data is sent to the equipment, and only the scanner unit data is updated.
When the data transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
(8) End the DPX7 PC Tool and DI Tool.
(9) If directory settings of the FTP site have been changed, set back to the original
settings.
(10) Remove the FD from the PC for servicing.
(11) Reboot the equipment, and start the M-Utility.
(12) Output the grid pattern using the M-Utility.
“SERVICE MODE, [2-5] Grid”
006-259-05
MC-117
(13) Measure “C” of the film output, and check that the values satisfy the specification.
For 35 x 43 cm size
B C A
Film conveyance
direction
(Unit: mm)
|A-B| ≤ 1.2 ≤ 1.2 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 1.2
C 300 ±1.2 300 ±1.2 200 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 FP7C0705.EPS
(14) If they do not, change the value of “[4-3-1] Scanning Width” of the M-Utility.
“SERVICE MODE, [4-3-1] Scanning Width”
(15) Measure “A” and “B” of the film output, and check that the values satisfy the
specification.
(16) If they do not, change the value of “[4-3-2] Scanning Position” of the M-Utility.
“SERVICE MODE, [4-3-2] Scanning Position”
(17) Perform automatic density correction.
“SERVICE MODE, [3-1] AUTO F.D.C.”
(18) Check the film density.
“SERVICE MODE, [3-2] Check Density”
006-259-03
8 HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT
FP7Z0811.EPS
8 - 1 Cooling Fan Assembly
FP7C0814.EPS
• Jam clear cover
• Upper left cover
(2) Remove the fan fixing bracket.
Cooling fan assembly
#1
[Remove] 4-BR3x8
Fan fixing bracket
FP7C0801.EPS
006-259-03
MC-119
(3) Remove the cooling fan assembly.
#2
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
#1
[Disconnect] Connector CNG3
FP7C0802.EPS
006-259-03
8 - 2 Filter Section Cooling Fan
FP7C0815.EPS
“8.1 Cooling Fan Assembly”
(2) Remove the fan duct.
(3) Remove the filter section cooling fan.
Fan duct
#1
[Remove] 4-BR3x8
Auxilary plate #2
[Remove] 2-BR4x40
Filter section cooling fan

FP7C0803.EPS
006-259-03
MC-121
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Reinstall the filter section cooling fan as shown in the figure.

Label
Cable Cooling fan assembly

FP7C0804.EPS
006-259-03
8 - 3 Film Cooling Section
FP7C0816.EPS
• Jam clear cover
• Upper left cover
• Upper right cover
(2) Remove the operation panel.
“10.1 Operation Panel”
(3) Remove the film release unit.
“9.1 Film Release Unit”
(4) Remove the film cooling section.
Round hole
#1
[Release]
Clamp
CHECK #2
[Disconnect]
Connector THG10
Film cooling section
CHECK
#3 #4
[Loosen] 2-BR4x8 [Remove] 5-BR4x8
FP7C0805.EPS
006-259-03
MC-123
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When reinstalling the film cooling section, press the shaft against the bracket as shown
in the figure, and secure with the screws.
[Press] Film cooling section shaft

FP7C0806.EPS
• After reinstalling the film cooling section, check from the round hole on the back of
the film cooling section that the gears of the film cooling section and heat
development unit are engaged.
• After reinstalling the film cooling section, rotate the jam handle, and check that it
moves smoothly.
006-259-03
8 - 4 Heat Development Unit
FP7C0817.EPS
• Jam clear cover
• Rear cover
• Left side cover
“8.1 Cooling Fan Assembly”
“10.1 Operation Panel”
“8.3 Film Cooling Section”
006-259-03
MC-125
(7) Remove the left inside cover.

(8) Remove the top panel.
Left inside cover
(7) #1 Top panel

[Remove] 2-BR3x8
(8) #1
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
(8) #2
[Release] Clamp
FP7C0807.EPS
(9) Remove the heat development unit.
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector CNG2
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector CNG4
#3
[Remove] 3-BR4x8 #1
[Disconnect]
Connector CNG1
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector MG1
#2
[Release] Clamp
FP7C0808.EPS
006-259-03
8 - 5 Heat Development Rack Assembly
FP7C0818.EPS
• Jam clear cover
• Rear cover
• Left side cover
“8.3 Film Cooling Section”
(5) Remove the cooling fan assembly together with the bracket.

#2
[Remove] 2-BR3x8
Bracket
Bracket
#3
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
#1
FP7C0823.EPS
006-259-03
MC-127
Left inside cover
[Remove] 2-BR3x8
FP7M0320.EPS
(7) Disconnect the connectors and earth cables.

(8) Remove the rack fixing brackets (small).
(9) Remove the rack fixing bracket (large).
<NOTE>
Do not remove the left and right fixing pins on the heat development rack assembly.
(10) Remove the heat development rack assembly.

(7) #2
[Disconnect] Connector THG7-9
(8) #2 (7) #2
[Remove] BR4x8 [Disconnect]
CHECK Connector HEAT3
Rack fixing bracket (small)
(8) #1
[Remove] CHECK
BR4x8 Rack fixing
bracket (small)
(7) #1
(10) [Remove] TP4x8
[Remove]
Heat development rack assembly
(9)
[Remove] 2-BR4x8 Rack fixing bracket (large)
FP7C0809.EPS
006-259-03
MC-128
<NOTE>
When reinstalling the adiabatic cover, do not sandwich the thermistor cable.
■ CHECK/Adjustment Procedure
Check that connectors are connected properly.
Third rack assembly
THG7-9
HEAT3
Second rack assembly
THG4-6
HEAT2
THG1-3
HEAT1
First rack assembly

FP7C0810.EPS
006-259-03
MC-129
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
8 - 6 Heat Development Roller
FP7C0819.EPS
(1) Remove the heat development rack assembly, and remove adiabatic cover.
“8.5 Heat Development Rack Assembly”
(2) Remove the fixing pins.
(3) Remove the heater assembly.
(4) Remove the heat development roller.
(3)
[Remove] Heater assembly
(2) #1
[Remove] Fixing pin (long)
(4) #1
[Remove] WP3x10
Bearing
(2) #2 Heat development roller

[Remove] Bearing
FP7C0811.EPS
Fixing pin (short)
006-259-03
MC-131
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
8 - 7 Thermal Protector
FP7C0825.EPS
(1) Remove the heat development rack assembly.
“8.5 Heat Development Rack Assembly”
(2) Remove adiabatic cover.
(3) Remove the fixing pins.
(4) Remove the heater assembly.
<NOTE>
• Heat development rollers and bearings may drop if the heat development rack assembly is
tilted with the heater assembly removed.
• Do not touch the rubber portion of the removed heat development rollers and heater side of
the heater assembly with bare hand.
(2)#1
[Remove] Adiabatic cover
(4)
[Remove] Heater assembly
(3)#2
[Remove] Fixing pins (long)
(3)#3
[Remove] Fixing pins (short) FP7C0826.EPS
006-259-08
02.15.2007 FM5077 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual MC-131.1
MC-131.2
(5) Disconnect the connector.

(6) Remove the thermal protector.
(6)#2 (6)#1
[Remove] Thermal protector [Remove] 2-3x6
(5)
[Disconnect] Connector x 2
FP7C0827.EPS
006-259-08
MC-131.3
<NOTE>
• When attaching the thermal protector, visually check that the tip of the screw is not
protruding out to the film conveyance side. (Reference screw tightening torque: 0.6Nm =
6kgcm)
Screw tip Film conveyance side

FP7C0828.EPS
• Attach the connectors of the thermal protector so that they all line up in a straight line.
FP7C0829.EPS
006-259-08
MC-131.4
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
9 FILM RELEASE UNIT
FP7Z0911.EPS
9 - 1 Film Release Unit
FP7C0904.EPS
• Jam clear cover
• Side ejection cover
006-259-03
MC-133

#1
[Release] Clamp
#2
[Disconnect]
Connector CNJ2
#2
[Disconnect]
Connector CNJ1
#3
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
Film release unit
FP7C0901.EPS
006-259-03
Density Measurement Light-Emitting
9 - 2 Board (LED15A)
FP7C0905.EPS
• Jam clear cover
• Film release unit cover
(2) Remove the LED15A installing bracket.
(3) Remove the density measurement light-emitting board.
(2) #3
[Disconnect]
Connector LED-CN85 (2) #1
[Remove] 2-BR3x8
(3) #1
[Remove] BR3x12
(3) #1
Shield [Remove] BR3x8
plate
Spacer
(2) #2
[Remove] Clamp
Density measurement
light-emitting board (LED15A)
(2) #3
[Disconnect] Connector SJ1
FP7C0902.EPS
006-259-03
MC-135
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Press the LED cover of the density measurement light-emitting board against the
position shown in the figure below, and secure.
[Press]
Density measurement light-emitting board (LED15A)
FP7C0903.EPS
006-259-03
10 CONTROLLER
FP7Z0A11.EPS
10 - 1 Operation Panel
FP7C0106.EPS
• Jam clear cover
#2 #2 #4
[Disconnect] [Disconnect]
[Disconnect] #4
Connector [Disconnect] Connector
Connector Connector
PANEL-CN5 PANEL-CN7
PANEL-CN2 PANEL-CN1
#4
Operation panel [Disconnect]
Connector
PANEL-CN8
#4
[Disconnect]
Connector
PANEL-CN6
#4 #3
[Disconnect] [Remove] BR3x8
Connector
PANEL-CN4
#1
[Remove] 2-BR3x8 FP7C0104.EPS
006-259-03
MC-137
<NOTE>
When reinstalling the upper left side cover, make sure that it does not interfere with the
operation panel.
006-259-03
10 - 2 Controller Assembly
FP7C0A04.EPS
• Left side cover
• Rear cover
• Lower front cover
(2) Remove the controller assembly.
#2
[Disconnect]
Shaded connector
#2
[Disconnect]
Connector PC-CN4
#2
[Disconnect]
Connector
PRN16A-CN2
#2
[Disconnect]
Connector #2
[Disconnect]
#1 Connector
[Release] PRN16A-CN4
Clamp
Controller
#4 assembly
#2
[Remove] [Disconnect]
3-BR3x8 Connector
PC-CN26
#2
[Disconnect]
Connector CNK1
#1 #2
[Release] [Disconnect]
Clamp Connector
PRN16A-CN6
FP7C0A01.EPS
006-259-03
MC-139
#5
[Pull out] Controller assembly
FP7C0A02.EPS
006-259-03
10.2 10 - 3 HDD
FP7C0A05.EPS
“10.2 Controller Assembly”
(2) Remove the HDD.
#2
[Remove] 4-BR3x12
HDD
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector HDD
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector HDD
FP7C0A03.EPS
006-259-03
MC-141
■ Replacing Procedure
The service parts HDD is installed with the OS and main unit software.
However, because the main unit software may not be of the latest version, if the HDD
has been replaced, perform full installation of the main unit software and re-installation
of individual data.
Prepare the latest main unit software CD-R when replacing the HDD.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2) Replace the HDD.
“■ Removing Procedure/■ Reinstalling Procedure”
(3) Turn ON the power of the equipment, and check the version of the main unit
software displayed at startup.
(4) Start the M-Utility, and set the network.
“INSTALLATION, 7.2.2 System Management/Network/Set Network”
(5) End the M-Utility, and turn OFF and then ON the power of the equipment.
“SERVICE MODE, 4.3.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network”,
“4.3.2 Starting the DI Tool(DPX7 PC Tool)”, “4.3.3 Connecting DPX7 PC
Tool to the Equipment”
<INSTRUCTIONS>
If the version of the main unit software in the HDD is old: Perform steps (7) and
onwards.
If the version of the main unit software in the HDD is latest: Perform steps (8) and
onwards.
(7) Perform full installation of the latest main unit software and installation of the
application program of the printer in the MCT board.
“12.3 Full Installation Steps (1) to (7)”
(8) Re-install the individual data.
“12.3 Full Installation Step (8) to (10)”
(9) Set the system date, film counter, and remaining number of films.
“12.3 Full Installation Steps (11) to (20)”
(10) Set whether to enable the [User Settable] function, and save the user settable
image to the new HDD when enabled.
“SERVICE MODE, 5.5 Setting Output of User Settable Images”
<NOTE>
• For the service parts HDD, the default value of [User Settable] is set to [Disable].
• For the service parts HDD for the equipment with main unit software version V7.0 or later, or
V13.0 or later, the default image of [User Settable] has been changed from the SMPTE
pattern to the grid pattern for checking unevenness.
006-259-08
10 - 4 PC Board
FP7C0A06.EPS
CAUTION
• Replace the PC board if the lithium battery has worn out.
• Return the old PC board to the Parts Center (factory).
• Improper replacement of the battery may result in explosion. When replacing the
lithium battery, use the battery designated by FUJIFILM Corporation or use an
equivalent battery. Dispose the old battery as specified by FUJIFILM Corporation.
• Main unit software version V10.0 or later requires Version D or later. This restriction
does not apply to main unit software version A00 to 04, or V4.1 or later.
(2) Remove the PRN board, MCT board, and image memory board.
“SERVICE PARTS LIST, 10. Controller”
(3) Disconnect all connectors on the PC board.
(4) Remove the PC board.
006-259-07
MC-143
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
10 - 5 MCT Board
FP7C0A07.EPS
(2) Remove the MCT board.
“SERVICE PARTS LIST 10. Controller”
■ Replacing Procedure
If the MCT board has been replaced, the software on the HD (printer installer, printer
OS, printer application) needs to be installed with a new MCT board.
(2) Remove the MCT board.
“■ Removing Procedure”
(3) Check the settings of DIPSW (S2) on the MCT board.
S2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
S2
ON
All OFF FP7C7A10.EPS
006-259-03
MC-145
(4) Reinstall the MCT board in the reverse order of removal.

(5) Turn ON the power of the equipment, and start the M-Utility during initialization.
(6) Display the version, and check that the model corresponding to the “Mode” is
displayed.
“SERVICE MODE, [1-1-5] Check Version”
(7) If a sorter is connected, set sorter setting to “Disable”.

“SERVICE MODE, [1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting”
(8) Install the software on the HD to the MCT board in the following order;
“PRT INST” → “PRT OS” → “PRT APL”
“SERVICE MODE, [1-1-8] Reload Software”
(9) Reboot the equipment.
If a sorter is connected, start the M-Utility during initialization, set sorter setting to
“Enable”, and then reboot the equipment.
006-259-03
10.6 10 - 6 DRV Board
FP7C0A09.EPS
■ Replacing the DRV16A Board with DRV16B Board

Perform the following procedure when replacing the DRV16A board with DRV16B
board.
<REMARKS>
As the DRV16B board is larger than the DRV16A board, there is a need to install the auxiliary
plate. Therefore the number of screws has been increased from six to nine.
● Checking the Kit Components

(1) Check the components of the DRV16B board kit (113Y1617A)
• DRV16B board ........................................................................................ 1
• Auxiliary plate (pasted with double-sided tape) ...................................... 1
• Double-sided tape (Spare) ...................................................................... 1
• Screw (BR3x8) ........................................................................................ 3
006-259-03
MC-147
● Replacing Procedure
(1) Remove the DRV16A board.
(2) Place the spacer at the top and paste the auxiliary plate.
Spacer
#1
[Paste] Auxiliary plate
FP7C0A08.EPS
(3) Install the DRV16B board with the nine screws.
006-259-03
11 SORTER
FP7C0B02.EPS
11 - 1 Film Conveyance Timing Belt
FP7C0B03.EPS
■ Belt Structure
Top belt
Inside belt
Bottom belt
FP3F0S43.EPS
006-259-03
MC-149
(1) There are three timing belts. Install the inside belt first and then the top and
bottom belts.
Top belt
Top belt
Inside belt Bottom belt

Bottom belt
Inside belt
FP3F0S42.EPS
006-259-03
MC-150
(1) With the fixing screws of the tension pulleys loosened, secure the tension pulleys
at the position where they are in balance by the force of the springs.
Tension spring
Top belt
Fixing screw
Bottom belt
Inside belt
Fixing screw
Fixing screw
Tension spring
Tension spring
FP3F0S40.EPS
006-259-03
11 - 2 Jam Removing Guide Plate Magnet
FP7C0B04EPS
(1) Loosen the fixing screws of the magnet.

(2) Close the jam removing guide plate, and tighten magnet fixing screws where it
touches the stopper.
Stopper
#2 [Push] Guide plate
#1 [Loosen] Two screws

#3 [Tighten] Two screws
Magnet
FP3F0S41.EPS
006-259-03
MC-152
12. VERSION UPGRADE AND FULL INSTALLATION

OF MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE
The main unit software is supplied on CD-R. The DI Tool is required for version
upgrading and full installation of the main unit software.
Version upgrade: The concerned files excluding individual data of the currently
installed software are overwritten.
Full installation: The concerned files including individual data of the currently
installed software are overwritten.
The table below shows the combinations of the main unit software and DPX7 PC Tool
version.
Main Unit Software Version

DPX7 PC Tool
Version V4.1/ V5.0/ V6.0/ V7.0 or later/
A00 A01 A02 A03 A04
V10.0/V10.1 V11.0 V12.0 V13.0 or later
A00 X X X X X X X X X
A02 X X X X X X X
A04 X X X X X X
A05 X X X X X
A06 ∗1 X X X
A08 X X X

DI Tool
A00 A01 A02 A03 A04
V10.0/V10.1 V11.0 V12.0 V13.0 or later
V1.0 ∗1 ∗1 ∗1 X X X
V2.0 ∗1 ∗1 ∗1 X
V3.0 ∗1 ∗1 ∗1
: Usable, X : Unusable, ∗1 : Only software installation is possible TP7C0F02.EPS
CAUTION
• During version upgrading and full installation, do not perform other procedures like
equipment settings, etc.
• To upgrade the main unit software version to A02/A03/A04/V10.0 or perform full
installation of these versions in equipment connected with a sorter, sorter setting
must be set to “Disable” beforehand. This setting requires no modification when the
equipment is installed with V4.1 or later, or V10.1 or later.
006-259-08
MC-153
<NOTE>
• As performing full installation will clear the individual data in the HD, the individual data
needs to be installed after completing full installation.
Use the latest individual data for installation.
• In version upgrades, individual data will be preserved.
• From DPX7 PC Tool version A09, the “Soft Ver.Up” function button display has been
changed to “Upgrading”, however some parts of this manual still uses the old name.
• For the equipment shipped with the main unit software version V7.0 or later/ V13.0 or later,
the grid pattern for checking unevenness is set as the default image of [User Settable]. For
the equipment with earlier version, the SMPTE pattern is set. Upgrading the main unit
software to V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later will not replace the User Settable image in the HD.
• For equipment with main unit software version V7.0 or later/V13.0 or later at shipment, when
equipment data is read, the DPX7 PC Tool screen [Clients:] list shows “MammoQCTest”.
However, if the version has been upgraded from an earlier version, as this will not be
displayed, add and register new clients.
<REMARKS>
The following shows the times required for software installation. Take note that these times
differ according to the performance and network environment of the PC for servicing used.
• Version upgrade (PC for servicing → Equipment): Approx. 2 minutes
• Full installation (PC for servicing → Equipment): Approx. 3 minutes
• PRT OS installation (HDD → MCT board): Approx. 15 seconds
• PRT APL installation (HDD → MCT board): Approx. 1 minute
12.1 Preparations (Same for Version Upgrades and Full

Installation)
(2) To upgrade the main unit software version to A02/A03/A04/V10.0 or perform full
installation of these versions in equipment connected with a sorter, first start the
M-Utility, set sorter settings to “Disable”, and then reboot the equipment.
This setting requires no modification when the equipment is installed with V4.1 or
later, or V10.1 or later.
“SERVICE MODE (MU), 3. M-Utility [1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting”
Equipment”
<NOTE>
006-259-08
MC-154
12.2 Version Upgrade

■ Flow of Data When Version Upgrading
PC for servicing (DI Tool) DRYPIX
HDD
(1) (2)
Formatter
program
FTP folder
CD-R
(Main unit software) Printer
program
(3)
MCT board
Memory
FP7C0F08.EPS
006-259-05
MC-155
■ Version Upgrading Procedure
CAUTION
To upgrade the main unit software version to A02/A03/A04/V10.0 in equipment
connected with a sorter, sorter settings must first be set to “Disable”.
This setting requires no modification when the equipment is installed with V4.1 or later,
or V10.1 or later.
<NOTE>
For the equipment shipped with the main unit software version V7.0 or later/ V13.0 or later, tthe
grid pattern for checking unevenness is set as the default image of [User Settable]. For the
equipment with earlier version, the SMPTE pattern is set. Upgrading the main unit software to
V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later will not replace the User Settable image in the HD.
(1) Insert the latest main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing, and copy the main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing.
“Printer name” → [Upgrading] (or [Soft Ver.UP]) → “CD-ROM drive” → [Copy]
#1 #2 #3 #4
FP7C0F31.EPS
→ The main unit software is copied to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing.
When completed, [File Copy Finish!!] screen appears.
006-259-08
MC-156
(2) Write the main unit software in the HD of the equipment from the PC for servicing
(FTP folder).
[Upgrading] → [Execute]
#1 #2 FP7C0F02.EPS
→ The main unit software is installed (version upgraded) in the equipment.

When installation completed, the [System File Load Finish!!] screen appears.
(3) Of the software written in the HD of the equipment, write the printer OS program in
the MCT board.
[PRT OS] → [Install]
#1 #2 FP7C0F22.EPS
→ The printer OS program in the HD is installed in the MCT bard.

When installation completed, the [Software Install Finish!!] screen appears.
(4) Write the printer application program in the MCT board.
[PRT APL] → [Install]
#1 #2 FP7C0F03.EPS
→ The printer application program in the HD is installed in the MCT bard.

<REMARKS>
The version of the main unit software is upgraded after the equipment is rebooted.
006-259-08
MC-157
(5) Reboot the equipment from the PC for servicing to upgraded the software.
“Printer name” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Reboot] → [Reboot All] →
[Reset]
#1 #4 #3 #2 #5
#6 FP7C0F33EPS
→ The equipment is rebooted.

As communication is cut off when the equipment is rebooted, the [LOGIN Failure]
screen appears.
(6) [OK]
(7) If a sorter is connected, start the M-Utility during initialization, set sorter settings to
settings.
(10) Remove the CD-R from the PC for servicing.
(11) Shutdown the PC for servicing.
(12) Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network to which
the equipment is connected.
006-259-08
MC-158
12.3 Full Installation

■ Flow of Data When Performing Full Installation
PC for servicing (DI Tool) DRYPIX
HDD
(1) (2)
Formatter
program
FTP folder
CD-R
Printer
(Main unit software) (4) program
Indv Folder
(3)
MCT board
Memory
FP7C0F07.EPS
006-259-05
MC-159
■ Full Installation Procedure
CAUTION
To perform full installation of the main unit software version A02/A03/A04/V10.0 in
equipment connected with a sorter, sorter settings must first be set to “Disable”.
or V10.1 or later.
(1) If the PC for servicing does not contain the latest individual data, import the
individual data from the equipment.
#1 #2 #4 #3
#5 FP7C0F34.EPS
→ The individual data is copied to the PC for servicing.

When the data copy is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
006-259-08
MC-160
(2) Insert the latest main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing, and copy the main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing.
“Printer name” → [Upgrading] (or [Soft Ver.UP]) → “CD-ROM drive” → [Copy]
#1 #2 #3 #4
FP7C0F31.EPS
→ The main unit software is copied to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing.
When completed, [File Copy Finish!!] screen appears.
006-259-08
MC-161
(3) Write the main unit software in the HD of the equipment from the PC for servicing
(FTP folder).
[Full] → [Execute]
#1 #2 FP7C0F05.EPS
→ The main unit software is installed in the equipment.

When installation completed, the [System File Load Finish!!] screen appears.
(4) Of the software written in the HD of the equipment, write the printer OS program in
the MCT board.
#1 #2 FP7C0F22.EPS
→ The printer OS program in the HD is installed in the MCT bard.

#1 #2 FP7C0F03.EPS
→ The printer application program in the HD is installed in the MCT board.

006-259-03
MC-162
(6) Reboot the equipment from the PC for servicing so that the changes made in the
main unit software becomes effective.
[Reset]
#1 #4 #3 #2 #5
#6 FP7C0F33EPS
→ The equipment reboots.

screen appears.
(7) [OK]
<REMARKS>
The main unit software is replaced with that fully installed after the equipment is rebooted.
006-259-08
MC-163
(8) After the equipment is rebooted, restore the individual data.

<INSTRUCTIONS>
The individual data needs to be restored if full installation has been performed. To
restore, use the latest individual data of the corresponding printer saved in the PC for
servicing or individual data copied at the step (1).
● Installing the Individual Data in the PC for Servicing

(i) “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [PC => Printer]
#1 #2 #4 #3
#5 FP7C0F35.EPS
→ The individual data in the PC for servicing is sent to the equipment.

When the data transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
006-259-08
MC-164
● When Restoring the Individual Data Saved on FD

If the PC for servicing does not contain the latest individual data, restore the individual
data backed up on the FD.
(i) Insert the FD with the latest individual data in the FDD of the PC for servicing.
(ii) Copy the individual data saved on FD to the PC for servicing.
“Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Restore]
#1 #2 #4 #3
#5 FP7C0F36.EPS
→ The [Restore] window for selecting the folder containing the individual data appears.
006-259-08
MC-165
(iii) Select “Drive A” → [OK]

→ Scanner unit data is copied to the PC for servicing.
#1
#2
FP7C0F38.EPS
→ The individual data is copied to the PC for servicing.

When the data copy is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
(iv) Restore the individual data to the equipment.
“Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [PC => Printer]
#1 #2 #4 #3
#5 FP7C0F35.EPS
→ The copied individual data in the PC for servicing is sent to the equipment.
When the data transfer is completed, [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
006-259-08
MC-166
(9) Reboot the equipment from the PC for servicing so that the changes of the
individual data becomes effective.
[Reset]
screen appears.
(10) [OK]
<REMARKS>
The main unit software is replaced with that fully installed after the equipment is rebooted.
(11) Click the function button (ex. [Control] button), to start communication with the
equipment again.
(12) Set the system date and time.
“Printer name” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Set Date/Time]
“SERVICE MODE, [PC9-2-1] System Config”
(13) Set the film counter.
“Printer name” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Set Counters]
“SERVICE MODE, [PC9-2-5] Set Counters”
(14) Set the number of remaining films.
“Printer name” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Set Remain. Films]
“SERVICE MODE, [PC9-2-6] Set Remain. Films”
(17) If directory settings of the FTP site have been changed, set back the original
settings.
(18) Remove the CD-R and FD from the PC for servicing.
006-259-05
MC-167
BLANK PAGE
006-259-04
MC-168
12.4 Upgrading Main Unit Software Version from A02 to A04

■ Outline
Normally, perform “12.2 Version Upgrade” to upgrade the version of the main unit
software, but for upgrading from version A02 to A04, perform the following procedure.
<NOTE>
• To upgrade to version A04, use the version A06 or later DPX7 PC Tool.
• As the format definition file (one type of individual data) was updated when the main unit
software version A03 was released, there is a need to change this file back to the original
file.
■ Procedure
1. Copy the version A04 main unit software to the PC for servicing.
2. Of the main unit software copied, copy the format definition file “fmtstd.prm” to
the “Indv” folder of the registered printer.
3. Perform version upgrading.
4. Write the printer OS and printer application program in the MCT board.
■ Upgrading Procedure
CAUTION
Do not perform other operations such as equipment settings during version upgrading
and full installation.
(1) Check that the equipment is in the standby state.

(2) To upgrade the main unit software version in equipment connected with a sorter,
first start the M-Utility, set sorter settings to “Disable”, and then reboot the
equipment.
Starting the DPX7 PC Tool”, and “4.3.3 Connecting the DPX7 PC Tool to the
Equipment”
<NOTE>
(4) Import the individual data of the equipment performing version upgrading.
006-259-05
MC-169
(5) Insert the main unit software version A04 CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing.
Copy the main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing.
“Printer name” → [Soft Ver.UP] (or [Upgrading]) → ”CD-ROM drive” → [Copy]
#1 #2 #3 #4
FP7C0F31.EPS
→ The main unit software is copied to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing. When copy
is completed, the [File Copy Finish!!] screen appears.
006-259-08
MC-170
(6) Open Windows Explorer.

[Start] → [Programs] → [Accessories] → [Explorer]
(7) Of the main unit software copied to the FTP folder (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
DRYPIX) at step (5), copy the “fmtstd.prm” in the “Indv” folder to the “Indv” folder
of the printer to be upgraded.
#1 #2
[Select] C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Indv [Select] fmtstd.prm
#3
Copy/paste “fmstd.prm” to the Indv folder of the printer. FP7C0F32.EPS
(8) Write the main unit software from the PC for servicing (FTP folder) to the HD of
the equipment.
[Verup] (or [Upgrading]) → [Execute]
#1 #2 FP7C0F45.EPS
→ The main unit software is installed in the equipment. When installation is completed,
the [System File Load Finish!!] screen appears.
006-259-08
MC-171
(9) Write the printer OS program in the MCT board.

#1 #2 FP7C0F22.EPS
→ The printer OS program in the HD is installed in the MCT board. When installation is
completed, the [Software Install Finish!!] screen appears.
#1 #2 FP7C0F03.EPS
→ The printer application program in the HD is installed in the MCT board. When
installation is completed, the [Software Install Finish!!] screen appears.
(11) Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit software
become effective.
[Reset]
screen appears.
(12) [OK]
settings.
006-259-05
MC-172
12.5 Upgrading Main Unit Software Version from A01 to A04

■ Outline
Normally, perform “12.2 Version Upgrade” to upgrade the version of the main unit
software, but for upgrading from version A01 to A04, perform the following procedure.
<NOTE>
• To upgrade to version A04, use the version A06 or later DPX7 PC Tool.
• Analysis logs are deleted when this procedure is performed to upgrade version. Prior to
beginning this procedure, save the logs in the PC for servicing as necessary.
• As the format definition file (one type of individual data) was updated when the main unit
software version A03 was released, there is a need to change this file back to the original
file.
• For the main unit software version A01, annotations are set by printer. For A02 or later,
annotations are set by client. For this reason, there is a need to correct the annotation
settings after version upgrading.
■ Procedure
1. Copy the version A04 main unit software to the PC for servicing.
2. Of the main unit software copied, copy the format definition file “fmtstd.prm” to
the “Indv” folder of the registered printer.
3. Perform full installation.
4. Write the printer OS and printer application program in the MCT board.
5. Change the annotation settings.
006-259-04
MC-173
CAUTION
Do not perform other operations such as equipment settings during version upgrading
and full installation.

(2) To upgrade the main unit software version in equipment connected with a sorter,
first start the M-Utility, set sorter settings to “Disable”, and then reboot the
equipment.
(3) Perform preliminary preparations of the PC for servicing.
Starting the DPX7 PC Tool”, and “4.3.3 Connecting the DPX7 PC Tool to the
Equipment”
<NOTE>
(4) Import the individual data of the equipment performing version upgrading.
006-259-05
MC-174
(5) Insert the main unit software version A04 CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing.
Copy the main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing.
“Printer name” → [Soft Ver.UP] (or [Upgrading]) → ”CD-ROM drive” → [Copy]
#1 #2 #3 #4
FP7C0F21.EPS
→ The main unit software is copied to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing. When copy
is completed, the [File Copy Finish!!] screen appears.
006-259-08
MC-175

(7) Of the main unit software copied to the FTP folder (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
DRYPIX) at step (5), copy the “fmtstd.prm” in the “Indv” folder to the “Indv” folder
of the printer to be upgraded.
#1 #2
[Select] C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Indv [Select] fmtstd.prm
#3
Copy/paste “fmstd.prm” to the Indv folder of the printer. FP7C0F32.EPS
006-259-03
MC-176
(8) Perform version upgrading, and write the main unit software from the PC for
servicing (FTP folder) to the HD of the equipment.
[Verup] (or [Upgrading]) → [Execute]
#1 #2 FP7C0F45.EPS
→ The main unit software is installed in the equipment. When installation is completed,
the [System File Load Finish!!] screen appears.
(9) Write the printer OS program in the MCT board.
#1 #2 FP7C0F22.EPS
→ The printer OS program in the HD is installed in the MCT board. When installation is
completed, the [Software Install Finish!!] screen appears.
#1 #2 FP7C0F03.EPS
→ The printer application program in the HD is installed in the MCT board. When
installation is completed, the [Software Install Finish!!] screen appears.
006-259-08
MC-177
(11) Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit software
become effective.
[Reset]
screen appears.
(12) [OK] → [Setting]
(14) Set annotations again.
“■ Resetting Annotations”
settings.
006-259-05
MC-178
■ Resetting Annotations
For the main unit software version A01, annotations are set by printer. For A02 or later,
annotations are set by client. For this reason, there is a need to correct the annotation
settings after version upgrading.
Annotation settings set by printer using version A01 are reflected in the [default] client
of version A02 or later. As annotation settings of each client become the default value,
perform settings again for overall consistency.
<REMARKS>
The settings of printers registered at the top of [Equipment list] are reflected in the [default]
client.
Main unit software version A01
Set by printer
Main unit software version A02 or later
Set by client
FP7C0F40EPS
006-259-03
MC-179
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MC-180
12.6 Upgrading Main Unit Software Version from [A03 to V4.2/

V10.2 or Earlier] to [V5.0/V11.0 or Later]
■ Outline
From the main unit software version V5.0/V11.0, the density correction table file
“DenCalib.dat” has been changed. As this file contains equipment data, the normal
version upgrade procedure will not implement upgrade changes in the equipment.
Upgrade to the V5.0/V11.0 or later using the following procedure.
<NOTE>
• Version upgrading to V5.0/V11.0 or later requires the version V2.0 DI Tool and DenCalib.dat
file Conversion Software V1.0.
• The DenCalib.dat file Conversion Software V1.0 can only be used for upgrading the version
from the main unit software V4.2/V10.2 or earlier to V5.0/V11.0 or later.
• If the software version is A00, A01 or A02, refer to the next section.
“12.7 Upgrading Main Unit Software Version from A00, A01, A02 to V5.0 or later”
<REMARKS>
• DenCalib.dat file Conversion Software V1.0 is a tool which automatically transfers the new
density correction table file (DenCalib.dat).
• Upgrading the main unit software version within implementing DenCalib.dat file Conversion
Software V1.0 will result in the following error when the equipment is rebooted after version
upgrading “0004 0000” error (The required parameter file does not exist at start or is
damaged.) In this case, implementing DenCalib.dat file Conversion Software V1.0 after the
error will reboot the equipment normally.
■ Precheck
• Check that the directory settings of the FTP site of the PC for servicing is “\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX”.
• Check that the equipment is in the standby state (no images input).
006-259-08
MC-181
Equipment”
(3) Load “DenCalib.dat file Conversion Software V1.0” into the CD-ROM drive of the
PC for servicing.
(4) Open the CD-ROM drive using the Windows explorer.
(5) Copy the “SupportTool” folder in the CD and paste it to the FTP folder (Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX) (or drag and drop).
(6) Right-click the “SupportTool” folder copied to display the Property screen.
(7) Uncheck the [Read-only] checkbox at the [SupportTool Properties] screen, and
click [Apply].
→ The [Confirm Attribute Changes] screen appears.
(8) Check the [Apply changes to this folder, subfolders and files] checkbox and click
[OK].
(9) Open the [SupportTool] folder, and double-click [VersionUpSupportTool.exe].
→ The [Version Up SupportTool] screen appears.
006-259-05
MC-182
(10) Perform the following settings at the [Version Up Support Tool] screen.
• [Select DRYPIX type.] : Select DRYPIX7000/5000
• [Input FTP Root Drive.]: Enter the FTP site directory drive name
• [Input DRYPIX's IPaddress.]: Enter the IP address of the equipment (do not add
“0” in front of each number)
(11) [Attach]
→ When completed normally, the [Attached SOFTWARE.] screen appears.
(12) [OK]
This ends the DenCalib.dat file Conversion Software V1.0 operation.
(13) Upgrade the equipment to version V5.0/V11.0 or later.
“12.2 Version Upgrading”
<NOTE>
When rebooting the equipment at the end after upgrading the version, check the version of the
main unit software at the version screen and confirm that the version upgrading procedure has
ended normally.
(14) Execute “AUTO F.D.C” using M-Utility or U-Utility.
006-259-08
MC-183
BLANK PAGE
006-259-05
MC-184
12.7 Upgrading Main Unit Software Version from A00, A01, A02
to V5.0 or Later
■ Outline
To upgrade the main unit software version from A00, A01, A02 to V5.0 or later, perform
the following procedure.
<NOTE>
Version upgrading to V5.0 or later requires the version V2.0 DI Tool and DenCalib.dat file
Conversion Software V1.0.
<REMARKS>
• DenCalib.dat file Conversion Software V1.0 is a tool which automatically transfers the new
density correction table file (DenCalib.dat).
• Upgrading the main unit software version within implementing DenCalib.dat file Conversion
Software V1.0 will result in the following error when the equipment is rebooted after version
upgrading “0004 0000” error (The required parameter file does not exist at start or is
damaged.) In this case, implementing DenCalib.dat file Conversion Software V1.0 after the
error will reboot the equipment normally.
■ Precheck
• Check that the directory settings of the FTP site of the PC for servicing is “\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX”.
• Check that the equipment is in the standby state (no images input).
006-259-08
MC-185
(1) Perform the usual version upgrading procedure.
“12.2 Version Upgrade steps (1) to (7)”
→ The “0004 0000” error is displayed when the equipment is rebooted after version
upgrading.
(2) Load “DenCalib.dat file Conversion Software V1.0” into the CD-ROM drive of the
PC for servicing.
(3) Open the CD-ROM drive using the Windows explorer.
(4) Copy the “SupportTool” folder in the CD and paste it to the FTP folder (Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX) (or drag and drop).
(5) Right-click the “SupportTool” folder copied to display the Property screen.
(6) Uncheck the [Read-only] checkbox at the [SupportTool Properties] screen, and
click [Apply].
→ The [Confirm Attribute Changes] screen appears.
006-259-05
MC-186
(7) Check the [Apply changes to this folder, subfolders and files] checkbox and click
[OK].
(8) Open the [SupportTool] folder, and double-click [VersionUpSupportTool.exe].
→ The [Version Up SupportTool] screen appears.
(9) Perform the following settings at the [Version Up Support Tool] screen.
• [Select DRYPIX type.] : Select DRYPIX7000/5000
• [Input FTP Root Drive.]: Enter the FTP site directory drive name
• [Input DRYPIX's IPaddress.]: Enter the IP address of the equipment (do not add
“0” in front of each number)
006-259-05
MC-187
(10) [Attach]
→ When completed normally, the [Attached SOFTWARE.] screen appears.
(11) [OK]
This ends the DenCalib.dat file Conversion Software V1.0 operation.
“12.2 Version Upgrading”
<NOTE>
When rebooting the equipment, check the version of the main unit software at the version
screen and confirm that the version upgrading procedure has ended normally.
(13) Execute “AUTO F.D.C” using M-Utility or U-Utility.
006-259-05
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE MODE (MU)

MU-1
CONTROL SHEET

11/10/2002 01 Revised (FM3601) 1-3, 6, 20, 24, 25, 29-34, 37, 40,
42-49, 51-54, 57, 59, 60, 64-87
04/01/2003 02 Revised (FM3978) 1, 9, 22, 23, 28, 29, 31-33, 38-40,
42-47, 47.1-47.4, 49, 53, 54, 56-60,
64, 66-69, 75, 78, 79, 84-86, 88-240
09/20/2004 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 4, 5, 11, 12, 19-21, 25, 27-29, 35,
V4.1, V10.0 and V10.1, DPX7 PC Tool version 36, 41, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 59, 100,
A08, etc.)(FM4447) 101, 104, 108, 146, 148, 149, 153,
157, 160, 161, 180, 183, 188, 190,
192, 257, 270, 272, 276, 279, 280,
285, 290, 292, 294, 295, 298, 301
11/30/2005 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 9, 21, 27-29, 34, 36, 37, 37.1-37.4,
V5.0 and V11.0, DI Tool version V2.0, etc.) 44, 46, 49, 60-63, 100, 101, 104-109,
(FM4690) 113-115, 115.1-115.4, 116-119, 125,
127-129, 131, 132, 134, 142, 143,
143.1-143.4,144-149, 169,
169.1-169.4, 174, 175, 178, 180,
183-185, 189-193, 200, 201,
203-205, 207-210, 212, 244, 274,
275, 290, 298-304, 307-313
07/31/2006 06 Revised (DI-ML film)(FM4949) 1, 34, 37.1, 142, 143, 147
02/15/2007 08 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 5, 6, 7.1-7.4, 8, 9, 24-27, 32, 36,
V7.0 and V13.0, DI Tool version V3.0, etc.) 37, 37.1-37.3, 49, 59, 100-103, 108,
(FM5077) 113-115, 115.3, 116, 117, 121, 122,
124-131, 133, 134, 138-140, 143,
143.1, 143.4, 144-151, 153, 158-160,
162, 163, 165-171, 174, 178, 180,
183, 185, 189-191, 191.1-191.4, 193,
194, 196-198, 204, 210, 220, 222,
244, 249, 256, 267-271, 274, 276,
277, 279-283, 286, 287, 290, 291,
291.1-291.4, 292-295, 295.1-295.4,
296-298, 308-321
006-259-08
02.15.2007 FM5077 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual MU-1
MU-2
1. OUTLINE OF SERVICE MODE
1.1 Transition of Modes in DRYPIX 7000

The service mode provides functions required for troubleshooting and maintenance.
The service mode consists of the following two modes.
● U-Utility (User-Utility) Mode

Mode for the user to perform normal maintenance operations (density measurement,
etc.)
● M-Utility (Maintenance-Utility) Mode

Mode for performing troubleshooting and maintenance operations of this equipment.
Other than these service modes, the following four modes are also provided.
● Initial Processing Mode

Mode in which initialization and self-diagnosis are performed when the power is turned
on.
● Routine Mode
The usual ready state.
● Abnormal Indication Mode

Indicates errors which have occurred.
● Shutdown Processing Mode

Mode for discharging film currently being processed and terminating the equipment.
1.2 Note on Executing Service Mode

Turning the power OFF while writing in the HDD or while exchanging data with the PC
for servicing may damage the data.
006-259-03
MU-3
1.3 Operations of Each Utility

Each utility is operated by selecting menus displayed on the color LCD touch panel.
Each of these menus has a tree structure classified by function. Selecting a menu item
at a certain menu displays the menu below.
■ U-Utility Operations
● [EXIT]
Touching at the top menu exits the U-Utility.
● [EXECUTE]
For executing the menu displayed. If a lower menu exists, shifts to the next menu.
● [QUIT]
Shifts to the display before the current menu was executed.
● [ ↑ ], [ ↓ ]
For moving up and down amongst the items displayed.
● [1/3], [2/3], [3/3]

Shifts to the next or previous display of the same menu if there exists more than two
displays in a menu.
■ M-Utility Operations
● [EXIT]
Touching at the top menu exits the M-Utility.
● [ENT]
For executing the menu displayed and confirming values entered. If a lower menu
exists, shifts to the next menu.
● [QUIT]
Shifts to the display before the current menu was executed.
● [ ↑ ], [ ↓ ]
For moving up and down amongst the items displayed.
● [BACK], [NEXT]
Shifts to the next or previous display of the same menu if there exists more than two
displays in a menu.
006-259-03
MU-4
2. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY)
The U-Utility functions are intended for both the user and service engineer.
<NOTE>
• Transition to the U-Utility can be reserved in the routine mode (“Printing” display).
• Menus which can be executed differ according to the state before transition.
Other than the U-Utility, there are functions for managing jobs during printing, for the
user to acquire logs, etc.
“2.4 Other Functions”
2.1 U-Utility Menu Tree

U-Utility <NOTE>
The numbers on the right side of menu
[ 1 ] AUTO F.D.C (1/3) names indicate the tab numbers on the
operation panel.
[ 2 ] TEST PATTERN (1/3)
[ 3 ] UNLOCK TRAY (1/3)
[ 4 ] PRINT QUEUE (1/3)
[ 5 ] SET COUNTERS (1/3)

[ 5-1 ] SET COUNTERS
[ 5-2 ] DISPLAY LIST (Main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0
or later)
[ 6 ] ECONOMY MODE (1/3) (Main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later,
or V10.0 or later)
[ 6-1 ] SAVE POWER
STAND BY
SLEEP
[ 6-2 ] CALENDAR
[ 6-3 ] DETAIL
[ 6-3-1 ] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED
[ 6-3-2 ] TRANSITION TIME
[ 6-3-3 ] SCHEDULER
A
FP7U0201.EPS
006-259-04
MU-5
[ 7 ] SET ALARM (2/3)

[ 7-1 ] SET ALARM
[ 7-2 ] KEY TOUCH
[ 8 ] AUTOMATED F.D.C (2/3)
[ 9 ] SET DATE/TIME (2/3)
[ 10 ] ECONOMY MODE (2/2) (Main unit software version A02 or earlier)

[ 10-1 ] SET TIME
[ 10-2 ] SCHEDULER
[ 10-3 ] SAVE POWER
[ 11 ] SOFTWARE VER (2/3)
[ 12 ] REPRINT (2/3) (Main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later)
[ 13 ] ANIMATION (3/3) (Main unit software version A02, A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0
or later)
[ 14 ] QC (3/3) (Main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later)
[ 14-1 ] QC TEST PATTERN
[ 14-2 ] HISTORY
[ 14-2-1 ] EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER
[ 14-2-2 ] FORMAT
[ 14-2-3 ] ARTIFACTS
[ 14-3 ] SETTINGS
[ 14-3-1 ] BUILT-IN DENSITOMETER
[ 14-3-2 ] EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER
[ 14-3-3 ] FORMAT
[ 15 ] MAMMO.QC (3/3) (Main unit software version V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later)
FP7U0205.EPS
006-259-08
MU-6
2.2 Starting and Ending the U-Utility

■ Starting the U-Utility
● Starting from the Initialization Processing Mode

While the software version number is displayed, touch the [UTILITY] button. The
software version number is displayed for about ten seconds.
Touch [UTILITY]
● Starting from the Routine Mode

Touch the [UTILITY] button on the operation panel.
Touch [UTILITY]
006-259-08
MU-7
● Making U-Utility (Density Correction) Reservations While Replenishing Film

Before inserting the film tray when replenishing film, touching the [UTILITY] button
reserves transition to the U-Utility. When film is loaded and the film tray is inserted, the
U-Utility starts, enabling density correction.
After this, all films printed after ending the U-utility will be subject to density correction,
including image data already accumulated. However, density correction will not be
performed on films processed before reservation.
■ Ending the M-Utility

At the U-Utility main menu, touch [EXIT] on the operation panel.
006-259-03
MU-7.1
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
02.15.2007 FM5077 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual MU-7.1
MU-7.2
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-7.3
2.3 Details of U-Utility Commands
[1] AUTO F.D.C.

<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the 24-steps pattern, and calculating 24-steps density correction
from the density data measured by the density measurement section.
<REMARKS>
• Unloaded film trays are not displayed.
• Degeneration film trays are rejected.
• The number of prints is fixed at one.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the film tray.
[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]/[TRAY 3]
(2) To change the shift value (Dmax) for high density correction, select [Dmax ↑ ↓].
(0.5 steps)
[4] to [-3]
(3) Check the printed results.
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The changes made will be effective immediately.
006-259-08
MU-7.4
[2] TEST PATTERN

<FUNCTION>
Command for printing test patterns (SMPTE, 17-steps, User Settable, Spatial
Resolution).
<NOTE>
• To print 17-steps/User Settable/Spatial Resolution patterns on this menu, activate [17-
Steps]/[User Settable]/[Spatial Resolution] in the [option] settings of the M-Utility
beforehand.
“3. M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option”
• Spatial Resolution is provided in main unit software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later.
• Dmax can be selected for 17-steps pattern and Spatial Resolution pattern, if the main unit
software version is V5.0 or later/V11.0 or later.
• To print the desired User Settable pattern, save the user settable image in the equipment
beforehand.
“5.5 Setting Output of User Settable Images”
<REMARKS>
006-259-08
MU-8
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the test pattern.
[SMPTE]/[17-Steps]/[User Settable]/[Spatial Resolution]
(3) If the main unit software version is V5.0/V11.0 or later, select Dmax. (17-Steps,
Spatial Resolution only)
<REMARKS>
With 17-Steps, Spatial Resolution, selecting the Dmax starts printing.
(4) Select the AE Title.

(5) Select the number of printing frames.
[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
(6) Select the LUT number.
[LUT1]/[LUT2]/[LUT3]/[LUT4]/[LUT5]/[LUT6]/[LUT7]/[LUT8]
(7) Select the interpolation type.
[SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH]
(8) Select the interpolation method.
[CUBIC]/[NONE]
(9) Check the printing results.
006-259-08
MU-9
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-10
[3] UNLOCK TRAY

<FUNCTION>
Command for clearing the tray lock and opening the tray.
<REMARKS>
• If a film tray is not inserted with the shutter, the film tray selection will be rejected.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Insert the shutter into the film tray, and select the corresponding film tray.
[4] PRINT QUEUE

<FUNCTION>
Command for operating registered print jobs.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) To perform priority printing, specify the job, and select [URGENT PRINT].
(2) To delete a registered job, specify the job and select [DELETE].
(3) To delete all registered jobs, select [DELETE ALL].
(4) Select [YES] or [NO].
(5) [YES]
→ The selected item is executed.
006-259-03
MU-11
[5] SET COUNTERS
[5-1] SET COUNTERS

<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the number of films used per film tray, and clearing this count
to zero.
<REMARKS>
• The film count per film tray is displayed in decimal 4-digits, and increased at the end of film
removal (becomes 0 after 9999).
• The total film count per film tray is displayed in decimal 8-digits, and increased at the end of
film removal (becomes 0 after 99999999).
• The total film count per film tray cannot be cleared to zero.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [TRAY 1 CLEAR], [TRAY 2 CLEAR], or [TRAY 3 CLEAR].
(3) [YES]
→ The film count of the selected tray is cleared.
[5-2] DISPLAY LIST

<NOTE>
This menu is provided in main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later.
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the number of films used on each film tray over the past ten
days.
<REMARKS>
• Days on which films were not used are also displayed.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Scroll the display using the [↑] and [↓] buttons.
(2) Check the number of films used.
006-259-04
MU-12
[6] ECONOMY MODE

<NOTE>
This function consists of three modes; [SCREEN SAVER], [STAND-BY], and [SLEEP].
• [SCREEN SAVER] : Turns OFF the backlight of the operation panel.
• [STAND-BY] : [SCREEN SAVER] function, decreases the temperature
level, and turns OFF motor excitation.
• [SLEEP] : [STAND-BY] function, and turns OFF temperature adjustment.
<NOTE>
If shifted to the [SLEEP], recovery takes the same time as the start of the equipment at power
ON.
<REMARKS>
• Under the following conditions, the equipment will recover from the economy mode to the
idle state.
• When printing is started by client.
• User operations (Touch of screen)
• When errors occur.
[6-1] SAVE POWER

Command to be set when executing [STAND-BY] or [SLEEP] immediately.
<NOTE>
If “[6-3-3] SCHEDULER” has been set, it will be executed with priority.
(Even if the other mode on this menu is set)
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [STAND-BY] or [SLEEP].
→ The mode selected will be executed immediately.
006-259-04
MU-13
[6-2] CALENDAR
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting nonconsultation days. The time set at “[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE
CLOSED” on days set as nonconsultation days is the economy mode.
<NOTE>
Nonconsultation days can be set to one year ahead.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Touch the day to be set as a nonconusltation day on the calendar.
→ With each touch, the setting changes from “Red (Whole day closed)” →“Yellow
(Afternoon closed)” →“Green (Morning closed)” →“Gray (normal consultation day)”.
<REMARKS>
By selecting the day (Monday, Tuesday, etc.), the same day can be set for the whole month.
[6-3] DETAIL
[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the time for shifting to the economy mode of the nonconsultation
day set at “[6-2] CALENDAR”.
Three types of settings are available (whole day closed, afternoon closed, and morning
closed), and the closed hours of sequential days can also be set together (for example,
the next day of an afternoon closed day can be set as whole day closed).
<REMARKS>
• “[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED” and “[6-3-3] SCHEDULER” can be set individually, and
the closed hours set at either can be set to the economy mode.
• If the same time is set in both settings, “[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED” will be given
priority.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Touch the time to be changed.
(2) Change the time by touching the [↑] and [↓] buttons.
006-259-03
MU-14
[6-3-2] TRANSITION TIME

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the transition time to each economy mode from the last
operations on this equipment.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the time to start shift to [Screen Saver] (15 minutes to 120 minutes).
(2) Select the time to start shift to [Stand-By] (15 minutes to 120 minutes).
(3) Select the time to start shift to [Sleep] (15 minutes to 120 minutes).
[6-3-3] SCHEDULER
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the economy mode for one week (by day and time).
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [ECONOMY MODE] or [NONE ECONOMY].
(2) Select the starting time (day/time).
(3) Select the ending time (day/time).
<REMARKS>
• “[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED” and “[6-3-3] SCHEDULER” can be set individually, and
the closed hours set at either can be set to the economy mode.
• If the same time is set in both settings, “[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED” will be given
priority.
006-259-03
MU-15
[7] SET ALARM
[7-1] SET ALARM

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting alarm.
<DEFAULT>
[Alarm]: ON
[Volume]: HIGH
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the alarm.
[ON]/[PULSE]/[OFF]
(2) Select the volume.
[HIGH]/[MEDIUM]/[LOW]
[7-2] KEY TOUCH

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting key touch tone.
<DEFAULT>
[Key touch tone]: ON
[Volume]: LOW
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the key touch tone.
[ON]/[OFF]
(2) Select the volume.
[HIGH]/[MEDIUM]/[LOW]
006-259-03
MU-16
[8] AUTOMATED F.D.C.

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting automatic density correction execution.
<DEFAULT>
[By each film lot No.]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the timing to execute automatic density correction.
[By each film pack]/[By each film lot No.]/[None]
<REMARKS>
• [By each film pack] : Automatic density correction is executed when film pack is replaced.
• [By each film lot No.]: Automatic density correction is executed when film lot number is
changed.
[9] SET DATE/TIME

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the system date and time.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the system date and time (year/month/day/hour/minute).
006-259-03
MU-17
[10] ECONOMY MODE

<NOTE>
This menu is provided in main unit software version A02 or earlier.
This function consists of three modes; [SCREEN SAVER], [STAND-BY], and [SLEEP].
• [SCREEN SAVER] : Turns OFF the backlight of the operation panel.
• [STAND-BY] : [SCREEN SAVER] function, decreases the temperature
level, and turns OFF motor excitation.
• [SLEEP] : [STAND-BY] function, and turns OFF temperature adjustment.
<NOTE>
If shifted to the [SLEEP], recovery takes the same time as the start of the equipment at power
ON.
[10-1] SET TIME

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the time to shift to each economy mode.
<REMARKS>
• The time to start shift can be set in increments of 15 minutes up to 120 minutes.
• Under the following conditions, the equipment will recover from the economy mode to the
idle state.
• When the equipment is started by SCHEDULER.
• When printing is started by client.
• User operations (Touch of screen)
• When errors occur.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the time to start shift to [SCREEN SAVER] (15 minutes to 120 minutes).
(2) Select the time to start shift to [STAND-BY] (15 minutes to 120 minutes).
(3) Select the time to start shift to [SLEEP] (15 minutes to 120 minutes).
006-259-03
MU-18
[10-2] SCHEDULER
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the economy mode for one week (by day and time).
<REMARKS>
If [SET TIME] and [SCHEDULER] of the economy mode have been set, [SCHEDULER] will be
executed with priority.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the starting time (day/time).
(3) Select the ending time (day/time).
[10-3] SAVE POWER

Command to be set when executing [STAND-BY] or [SLEEP] immediately.
<NOTE>
If [SCHEDULER] has been set, it will be executed with priority.
(Even if the other mode on this menu is set)
<OPERATIONS>
→ The mode selected will be executed immediately.
[11] SOFTWARE VERSION

<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the software version.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Check the software version.
006-259-03
MU-19
[12] REPRINT
<NOTE>
<FUNCTION>
Command for reprinting images output in the past.
<NOTE>
To execute this menu, there is a need to set [Reprint Function] to “Enable” for each modality
using the M-Utility or DPX7 PC Tool beforehand.
“3. M-Utility [1-1-2-3] Reprint Function”, “4. DPX7 PC Tool [PC1-3-1-12] Reprint”, “5.3
Setting Reprint”
<REMARKS>
The image storage area for HDD reprints is 6 Gbyte. (Storage time is about 1 week)
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
Before executing this menu, check that there are no print queues remaining inside the
equipment. If remaining, and these images are not required, delete using [PRINT QUEUE] of
the U-Utility.
(1) Touch [REPRINT].

→ The date of the oldest image stored is displayed.
(2) Enter the user ID.
<REMARKS>
The default user ID is “1111”, and this can be changed using the DPX7 PC Tool.
(3) Enter the print ID to be reprinted.

<REMARKS>
Enter the print ID printed as the annotation on the film.
(4) Set the number of copies.

→ Images are reprinted after the U-Utility ends.
006-259-04
MU-20
[13] ANIMATION
<NOTE>
This menu is provided in main unit software version A02, A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or
later.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the display speed of animation during film loading and removal of
jammed film.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Touch the [Slow] or [Fast] button and set the display speed.
The display speed can be set in nine levels.
(2) [ENTER]
(3) To check the display speed, touch [PREVIEW].
→ The test window appears and preview animation is displayed.
The changes made will be effective when the [ENTER] button is touched.
006-259-04
MU-21
[14] QC
<NOTE>
• This menu is provided in main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or
later.
• To execute this menu, there is a need to set [QC] to “Enable” using the M-Utility or DPX7 PC
Tool beforehand.
“3. M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option/QC”, “4. DPX7 PC Tool [PC1-2-9-13] QC”, “5.2 Setting
the Image QC Function”.
[14-1] QC TEST PATTERN

<FUNCTION>
Command for printing test patterns and displaying/saving density values measured by
the built-in densitometer of the equipment.
<OPERATIONS>
<REMARKS>
The default value of the user ID is “1111”, and this can be changed using the DPX7 PC Tool.
(2) [QC TEST PATTERN]

[TRAY 1]/[TRAY 2]/[TRAY 3]
(4) [EXECUTE]
→ The QC test pattern is printed, and the measured density values are displayed on the
operation panel.
(5) Select [SAVE]/[CANCEL].
• [SAVE] : The measured results are saved, and the tray selection window is returned.
• [CANCEL]: The measured results are not saved, and the tray selection window is
returned.
006-259-05
MU-22
[14-2] HISTORY
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the QC measurement results, and correcting these results
based on the printed QC test pattern.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Execute “[14-1] QC TEST PATTERN”.
(2) [HISTORY]
(3) Select data, and select [SELECT]/[DELETE].
• [SELECT] : Details of [Result in detail] of the selected data are displayed.
For [Result: FAIL], the background will be displayed in red.
• [DELETE] : The data selected is deleted.
(4) If [SELECT] is selected, set [EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER], [FORMAT], and
[ARTIFACTS].
[14-2-1] EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER

(1) Measure “Density 1”, “Density 2”, and “Density 3” of the QC test pattern using the
external densitometer.
(2) Enter the 100 times values of “Density 1” measured using the external densitometer.
(5) [ENTER]
→ The measured values of the external densitometer set are displayed at the [Result in
detail] window. If these new values exceed the established criteria, the background is
displayed in red.
[14-2-2] FORMAT
(1) Measure [Format A] and [Format B] of the QC test pattern.
(2) Enter the 10 times value (mm) of [Format A] measured.
(3) Enter the 10 times value (mm) of [Format B] measured.
(4) [ENTER]
→ The measured values of the external densitometer set are displayed at the [Result in
detail] window. If these new values exceed the established criteria, the background is
displayed in red.
[14-2-3] ARTIFACTS
(1) Select the artifact.
006-259-03
MU-23
[14-3] SETTINGS
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the baseline values and established criteria, at [BUILT-IN
DENSITOMETER], [EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER], and [FORMAT] for each film tray.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [QC]
<REMARKS>
The default user ID is “1111”, and this can be changed using the DPX7 PC Tool.
(3) [QC SETTINGS]

(4) Set [BUILT-IN DENSITOMETER], [EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER], and [FORMAT].
[14-3-1] BUILT-IN DENSITOMETER

(1) [TRAY 1]
(2) [DENSITY 1]
(3) Enter the 100 times value of the baseline values of density 1.
(4) Enter the 100 times value of the established criteria of density 1.
(5) Perform the above procedure for [DENSITY 2] and [DENSITY 3].
(6) Perform the above procedure for [TRAY 2] and [TRAY 3].
[14-3-2] EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER

(1) [TRAY 1]
(2) [DENSITY 1]
(3) Enter the 100 times value of the baseline values of density 1.
(4) Enter the 100 times value of the established criteria of density 1.
(5) Perform the above procedure for [DENSITY 2] and [DENSITY 3].
006-259-03
MU-24
[14-3-3] FORMAT
(1) [TRAY 1]
(2) [FORMAT A]
(3) Enter the 10 times value of the baseline values of format A.
(4) Enter the 10 times value of the established criteria of format A.
(6) Perform the above procedure for [FORMAT B].
<REMARKS>
Format baseline values by film size (Allowable range: 5%)
35x43 cm: Format A; 304.0 mm, Format B; 406.0 mm
[15] MAMMO.QC
<NOTE>
This menu is provided in the main unit software version V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later.
<FUNCTION>
Command for outputting the pattern for Mammo QC.
<NOTE>
• To execute this menu, there is a need to set the Mammo QC function to “Enable” using the
M-Utility or DPX7 PC Tool beforehand.
“3. M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option/Mammo.QC”, “4. DPX7 PC Tool [PC1-2-9-16]
MammoQC”.
• For equipment with main unit software version V7.0 or later/V13.0 or later at shipment,
“MammoQCTest” is registered as default. If the version has been upgraded from an earlier
version, read equipment data and add and register new clients.
“5.14 Settings for Using MammoQC Function After Upgrading Main Unit Software
Version from V6.0/V12.0 or Earlier to V7.0/V13.0”
006-259-08
MU-25
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the test pattern.
<REMARKS>
Selecting NEMA (National Manufacturers Association), EUREF (European Reference Frame)
enables output of the mammo QC pattern complying with the respective standards.
• NEMA : Refer to the separate “Mammo QC Operation Manual” when using.
• EUREF : In the EU, individual standards are set down by country based on the EUREF
standards, use according to the status of the country installed in.
● When [NEMA] is Selected for the Mammo QC Function:

[TG18-QC]/ [TG18-PQC]/ [17-Steps]/ [Grid]/ [Spatial Resolution]
● When [EUREF] is Selected for the Mammo QC Function:

[TG18-QC]/ [TG18-PQC]/ [TG18-PQC(HIGH)]/ [TG18-UN80]/ [TG18-UN10]/ [TG18-
UNL80]/ [TG18-UNL10]
<REMARKS>
• [TG18-PQC] : 10 pix/mm, no enlargement/reduction
• [TG18-PQC(HIGH)] : 20 pix/mm, no enlargement/reduction
• [Spatial Resolution] : No enlargement/reduction

[TRAY 1]/[TRAY 2]/[TRAY 3]
<NOTE>
Limit the output size of [TG18-QC] and [17-Steps] to 26x36 cm, 25x30 cm, or 20x25 cm size
because an output in 35x43 cm size does not have sufficient density in its maximum density
area (Dmax 3.6).
(3) Select the [LUT2].

<REMARKS>
• The LUT number should be selected only when the following is selected: [TG18-QC]/
[TG18-PQC]/ [TG18-PQC(HIGH)]/ [TG18-UN80]/ [TG18-UN10]/ [TG18-UNL80]/ [TG18-
UNL10]
• For [17-Steps]/[Grid]/[Spatial Resolution], the film is output in Dmax=3.6 and Dmin=0.2,
without any tone processing.
(4) Check the output results.
006-259-08
MU-26
2.4 Other Functions
2.4.1 Displaying Printing Jobs and Job Operations

Use of this function allows jobs to be displayed and processed from the operation panel
without the use of the U-Utility, even during printing.
Main functions include display of detailed job information, priority printing, and deletion.
<NOTE>
later.
(1) If print jobs have accumulated in the equipment, touch the hard disk icon on the
operation panel.
#1 [Touch]
Hard disk icon
FP7U0202.EPS
→ Jobs accumulated in the equipment are listed.
(2) To display detailed job information, specify the desired job and touch [DETAIL].
→ Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
(3) Perform the following procedure at the job list screen or job details screen.
• To perform priority printing, select [URGENT PRINT].
• To delete a job, select [DELETE].
• To update the display to the latest, select [REFRESH].
006-259-08
MU-27
2.4.2 Acquisition of Log Data by User

The user can save log data for equipment analysis in the HDD of the equipment.
<NOTE>
later.
• To execute this menu, there is a need to set [Logging by User] to “ON” using the M-Utility or
DPX7 PC Tool beforehand.
“3. M-Utility [1-3-4] Logging by User”, “4. DPX7 PC Tool [PC1-2-9-12] BackupLog”, “4.
DPX7 PC Tool [PC2-3] Log”
(1) With the equipment in the idling state, touch the part on the operation panel
indicated in the following figure for three seconds.
#1
[Touch] For three seconds
FP7U0210.EPS
→ The “Under Logging” message appears on the operation panel and log data is saved in
the HDD of the equipment. This may up to five minutes according to the log
information volume.
006-259-08
MU-28
3. M-UTILITY (MAINTENANCE UTILITY)
3.1 M-Utility Menu Tree

M-Utility
[ 1 ] System Management
[ 1-1 ] System Config.
[ 1-1-1 ] Set Date/time
[ 1-1-2 ] Set Parameters
[ 1-1-2-1 ] Set Tray
[ 1-1-2-2 ] Sorter Setting
[ 1-1-2-3 ] Reprint Function (Main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or
later)
[ 1-1-2-4 ] Option
[ 1-1-2-5 ] Select Dmax
[ 1-1-2-6 ] Set ML Dmax (Main unit software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later)
[ 1-1-3 ] Initialize
[ 1-1-3-1 ] Recover
[ 1-1-3-2 ] Save Config.
[ 1-1-3-3 ] Initialization
[ 1-1-4 ] Check Files
[ 1-1-5 ] Check Version
[ 1-1-6 ] Set Counters
[ 1-1-7 ] Reboot
[ 1-1-8 ] Reload Software
[ 1-2 ] Print Queue
[ 1-3 ] Log Files
[ 1-3-1 ] Display Error Log
[ 1-3-2 ] Clear
[ 1-3-3 ] Store Log Files
[ 1-3-4 ] Logging by User (Main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later)
A1 B1
FP7U7301.EPS
006-259-05
MU-29
A1 B1
[ 1-4 ] Network
[ 1-4-1 ] Set Network
[ 1-4-1-1 ] AE-title
[ 1-4-1-2 ] Fine PRT AE-title
[ 1-4-1-3 ] Port No.
[ 1-4-1-4 ] IP Address
[ 1-4-1-5 ] SubNetMask
[ 1-4-1-6 ] Gateway
[ 1-4-1-7 ] Hostname
[ 1-4-2 ] Test Network (Main unit software version A02, A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later)
[ 1-4-3 ] Set DICOM (Main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later)
[ 1-5 ] Set Main Panel
[ 1-5-1 ] Select Language
[ 1-5-2 ] Size Information
[ 1-5-3 ] Set Alarm
[ 1-5-4 ] Set Key Touch Tone
[ 1-5-5 ] ANIMATION (Main unit software version A02, A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later)
[ 1-5-6 ] Sound Test
[ 1-5-7 ] Icon Positioning
[ 1-5-8 ] Show Position
[ 1-6 ] Economy Mode
[ 2 ] Output Film
[ 2-1 ] 24-Steps
[ 2-2 ] 17-Steps
[ 2-3 ] Flat
[ 2-4 ] Cleaning
[ 2-5 ] Grid
[ 2-6 ] Film out to Sorter
[ 2-7 ] Uniformity
[ 2-8 ] SMPTE
[ 2-9 ] User Settable (Main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later)
[ 2-10 ] Spatial Resolution (Main unit software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later)
A2
FP7U7302.EPS
006-259-05
MU-30
A2
[ 3 ] F.D.C.
[ 3-1 ] AUTO F.D.C.
[ 3-2 ] Check Density
[ 3-3 ] 24-Steps
[ 3-4 ] Manual F.D.C.
[ 3-5 ] Densitometer
[ 3-5-1 ] 24-Steps
[ 3-5-2 ] Calibration
[ 3-5-3 ] Clear Calib. Table
[ 3-5-4 ] DM Sensor Monitoring
[ 3-6 ] Uniformity
[ 3-6-1 ] Clear Table
[ 3-6-2 ] Input
[ 4 ] Check Scanner
[ 4-1 ] Polygonal Motor
[ 4-2 ] LD
[ 4-3 ] Adjusting Main Scanner
[ 4-3-1 ] Scanning Width
[ 4-3-2 ] Scanning Position
[ 4-3-3 ] Display Adjustment
[ 4-3-4 ] Initialize Scanner
[ 4-4 ] Diagnosis
[ 4-4-1 ] Initial Check
[ 4-4-2 ] PRN Board Test
[ 5 ] Check Mechanism
[ 5-1 ] Film Removing
[ 5-1-1 ] Unlock Tray
[ 5-1-2 ] Set Remain. Films
[ 5-1-3 ] Unit Operation
[ 5-2 ] Motor Operation
[ 5-2-1 ] Motor Operation
[ 5-2-2 ] Adjusting Subscanner
[ 5-3 ] Grip
[ 5-4 ] Other Actuators
[ 5-5 ] Positioning Film
[ 5-6 ] Sensor Monitor
A3 B3
FP7U7303.EPS
006-259-03
MU-31
A3 B3
[ 5-7 ] Other
[ 5-7-1 ] Board FAN
[ 5-7-2 ] Serial I/F
[ 5-7-3 ] HDD Test
[ 5-7-4 ] DPRAM Test
[ 5-7-5 ] Inter Board Test
[ 5-7-6 ] Barcode Test
[ 5-8 ] Sorter Unit
[ 5-8-1 ] Motor MT1
[ 5-8-2 ] Solenoids
[ 5-8-3 ] Sensor Monitor
[ 6 ] Heat-Developer
[ 6-1 ] Temperature
[ 6-2 ] Heating
[ 6-3 ] Fan Operation
[ 6-4 ] Temp. Control
[ 6-5 ] Set Heater Temp.
[ 7 ] Skip Initialize
[ 7-1 ] Eject Film Remaining
[ 7-2 ] Initialize & Heating Up
[ 7-3 ] Initialize Developer
FP7U7304.EPS
006-259-03
MU-32
3.2 Starting and Ending the M-Utility

■ Starting the M-Utility
● Starting from the Initialization Processing Mode

After turning ON the power of the equipment, the startup display will be displayed for
about 1 minute and 30 seconds, after which the software version number will be
displayed for about 15 seconds.
While the software version number is displayed, touch (1) below, and then [UTILITY].
(1) Touch left top of display
(2) Touch [UTILITY]

<NOTE>
Touching the operation panel after the software version number disappears is invalid. In this
case, restart the equipment, display the software version number, or enter the routine mode
and then start the M-Utility.
006-259-08
MU-33
● Starting from the Routine Mode
(2) Touch [UTILITY]
● Starting from the Error Indication Mode
(2) Touch [UTILITY]
■ Ending the M-Utility

At the M-Utility top menu, touch the [EXIT] button on the operation panel.
<NOTE>
If the state of the equipment changes, re-initialization is carried out after the M-Utility ends.
006-259-03
MU-34
3.3 Details of M-Utility Commands
[1] System Management
[1-1] System Config.
[1-1-1] Set Date/time

Same as “[9] SET DATE/TIME” of the U-Utility.
[1-1-2] Set Parameters
[1-1-2-1] Set Tray

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting film used per film tray.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the film size.
[14x17 (35x43cm)]/[14x14 (35x35cm)]/[10x14 (26x36cm)]/[10x12 (25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)]/[Disable]
<NOTE>
Do not select [14x14 (35x35cm)].
(3) Select the film base color.

[Clear base/HL]/[Blue base/HL]/[Blue base/ML]
<NOTE>
[Blue base/ML] is available from main unit software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later.
<REMARKS>
When films are loaded incorrectly, error message detected by BCR is displayed.
The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
006-259-06
MU-35
[1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether a sorter is connected.
<DEFAULT>
[Without Sorter]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select whether to use sorter or not.
[With Sorter]/[Without Sorter]
[1-1-2-3] Reprint Function

<FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling the reprinting function of images output in the past
using the U-Utility.
“2. U-Utility [12] Reprint”, “5.3 Setting Reprint”
<NOTE>
<DEFAULT>
[OFF]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the clients for reprinting using the arrow buttons.
(2) Switch between enable/disable using the [ON/OFF] button.
• [ON] : Enables the reprinting function.
• [OFF] : Disables the reprinting function.
<NOTE>
To enable this function, there is a need to register the user ID using the DPX7 PC Tool and set
macro (%REPRINT%) at Annotation settings.
“5.1 Registering User ID”, “5.4 Setting Annotation”
The settings made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
006-259-04
MU-36
[1-1-2-4] Option
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the software options of the equipment.
<NOTE>
[User Settable], [Operation After Film Loading], and [QC] are available from main unit software
version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later.
[Spatial Resolution], [Warning at system start] are available from main unit software version
V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later.
[Mammo.QC] is available from main unit software version V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later.
<REMARKS>
• [Automated F.D.C.] :
For setting the timing for automatic execution of automatic density correction
• [17-Steps Pattern] :
For setting whether or not to select 17-step pattern test printing at [Test Pattern] of the U-
Utility.
• [User Settable] :
For setting whether or not to select test printing of user settable images at [Test Pattern] of
the U-Utility.
• [Operation After Film Loading] :
For setting whether to enable resetting of films if film packs differs from the base color set
are set.
• [QC] :
For enabling/disabling the image QC function
• [Spatial Resolution] :
For setting whether or not to select spatial resolution pattern test printing (for checking 20
pix/mm recording) at [Test Pattern] of the U-Utility. (This menu is provided in main unit
software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later.)
• [Warning at system start] :
In the case the shutter is inserted at the time the equipment is started, for setting whether to
warn the user to remove the shutter or to disable use of the film tray without warning. (This
menu is provided in main unit software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later.)
For the equipment with main unit software version V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later, the
equipment can be started without disabling use of the film tray because the shutter presence
check can be skipped.
• [Mammo.QC] :
For setting whether or not to enable Mammo QC function and for setting the value (NEMA/
EUREF) when enabled. (This menu is provided in main unit software version V7.0 or later,
or V13.0 or later.)
<DEFAULT>
[Automated F.D.C.: By each film lot No.], [17-Steps Pattern: Disable], [User Settable:
Disable], [Operation After Film Loading: Enable], [QC: Disable], [Spatial Resolution:
Disable], [Warning at system start: Enable], [Mammo.QC: Disable]
006-259-08
MU-37
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select one of the following at [Automated F.D.C.].
[By each film lot No.]/[By each film pack]/[None]
(2) Select one of the following at [17-Steps Pattern].
[Enable]/[Disable]
(3) Select one of the following at [User Settable].
[Enable]/[Disable]
(4) Select one of the following at [Operation After Film Loading].
[Enable]/[Disable]
(5) Select one of the following at [QC].
[Enable]/[Disable]
(6) Select one of the following at [Spatial Resolution].
[Enable]/[Disable]
(7) Select one of the following at [Warning at system start].
• [Enable] : Warn the user.
• [Disable] : Do not warn the user.
• [Ignore] : Ignore the shutter.
<NOTE>
When [Ignore] is selected, the equipment will start normally if started with the shutter inserted.
However when print request is sent to the film on the film tray inserted with the shutter, “Shutter
present error” will be displayed. In this case, removing the shutter clears the error and resumes
printing.
(8) Select one of the following at [Mammo.QC].

[Disable]/[NEMA]/[EUREF]
<REMARKS>
Selecting NEMA (National Manufacturers Association), EUREF (European Reference Frame)
enables output of the mammo QC pattern complying with the respective standards.
006-259-08
MU-37.1
[1-1-2-5] Select Dmax

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the Dmax selected using commands such as [Output Film] of the
M-Utility.
<DEFAULT>
[2.64/3.0/3.6]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select three Dmax values.
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<NOTE>
Settings cannot be ended until three Dmax values have been selected.
006-259-08
MU-37.2
[1-1-2-6] Set ML Dmax

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to print by Dmax of the image sent when the DI-ML film is
loaded.
<NOTE>
• This menu is provided in main unit software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later.
• This setting applies not only to each individual film tray, but to all film trays.
<DEFAULT>
[Real Dmax on film: 3.6], [Requested Dmax less than 3.6: Reject]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Real Dmax on film].
• [3.6] : When print request above Dmax 3.6 is received, prints at Dmax 3.6 and above on
the DI-ML film.
• [4.0] : When print request above Dmax 3.6 is received, prints at Dmax 4.0 and above on
the DI-ML film.
<REMARKS>
If the same size DI-HL film and DI-ML film are loaded, and the print request is less than Dmax
3.6, prints from the DI-HL film.
(2) Select [Requested Dmax less than 3.6].

• [Accept] : If the print request is less than Dmax 3.6 and DI-HL film is run out, DI-ML
film is used.
• [Reject] : If the print request is less than Dmax 3.6, DI-ML film is not used.
<REMARKS>
If the same size DI-HL film and DI-ML film are loaded, and [Reject] is selected, the film
replenish screen will be displayed when the DI-HL film runs out.
006-259-08
MU-37.3
[1-1-3] Initialize
[1-1-3-1] Recover
<FUNCTION>
Command for returning various configuration settings to the saved state using “[1-1-3-
2] Save Config.”.
Also used for initializing some data managed by the system.
<NOTE>
• To execute this menu, save the various configuration settings beforehand using “[1-1-3-2]
Save Config.”.
• The initialized data are as follows.
• Remaining film count
• User counter
• Total counter
• Error log
<OPERATIONS>
• [YES] : The various configuration settings saved are recovered.
• [NO] : The selected menu is not executed and return to the previous display.
006-259-08
MU-37.4
BLANK PAGE
006-259-05
MU-38
[1-1-3-2] Save Config.

<FUNCTION>
Command for saving various configuration settings (system state after installation).
<REMARKS>
The various configuration settings saved on this menu can be returned to the state when
saved using “[1-1-3-1] Recover”.
<OPERATIONS>
• [YES] : The current system state is saved in the internal HD.
[1-1-3-3] Initialization
<FUNCTION>
Command for executing initialization of various set information and returning default
values set at shipment.
<NOTE>
Executing this menu initializes the following data other than the data initialized using “[1-1-3-1]
Recover”.
• Various configuration data
• Data on whether I/O tracer is executed
<OPERATIONS>
• [YES] : Initialization is executed.
006-259-03
MU-39
[1-1-4] Check Files

<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying system file list.
<REMARKS>
• Only application software files can be displayed.
• Files are displayed in alphabetical order.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Check All] or [Check Individual].
→ The corresponding files are displayed.
● Example of Display
[1-1-5] Check Version

<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying software/hardware version list.
006-259-03
MU-40
[1-1-6] Set Counters

Same as “[5] SET COUNTERS” of the U-Utility.
[1-1-7] Reboot
<FUNCTION>
If the equipment needs to be rebooted after completing command settings, execute this
menu and reboot the equipment.
Even if the “Abnormal Operations” errors occurred, execute this menu and reboot the
equipment. (This is possible only when the M-Utility can be operated.)
“TROUBLESHOOTING (MT), 4.1 Abnormal Operations”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Reboot All].
• [YES] : After “Wait for a while.” appears, the equipment is rebooted.
006-259-03
MU-41
[1-1-8] Reload Software

<FUNCTION>
Command for installing various software on the HD in the MCT board.
These softwares need to be re-installed after replacing the MCT board. Re-install in the
order of “INST (PRT)” (Printer installer) → “OS (PRT)” (Printer OS) → “APPL (PRT)”
(Printer applications).
• Printer applications/Printer OS:
When the software version has been changed or software errors occur in the conveyor
unit, heat development unit, or density measurement section, reload the software.
• Printer installer:
When the software version of the installer has been changed or software errors occur
before reinstalling the above printer applications/printer OS, reload the software.
<REMARKS>
The following shows the times required for software installation.
• INST (PRT) : Approx. 20 seconds
• OS (PRT) : Approx. 15 seconds
• APPL (PRT) : Approx. 1 minute
<OPERATIONS>
CAUTION
To upgrade the main unit software version to A02/A03/A04/V10.0 or perform full
installation of these versions in equipment connected with a sorter, sorter setting must
be set to “Disable” beforehand.
After completion of reinstallation procedure, return this setting to “Enable”.
or V10.1 or later.
(1) Select the installation type.

[APPL (PRT)]/[OS (PRT)]/[INST (PRT)]
(2) Select [ENT] or [QUIT].
(3) [ENT]
• [YES] : Installation starts.
[1-2] Print Queue

Same as “[4] PRINT QUEUE” of the U-Utility.
006-259-04
MU-42
[1-3] Log Files
[1-3-1] Display Error Log

<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying error log list.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Display the error log list.
→ The date of occurrence, place of occurrence, error code, and detailed error code are
displayed.
[1-3-2] Clear
<FUNCTION>
Command for deleting error logs.
<OPERATIONS>
• [YES] : All logs are deleted.
The settings made will be effective immediately.
006-259-03
MU-43
[1-3-3] Store Log Files

<FUNCTION>
Command for saving data files for analysis saved on the PC board in the HDD.
<REMARKS>
• The data for analysis which will be saved are as follows.
• Error logs and text files of various setting information
• Communication logs (external input/formatter/formatter to printer/printer ISC)
• The time stamp of the analysis data is not guaranteed, but is of the date of execution.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [EXECUTE].
→ The corresponding files are saved on the HD.
(2) Check the results.
→ [Completed] appears.
[1-3-4] Logging by User

<FUNCTION>
Command for saving log data for equipment analysis in the HDD of the equipment by
user operations.
“2.4.2 Acquisition of Log Data by User”, “4. DPX7 PC Tool [2-3] Log”
<NOTE>
<DEFAULT>
[Disable]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [ON] or [OFF].
• [ON] : Enables log data acquisition by the user.
• [OFF] : Disables log data acquisition by the user.
006-259-04
MU-44
[1-4] Network
[1-4-1] Set Network
CAUTION
Perform Set Network menu settings after disconnecting the network cables. Re-
connect after completing settings and rebooting the equipment. If Set Network menu
settings have been performed, the security will be vulnerable temporarily.
[1-4-1-1] AE-title
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the printer name for 10 pix/mm recording.
<DEFAULT>
“DRYPIX”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the AE title (fixed at 16 digits).
<NOTE>
If entering less than 16 digits, enter spaces to make up 16 digits.
<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the AE title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the 1-byte code
table.
• The following are not accepted.
• All spaces
• Space for the first digit
006-259-05
MU-45
[1-4-1-2] Fine PRT AE-title

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the name of the printer for 20 pix/mm recording.
<DEFAULT>
“DRYPIXHIGH”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the AE Title (fixed at 16 digits).
<NOTE>
If entering less than 16 digits, enter spaces to make up 16 digits.
<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the AE title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the 1-byte code
table.
• All spaces
[1-4-1-3] Port No.

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the port number used on the network.
<DEFAULT>
“104”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the port number (decimal).
<REMARKS>
Input range: 0 to 65535
006-259-03
MU-46
[1-4-1-4] IP Address
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the IP address used on the network.
<NOTE>
If the main unit software version is V10.0 or V10.1, the network must be in the enabled state
(network cable is connected, and HUB power is ON) when the equipment is started after IP
address setting.
If the network is not enabled when the equipment is started, communication will not be
possible even though the same display as normal start is displayed. In this case, enable use of
the network and then start up the equipment again.
<DEFAULT>
“172.016.001.040”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the IP address (decimal).
<REMARKS>
• Input range: 000 to 255
• “000.000.000.000”
• “255.255.255.255”
[1-4-1-5] SubNetMask
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the subnet mask used on the network.
<DEFAULT>
“255.255.000.000”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the subnet mask (decimal).
<REMARKS>
• If no value is entered, it will be set as “000.000.000.000”.
006-259-05
MU-47
[1-4-1-6] Gateway
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the gateway address used on the network.
<DEFAULT>
None
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the gateway address (decimal).
<REMARKS>
• Unaccepted: 255.255.255.255
• If no value is entered or entered as “000.000.000.000”, it will be taken as unset.
[1-4-1-7] Hostname
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the host name used on the network.
<DEFAULT>
“fujiprinter”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the host name (maximum 16 digits).
<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower cases),
numbers, and hyphen “-”.
• The following are unaccepted.
• Space
• Less than 2 characters
• First character is a number.
006-259-03
MU-48
[1-4-2] Test Network

<FUNCTION>
Command for checking network connection with the connected equipment using Ping.
<NOTE>
later.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Touch the [IP Address] button.
(2) Enter the IP address of the equipment to be checked. → [ENT]
<NOTE>
Enter three digits each time for the IP address.
Input example: For “111.22.3.44”, enter “111.022.003.044”
(3) [ENT]
→ The test to check network connections is executed.
If connection is normal, the following screen (example) displayed.
[1-4-3] Set DICOM

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the filtering of DICOM communication logs.
“5.6 Displaying Logs by Client (Filtering DICOM Communication Logs)”
<NOTE>
006-259-04
MU-49
<DEFAULT>
[OFF]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the client for the filtering using the arrow buttons.
(2) Switch between enable/disable using the [ON/OFF] button.
• [ON] : Enables the filtering function.
• [OFF] : Disables the filtering function.
[1-5] Set Main Panel
[1-5-1] Select Language

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the display language of the operation panel.
<DEFAULT>
[English]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the display language.
[Japanese]/[English]/[German]/[French]/[Italian]/[Swedish]/[Spanish]/[Danish]/
[Norwegian]/[Portuguese]/[Greek]/[Finnish]/[Dutch]/[Chinese (Simplified)]/[Chinese
(Traditional)]/[Korean]
<NOTE>
To display [Chinese (Simplified)]/[Chinese (Traditional)]/[Korean], use an equipment installed
with main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later at shipment, or
replace with an HDD installed with these fonts (114Y5396101A03/A04/A05/A07/A10,
114Y5396105B01/B02/B05/B08).
<REMARKS>
Correspondence between the HDD version and the main unit software version:
114Y5396101A03 : software version A03 114Y5396105B01 : software version V10.0
114Y5396101A05 : software version V4.1 114Y5396105B05 : software version V11.0
114Y5396101A10 : software version V7.0
006-259-08
MU-50
[1-5-2] Size Information

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the display type of the film size displayed on the operation panel.
<DEFAULT>
[inch]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the display type.
[inch]/[cm]/[Japanese]
[1-5-3] Set Alarm

Same as “[7-1] SET ALARM” of the U-Utility.
[1-5-4] Set Key Touch Tone

Same as “[7-2] KEY TOUCH” of the U-Utility.
[1-5-5] ANIMATION
Same as “[13] ANIMATION” of the U-Utility.
[1-5-6] Sound Test

<FUNCTION>
Command for testing the buzzer sound function of the operation panel.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) [ON] → [ENT]
→ The buzzer sounds.
(3) [OFF]
→ The buzzer stops.
006-259-03
MU-51
[1-5-7] Icon Positioning

<FUNCTION>
Command for correcting the deviation of the LCD display position on the operation
panel and touched position on the touch panel.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Execute this menu if the operation panel has been replaced.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Calibration].
(2) Select [Start].
(3) Using a pen, etc., touch the two intersections of mark displayed on the
operation panel.
(4) If touched correctly, select [Exit (OK)].
→ Position is corrected.
(5) If the intersections were not touched correctly, select [Cancel] and repeat from
step (2).
(6) To return this command to its default, select [default].
(7) [Continue]
→ Return to the previous display.
The settings will be effective immediately.
[1-5-8] Show Position

<FUNCTION>
Command for testing the touch coordinates of the operation panel.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Using a pen, etc., touch the operation panel.
Check that “ ” is displayed correctly at the touched position.
If not displayed correctly, execute “[1-5-7] Icon Positioning”.
[1-6] Economy Mode

The same as “[6] ECONOMY MODE” of the U-Utility. (Main unit software version A03,
A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later)
The same as “[10] ECONOMY MODE” of the U-Utility. (Main unit software version A02
or earlier)
006-259-04
MU-52
[2] Output Film
[2-1] 24-Steps
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the 24-steps pattern.
<REMARKS>
• The film count set will be preserved while the M-Utility is on. (Same as the menus related to
film output.)
<DEFAULT>
[Copies]: 1 (At startup of equipment)
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 150).
006-259-03
MU-53
[2-2] 17-Steps
<FUNCTION>
<REMARKS>
film output.)
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the tone type.
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>
Select from the three tone types selected at “[1-1-2-5] Select Dmax”.

006-259-03
MU-54
[2-3] Flat
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the flat pattern.
<REMARKS>
• The film count set and flat density value will be preserved while the M-Utility is on. (Same as
the menus related to film output.)
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>

(4) Enter the flat density value (1 to 399).
[2-4] Cleaning
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the cleaning film.
<REMARKS>
film output.)
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>
006-259-03
MU-55
[2-5] Grid
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the grid pattern.
<REMARKS>
film output.)
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>

006-259-03
MU-56
[2-6] Film out to Sorter

<FUNCTION>
Command for printing flat patterns and discharging to the sorter.
<REMARKS>
film output.)
• This command can be executed only when “[1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting” is set to “With Sorter”.
• For this command, initialize the sorter just before starting the first printing job.
• If the start bin number and end bin number are the same, films will be printed to the same
bin. In other cases, films will be discharged to each bin sequentially starting from the start
bin. After discharging to the 10th bin, films will be discharged starting from 1st bin again.
• The flat pattern density is fixed at 120 and the tone type at 3.0.
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Enter the printing start bin number (1 to 10).
(3) Enter the printing end bin number (1 to 10).
006-259-03
MU-57
[2-7] Uniformity
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the uniformity measurement pattern.
<REMARKS>
film output.)
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>

006-259-03
MU-58
[2-8] SMPTE
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the SMPTE pattern.
<REMARKS>
film output.)
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>
(3) Select the number of image matrix.
[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
(6) Select the interpolation algorithm/method.
[CUBIC]/[NONE]
006-259-03
MU-59
[2-9] User Settable

<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the User Settable pattern (user data image).
“2. U-Utility [2] TEST PATTERN”
<NOTE>
later.
• To print the desired User Settable pattern, save the user settable image in the equipment
beforehand.
“3. M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option”, “5.5 Setting Output of User Settable Images”
<REMARKS>
film output.)
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>
(3) Select the number of image matrix.
[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
(6) Select the interpolation algorithm/method.
[CUBIC]/[NONE]
006-259-08
MU-60
[2-10] Spatial Resolution

<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the Spatial Resolution pattern (for checking 20 pix/mm
recording).
“2. U-Utility [2] TEST PATTERN”
<NOTE>
This menu is provided in main unit software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later.
<REMARKS>
film output.)
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>

006-259-05
MU-61
[3] F.D.C.
[3-1] AUTO F.D.C.

<FUNCTION>
Command for printing 24-steps patterns and calculating the 24-steps density correction
value from the density data measured by the density measurement section.
<REMARKS>
• The number of prints is fixed at 1.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) To change the shift value for high density correction, select [Dmax ↑ ↓ ].
[4] to [-3]
(3) Check the results of execution.
006-259-05
MU-62
[3-2] Check Density

<FUNCTION>
Command for printing 17-steps pattern, and displaying 17-steps data measured by the
density measurement section on the operation panel.
<REMARKS>
● Reference Values
Step Dmax 2.64 Dmax 3.0 Dmax 3.3 Dmax 3.6
1 fog fog fog fog
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
4 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05
5 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05
6 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05
7 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05
8 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05
9 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05
10 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05
11 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05
12 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05
13 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05
14 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07
15 2.28 ±0.07 2.40 ±0.10 2.40 ±0.10 2.43 ±0.10
16 2.46 ±0.07 2.70 ±0.10 2.70 ±0.10 2.95 ±0.10
17 2.64 ±0.07 3.00 ±0.10 3.30 ±0.20 3.60 ±0.20
TP7B0701.EPS
<DEFAULT>
[Dmax: 2.64]
<OPERATIONS>
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>

→ The measured density of each step of the pattern is displayed.
006-259-05
MU-63
[3-3] 24-Steps
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the 24-steps density data measured by “[3-1] AUTO F.D.C.”
on the operation panel.
<NOTE>
If the equipment is rebooted after executing “[3-1] AUTO F.D.C.”, the 24-steps density data
(that displayed on the operation panel) will be deleted.
[3-4] Manual F.D.C.

<FUNCTION>
Command for entering the 24-steps density value measured using the external
densitometer, and creating density correction information.
<REMARKS>
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Measure the films printed using “[2-1] 24-Steps” using the external densitometer.
(3) Enter the density values (1 to 399) of each step of the pattern measured at step
(1).
<NOTE>
The specified values of the input range of each step are as follows.
• Should be between 0 and 399.
• Should be above the density value of the previous step of the pattern.
(4) Check the input value of each step of the pattern, and start correction.
→ “Wait for a while.” appears.
→ “Completed.” appears on the display.
006-259-05
MU-64
[3-5] Densitometer
[3-5-1] 24-Steps
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the 24-steps pattern and measuring the density values.
<REMARKS>
• The measured results are recorded internally.
<OPERATIONS>
[3-5-2] Calibration
<FUNCTION>
Command for creating densitometer calibration tables for calibrating the built-in
densitometer.
<NOTE>
To execute this menu, “[3-5-1] 24-Steps” needs to be executed first.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Measure the films printed by “[3-5-1] 24-Steps” using an external reference
densitometer.
(2) Enter the density values (1 to 399) of each step of the pattern measured at step
(1).
(3) Check the input value of each step of the pattern, and start correction.
006-259-03
MU-65
[3-5-3] Clear Calib. Table

<FUNCTION>
Command for initializing the densitometer calibration table linearly.
<OPERATIONS>
• [YES] : The calibration table is cleared.
[3-5-4] DM Sensor Monitoring

<FUNCTION>
Command for monitoring whether the density sensor of the internal densitometer is
operating normally.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) The state of the density measurement section sensor is displayed at a constant
cycle.
Shield the density measurement section sensor with the film, and check that the
displayed values change.
Also check that low values are displayed for high density areas of the film and
high values for low density areas.
006-259-03
MU-66
[3-6] Uniformity
[3-6-1] Clear Table

<FUNCTION>
Command for clearing the uniformity correction data.
<OPERATIONS>
• [YES] : The calibration table is cleared.
[3-6-2] Input
<FUNCTION>
Command for entering the uniformity correction data.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Repeatedly enter the uniformity measurement patterns measured using the
external densitometer for the required points.
(Points=Low density/high density: 15 points each)
(2) Check the input values of each point, and start correction.
006-259-03
MU-67
[4] Check Scanner
[4-1] Polygonal Motor

<FUNCTION>
Command for turning ON/OFF the polygon motor.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the action.
[ON]/[OFF]
(2) Check operations.
[4-2] LD
<FUNCTION>
Command for turning ON/OFF the LD.
<DEFAULT>
[Low]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Set LD Power] to change the LD power.
(2) Select the power.
[High]/[Middle]/[Low]
(3) Select the action.
[ON]/[OFF]
006-259-03
MU-68
[4-3] Adjusting Main Scanner
[4-3-1] Scanning Width

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the scanning width (compression rate in the scanning direction).
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Output grid pattern using “[2-5] Grid”.
(2) Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified value.
(3) If outside the specified value, enter the scanning width adjustment value. (0 to
±120)
<REMARKS>
• Entering a negative value reduces the image from the reference position.
• The changes in the value entered can be calculated by: (Value entered) x C x 10 ÷ 37000 (mm)
(4) Output and check the grid pattern again.
● Example of Input
Scanning adjusting value = XXXX Adjusting direction
Enter the value. Film conveyance

direction
If minus, enter “–”. Reduction
Enlargement
For C=300 Reference
Value entered Changes
±10 ±0.8 mm
±20 ±1.6 mm
±30 ±2.4 mm
±40 ±3.2 mm
±50 ±4.0 mm
±60 ±4.8 mm
FP7U0309.EPS
006-259-03
MU-69
● Reference Values for Each Film Size
35 x 43 cm size Film conveyance 26 x 36 cm size Film conveyance

direction direction
C C

direction direction
C C
(Unit: mm)
C 300± 1.2 300 ±1.2 200 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 FP7U0310.EPS
006-259-03
MU-70
[4-3-2] Scanning Position

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the scanning position in the main scanning direction.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Output grid pattern using “[2-5] Grid”.
(2) Measure “| A - B |” of the output film and check that it is within the specified value.
(3) If outside the specified value, enter the scanning position adjustment value. (0 to
±120)
<REMARKS>
Enter the adjusting values in units of 0.1 mm.
Start point = XXXX Adjusting direction
XX.Xmm Film conveyance

direction
If minus : - (+) (-)
When entered as "50": Enlarges by +5mm

When entered as "-50": Reduces by -5mm
FP7U0311.EPS
006-259-03
MU-71

direction direction
B A B A
Film conveyance Film conveyance

20 x 25 cm size 25 x 30 cm size
direction direction
B A B A
(Unit: mm)
|A-B| ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤2.0 FP7U0314.EPS
006-259-03
MU-72
[4-3-3] Display Adjustment

<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the current scanning width adjusting values and scanning
position adjusting values.
<NOTE>
The scanning width value entered the last time will not necessarily be displayed.
<REMARKS>
Measured Width/Starting Position: Displayed ten times the value in mm.
[4-3-4] Initialize Scanner

<FUNCTION>
Command for initializing the scanning width adjusting values and scanning position
adjusting values.
<OPERATIONS>
• [YES] : Initialization is executed.
006-259-03
MU-73
[4-4] Diagnosis
[4-4-1] Initial Check

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing self-diagnosis of the scanner.
<REMARKS>
Execution time: Approx. 30 seconds.
● Diagnosis Flow
For diagnosing leading edge detection, LD, polygon, and start point detection.
START
Error
Polygon diagnosis Fatal error termination
Normal
Error
LD diagnosis Fatal error termination
Normal
Error
Start point
detection diagnosis Fatal error termination
Normal
Error
Leading edge
detection diagnosis Fatal error termination
Normal
Diagnosis end processing
END FP7U0313.EPS
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Diagnosis starts.
→ “Wait for a while” appears.
006-259-03
MU-74
[4-4-2] PRN Board Test

<FUNCTION>
Command for executing initialization diagnosis of the PRN board, and fuse and
memory check.
<REMARKS>
Execution time: Approx. 1 minute and 30 seconds.
<OPERATIONS>
→ “Wait for a while” appears.
006-259-03
MU-75
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MU-76
[5] Check Mechanism
[5-1] Film Removing
[5-1-1] Unlock Tray

Same as “[3] UNLOCK TRAY” of the U-Utility.
[5-1-2] Set Remain. Films

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of films remaining on each film tray.
<REMARKS>
• The maximum number of remaining films which can be entered differs according to the film
size. (35 x 43 cm: 100 films, 26 x 36 cm/20 x 25 cm/25 x 30 cm: 150 films)
• Only film trays which are mounted can be set. (Degeneration film trays can also be set.)
• The value immediately after initialization is 0 for each film tray.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the number of remaining films to be set for film tray 1.
(2) Enter in the same way for film trays 2 and 3 if they are used.
006-259-03
MU-77
[5-1-3] Unit Operation

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of the removal mechanism.
<NOTE>
Error will occur if the individual operations are performed in a different order from that
specified.
<REMARKS>
• Degeneration film trays can also be operated.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] → [Film Surface]
→ [Film Suction] → [Lower Limit of Film Fanning] → [Film Fanning] → [Film
Release] → [Film Convey].
006-259-03
MU-78
[5-2] Motor Operation
[5-2-1] Motor Operation

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of the conveyor motor.
<REMARKS>
• Not all operations (STOP/CW/CCW) can be selected for some motors.
• The motor will not stop driving unless [STOP] or re-initialization is performed.
MJ1:CW
MG1:CCW
MD2:CW
ME1:CW
MD1:CW
: Grip roller
: Film conveyance direction
: Roller rotation direction in respect to the film
conveyance direction
CW/CCW in illustration: Operating direction of motor in FP7U0308.EPS
006-259-03
MU-79
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the conveyor motor.
[MD1]/[MD2]/[ME1]/[MG1]/[MJ1]
(2) Select the Action.
[STOP]/[CW]/[CCW]
(3) Select the Speed. (Cannot select at ME1.)
[High Speed]/[Low Speed]
(4) Check the selected operation.
006-259-03
MU-80
[5-2-2] Adjusting Subscanner

<FUNCTION>
Command for adjusting the film conveyance speed (pps) of the sub-scanning unit.
<NOTE>
The film size measured is that of the film currently loaded on film tray 1.
<OPERATIONS>
● When [Printed Length] is selected

“[2-5] Grid”
(2) Select the printed film size.
[14x17 (35x43cm)]/[14x14(35x35cm)]/[10x14(26x36cm)]/[10x12(25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)]
<NOTE>
(3) Select the image printed.

[Grid]/[Flat]
(4) [ENT]
(5) Enter the sub-scanning length “F” measured from the grid pattern (in units of 1/10
mm).
(6) [ENT]
(7) Print the grid pattern and check again.
● When [INITIALIZATION] is selected

• [YES] : The conveyance speed is initialized.
006-259-03
MU-81
● Reference Values for Each Film Size (Grid Pattern)

20 direction 20 direction

F F
(Unit: mm)
F 413.0 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.0 ±1.0 200.0 ±0.8 FP7U0307.EPS
006-259-03
MU-82
[5-3] Grip
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of the grip motor.
<NOTE>
When performing individual operations of MD4, errors may occur if the specified order is not
followed.
<REMARKS>
The grip state will continue unless the [Home Position] operation or re-initialization is
performed.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [MD3] or [MD4].
(2) If [MD3] is selected
Check individual operations by selecting [Home Positioning], [Grip (8x10/10x14),
or [Grip (14x14)].
(3) If [MD4] is selected
Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] → [Grip].
[5-4] Other Actuators

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of actuators.
<OPERATIONS
(1) Select the actuator.
[SOLA11]/[SOLA21]/[SOLA31]/[SOLJ1]/[CLD1]
(3) Check the selected operations.
006-259-03
MU-83
[5-5] Positioning Film

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing positioning operations.
<NOTE>
Error will occur if the individual operations are performed in a different order from that
specified.
<OPERATIONS>
[14x17 (35x43cm)]/[14x14 (35x35cm)]/[10x14 (26x36cm)]/[10x12 (25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)]
<NOTE>

Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] → [Positioning
Film].
Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] → [Positioning].
006-259-03
MU-84
[5-6] Sensor Monitor

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing sensor monitoring.
<REMARKS>
The alarm sounds and stops according to whether the sensor is ON/OFF .
<NOTE>
The F5VM and RMTPWR monitoring is currently not available.
Name Sensor State NO Sensor State OFF
Film pack/shutter detection

SA11 Film pack/shutter is present No film pack/shutter
sensor (U)
SA12 Tray detection switch (U) Film tray is not set Film tray is set
SA13 Tray lock detection sensor (U) Lock is not released Lock is released
SB11 Suction cup HP detection sensor (U) Not at home position At home position
SB12 Film surface detection sensor (U) Suction cup has reached film Suction cup has not reached film
Removal conveyance detection
SB13 Film is at removal unit exit Film is not at removal unit exit
sensor (U)
SA21 Film pack/shutter detection sensor (M) Film pack/shutter is present No film pack/shutter
SA22 Tray detection switch (M) Film tray is not set Film tray is set
SA23 Tray lock detection sensor (M) Lock is not released Lock is released
SB21 Suction cup HP detection sensor (M) Not at home position At home position
SB22 Film surface detection sensor (M) Suction cup has reached film Suction cup has not reached film
Removal conveyance
detection sensor (M)
SA31 Film pack/shutter detection sensor (L) Film pack/shutter is present No film pack/shutter
SA32 Tray detection switch (L) Film tray is not set Film tray is set
SA33 Tray lock detection sensor (L) Lock is not released Lock is released
SB31 Suction cup HP detection sensor (L) Not at home position At home position
SB32 Film surface detection sensor (L) Suction cup has reached film Suction cup has not reached film
Removal conveyance Film is at removal unit exit Film is not at removal unit exit
SB33
detection sensor (L)
SD1 Upper conveyor unit entrance sensor Film is at U turn guide entrance Film is not at U turn guide entrance
SD2 Upper conveyor unit exit sensor Film is at upper conveyor unit exit Film is not at upper conveyor unit exit
SD3 Upper grip position detection sensor
Detection state differs according to combination of sensor ON/OFF
SD4 Lower grip position detection sensor
Cleaning roller grip position
SD5 Cleaning roller grip is at grip position Cleaning roller grip is not at grip position
detection sensor
Positioning guide HP detection Positioning guide (upper) is not at
SD6 Positioning guide (U) is at home position
sensor (U) home position
Positioning guide HP detection Positioning guide (lower) is not at
SD7 Positioning guide (L) is at home position
sensor (L) home position
SJ1 Film release unit film detection sensor Film at film release unit No film at film release unit
SK1 Jam clear cover interlock switch Jam clear cover is open Jam clear cover is closed
SK2 Front cover interlock switch Front cover is open Front cover is closed
TP7U0301.EPS
006-259-03
MU-85
Name ON State OFF State
F5VP DRV board +5V Disconnected Normal

F5VM Power fuse for ME1 - Normal
Density measurement sensor
F12VP Disconnected Normal
+12V power fuse (SNS board F1)
F12VM Disconnected Normal
-12V power fuse (SNS board F2)
Power fuse for upper tray
F24VA Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F1)
Power fuse for middle tray
F24VB Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F2)
Power fuse for lower tray
F24VC Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F3)
Power fuse for MD1
F24VD Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F8)
Power fuse for MD2, MD3,
F24VE Disconnected Normal
and MG1 (DRV board F5)
F24VF Disconnected Normal
MD6, and CLD1 (DRV board F6)
Power fuse for ME1
F24VG Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F7)
Jam clear cover related fuses
F24VH Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F4)
Front cover related fuses
F24VJ Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F9)
FUSEERR Fuse for sorter Normal Disconnected
RMTPWR External remote signal OFF -
LOCK Sub-scanning motor Unmatching speed Speed matching
REDY Polygonal motor NotReady Ready
Sensor power fuse
VCCS Disconnected Normal
(SNS board F3)
TP7U0302.EPS
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Single] or [All]
(2) If [Single] is selected
Select the sensor to be monitored.
→ The state of the sensor selected appears.
(3) If [All] is selected.
→ The states of all sensors appear.
006-259-03
MU-86
[5-7] Other
[5-7-1] Board FAN

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of the fan for the I/F board.
<NOTE>
After executing individual operations of the fan, rebooting the equipment returns the command
to default (intermittent).
<DEFAULT>
[Intermittent]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [ON], [OFF], or [Intermittent].
006-259-03
MU-87
[5-7-2] Serial I/F

<FUNCTION>
If I/F related errors such as SIO communication error occur, perform the serial I/F loop
back test, and check the operations between boards.
Selecting [Sorter] executes the loop back test between the MCT board and SRT board,
and selecting [Barcode Reader] executes the loop back test between the SNS board
and BCR.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• Before executing the loop back test by [Sorter], short-circuit pins 2 and 3 of J2 and J3
of the MCT board. (Normally, pins 1 and 2 are short-circuited.)
Also set “[1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting” to “Without Sorter”.
• Before executing the loop back test by [Barcode Reader], perform the following
beforehand because jumper pins need to be set for each film tray.
• Upper film tray: Short-circuit pins 2 and 3 of J1 and J2 of the SNS board.
(Normally, pins 1 and 2 are short-circuited.)
• Middle film tray: Short-circuit pins 2 and 3 of J3 and J4 of the SNS board.
• Lower film tray: Short-circuit pins 2 and 3 of J5 and J6 of the SNS board.
<OPERATIONS>
● When [Sorter] is selected

(1) Select [START].
→ If errors are detected, the number of errors is displayed.
(2) Select [STOP].
<NOTE>
The loop back test is repeatedly executed until [STOP] is selected.
● When [Barcode Reader] is selected

(2) Select [START].
(3) Select [STOP].
<NOTE>
The loop back test is repeatedly executed until [STOP] is selected.
006-259-03
MU-88
[5-7-3] HDD Test

<FUNCTION>
Command for executing the HDD test and checking hard disk operations when errors
occur while data is transferred from the PC board to the hard disk (reading or writing).
When HDD test is executed, check disk is performed on the R/W partitions in the hard
disk.
<REMARKS>
Execution time: Approx. 30 seconds
<OPERATIONS>
→ ”Wait for a while” appears.
(2) Check the results of execution for Drive 1 to Drive 5.
[5-7-4] DPRAM Test

<FUNCTION>
Command for executing the DPRAM test and checking DPRAM operations when
communication errors such as FMT communication timeout error occur.
When the DPRAM test is executed, the R/W test of the Dual Port RAM mounted on the
MCT board is performed.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [START].
→ If normal, nothing is displayed.
→ If errors are detected, “Failed.” appears on the display.
(2) Select [STOP].
006-259-03
MU-89
[5-7-5] Inter Board Test

<FUNCTION>
Command for executing inter-board test and checking control operations when errors
occur in control operations of the MCT board and SNS board.
Executing the inter board test implements the control signal line/address data line tests
between the MCT board and SNS board.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [START].
(2) Select [STOP].
<NOTE>
The inter board communication test is repeatedly executed until [STOP] is selected.
006-259-03
MU-90
[5-7-6] Barcode Test

<FUNCTION>
Command for executing the barcode reader reading test and checking operations of
the barcode reader when reading errors of the barcode reader occur.
There are two barcode reader reading tests; one by setting the barcode in the film tray
and reading barcodes through the filter, and the other is reading barcodes directly by
pressing the barcode against the reading area.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
For reading tests, use the barcodes pasted on the film pack for DRYPIX 7000.
<REMARKS>
Executing the barcode reading test reads the following barcode values.
Barcode (Example)
45569840858521533691
Barcode value (20 digits) is displayed

on the operation panel.
FP7U0312.EPS
<OPERATIONS>
● When setting barcode in the film tray to perform reading tests

(1) Select the film tray to be tested.
(2) [ENT]
(3) Select [Unlock Tray].
(4) Pull out the film tray, and set the barcode to be tested on the film tray.
Set a used film pack or a new one.
(5) Insert the film tray into the equipment and select [Lock Tray].
(6) Select [Read Barcode].
After reading, check that the value displayed on the operation panel and the
barcode value used for the reading test are the same.
(7) Select [Cancel].
→ Barcode reading ends.
006-259-03
MU-91
● When performing single reading test on the barcode reader

(1) Select the film tray to be tested.
(2) [ENT]
(3) Select [Unlock Tray].
(4) Remove the film tray from the film loading unit.
(5) Press the barcode to be used for the reading test against the reading area of the
barcode reader.
Press the barcode of a used film pack or a new one.
(6) Select [Read Barcode].
After reading, check that the value displayed on the operation panel and the
barcode value used for the reading test are the same.
(7) Select [Cancel].
→ Barcode reading ends.
006-259-03
MU-92
[5-8] Sorter Unit

<NOTE>
This menu can be executed only when the sorter unit is connected to the equipment, and also
“[1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting” is set to “With Sorter” when the equipment is started.
[5-8-1] Motor MT1

<FUNCTION>
Command for checking the individual operations of the conveyor motor (MT1).
<REMARKS>
The motor will continue driving unless [STOP] or re-initialization is performed.
MT1 CCW
FP3F0814.EPS
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Check the operations of the conveyor motor MT1.
006-259-03
MU-93
[5-8-2] Solenoids
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing solenoid operations.
<INITIAL DISPLAY>
Previous ON/OFF state
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the solenoid.
[SOLT1]/[SOLT2]/[SOLT3]/[SOLT4]/[SOLT5]/[SOLT6]/[SOLT7]/[SOLT8]/[SOLT9]
(3) Check the operations of the selected solenoid.
[5-8-3] Sensor Monitor

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing sensor monitoring of the sorter.
<REMARKS>
The alarm sounds and stops according to whether the sensor isON/OFF .
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Single] or [All].
(2) If [Single] is selected
Select the monitoring sensor.
→ The state of the selected sensor is displayed.
(3) If [All] is selected
→ The states of all the sensors selected are displayed.
006-259-03
MU-94
[6] Heat-Developer
[6-1] Temperature
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing temperature monitoring of each thermistor.
006-259-03
MU-95
[6-2] Heating
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing the ON/OFF of each heater.
CAUTION
If the upper limit temperature has been detected, the heater is turned OFF by the
thermal protector.
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
During temperature control (after starting M-Utility, if [ALL] → [intermittent] has been selected
at “[6-2] Heating” or [ON] has been selected at “[6-4] Temp. Control”), check heater operations
after stopping all heaters at step (1).
(1) Stop all heaters.

[All OFF Immediately]
(2) Select the heater.
[HG1]/[HG2]/[HG3]/[HG4]/[HG5]/[HG6]/[HG7]/[HG8]/[HG9]/[ALL]
[ON]/[OFF]/[intermittent]
006-259-03
MU-96
[6-3] Fan Operation

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing the ON/OFF operations of the cooling fan.
<NOTE>
• Before executing this menu, be sure to set “[6-4] Temp. Control” to “OFF” beforehand.
• After executing fan operations, exiting the M-Utility executes re-initialization and returns
normal operations of the fan (intermittent).
• In equipment installed with main unit software version A02, if a fatal error occurs during the
economy mode and the mode transitions to the M-Utility, fans may not operate according to
settings.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the cooling fan.
[Group A]/[Group B]
<REMARKS>
• [Group A]: FANG1, FANG3
• [Group B]: FANG2

[ON]/[OFF]/[intermittent]
[6-4] Temp. Control

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing ON/OFF control of temperature.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the operation.
[ON]/[OFF]
006-259-03
MU-97
[6-5] Set Heater Temp.

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default of the targeted temperature of each heater.
<REMARKS>
The displayed temperature is ten times the value and can be displayed to the first decimal
point.
<OPERATIONS>
[HG1]/[HG2]/[HG3]/[HG4]/[HG5]/[HG6]/[HG7]/[HG8]/[HG9]
(2) Enter the targeted temperature default (100 to 130 °C) (In units of 0.1 °C)
006-259-03
MU-98
[7] Skip Initialize

<NOTE>
Command which is effective only when the equipment is started up. After the M-Utility is
ended, initialization self-diagnosis will be carried out according to skip settings.
The settings made are effective until the equipment is rebooted.
[7-1] Eject Film Remaining

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting skipping discharge of remaining films.
<NOTE>
When set to [Skip], remaining films detected during initialization self-diagnosis by the sensor
will not be discharged.
<DEFAULT>
[Go]
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the skip type.
[Skip]/[Go]
The settings made will be preserved until the equipment is rebooted.
[7-2] Initialize & Heating Up

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting skipping of initialization temperature control.
<NOTE>
When set to [Skip], temperature control is performed but initialization of the heat development
unit is ended without waiting for initialization temperature control.
<DEFAULT>
[Go]
<OPERATIONS>
[Skip]/[Go]
006-259-03
MU-99
[7-3] Initialize Developer

<FUNCTION>
Command for setting skipping temperature control.
<NOTE>
• When set to [Skip], if temperature control is currently being performed, it will be stopped.
• After setting to [Skip], temperature control will not start if “[6-4] Temp. Control” is not set to
“ON”.
<DEFAULT>
[Go]
<OPERATIONS>
[Skip]/[Go]
006-259-03
MU-100
4. DPX7 PC Tool
DI Tool is the Fuji Medical Dry Imager integrated service tool software containing
“DPX7 PC Tool” and “DPX PC Tools”. With this equipment, the functions of “DPX7 PC
Tool” in DI Tool are used.
Using the DPX7 PC Tool allows the following operations and settings to be performed
in addition to the M-Utility functions of the equipment.
• Setup of clients (image output devices) connected to the DICOM network
• Setup of annotations printed on film
• Setup of discharge destination of the sorter by client
• Installation and version upgrade of main unit software
• Backup of individual data
• Saving/loading of equipment data file
• Saving of analysis data
The DPX7 PC Tool also enables settings of printers installed in hospitals serviced by
service representatives to be managed and saved.
<NOTE>
• This manual describes functions of software version V3.0 of the DI Tool.
• This manual describes “DPX7 PC Tool” functions which apply to this equipment.
• In this manual, “DI Tool” indicates the whole service tool software and “DPX7 PC Tool”
indicates the tool functions used in this equipment.
• From DPX7 PC Tool version A09, the “Soft Ver.Up” function button display has been
changed to “Upgrading”, however some parts of this manual still uses the old name.
• By using the DPX7 PC Tool, files will be saved in the “Indv” folder and “LOG” folder in the
“C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment name_Printer name” folder of
the PC for servicing.
In this manual, these folders are referred to as “Indv” folder and “LOG” folder.
• For equipment with main unit software version V7.0 or later/V13.0 or later at shipment, when
equipment data is read, the DPX7 PC Tool screen [Clients:] list shows “MammoQCTest”.
However, if the version has been upgraded from an earlier version, as this will not be
displayed, add and register new clients.
006-259-08
MU-101
■ Restriction According to DPX7 PC Tool and Main Unit Software Version

DPX7 PC Tool
A00 A01 A02 A03 A04
V10.0/V10.1 V11.0 V12.0 V13.0 or later
A02 X X X X X X X
A04 X X X X X X
A05 X X X X X
A06 ∗1 X X X
A08 X X X

DI Tool
A00 A01 A02 A03 A04
V10.0/V10.1 V11.0 V12.0 V13.0 or later
V1.0 ∗1 ∗1 ∗1 X X X
V2.0 ∗1 ∗1 ∗1 X
V3.0 ∗1 ∗1 ∗1
: Usable, X : Unusable, ∗1 : Only software installation is possible TP7C0F02.EPS
006-259-08
MU-102
4.1 DPX7 PC Tool Operations
4.1.1 Outline of Operations

The functions of the DPX7 PC Tool are classified into thirteen types, some of which are
“Function buttons” on the DPX7 PC Tool and some can be selected from the menu bar.
“4.6 DPX7 PC Tool Menu Tree”.
The basic operations of the DPX7 PC Tool consist of selecting the name of the printer
used for performing maintenance and installation work from [Equipment list], and
selecting the desired function to be performed for this printer from a “Function button”
(This procedure can also be performed in the reverse order). This allows various
settings, changes, and checks to be performed using the menus and parameters
displayed on the “Function area”.
When performing settings, changes, and checks using the DPX7 PC Tool, some
functions may require equipment data files to be imported to the DPX7 PC Tool
beforehand using [File Save/Load] of the [Control] function or [from the printer] of the
[Data Transfer] function.
After settings and changes, there is a need to return the changed file to the equipment.
Function button
[Equipment list] Function area

FP7U0407.EPS
006-259-08
MU-103
4.1.2 Operations of the Configuration Setting Screen

The following describes operations at the equipment configuration setting screen
(“[PC1-2] Config”) and client parameter setting screen (“[PC1-3] Clients”).
● Example of Screen (Client Parameter Setting Screen)
Function button
“Item” column “Value” column

FP7U0446.EPS
■ Entering and Selecting Settings

Double-clicking a menu at “Item” or parameter at “Value” enables the values in the
“Value” column to be changed.
Change the value by entering on the PC keyboard, selecting a value from the drop-
down list, or using the ▲/▼ button for changing values.
■ Confirming Values Set

After changing a value at “Item”, press the <Enter> key on the PC keyboard or move
the cursor to another item to confirm the value set.
■ Saving and Canceling Settings

Clicking [Update] at the bottom of the “Function Area” saves the settings of the
equipment or client at that point. Clicking [Cancel] returns to the settings previously
saved.
After confirming the value set, clicking other function buttons saves the settings in the
same way as clicking [Update].
006-259-08
MU-104
4.2 Preparations for Using the DPX7 PC Tool

In order to use the DPX7 PC Tool, the Service Center or Service Station, etc. must first
install the DI Tool in the PC for servicing and set the directory of the FTP site.
<NOTE>
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX straight cable is required for connecting the PC for servicing.
<REMARKS>
This manual describes the procedure for connecting the PC for servicing to this equipment via
the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for servicing to this equipment
using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX crossing cable.
4.2.1 PC Environment Required for Installing the DI Tool

■ Environment of PC for Servicing
● OS
Microsoft Windows 2000 (SP4) or Windows XP Professional (SP2)
● Accessories
CD-ROM drive
● Display
800 x 600 pixels or higher-resolution display
<NOTE>
Version A08 or later must be installed to use Windows XP.
■ PC for Servicing Installing DPX7 PC Tool and DPX PC Tools before DI Tool
It is possible to install DI Tool in the PC for servicing which is already installed with
DPX7 PC Tool and DPX PC Tools before DI Tool.
In this case, data on the various settings of DPX7 PC Tool or DPX PC Tools remaining
in the PC for servicing is succeeded by DI Tool.
<NOTE>
After installing DI Tool, functions of both DPX7 PC Tool and DPX PC Tools can be used by DI
Tool. Delete the DPX7 PC Tool and DPX PC Tools shortcut icons on the desktop and start
menu of the PC for servicing.
006-259-05
MU-105
4.2.2 Installing/Uninstalling/Version Upgrading the DI Tool

■ Installing Procedure
Install the DI Tool as follows.
<NOTE>
If the DRYPIX Net Tool is already installed in the PC in which the DI Tool is to be installed,
uninstall the DRYPIX Net Tool first.
In this case, save the information set using the DRYPIX Net Tool before uninstalling it and use
this information when using the DRYPIX Net Tool on the PC again in the future.
(1) Check that the power of the PC is ON.

(2) If there are any applications currently running, end them. Also turn OFF any
resident virus software which may be running.
(3) Load the CD-R for installation in the CD-ROM drive.
→ The installer starts automatically, and the [Choose Destination Location] dialog for
specifying the location for saving the DI Tool appears.
(4) Click [Next] at the default location shown.
→ Installation of the DI Tool starts.
When installation completes normally, the [Setup Complete] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
The DI Tool will be saved in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm” directory.
(5) Click [Finish].

(6) Remove the installation CD-R and close all windows opened on the Windows
desktop.
006-259-05
MU-106
■ Uninstalling Procedure
To uninstall the DI Tool from the PC, perform the following procedure.
(3) Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control Panel].
(4) Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
(5) From the [Currently installed programs:] list, click [DI Tool Uninstall] and then
[Change/Remove].
→ The [Confirm File Deletion] dialog appears to confirm whether to uninstall the DI
Tool.
(6) Click [Yes].
→ The [Remove Programs From Your Computer] window appears to uninstall the DI
Tool.
(7) Upon completion, click [OK].
<NOTE>
If the message “Some elements could not be removed. ...” is displayed when deletion
completes, click [Details...] and note down the files and folders which could not be deleted.
After completing the following steps, delete the files and folders noted down.
(8) Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
006-259-05
MU-107
■ Upgrading the DI Tool Version

Upgrade the version of the DI Tool as follows.
The version upgrading procedure is the same as the installation procedure.
(5) Click [Finish].
desktop.
006-259-05
MU-108
4.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC

To perform transmission and reception of various data with the equipment, there is a
need to set the FTP site directory of the PC installed with the DI Tool.
Described here is the setting method for an example of Windows 2000.
The setting procedure is basically the same for Windows XP, however there are certain
precautions to be taken and additional settings to be made.
“APPENDIX 1 PRECAUTIONS AND SETTINGS IN THE USE OF Windows XP
PC FOR SERVICING”
<NOTE>
To set the FTP site directory of the PC, Internet Information Services (IIS) function (one of the
Windows components) is required.
This Internet Information Services (IIS) will not be installed in the standard installation of
Windows 2000. If not installed in the PC used, install it as follows.
■ Installing the Internet Information Services (IIS)

(3) Click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
(4) Select the checkbox of [Internet Information Services (IIS)] from the
[Components:] list, and click [Next].
(5) Follow the instructions of the [Windows Components Wizard] dialog to install the
Internet Information Services (IIS).
The message [Insert Disk] appears halfway through to prompt for the “Windows
2000 CD-ROM” to be inserted. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and
click [OK].
<REMARKS>
If the [Microsoft Windows 2000 CD] window appears upon inserting the “Windows 2000 CD-
ROM”, click [Exit] to close the window.
(6) After completing installation, click [Finish].

■ Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC

(2) Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
(3) Double-click the [Internet Services Manager] icon.
(4) Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer] list.
006-259-08
MU-109
(5) Check that [Default FTP Site] is set to [Running]. If set to [Stopped] or [Pause],
right-click [Default FTP Site] and select [Start].
(6) Right-click [Default FTP Site], and click [Properties] from the popup menu.
(7) Click the [Home Directory] tab.
(8) Note down the path set at [Local Path:]
<NOTE>
As Windows 2000 has only one home directory for all accounts, if another directory (folder
name) has already been specified for [Local Path:], other applications may be using it.
(9) Set the folder name installing the DI Tool (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX) at
[Local Path:] , and select the checkboxes of [Read], [Write], and [Log visits].
<NOTE>
If the directory of the FTP site is not set to the folder installing the DI Tool (C:\Program
Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX), the DI Tool will not operate properly. If using other applications on the
same PC, after using the DI Tool, return to the settings noted down at step (8).
In addition, “C:\inetpub\ftproot” is the default value of Windows 2000 and can be changed.
(10) Click [OK].

006-259-05
MU-110
4.2.4 Setting Grouping Symbols

When the [Regional Options] of the PC installing the DPX7 PC Tool is not English,
check the setting of the grouping symbol, and change it if different from below.
<NOTE>
If the setting differs, the formatter error “0005” will occur when files are transferred to this
equipment.
■ Checking Procedure
(2) Double-click the [Regional Options] icon.
(3) Click the [Numbers] tab.
(4) Check that [Decimal symbol] is “ . ” (period).
<NOTE>
If as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for [Digit grouping symbol]
and [Decimal symbol], change the symbol for [Digit grouping symbol].
006-259-03
MU-111
(5) Click the [Time] tab.

(6) Check that [Time separator] is “ : ” (colon).
(7) Click the [Date] tab.

(8) Check that [Date separator] is “ / ” (slash).
(9) Click [OK].

(10) Close the [Control Panel] window.
006-259-03
MU-112
4.3 Flow of DPX7 PC Tool Operations
4.3.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network

To connect the PC for servicing to the network, set the IP address and subnet mask of
(1) Connect the network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which the
equipment is connected.
(2) Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
(3) Check that the directory setting of the FTP site is “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
DRYPIX”.
“4.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC”
(4) From the Windows taskbar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
(5) Double-click [Network and Dial-up Connections] → Right-click [Local Area
Connection] → [Properties] → [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)].
(6) Set [IP Address] and [Subnet Mask].
<NOTE>
Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network administrator of the
installation site.
(7) [OK] → [OK]

(8) Close all windows.
006-259-03
MU-113
4.3.2 Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool)

(1) Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar → [Program] → [Fujifilm] → [DI Tool].
→ The DI Tool main screen appears.
(2) Click [NET] of the “DRYPIX 7000/DRYPIX 5000/DRYPIX 4000”.

→ The DPX7 PC Tool starts, then the DPX7 PC Tool screen appears.
006-259-08
MU-114
4.3.3 Connecting DPX7 PC Tool to the Equipment

Complete the connection of the communication between the DPX7 PC Tool and this
equipment.
<NOTE>
If the equipment in which maintenance and installation are to be performed is already
registered to the DPX7 PC Tool, skip this procedure.
(1) Check that the equipment to be connected is in the standby state.

(2) Right-click [Hospital Name] → [Add].
#1 [Right-click]
[Hospital Name] #2
FP7U0413.EPS
→ The screen for entering the printer name (Host Name) to be registered appears.
(3) Enter the Host Name set for the equipment connected.
(4) Select [DRYPIX 7000/5000] for [Model].
(5) [OK]
006-259-08
MU-115
(6) [Network].
#1
FP7U0415.EPS
→ The [HostInformation] screen appears.
Host Name set at step (3)
Default value of DPX7 PC Tool
FP7U0417.EPS
(7) Enter the IP Address of the equipment and subnet mask → [OK]
→ This completes preparations for enabling communications between this equipment
and DPX7 PC Tool.
006-259-08
MU-115.1
(8) Click the function button (ex. [Control] button) at the top of the DPX7 PC Tool
screen.
→ Communication with this equipment starts. When all connections with this equipment
have completed, the operation panel of this equipment switches to the following
screen, activating the various commands from DPX7 PC Tool.
PC-UTL
Executing
<NOTE>
• If communication fails, the error message [LOGIN Failure] will be displayed.
• While “PC-UTL Executing” is displayed, the equipment will not be able to receive print
requests.
006-259-05
MU-115.2
BLANK PAGE
006-259-05
MU-115.3
4.3.4 Importing Individual Data

Import individual data from the equipment on which maintenance is to be performed.
<NOTE>
• Some DRY7 PC Tool functions may not need import of individual data.
“4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Command Details”
• The following describes the procedure for importing all the individual data using [File Save/
Load] of the [Control] function. As an alternative to this, data files can be imported
individually using the [Data Transfer] function.
“4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Command Details [PC2] Data Transfer”
(1) “Printer name importing individual data” → [Control] → [File Save/Load] → [Save
from the printer] → [Execute]
→ Reading of individual data starts.
#1 #3 #2
#4 #5 FP7U0420.EPS
006-259-08
MU-115.4
→ After import ends, the [File transfer is completed.] message appears, and the data is
saved in the HD in the PC for servicing.
(2) [OK]
4.3.5 Setting/Changing/Checking Individual Data Using the DPX7

PC Tool
Refer to “4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Command Details”, perform the desired setting, changes,
or checks.
To obtain log data, refer to “5.11 Acquiring Log Files” and check the acquired log data
files.
006-259-05
MU-116
4.3.6 Sending Individual Data to the Equipment

Transfer individual data whose settings have been changed to the equipment.
(1) “Printer name” → [Control] → [File Save/Load] → [Load to the printer] →
[Execute]
→ The individual data is sent to the equipment.
#1 #3 #2
#4 #5 FP7U0423.EPS
→ After transfer of individual data ends, the [File transfer is completed.] message
appears, and the individual data is saved in the HD of the equipment.
(2) [OK]
006-259-08
MU-117
(3) Reboot the equipment for the transferred individual data to be valid.
<NOTE>
The equipment may not need to be rebooted for some DPX7 PC Tool functions.
“4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Command Details”

[Reset]
#1 #4 #3 #2 #5
#6 FP7U0409.EPS
→ As communication is cut off when the equipment is rebooted, the [LOGIN Failure]
screen appears.
(4) [OK]
006-259-08
MU-118
4.3.7 Ending the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool)

(1) To end the DPX7 PC Tool, click [Exit] at the top right of the DPX7 PC Tool screen.
<REMARKS>
The button at the top right-hand corner of the screen and [Exit] of the [File] menu have the
same function as the [Exit] button.
→ All settings are saved, and the DPX7 PC Tool is ended.

(2) To end the DI Tool, click [EXIT] of the DI Tool main screen.
→ The DI Tool end.
(3) If directory settings of the FTP site were changed at step (3) of “4.3.1 Connecting
the PC for Servicing to the Network”, set back the original settings.
006-259-05
MU-119
BLANK PAGE
006-259-05
MU-120
4.4 Registering and Deleting the Establishments and Printers

Perform the following procedure to register several establishments and printers to the
DPX7 PC Tool.
The registration and setting of establishments and printers can be performed after
connecting with the equipment at the user or beforehand at the Service Center, etc.
4.4.1 Registering Establishments

<NOTE>
• Names which have already been registered, which exceed 16 characters, consist of space
only, contain two-byte size characters, or start with number cannot be registered.
• Establishment names cannot be changed once they have been registered. To change,
register the establishment by copy/paste, change the name at this time, and then delete the
copied establishment.
As the establishment name registered as default (Hospital name) also cannot be changed,
delete it if unnecessary.
• The following describes a procedure performed by right-clicking the mouse. Registration
can also be performed by selecting the corresponding command from the [Edit] menu.
<REMARKS>
Up to 128 establishments can be registered.
006-259-03
MU-121
■ Registering New Establishments

(1) Right-click [Equip Management] of [Equipment list] → [Add]
→ The [Add EstablishmentName] screen for entering the name of the establishment to be
registered appears.
(2) Enter the establishment name → [OK]
→ The registered establishment name is added to [Equipment list].
The following shows an example of registering under the name “FUJI HOSPITAL”.
■ Registering Establishments by Copy/Paste

<REMARKS>
Registering an establishment by copy/paste will also copy printers registered for the copied
establishment.
(1) Right-click the name of the establishment to be copied from [Equipment list] →
[Copy]
(2) Right-click [Equip Management] → [Paste]
→ The [Paste EstablishmentName] screen for entering the name of the establishment to
be registered appears.
(3) Enter the establishment name → [OK]
→ The establishment name registered by copy/paste will be added to [Equipment list].
■ Deleting Establishments
(1) Right-click the name of the establishment to be deleted from [Equipment list] →
[Delete] → [OK]
→ The selected establishment name is deleted from [Equipment list].
006-259-08
MU-122
4.4.2 Registering Printers

<NOTE>
Names which have already been registered, which exceed 16 characters, consist of
spaceonly, contain two-byte size characters, or start with number cannot be registered.
<REMARKS>
• Up to 32 printers can be registered per establishment.
• The following describes a procedure performed by right-clicking the mouse. Registration
can also be performed by selecting the corresponding command from the [Edit] menu.
• When a printer is registered, a folder named “Establishment name_Printer name” will be
created in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers” folder.
■ Registering New Printers

(1) Right-click the name of the establishment for which the printer is to be registered
from [Equipment list] → [Add]
→ The [Add HostName] screen for entering the name of the printer to be registered
appears.
(2) Enter the printer name → [OK]
→ The registered printer name is added to the establishment selected from [Equipment
list].
The following shows an example of registering printers under the name “fujipriner1”
and “fujipriner2” for the establishment name “FUJI HOSPITAL”.
006-259-08
MU-123
(3) Refer to “4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Command Details [PC1-2] Config” And set the
configuration for the registered printer.
(4) Repeat this procedure for all the printers that need to be registered.
■ Registering Printers by Copy/Paste

<REMARKS>
Registering a printer by copy/paste will also copy the clients registered for the copied printer.
(1) Right-click the name of the printer to be copied from [Equipment list] → [Copy]
(2) Right-click the name of the establishment to register the printer → [Paste]
→ The [Paste HostName] screen for entering the name of the printer to be registered by
copy/paste apperars.
→ The printer name registered by copy/paste will be added to the establishment selected
from [Equipment list].
■ Deleting Printers
(1) Right-click the name of the printer to be deleted from [Equipment list] → [Delete]
→ [OK]
→ The selected printer name is deleted from [Equipment list].
■ Changing the Printer Name

(1) Select the name of the printer to be changed from [Equipment list].
(2) Click [Network] at [System:] of the [Setting] function screen.
(3) Enter the printer name (maximum 16 characters) to be changed in the
[HostName] box → [OK]
→ The printer name selected from [Equipment list] is changed.
“[PC1-1-1] HostName”
006-259-03
MU-124
4.5 Registering and Deleting Clients

Clients requesting printing to registered printers can be registered or deleted.
<NOTE>
• Names which have already been registered, which exceed 16 characters, consist of space
only, or contain two-byte size characters cannot be registered.
• It is not possible to register clients with the same name on one printer. Clients with the same
name can be registered on different printers, however if these printers exist within the same
establishment, the settings of additional clients registered will be the same as existing
clients.
Changing the name and settings of one client will make the same changes in the other
clients as well.
FUJI HOSPITAL
fujiprinter1 DICOM-CT1
DICOM-CT2
fujiprinter2 DICOM-CT1 Can be registered with the same name

FP7U0908.EPS
FUJI HOSPITAL
fujiprinter1 DICOM-CT1 (1) Changing the settings of one
client
DICOM-CT2
fujiprinter2 DICOM-CT1 (2) Also name the same changes

in the other client FP7U0909.EPS
• Importing individual data displays the client name registered and set in the printer in the
[Clients:] list.
<REMARKS>
The maximum number of clients which can be registered is 32 including “default”, “FCR-CSL”,
“WatchDRYPIXLink” and “MammoQCTest”.
006-259-08
MU-125
■ [Clients:] list
[Clients:] list FP7U0905.EPS
The [Clients:] list shows the client names of all currently registered clients. If no clients
are registered, “default”, “FCR-CSL”, “WatchDRYPIXLink” and “MammoQCTest” will
be registered.
CAUTION
If DRYPIX Link is client, then “WatchDRYPIXLink” will be the AE Title used for
communication. In this case, do not change it. Changing it will disable communication
when DRYPIX Link and this equipment are connected.
<NOTE>
For equipment with main unit software version V7.0 or later/V13.0 or later at shipment,
<REMARKS>
FCR-CSL: Settings provided for connecting CR-IR346CL (console for FCR XG-1) and
CR-IR348CL (console for FCR5000 series). This settings is applied to the
clients of named “FCR-CSL”.
default: Settings for clients other than the above.
MammoQCTest: Name of default client (AE Title) used in U-Utility Mammo QC test pattern
output.
006-259-08
MU-126
■ Registering New Clients

(1) [Setting] → “Printer name” → [Add]
[Add] button FP7U0907.EPS
→ The [ProtocolInformation] screen for entering the client name (AE Title) to be
registered appears.
(2) Enter the client name → [OK]
→ The new client is added to the [Clients:] list.
The following shows an example where a client “DICOM-CT” was added.
(3) Refer to “4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Command Details [PC1-3] Client” and set various
parameters to the registered client.
(4) Repeat this procedure for all the clients that need to be registered.
006-259-08
MU-127
■ Deleting Clients
(1) Click the name of the client to be deleted from the [Clients:] list.
<REMARKS>
“default”, “FCR-CSL”, “WatchDRYPIXLink” and “MammoQCTest” cannot be deleted. (If the
main unit software version has been upgraded from V6.0 or earlier/V12.0 or earlier to V7.0 or
later/V13.0 or later, it will also not be possible to delete “MammoQCTest” newly registered
manually.)
(2) [Delete] → [OK]

→ The selected client is deleted.
■ Changing the Client Name

(1) Double-click the name of the client to be changed from the [Clients:] list.
→ The [ProtocolInformation] dialog of the client selected appears.
(2) Change the name of the client → [OK]
→ The name of the client selected changes.
<NOTE>
If clients with the same name exist in one establishment, changing the name of one client also
changes the name of the other clients.
<REMARKS>
The names set at “default”, “FCR-CSL”, “WatchDRYPIXLink” and “MammoQCTest” cannot be
changed. (If the main unit software version has been upgraded from V6.0 or earlier/V12.0 or
earlier to V7.0 or later/V13.0 or later, it will also not be possible to delete “MammoQCTest”
newly registered manually.)
006-259-08
MU-128
4.6 DPX7 PC Tool Menu Tree

Functions displayed on the DPX7 PC Tool are classified as follows on the menu tree.
[PC1] [PC2] [PC3] [PC4] [PC5]

[PC6] [PC7] [PC8] [PC9] [PC10] [PC11]
[PC1-1]
[PC1-2]
[PC1-3]
[PC12]
FP7U0428.EPS
006-259-08
MU-129
DPX7 PC Tool
[ PC1 ] Setting
[ PC1-1 ] Network
[ PC1-1-1 ] HostName
[ PC1-1-2 ] IP Address
[ PC1-1-3 ] SubnetMask
[ PC1-1-4 ] Default Gateway
[ PC1-2 ] Config
[ PC1-2-1 ] Version
[ PC1-2-2 ] Protocol Information
[ PC1-2-2-1 ] AE-title
[ PC1-2-2-2 ] Fine PRT AE-title
[ PC1-2-2-3 ] Port No.
[ PC1-2-2-4 ] Data Transfer Timeout
[ PC1-2-3 ] Association Count
[ PC1-2-4 ] Logging DICOM
[ PC1-2-5 ] Default Client
[ PC1-2-6 ] Real Dmax on film (DI Tool software version V2.0 or later)
[ PC1-2-7 ] Requested Dmax less than 3.6 (DI Tool software version V2.0
or later)
[ PC1-2-8 ] Printer
[ PC1-2-9 ] Option
[ PC1-2-9-1 ] 17-Steps Pattern
[ PC1-2-9-2 ] Auto FDC
[ PC1-2-9-3 ] Set Alarm
[ PC1-2-9-4 ] Set Alarm Tone
[ PC1-2-9-5 ] Set Key Touch
[ PC1-2-9-6 ] Set Key Touch Tone
[ PC1-2-9-7 ] Language
[ PC1-2-9-8 ] Sorter
[ PC1-2-9-9 ] Step Type
[ PC1-2-9-10 ] Size Information
[ PC1-2-9-11 ] User Settable
[ PC1-2-9-12 ] BackupLog
[ PC1-2-9-13 ] QC
[ PC1-2-9-14 ] Warning at system start (DI Tool software version
V2.0 or later)
A1 B1 C1 D1
FP7U0401.EPS
006-259-08
MU-130
A1 B1 C1 D1
[ PC1-2-9-15 ] Spatial Resolution (DI Tool software version V3.0 or
later)
[ PC1-2-9-16 ] MammoQC (DI Tool software version V3.0 or later)
[ PC1-2-10 ] Tray1/Tray2/Tray3
[ PC1-3 ] Clients
[ PC1-3-1 ] Protocol
[ PC1-3-1-1 ] Attribute List Error (0107H Warning)
[ PC1-3-1-2 ] Attribute Value Out of Range (0116H Warning)
[ PC1-3-1-3 ] Image Size is Larger than Imagebox (B604H Warning)
[ PC1-3-1-4 ] N-Event-ReportRQ
[ PC1-3-1-5 ] Use Extention format
[ PC1-3-1-6 ] Change Film
[ PC1-3-1-7 ] Use System Timeout
[ PC1-3-1-8 ] Presentation LUT
[ PC1-3-1-9 ] Precede Picking Up
[ PC1-3-1-10 ] Use Max/Min Density
[ PC1-3-1-11 ] Logging Client
[ PC1-3-1-12 ] Reprint
[ PC1-3-2 ] Magnify
[ PC1-3-2-1 ] Procedure
[ PC1-3-2-2 ] Default Smoothing Type
[ PC1-3-2-3 ] Adjustment Parameter
[ PC1-3-2-4 ] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior
[ PC1-3-3 ] LUT
[ PC1-3-3-1 ] Procedure
[ PC1-3-3-2 ] Default LUT
[ PC1-3-3-3 ] Adjustment Parameter
[ PC1-3-3-4 ] Dmax 3.6
A2 B2
FP7U0402.EPS
006-259-08
MU-131
A2 B2
[ PC1-3-4 ] Output Format
[ PC1-3-4-1 ] Border Density
[ PC1-3-4-2 ] Polarity(Pos./Neg.)
[ PC1-3-4-3 ] Trim Density
[ PC1-3-4-4 ] Trim
[ PC1-3-4-5 ] Trim Width
[ PC1-3-4-6 ] Number of Copies
[ PC1-3-4-7 ] Margin between Image
[ PC1-3-4-8 ] Image Layout
[ PC1-3-4-9 ] Film Size
[ PC1-3-4-10 ] Medium Type(base color)
[ PC1-3-4-11 ] Film Orientation
[ PC1-3-4-12 ] Mirror
[ PC1-3-4-13 ] Processing Type
[ PC1-3-4-14 ] Film Destination
[ PC1-3-5 ] Annotation
[ PC1-3-5-1 ] Annotation Height
[ PC1-3-5-2 ] Annotation Font
[ PC1-3-5-3 ] Annotation Size
[ PC1-3-5-4 ] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/
Lower Left/Lower Center/Lower Right
[ PC2 ] Data Transfer
[ PC2-1 ] Indv
[ PC2-2 ] Operation
[ PC2-3 ] Log
[ PC2-4 ] Files
[ PC2-5 ] User Settable
[ PC3 ] Upgrading
[ PC3-1 ] Load System Files
[ PC3-2 ] Install
[ PC4 ] Analyzer
[ PC5 ] DICOM Print
A3
FP7U0403.EPS
006-259-08
MU-132
A3
[ PC6 ] OutPutFilm
[ PC6-1 ] 24-Steps
[ PC6-2 ] 17-Steps
[ PC6-3 ] Flat
[ PC6-4 ] Cleaning
[ PC6-5 ] Grid
[ PC6-6 ] Film out to Sorter
[ PC6-7 ] Uniformity
[ PC6-8 ] SMPTE
[ PC6-9 ] User Settable
[ PC6-10 ] Spatial Resolution (DI Tool software version V2.0 or later)
[ PC7 ] F.D.C.
[ PC7-1 ] Auto F.D.C.
[ PC7-2 ] Check Density
[ PC7-3 ] 24-Steps
[ PC7-4 ] Manual F.D.C.
[ PC7-5 ] Calibration
[ PC7-6 ] Uniformity
[ PC7-6-1 ] Unit data Reading
[ PC7-6-2 ] Clear Table
[ PC7-6-3 ] Input
[ PC7-7 ] DM sensor monitor
A4
FP7U0404.EPS
006-259-05
MU-133
A4
[ PC8 ] Check
[ PC8-1 ] Check Scanner
[ PC8-1-1 ] Initialize Scanner
[ PC8-1-2 ] Adjusting Main Scanner
[ PC8-1-3 ] Polygonal Motor LD
[ PC8-1-4 ] Initial Check
[ PC8-1-5 ] PRN Board Test
[ PC8-2 ] Check Mechanism
[ PC8-2-1 ] Moving
[ PC8-2-1-1 ] Unit Operation
[ PC8-2-1-2 ] Motor Operation
[ PC8-2-1-3 ] Grip
[ PC8-2-1-4 ] Positioning Film
[ PC8-2-1-5 ] Adjusting Subscanner
[ PC8-2-1-6 ] Other Actuators
[ PC8-2-1-7 ] Sorter Unit
[ PC8-2-1-8 ] Solenoids
[ PC8-2-1-9 ] Sensor Monitor
[ PC8-2-2 ] Sensor Monitor
[ PC8-2-3 ] Other
[ PC8-2-3-1 ] Board Fan
[ PC8-2-3-2 ] Serial I/F
[ PC8-2-3-3 ] HDD Test
[ PC8-2-3-4 ] DPRAM Test
[ PC8-2-3-5 ] Inter Board Test
[ PC8-2-3-6 ] LAN Base Test
[ PC8-2-3-7 ] Patrol Lamp Test
[ PC8-3 ] Heat-Developer
[ PC8-3-1 ] Temperature
[ PC8-3-2 ] Heating
[ PC8-3-3 ] Fan Operation
[ PC8-3-4 ] Temp. Control
[ PC8-3-5 ] Set Heater Cond. Temp.
A5
FP7U0405.EPS
006-259-08
MU-134
A5
[ PC9 ] Control
[ PC9-1 ] File Save/Load
[ PC9-1-1 ] Log Data
[ PC9-1-2 ] Error Log
[ PC9-1-3 ] Indv. data
[ PC9-2 ] System Config
[ PC9-2-1 ] Set Date/Time.
[ PC9-2-2 ] Save Config.
[ PC9-2-3 ] Initialize
[ PC9-2-4 ] Reboot
[ PC9-2-5 ] Set Counters
[ PC9-2-6 ] Set Remain. Films
[ PC9-3 ] Set Main Panel
[ PC9-3-1 ] Sound Test
[ PC9-3-2 ] Motion Speed
[ PC9-4 ] Set Parameter
[ PC9-4-1 ] Patrol Lamp
[ PC10 ] Film Counter
[ PC11 ] Print Queue
[ PC12 ] Tool
[ PC12-1 ] GetLog
[ PC12-2 ] HW AutoCheck FP7U0400.EPS
006-259-08
MU-135
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MU-136
4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Command Details
[PC1] Setting
[PC1-1] Network
To communicate with printers connected to the network, first enter the network setting
of the printer at the [HostInformation] screen.
[PC1-1-1] HostName
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the host name of the equipment.
“M-Utility [1-4-1-7] Hostname”
<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower cases),
numbers, and hyphen “-”.
• Space
• Name starting with a number.
<OPERATIONS>
006-259-03
MU-137
[PC1-1-2] IP Address
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the IP address of the equipment.
“M-Utility [1-4-1-4] IP Address”
<REMARKS>
• Unaccepted: “000.000.000.000”, “255.255.255.255”
<OPERATIONS>
[PC1-1-3] SubnetMask
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the subnet mask of the equipment.
“M-Utility [1-4-1-5] SubNetMask”
<REMARKS>
<OPERATIONS>
[PC1-1-4] Default Gateway
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default gateway address of the equipment.
“M-Utility [1-4-1-6] Gateway”
<REMARKS>
• Unaccepted: “000.000.000.000”, “255.255.255.255”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the default gateway address (decimal).
006-259-03
MU-138
[PC1-2] Config
Command for setting the configuration of the equipment.
<NOTE>
• Import individual data from the equipment beforehand.
“[PC9-1-3] Indv. data”
• If settings have been changed, individual data must be transferred to the equipment, and the
equipment must be rebooted.
“[PC9-2-4] Reboot”
[PC1-2-1] Version
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying software/hardware version list of the equipment.
“M-Utility [1-1-5] Check Version”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Import individual data beforehand.
(2) Import the desired files from the equipment at [Files] of [Data Transfer].
“[PC2] Data Transfer”
(3) Click the [+] mark on the left side of [Version].
→ The software and hardware version of the equipment is displayed.
006-259-08
MU-139
[PC1-2-2] Protocol Information
[PC1-2-2-1] AE-title
<FUNCTION>
“M-Utility [1-4-1-1] AE-title”
<OPERATIONS>
<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the 1-byte code
table.
• All spaces
• First character is a number
(3) [Update]
(4) After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the equipment.
[PC1-2-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title
<FUNCTION>
“M-Utility [1-4-1-2] Fine PRT AE-title”
<OPERATIONS>
<REMARKS>
• If not performing 20 pix/mm recording, this need not be set.
• Use a name that is different from the 10 pix/mm recording printer.
• The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the 1-byte code
table.
• Do not enter upper and lower cases incorrectly.
• All spaces
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-140
[PC1-2-2-3] Port No.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the port number of the equipment.
“M-Utility [1-4-1-3] Port No.”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Enter the port number (decimal).
<REMARKS>
(3) [Update]
[PC1-2-2-4] Data Transfer Timeout
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the timeout value for network communication.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Enter the timeout value. (Unit: seconds)
<REMARKS>
• The timeout value is the maximum time limit for the printer to wait for data to arrive. If data
does not arrive within the set time, a timeout occurs.
• Normally, use the default timeout. If this default value does not work properly for the
connected DICOM client, set the value given by the DICOM client.
• Setting range: 30 to 3600
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-141
[PC1-2-3] Association Count
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of associations to be established together for DICOM
connection.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Set according to the installation environment.
[1] to [10] (default value: 10)
(3) [Update]
[PC1-2-4] Logging DICOM
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to save the record of communication with the client as
log information, and the communication record level.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the value to be set.
• [0:none] : No logging of communication record
• [1:normal] : Normal log information
• [2:detailed] : Detailed log information
<NOTE>
For details on how to acquire communication record logs from the printer, refer to “5.11
Acquiring Log Files”.
(3) [Update]
006-259-03
MU-142
[PC1-2-5] Default Client
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to apply parameters set at [default] in the [Clients:] list for
unregistered clients.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:Yes] : Applies the [default] settings.
• [1:No] : The [default] settings will not be applied.
<REMARKS>
Selecting [1: No] hides [default] in the [Clients:] list.
(3) [Update]
[PC1-2-6] Real Dmax on film
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the Dmax for printing when a print request above Dmax 3.6 is
received by the equipment loading DI-ML film.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-6] Set ML Dmax”
<NOTE>
• This menu is effective for equipment installing software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or
later.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:3.6] : Prints at Dmax 3.6 on DI-ML film
• [1:4.0] : Prints at Dmax 4.0 on DI-ML film
<REMARKS>
If the same size DI-HL film and DI-ML film are loaded, and the print request is less than Dmax
3.6, prints from the DI-HL film.
(3) [Update]
006-259-06
MU-143
[PC1-2-7] Requested Dmax less than 3.6
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use DI-ML film when a print request less than Dmax
3.6 is received and DI-HL film is run out by the equipment loading DI-ML film.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-6] Set ML Dmax”
<NOTE>
• This menu is effective for equipment installing software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or
later.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:Accept] : DI-ML film is used.
• [1:Reject] : DI-ML film is not used.
<REMARKS>
If the same size DI-HL film and DI-ML film are loaded, and [Reject] is selected, the film
replenish screen will be displayed when the DI-HL film runs out.
(3) [Update]
[PC1-2-8] Printer
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the
printer.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Enter the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the printer.
<NOTE>
• Both the [Model] (manufacturing model name) and [Manufacturer] (manufacturer name)
must be no more than 64 characters long.
• This name is used by the client to acquire the name of the printer on the network.
• Normally the default for the model and manufacturer names should be used (Model:
DRYPIX, Manufacturer: FUJIFILM Corporation respectively). Where multiple printers are
installed at a single location, each must be identified by a unique name determined in
consultation with the users.
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-143.1
[PC1-2-9] Option
Command for setting software options unique to the equipment.
[PC1-2-9-1] 17-Steps Pattern
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to display “17-steps pattern” at [Test Pattern] of the U-
Utility.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option”
<OPERATIONS>
• [1:Enable] : Displayed
• [0:Disable] : Not displayed
(3) [Update]
[PC1-2-9-2] Auto FDC
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the automatic execution timing of automatic density correction.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option”
<OPERATIONS>
• [2:None] : Not performed.
• [1:Everylot] : By each film lot No.
• [0:Everypack] : By each film pack
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-143.2
[PC1-2-9-3] Set Alarm
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the alarm.
“U-Utility [7-1] SET ALARM”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the alarm.
• [2:PULSE] : Alarm stops after about three seconds.
• [1:ON] : Alarm is sounded.
• [0:OFF] : No alarm is sounded.
(3) [Update]
[PC1-2-9-4] Set Alarm Tone
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the alarm tone.
“U-Utility [7-1] SET ALARM”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the alarm tone.
[500:Low]/[1200:Medium]/[2400:High]
(3) [Update]
006-259-05
MU-143.3
[PC1-2-9-5] Set Key Touch
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the key touch sound.
“U-Utility [7-2] KEY TOUCH”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the key touch sound.
[1:ON]/[0:OFF]
(3) [Update]
[PC1-2-9-6] Set Key Touch Tone
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the key touch tone.
“U-Utility [7-2] KEY TOUCH”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the key touch tone.
[500:Low]/[1200:Medium]/[2400:High]
(3) [Update]
006-259-05
MU-143.4
[PC1-2-9-7] Language
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the display language of the operation panel.
“M-Utility [1-5-1] Select Language”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the display language.
[ja:Japanese]/[en:English]/[de:German]/[fr:French]/[it:Italian]/[sv:Swedish]/
[es:Spanish]/[da:Danish]/[no:Norwegian]/[pt:Portuguese]/[el:Greek]/[fi:Finnish]/
[nl:Dutch]/[zh:Chinese (Simplified)]/[tw:Chinese (Traditional)]/[ko:Korea]
(3) [Update]
<NOTE>
with main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later at shipment, or
replace with an HDD installed with these fonts (114Y5396101A03/A04/A05/A07/A10,
114Y5396105B01/B02/B05/B08).
<REMARKS>
Relation between the version of HDD and that of main unit software.
114Y5396101A10 : software version V7.0
[PC1-2-9-8] Sorter
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether a sorter is connected.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select whether to use sorter or not.
• [1:Enable] : Sorter is used.
• [0:Disable] : Sorter is not used.
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-144
[PC1-2-9-9] Step Type
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the step type selected using commands such as film output.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-5] Select Dmax”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Set up to three step types to [1: Enable].
[1:Enable]/[0:Disable]
(3) [Update]
[PC1-2-9-10] Size Information
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the display type of the film size displayed on the operation panel.
“M-Utility [1-5-2] Size Information”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the film size to be displayed.
• [1:Cm] : Displayed in cm.
• [2:Inch] : Displayed in inches.
• [3:Japanese] : Displayed in Japanese (Japan only)
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-145
[PC 1-2-9-11] User Settable
<FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling the User Settable image print function of the U-Utility.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option/User Settable”
<NOTE>
This menu is effective for equipment installing software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or
V10.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the required settings.
• [1: enable] : Enable
• [0: disable] : Disable
(3) [Update]
(4) After transferring the individual data to the equipment, reboot the equipment.
[PC1-2-9-12] BackupLog
<FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling the function for acquiring logs by user operations.
“M-Utility [1-3-4] Logging by User”
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
• [1: ON] : Enables acquisition of log data by the user
• [0: OFF] : Disables acquisition of log data by the user
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-146
[PC1-2-9-13] QC
<FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling the image QC function.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option/QC”
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
• [1: Enable] : Enable
• [0: Disable] : Disable
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-147
[PC1-2-9-14] Warning at system start
<FUNCTION>
In the case the shutter is inserted at the time the equipment is started, command for
setting whether to warn the user to remove the shutter or to disable use of the film tray
without warning.
For the equipment with main unit software version V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later, the
equipment can be started without disabling use of the film tray because the shutter
presence check can be skipped.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option/Warning at system start”
<NOTE>
This menu is provided in DI Tool software version V2.0 or later, and effective for equipment
installing software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
• [2: Ignore] : Ignore the shutter
• [1: Enable] : Warn the user
• [0: Disable] : Do not warn the user
<NOTE>
printing.
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-148
[PC1-2-9-15] Spatial Resolution
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to display “Spatial Resolution pattern” at [Test Pattern] of
the U-Utility.
<NOTE>
“M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option/Spatial Resolution”
<OPERATIONS>
• [1:Enable] : Displayed
• [0:Disable] : Not displayed
(3) [Update]
[PC1-2-9-16] MammoQC
<FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling the Mammo QC function.
<NOTE>
“M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Option/Mammo.QC”
<OPERATIONS>
• [2:EUREF] : European Reference Frame
• [1:NEMA] : National Electrical Manufacturers Association
• [0:Disable] : Disable
<REMARKS>
Selecting NEMA, EUREF enables output of the mammo QC pattern complying with the
respective standards.
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-149
[PC1-2-10] Tray1/Tray2/Tray3
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the film to be used.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-1] Set Tray”
<OPERATIONS>
[Tray1]/[Tray2]/[Tray3]
• [0:OFF] : Not used
• [1:14*17] : 35cm x 43cm
• [2:14*14] : 35cm x 35cm
• [3:10*14] : 26cm x 36cm
• [4:10*12] : 25cm x 30cm
• [5:8*10] : 20cm x 25cm
<NOTE>
Do not select [2: 14*14].

• [blue:blue (HL)] : DI-HL
• [clear:clear (HL)] : DI-HLc
• [ML:blue (ML)] : DI-ML
<NOTE>
[ML:blue (ML)] is effective for equipment installing software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or
later.
(5) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-150
[PC1-3] Clients
Command for setting the various parameters for the client (image output device).
<NOTE>
• Import individual data from the equipment beforehand.
• If settings have been changed, individual data must be transferred to the equipment, and the
equipment must be rebooted.
• Do not change the settings of “FCR-CSL” and “WatchDRYPIXLink”.
• The [protocol] parameter of “default” cannot be changed.
• [AutoConfig] is currently not available.
<REMARKS>
The parameters related to the image processing of each client set here apply when image
processing parameters are not set for the image data sent by the client.
006-259-08
MU-151
[PC1-3-1] Protocol
[PC1-3-1-1] Attribute List Error (0107H Warning)
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how unexpected data received should be treated.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the value.
• [0:not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [1:indicate] : Send error message
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-1-2] Attribute Value Out of Range (0116H Warning)
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how data out of range should be treated.
<OPERATIONS>
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-1-3] Image Size is Larger than Imagebox (B604H Warning)
<FUNCTION>
In the BIB N-SET mode (when image data is received in frames), images are reduced
if they are too large to fit the image frame. Select whether to notify that the image has
been reduced.
<OPERATIONS>
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-152
[PC1-3-1-4] N-Event-ReportRQ
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how N-Event-Report Requests (report of events to clients) should
be treated.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:disabled] : No report sent
• [1:enabled] : Send report
(3) [Update]
006-259-03
MU-153
[PC1-3-1-5] Use Extention format
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the exclusive extension format for specific clients.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:No] : Not used
• [1:Yes] : Use
<NOTE>
• The “FCR-CSL” registered as default is set to [1: Yes].
• If the specific clients shown in the table below are not connected, select [0: No].
(3) If [1: Yes] is selected, the [ID] and [Use Default Annotation] in the lower tree level
can be set. Set referring to the table below.
• [ID]
Enter the ID to differentiate the extension format used by the client.
• [Use Default Annotation]
Select whether to use “Annotation” set at “[PC1-3-5] Annotation”.
• [0:No] : Used
• [1:Yes] : Not used
<NOTE>
• Select [0:No] if “CR” is set for [ID]. Image processing error will result if CR extension format
and annotation are used together.
• [Siemens] setting is effective for equipment installing software version A03, A04, V4.1 or
Manufactuter Model ID Use Default Annotation

Siemens – SM
Philips Easy Vision EV No
DR2000 Series HM No
HITACHI Medico If user requires Annotation output set

Clavis View HM using DPX7 PC Tool, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No].
QA-WS771 CR No
HI-C655 CR No
FUJIFILM CR-IR346CL
CR No
(Console for FCR XG-1)
CR-IR348CL
CR No
(Console for FCR 5000 seires)
Synapse CR No
TP7U0401.EPS
(4) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-154
[PC1-3-1-6] Change Film
<FUNCTION>
If the film size/base color specified by the client differ from that of the printer, set
whether to change film.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select one of the following.
• [0:0116H (W)] (default value)
Enables film to be changed. Details of errors which occur when the film is changed can be
set whether to send to the client or not by setting [Attribute list error (0107H Warning)],
[Attribute value out of range (0116H Warning)], [Image size is larger than imagebox
(B604H Warning)].
• [272:0110H (F)]
Details of errors are sent to the client, without changing the film.
• [21317: 5345H (F)]
Details of errors (unique values for Fuji Film systems) are sent to the client, without
changing the film.
<REMARKS>
Set the following according to the client system.
• QA-WS771: For QA-WS771 software version A05 or later:
[21317:5345H (F)]
For QA-WS771 software version A04 or earlier:
[272:0110H (F)]
• HI-C655: For HI-C655 software version A08/B00 or later:
[21317:5345H (F)]
For HI-C655 software version A07 or earlier:
[272:0110H (F)]
• CR-IR346CL
(Console for FCR XG-1): [21317:5345H (F)]
• CR-IR348CL
(Console for FCR5000 series): [21317:5345H (F)]
• Synapse: [0:0116H (W)]
• Other modalities: Set according to operating environment of installation site.
(3) [Update]
006-259-03
MU-155
[PC1-3-1-7] Use System Timeout
<FUNCTION>
If problems occur when the association of clients which are continuously connected is
disconnected at the timeout value set at the printer, set to ignore timeout.
For details, refer to “Modality Connection List”.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:No] : Ignore timeout
• [1:Yes] : Enable timeout
<NOTE>
Select [0: No] (ignore timeout) for equipment resulting in problems.
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-1-8] Presentation LUT
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use LUT information sent from the client.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:No] : LUT sent from the client is not used.
• [1:Yes] : LUT sent from the client is used.
(3) [Update]
006-259-03
MU-156
[PC1-3-1-9] Precede Picking Up
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the pre-removal function for starting removal
operations immediately after receiving the output request to increase the printing
speed.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:No] : The pre-removal function is not used.
• [1:Yes] : The pre-removal function is used.
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-1-10] Use Max/Min Density
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the minimum density value and maximum density
value of the equipment or client.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:Printer] : Printer
• [1:modality] : Client
(3) [Update]
006-259-03
MU-157
[PC1-3-1-11] Logging Client
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the filtering of DICOM communication logs.
“M-Utility [1-4-3] Set DICOM”, “5.6 Displaying Logs by Client (Filtering DICOM
Communication Logs)”
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Import individual data (dicom.dat) beforehand.
• [0: No] : Disables filtering.
• [1: Yes] : Enables filtering.
(3) [Update]
(4) After transferring the individual data (dicom.dat) to the equipment, reboot the
equipment.
[PC1-3-1-12] Reprint
<FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling the image reprint function.
“M-Utility [1-1-2-3] Reprint Function”
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0: No] : Disables the reprint function.
• [1: Yes] : Enables the reprint function.
(3) [Update]
<NOTE>
For the user to reprint, the user ID needs to be registered.
“5.1 Registering User ID”
006-259-04
MU-158
[PC1-3-2] Magnify
Command for setting the default value for enlargement/reduction processing.
[PC1-3-2-1] Procedure
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the enlargement/reduction processing.
<OPERATIONS>
[0:A-VR]/[1:SSM]
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-2-2] Default Smoothing Type
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default smoothing type.
<OPERATIONS>
[1:SHARP]/[2:MEDIUM]/[3:SMOOTH]
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-159
[PC1-3-2-3] Adjustment Parameter
<FUNCTION>
If A-VR method is selected, set the [Adjustment parameter] (fine tuning) for each the
three modes [SHARP], [MEDIUM], and [SMOOTH].
<OPERATIONS>
• [Edge detection]
Select [0: OFF] if not performing edge enlargement/reduction processing, or [1:ON] if
performing.
• [Detection level]
Set the edge detection level value in the range of 1 to 1023.
• [Sharpness]
Set the sharpness adjustment parameter in the range of -70 to 300.
• [Character color]
Select [0:White] or [1:Black] for the continuous emphasis density settings flag (the color
specified for characters).
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-160
[PC1-3-2-4] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default values if the client does not send the Requested
Decimate/Crop Behavior tag (image reduction treatment).
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
• [1: DECIMATE] : Reduces images by interpolation to fit into the image box.
• [2: CROP] : Cuts away the outer perimeter taking the image center as the origin.
• [3: FAIL] : Rejects reception because the image does not fit into the image box.
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-161
■ Enlargement/Reduction
● Main unit software version A02 or earlier
Setting Processing Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
Response status 0000H(S) B604H(W) *1 0116H(W)
Enlargement/ Reduces image by Taking (2010,0060)=CUBIC, Ignoring (2020, 0030),
–
reduction interpolation reduces image by enlarges/reduces image to
(CUBIC interpolation ). interpolation fit into image box
(CUBIC interpolation). (CUBIC interpolation).
● Main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later
Setting Processing Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
Response status 0000H(S) B60AH(W) *2 0116H(W)
Enlargement/ Reduces image by Taking (2010,0060)=CUBIC, Ignoring (2020, 0030),
reduction interpolation reduces image by enlarges/reduces image to
DECIMATE
(CUBIC interpolation ). interpolation fit into image box. If reducing,
(CUBIC interpolation ). reduces image by
interpolation
(CUBIC interpolation ).
Response status 0000H(S) B609H(W) *2 B609H(W) *2
Enlargement/ Cuts away unnecessary Cuts away unnecessary Centers image enlarged/
reduction parts after centering the parts after centering the reduced (CUBIC
CROP specified image and image specified image and image interpolation ) at the size
box. box. specified by (2020,0030)
with the image box, and cuts
away unnecessary parts.
Response status 0000H(S) C603H(F) C603H(F)
Enlargement/ Reduces image by Images are not received. Images are not received.
FAIL
reduction interpolation
(CUBIC interpolation ).
❍ However, conditions are as follows.

• Condition 1: (2010,0060)=CUBIC. When image is larger than the image box, and image is reduced.
• Condition 2: (2010, 0060)=NONE. When image is larger than the image box.
• Condition 3: When size specified by (2020,0030) is larger than the image box.
❍ The meanings of response status are as follows.

B604H(W) : Image size is larger than image box size, the image has been demagnified.
B609H(W) : Image size is larger than the Image Box size. The Image has been cropped to fit.
B60AH(W) : Image size or Combined Print Image size is larger than the Image Box size.
Image or Combined Print Image has been decimated to fit.
B604H(W) : Image size is larger than image box size.
*1) If the reduction notification B604H (W) is ignored for images that do not fit into the image box at the Configuration
setting regardless of the version, 0000H (S) is returned instead of B604H (W).
*2) Likewise for CROP specification B609H (W), B604H (W) is ignored, and 0000H (S) is returned.
TP7U0412.EPS
006-259-04
MU-162
[PC1-3-3] LUT
Command for setting the default values for the tone correction processing parameters.
<REMARKS>
If performing fine adjustments of LUT for registered clients, the changes made in parameter
values will also be made at the equipment even if individual data is not transferred for every
fine adjustment.
[PC1-3-3-1] Procedure
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the tone correction processing method.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the tone correction processing method.
[0:SAR]/[1:BAR]
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-3-2] Default LUT
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default LUT number.
<OPERATIONS>
[1] to [8]
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-163
[PC1-3-3-3] Adjustment Parameter
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the following parameters for each LUT number (LUT1 to LUT8) in
the lower menu items.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Set the following parameters.
• [γ Table No.]
For SAR: 11 to 99 (If the main unit software version is up to A01, set within 11 to 49.)
For BAR: 1 to 20 (If the main unit software version is up to A01, set within 1 to 10.)
• [Max. Density]
For SAR, set the maximum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0 to 300,
330, 360)
For BAR, set the maximum density by percentage. (Range: 0 to 100)
• [Min. Density]
For SAR, set the minimum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (The value of the
minimum density must be lower than that of the maximum density.) (Range: 0 to 300)
For BAR, the minimum density setting is not required.
• [Contrast:]
Set the contrast in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 10 to 400)
This contrast setting does not exist for the SAR method.
For the SAR method, the following settings are also required for the tone
correction curve tuning (if used).
• [Number of Tuning Points]
Set the number of tuning points in the range of 0 to 5. The following values must be set for
each tuning point when the number of tuning points is set to 1 or more.
• [Density]
Set the tuning density in multiples of 100 (range: 1 to 300).
Follow the rule of Min. density<density<Max. density.
• [Shift]
Set the shift density in multiples of 100 (range: -100 to 100).
Follow the rule of Min. density<density ± shift<Max. density.
• [Contrast]
Set the contrast at the tuning point in multiples of 100 (range: 10 to 400).
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-164
[PC1-3-3-4] Dmax 3.6
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the tone type of Dmax.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Set the tone type.
[0:Standard]
(3) [Update]
006-259-03
MU-165
[PC1-3-4] Output Format

Command for setting the client-dependent default settings for the output format.
[PC1-3-4-1] Border Density
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the border density.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Set the border density in multiples of 100 x actual value (range = 0 to 300).
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-4-2] Polarity(Pos./Neg.)
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to reverse the black/white of the image.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select whether to reverse the black/white of the image.
• [1:normal(Pos.)] : Black/white reversal off
• [2:reverse(Neg.)] : Black/white reversal on
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-4-3] Trim Density
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the image trim density.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Set the image trim density in multiples of 100 x actual value (range = 0 to 300).
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-166
[PC1-3-4-4] Trim
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to print trimming.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select whether to print trimming.
• [0:OFF] : Without trim
• [1:ON] : With trim
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-4-5] Trim Width
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the trim width.
<NOTE>
If the setting of the “[PC1-3-4-4] Trim” is [0: OFF] the value set for the “[PC1-3-4-5] Trim Width”
will be invalid.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Set the width of the trim in pixels (range = 1 to 9).
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-4-6] Number of Copies
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default number of print copies.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Set number of print copies in the range of 1 to 99.
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-167
[PC1-3-4-7] Margin between Image
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the margin between image frames on the film.
<NOTE>
Normally, the default value for the margin between image frames should be used. Do not
change the default setting unless requested by a user because of layout problems.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Set the margin between image frames on the film in the range of 0 to 50 (unit:
pixel).
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-4-8] Image Layout
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how image frames are arranged.
(2) Select how image frames are arranged.
• [0:concentration]:
Sets the image frames in the center of the film (secures the setting value of [Margin
between Image]).
• [1:spread]:
Sets the image frames in the center within each of the remaining image blocks that are
secured by the setting value of [Margin between Image].
<NOTE>
For [concentration], all images on the film must be of the same size. In the following cases,
images will be arranged by [spread] even if set to [concentration] because image sizes vary.
• When images of different sizes are included on one film.
• If the output image size (width of image) on the film is specified (Requested Image Size) in
the image data sent from the client.
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-168
[PC1-3-4-9] Film Size
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default film size.
<OPERATIONS>
[1:8IN*10IN]/[2:10IN*14IN]/[3:14IN*14IN]/[4:14IN*17IN]/[5:10IN*12IN]
<NOTE>
Do not select [3:14IN*14IN].
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-4-10] Medium Type(base color)
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default film base color.
<OPERATIONS>
[1:blue]/[2:clear]
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-4-11] Film Orientation
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the film orientation.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the film orientation.
[1:PORTRAIT]/[2:LANDSCAPE]
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-169
[PC1-3-4-12] Mirror
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting film surface/back.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select film surface/back.
• [0:OFF(Normal)]: Glossy side to back
• [1:ON(Mirror)] : Glossy side to front
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-4-13] Processing Type
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the density processing calculation method.
<NOTE>
This menu is effective for equipment installing software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the processing type.
• [0:Type1] : Density processing calculation method which interpolates the measured
density.
• [1:Type2] : Density processing calculation method with smoother tonal representation
than Type 1. Tonal conversion continuity is better in low density areas below
density of 0.4.
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-169.1
[PC1-3-4-14] Film Destination
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the destination to discharge film.
<NOTE>
The sorter related parameters set here are applied to image data sent from clients if not
discharge bin number is specified. If the client specifies a discharge bin number, this number
will be used.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select [Upper Tray] or [Bin No. 1] to [Bin No. 10], and specify as film discharge
destination.
• [0:not use] : Film discharge destination not specified.
• [1:use] : Film discharge destination is specified.
<NOTE>
When [Upper Tray] is specified as the discharge destination, film will be discharged to the top
of the equipment. In this case, bins cannot be specified as the discharge destination.
(3) [Update]
006-259-05
MU-169.2
BLANK PAGE
006-259-05
MU-169.3
BLANK PAGE
006-259-05
MU-169.4
BLANK PAGE
006-259-05
MU-170
[PC1-3-5] Annotation
Set and enter the character string of the annotation to be printed on film.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to “5.4 Setting Annotation”.
The following three types of annotations are printed by this equipment.

(i) Annotations specified by the client.
(ii) Annotations by client set on this equipment.
(iii) Annotations fixed for the printer set on this equipment.
Perform the above (ii) and (iii) settings as follows.
● To set annotations by client

(1) Select the client to which the annotation is to be set from the [Clients:] list.
(2) Perform [Annotation] settings.
● To set annotations fixed for the printer

(1) Select the [default] client from the [Clients:] list.
(2) Perform [Annotation] settings.
<NOTE>
• If the same annotation print settings are set for the same position on the film, the output
priority order will be (i) → (ii) → (iii).
• If the CR extension format is set, do not set annotation.
“[PC1-3-1-5] Use Extention format”
006-259-08
MU-171
[PC1-3-5-1] Annotation Height
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the extension of the printing area of annotations along the height
of the characters. Execute this setting command to increase the character size
according to the needs of the hospital.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the height of the area for printing annotations.
• [1] : Area is not extended
• [2] : Extended two times along height
• [3] : Extended three times along height
• [4] : Extended four times along height
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-5-2] Annotation Font
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the font type of the annotation.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the font.
• [System] : Font used by the equipment’s system.
• [MS_Gothic] : MS Gothic font
• [MS_Mincho] : MS Mincho font
<NOTE>
Be sure to select [System].
(3) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-172
[PC1-3-5-3] Annotation Size
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the size of the annotation font.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the size of the annotation font. (Unit: point)
[8]/[9]/[10]/[11]/[12]/[14]/[16]/[18]/[20]/[22]/[24]/[26]/[28]/[36]/[48]/[72]
<NOTE>
With 20 pix/mm recording, annotation characters are printed smaller than 10 pix/mm
recording.
(3) [Update]
[PC1-3-5-4] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/Lower Center/

Lower Right
<FUNCTION>
Select the place for entering the annotation text, and enter the annotation text
character.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) Select the place for entering the annotation text.
• [Upper Left] : Character string printed on the upper left corner of the film
• [Upper Center] : Character string printed on the top of the film in the center
• [Upper Right] : Character string printed on the upper right corner of the film
• [Lower Left] : Character string printed on the lower left corner of the film
• [Lower Center] : Character string printed on the bottom of the film in the center
• [Lower Right] : Character string printed on the lower right corner of the film
006-259-03
MU-173
Upper Left Upper Center Upper Right
Lower Left Lower Center Lower Right FP7U0434EPS
<NOTE>
• If annotations are set to be printed at the bottom of the film, the image area will be smaller
than when this is not set, and images will be printed in reduced size.
• Though annotations can be printed anywhere (upper/lower, left/ center/ right of the film),
they may be missing at some locations. Therefore when printing annotations at several
locations, check that none is missing during printing.
“5.4 Setting Annotation/■ Rules on Location of Annotations”
(3) Enter the annotation text character string in the [Value].

<NOTE>
• Up to 64 one-byte size characters can be entered.
• In addition to standard characters, macros are also available.
• If the annotation character string becomes long after macro conversion, make sure that no
characters are missing.
“5.4 Setting Annotation/■ List of Macro Definitions”
(4) [Update]
006-259-03
MU-174
[PC2] Data Transfer

Transfer data files of the equipment between the equipment and PC for servicing, and
save/load data files using the FD.
<REMARKS>
Save: Saves data in the PC for servicing on the FD (Backup)
Load: Imports data saved on the FD to the PC for servicing (Restore)
[Data Transfer] consists of five functions, according to the data file to be transferred.
The files corresponding to each function are as follows.
• [Indv] : Individual data files
• [Operation] : Equipment operation data files
• [Log] : Log data files
• [Files] : Manually selected data files
• [User Settable] : User settable image data file
006-259-08
MU-175
■ Button Operations
The following shows functions of buttons used at [Data Transfer]. Some buttons cannot
be implemented according to the function selected.
Button Name Function
[PC => Printer] Transfers data files from the PC for servicing to the equipment.
[Backup] Transfers individual data files (*1) saved in the PC for servicing
to a folder on the PC for servicing.
(Used mainly for saving on FDs)
[Restore] Transfers individual data files saved in a folder to the folder in

the PC for servicing (*1).
(Used mainly for loading from FDs.)
[Printer => PC] Transfers data files from the equipment to the PC for servicing.
(*1): C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment name_Printer name\Indv

TP7U0411.EPS
<NOTE>
As data files on FDs cannot be transferred to the equipment directly, transfer in the following
order, “FD” → “PC for servicing” → “Equipment”.
■ Selecting the Transfer Destination/Transfer Source

When [Backup] or [Restore] is selected, the window for selecting the transfer
destination or transfer source appears. After selecting, click [OK] to transfer the files.
● When [Backup] is selected ● When [Restore] is selected

Window for selecting transfer destination Window for selecting transfer source
FP7U0930.EPS
006-259-05
MU-176
■ Configuration of Storage Folders

The following shows the configuration of folders storing files used at [Data Transfer].
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm
Config
Dicom.dat
Imginf.prm
netinf.prm
DRYPIX
Printers
Establishment name_Printer name
Indv
Individual data file
Operation
FilmCount
Film count file
Maintenance
Maintenance data file
QCData
QC data file
Log
AnalysisDirectory
yymmddhhmmss (date/time)
DICOM
DICOM log file
Client
Client DICOM log file
Output
Output control log file
Spooler
Spooler log file
Event
Event log file
PCUTL
PCUTL log file
Driver
Driver log file
Main
Main control log file
GUI
GUI log file
PRT
IOT.ISC log file
Startup
Startup log file
Backup
Backup log file FP7U0918.EPS
006-259-03
MU-177
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MU-178
[PC2-1] Indv
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring individual data files.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) If using a FD, insert the FD in the FDD of the PC for servicing (drive A).
(2) Select the type of file to transfer.
• [All] : All individual data
• [Dicom.dat/Imginf.prm] : Dicom.dat and Imginf.prm files
• [gamma2.prm] : gamma2.prm file
(3) Execute transfer.
• [PC => Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment
• [Backup] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to selected folder (FD)
• [Restore] : Data files are transferred from selected folder (FD) to PC for servicing
• [Printer => PC] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
<NOTE>
When [Backup] or [Restore] is selected, a window for selecting the transfer destination or
transfer source appears. After selecting, click [OK].
→ File transfer starts.
→ When file transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen will be
displayed.
006-259-08
MU-179
(4) If using a FD, remove it from the FDD.

(5) If files were transferred to the equipment, reboot the equipment so that the
settings of the transferred file are made effective.
006-259-03
MU-180
[PC2-2] Operation
Command for transferring operation data files.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the type of file to be transferred.
• [All] : All equipment operation data
• [Film Count] : Film count data
• [Maintenance Data] : Maintenance data
• [QC Data] : QC data
<NOTE>
[Maintenance Data] and [QC Data] are effective for equipment installing software version A03,
A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later.

[Printer => PC] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
displayed.
006-259-08
MU-181
<Transfer Files>
• [Film Count]
• Film count (film_stat*dat)/(film_stat_YYYY_MM_DD.csv)
<REMARKS>
After transferring “film_stat.dat”, the files on number of films used are aggregated, and the
“film_stat_YYYY_MM_DD.csv” file is generated. “YYYY_MM_DD” is the date the file was
generated. If an aggregation file with the same name exists in the folder generated in, this file
is overwritten.
• [Maintenance Data]
• Conduction time file (running_time.csv)
• Start/initialization diagnosis results file (PRT_diagnosis.csv)
• Barcode data file (barcode.csv)
• Error information file (error_info.csv)
• Density measurement data file (density.csv)
• Event log (EventLog.txt)
• [QC Data]
• QC results storage file (QC_Result.csv)
<REMARKS>
The format of files is shown below.
● Film count
film_stat_YYYY_MM_DD.csv (YYYY_MM_DD is the date the file was generated)
File format: kind, date, n1, n2, n3, • • • , n31
• kind : The category values of statistical information on the number of films used
are “tray1”, “tray2”, “tray3”, AE Title, IP address.
• date : The year and month of aggregation of the statistical information on the
number of films used.
• 1-31 : Number of files used between 1st and 31st. (maximum 31)
● Maintenance data
running_time.csv
File format: YYYY/MM/DD, hh:mm:ss, Status
• YYYY/MM/DD : Date
• hh:mm:ss : Time
• Status : Category (“Boot up” at startup and “Shut Down” at shutdown)
PRT_diagnosis.csv
File format: YYYY/MM/DD, hh:mm:ss, Operation, Result, Time, Laser Power, Check Disk
• hh:mm:ss : Time
• Operation : Operation (“Initialization” or “Re-initialization”)
• Result : Results (“Completed” or results code notified from the PRT)
• Time : Initialization time (“mm: Minute, ss: Seconds, “---” if initialization time is
not notified)
• Laser Power : Laser search power (Search power value notified from driver during LD
diagnosis, “---” is notified when LD diagnosis is canceled.)
• Check Disk : Whether check disk is executed or not (“Executed” when check disk is
executed by the OS at startup, and “Nothing” when not executed)
006-259-03
MU-182
barcode.csv
File format: YYYY/MM/DD, hh:mm:ss, Tray, Detail, Barcode
• hh:mm:ss : Time
• Tray : Tray number (trays 1 to 3 in which film was replaced)
• Detail : Detailed code (Same code as event log recording)
• Barcode : Barcode (Barcode data read)
error_info.csv
File format: YYYY/MM/DD, hh:mm:ss, Error Code, Detail, Comment
• hh:mm:ss : Time
• Error Code : Error Code
• Detail : Detailed code
• Comment : Comment (Information recorded separately from error code)
density.csv
File format: YYYY/MM/DD, hh:mm:ss, Item, Data (This file is recorded in a 3-rows set.)
• YYYY/MM/DD : Date (Common to all rows)
• hh:mm:ss : Time (Common to all rows)
• Item : Data category (1/3: Density, 2/3: Gain, 3/3: Dmax Adjusted)
• Data : Density information (1/3: 24-steps density data of built-in densitometer,
2/3: tonal gain parameter after density measurement, 3/3: Dmax
adjustment parameter)
EventLog.txt
• Error log information acquired during log acquisition
006-259-03
MU-183
[PC2-3] Log
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring log data files.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the type of log file to be transferred.
• [All] : Acquires all log file
• [Select Log Type] : Acquires individual logs
• [Backup Log] : Acquires user acquired logs
<NOTE>
• [All] and [Select Log Type] are effective for equipment installing software version A02, A03,
A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later. For version A01 and earlier, use [GetLog] of the [Tool]
menu.
“[PC12] GetLog”
• Clicking [Clear] deselects the log file selected at [Select Log Type].
• [Backup Log] is effective only for equipment installing software version A03, A04, V4.1 or

[Printer => PC] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
displayed.
006-259-08
MU-184
[PC2-4] Files
<FUNCTION>
Command for manually selecting the required data files one at a time and transferring
them.
<OPERATIONS>
■ General Procedure
(1) If using a FD, insert the FD in the FDD of the PC for servicing (drive A).
(2) Select the place storing the files to be transferred.
• [PC] : HD of the PC for servicing
• [Printer] : HD of the equipment
(3) Display the files to be transferred.
• [Indv. Files] : Displays individual data files
• [All Files] : Displays all data files
<NOTE>
• Normally, select [Indv. Files]. If the files to be transferred are not displayed by this selection,
select [All Files].
• If using a FD, do not select [All Files].
<REMARKS>
The files displayed will differ between “PC” and “Printer” selected at step (4). Because files not
related to the DPX7 PC Tool editing function are not displayed, less files will be displayed with
[PC]. However there are some files displayed only by [PC].
(4) Select the files to be transferred.

<NOTE>
Always take the three files “Dicom.dat”, “Imginf.prm”, and “netinf.prm” as one set.
<REMARKS>
• To select several files, select them while pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key.
• If using a FD, all individual data will be saved/loaded regardless of the files selected.

• [PC => Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment
• [Backup] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to selected folder (FD)
• [Restore] : Data files are transferred from selected folder (FD) to PC for servicing
• [Printer => PC] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
<NOTE>
When [Backup] or [Restore] is selected, a window for selecting the transfer destination or
transfer source appears. After selecting, click [OK].
006-259-05
MU-185
(4)
(5) (3) (2) FP7U0448.EPS
→ When file transfer ends normally, the [File transfer is completed.] screen will be
displayed.
<REMARKS>
Other than the selected files, files required for specifying the printer will also be transferred.
(6) If using a FD, remove it from the FDD.

(7) If files were transferred to the equipment, reboot the equipment so that the
settings of the transferred file are made effective.
006-259-08
MU-186
■ Loading Individual Data Saved on FD

(1) Insert the FD saving individual data in the FDD of the PC for servicing (drive A).
(2) Register the establishment name and printer name of the printer saved on the FD.
“4.4 Registering and Deleting Establishments and Printers”.
(3) “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Files] → [PC] → [Indv. Files] → [Restore]
→ The [Restore] screen for selecting the folder (transfer source) appears.
(4) “drive A” → [OK]
→ The individual data will be copied from the FD to the PC for servicing.
<NOTE>
When registering the printer name, make sure the establishment name and printer name are
entered correctly.
Otherwise, the correct printer name will be registered newly, and individual data on the FD will
not be incorporated by the printer additionally registered but in the printer with the incorrect
name.
In this case, delete both printers, and start from step (2).
FUJI HOSPITAL
fujiprinter4 Incorrect printer name is registered.
Individual data FD of “fujiprinter1”
[Restore]
FUJI HOSPITAL
fujiprinter4
fujiprinter1 Printer with correct name will be registered newly,
but the individual data will not be incorporated.
FP7U0910.EPS
006-259-03
MU-187
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MU-188
[PC2-5] User Settable

Command for transferring image data output by the “User Settable” of the U-Utility.
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) “Printer Name”
(2) Select the drive with the image file.
(3) Select the folder with the image file.
(4) Select the image file.
<NOTE>
• Transfer image files one file at a time.
• Files that are applicable to “User Settable” are bitmap files below 8 bits.
• Black/white
• 4-bit bitmap (Compressed format)
• 4-bit bitmap (Non-compressed format)
• 8-bit bitmap (Compressed format)
• 8-bit bitmap (Non-compressed format)
• The bitmap size (number of pixels, number of lines) is 1 at minimum and 8800 at maximum.
Bitmaps exceeding this will result in transfer error during conversion.
• The last image file transferred to the equipment is output by “User Settable”.
<REMARKS>
Clicking [Preview] starts “Paint” (mspaint.exe), allowing the image files selected to be
checked.
006-259-04
MU-189
(5) [PC => Printer]

→ The image data is transferred to the equipment.
displayed.
006-259-08
MU-190
[PC3] Upgrading
Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software, and installation
of the various software saved in the HD of the equipment to the MCT board.
[PC3-1] Load System Files
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring software files in the main unit software CD-R to the HD of the
equipment.
Files will be transferred by the following route:
“CD-R” → “FTP folder of the PC for servicing” → “Equipment HD”
<OPERATIONS>
CAUTION
must be set to “Disable” beforehand.
• This setting requires no modification when the equipment is installed with V4.1 or
<NOTE>
For the equipment shipped with the main unit software version V7.0 or later/ V13.0 or later, the
grid pattern for checking unevenness is set as the default image of [User Settable]. For the
equipment with earlier version, the SMPTE pattern is set. Upgrading the main unit software to
V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later will not replace the User Settable image in the HD.
(1) Set the main unit software CD-R in the PC for servicing.
(2) Select the name of the printer to be installed or version upgraded.
(3) Select CD-ROM drive name.
(4) [Copy]
→ The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
DRYPIX).
006-259-08
MU-191
(5) Select by type of installation.

• [Upgrading] : Version upgrading
• [Full] : Full installation
(6) [Execute]
→ The main unit software files will be transferred to the HD of the equipment.
<REMAKRS>
The following shows the time taken for transfer. (PC for servicing → Equipment HD)
These times differ according to the performance of the PC for servicing, network environment,
and software version.
• Upgrading : Approx. 2 minutes
• Full : Approx. 3 minutes
(2) (3) (4)
(5) (6) FP7U0450.EPS
→ When file transfer ends normally, the [System File Load Finish!!] screen will be
displayed.
(7) [OK]
006-259-08
MU-191.1
(8) Perform the following procedure so that the software files transferred to the
equipment HD become effective.
“[PC3-2] Install”
(i) Write the printer OS files transferred to the equipment HD in the MCT board.
(ii) Write the printer application files transferred to the equipment HD in the MCT
board.
→ When file transfer end normally, the [Software Install Finish!!] screen is displayed.
(iii) [OK]
(iv) Reboot the equipment.
[Control] → [System Config] → [Reboot] → [Reboot All] → [Reset]
(9) If [Full] (full installation) has been performed, reinstalls the individual data.
006-259-08
MU-191.2
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-191.3
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-191.4
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-192
[PC3-2] Install
<FUNCTION>
Install the various software in the HD of the equipment (printer applications, printer OS,
and printer installer) in the MCT board.
“M-Utility [1-1-8] Reload Software”
<NOTE>
Reinstall software in the following cases:
• Printer applications/printer OS:
If version changes have been made or problems have occurred in the software controlling
the conveyor/heat development/ density measurement units.
• Printer installer:
If version changes have been made or problems have occurred in the printer installer.
Reinstall this installer before reinstalling the above printer applications/printer OS.
<OPERATIONS>
CAUTION
must be set to “Disable” beforehand.
• This setting requires no modification when the equipment is installed with V4.1 or
(1) Select the installation type.

• [PRT APL] : Printer applications
• [PRT OS] : Printer OS
• [PRT INST] : Printer installer
<NOTE>
Perform installation in the order of [PRT INST] → [PRT OS] → [PRT APL].
(2) [Install]
→ Installation is executed.
<REMARKS>
The time required for installation is as follows: (Equipment HD → MCT board)
• [PRT APL] : Approx. 1 minute
• [PRT OS] : Approx. 15 seconds
• [PRT INST] : Approx. 20 seconds
006-259-05
MU-193
(1) (2) FP7U0452.EPS
→ When install ends normally, the [Software Install Finish!!] screen is displayed.
(3) [OK]
[Control] → [System Config] → [Reboot] → [RebootAll] → [Reset]
006-259-08
MU-194
[PC4] Analyzer
<FUNCTION>
Monitors the operating state of the software on the equipment in DICOM
communication (communication between software tasks, calculation results, etc.).
<NOTE>
Use this function only for the purpose of analyzing design when problems occur. Do not set nor
operate it in normal maintenance and installation work. Use as instructed only when requested
by the Service headquarters.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) “Printer name” → [GET LOG]
→ The operation state of the software (dicom.log) is displayed.
Communication with the equipment is terminated when monitoring and display starts.
(2) To display logs by client, select [Client.log], and select the client name from the
dropdown list.
(3) [View]
→ The DICOM communication log of the selected client is displayed.
006-259-08
MU-195
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MU-196
[PC5] DICOM Print

<FUNCTION>
Perform test printing for the connected printers via the network.
Use the [DICOM Print] function for checking and adjusting the tone correction
parameter (LUT) and enlargement/reduction processing parameter (Magnify) set for
each client during installation.
With the [DICOM Print] function, one film of 8-frame format SMPTE pattern
corresponding to the set LUT1 to LUT8 is test printed under the printing conditions set
in the configuration settings of the client selected.
Film is output from the tray set at “[PC1-3-4-9] Film Size”.
<NOTE>
Execute [DICOM Print] when the printer is in the standby state or during printing.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Import individual data.
(2) Select the name of the printer to perform test printing.
(3) Select the client name (AE Title).
<NOTE>
If [DICOM Print] is already selected when several printers are registered and the printer name
is selected at step (1), the AE Title display may not be updated.
In this case, select other functions using [Setting] etc. first and then select again.
<REMARKS>
Test printing is performed under the various printing conditions set for the above selected
client.
(4) Select which condition of the enlargement/reduction processing parameter set for
the selected client to perform test printing from [Sharp], [Smooth], [Medium], and
[None].
<REMARKS>
With [None], no enlargement/reduction processing is performed.
006-259-08
MU-197
(5) [Run]
→ The test print data is transferred to the selected printer and the film is printed.
(2) (3)
(4) (5) FP7U0454.EPS
→ When data transfer ends normally, the [Test printing is completed.] information is
displayed.
(6) [OK]
<REMARKS>
8-frame images from LUT1 to LUT8 are arranged on the film output in order from the top left to
the bottom right.
006-259-08
MU-198
[PC6] OutPutFilm
CAUTION
If errors occur at the equipment while executing [OutPutFilm], reboot the equipment
and DPX7 PC Tool.
<INSTRUCTION>
When executing [OutPutFilm], be sure to import individual data from the equipment
beforehand.
“[PC9-1-3] indv. Data”
006-259-08
MU-199
[PC6-1] 24-Steps
<FUNCTION>
“M-Utility [2-1] 24-Steps”
<OPERATIONS>
“[PC9-1-3]Indv. data”
[TRAY1]/[TRAY2]/[TRAY3]
(4) [OUTPUT]
→ The 24-steps pattern is printed.
006-259-03
MU-200
[PC6-2] 17-Steps
<FUNCTION>
“M-Utility [2-2] 17-Steps”
<OPERATIONS>
(4) Select the Dmax.
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>
Select from the three tone types selected at “[PC1-2-9-9] Step Type”.
(5) [OUTPUT]
006-259-05
MU-201
[PC6-3] Flat
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the flat pattern.
“M-Utility [2-3] Flat”
<OPERATIONS>
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>
(5) Enter the flat density value (1 to 399).

(6) [OUTPUT]
→ The flat pattern is printed.
006-259-05
MU-202
[PC6-4] Cleaning
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the cleaning film.
“M-Utility [2-4] Cleaning”
<OPERATIONS>
(4) [OUTPUT]
→ The cleaning film is printed.
006-259-03
MU-203
[PC6-5] Grid
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the grid pattern.
“M-Utility [2-5] Grid”
<OPERATIONS>
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>
(5) [OUTPUT]
→ The grid pattern is printed.
006-259-05
MU-204
[PC6-6] Film out to Sorter
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing flat patterns and discharging to the sorter.
“M-Utility [2-6] Film out to Sorter”
<REMARKS>
Executable only when set to “[PC1-2-9-8] Sorter: Enable”.
<OPERATIONS>
(4) Enter the printing start bin number (1 to 10).
(5) Enter the printing end bin number (1 to 10).
(6) [OUTPUT]
→ The flat pattern is printed to the sorter.
006-259-08
MU-205
[PC6-7] Uniformity
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the uniformity measurement pattern.
“M-Utility [2-7] Uniformity”
<OPERATIONS>
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>
(5) [OUTPUT]
→ The uniformity measurement pattern is printed.
006-259-05
MU-206
[PC6-8] SMPTE
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the SMPTE pattern.
“M-Utility [2-8] SMPTE”
<REMARKS>
The differences between this function and “[PC5] DICOMPrint” are that this function allows
specification of the number of output frames and specification of the tray. The LUT of the
pattern output is the same.
<OPERATIONS>
<REMARKS>
client.
006-259-03
MU-207
(5) Select [Image Matrix] (Number of frames).

[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
(6) Select [LUT Number].
[LUT1] to [LUT8]
(7) Select [Interpolaton type].
(8) Select [Interpolation algorithm/method].
[NONE]/[CUBIC]
(9) [OUTPUT]
→ The SMPTE pattern is printed.
006-259-05
MU-208
[PC6-9] User Settable
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the User Settable pattern.
“M-Utility [2-9] User Settable”
<NOTE>
This menu is effective for equipment installing software version A03 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
<REMARKS>
client.
(5) Select [Image Matrix] (Number of frames).

[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
(6) Select [LUT Number].
[LUT1] to [LUT8]
(7) Select [Interpolaton type].
(8) Select [Interpolation algorithm/method].
[NONE]/[CUBIC]
(9) [OUTPUT]
→ The SMPTE pattern is printed.
006-259-05
MU-209
[PC6-10] Spatial Resolution
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the Spatial Resolution pattern (for checking 20 pix/mm
recording).
“M-Utility [2-10] Spatial Resolution”
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS>
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>
(4) [OUTPUT]
→ The Spatial Resolution pattern is printed.
006-259-05
MU-210
[PC7] F.D.C.
006-259-08
MU-211
[PC7-1] Auto F.D.C.
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing 24-steps patterns and calculating the 24-steps density correction
value from the density data measured by the density measurement section.
The corrected 24-steps density data can also be displayed on the DPX7 PC Tool.
“M-Utility [3-1] AUTO F.D.C.”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) [Execute]
→ The 24-steps pattern is output and automatic density correction is executed.
• To display the correction values, click [Display].
→ The measured density value of each pattern is displayed.
• To change the shift value for high density correction, select [Adjust Dmax] and
adjust.
[4] to [-3]
006-259-03
MU-212
[PC7-2] Check Density
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing 17-steps pattern, and displaying 17-steps density data
measured by the density measurement section on the DPX7 PC Tool.
“M-Utility [3-2] Check Density”
<OPERATIONS>
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<REMARKS>
(3) [Execute]
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the 17-steps data is displayed on the DPX7 PC
Tool.
(5) [OK]
006-259-05
MU-213
● Reference Value

1 fog fog fog fog
4 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05
5 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05
6 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05
7 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05
8 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05
9 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05
10 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05
11 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05
12 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05
13 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05
14 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07
15 2.28 ±0.07 2.40 ±0.10 2.40 ±0.10 2.43 ±0.10
16 2.46 ±0.07 2.70 ±0.10 2.70 ±0.10 2.95 ±0.10
17 2.64 ±0.07 3.00 ±0.10 3.30 ±0.20 3.60 ±0.20
TP7B0701.EPS
006-259-03
MU-214
[PC7-3] 24-Steps
<FUNCTION>
Command for outputting the 24-steps pattern using the current setting value.
“M-Utility [3-5-1] 24-Steps”
<OPERATIONS>
(2) [Execute]
006-259-03
MU-215
[PC7-4] Manual F.D.C.
<FUNCTION>
Command for entering the 24-steps pattern measured using the external densiometer,
and creating density correction information.
“M-Utility [3-4] Manual F.D.C.”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Output 24-steps pattern at “[PC7-3] 24-Steps”.
(2) Select the tray.
(3) Measure the film output at step (1) using an external densiometer, and enter the
density values of each step (1 to 399).
<NOTE>
The specified values for the input range of each step are as follows.
• Should be between 0 and 399.
• Should be above the density value of the previous step.
(4) [Execute]
→ Correction is executed.
006-259-03
MU-216
[PC7-5] Calibration
<FUNCTION>
Command for creating density calibration table for calibrating the internal densiometer
and initializing the densiometer calibration table.
“M-Utility [3-5-2] Calibration”, “[3-5-3] Clear Calib Table”
<OPERATIONS>
● Creating Calibration Tables

(1) Output 24-steps pattern at “[PC7-3] 24-Steps”, and measure the density value of
each step using an external reference densiometer.
(2) Enter the density value of each step measured (1 to 399).
(3) [EXT. DEN Calibration]
→ The calibration table is created.
● Clearing the Calibration Table

(1) [Clear Calib. Table]
→ The calibration table is initialized.
006-259-03
MU-217
[PC7-6] Uniformity
[PC7-6-1] Unit data Reading
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring uniformity correction data in the PC for servicing to the
equipment.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Execute]
→ The correction data is transferred.
[PC7-6-2] Clear Table
<FUNCTION>
Command for clearing the uniformity correction data to zero.
“M-Utility [3-6-1] Clear Table”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Execute]
→ The correction data is cleared.
006-259-03
MU-218
[PC7-6-3] Input
<FUNCTION>
Command for entering uniformity correction data.
“M-Utility [3-6-2] Input”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Measure the uniformity measurement pattern output at “[PC6-7] Uniformity” using
an external densiometer, and repeatedly enter the required number of
measurement data.
(Number=Low Density/High Density: 15 each)
(2) [Execute]
→ Correction is executed.
006-259-03
MU-219
[PC7-7] DM sensor monitor
<FUNCTION>
Command for monitoring whether the density measurement sensor of the internal
densiometer is operating normally or not.
“M-Utility [3-5-4] DM Sensor Monitoring”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Start]
→ The state of the density measurement sensor is displayed at a certain cycle.
(2) Block the density measurement section sensor with a film, and check that the
displayed value changes.
Check that a low value is displayed for high density parts of the film, and a high
value for low density parts.
(3) [End]
→ The display stops.
006-259-03
MU-220
[PC8] Check
[PC8-1] Check Scanner
[PC8-1-1] Initialize Scanner
<FUNCTION>
Command for initializing the main scanning width adjustment value and main scanning
starting position adjustment value.
“M-Utility [4-3-4] Initialize Scanner”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Execute]
→ Initialization is executed.
006-259-08
MU-221
[PC8-1-2] Adjusting Main Scanner
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the scanning width (compression rate in main scanning direction)
and scanning position (starting position in main scanning direction).
“M-Utility [4-3-1] Scanning Width”, “[4-3-2] Scanning Position”
006-259-03
MU-222
<OPERATIONS>
■ Adjusting the Scanning Width

(2) Output grid pattern using “[PC6-5] Grid”.
(3) Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified value.
(4) If outside the specified value, check the [Measurement Width (XXmmx10)]
checkbox, and enter the scanning width adjustment value. (0 to ±120)
<REMARKS>
• Entering a negative value reduces the image from the reference position.
• The changes in the value entered can be calculated by: (Value entered) x C x 10 ÷ 37000
(mm)
(5) [Execute]
Scanning adjusting value = XXXX Adjusting direction
Enter the value. Film conveyance

direction
If minus, enter “–”. Reduction
Enlargement
For C=300 Reference
Value entered Changes
±10 ±0.8 mm
±20 ±1.6 mm
±30 ±2.4 mm
±40 ±3.2 mm
±50 ±4.0 mm
±60 ±4.8 mm
FP7U0309.EPS
006-259-08
MU-223

direction direction
C C

direction direction
C C
(Unit: mm)
C 300± 1.2 300 ±1.2 200 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 FP7U0310.EPS
006-259-03
MU-224
■ Adjusting the Scanning Position

(2) Output grid pattern using “[PC6-5] Grid”.
(3) Measure “| A - B |” of the output film and check that it is within the specified value.
(4) If outside the specified value, check the [Starting Position (XXmmx10)] checkbox,
and enter the starting position adjustment value. (0 to ±120)
<REMARKS>
Enter the adjustment value in units of 0.1 mm.
(5) [Execute]
Start point = XXXX Adjusting direction
XX.Xmm Film conveyance

direction
If minus : - (+) (-)
When entered as “50” : Enlarges by +5mm

When entered as “-50” : Reduces by -5mm
FP7U0913.EPS
006-259-03
MU-225

35 x 43 cm size Film conveyance
direction
B A

direction direction
B A B A
(Unit: mm)
Position 35 x 43 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
|A-B| ≤ 1.2 ≤ 1.2 ≤ 2.0 FP7U0314.EPS
006-259-03
MU-226
[PC8-1-3] Polygonal Motor LD
<FUNCTION>
Turn ON and then OFF the polygon motor and the laser diode (LD).
“M-Utility [4-1] Polygonal Motor, [4-2] LD”
<OPERATIONS>
● [Polygonal Motor]
(1) [Polygonal Motor]
(2) [ON]
→ The polygon motor rotates.
(3) [OFF]
→ The polygon motor stops.
● [LD]
(1) [LD]
(2) Select the [Optical Power] (optical value).
[High]/[Middle]/[Low]
(3) [Execute]
→ The LD value set is transferred to the equipment.
(4) [ON]
→ The LD lights up.
(5) [OFF]
→ The LD light goes off.
006-259-03
MU-227
[PC8-1-4] Initial Check

<FUNCTION>
Command for performing self-check of the scanner unit.
“M-Utility [4-4-1] Initial Check”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Execute]
→ Diagnosis is carried out in the order of polygon, LD, start point detection, and leading
edge detection. (About 30 seconds)
If problems are detected, the [Error!] screen is displayed.
<REMARKS>
When self-diagnosis ends, the [Execute] button becomes active.
START
Error
Polygon diagnosis “Error!”
Normal
Error
LD diagnosis “Error!”
Normal
Error
Start point
detection diagnosis “Error!”
Normal
Error
Leading edge
detection diagnosis “Error!”
Normal
Diagnosis end processing
END FP7U0914.EPS
006-259-03
MU-228
[PC8-1-5] PRN Board Test
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing diagnosis in the initialization of the PRN board, and
implementing fuse and memory check.
“M-Utility [4-4-2] PRN Board Test”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Execute]
→ Diagnosis starts. (About 1 minute 45 seconds)
If problems occur, the [Error!!] screen is displayed.
006-259-03
MU-229
[PC8-2] Check Mechanism

Command for checking mechanism operations of the equipment.
[PC8-2-1] Moving
[PC8-2-1-1] Unit Operation
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of the removal mechanism.
“M-Utility [5-1-3] Unit Operation”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the tray to be used.
(2) Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] → [Film Surface]
→ [Film Suction] → [Lower Limit of Film Fanning] → [Film Fanning] → [Film
Release] → [Film Convey].
<REMARKS>
Can be returned to the home position from any position.
006-259-03
MU-230
[PC8-2-1-2] Motor Operation
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of the conveyance motor.
“M-Utility [5-2-1] Motor Operation”
<REMARKS>
• It may not be possible to select all operation types (CW/CCW) for some motors.
• After the motor is started, it will continue driving unless it is stopped or communication is
terminated.
006-259-03
MU-231
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Motor type].
[MD1]/[MD2]/[ME1]/[MG1]/[MJ1]
(2) Select [Operation type].
[CW]/[CCW]
MJ1:CW
MG1:CCW
MD2:CW
ME1:CW
MD1:CW
CW/CCW: Roller rotation direction FP7U0915.EPS
(3) Select [Speed Condition]. (Cannot select at ME1.)

[High Speed]/[Low Speed]
(4) [Moving]
→ The motor rotates.
(5) Select [Operation type].
[Stop]
(6) [Moving]
→ The motor stops.
006-259-03
MU-232
[PC8-2-1-3] Grip
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of the grip motor.
“M-Utility [5-3] Grip”
<NOTE>
When performing individual operations of [MD4], errors will occur if not performed in the
correct order.
<REMARKS>
After completing operations, it will remain in the gripped state unless [Home Positioning] is
performed or communication is terminated.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Motor Type].
[MD3]/[MD4]
<REMARKS>
• MD3: Gripping release motor
• MD4: Cleaning roller grip release motor
(2) If [MD3] is selected:

Check individual operation by selecting [Home Positioning]/[8x10(20x25cm)/
10x12(25x30cm)/10x14(26x36cm)]/[14x14(35x35cm)].
(3) If [MD4] is selected:
Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] → [Grip].
006-259-03
MU-233
[PC8-2-1-4] Positioning Film
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing film positioning operation.
“M-Utility [5-5] Positioning Film”
<NOTE>
Errors will occur if individual operations are not performed in the correct order.
<OPERATIONS>
[14x17(35x43cm)]/[14x14(35x35cm)]/[10x14(26x36cm)]/[10x12(25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)]
(2) Select [Kind].
Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] → [Positioning].
Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] → [Positioning
Film].
006-259-03
MU-234
[PC8-2-1-5] Adjusting Subscanner
<FUNCTION>
Adjust the film conveyance speed (pps) of the sub-scanning unit.
“M-Utility [5-2-3] Adjusting Subscanner”
<OPERATIONS>
● When [Printed Length] (setting) is selected

(2) Output grid patterns at “[PC6-5] Grid”.
<NOTE>
Output from film tray 1.
(3) Select the film size of the output grid pattern.

[14x17(35x43cm)]/[14x14(35x35cm)]/[10x14(26x36cm)]/[10x12(25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)]
(4) Select the output image.
[Grid]
(5) Enter the subscanning length “F” (in units of 1/10 mm) at [Printed Length
(XXmmx10)].
(6) [Execute]
→ The conveyance speed is adjusted.
(7) Output the grid pattern again, and check that the subscanning length satisfies the
specified value.
006-259-03
MU-235
● Reference Values for Each Film Size (Grid Pattern)


F F
(Unit: mm)
F 413.0 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.0 ±1.0 200.0 ±0.8 FP7U0307.EPS
● When [Initialize] is selected

(1) [Execute]
→ The conveyance speed is initialized.
006-259-03
MU-236
[PC8-2-1-6] Other Actuators
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of each actuator.
“M-Utility [5-4] Other Actuators”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Unit type].
[SOLA11]/[SOLA21]/[SOLA31]/[SOLJ1]/[CLD1]
(2) [ON]
→ The selected actuator operates.
(4) [OFF]
006-259-03
MU-237
[PC8-2-1-7] Sorter Unit
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of sorter motor (MT1).
“M-Utility [5-8-1] Motor MT1”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [ON]
→ The sorter motor (MT1) rotates.
(2) Check MT1 operation.
(3) [OFF]
006-259-03
MU-238
[PC8-2-1-8] Solenoids
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of the bin switching solenoids (SOLT1
to SOLT9).
“M-Utility [5-8-2] Solenoids”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the solenoid.
[SOLT1]/[SOLT2]/[SOLT3]/[SOLT4]/[SOLT5]/[SOLT6]/[SOLT7]/[SOLT8]/[SOLT9]
(2) [ON]
→ The selected solenoid operates.
(3) Check the operations of the solenoid.
(4) [OFF]
006-259-03
MU-239
[PC8-2-1-9] Sensor Monitor
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing sensor monitoring of the sorter.
“M-Utility [5-8-3] Sensor Monitor”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Single]/[All].
(2) If [Single] is selected, select the monitoring sensor.
(3) [ON]
• If [Single] is selected : The state of the sensor selected is displayed.
• If [All] is selected : The state of all sensors is displayed.
(4) [OFF]
006-259-03
MU-240
[PC8-2-2] Sensor Monitor
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing sensor monitoring of the equipment.
“M-Utility [5-6] Sensor Monitor”
<NOTE>
The F5VM and RMTPWR monitoring functions are currently not available.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [All]/[Single].
If [Single] is selected, select the monitoring sensor.
(2) [ON]
• If [All] is selected : The state of all sensors is displayed.
• If [Single] is selected : The state of the sensor selected is displayed.
(3) [OFF]
006-259-03
MU-241
Name Sensor State NO Sensor State OFF
SA13 Tray lock detection sensor (U) Lock is not released Lock is released
SA23 Tray lock detection sensor (M) Lock is not released Lock is released
SA33 Tray lock detection sensor (L) Lock is not released Lock is released
SA11 Film pack/shutter detection sensor (U) Film pack/shutter is present No film pack/shutter
SA21 Film pack/shutter detection sensor (M) Film pack/shutter is present No film pack/shutter
SA31 Film pack/shutter detection sensor (L) Film pack/shutter is present No film pack/shutter
SA12 Tray detection switch (U) Film tray is not set Film tray is set
SA22 Tray detection switch (M) Film tray is not set Film tray is set
SA32 Tray detection switch (L) Film tray is not set Film tray is set
SB11 Suction cup HP detection sensor (U) Not at home position At home position
SB12 Film surface detection sensor (U) Suction cup has reached film Suction cup has not reached film
SB21 Suction cup HP detection sensor (M) Not at home position At home position
SB22 Film surface detection sensor (M) Suction cup has reached film Suction cup has not reached film
SB31 Suction cup HP detection sensor (L) Not at home position At home position
SB32 Film surface detection sensor (L) Suction cup has reached film Suction cup has not reached film
Removal conveyance
detection sensor (U)
Removal conveyance
detection sensor (M)
Removal conveyance
detection sensor (L)
SD1 Upper conveyor unit entrance sensor Film is at U turn guide entrance Film is not at U turn guide entrance
SD2 Upper conveyor unit exit sensor Film is at upper conveyor unit exit Film is not at upper conveyor unit exit
SD3 Upper grip position detection sensor
Detection state differs according to combination of sensor ON/OFF
SD4 Lower grip position detection sensor
Cleaning roller grip position
SD5 Cleaning roller grip is at grip position Cleaning roller grip is not at grip position
detection sensor
Positioning guide HP detection Positioning guide (upper) is not at
SD6 Positioning guide (U) is at home position
sensor (U) home position
Positioning guide HP detection Positioning guide (lower) is not at
SD7 Positioning guide (L) is at home position
sensor (L) home position
SJ1 Film release unit film detection sensor Film at film release unit No film at film release unit
SK1 Jam clear cover interlock switch Jam clear cover is open Jam clear cover is closed
SK2 Front cover interlock switch Front cover is open Front cover is closed
TP7U0405.EPS
006-259-03
MU-242
Name ON State OFF State

F5VM Power fuse for ME1 - Normal
F12VP Disconnected Normal
+12V power fuse (SNS board F1)
F12VM Disconnected Normal
-12V power fuse (SNS board F2)
Power fuse for upper tray
F24VA Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F1)
Power fuse for middle tray
F24VB Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F2)
Power fuse for lower tray
F24VC Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F3)
Power fuse for MD1
F24VD Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F8)
F24VE Disconnected Normal
and MG1 (DRV board F5)
F24VF Disconnected Normal
MD6, and CLD1 (DRV board F6)
Power fuse for ME1
F24VG Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F7)
Jam clear cover related fuses
F24VH Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F4)
Front cover related fuses
F24VJ Disconnected Normal
(DRV board F9)
FUSEERR Fuse for sorter Normal Disconnected
RMTPWR External remote signal OFF -
LOCK Sub-scanning motor Unmatching speed Speed matching
REDY Polygonal motor NotReady Ready
Sensor power fuse
VCCS Disconnected Normal
(SNS board F3)
TP7U0302.EPS
006-259-03
MU-243
[PC8-2-3] Other
[PC8-2-3-1] Board Fan
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of the fan for the I/F board.
“M-Utility [5-7-1] Board FAN”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [ON]
→ The fan rotates.
(2) [OFF] → [intermittent]
→ The fan returns to the normal operations.
<NOTE>
After executing fan operations, rebooting the equipment returns it to normal operations
[intermittent].
006-259-03
MU-244
[PC8-2-3-2] Serial I/F
<FUNCTION>
If I/F related errors such as SIO communication error occur, perform the serial I/F loop
back test, and check the operations between boards.
Selecting [Sorter] executes the loop back test between the MCT board and SRT board,
and selecting [Barcode Reader] executes the loop back test between the SNS board
and BCR.
“M-Utility [5-7-2] Serial I/F”
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• Before executing the loop back test by [Sorter], short-circuit pins 2 and 3 of J2 and J3
of the MCT board. (Normally, pins 1 and 2 are short-circuited.)
Also set “[PC1-2-9-8] Sorter” to “Disable”.
• Before executing the loop back test by [Barcode Reader], perform the following
beforehand because jumper pins need to be set for each film tray.
• Upper film tray: Short-circuit pins 2 and 3 of J1 and J2 of the SNS board.
• Middle film tray: Short-circuit pins 2 and 3 of J3 and J4 of the SNS board.
• Lower film tray: Short-circuit pins 2 and 3 of J5 and J6 of the SNS board.
006-259-08
MU-245
<OPERATIONS>
● When [Sorter] is selected

(1) [START]
→ The loopback test starts.
(2) [STOP]
→ If problems are detected, the abnormal count is displayed at “Abnormal Count:”.
<NOTE>
The loopback test is repeated until [STOP] is selected.
● When [Barcode Reader] is selected

(2) [START]
→ The loopback test starts.
(3) [STOP]
→ If problems are detected, the abnormal count is displayed at “Abnormal Count:”.
<NOTE>
The loopback test is repeated until [STOP] is selected.
006-259-03
MU-246
[PC8-2-3-3] HDD Test
<FUNCTION>
Command for executing the HDD test and checking hard disk operations when errors
occur while data is transferred from the PC board to the hard disk (reading or writing).
When HDD test is executed, check disk is performed on the R/W partitions in the hard
disk.
“M-Utility [5-7-3] HDD Test”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Execute]
→ Diagnosis starts.
(2) Check the results of execution for Drive 1 to Drive 5.
006-259-03
MU-247
[PC8-2-3-4] DPRAM Test
<FUNCTION>
Command for executing the DPRAM test and checking DPRAM operations when
communication errors such as FMT communication timeout error occur.
When the DPRAM test is executed, the R/W test of the Dual Port RAM mounted on the
MCT board is performed.
“M-Utility [5-7-4] DPRAM Test”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [START]
→ Test starts.
(2) [STOP]
→ If problems are detected, the number of errors occurred is displayed at “Number of
errors:”.
006-259-03
MU-248
[PC8-2-3-5] Inter Board Test
<FUNCTION>
Command for executing inter-board test and checking control operations when errors
occur in control operations of the MCT board and SNS board.
Executing the inter board test implements the control signal line/address data line tests
between the MCT board and SNS board.
“M-Utility [5-7-5] Inter Board Test”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [START]
→ Test starts.
(2) [STOP]
→ If problems are detected, the number of errors occurred is displayed at “Number of
errors:”.
<NOTE>
The interboard communication test is repeated until [STOP] is selected.
006-259-03
MU-249
[PC8-2-3-6] LAN Base Test
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing LAN port tests.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [TEST]
→ LAN port tests are started. If errors are detected, details are displayed at “Diagnosis:”.
[PC8-2-3-7] Patrol Lamp Test
Use is prohibited.
006-259-08
MU-250
[PC8-3] Heat-Developer
[PC8-3-1] Temperature
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing temperature monitoring of each thermistor.
“M-Utility [6-1] Temperature”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [START]
→ The measured temperature of each thermistor is displayed ten times larger.
The measured value is updated every 1.2 seconds.
(2) [STOP]
006-259-03
MU-251
[PC8-3-2] Heating
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing ON/OFF operations of each heater.
“M-Utility [6-2] Heating”
CAUTION
When the upper limit temperature is reached, the heater is turned OFF by the thermal
protector.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Stop all heaters.
[ALL] → [OFF]
(2) Select a heater.
[HG1]/[HG2]/[HG3]/HG4]/[HG5]/[HG6]/[HG7]/[HG8]/[HG9]/[ALL]
(3) [ON]
→ The selected heater heats up.
(4) Stop this heater.
[OFF]
(5) Return all heaters to normal temperature control operations.
[ALL] → [INTERMITTENT]
006-259-03
MU-252
[PC8-3-3] Fan Operation
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing ON/OFF operations of the cooling fan.
“M-Utility [6-3] Fan Operation”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select [Group A] or [Group B].
<REMARKS>
• [Group A] : FANG1, FANG3
• [Group B] : FANG2
(2) [ON]
→ The fan rotates.
(3) [OFF] → [intermittent]
→ The fan returns to normal operations.
<NOTE>
After executing fan operations, rebooting the equipment returns it to normal operations
[intermittent].
006-259-03
MU-253
[PC8-3-4] Temp. Control
<FUNCTION>
Command for controlling ON/OFF of the heater temperature control.
“M-Utility [6-4] Temp. Control”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the operation type.
• [ON] : Temperature control is performed.
• [OFF] : Temperature control is not performed.
<REMARKS>
Rebooting the equipment returns the setting to [ON].
006-259-03
MU-254
[PC8-3-5] Set Heater Cond. Temp.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the initial value of the targeted temperature of each heater.
“M-Utility [6-5] Set Heater Temp.”
<OPERATIONS>
[HG1]/[HG2]/[HG3]/[HG4]/[HG5]/[HG6]/[HG7]/[HG8]/[HG9]
(2) Enter the initial targeted temperature value (100 to 130 °C). (In units of 0.1 °C)
(3) [SET]
→ The initial value of the targeted temperature of each heater changes.
006-259-03
MU-255
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MU-256
[PC9] Control
[PC9-1] File Save/Load
[PC9-1-1] Log Data
<FUNCTION>
Command for saving data files for analysis stored in the equipment’s PC board in the
HD, and transfer to the PC for servicing.
“M-Utility [1-3-3] Store Log Files”
<REMARKS>
• The saved analysis data is shown below.
• Text file of error logs and various settings information
• Communication logs (external input, formatter, formatter to printer, printer ISC)
• The error log data is saved under the filename “AppEvt.txt”.
• The analysis data transferred to the PC for servicing are saved in the “LOG” folder.
006-259-08
MU-257
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Save IOT Log] → [Execute]
→ At this point, data files for analysis are saved in the HD of the equipment. When the
data is saved, the [Save ITO Log completed.] screen is displayed.
(2) [Transfer Analysis Log] → [Execute]
→ Data files for analysis saved in the HD of the equipment are saved in the PC for
servicing. When the data transfer is completed, the [Transfer Analysis Log
completed.] screen is displayed.
<NOTE>
With main unit software version A02, A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later, executing
[Transfer Analysis Log] saves the latest data files for analysis at this point in the PC for
servicing.
[PC9-1-2] Error Log
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying error log lists and deleting error logs.
“M-Utility [1-3-1] Display Error Log”, “[1-3-2] Clear”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Display Error Log] → [Execute]
→ The error log list is displayed.
<REMARKS>
Executing [Display Error Log] saves the error log data (AppEvt.txt) in the “Indv” folder.
(2) [Clear Error Log] → [Execute]

→ The error log is deleted.
006-259-04
MU-258
[PC9-1-3] Indv. data
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring individual data.
<REMARKS>
The individual data transferred to the PC for servicing is saved in the “Indv” folder.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Save from the printer] → [Execute]
→ The individual data is transferred to the PC for servicing.
When transfer ends, the [File transfer is completed.] screen is displayed.
(2) Change and backup the individual data.
(3) [Load to the printer] → [Execute]
→ The individual data is transferred to the equipment.
When transfer ends, the [File transfer is completed.] screen is displayed.
[Reset]
006-259-03
MU-259
[PC9-2] System Config
[PC9-2-1] Set Date/Time.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the system date and time.
“M-Utility [1-1-1] Set Date/time”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the system date and time (year/month/day hour:miniute).
006-259-03
MU-260
[PC9-2-2] Save Config.
<FUNCTION>
Command for saving the various configuration settings.
“M-Utility [1-1-3-2] Save Config”
<REMARKS>
Configuration settings saved on this menu can be recovered by [Recover] of “[PC9-2-3]
Initialize”.
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [Recover] → [Memory]
→ The current configuration settings are saved in the HD of the equipment.
006-259-03
MU-261
[PC9-2-3] Initialize
<FUNCTION>
Command for returning the various configuration settings to the state saved in “[PC9-2-
2] Save Config.” or setting at shipment, and initializing some of the data managed by
the system.
“M-Utility [1-1-3-1] Recover”, “[1-1-3-3] Initialization”
<NOTE>
The following are data initialized when [Recover] is executed.
• Number of remaining film
• User counter
• Total counter
• Error log
Executing [Initialize (manufacture)] initializes the following data in addition to the above.
• Various configuration data
• Whether I/O tracer is executed or not
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the initialization type.
• [Initialize (manufacture)] : State at shipment
• [Recover] : State saved in “[PC9-2-2] Save Config.”.
(2) [Set]
→ Initialization is executed.
006-259-03
MU-262
[PC9-2-4] Reboot
<FUNCTION>
If the equipment needs to be rebooted after completing settings, execute this menu to
reboot it.
“M-Utility [1-1-7] Reboot”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Select the reset type.
• [Power OFF] : Turns OFF the power of the equipment.
• [Reboot All] : Reboots the equipment.
(2) [Reset]
<NOTE>
Executing “[PC9-2-4] Reboot” turns OFF the power of the equipment and displays the [LOGIN
Failure] screen because communication is cut off.
006-259-03
MU-263
[PC9-2-5] Set Counters
<FUNCTION>
Check the number of films used on each film tray, set the total number of films to be
used per film tray, and clear the total counter to zero.
<NOTE>
If the total counter is not cleared once to zero after installation, [Cumulative Count] and [Total
Counter] will show the same values.
“M-Utility [1-1-6] Set Counters”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Click [Set Counters].
→ The cumulative count of each film tray after it has been cleared to zero the previous
time and total counter are displayed for each film tray.
(2) To clear [Cumulative Count] to zero, click [TrayX UserCounter Clear].
→ The number of films used on the equipment is cleared to zero.
(3) To set the total number of films used, enter the desired value in the [Total
Counter].
(4) [Set]
→ The total counter value of the equipment changes.
<REMARKS>
If the value entered at [Total Counter] is smaller than that at [Cumulative Count], it will be
replaced with the value of [Cumulative Count].
006-259-03
MU-264
[PC9-2-6] Set Remain. Films
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of film remaining in each film tray.
“M-Utility [5-1-2] Set Remain.Films”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Enter the number of films remaining in each film tray.
(2) [Set]
→ The number of films remaining in the equipment is changed.
006-259-03
MU-265
[PC9-3] Set Main Panel
[PC9-3-1] Sound Test
<FUNCTION>
Command for testing the buzzer sound function of the operation panel.
“M-Utility [1-5-6] Sound Test”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) [ON]
→ The buzzer of the operation panel sounds.
(2) [OFF]
→ The buzzer stops.
006-259-03
MU-266
[PC9-3-2] Motion Speed
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the animation display speed during film loading and removal of
jammed film.
“M-Utility [1-5-5] ANIMATION”
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Set the display speed.
• [Slow] : Speed becomes slower
• [Fast] : Speed becomes faster
(2) [Execution]
→ The settings are transferred to the equipment.
006-259-03
MU-267
[PC9-4] Set Parameter
[PC9-4-1] Patrol Lamp
Use is prohibited.
006-259-08
MU-268
[PC10] Film Counter

<FUNCTION>
This function allows the film output by the DRYPIX 7000 to be counted by film tray, AE
Title, IP address, and film size/base color.
<OPERATIONS>
(2) [Film Counter]
→ The [Film Counter] screen is displayed.
<REMARKS>
Though [Film Counter] starts from the DPX7 PC Tool, it will operate independently from the
DPX7 PC Tool after starting because it is a different application. (Example: Even if the DPX7
PC Tool is ended after displaying the [Film Counter] screen, [Film Counter] does not end.)
(3) Select [Mode].

• [by date] : Specify the date range.
• [Total] : Past count
(4) If [by date] is selected, click ▼, and specify the calendar displayed from the date.
• [Start] : From when
• [End] : To when
006-259-08
MU-269
(5) Click ▼, select the items counted, and click [ADD].

• [Tray] : By selected film tray
• [AE Title] : By selected AE Title
• [IP Address] : By selected IP address
• [film color_size] : By selected film size/base color
→ The selected item is displayed in the [List] box at the bottom left of the [Film Counter]
screen.
<REMARKS>
To delete an item displayed in the [List] box, select the item and click [DELETE].
(6) [OK]
→ The output film count is displayed.
<REMARKS>
Click [CLEAR] to clear the displayed count.
(7) [Close]
→ [Film Counter] ends.
006-259-08
MU-270
[PC11] Print Queue

<FUNCTION>
This function displays the state of print jobs having the following functions.
• Acquires the state of print jobs from the DRYPIX 7000 print queue and displays it.
• Deletes print jobs from the DRYPIX 7000 print queue. (Corresponding to main
unit software version A02, A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later)
• Change the priority order of print jobs in the DRYPIX 7000 print queue.
(Corresponding to main unit software version A02, A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or
V10.0 or later)
<OPERATIONS>
■ Displaying Print Jobs

(1) Click the printer name whose print job is to be displayed → [Print Queue]
→ The [PrintJobList] screen displayed.
<NOTE>
[Print Queue] cannot be started if the equipment is currently starting the M-Utility or U-Utility, or
communicating with the DPX7 PC Tool.
<REMARKS>
• Though [Print Queue ] starts from the DPX7 PC Tool, it will operate independently from the
DPX7 PC Tool after starting because it is a different application. (Example: Even if the DPX7
PC Tool is ended after displaying the [PrintJobList] screen, [Print Queue] does not end.)
• As communication is carried out via the DICOM interface, the equipment will not set into the
offline state even if [Print Queue] is started.
006-259-08
MU-271
■ Ending [Print Queue]

(1) Click the button at the top right of the [PrintJobList] or select [Exit] from the
[File] menu.
→ [Print Queue] ends.
■ [PrintJobList] Screen
The following shows the displayed contents of the [PrintJobList] screen.
Row Details Display
AE Title AE Title name
Entry Time Print job reception date and time
Status Print job state PRINTING

FAILURE
DONE
(Not displayed): Unprocessed
Priority Print job output priority order HIGH

MEDIUM
LOW
Number of Copies Number of output requests (1 to 99)

TP7U0402.EPS
<REMARKS>
• Clicking the row name [AE Title], etc. sorts in the ascending or descending order at the
character string of the row.
• By selecting [Refresh] of the [View] menu, the display can be updated to the latest state.
006-259-08
MU-272
■ Deleting Jobs (Main Unit Software Version A02, A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or
later)
(1) Select the job to be deleted at the [PrintJobList] screen. (Several can be selected)
(2) Select [Delete] or [Delete All] from the [Edit] menu.
→ The selected job is deleted, and the [PrintJobList] screen is updated.
<NOTE>
Jobs which can be deleted are those which are not displayed in the [Status] column (not
processed) and those indicated as “FAILURE” (error occurred) in the [Status] column.
■ Changing the Output Priority Order of Print Jobs (Main Unit Software Version A02,
A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later)
(1) Double-click the job whose priority order in printing is to be changed on the
[PrintJobList] screen.
→ The [Change Priority] screen is displayed.
<NOTE>
Applicable jobs for changing priority are those not displayed in the [Status] column (not
processed).
<REMARKS>
After selecting a job whose priority order in printing must be changed on the [PrintJobList]
screen, [Priority] can be selected from the [Edit] menu.
(2) Change the priority order in printing.

• [High] : Priority order in printing is set to “High”
• [Medium] : Priority order in printing is set to “Medium”
• [Low] : Priority order in printing is set to “Low”
(3) [OK]
→ The priority order in printing is changed, and the [PrintJobList] screen is updated.
006-259-04
MU-273
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MU-274
[PC12] Tool
[PC12-1] GetLog
<FUNCTION>
This function is a log acquisition tool for acquiring logs while the DRYPIX 7000 is
running (including after transitioning to the routine mode/during utility mode).
<OPERATIONS>
(1) Click the name of the printer for which log is to be acquired.
(2) Select [GetLog] from the [Tool] menu.
→ The [Get Log] screen for selecting the log data type is displayed.
(3) Select the type of log data to be acquired.
Selection Type Details

DICOM DICOM log
Timeout Timeout log
OUTPUT Output control log
Spooler Spooler log
Event Event log (Text file)
PCUTL PC interface
DenFileIO DenFileIO
Driver Driver log
ImgPrc ImgPrc log
Main Main log
GUI GUI log
PRT PRT log (IOT and ISC files saved the last inside the DRYPIX 7000 HD.
Acquire the latest files using [Save ITO Log] of the [Control] function.)
TP7U0404.EPS
006-259-08
MU-275
(4) [Get]
→ The log data is transferred to the PC for servicing.
When transfer ends normally, the [File Transfer completed.] screen is displayed.
<REMARKS>
The log data transferred to the PC for servicing is saved in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment name_Printer name\Log\AnalysisDirectory\date time of log
acquisition” folder.
(5) [OK] → [END]
● List of Acquired Files

Filename Remarks Filename Remarks
DICOM.bak DICOM.log backup file MAINxxxxxxxxx.log Main control log

OUTPUT.BAK OUTPUT.Log backup file OUTPUT.LOG Output control log
Spooler.bak Spooler.log backup file Spooler.log Spooler log
evlog.evt evlog event file TimeOut.txt Timeout text file
dbg.log dbg log 000_000.log 0. GUI log
DenFileIO.log DenFileIO log 001_000.log 1. GUI log
DICOM.log DICOM log 002_000.log 2. GUI log
drv01.log Drv log 003_000.log 3. GUI log
drv02.log Drv log 004_000.log 4. GUI log
EventLog.Txt Event log text file 005_000.log 5. GUI log
evlog.txt evlog text file xxxxxxxx.IOT IOT log
ImgPrcErrInfo.txt ImgPrcErrInfo text file xxxxxxxx.ISC ISC log
TP7U0403.EPS
[PC12-2] HW AutoCheck
[HW AutoCheck] is not supported for this equipment.
006-259-05
MU-276
5. SETTING METHOD BY PURPOSE
5.1 Registering User ID

Set the user ID entered by the user to execute the image QC function or reprint
function.
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
■ Setting Procedure
(1) For printers already registered with the user ID, import individual data (User.id).
(2) If currently communicating with the equipment, click [Setting] to cancel the
communication.
(3) “Printer Name” → [Option] → [User ID]
→ The [User.id] screen appears.

<NOTE>
The “1111” user ID is registered as a default.
(4) [Edit] → [Add]
→ The [UserID] screen appears.

006-259-08
MU-277

Enter using 4-digit numbers.
(6) Select the checkbox of the function used.
<NOTE>
Be sure to check [QC] or [Reprint] or both.
<REMARKS>
[Comment] can be entered as required.
(7) [OK]
→ The settings made are displayed at the [User.id] screen.
(8) To register other user IDs, repeat steps (4) to (7).
<REMARKS>
• By deleting all user ID, entering the user ID can be omitted. To delete user ID, select [Delete]
from the [Edit] menu after selecting registered user ID.
• In the above screen, settings can be changed by double-clicking the desired setting or
selecting [Change] from the [Edit] menu after selecting that desired setting to display the
[UserID] screen.
006-259-08
MU-278
(9) Click the of the [User.id] screen.

→ The screen for checking the data saved appears.
(10) [OK]
→ The settings are saved in the “User.id” file. This file is saved in the “C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\ DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment name_Printer name\Indv” folder.
(11) After transferring the individual data (user.id) to the equipment, reboot the
equipment.
006-259-03
MU-279
5.2 Setting the Image QC Function

Set as follows to enable the image QC function.
• Set the image QC function to “Enable”.
• Register the user ID
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
(2) [Setting] → “Printer name” → [Config] → [Option]
(3) Set [QC] to “Enable” to enable the QC function.
(4) [Update]
(5) Register the user ID.

<REMARKS>
The QC function can also be set to enable/disable using the M-Utility.
[System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Option] → [QC]
“M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Options”
006-259-08
MU-280
5.3 Setting Reprint

Set as follows to enable the reprint function.
• Set the reprint function to “Enable”.
• Register macro (%REPRINT%) in annotation settings.
• Register the user ID
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
(2) [Setting] → “Printer name” → “Client name” → [Protocol]
(3) Set [Reprint] to “Yes” to enable the reprint function.
<REMARKS>
The reprint function can also be set to enable/disable using the M-Utility.
[System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Reprint Function]
“M-Utility [1-1-2-3] Reprint Function”
006-259-08
MU-281
(4) [Setting] → “Printer name” → “Client name” → [Annotation]

(5) Register macro (%REPRINT%) in annotation settings.
(6) [Update]
(7) Register the user ID.

006-259-08
MU-282
5.4 Setting Annotation

Set annotation to be printed on film as follows.
<NOTE>
As the use of CR extension format and annotation will result in image processing error, do not
set annotation. (CR extension format: use of whole film as image area)
“[PC1-3-1-5] Use Extension format”

communication.
(3) Select the client for setting annotation.
• To set by each client : Select the client for setting annotation from the
[Clients:] list.
• To fix the printer in setting : Select the [default] client from the [Clients:] list.
(4) Select the font type of the annotation character.
“[PC1-3-5-2] Annotation Font”
(5) Set the annotation character size.
“[PC1-3-5-3] Annotation Size”
<NOTE>
For 20 pix/mm recording, images are printed smaller than 10 pix/mm recording.
(6) Select the position to be printed annotation, and enter the character string.
<NOTE>
• If annotations are set to be printed at the bottom of the film, the image area will be smaller
than when this is not set, and images will be printed in reduced size.
• Though annotations can be printed anywhere (upper/lower, left/ center/ right of the film),
they may be missing at some locations. Therefore when printing annotations at several
locations, check that none is missing during printing.
“■ Rules on Location of Annotations”
• Up to 64 one-byte size characters can be entered.
• In addition to standard characters, macros are also available.
“■ List of Macro Definitions”
006-259-08
MU-283
(7) [Update]
(9) Print the film, and check that no characters are missing.
<NOTE>
If characters are chipped along the height, extend the annotation print area.
“[PC1-3-5-1] Annotation Height”
006-259-08
MU-284
■ Rules on Location of Annotations

The printing area will be set to “no division”, “two-part division”, and “three-part division”
as shown below according to the annotation location set. When long annotation
character strings are set, etc., make sure no characters are missing.
Upper Left Upper Center Upper Right
Film
Lower Left Lower Center Lower Right
● Upper Left only ● Upper Left and Upper Right
FUJIFILM FUJIFILM FUJIFILM
No division Two-part division
fujifilm fujifilm fujifilm
● Lower Left only ● Lower Left and Upper Right
● Upper Center only ● Upper Left and Upper Center

FUJIFILM FUJIFILM FUJIFILM
No division Two-part division
fujifilm fujifilm fujifilm
● Lower Center only ● Lower Center and Lower Right
● Upper Right only ● Upper Left, Upper Center, Upper Right

FUJIFILM FUJIFILM FUJIFILM FUJIFILM
No division Three-part division
fujifilm fujifilm fujifilm fujifilm
● Lower Right only ● Lower Left, Lower Center, Lower Right

FP7U0435.EPS
<REMARKS>
For hospitals switching between portrait and landscape when printing images, set [Annotation]
using the portrait. As the printing area is formatted smaller with portrait, missing characters can
be prevented by adjusting the printing area with portrait beforehand.
006-259-03
MU-285
■ List of Macro Definitions

The following macros are available on this equipment.
Macro Significance Output example

%YYYY% 4-digit year in image reception 2003
%MM% 2-digit month in image reception 05
%MON% Month in English in image reception MAY
%DD% 2-digit day in image reception 12
%TIME% Time in image reception 09:51
%IPADDR% IP address of client 192.168.1.225
%AET% AE Title of client Fujifilm
%ALIAS% Alias of client FUJIFILM
%REPRINT% Print ID used in the reprint function 1234
TP7U0407.EPS
<NOTE>
• “%ALIAS%” is valid for main unit software version A02, A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or
later.
• “%REPRINT%” is valid for main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or
later.
• To print the print ID, there is a need to set [Reprint] to “Yes”.
“5.3 Setting Reprint”
<REMARKS>
For example, to print the hospital name, print request date and time information as follows,
enter as indicated.
FUJIFILM<sp>HOSPITAL<sp>2003.05.12<sp>09:51
“FUJIFILM<sp>HOSPITAL<sp>%YYYY%.%MM%.%DD%<sp>%TIME%”
(Note: <sp> designates a space.)
For details on printing client alias in the annotation character string, refer to “■ Setting
Client Alias”.
006-259-04
MU-286
■ Setting Client Alias

Perform the following procedure to print client alias in annotations.
<REMARKS>
Client alias is a name related to the client IP address and AE Title.
(1) For printer already registered with the client alias, import individual data (IP
Address_Alias.txt).
communication.
(3) “Printer name” → [Option] → [IP Address Alias]
→ The [IPAddress_Alias] screen appears.

(4) [Edit] → [Add]
→ The [IPAddress Alias] screen appears.
006-259-08
MU-287
(5) Enter the following items:

• [IP Address] : IP address of client
• [AE Title] : AE Title of client
• [Alias Name] : Alias of client
<NOTE>
Entering the IP address or AE Title incorrectly will disable printing of annotations.
<REMARKS>
[Comment] can be entered as required.
(6) [OK]
→ The settings made are displayed at the [IPAddress_Alias] window.
(7) To assign an alias to other clients, repeat steps (4) to (6).
<REMARKS>
In the above screen, settings can be changed by double-clicking the desired setting or
selecting [Change] from the [Edit] menu after selecting that desired setting to display the [IP
Address Alias] window.
006-259-08
MU-288
(8) Click at the [IPAddress_Alias] window.

→ The window for checking the data saved appears.
(9) [OK]
→ The settings are saved in the text format “IPAddress_Alias.txt” in the “C:\Program
Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment name” folder.
<REMARKS>
“IPAddress_Alias.txt” is saved as individual data.
(10) After transferring the individual data (IPAddress_Alias.txt) to the equipment,

reboot the equipment.
006-259-03
MU-289
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
MU-290
5.5 Setting Output of User Settable Images

Set as follows to enable output of user settable images.
• Set the user settable image output function to “Enable”.
• Transfer user settable image files (user data) to the equipment.
• Execute test printing and check the results.
<NOTE>
later.
(2) [Setting] → “Printer name” → [Config] → [Option]
(3) Set [User Settable] to “Enable” to enable the user settable image output function.
“[PC1-2-9-11] User Settable”
(4) [Update]
006-259-08
MU-291
(5) Transfer the individual data to the equipment.
<REMARKS>
The user settable image output function can also be set to enable/disable using the M-Utility.
[System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Option] → [User Settable]
“M-Utility [1-1-2-4] Options”
(6) “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [User Settable]

“[PC2-5] User Settable”
(7) Select the drive with the image file.
(8) Select the folder with the image file.
(9) Select the image file.
006-259-08
MU-291.1
(10) [to the printer]

→ The image data is transferred to the equipment.
→ When file transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen is displayed.
(12) “Printer name” → [OutPutFilm]

(13) Select [User Settable], and execute test printing of user settable images and
check the results.
“[PC6-9] User Settable”
<REMARKS>
Test printing can be performed using the U-Utility or M-Utility.
“U-Utility [2] TEST PATTERN”, “M-Utility [2-9] User Settable”
006-259-08
MU-291.2
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-291.3
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-291.4
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-292
5.6 Displaying Logs by Client (Filtering DICOM Communication

Logs)
Perform the following procedure to display and analyze DICOM logs by client.
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
(1) Import individual data (dicom.dat).
(2) [Setting] → “Printer name” → “Client name” → [Protocol]
(3) Set [Logging Client] to “Yes” to enable the setting of the filtering of DICOM
communication logs.
“[PC1-3-1-11] Logging Client”
(4) [Update]
(5) Transfer individual data (dicom.dat) to the equipment.
006-259-08
MU-293
■ Displaying Procedure
(1) “Printer name” → [Analyzer]
(2) [GET LOG]
→ The DICOM communication log is displayed.
(3) Select [Client.log], and select the client name from the dropdown list.
(4) [View]
→ The DICOM communication log of the selected client is displayed.
006-259-08
MU-294
5.7 Adjusting LUT Using SAR MAKER

Perform the following procedure to adjust LUT using the SAR MAKER.
• Start the SAR MAKER and adjust LUT.
• Perform the changes for the adjustments made in the DPX7 PC Tool.
<NOTE>
DPX7 PC Tool Version A08 or later must be installed to use the functions of SAR MAKER.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Do not display the screen for setting client of [Setting] while using the SAR MAKER. If
displayed, adjustment values may not be reflected, but reflected in other clients.

(2) [Option] → [SarMaker]
→ The SAR MAKER screen appears.
006-259-08
MU-295
(3) Click [Mode] from the menu bar.

→ The [Mode] screen appears.
<NOTE>
[4.0] of [Density] (Dmax4.0) is provided in DI Tool software version V3.0 or later, and effective
for equipment installing software version V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later.
(4) Select [Density] (maximum density) and [Color] (film base color).
(5) [OK]
(6) Select [GAMMA No.].
→ The tone curve (gamma curve) is drawn. (dark red)
006-259-08
MU-295.1
(7) Select the fine adjustment point number at [tuning point].

(8) Enter [DMAX] (maximum density) and [DMIN] (minimum density).
(9) Enter the [density], [shift], [contrast] for the number of times selected at [tuning
point].
<NOTE>
Even when [4.0] is selected at [Density] in the [Mode] screen, the maximum density value that
can be fine-adjusted at the fine adjustment points is 3.6.
(10) [Adjust]
→ The input data is reflected, and the converted tone curve is drawn. (bright red)
<REMARKS>
Two tone curves can be drawn at the same time. The second tone curve is drawn in blue. Note,
however, that only the LUT data adjusted last is saved to “sar_savedata.txt”.
(11) [Save]
→ The [save complete] screen is displayed, and the converted LUT data is saved under
the filename “sar_savedata.txt”. This file is saved in the folder “C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX”.
<REMARKS>
“sar_savedata.txt” saves the data creation date/time, GAMMA No., DMAX, DMIN, fine
adjustment points and QL values at 48 points, and density values.
This ends the adjustment of LUT.
006-259-08
MU-295.2
(12) [POST]
→ The [Post] screen appears.
(13) At the [Post] screen, select the printer name, client name, and LUT number for
reflecting the values adjusted using SAR MAKER.
(14) [Execute]
→ The [Post Completed] screen is displayed, and the adjustment values are reflected in
the LUT number of the selected client.
(15) Click to close SAR MAKER.
006-259-08
MU-295.3
(16) [Setting] → “Printer name” → “Client name” → [LUT] → [Adjustment parameter]
(17) Check that the adjustment values are reflected in the LUT number selected at
step (13).
006-259-08
MU-295.4
■ Other functions
● [QL >> D] button

Allows you to find the density difference before and after the adjustment.
(1) Enter the desired QL value in [QL].
(2) [QL >> D]
→ The density value before adjustment is displayed in [Density (before)] and the density
value after adjustment is displayed in [Density (after)]. (100-fold value)
#2
[Click]
#1
[Enter]
FP7U0957.EPS
006-259-08
MU-296
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-297
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-298
5.8 Acquiring Logs when Equipment is not Started

If the DPX7 PC Tool cannot be communicated with the equipment due to fatal errors of
the equipment, acquire logs for analysis by connecting the DPX7 PC Tool as follows.
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later.
■ Acquiring Log Files from the Equipment

(1) “Printer name” → [Option] → [Data Trans-forInitialError]
→ The [Data Trans] screen appears.

• [PC Target Directry] : The directory of the DPX7 PC Tool corresponding to the
selection made at [Printer Target Directry] is displayed.
• [Printer Target Directry] : The directory of the equipment is displayed.
006-259-08
MU-299
(2) Select the folder transferred from at [Printer Target Directry].

<NOTE>
The selectable folder is limited. For details on selectable folders, refer to “■ List of Directories”.
(3) [from the printer] → [OK]
CAUTION
As full installation is executed and the main unit software is set to the default state, do
not select click [Recover] .
→ The selected folder is transferred.
006-259-05
MU-300
■ List of Directories
Drive Lower Directory Access Remarks
drive E:
BackupDir Reference only Temporary directory in version upgrading
Driver Reference only Same as above
Image Reference only Same as above
PanelDriver Reference only Same as above
Param Reference only Same as above
Program Reference only Same as above
BackupLog Reference only For log file (Used in backup of logs)
DICOM Reference only Same as above
Client Reference only Same as above (Used for DICOM filtering function)
EventLog Reference only Same as above
GUI Reference only Same as above
Main Reference only Same as above
Output Reference only Same as above
PCUTL Reference only Same as above
Spooler Reference only Same as above
CalTemp Not applicable Used in internal processing
Driver Reference, Update
Image Reference, Update
List Reference, Update (Individual data list file)
Log Reference only Log file
DICOM Reference only Same as above
Client Reference only Same as above (Used for DICOM filtering function)
EventLog Reference only Same as above
GUI Reference only Same as above
Main Reference only Same as above
Output Reference only Same as above
PCUTL Reference only Same as above
Spooler Reference only Same as above
PanelDriver Reference, Update
param Reference, Update (Current individual data)
Custom Reference, Update (Directory for saving individual data during installation)
Install Reference, Update (Directory for saving default individual data)
Manufacture Reference, Update (Directory for saving individual data at factory)
program Reference, Update
Temp Not applicable Used in internal processing
UniTemp Not applicable Used in internal processing
VersionupDir Reference, Update
PanelDriver Reference, Update
param Reference, Update
program Reference, Upda
TP7U0409.EPS
006-259-05
MU-301
Drive Lower Directory Access Remarks

drive F:
BackupDir Reference only Temporary directory in version upgrading
Param Reference only Same as above
Program Reference only Same as above
Driver Reference, Update (Currently not used)
Log Reference only Log file
param Reference, Update (Current individual data)
Custom Reference, Update (Directory for saving individual data during installation)
Install Reference, Update (Directory for saving default individual data)
Manufacture Reference, Update (Directory for saving individual data at factory)
program Reference, Update
Remote Reference only (Operation information)
VersionupDir Reference, Update
Param Reference, Update
Program Reference, Update
drive G:
Job Reference, Update
Raw Reference, Update
Backup Reference, Update Directory for reprint
Job Reference, Update
drive H:
Log Reference only Temporary directory in version upgrading
Acquisition of Watson log
TP7U0410.EPS
006-259-05
MU-302
5.9 Adjusting the Leading Edge Margin

Perform the following procedure to adjust the leading edge margin (margin at the
leading edge along the film conveyance direction).
• Editing of leading edge margin definition file
• Transfer of definition file to equipment.
<NOTE>
V10.0 or later
(1) Copy “PRT_MARGIN.txt” to the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers\
Establishment name_Printer name\Indv” folder.
(2) Open and edit “PRT_MARGIN.txt” using the text editor such as Notepad.
<NOTE>
For all film sizes, set the range of leading edge margin values to 5 to 60 for 10 pix/mm
recording and 10 to 120 for 20 pix/mm recording.
If the leading edge margin exceeds the above values, it is defined as the default 5 (10 in 20 pix/
mm recording).
;
; File:Prt_Margin.txt
;
; [History]
; V1.0 Jun-03 2003 Ver.A03
;
;----------------------------------------------------------
;;100um
5 ;; 8x10
5 ;; 10x12
5 ;; 10x14
5 ;; 14x14
5 ;; 14x17
;;50um
10 ;; 8x10
10 ;; 10x12
10 ;; 10x14
10 ;; 14x14
10 ;; 14x17
;;eof
Change this value. FP7U0520.EPS
(3) Overwrite and save “PRT_MARGIN.txt”.

(4) “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Files] → [PC] → [Indv. Files]
(5) Select “PRT_MARGIN.txt”.
(6) [to the printer]
→ The leading edge margin definition file (PRT_MARGIN.txt) is transferred to the
equipment.
006-259-05
MU-303
5.10 Copying Weekly Settings

Perform the following procedure to copy weekly settings (SCHEDULER) set using the
U-Utility to other equipment.
“2. U-Utility [6-3-3] SCHEDULER”
■ Outline of Procedure
• Import individual data of the equipment (printer 1) set with weekly settings in the
PC for servicing.
• Import the individual data of the equipment (printer 2) for making copies to the PC
for servicing.
• Replace the files related to weekly settings using the DPX7 PC Tool (printer 1 →
printer 2).
• Transfer individual data to the equipment (printer 2).
■ Copying Procedure
(1) Import individual data of equipment (printer 1) set with weekly settings.
“Printer name (printer 1)” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Printer => PC]
(2) Import the individual data of the equipment (printer 2) for making copies.
“Printer name (printer 2)” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Printer => PC]
006-259-05
MU-304
(4) Copy the weekly settings related files of printer 1 to the “Indv” folder of printer 2.
<REMARKS>
Weekly settings related files:
“closed.txt”, “eco_idle.txt”, “eco_weekly1.txt” to “eco_weekly7.txt”, “timetable.txt”
#1 #2
[Select] Indv folder of printer 1 [Select] Weekly settings related files
#3
Copy/paste weekly settings related files
to the Indv folder of printer 2. FP7U0954.EPS
(5) Transfer the individual data of printer 2 from which weekly settings were copied to
printer 2.
“Printer name (printer 2)” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [PC => Printer]
006-259-05
MU-305
5.11 Acquiring Log Files

The following describes four methods of acquiring log files using the DPX7 PC Tool.
Use as appropriate according to the log acquisition state and type of log acquired.
● To Acquire Logs without Stopping Printer Output when Problems Occur:

Acquire logs using the [GetLog] function.
“[PC12] GetLog”
● To Analyze DICOM Logs on the Spot when Problems Occur:

Acquire logs using the [Analyzer] function.
“[PC4] Analyzer”
● To Acquire All Log Information Files:

Acquire logs using the [Transfer Analysis Log] of [Control] function.
“[PC9-1-1] Log Data”
● To Perform Periodic Maintenance:

Acquire logs using the [Save from the printer] of [Control] function.
“[PC9-1-3] Indv. Data”
The following page shows a list of saved log files and where they are saved by DPX7
PC Tool function.
006-259-03
07.15.2004 FM4324
006-259-03
Function Details of Function Login Filename Type of File Folder Saved in

GetLog Saves the log files for analysis in the PC for No Number_Number.log GUI log C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\printers\
servicing. *.IOT IOT log Establishment name_Printer name\LOG\
Can be acquired even while the equipment is *.ISC ISC log Analysis Directory\date time of log acquisition
during M-Utility or U-Utility mode, or printing. dbg.log PCUTL log
DenFileIO.log Density measurement display data IO log
DICOM.log DICOM log
DICOM.bak DICOM log (Backup)
drv*.log Drv log

ImgPrcErrInfo.txt ImgPrcErrInfo (Text)
Main*****.log Main control log
Output.log Output control log
OUTPUT.BAK Output control log (Backup)
Spooler.log Spooler log
Spooler.bak Spooler log (Backup)
TimeOut.txt Timeout log
AppEvt.txt Event log (Text)
Analyzer For design and analysis when problems Yes dicom.log DICOM log C:\Program Files\FujiFilm
occur. dicom.bak DICOM log (Backup) (Home directory)
Transfer Analysis Log Saves the log files for analysis in the PC for Yes Number_Number.log GUI log C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\printers\
servicing. *.IOT IOT log Establishment name_Printer name\LOG
*.ISC ISC log
AppEvt.txt Event log (Text)
dbg.log PCUTL log
DenFileIO.log Density measurement display data IO log
DICOM.log DICOM log
DICOM.bak DICOM log (Backup)
drv*.log Drv log
Save from the printer Saves individual data as well as log files for Yes ImgPrcErrInfo.txt ImgPrcErrInfo (Text)
analysis in the PC for servicing. Main*****.log Main control log
Output.log Output control log
OUTPUT.BAK Output control log (Backup)
Spooler.log Spooler log
Spooler.bak Spooler log (Backup)
TimeOut.txt Timeout log
Display Error Log Error log view Yes AppEvt.txt Event log (Text) C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\printers\
Establishment name_Printer name\Indv
TP7U0406.EPS
MU-306
MU-306
MU-307
BLANK PAGE
006-259-05
MU-308
5.12 Creating a New Gamma Table

Gamma tables can be created and created gamma tables can be changed using
[Gamma Creator].
To create with the same tone (gamma table) as the 11-point density of the SMPTE
pattern output from another printer, perform the following procedure.
<NOTE>
This menu is effective for DI Tool software version V3.0 or later.

(2) Check that the target printer for the gamma table is selected in [Equipment list] of
DPX7 PC Tool.
(3) Start SAR MAKER.
[Option] → [SarMaker]
→ The [SAR MAKER] screen appears.
006-259-08
MU-309
(4) Click [Gamma Creator] in the menu bar.

→ The [Gamma Creator] screen appears.
(5) Select a desired gamma number from [Gamma No.].

<NOTE>
[Gamma No.] can be selected in the range of 80 to 99. When an already-registered gamma
number is selected, the comment registered in [Comment] is displayed.
(6) Select the maximum density value from [Dmax].

<REMARKS>
[Dmax] can be selected from 300, 330, 360, and 400.
(7) Enter the density values in [OD] column.

<REMARKS>
• Entry value range: 0 ≤ entry value ≤ Dmax.
• Enter a 100-fold value of the density value.
006-259-08
MU-310
(8) In [Comment], enter a comment for the gamma number to be created.
(9) Select [OK].

→ The [Gamma Creator] screen closes and a GAMMA curve is drawn in the [SAR
MAKER] window, while “gamma2.prm” in the “Indv” folder of the printer selected in
Step (2) is updated.
<NOTE>
When an already-registered gamma number is selected, a message [Select gamma number is
already exist. Overwrite gamma number?] to confirm whether you want to overwrite the
existing gamma number.

→ The gamma number created can be specified at the [γ Table No.] setting of each LUT.
006-259-08
MU-311
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
MU-312
5.13 Full Installation of Main Unit Software with Equipment not

Started
If the equipment does not start due to main unit software error, etc., connect the DPX7
PC Tool as follows, and perform full installation of the main unit software.
<NOTE>
• This menu is effective for DI Tool software version V2.0 or later.
• There is a need to copy (store) the main unit software and latest equipment data in the FTP
folder of the PC for servicing.
■ Acquiring Log Files from the Equipment

(1) “Printer name” → [Option] → [Data Trans-forInitialError]
→ The [Data Trans] screen appears.
006-259-08
MU-313
(2) [Recover].
→ Full installation is executed, and the main unit software and configuration settings are
set back to default.
When full installation completes normally, the [Completed] screen appears.
(3) [OK]
(4) After rebooting the equipment, transfer the individual data to the equipment.
(5) Reboot the equipment again.
006-259-08
MU-314
5.14 Settings for Using MammoQC Function After Upgrading

Main Unit Software Version from V6.0/V12.0 or Earlier to
V7.0/V13.0
If using the mammo QC function in equipment whose main unit software version has
been upgraded from V6.0/V12.0 or earlier to V7.0/V13.0, perform the following
procedure.
<NOTE>
• This function is effective for equipment whose main unit software version is V7.0/V13.0 or
later.
• Added client [MammoQCTest] cannot be deleted.

(2) Register a new client
[Setting] → “Printer name” → [Add]
#1 #2
FP7U0961.EPS
(3) Enter the “MammoQCTest” as a client name.

(4) [OK]
006-259-08
MU-315
(5) Set the following values for LUT1 of client [MammoQCTest].

γ Table No. : 19
Max. Density : 360
Min. Density : 20
(6) Set LUT2 to 8 of client [MammoQCTest].

For LUT2, set the same value as the LUT of the mammo system used in the hospital. If
there are several mammo systems in the hospital, set the LUT value of one of these
systems to LUT2, and those of the other systems to LUT3 to LUT8 respectively.
006-259-08
MU-316
APPENDIX 1 PRECAUTIONS AND SETTINGS IN THE

USE OF Windows XP PC FOR SERVICING
When using the Windows XP (SP2) PC for servicing, the following precautions and
additional settings are required for operating the service tool software.
■ Precautions on Installing Internet Information Services (IIS)

Like the Windows 2000 PC for servicing, the Windows XP PC for servicing also
requires the Windows components Internet Information Services (IIS) function. If it has
not been installed in the Windows XP PC for servicing to be used, install as follows.
During the installing procedure, check the following.
(1) Select the checkmark in the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] checkbox from
the [Components:] list at [Add/Remove Windows Components], and click
[Details].
(2) Check that the checkmark is selected in the [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service]
checkbox from the [Subcomponents of Internet Information Services (IIS):] list. If
not selected, select the checkmark, and click [OK].
<NOTE>
If [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service] is not selected at the [Subcomponents of Internet
Information Services (IIS):] list, [Default FTP Site] will be disabled, disabling directory settings
of the FTP site hereafter.
(3) Proceed with the installation procedure according to the instructions displayed.
006-259-08
MU-317
■ Windows Firewall Settings

Like the Windows 2000 PC for servicing, implement FTP site directory settings,
Windows XP will also require additional setting of the TCP Port number used by the
[Default FTP Site] to the Windows Firewall Exceptions. Set as follows.
(1) Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
(3) Double-click the [Internet Information Services] icon.
(5) Double-click the [FTP Sites] folder from the [Name] list.
(6) Right-click [Default FTP Site], and select [Properties].
(7) At the [FTP Site] tab, note down the number displayed at [TCP Port:] of
[Identification] (“21” in the following screen example).
(8) Click [Cancel].

(10) Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
(11) Double-click the [Windows Firewall] icon.
006-259-08
MU-318
(12) Click the [Exceptions] tab.
(13) Click [Add Port].

(14) Enter “FTP” in [Name:], and enter the number noted down at step (7) at [Port
number:] (“21” in the following screen example).
(15) Click [OK].
006-259-08
MU-319
(16) Check that the checkmark of the [FTP] checkbox has been added in the
[Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab.
<REMARKS>
The contents of the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab of the Windows
Firewall shown below are just an example, and actual contents displayed will differ according
to the state of use of the PC for servicing (different programs and service names may be
registered).
(17) Click [OK].

006-259-08
MU-320
■ Precautions on Selecting the User Name when Starting the PC for Servicing
At the user name selection screen when the Windows XP PC for servicing is started
after installing the service tool software, the user name [dryprinter] will be added. Do
not select it. Also do not change the settings of this user name. Selecting or changing
the settings of [dryprinter] will disable normal operations of the PC for servicing.
006-259-08
MU-321
BLANK PAGE
006-259-08
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

SP7-1
CONTROL SHEET
10/15/2002 00 New Release (FM3342/FM3343) All pages

11/10/2002 01 Revised (FM3600/FM3601) All pages
03/10/2003 02 Revised (FM3977) 1, 4-91
07/15/2004 03 Revised (FM4323) All pages
09/20/2004 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 12, 13, 15, 19, 25-27, 31-33, 36,
V4.1, V10.0 and V10.1, DPX7 PC Tool version 37, 41, 47, 49, 51, 57, 59, 65, 69, 72,
A08, etc.)(FM4446) 84-89
11/30/2005 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 2, 3, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19-21, 23, 25,
V5.0 and V11.0, DI Tool version V2.0, etc.) 27, 29, 31, 33, 37, 41, 45-51, 53, 55,
(FM4689) 57, 59, 63, 65, 67, 69, 72, 84-89
10/02/2006 06 Revised (Change of corporate name and 1, 73-83
02/15/2007 08 Revised (FM5076) 1-3, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 29, 31, 33,
37, 46-53, 57, 59, 72, 84-89
006-259-08
02.15.2007 FM5076 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual SP7-1
SP7-2
<The RANK guide>

HOW TO USE THE The Fault RANK characters, Handling
RANK characters, and Export regulation-
SERVICE PARTS LIST applicable character are assigned in that
order.
■ RANK Thus, at least one character or up to three
characters are assigned in the RANK
● Handling RANK Characters
column.
(Parts that are handled in a special
manner during parts management, such ■ REF.NO.
as replacement) REF. NO. is a part number indicated in the
It is assigned only to applicable parts. Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty having different functions, they are clearly
R Must be returned. Repairable distinguished in the REMARKS and
Q
Must be returned.
Not repairable
SERIAL NUMBER columns.
(We use for analysis.)
Must not be returned. ■ PART NUMBER

(Consumable part.
T
Not applicable to Not repairable PART NUMBER is a code number that is
free-of-charge warranty.) unique to each part. An alphabetic letter at
without
Must not be returned. Not repairable the rightmost position of the code number
R, Q, T
TP5Z0002.EPS
has the following meaning.
❍For hardware
● Export Regulation-applicable Character
The alphabet denotes the version
(Parts with the following designator are number of a part. If parts have different
controlled by export regulations.) version numbers, they are upward
Character Significance compatible.
+ Parts applicable to export regulations.
TP3Z0003.EPS
❍For software
The alphabet denotes a difference in the
● Fault RANK Characters specifications. Parts differing in the
(Which provide reference for determining suffix are not compatible with each
the recommended stock quantity) other. Version number is omitted in the
All parts are assigned with one of list.
characters A thorugh E.
■ PART NAME
Character Significance
Consumable parts or parts that will be
PART NAME represents a general name
A of a part.
replaced at short intervals.
Parts that may become faulty accidentally
B
and have a relatively high failure rate. ■ QTY.
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but ❍QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used
C are expected to have a relatively high failure
rate.
in each unit.
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but ❍A part whose quantity is suffixed with -S
D
are expected to become faulty. represents a small part that is shipped in
Parts that are necessary for fault analysis, or packs of 50. (Even if such a part is
parts that may be needed in case of
E
unexpected accidents such as man-induced
ordered in quantity of 1, a pack
damage. containing 50 pieces of that part is
TP3Z0004.EPS supplied.)
006-259-08
SP7-3
■ REMARKS ■ PRECAUTIONS TO BE OBSERVED

The REMARKS column indicates a WHEN RETURNING PARTS FOR
unique name or relevant information of REPAIR
each part. When returning a component for repair,
pack it in the same manner as for the
■ SERIAL NUMBER
supplied substitute, using the substitute
The units may contain different parts packing materials.
depending on their shipment control The use of different packing materials or
number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates the packing methods may incur damage to
shipment control number to which the packed component during transit.
relevant parts are applicable. If the
SERIAL NUMBER column is blank, the
parts are applicable to all the relevant
units. The shipment control number is
represented by lower five digits of eight-
digit number indicated on the rating
indication label.
■ RECOMMENDED QUANTITIES OF
SPARE PARTS
It is recommended as a rough guide to
keep in stock a certain quantity of parts
according to the rank (A, B, C, D, E)
assigned to the parts, as follows. For
periodically replaced parts, keep them in
stock separately. Adjust the stock quantity
of service parts depending on the number
of working units (N).
Quantity used in a single system: Q
❍N=1
Rank A = 1 + Q x 0.3
Rank C = 1 + Q x 0.05
Rank D = 1 + Q x 0.02
❍2≤N≤10
Rank A = 2 + N x Q x 0.3
Rank C = 2 + N x Q x 0.05
Rank D = 1 + N x Q x 0.02
❍11≤N≤300
Rank A = 3 + N x Q x 0.3
Rank C = 3 + N x Q x 0.05
Rank D = 2 + N x Q x 0.02
006-259-08
SP7-4
HOW TO READ PARTS DIAGRAMS

The SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) Volume is constructed in such a way that it can be
referred together with the REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) Volume. REF Nos.
enclosed in the exploded view mean that the removal/reinstallation/adjustment
procedure of that part is provided in the REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT Volume.
The following describes how to read the Parts Diagrams.
■ Example (SERVICE PARTS LIST Volume)
INDEX No.
(1)
05C
FP7Z0513.EPS
E6
15 REF. No.
(2)
3
16 2 2-BR3X8
1
E6
4
6
E4
E3
DT3X6
14 5
E6
8 6
13
10
E6
17 7
6
6
E6
9
DT3X6
10
3-BR3X10
11
18
19
12
FP7Z0503.EPS
006-259-00
11.10.2002 FM3342(1) SP-30
FP7Z0001.EPS
(1) INDEX No. .... The INDEX Nos. in the SERVICE PARTS LIST Volume are related to the
Chapter No. in the REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT Volume.
(2) REF No. ....... REF No. (example 3 ) which are enclosed in the exploded view indicate the
Section No. to be referred in REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT Volume.
For the above example, the item to be referred for REF. 3 is “MC 5 - 3
Upper Conveyor Unit Exit Motor (MD2)”.
006-259-03
SP7-5
■ Example (REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT Volume)
Chapter No.
(1)
5 3 Upper Conveyor Unit Exit Motor (MD2)
Section No.
(2)
FP7C0523.EPS
■Removing Procedure
• Rear cover
(2) Remove the conveyor unit exit clutch (CLD1)
(3) #3
[Disconnect]
Connector MD2
(3) #3
[Disconnect]
Connector CLD1
(3) #3
[Release] Clamp
(3) #4
[Disconnect]
Clutch connector
(3) #1
[Remove] 2-DT3x6
(3) #2
[Remove]
(2) #1
[Remove] E5 (2) #2
[Pull out]
FP7C0504.EPS
■Reinstalling Procedure
006-259-00
11.10.2002 FM3342(1) MC-60
FP7Z0002.EPS
Refer to “MC 5 - 3 Upper Conveyor Unit Exit Motor (MD2)” for details on the removal/
reinstallation/adjustment of “ 05C - 3 ”.
006-259-03
SP7-6
INDEX 01A INDEX 01B INDEX 02A

● カバー1 ● カバー2 ● フレーム1
COVER 1 COVER 2 FRAME 1
INDEX 02B INDEX 03A INDEX 03B

● フレーム2 ● 装填部1 ● 装填部2
FRAME 2 LOADING UNIT 1 LOADING UNIT 2
INDEX 04A INDEX 04B INDEX 05A

● 枚葉部1 ● 枚葉部2 ● 搬送部1
REMOVAL UNIT 1 REMOVAL UNIT 2 CONVEYOR UNIT 1
INDEX 05B INDEX 05C INDEX 05D

● 搬送部2 ● 搬送部3 ● 搬送部4
CONVEYOR UNIT 2 CONVEYOR UNIT 3 CONVEYOR UNIT 4
FP7Z1001.EPS
006-259-03
SP7-7
INDEX 05E INDEX 06 INDEX 07

● 搬送部5 ● 副走査部 ● 光学部
CONVEYOR UNIT 5 SUB-SCANNING UNIT SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
INDEX 08A INDEX 08B INDEX 08C

● 熱現像部1 ● 熱現像部2 ● 熱現像部3
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2 HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3
INDEX 08D INDEX 08E INDEX 08F

● 熱現像部4 ● 熱現像部5 ● 熱現像部6
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 5 HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 6
INDEX 09A INDEX 09B INDEX 10

● 排出部1 ● 排出部2 ● 制御部
FILM RELEASE UNIT 1 FILM RELEASE UNIT 2 CONTROLLER
FP7Z1002.EPS
006-259-03
SP7-8
INDEX 11A INDEX 11B INDEX 11C

● ソータ1 ● ソータ2 ● ソータ3
SORTER 1 SORTER 2 SORTER 3
INDEX 11D INDEX 11E INDEX 11F

● ソータ4 ● ソータ5 ● ソータ6
SORTER 4 SORTER 5 SORTER 6
INDEX 11G INDEX 12 INDEX 13

● ソータ7 ● ケーブル ● 接続図
SORTER 7 CABLE CABLE CONNECTION
DIAGRAM
INDEX 14 INDEX 15 INDEX 16

● 部品番号検索表 ● ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧表 ● 消耗品一覧表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE OF SCREWS/ LIST OF QUICK WEARING
TABLE WASHERS INDICATION PARTS
SYMBOLS
FP7Z1003.EPS
006-259-03
SP7-9
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
カバー 1
01A COVER 1
FP7Z0111.EPS
20
8-T4x16
B
21
C
BR3x8
29 A 4
5
A 8-BR3x8
2-BR3x8
25
BR3x8
26 1.2 2 2-BR3x8
1.1
D 27
7
10
9 6
B
10-BR3x8
3-DT3x8
3
15
2-BR3x8 4-BR3x8
17
11
2-BR3x8 28
2-PS3x8
D
18 2
4-PS3x8
16
C
4-TP4x8
22
23
24
12
19 13
2-BR3x8 FP7Z0101.EPS
15 4-PS3x8 14
006-259-03
カバー 1
COVER 1 01A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO.
1.1 1
D 350N2653D/E カバー Cover 1段トレイ使用時の
1.2 1 み/Used for upper
tray
E 2 345N1633E/F 遮板 Cover 3
A 3 393N0011 刃物 Cutter 2
D 4 332N0600 ストッパ Stopper 1
E 5 899Y0260 保守部品 Jig 1
E 6 345N1635E 遮板 Cover 1
D 7 345N1481 シールド材 Packing 1
D 8 350N2656B カバー Cover 1
A 9 376N0229B メカニカルフィル Air Filter 1
ター
E 10 345N1660B 遮板 Cover 1
D 11 314N0065D 蝶番 Hinge 1
E 12 356N9003B ブラケット Bracket 3
E 13 356N9006A ブラケット Bracket 1
E 14 356N9007C ブラケット Bracket 1
D 15 316S3132 ラッチ Lutch 2
D 17 366N0058C アクチュエータ Actuator 1
D 18 350Y1684 カバー Cover 1
D 19 350N2666D カバー Cover 1
D 20 350N2059A/B/C カバー Cover 8
D 21 350N2651D/E/F カバー Cover 1
D 22 386N1171A 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 6
D 23 386N1169 リボン Ribbon 6
E 25 405N3010A 銘板 Label 1
E 26 405N3011 銘板 Label 1
E 27 405N3012 銘板 Label 1
D 28 382N1599 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 3
D 29 317N1053A/B キャップ Cap 4
006-259-08
カバー 2
01B COVER 2
1
2
3
FP7Z0112.EPS
4
BR3x12
2-S3x5 5
2-T4x8
6
A
7
2-T4x12
4-BR3x8
2-T4x12
A
3-BR3X8
8
8
8-T4x16
8-T4x25
9 9
9 10
12
12 BR4x8 15
9 9
16
9 BR4x8
17
13
11
14
9 12
10 FP7Z0102.EPS
006-259-04
カバー 2
COVER 2 01B
D 1 350N2668D カバー Cover 1
D 2 350N2661B/C カバー Cover 1
D 3 350N2663C/D カバー Cover 1
D 8 350N2059A/B/C カバー Cover 16
D 9 343N0054B フック Hook 7
D 10 345Y0300A ルーバ Louver 5
D 11 350N2650D/E/F/G カバー Cover 1
D 12 398Y0064 シャッタ Shutter 1-3 With REF.13
E 13 405N2980 銘板 Label 1
D 14 350Y1673A カバー Cover 1
D 15 376N0238 メカニカルフィルタ Air Filter 5
D 16 364N0125 ガード Guard 1-3
D 17 364N0124 ガード Guard 1-3
006-259-08
フレーム 1
02A FRAME 1
2-BR3x8
1
2
FP7Z0211.EPS
3
2-BR3x8
25
24
4
2-BR3x8 27
6
5
22 16
23
2-BR3x8
7
9 BR3x8
19 2-BR3x8
17
21 8
15 26
14
18
2-TP 2-BR3x8
4-BR3x8
3-BR5x12 10 11
10
11
12
12 19
13 13
20
19 FP7Z0201.EPS
006-259-03
フレーム 1
FRAME 1 02A
E 1 345N1653C 遮板 Cover 1
E 2 345N1634C 遮板 Cover 1
E 3 345N1640G 遮板 Cover 1
D 4 345F0606A ルーバ Louver 4
E 5 345N1649B 遮板 Cover 1
D 6 363N2453B ガイド Guide 1
D 7 128Y0299 スイッチ Switch 1
E 9 356N8962 ブラケット Bracket 1-3
D 10 367N1007 キャスタ Caster 2
D 11 367S2059 脚 Foot 2
D 12 316N0371 止め具 Clamp 2
D 13 316N0372 止め具 Clamp 2
D 14 360N0474C ケーシング Casing 1-3
D 15 852N0025E/F 読取り部 Bar Code Reader 1-3 SA14, SA24, SA34
D 19 382N1541A テープ Tape 3
D 22 382N1558B テープ Tape 1
E 26 345N1662A 遮板 Cover 1-3
D 27 345N1639 遮板 Tape 1
006-259-08
フレーム 2
02B FRAME 2
4-BR4X8
19 2-BR4X8 FP7Z0212.EPS
1
20 2
3
21
4
TP3x6
2-DT3X6
2-DT3X6
9 8
5
3-BR4x8
2-TP3x6 6-BR3x8
23 7
22
13
10
14
3-BR5x12 15 12
14
W12
11
SW12 15
10
W12
16
SW12
18
16 3-BR5x12
17
17
FP7Z0202.EPS
006-259-03
フレーム 2
FRAME 2 02B
E 1 347N1827 調整板 Adjustment Plate 1
E 3 346N1258A 補助板 Support Plate 1
輸送用/for
E 4 401N0846 押え板 Couter Plate 1
Transport
輸送用/for
E 5 347N1830 スペーサ Spacer 1
Transport
輸送用/for
E 6 309N0103 座金 Washer 1
Transport
輸送用/for
E 7 308N0212 特殊ねじ Special Screw 2
Transport
D 8 388N5349C 板ばね Leaf Spring 1
E 9 356N9084 ブラケット Bracket 1
E 13 316S1190 コードクランプ Code Clamp 1
E 15 316N0377 止め具 Clamp 2
D 18 367N1007 キャスタ Caster 2
D 20 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1 ThK1
D 22 375N0078 シール Seal 15
D 23 363N2473 ガイド Guide 6
006-259-08
装填部 1
03A LOADING UNIT 1
2-B3x16
4
5
1 33 FP7Z0311.EPS
2-BR3x8
2 6
2-BR4x8
1
12
DT3x6
11
10
B
BR4x8
9
8
27 B 2-BR4x8
13
28 7
29 30 14
BR4x8
25
2-BR4x8
BR4x8 2-T4x4
32 T4X6
SW4
W4
26
2-T4x4
2-T4x4
31
2-T4x4
24
15
3 2-T4x4 16
V3x10
E4
22
23 E4
21 DT3x6 E4
DT3x6
20
18
19 E4
17
FP7Z0301.EPS
006-259-03
装填部 1
LOADING UNIT 1 03A
D 1 322SY054 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2
E 2 356Y0269 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 3 146N0010/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SA11, SA21, SA31
D 4 128S0258 マイクロスイッチ Micro Switch 1 SA12, SA22, SA32
D 5 366S0011 アクチュエータ Actuator 1
E 6 356Y0272D ブラケット Bracket 1
D 7 146S0029/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SA13, SA23, SA33
D 8 107Y0180 ソレノイド Solenoid 1
D 9 343N0051A フック Hook 1
D 10 310S6003024 波型スプリングピン Pin 1
SOLA11, SOLA21,
SOLA31
D 12 388N2513 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring 1
E 14 355N0665D フレーム Frame 1
E 15 346N1209A 補助板 Support Panel 1
365N0093/
D 16 レール Rail 2
365N0106/A
D 18 319N3954 軸 Shaft 1
D 19 334N1177A 金属ローラ Metallic Roller 1
D 22 319N3953 軸 Shaft 1
D 23 334N1182 金属ローラ Metallic Roller 1
D 26 355Y0216B ガイド Guide 1
E 28 313N1182 ステー Stay 1
E 29 345Y0298 遮板 Cover 1
D 31 308N0210 特殊ねじ Special Screw 1
D 32 388N5360 板ばね Leaf Spring 1
D 33 356N9533 ブラケット Bracket 1
006-259-08
装填部 2
03B LOADING UNIT 2
19 21 25
BR4x8 35
2 FP7Z0312.EPS
7
8
T4x35 3
7 5
11 26 6
5
5
14 6
E4 5
4
13 DT3x8 16
E4
15
18 12
22
17
20 34 E4
12
5-T4x4 9-Q4x6
10 DETAIL A
SW4
29 W4
T4X6
33
31
5-T4x4
Y 3-PS3x8
27
28
24
23 32
BR4x8 30 1 FP7Z0302.EPS
006-259-05
装填部 2
LOADING UNIT 2 03B
REF. 34と35を除
く
D 1 359Y0059 容器 Case 1
Except for REF. 34
and 35
D 2 363N2420A ガイド Guide 1
D 5 319N3919A 軸 Shaft 4
D 9 345N1646B 遮光材 Light Protect Tape 1
D 10 340Y0037A 取手 Handle 1
D 11 345N1646B 遮光材 Light Protect Tape 1
E 12 308S0309A 特殊ねじ Special Screw 2
D 13 363N2456A ガイド板 Guide Plate 4
D 14 319N3955 軸 Shaft 1
D 16 319N3953 軸 Shaft 1
D 19 363Y0458 ガイド Guide 1
D 21 382N1463A リボン Ribbon 1
D 22 603N0230A フィルタ Filter 1
D 23 343N0053C フック Hook 1
E 24.1 405N2972 銘板 Label 1 大角
E 24.2 405N2973 銘板 Label 1 35X35
E 24.3 405N2974 銘板 Label 1 半切
E 24.4 405N2975 銘板 Label 1 35X43
E 24.5 405N2976 銘板 Label 1 B4
E 24.6 405N2977 銘板 Label 1 26X36
E 24.7 405N3006 銘板 Label 1 六切
E 24.8 405N3007 銘板 Label 1 20X25
E 24.9 405N2978 銘板 Label 1 四切
E 24.10 405N2979 銘板 Label 1 25X30
For DI-ML
B4、六切、
E 24.11 405Y0182 銘板 Label 1
25X30、26X36、
20X25
D 26 386N1168 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 3
D 31 350N2736 カバー Cover 1
D 33 388N5359 板ばね Leaf Spring 1
D 34 405N3433 銘板 Label 1 For DI-ML
D 35 405N3434 銘板 Label 1 For DI-ML
006-259-08
枚葉部 1
04A REMOVAL UNIT 1
FP7Z0411.EPS
2 1
to
RE
F.5 3
4
E6
5
7
E6
E6
6
E3
E3
7
E6 9
E6 9
21 5
20 E6
8 4-DT3x6
11 7 10
E6 11
4-DT3x6 3
2
E6
E6
19 E4
E4 7
4 E6
12
17 13
2-BR4x8
14
E3
E3
18
8
5
9 15
16
FP7Z0401.EPS
006-259-03
枚葉部 1
REMOVAL UNIT 1 04A
D 1 345N1641B 遮板 Cover 1
D 2 322N1004 軸受 Bearing 4
D 3 388N2384 引っ張りコイルばね Extension Spring 2
D 4 327N0178A 歯車 Gear 2
D 5 341N1035A アーム Arm 4
D 8 327N1107204B 歯車 Gear 2
D 9 341N1034 アーム Arm 4
D 10 327N1102014A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 11 327N1103501 歯車 Gear 2
D 12 334N3565C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 13 334N2380 樹脂ローラ Plastic Roller 1
D 14 334N3562B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 15 319N3913C 軸 Shaft 1
MB11, MB21,
D 16 118SX063/A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1
MB31
D 17 327N1103101B 歯車 Gear 1
D 18 327N1101806B 歯車 Gear 1
D 20 327N1105401 歯車 Gear 1
006-259-05
枚葉部 2
04B REMOVAL UNIT 2
FP7Z0412.EPS
2-DT3x6
17
2-DT3x6
1
2-BR3x8
2.1
B
1
2.2
2-BR3x8
3
E3
18 15 7
16
2-PS3x8
V3x10 19 DT3x6 7
20
BR3x8 14 23.1
23.2
7
B
PS3x8 6
DT3x6
8
21
22 12 9
10
13
4
11
FP7Z0402.EPS
006-259-03
枚葉部 2
REMOVAL UNIT 2 04B
D 2.1 341Y0317 アーム Arm 1
for
D 2.2 341Y0318 アーム Arm 1
20X25(Optional)
A 4 392N0012/A/B 吸着盤 Suction Cup 2
D 5 402N0020A ベローズ Bellows 2
E 6 346N1212A 補助板 Support Plate 2
D 7 322SY223 軸受 Bearing 16
D 8 388N1212 圧縮コイルばね Compression Coil Spring 4
D 9 375N0095 シール Packing 2
E 10 316N0436A 止め具 Clamp 2
E 11 371N0123A ノズル Nozzle 2
E 12 390N0035 ウエイト Weight 5
E 13 316Y0043 止め具 Clamp 1
E 14 366N0057A アクチュエータ Actuator 1
D 15 146S0029/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SB12, SB22, SB32
E 17 346N1246B 補助板 Support Plate 2
D 18 363N2442C ガイド Guide 5
D 23.1 341N1033B アーム Arm 1
for
D 23.2 341N1036B アーム Arm 1
20X25(Optional)
006-259-05
搬送部 1
05A CONVEYOR UNIT 1
2
A
6 FP7Z0511.EPS
1 4
5-DT3X8
A 5
9
8
7
V3X10
DT3X6
E6 29
11
10 14
BR4X8
BR3X8 E4
12 15
BR3X8
11 A
E6
17
14
13
DT3X6
15 16
A
BR4X8 22
DT3X6
E4
18
19 23
21 20 DT3X6
DT3X6
28 19
BR3X8
30
BR3X8
24
BR3X8
27
26 BR3X8
25 FP7Z0501.EPS
006-259-04
搬送部 1
CONVEYOR UNIT 1 05A
D 1 319N3927A 軸 Shaft 1
D 2 388N3091A ねじりコイルばね Torsion Coil Spring 1
D 6 363Y0445 ガイドアセンブリ Guide Assembly 1
D 8 146S0052/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD1
D 11 322N1006C 軸受 Bearing 2
E 14 347N1826A スペーサ Spacer 2
D 17 319N3928B 軸 Shaft 1
D 20 363N2428A/B ガイド Guide 1
D 25 363N2424B/C ガイド Guide 1
D 27 363N2425B/C ガイド Guide 1
D 28 405N3028A 銘板 Label 1
D 30 405N3132 銘板 Label 1
006-259-05
搬送部 2
05B CONVEYOR UNIT 2
8
10 FP7Z0512.EPS
8 DT3X6
4
5
DT3X6
E3 12
3
2-BR3X8
1
DT3X6
E4
7 13 4 6
2-BR3X8
8
DT3X6
9 10
DT3X6 DT3X6
3
E3
1
7 5 2
E4
13 2-DT3X6
DT3X6
DT3X6 2-BR3X8
BR3X8
11
FP7Z0502.EPS
006-259-03
搬送部 2
CONVEYOR UNIT 2 05B
D 1 327N1081802A 歯車 Gear 2
D 2 118SX171/B/C パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD6
D 7 146S0029/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SD6, SD7
D 8 363N2423C ガイド Guide 4
E 9 401N0842B 圧板 Pressure Plate 4
D 10 319N3923A 軸 Shaft 4
006-259-08
搬送部 3
05C CONVEYOR UNIT 3
E6
FP7Z0513.EPS
15
3
16 2 2-BR3X8
1
E6
4
6
E5
E4
DT3X6
14 5
E6
8 6
13
10
E6
17 7
6
6
E6
2-BR3X8 9
DT3X6
10
BR4X8
3-BR3X10
11
18
12
FP7Z0503.EPS
006-259-03
搬送部 3
CONVEYOR UNIT 3 05C
D 1 327N1101809 歯車 Gear 1
D 4.1 106S0029A/B 電磁クラッチ Clutch 1 CLD1
D 4.2 106Y0012 電磁クラッチ Clutch 1 CLD1
D 7 319N3935D 軸 Shaft 1
D 8 341N1044D アーム Arm 1
D 9 341N1043C アーム Arm 1
D 11 341N1042C アーム Arm 1
E 12 356Y0287A ブラケット Bracket 1
D 13 334N3569C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 15 334Y3210A ローラ Roller 1
D 16 362N0716B 受 Support 1
E 17 364N0096 ガード Guard 1
Bバージョン以降のREF.2（356N8964）、およびCバージョン以降のREF.13（334N3569）は、REF.4.1に取付けることが
できない。
そのため、REF.2、REF.13を交換する場合には、CLD1をREF.4.2に交換すること。
B version or later of REF. 2 (356N8964) or C version or later of REF. 13 (334N3569) cannot be attached to REF. 4.1.
When replacing REF. 2 or REF. 13, CLD1 must be replaced with REF. 4.2.
006-259-08
搬送部 4
05D CONVEYOR UNIT 4
2-BR3X8 FP7Z0514.EPS
42
8 29
25
27 2-BR4X8
30
8 26
31 32
33
E4 28
E6 2-DT3X8 34
18 45
A 45 36
E6 BR3X8
E6
11
E6 6
35
E6 39 4
A E6 E4
DT3X6 E6 35
17 8
43 E6
E6 40
E6 35
37 38 E4
12 41
11 E6
6
E6
DETAILE A
37
BR3X8
5
18 16 DT3X6
DT3X6
15
19 23 BR3X8
22
44 24
2 9
1
E6
BR3X10
14 8
8
13
E6 21
12 7
11 2-BR4X8
10
6 E6
A 44 20
E6
E6 3
E4
1112
6 E6
A
E6
E6 8
E4 FP7Z0504.EPS
006-259-04
搬送部 4
CONVEYOR UNIT 4 05D
D 1 319N3926A 軸 Shaft 1
D 2 319N3934A 軸 Shaft 1
D 3 319Y1168 軸 Shaft 1
D 5 319N3925A 軸 Shaft 4
D 6 341N1038A アーム Arm 4
D 7 329N0154C カム Cam 1
D 9.1 334N3566A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 # or earlier
D 9.2 334N3610/A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 # or later
D 10 334N3567A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 13 339N0022A ハンドル Handle 1
E 14 347S0283/A スペーサ Spacer 1
D 18 146S0029/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 SD3, SD4, SD5
D 19 146S0052/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD2
D 20 118SX063/A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD1
D 21 327N0180B 歯車 Gear 1
D 24 327N1101809 歯車 Gear 1
D 25 327N0183A 歯車 Gear 1
D 26 340D775280 つまみ Knob 1
D 28 319N4187A 軸 Shaft 1
D 29 327N0186B 歯車 Gear 1
D 30 341N1055C アーム Arm 1
D 31 327N1101502 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 32 327N0185A ウォームホイール Worm Wheel 1
D 33 327N0184A ウォームギア Worm Gear 1
D 35 327N1103501 歯車 Gear 3
D 37 327N1105401 歯車 Gear 2
D 38 327N0182A 歯車 Gear 2
D 39 327N1106101 歯車 Gear 1
E 40 345N1638A 遮板 Cover 1
E 41 345N1652A 遮光板 Cover 1
D 42 316S3047 キャッチ Catch 1
D 44 334N2382C 樹脂ローラ Plastic Roller 2
D 45 322N1028A すべり軸受 Bearing 2
006-259-08
搬送部 5
05E CONVEYOR UNIT 5
FP7Z0515.EPS
9 24.2
DT3X6 23
24.1
8 2-BR3X6 E6
E6
19 23
22 E6
18
E6
E4 E6
E6
27
E6
BR4X8 E6
26
7 3 23
25
2 22
6 A 2-BR3X6 24.3
21.1
2 E6 20 21.2
18
19
22
16
DT3X6
15 E6
E6 DT3X6
E6
4
BR4X8
1
5
12 14
28 10
DT3X6
16
29 DT3X6 11
17
13
FP7Z0505.EPS
006-259-03
搬送部 5
CONVEYOR UNIT 5 05E
D 5 363N2428A/B ガイド Guide 1
D 7 334N2381B 樹脂ローラ Plastic Roller 1
D 12 319N3928B 軸 Shaft 1
D 20 319N3929A 軸 Shaft 1
中/下搬送共通
/Common to
D 21.1 1
middle/lower
Conveyor
中搬送のみ(3段ト
356N9021B ブラケット Bracket
レイ使用時)/Used
D 21.2 1 for middle
conveyor(used
when lower tray
mounted)
E 22 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 3
D 23 327N1103501 歯車 Gear 3
中/下搬送共通
/Common to
D 24.1 1
middle/lower
Conveyor
D 24.2 1 中搬送のみ使用
/Used for middle
327N1106101 平歯車 Spur Gear
中搬送のみ(3段ト
レイ使用時)/Used
D 24.3 1 for middle
conveyor(used
when lower tray
mounted)
D 25 345N1638A 遮板 Cover 1
D 26 345N1652A 遮光材 Light Protect Plate Cover 1
D 28 334N3609B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4
006-259-03
副走査部
06 SUB-SCANNING UNIT
FP7Z0611.EPS
7
1
2- 6 2-
BR4X8
BR4X16 BR3X8
W4 2-
2-BR4X8 16
BR3X8
8
16 2-BR3X8
2-
2- BR3X8 16 BR3X10
10
BR3X8 16 BR3X10
Q4X14
8 BR4X8 3
4-BR3X8 9
4-BR3X8 5
5
14
12
11
32
BR4X8
13
35
33
W5
BR4X8
2
35 BR4X8
2-BR4X8
W5
4
34 15
TP4X8
2-BR3X8
TP4X6 4-TP4X8
4-TP4X8
2-BR4X8
17
20
23
25 24
26 21 BR4X8
24 3-BR4X8 18
29 27
22
BR3X10 E6
31 2-BR4X8 E6
21 36
30 TP4X8
28
19
FP7Z0601.EPS
006-259-04
副走査部
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 06
D 2 118YX247B/D モータアセンブリ Motor Assembly 1 ME1
D 3 334Y3202C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 4 815Y0058 SED16Aアセンブリ SED16A Assembly 1
D 5 319N3920C 軸 Shaft 2
E 6 345N1647A 遮板 Cover 1
E 7 350N2716A カバー Cover 1
E 8 357N1444D 台 Base 2
D 9 334Y3203C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 10 309S0075 座金 Washer 2
D 11 334N3605 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
E 12 322SF227 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2
E 13 350N2671B カバー Cover 1
E 14 357N1445C 台 Base 1
D 16 386S0015 防振ゴム Vibration-proof Rubber 4
D 18 363N2416C/D ガイド Guide 1
D 19 316N0442A 止め具 Clamp 1
D 20 323N1244 平ベルト Belt 1
D 23 341N1037B アーム Arm 1
D 24 322SF061 軸受 Bearing 2
D 25 337N0038 ホイール Wheel 1
D 26 388N1073 圧縮コイルばね Compression Coil Spring 1
D 28 341Y0316 アームアセンブリ Arm Assembly 1
E 29 350N2646C カバー Cover 1
D 30 339N0025 ハンドル Handle 1
E 32 313N1213G ステー Stay 1
D 33 319N4032 軸 Shaft 1
E 34 346N1296 補助板 Support Plate 1
Upper conveyor
E 36 357N1472B 台 Base 1
unit removing jig
006-259-08
光学部
07 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
FP7Z0711.EPS
FP7Z0701.EPS
006-259-03
光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 07
DR 1 839Y0056A 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1
006-259-03
熱現像部 1
08A HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1
FP7Z0811.EPS
17
18
10
BR4X8 9
7
4-BR4X12
BR4X8
6
E6
1
BR4X8
3-BR4X8
BR4X8
E4
15
2 WP4X12
8
BR4X8 BR4X8 6
11
BR4X8 6
16
19 5
BR4X8 BR4X8
14 BR3X10
3
4-BR4X8
4
6
13 12 FP7Z0801.EPS
006-259-03
熱現像部 1
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 08A
D 1 327Y0011 歯車アセンブリ Gear Assembly 1
D 2 319N3910A 軸 Shaft 1
D 3 363N2451C/D ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 4 363N2412G/H ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 5 327N1082601B 歯車 Gear 1
D 6 322SF012 軸受 Bearing 4
D 7 327N1108001A 歯車 Gear 1
D 8 327N1101605A 歯車 Gear 1
D 10 118SX162/A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MG1
D 11 327N1106402A 歯車 Gear 1
D 13 339N0022A ハンドル Handle 1
D 17 346N1272 補助板 Support Plate 2
D 18 346N1271 補助板 Support Plate 1
D 19 405N3008 銘板 Label 1
006-259-05
熱現像部 2
08B HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2
FP7Z0812.EPS
3
4
3
5
4
3 E6
E6
E6
1
8
7
12
4-DT3X6
2-DT3X6
13
14 TP3X6
11
10 2-DT3X6
9
4-DT3X6 FP7Z0802.EPS
006-259-03
熱現像部 2
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2 08B
D 2 327N1102707 歯車 Gear 1
D 3 334Y0092 ローラ Roller 12
D 4 334Y0093 ローラ Roller 1
D 5 327N1083502B 歯車 Gear 1
D 6 327N1101807B 歯車 Gear 1
D 7 322NY156 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 17
D 9 387N0165 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
E 10 313N1219C ステー Stay 1
D 13 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1 ThG10
006-259-03
熱現像部 3
08C HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3
FP7Z0813.EPS
10
11
A
1
6-BR4X40
A
3
2-BR3X8
2
4-BR3X8 6
7
8
A 2-BR4X8
2
4
5
2-BR4X8
A
3-TP3X8
9
FP7Z0803.EPS
006-259-03
熱現像部 3
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3 08C
E 1 364S0005 ガード Guard 3
D 2 119Y0056 電動ファン Motor Fan 2 FANG1, 3
D 3 119S0008/A/B 電動ファン Motor Fan 1 FANG2
E 6 318S1232 ブッシュ Bushing 12
A 11 603N0228 フィルタ Filter 1
006-259-05
熱現像部 4
08D HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4
FP7Z0814.EPS
11
12
1
4-3x6
13
5
6
7
3
2 3
9
WP3X10
DETAIL A
10
006-259-08
熱現像部 4
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 08D
D 1 117Y100017 ヒータ Heater 1
D 2 348Y0196 側板 Side Plate 1
D 3 322NF006 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 14
- 4 - - - -
D 5 327N1081801A 歯車 Gear 7
D 8 310N0685 ピン Pin 2
D 9 310N0684 ピン Pin 2
D 11 350Y100426 カバー Cover 1
D 12 802Y0111 ラック部 Rack 1
D 13 115N100002 感熱スイッチ Thermal Protector 3
006-259-08
熱現像部 5
08E HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 5
12
FP7Z0815.EPS
11
1
4-3x6
13
5
6
7
3
2 3
9
WP3X10
10 DETAIL A
006-259-08
熱現像部 5
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 5 08E
- 4 - - - -
D 5 327N1081801A 歯車 Gear 7
D 8 310N0685 ピン Pin 2
D 9 310N0684 ピン Pin 2
D 11 350Y100427 カバー Cover 1
D 12 802Y0112A ラック部 Rack 1
006-259-08
熱現像部 6
08F HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 6
12
FP7Z0816.EPS
11
1
4-3x6
13
5
6
7
3
2 3
9
WP3X10
10 DETAIL A
006-259-08
熱現像部 6
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 6 08F
- 4 - - - -
D 5 327N1081801A 歯車 Gear 7
D 8 310N0685 ピン Pin 2
D 9 310N0684 ピン Pin 2
D 11 350Y100428 カバー Cover 1
D 12 802Y0112A ラック部 Rack 1
006-259-08
排出部 1
09A FILM RELEASE UNIT 1
FP7Z0911.EPS
13
10 2-BR3X8
3 12
9
6 11
7
5 E6
2-TP3X6
4
E3
14
TP3X6 10
8
2 E4
A 7
1
E4
15
7 A
3
E6
16
TP3X6
A
19
A
E6 17
8 7 E3
18
16 FP7Z0901.EPS
006-259-08
排出部 1
FILM RELEASE UNIT 1 09A
D 1 319N3911A 軸 Shaft 1
D 4 338N0464/A リング Ring 2
D 5 338N0468/A リング Ring 4
D 6 319N3912A 軸 Shaft 1
E 8 388N2108A ばね Spring 2
D 11 319N3930 軸 Shaft 1
D 13 118SX171/B/C パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MJ1
D 15 338N0505 リング Ring 1
D 16 322SY223 軸受 Bearing 2
D 17 346N1247B 補助板 Support Plate 1
D 18 363N100386B ガイド板 Guide Plate 5
D 19 334N0072C ローラ Roller 15
006-259-08
排出部 2
09B FILM RELEASE UNIT 2
BR3X8 FP7Z0912.EPS
11
BR3X12 17
BR3X8 12
16
BR3X8
BR3X8
BR3X8
3
4
18
BR3X8
BR3X8
See 11F-REF.13
2-BR3X8
5 See 11F-REF.12
6
15
2-BR3X16 7
10
2-BR3X8
13
9
14
8 BR3X6
2-BR3X6
2-TP4X8
BR3X8
See 11F-REF.10
BR3X8 See 11F-REF.11
See 11F-REF.14
FP7Z0902.EPS
006-259-03
排出部 2
FILM RELEASE UNIT 2 09B
D 2 113Y1531 LED15A LED15A 1
D 3 146S0052/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SJ1
D 6 113Y1532B PDD15A PDD15A 1
D 7 387N0165 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
D 9 128S0258 スイッチ Switch 1 SK1
E 10 356N9025D ブラケット Bracket 1
E 11 350N2664B/C カバー Cover 1
D 12 345N1673 遮板 Cover 1
E 14 139S0091 絶縁材 Insulate Plate 1
D 15 316S3133 ラッチ Lutch 1
E 17 313N1204C ステー Stay 1
D 18 405N3008 銘板 Label 1
006-259-05
制御部
10 CONTROLLER
12 FP7Z0A11.EPS
13, 24
BR3x8 1
6-BR3x8
5 , 25
6 , 25, 26
2-BR3x8 6-BR3x8
2-BR3x8
4 2-BR3x8
16, 25
6-BR3x8
11 21
22 3
10
27
9 17 20
2-BR3x8 2-BR3x35
18
2-BR3x8
4-BR3x12 2-BR3x8 15
14
2-BR3x8 15
19
7
8 7
23
4-TP4x8
BR3x8
FP7Z0A01.EPS
2
006-259-03
制御部
CONTROLLER 10
CR 1 845Y0094B/C パネル部 Operation Panel 1
CR 2.1 125N0121C/D/E/F 電源 Power 1 NFBなし/without
circuit breaker
NFBタイプ/with
CR 2.2 125N0121G 電源 Power 1
circuit breaker
#30000 or
C 3.1 114Y5396101A 磁気ディスク部 HDD 1 OS:WIN NT
earlier
#30001 or
C 3.2 114Y5396105B 磁気ディスク部 HDD 1 OS:WIN XP
later
CR 4 113Y1614D/E PCボード PC Board 1
113Y1601D/E/F/G
CR 5 MCT16A MCT16A 1
/H
CR 6.1 113Y1603G/H DRV16A DRV16A 1
CR 6.2 113Y1617A DRV16B（キット） DRV16B (Kit) 1
D 7 363S0014 ガイドレール Guide Rail 2
E 8 357N1457D 台 Tray 1
D 10 363S0012 ガイドレール Guide Rail 2
CR 13 113Y1600C/D/E PRN16A PRN16A 1
D 14 119S0008/A/B 電動ファン Motor Fan 1
E 15 364S0005 ガード Guard 2
CR 16 113Y1602G SNS16A SNS16A 1
D 19 301N7000 十字穴付き小ねじ Screw 4
D 20 318S1232 ブッシュ Bushing 4
D 21 113S0185/A/B ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1
D 22 113S0185/A/B ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 Optional
D 23 119Y0057 電動ファン Motor Fan 1
A 24 137S1178 ヒューズ Fuse 2 AC/DC48V 1A
006-259-08
ソータ 1
11A SORTER 1
FP7Z0B11.EPS
DETAIL A
2
3
4-T4x6
1
12
13 3-BR4x8
BR4x10
11 A 2-BR4x8
10
4-BR4x8
18
2-BR4x8
4-BR3x6 5 15 6 17
16 22
19
21
B
9
20
DETAIL B 14
1 6 20-BR4x8
2 7
7
3 8
2-W4
2-T4x6
4 9 2-BR4x8
8
5 10
2
FP7Z0B01.EPS
006-259-03
ソータ 1
SORTER 1 11A
D 2 350N2059A/B/C ネジカバー Screw Cover 6
D 4 350N2749/A カバー Cover 1
E 5 347N1861 調整板 Bracket 1
D 6 362N0744 受 Bin 10
D 7 362N0743 受 Support 1
D 8 350N2752/A カバー Cover 1
E 11 890N0005 工具 Tool 1 スパナSpanner
E 12 405N3013 銘板 Label 1
E 13 405N2579 銘板 Label 4
E 14 405N2601 銘板 Label 1
E 17 385N0065A 被覆材 Covering Material 10
E 18 362Y0105 受 Bin Assy 10
E 19 308S0253 特殊ねじ Screw 40
E 22 385N0078 被覆材 Covering Material 10
006-259-08
ソータ 2
11B SORTER 2
FP7Z0B12.EPS
2
3-B3x6
3
BR4x12
E5
5
20 24 4
BR3x12
21
2-BR
4x12 6 7
20 BR4x8
23 4-BR4x8
22 25 8
5 2-BR4x8
BR4x12 E6
E5
15 26
6-BR4x8 4
E5 4 9 2
BR4x8
3-B3x6
A
18
19 BR4x8
4-BR4x8
E6
E5 4
16 17 4-BR4x8
10 11
2-BR4x8
2-W3
2-SW3
2-Na3 9
DETAIL A
NO
COM 14 2-BR4x8
NC
2-B3x18 14
2-BR4x8
2-BR4x8
12
13 13
27 2-BR4x8 3-BR4x8
28 12
29 12
3-BR4x8
3-BR4x8
30 12
3-BR4x8 FP7Z0B02.EPS
006-259-03
ソータ 2
SORTER 2 11B
RANK R E F . PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO.
E 1 313N1255 ステー Stay 1
D 2 387N0133 帯電防止材 Eliminator 10
D 3 341N1093 アーム Arm 1
E 4 309S0034 プラワッシャ Plastic Washer 4
D 5 318S1078 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2
D 6 388N2467 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring 2 L=75.0
D 7 341N1088 アーム Arm 1
E 8 343N0040 フック Hook 1
E 9 313N1254 ステー Stay 10
D 10 357S0016 台 Mount 2
E 11 352N0597 パネル Panel 1
D 12 367Y1006 キャスタ Caster 4
D 14 367S2040 脚 Caster 2
D 15 341N1086 アーム Arm 1
E 17 343N0041 フック Hook 1
D 18 341N1089 アーム Arm 1
E 19 318S3161 グロメット Grommet 5
E 20 313N1256 ステー Stay 2
E 22 386S0060 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1
D 23 319N4000 軸 Shaft 1
D 24 340N0168A 取手 Lever 1
D 27 128S0723 マイクロスイッチ Micro Switch 1 ST6
D 28 366S0006 アクチェータ Actuator 1
E 29 139S0091 絶縁材 Insulating 1
006-259-03
ソータ 3
11C SORTER 3
FP7Z0B13.EPS
DETAIL B
29
30 31 2
32 1
39 2-BR 3-E6
2-B2.5x5 3x12 5-E6
35 38
18 3
2-BR3x12
34 17
16 1
33 2-B2x5
32 15
6
5 5-E6
14 4
13
6-E6 6
3-E6
18 4
5
6 4 17
DETAIL C 22
4 16
28 3-E2
5 27 23
21 2-BR 24
1 6-E6 4x8
4 5 20 BR3x12
6 4 7
19
4 26 2-B3x6 25
5 37 C
8
5
4
9
39
11 10
12
6-E6
B
13
4-BR4x8
2-BR4x8
2-BR4x8 A
12
6-E6
DETAIL A
15
14
BR4x8
13 36
FP7Z0B03.EPS
006-259-03
ソータ 3
SORTER 3 11C
D 1 388N2468A 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring 12 L=65.0
D 2 324N3133B タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 2
D 3 324N3127A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 4
D 5 322SF050 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 10 One-Way
D 6 360N0339A ハウジング Housing 24
E 7 363N2181 ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
E 9 313N1257 ステー Stay 1
E 10 356N9320 センサ板（上） Sensor Plate 1
D 14 319N3768 軸 Shaft 20
E 15 334N2368A 樹脂ローラ Plastic Roller 5
D 16 319N3767 軸 Shaft 2
D 17 334N2368A 樹脂ローラ Plastic Roller 8
D 19 319N3765 軸 Shaft 4
D 22 319N3766 軸 Shaft 1
D 25 341N1087 アーム Arm 1
D 28 107Y0170/A ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLT1 - SOLT4
D 29 363Y0476 ガイド Guide Assembly 2
D 31 388N3084 ねじりコイルばね Helical Torsion Coil Spring 2
D 32 319N3771 軸 Shaft 4
D 34 316S3107 キャッチ Magnet Catch 2
D 37 824Y0111 ソレノイドアセンブ Solenoid Assembly 4
リ
E 38 356N9321 センサ板 Sensor Plate 2
D 39 146S0052/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 ST1, ST2, ST3
006-259-05
ソータ 4
11D SORTER 4
DETAIL B
28 30 31 FP7Z0B14.EPS
38 32
2-BR3x12
2-B2.5x5 4
35 29 3 5
12
2-BR3x12
34 5-E6
2-B2x5
33 32
15 6
3
7 4
14
36 13
DETAIL C 6
6-E6
16 7
1
2 4
1
7 5-E6
6
1
6-E6
5
2 D
37
3 2
1 18
1 17
1
6-E6
2
19
1 2
71
1 B
2
9-E6
1
2 8
A
8
8-E6
C 9
10 DETAIL D
11 20
4-BR4x8 DETAIL A 26 3-E2
25 21
BR4x12 22
2-BR4x8
BR4x8
BR3x12
12 BR4x8
2-B3x6
27 24 23
FP7Z0B04.EPS
006-259-03
ソータ 4
SORTER 4 11D
D 2 322SF050 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 15 One-Way
D 3 388N2468A 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring 18 L=65.0
D 4 324N3133B タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 3
D 5 324N3187 タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 2
D 7 360N0339A ハウジング Housing 36
D 11 319N3768 軸 Shaft 3
D 12 341N1093 アーム Arm 1
D 13 319N3767 軸 Shaft 3
D 17 319N3765 軸 Shaft 6
D 20 319N3766 軸 Shaft 1
D 23 341N1087 アーム Arm 1
D 26 107Y0170/A ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLT5 - SOLT9
D 28 363Y0476A ガイド Guide Assembly 2
E 29 356N9321 センサ板 Sensor Plate 2
E 30 363N2534A ガイド板 Guide Plate 2
D 32 319N3771 軸 Shaft 4
D 34 316S3107 キャッチ Magnet Catch 2
D 35 350N2755A カバー Cover 2
E 36 363N2180A ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 37 824Y0111 ソレノイドアセンブリ Solenoid Assembly 5
D 38 146S0052/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 ST4, ST5
006-259-05
ソータ 5
11E SORTER 5
11
11 14
E4 E4
FP7Z0B15.EPS
10
2
12 12 1
B A
DETAIL A
2-BR
4x8
11 E4 DETAIL C 2-BR
4x8
13
B 2-BR
4x8
12
B 2-BR
DETAIL B 4x8
B
2-BR
4x8
2-BR4x8
3
B
B 2-BR4x8
B 2-BR4x8
2-BR4x8
2-BR4x8
2
7
C
E4
E4
D 1
E4 1
4
5
2-BR 6 DETAIL D
4x8 16
2-B4x10
E4
15
17
8
FP7Z0B05.EPS
006-259-03
ソータ 5
SORTER 5 11E
D 1 388N2469 引張りコイルばね Extension Spring 3 L=16.0
D 2 323S3190 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 2
D 3 323S3189 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1
D 4 324Y3021 タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 1
D 5 327Y0010 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 7 322SF041 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2
D 9 118SX164/A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MT1
D 11 324S3066A タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Wheel 9
006-259-05
ソータ 6
11F SORTER 6
14
FP7Z0B16.EPS
11
2-BR3x6
10
2-TP4x8 BR3x6
13
15 2-BR3x6
12
2-BR4x8
A 2-BR4x8
B 4-BR4x8
2
1
DETAIL A DETAIL C 5
9
DETAIL B
4 7
5-T4x6 8 FP7Z0B06.EPS
006-259-03
ソータ 6
SORTER 6 11F
D 1 365Y0005 レール Rail 1
E 2 823Y0006 連結部 Docking Plate 1 背面側/ Rear side
E 3 823Y0008 連結部 Docking Plate 1 前面側/ Front side
E 5 136Y8727/A ケーブル Cable 1 See Index 12
D 8 365S0037 レール Rail 1
E 9 136Y8728A/B ケーブル Cable 1 See Index 12
E 11 345N1661A 仕切り板 Partition 1
E 12 346N1249C 補助板 Support Plate 1
E 15 405N3030 銘板 Label 1
006-259-05
ソータ 7
11G SORTER 7
FP7Z0B17.EPS
4-B3x6
FP7Z0B07.EPS
006-259-03
ソータ 7
SORTER 7 11G
CR 1 113Y1613B ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SRT16A
006-259-03
ケーブル
12 CABLE
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. CONNECTION
DIAGRAM
E 1 136Y6871/A ケーブル Cable 1 For Sorter 11/11
E 2 136Y6873A/B ケーブル Cable 1 For Sorter 11/11
E 4 136Y8557C/D ケーブル Cable 1 1/11
E 5 136Y8560 ケーブル Cable 1 1/11, 8/11
E 6 136Y8566 ケーブル Cable 1 1/11
E 7 136Y8567C/D ケーブル Cable 1 2/11
E 8 136Y8575A ケーブル Cable 1 8/11
E 9 136Y8576B ケーブル Cable 1 8/11
E 10 136Y8577B ケーブル Cable 1 8/11
E 11 136Y8580C ケーブル Cable 1 10/11
E 12 136Y8597B ケーブル Cable 1 1/11
E 13 136Y8610A ケーブル Cable 1 3/11
E 14 136Y8611C ケーブル Cable 1 1/11
E 15 136Y8612A ケーブル Cable 1 9/11
E 16 136Y8613B ケーブル Cable 1 9/11
E 17 136Y8614B ケーブル Cable 1 10/11
E 18 136Y8615B ケーブル Cable 1 10/11
E 19 136Y8616B ケーブル Cable 1 5/11
E 20 136Y8617B ケーブル Cable 1 6/11
E 21 136Y8618B ケーブル Cable 1 10/11
E 22 136Y8619C ケーブル Cable 1 7/11
E 23 136Y8620A ケーブル Cable 1 7/11
E 24 136Y8621C ケーブル Cable 1 6/11
E 25 136Y8623B ケーブル Cable 1 10/11
For Sorter,
E 26 136Y8727/A ケーブル Cable 1 3/11, 11/11
See Index 11F
For Sorter,
E 27 136Y8728A/B ケーブル Cable 1 1/11, 11/11
See Index 11F
1/11, 2/11, 3/11,
E 30 858Y0316J/K ケーブル部 Cable 1 4/11, 5/11, 6/11,
7/11
E 31 858Y0317E ケーブル部 Cable 1 3/11, 9/11, 10/11
E 32 858Y0318F ケーブル部 Cable 1 1/11, 2/11, 3/11
006-259-08
接続図
CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM 13
006-259-06
接続図
13 CABLE CONNECTION DIAGRAM
4
1
1
006-259-06
接続図
006-259-06
接続図
006-259-06
接続図
006-259-06
接続図
006-259-06
接続図
006-259-06
接続図
006-259-06
接続図
006-259-06
接続図
006-259-06
接続図
006-259-06
部品番号検索表
14 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
PART NO. INDEX NO.-REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.-REF.NO. PART NO. INDEX NO.-REF.NO.
106S0029A/B 05C-4.1 128S0258 09B-9 146S0052/A 05A-8

106Y0012 05C-4.2 128S0723 11B-27 146S0052/A 05D-19
107Y0170/A 11C-28 128Y0299 02A-7 146S0052/A 09B-3
107Y0170/A 11D-26 136Y6871/A 12-1 146S0052/A 11C-39
107Y0179 03A-11 136Y6873A/B 12-2 146S0052/A 11D-38
107Y0180 03A-8 136Y6874/A 12-3 301N7000 10-19
107Y0181 11F-13 136Y8557C/D 12-4 308N0210 03A-31
113S0185/A/B 10-21 136Y8560 12-5 308N0212 02B-7
113S0185/A/B 10-22 136Y8566 12-6 308S0253 11A-19
113Y1531 09B-2 136Y8567C/D 12-7 308S0309A 03B-12
113Y1532B 09B-6 136Y8575A 12-8 309N0103 02B-6
113Y1600C/D/E 10-13 136Y8576B 12-9 309S0034 11B-4
113Y1601D/E/F/G/H 10-5 136Y8577B 12-10 309S0075 06-10
113Y1602G 10-16 136Y8580C 12-11 310N0684 08D-9
113Y1603G/H 10-6.1 136Y8597B 12-12 310N0684 08E-9
113Y1613B 11G-1 136Y8610A 12-13 310N0684 08F-9
113Y1614D/E 10-4 136Y8611C 12-14 310N0685 08D-8
113Y1617A 10-6.2 136Y8612A 12-15 310N0685 08E-8
114Y5396101A 10-3.1 136Y8613B 12-16 310N0685 08F-8
114Y5396105B 10-3.2 136Y8614B 12-17 310S6003024 03A-10
115N100002 08D-13 136Y8615B 12-18 313N1182 03A-28
115N100002 08E-13 136Y8616B 12-19 313N1204C 09B-17
115N100002 08F-13 136Y8617B 12-20 313N1213G 06-32
115Y0041A 02B-20 136Y8618B 12-21 313N1219C 08B-10
115Y0041A 08B-13 136Y8619C 12-22 313N1254 11B-9
117Y100017 08D-1 136Y8620A 12-23 313N1255 11B-1
117Y100018 08E-1 136Y8621C 12-24 313N1256 11B-20
117Y100018 08F-1 136Y8623B 12-25 313N1257 11C-9
118SX063/A 04A-16 136Y8727/A 11F-5 314N0065D 01A-11
118SX063/A 05D-20 136Y8727/A 12-26 314N0066D 02A-18
118SX162/A 08A-10 136Y8728A/B 11F-9 314N0067D 02A-17
118SX164/A 11E-9 136Y8728A/B 12-27 314N0068D 02A-16
118SX171/B/C 05B-2 136Y8729/A 12-28 316N0371 02A-12
118SX171/B/C 05B-6 136Y8730/A 12-29 316N0371 02B-16
118SX171/B/C 05C-3 137S1178 10-24 316N0372 02A-13
118SX171/B/C 05D-4 137S1277 10-25 316N0372 02B-17
118SX171/B/C 05D-22 137S1280 10-26 316N0377 02B-15
118SX171/B/C 09A-13 139S0091 09B-14 316N0436A 04B-10
118YX247B/D 06-2 139S0091 11B-29 316N0442A 06-19
119S0008/A/B 08C-3 146N0010/A 03A-3 316S1190 02B-13
119S0008/A/B 10-14 146S0029/A 03A-7 316S3047 05D-42
119Y0056 08C-2 146S0029/A 04B-15 316S3107 11C-34
119Y0057 10-23 146S0029/A 04B-21 316S3107 11D-34
125N0121C/D/E/F 10-2.1 146S0029/A 05B-7 316S3132 01A-15
125N0121G 10-2.2 146S0029/A 05D-18 316S3133 09B-15
128S0258 03A-4 146S0052/A 04B-19 316Y0043 04B-13
006-259-08
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE 14
317N1053A/B 01A-29 322N1003 05E-22 327N0186B 05D-29

318S1078 11B-5 322N1003 08B-8 327N1081801A 08D-5
318S1078 11C-13 322N1004 04A-2 327N1081801A 08E-5
318S1078 11D-8 322N1004 05D-12 327N1081801A 08F-5
318S1232 08C-6 322N1004 05E-18 327N1081802A 05B-1
318S1232 10-20 322N1004 09A-7 327N1082601B 08A-5
318S3161 11B-19 322N1006C 05A-11 327N1083502B 08B-5
319N3765 11C-19 322N1028A 05D-45 327N1101502 05D-31
319N3765 11D-17 322NF006 08D-3 327N1101605A 08A-8
319N3766 11C-22 322NF006 08E-3 327N1101805 11E-6
319N3766 11D-20 322NF006 08F-3 327N1101806B 04A-18
319N3767 11C-16 322NY156 08B-7 327N1101807B 08B-6
319N3767 11D-13 322SF002 11E-12 327N1101809 05C-1
319N3768 11C-14 322SF012 08A-6 327N1101809 05D-24
319N3768 11D-11 322SF017 11E-17 327N1102014A 04A-10
319N3771 11C-32 322SF041 11E-7 327N1102014A 05C-5
319N3771 11D-32 322SF050 11C-5 327N1102014A 05E-27
319N3910A 08A-2 322SF050 11D-2 327N1102022A 05D-27
319N3911A 09A-1 322SF061 06-24 327N1102707 08B-2
319N3912A 09A-6 322SF227 06-12 327N1103101B 04A-17
319N3913C 04A-15 322SY054 03A-1 327N1103501 04A-11
319N3919A 03B-5 322SY055 06-21 327N1103501 05D-35
319N3920C 06-5 322SY122 05E-16 327N1103501 05E-23
319N3923A 05B-10 322SY165 11C-4 327N1105401 04A-20
319N3925A 05D-5 322SY165 11D-1 327N1105401 05D-37
319N3926A 05D-1 322SY223 04B-7 327N1106101 05D-39
319N3927A 05A-1 322SY223 09A-16 327N1106101 05E-24.1
319N3928B 05A-17 322SY287 03A-17 327N1106101 05E-24.2
319N3928B 05E-12 322SY287 03B-18 327N1106101 05E-24.3
319N3929A 05E-20 323N1244 06-20 327N1106402A 08A-11
319N3930 09A-11 323S3189 11E-3 327N1107204B 04A-8
319N3934A 05D-2 323S3190 11E-2 327N1108001A 08A-7
319N3935D 05C-7 324N1026A 11E-16 327N1121608A 09A-10
319N3953 03A-22 324N3127A 11C-3 327N1122006 09A-12
319N3953 03B-16 324N3127A 11D-6 327N1123202A 09A-9
319N3954 03A-18 324N3133B 11C-2 327Y0010 11E-5
319N3955 03B-14 324N3133B 11D-4 327Y0011 08A-1
319N4000 11B-23 324N3187 11D-5 329N0154C 05D-7
319N4032 06-33 324S3066A 11E-11 332N0600 01A-4
319N4187A 05D-28 324Y3021 11E-4 332N0612 04B-3
319Y1168 05D-3 327N0178A 04A-4 332N0617 11C-36
322N0048 05A-15 327N0180B 05D-21 332N0617 11D-27
322N0048 05D-34 327N0182A 05D-38 334N0072C 09A-19
322N1003 04A-7 327N0183A 05D-25 334N1177A 03A-19
322N1003 05C-6 327N0184A 05D-33 334N1182 03A-23
322N1003 05D-8 327N0185A 05D-32 334N1182 03B-17
006-259-08
334N1183 03B-15 341N1033B 04B-23.1 345Y0298 03A-29

334N1186 05A-10 341N1034 04A-9 345Y0300A 01B-10
334N2348 06-35 341N1035A 04A-5 346N1209A 03A-15
334N2348 09A-2 341N1036B 04B-23.2 346N1212A 04B-6
334N2368A 11C-15 341N1037B 06-23 346N1246B 04B-17
334N2368A 11C-17 341N1038A 05D-6 346N1247B 09A-17
334N2368A 11C-20 341N1042C 05C-11 346N1249C 11F-12
334N2368A 11D-10 341N1043C 05C-9 346N1257B 06-1
334N2368A 11D-14 341N1044D 05C-8 346N1258A 02B-3
334N2368A 11D-18 341N1055C 05D-30 346N1271 08A-18
334N2380 04A-13 341N1086 11B-15 346N1272 08A-17
334N2381B 05E-7 341N1087 11C-25 346N1296 06-34
334N2382C 05D-44 341N1087 11D-23 346N7004B 09B-13
334N3517 11C-18 341N1088 11B-7 347N0339 09B-16
334N3517 11D-15 341N1089 11B-18 347N0636 06-27
334N3518 11C-21 341N1093 11B-3 347N1623 02B-14
334N3518 11D-16 341N1093 11D-12 347N1737A 11A-16
334N3558A 08D-6 341Y0316 06-28 347N1738A 11A-15
334N3558A 08E-6 341Y0317 04B-2.1 347N1825A 05A-26
334N3558A 08F-6 341Y0318 04B-2.2 347N1826A 05A-14
334N3560 08B-1 343N0040 11B-8 347N1827 02B-1
334N3561A 09A-3 343N0041 11B-17 347N1830 02B-5
334N3562B 04A-14 343N0051A 03A-9 347N1861 11A-5
334N3565C 04A-12 343N0053C 03B-23 347S0117/A 08A-12
334N3566A 05D-9.1 343N0054B 01B-9 347S0283/A 05D-14
334N3566A 05E-6 345F0606A 02A-4 347S0283/A 06-31
334N3567A 05D-10 345N1481 01A-7 347S0283/A 08A-14
334N3569C 05C-13 345N1633E/F 01A-2 347S0329/A 10-27
334N3605 06-11 345N1634C 02A-2 347S0390/A 08C-4
334N3609B 05E-28 345N1635E 01A-6 348Y0196 08D-2
334N3610/A 05D-9.2 345N1638A 05D-40 348Y0196 08E-2
334Y0092 08B-3 345N1638A 05E-25 348Y0196 08F-2
334Y0093 08B-4 345N1639 02A-27 348Y0197 08D-7
334Y3202C 06-3 345N1640G 02A-3 348Y0197 08E-7
334Y3203C 06-9 345N1641B 04A-1 348Y0197 08F-7
334Y3210A 05C-15 345N1646B 03B-9 350N2059A/B/C 01A-20
337N0038 06-25 345N1646B 03B-11 350N2059A/B/C 01B-8
338N0464/A 09A-4 345N1647A 06-6 350N2059A/B/C 11A-2
338N0468/A 09A-5 345N1649B 02A-5 350N2631C 08D-10
338N0505 09A-15 345N1652A 05D-41 350N2631C 08E-10
339N0022A 05D-13 345N1652A 05E-26 350N2631C 08F-10
339N0022A 08A-13 345N1653C 02A-1 350N2635C 08B-12
339N0025 06-30 345N1660B 01A-10 350N2636A 08B-11
340D775280 05D-26 345N1661A 11F-11 350N2646C 06-29
340N0168A 11B-24 345N1662A 02A-26 350N2650D/E/F/G 01B-11
340Y0037A 03B-10 345N1673 09B-12 350N2651D/E/F 01A-21
006-259-08
350N2653D/E 01A-1.1 356N8962 02A-9 356N9090 06-15

350N2653D/E 01A-1.2 356N8964B 05C-2 356N9092 05A-16
350N2656B 01A-8 356N8967A 05D-15 356N9234A 04B-20
350N2658B/C 01B-6 356N8968A 05A-22 356N9305 11F-6
350N2660B/C 01B-7 356N8968A 05E-4 356N9306 11F-7
350N2661B/C 01B-2 356N8969C 05A-23 356N9307 11A-3
350N2662B/C 01B-5 356N8970C 05B-5 356N9308 11A-20
350N2663C/D 01B-3 356N8975C 05A-7 356N9309 11A-21
350N2664B/C 09B-11 356N8991B 08A-15 356N9311 11B-25
350N2666D 01A-19 356N8993 02B-19 356N9312 11B-26
350N2668D 01B-1 356N8994B 01B-4 356N9313 11B-13
350N2671B 06-13 356N9003B 01A-12 356N9314 11B-21
350N2690A 08C-10 356N9004B 01A-16 356N9315 11C-23
350N2696 05B-12 356N9006A 01A-13 356N9315 11D-21
350N2716A 06-7 356N9007C 01A-14 356N9316 11E-13
350N2736 03B-31 356N9010B 04B-22 356N9317 11E-10
350N2737 03B-32 356N9012A 03A-20 356N9318 11E-15
350N2749/A 11A-4 356N9013 03A-21 356N9319 11E-14
350N2750 11A-9 356N9014A 04B-16 356N9320 11C-10
350N2751 11A-1 356N9021B 05E-21.1 356N9321 11C-38
350N2752/A 11A-8 356N9021B 05E-21.2 356N9321 11D-29
350N2753 11A-10 356N9022A 05B-13 356N9322 11B-30
350N2754 11C-11 356N9023B 03A-13 356N9323 11B-16
350N2755 11C-35 356N9025D 09B-10 356N9327 08A-16
350N2755A 11D-35 356N9026B 05C-14 356N9533 03A-33
350N2848 05D-43 356N9027A 05E-9 356N9660A 05D-17
350Y100426 08D-11 356N9028A 05E-13 356Y0269 03A-2
350Y100427 08E-11 356N9029A 05E-14 356Y0272D 03A-6
350Y100428 08F-11 356N9034B 08C-9 356Y0273 04B-1
350Y1673A 01B-14 356N9062A 10-9 356Y0286 05A-4
350Y1684 01A-18 356N9063B 10-11 356Y0287A 05C-12
352N0597 11B-11 356N9064A 10-12 356Y0288 05E-11
355N0665D 03A-14 356N9065A 10-18 357N1444D 06-8
355Y0216B 03A-26 356N9066 10-17 357N1445C 06-14
356N8152 11C-26 356N9070B 08C-8 357N1457D 10-8
356N8152 11D-24 356N9071C 08C-5 357N1472B 06-36
356N8704A 03A-24 356N9072 08C-7 357S0016 11B-10
356N8705A 03A-27 356N9075 05D-36 359Y0059 03B-1
356N8945A 09B-5 356N9076 05D-16 360N0339A 11C-6
356N8946A 09A-14 356N9080A 05B-3 360N0339A 11D-7
356N8947A 08A-9 356N9080A 05D-23 360N0474C 02A-14
356N8949A 04A-21 356N9084 02B-9 362N0716B 05C-16
356N8950A 04A-6 356N9085 05B-11 362N0743 11A-7
356N8951B 04A-19 356N9087 02B-21 362N0744 11A-6
356N8956C 06-17 356N9087 08B-14 362Y0105 11A-18
356N8958A 03A-25 356N9089A 05B-4 363N2180A 11D-36
006-259-08
363N2181 11C-7 363Y0359 11D-19 382N1604 03A-30

363N2182 11C-8 363Y0360 11D-9 385N0065A 11A-17
363N2368A 09B-8 363Y0445 05A-6 385N0078 11A-22
363N2373B 03B-8 363Y0458 03B-19 386N1153A 05E-17
363N2374A 03B-4 363Y0476 11C-29 386N1164A 03B-28
363N2406C/D 09B-4 363Y0476A 11D-28 386N1165A 03B-29
363N2407C 09A-18 363Y0491 05E-29 386N1166A 03B-30
363N2408C/D 11F-10 363Y0497 05A-29 386N1167A 03B-27
363N2412G/H 08A-4 364N0096 05C-17 386N1168 03B-26
363N2416C/D 06-18 364N0124 01B-17 386N1169 01A-23
363N2419A 03B-3 364N0125 01B-16 386N1171A 01A-22
363N2420A 03B-2 364S0005 08C-1 386N1602 01A-24
363N2421A 03B-20 364S0005 10-15 386S0015 06-16
363N2423C 05B-8 365N0093/ 386S0060 11B-22
363N2424B/C 05A-25 365N0106/A 03A-16 386S0060 11F-4
363N2425B/C 05A-27 365S0037 11F-8 386S0080 11E-8
363N2428A/B 05A-20 365Y0005 11F-1 386S0083 11C-27
363N2428A/B 05E-5 366N0057A 04B-14 386S0083 11D-25
363N2431B 05E-1 366N0058C 01A-17 387N0133 11B-2
363N2432B 05A-19 366S0006 11B-28 387N0165 08B-9
363N2432B 05E-2 366S0011 03A-5 387N0165 09B-7
363N2433B 05A-18 367N1007 02A-10 388N1073 06-26
363N2433B 05E-3 367N1007 02B-18 388N1212 04B-8
363N2433B 09B-1 367S2040 11B-14 388N2108A 09A-8
363N2435B 05A-24 367S2059 02A-11 388N2384 04A-3
363N2437B 05A-9 367Y1006 11B-12 388N2384 05D-11
363N2442C 04B-18 371N0123A 04B-11 388N2384 05E-19
363N2451C/D 08A-3 375N0078 02B-22 388N2425 06-22
363N2453B 02A-6 375N0095 04B-9 388N2467 11B-6
363N2453B 02A-8 376N0229B 01A-9 388N2468A 11C-1
363N2455B 05E-8 376N0238 01B-15 388N2468A 11D-3
363N2456A 03B-13 382N1463A 03B-21 388N2469 11E-1
363N2469A 03B-6 382N1540A 02A-21 388N2470 11C-24
363N2470 03B-7 382N1541A 02A-19 388N2470 11D-22
363N2473 02B-23 382N1541A 02B-10 388N2513 03A-12
363N2502B 05C-18 382N1542A 02A-20 388N2541 11F-14
363N2534 11C-30 382N1543B 02A-23 388N2559 05C-10
363N2534A 11D-30 382N1544A 02B-11 388N3084 11C-31
363N2547B 05A-21 382N1545A 02B-2 388N3084 11D-31
363N2552A 05E-10 382N1558B 02A-22 388N3085 11C-33
363N2553 05A-5 382N1559B 02A-25 388N3085 11D-33
363N2555A 05A-12 382N1560A 02B-12 388N3090A 05A-3
363N2556A 05A-13 382N1561A 02A-24 388N3091A 05A-2
363S0012 10-10 382N1599 01A-28 388N3096A 05E-15
363S0014 10-7 382N1602 03A-34 388N5349C 02B-8
363Y0359 11C-12 382N1603 03B-25 388N5359 03B-33
006-259-08
388N5360 03A-32 858Y0316J/K 12-30

390N0035 04B-12 858Y0317E 12-31
392N0012/A/B 04B-4 858Y0318F 12-32
393N0011 01A-3 890N0005 11A-11
398Y0064 01B-12 899Y0260 01A-5
401N0842B 05B-9
401N0846 02B-4
402N0020A 04B-5
405N2579 11A-13
405N2601 11A-14
405N2972 03B-24.1
405N2973 03B-24.2
405N2974 03B-24.3
405N2975 03B-24.4
405N2976 03B-24.5
405N2977 03B-24.6
405N2978 03B-24.9
405N2979 03B-24.10
405N2980 01B-13
405N3006 03B-24.7
405N3007 03B-24.8
405N3008 08A-19
405N3008 09B-18
405N3010A 01A-25
405N3011 01A-26
405N3012 01A-27
405N3013 11A-12
405N3028A 05A-28
405N3030 11F-15
405N3132 05A-30
405N3433 03B-34
405N3434 03B-35
405Y0182 03B-24.11
603N0228 08C-11
603N0230A 03B-22
802Y0111 08D-12
802Y0112A 08E-12
802Y0112A 08F-12
815Y0058 06-4
823Y0006 11F-2
823Y0008 11F-3
824Y0111 11C-37
824Y0111 11D-37
839Y0056A 07-1
845Y0094B/C 10-1
852N0025E/F 02A-15
006-259-08
TABLE OF SCREWS/
15 WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS
TABLE OF SCREWS/WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS
Indication Symbol in the
No. Part name disassembly Size Shape
symbols chart (example)
1 Cross-recessed flat-head screw S S3 x 10 M3 x 10 1. 2.
2 Cross-recessed truss-head screw T * T4 x 8 M4 x 8 Flat-head screw Truss-head screw

S T
Cross-recessed pan-head screw 3. 4.

3 A A3 x 6 M3 x 6
with spring washer
Pan-head screw with Pan-head screw with
spring washer spring and plain washers
Cross-recessed pan-head screw A B
4 B B3 x 16 M3 x 16
with spring and plain washers
5. 6.
5 Pan-head screw N N3 x 6 N3 x 6 Pan-head screw Hexagon-headed bolt

N R
6 Hexagon-headed bolt R R12 x 20 R12 x 20
7. 8.
Cross-recessed hexagon-headed Hexagon-headed screw Bolt with hexagon hole

7 BR BR4 x 25 M4 x 25
screw with spring and plain with spring and plain Q
washers washers
BR
8 Bolt with hexagon hole Q Q3 x 20 M3 x 20
9. 10.
Bolt with hexagon hole with Bolt with hexagon hole Deltight
9 BQ BQ4 x 10 M4 x 10
spring and plain washers with spring and plain
DT
washers
Nominal BQ
10 Deltight *1) DT DT4 x 8 diameter
4x8
11. 12.
11 Hexagon hole setscrew WP WP4 x 6 M4 x 6 Hexagon hole Hexagon nut

setscrew Na
WP
(double-point) WP4 x 8 M4 x 8
13. 14.
12 Hexagon nut Na Na3 M3 Plain washer Spring washer

W SW
13 Plain washer W W4 M4
15.
14 Spring washer SW SW3 M3
E ring
15 E ring E E6 Nominal E
diameter 6
*1): Top end non-circular self-tapping screw

* : Stainless-made FP5Z0D01.EPS
006-259-03
LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS 16
LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS
No. Part name Shape
1 Fixing plug
1. 2. 3.
2 Binding band
Fixing plug Binding band N. K. clamp
3 N.K. clamp
4. 5.
4 Edging
5 Edge saddle Edging Edge saddle
FP5Z0D02.EPS
006-259-03
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

PM-1
CONTROL SHEET

11/10/2002 01 Revised (FM3601) 1-3, 5-8, 11, 12, 14, 15, 18, 19, 22-41
04/01/2003 02 Revised (FM3978) 1, 11, 13, 16, 17, 20, 28, 39, 40
09/20/2004 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1-5, 7, 41-43
A08, etc.)(FM4447)
11/30/2005 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 22, 38, 39, 41
(FM4690)
006-259-06
07.31.2006 FM4949 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual PM-1
PM-2
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS

<INSTRUCTIONS>
1.1 List of Preventive Maintenance Items

Refer to Maintenance Work Intervals Work time Remarks

(Min.)
Power ON 15 Power switch
Starting the M-Utility – Start during initialization
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs 1Y 5 M-Utility (Log Files)
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking 1Y 5

Images
• Grid patterns (Output Film)
• Check density (F. D. C.)
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 1Y 10
• Jam clear cover (MJ1)
• Front cover (MD1, Check Scanner)
• Film tray (Other actuators, MD1)
• Sorter (Motor MT1)
3.4 Checking the Fan Operations 1Y 1 (Fan operation, Board FAN)
Ending the M-Utility – –
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery 1Y 5 Check lock state
• Checking the traylock Check for shaking
• Checking the traylock mechanism –
Power OFF – –
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller, 1Y 5 Clean with ethanol after washing
Removing the Cover (3Y) Replace every three years.
TP7M0101.EPS
006-259-05
PM-3

(Min.)
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing Filters 1Y 5 Replace if dirty
• Lower front cover filter Vacuum cleaner
• Filter section cooling fan assembly filter (3Y) Vacuum cleaner

(Replacement time is every
three years, but replace earlier if
dirt cannot be removed)
• Louver Vacuum cleaner
Reinstalling filters –
3.8 Cleaning Inside the Equipment 1Y 5 Cleaning cloth, vacuum cleaner
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the SUS Belt, Cleaning 3Y 5 Clean with ethanol

Sub-scanning conveyance roller
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section 1Y 3 Clean with ethanol using cotton
swab
Removing the cooling fan assembly 5 –
Removing the film release unit 5 –
Removing the film cooling section 5 –
3.11 Cleaning the Heat development Unit 1Y 80 –
• Heat plate Clean with ethanol
• Rubber roller Clean with ethanol
• Heat development unit periphery Vacuum cleaner
Installing the heat development rack 20 –

assembly, film cooling section, film release
unit, cooling fan assembly
3.12 Greasing 6Y 5 EM-30L
3.13 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers 1Y 5 –
• Reinstalling covers –
• Reinstalling the cleaning roller –
• Cleaning covers Wet cloth
Power ON – Power switch
3.14 Checking the DC Voltage 1Y 5 Tester
Reinstalling the lower front cover 1 –
Starting the M-Utility – M-Utility

TP7M0102.EPS
006-259-04
PM-4

(Min.)
3.15 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images 1Y 15 –
• MD1 operation (Applying EM-30L) (MD1)
• Grid patterns (Output Film)
• AUTO F. D. C. (F. D. C.)
• Check Density (F. D. C.)
3.16 Setting Date and Time 1Y 1 (Set Date/time)
Power OFF – –
3.17 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding 1Y 1 –
3.18 Work Completion Report – –

TP7M0103.EPS
■ Sorter
Clean the sorter once every year or when dirty.
006-259-04
PM-5
1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle

In this chapter, the following symbols are indicated for every maintenance item.
Before beginning the respective maintenance work, be sure to confirm the cycle
indicated by the symbols.
Maintenance to be performed every year.

1Y
Maintenance to be performed every three years.

3Y
Maintenance to be performed every four years or more.

6Y
1.3 Precautions on Periodic Maintenance

CAUTION
Do not clean the barcode reader filter attached to the film tray using ethanol, as the filter
will be damaged with time if the ethanol penetrates inside.
006-259-05
PM-6
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW
START
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller, Removing the Cover
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing Filters
3.8 Cleaning the Suction Cup, Cleaning Inside the Equipment
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the SUS Belt, Cleaning Sub-scanning

Conveyance Roller
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit
3.12 Greasing
3.13 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers
A
FP7M0201.EPS
006-259-03
PM-7
3.15 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images
3.16 Setting Date and Time
3.17 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding
3.18 Work Completion Report
END
FP7M0202.EPS
006-259-04
PM-8
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs

Check whether errors have occurred using the M-Utility. If errors have 1Y
occurred, correct them appropriately. If necessary, save the error logs
in the internal HD of the equipment, and delete those error logs.
■ Procedure
● Checking Error Logs

(2) Start the M-utility during initialization.
(3) [System Management] → [Log Files] → [Display Error Log]
→ The error log window appears.
<REMARKS>
The following shows an example of the error log display.
To correct the errors, refer to “TROUBLESHOOTING, 2.3 List of Error Codes” for meanings of
error codes, suspected causes, and remedies. To analyze error codes, refer to detailed
information on errors in “TROUBLESHOOTING, 2.2 Detailed Information on Error Codes”.
(4) Refer to each error code displayed to confirm if serious errors have occurred.
(5) [QUIT]
006-259-03
PM-9
● Saving Error Logs

(1) [System Management] → [Log Files] → [Store Log Files]
(2) [Store]
→ The corresponding file is saved in the HD.
(3) [QUIT]
<REMARKS>
● Deleting Error Logs

(1) [System Management] → [Log Files] → [Clear]
(2) [YES]
→ Clears all log data.
(3) [TOP]
→ Returns to the M-Utility top menu.
006-259-03
PM-10
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images

Print from each film tray using the M-Utility (grid pattern, 17-steps pattern), 1Y
and check the recorded image format, density correction function, and there
are no unevenness on the images and scratches. Also check that the mechanism
and conveyor system are operating normally during film conveyance.
■ Procedure
● Printing Grid Pattern

Print grid pattern from each film tray, and check the operations of the mechanism
system and conveyor system, recorded image format, and also check for unevenness
and scratches on the images.
(2) [Output Film] → [Grid] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT]
(3) Select Dmax → [ENT]
(4) [Copies]: “1” → [ENT]
(5) Check the following.
• If there are abnormal sounds and smell from the equipment.
• If film jam has occurred.
• If the format of the recorded image is correct.
• If there are unevenness on the images and scratches.
(6) Perform the same checks for each tray.
006-259-05
PM-11

20 direction 20 20 direction 20
B D C E A B D C E A
F G
257.5 ±1.0
F G
430.0 ±1.0
364.5 ±1.0
354.0 ±1.0

direction direction
20 20 20 20
B D C E A B D C E A
F G F G
252.0 ±1.0 252.0 ±1.0
201.0 ±1.0 303.0 ±1.0
(Unit: mm)
|A-B| ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤2.0 ≤1.2
C 300 ±1.2 300 ±1.2 200 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0
|D-E| ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.0 ±1.0 200 ±0.8
|F-G| ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
FP7B0705.EPS
006-259-03
PM-12
● 17-steps Pattern
Print 17-steps patterns from each film tray, and check the density according to tone
type (Dmax.).
(1) [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT]
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is displayed on
the operation panel.
(3) Note down the 17-steps data displayed on the operation panel.
(4) Check that the value noted down is within the specified values shown below. If
Dmax setting is set to “4.0 : enable”, check that the density of the 17th step is
above 4.0.

1 fog fog fog fog
4 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05
5 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05
6 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05
7 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05
8 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05
9 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05
10 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05
11 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05
12 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05
13 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05
14 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07
15 2.28 ±0.07 2.40 ±0.10 2.40 ±0.10 2.43 ±0.10
16 2.46 ±0.07 2.70 ±0.10 2.70 ±0.10 2.95 ±0.10
17 2.64 ±0.07 3.00 ±0.10 3.30 ±0.20 3.60 ±0.20
TP7B0701.EPS
006-259-06
PM-13

An interlock is provided at the jam clear cover (SK1), front cover (SK2, SK3), 1Y
and each film loading unit (SA12, SA22, SA32).
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening a
cover while executing the M-Utility.
SA12 SK1
SA22
SK2
SA32
SK3
FP7B0701.EPS
● Checking the Jam Clear Cover Interlock

(1) [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] → [MJ1]
(2) [Action]: [CW]
(3) [Speed]: [High Speed] → [ENT]
→ The MJ1 drives.
(4) Open the jam clear cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MJ1 stops.
(5) Close the jam clear cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MJ1 can be heard.
(6) [Action]: [STOP] → [ENT]
(7) Touch [QUIT] to return to the top menu of M-Utility.
006-259-03
PM-14
● Checking the Front Cover Interlock
❍ Driving System
(1) [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] → [MD1]
(2) [Action]: [CW]
→ The MD1 drives.
(4) Open the front cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MD1 stops.
(5) Close the front cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MD1 can be heard.
❍ Scanner System
CAUTION
Do not place anything which reflects light (screwdriver, etc.) in the equipment when
checking interlock functions.
(1) [Check Scanner] → [Diagnosis] → [Initial Check]

The scanner self-diagnosis is executed, and if it ends normally, the
message “Completed.” will be displayed. (Takes about 30 seconds)
(2) [QUIT]
(4) [Initial Check]
The self-diagnosis of the scanner is executed, and the message “Failed”
appears with error code. This allows the interlock function to be checked if
it is normal. (Takes about 15 seconds)
(5) [Top]
006-259-03
PM-15
● Checking the Film Tray Interlocks

<NOTE>
The procedure for checking the interlock is the same for all film trays. For film tray 2, replace
[SOLA11] in the following procedure as [SOLA21], and for film tray 3, replace it as
[SOLA31].Check the interlock of all film trays.

(2) [Check Mechanism] → [Other Actuators] → [SOLA11]
(3) [Action]: [ON] → [ENT]
(4) Pull out the film tray.
(5) [Action]: [OFF] → [ENT]
(8) [Action]: [CW]
Check that no operating sound of the MD1 can be heard.
(10) Close the film tray.
Check that operating sound of the MD1 can be heard.
(12) pull out the shutter.
■ Checking the Sorter Interlock

Separate the sorter while executing the M-Utility, and check the interlock function.
(1) [Check Mechanism] → [Sorter Unit] → [Motor MT1]
→ The MT1starts driving.
(3) Pull the sorter release lever to release the sorter.
Check that the operating sound of MD1 stops.
(4) Connect the sorter to the printer.
006-259-03
PM-16
3.4 Checking Fan Operations

Altogether operations of five fans need to be checked. 1Y

(FANG1-3)
Power supply
unit fan
Ventilation fan
(FANK1)
FP7B0702.EPS
(1) [Heat-Developer] → [Temp. Control] → [OFF] → [ENT]

(2) [QUIT]
(3) [Fan Operation]
(4) [Group]: [Group A] → [ENT]
→ The FANG1 and FANG3 start rotating.
Check the operation and wind direction of the FANG1 and FANG3.
(6) [Action]: [intermittent] → [ENT] → [QUIT]
(7) [Group]: [Group B] → [ENT]

→ The FANG2 starts rotating.
Check the operations and wind direction of the FANG2.
(9) [Action]: [intermittent] → [ENT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT]
(10) [Temp. Control] → [ON] → [ENT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT]
006-259-03
PM-17
(11) [Check Mechanism] → [Other] → [Board FAN]

→ The FANK1 starts rotating.
Check the operations and wind direction of the FANK1 and power supply
unit fan.
(13) [intermittent] → [ENT] → [QUIT]
(15) End the M-Utility.
006-259-03
PM-18
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery

Check the traylock and traylock mechanism. 1Y
■ Procedure
(2) Check that when the film tray is locked, it cannot be pulled out to the front.
(3) Move the film tray to and fro, and check that it does not shake. At the same time,
check that the film tray interlock function does not function due to shaking of the
film tray when attaching it.
006-259-03
PM-19
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller,

Removing the Cover 1Y 3Y
Inspect the cleaning roller, wash away dirt with water, and clean with absolute
ethanol.
<NOTE>
Replace the cleaning roller every three years.
■ Procedure
(1) Remove the cleaning roller.
#3
[Remove]
Cleaning roller
#2 #1
[Pull out] Holder [Lower] Lever
#5 #4
[Insert] Holder [Lower] Lever
FP7M0301.EPS
(2) Wash the cleaning roller removed using water or warm water.
(3) Wipe the cleaning roller dry with a dry cloth.
(4) Clean the cleaning roller with a cloth moistened adequately with absolute ethanol.
Wiping with absolute ethanol helps vaporize the water remaining on the cleaning roller.
(5) With the cleaning roller inserted into the holder, leave to dry completely until the
end of preventive maintenance.
(6) Remove all covers.
006-259-03
PM-20
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing Filters

Clean and replace the louver attached to the air filter of the front lower 1Y 3Y
cover, heat development unit filter, rear cover, and left cover.
<NOTE>
• Check if the filter is dirty. If dirty, replace the filter.
• Replace the heat development unit filter every three years.
■ Procedure
(1) Remove the lower front cover. Clean the filter attached to the lower front cover
using a vacuum cleaner.
8-BR3x8
Lower front cover FP7M0313.EPS
(2) Clean the filter of the heat development unit cooling assembly using a vacuum
cleaner.
If dirt cannot be removed by cleaning, replace earlier than three years.
Filter
FP7M0305.EPS
(3) Install the filter of the heat development unit cooling assembly.
006-259-03
PM-21
(4) Remove the louver installed to the rear cover and left cover, and clean with a
vacuum cleaner.
Louver
FP7M0306.EPS
(5) Reinstall the louver.
006-259-03
PM-22
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside the

Equipment 1Y
Clean the suction cup and rubber roller of the removal unit, and clean inside the
equipment.
CAUTION
Do not clean the barcode reader filter attached to the film tray using ethanol, as the filter
will be damaged with time if the ethanol penetrates inside.
■ Procedure
● Cleaning the Removal Unit

Clean the removal unit from behind the equipment.
(1) Release the tray lock manually, and pull out the film tray.
(2) Move the suction cup arm with the hand to a location where it can be cleaned
easily.
(3) Clean the suction cup and removal conveyance rollers (upper/lower) with a cloth
moistened with water.
Removal conveyance
roller (lower)
Removal conveyance
roller (upper)
Suction cup
FP7M0328.EPS
● Cleaning Inside the Equipment

(1) Remove the dusts and dirt in the equipment such as frame, mechanism unit, and
inside the controller section, etc. with a cleaning cloth or vacuum cleaner, etc.
(2) Check the inside of the mechanism unit visually, and clean if dirty.
006-259-05
PM-23
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the SUS Belt, Cleaning Sub-

scanning Conveyance Roller 3Y
Check and clean the SUS belt, and clean the sub-scanning conveyance rollers.
■ Procedure
(1) Remove the belt cover of the sub-scanning unit.
#3
[Remove] BR4x8
#4
[Remove] Belt cover
#1
[Remove] BR3x10
#2
[Remove] Handle
FP7M0307.EPS
(2) Clean the SUS belt with a cloth moistened with absolute ethanol.
<NOTE>
Do not bend or scratch the SUS belt as it will affect the recorded images.
SUS belt
FP7M0308.EPS
(3) Reinstall the belt cover.

006-259-03
PM-24
(4) Remove the sub-scanning unit fixing brackets.
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
FP7C0613.EPS
(5) Attach the sub-scanning unit fixing brackets at the position shown below.
#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
Sub-scanning unit
fixing bracket
#1
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
Sub-scanning unit
fixing bracket
FP7C0614.EPS
006-259-03
PM-25

(8) Remove the sub-scanning unit
(8)#1
LDD16A-CN1
(8)#1
LDD16A-CN3
(8)#1
LDD16A-CN7
Shield plate (8)#1
(6)#1 (7)#1 LDD16A-CN9
Connector cover FP7M0322.EPS
(8)#2
[Disconnect]
Connector ME1
(8)#2
[Disconnect]
Connector CNS2
(8)#3
[Remove] 2-BR4x8
(8)#4
[Pull] Sub-scanning unit FP7M0323.EPS
006-259-03
PM-26
(9) Clean the sub-scanning unit conveyance rollers with a cloth moistened with
ethanol.
Sub-scanning unit
conveyance roller
FP7M0325.EPS
(10) Return the sub-scanning unit to its original position.

#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
#2
[Tighten] 2-BR4x8
#1

FP7M0324.EPS
(12) Remove the sub-scanning unit fixing brackets, and reinstall them to its original
position.
CAUTION
When removing the sub-scanning unit fixing brackets, be careful never remove the
006-259-03
PM-27
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section

Clean the density measurement section light-receiving surface. 1Y
■ Procedure
(1) Remove the ejection cover.
(2) Remove the film release unit upper guide bracket.
#2
[Remove] 2-BR3x8
Film release unit

upper guide bracket
Ejection cover
#1
[Remove] BR3x8
FP7M0309.EPS
(3) Clean the light-receiving surface of the PDD board with a cotton swab moistened
with absolute ethanol.
Light-receiving surface
FP7M0310.EPS
(4) Reinstall the film release unit upper guide bracket, and ejection cover.
006-259-03
PM-28
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit

Clean the heat development unit heat plate and rubber roller. 1Y
CAUTION
Because the heat plate inside the heat development rack assembly is very hot, wait
more than 60 minutes after turning OFF the power of the equipment before cleaning to
allow the heat plate to cool down completely.
■ Procedure
(1) Remove the film release unit and film cooling section.
“REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT, 9.1 Film Release Unit”, “REMOVAL AND
ADJUSTMENT, 8.3 Film Cooling Section”
(2) Remove the cooling fan assembly from the heat development unit together with
the bracket.

#2
[Disconnect] 2-BR3x8
Bracket
Bracket
#3
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
#1
FP7C0823.EPS
006-259-03
PM-29

Left inside cover
[Remove] 2-BR3x8
FP7M0320.EPS
(4) Remove the heat development racks in order from the third rack to the first rack.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
If the fixing pins in front and at the rear of the heat development rack assembly are
removed, the roller assembly will drop when the heat development rack assembly is
removed. Therefore remove the heat development rack assembly without removing the
fixing pins.
#2 #2
[Disconnect] Connector [Disconnect] Connector
THG7-9, 4-6, 1-3 HEAT3, 2, 1
#4 [Remove]
Rack fixing bracket
(small) x4
#3
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
Fixing pin #1
[Remove] TP4x8
#6
[Remove] Heat development
#5 rack assembly
[Remove] 2-BR4x8
Rack fixing bracket
(large) FP7M0321.EPS
006-259-03
PM-30
(5) Remove the adiabatic cover and heater assembly from the heat development
rack assembly.
(6) Clean the heat plate and rubber roller with a cloth moistened with ethanol.
#3
[Remove] Heater assembly #2
[Remove] Pins (long) x 2
#4
[Clean] Heat plate
#5
#1 [Clean] Rubber roller
[Remove] Pins (Short) x 2
FP7M0312.EPS
(7) Assemble the heat development rack assembly.

<NOTE>
When installing the adiabatic cover, make sure that the cables do not get caught.
(8) Clean the periphery of the heat development unit of this equipment with a vacuum
cleaner.
(9) Reinstall the heat development rack assembly to the heat development unit.
<NOTE>
Make sure that the thermistor cable is not damaged by the screw with grounding.
(10) Reinstall the left inside cover, and cooling fan assembly.
006-259-03
PM-31
3.12 Greasing
Apply oil to the gears of the conveyance system every six years. 6Y
■ Procedure
(1) Apply Molykote (EM-30L) to the whole one-way gear of the upper conveyor unit.
One-way gear
FP7M0326.EPS
006-259-03
PM-32
(2) Apply Molykote (EM-30L) to the conveyor unit and removal unit gears as shown in
the figure.
Apply a drop of Molykote (EM-30L)
(2 mm dia) at the four points
indicated by the arrow.

[Apply Molykote] Gear
Upper removal unit

#1
#1 [Apply Molykote] Gear
[Apply Molykote]
Gear
Middle removal unit

#1
[Apply Molykote] Gear
Lower conveyor unit
Lower removal unit
FP7M0327.EPS
006-259-03
PM-33
3.13 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers

Wipe covers with a moist cloth. Inspect the covers for missing screws and 1Y
gaps with the equipment.
■ Procedure
(1) Reinstall all covers except for the lower front cover.
(2) Reinstall the cleaning roller.
(3) Wipe the covers with a moistened cloth.
(4) Check that no cover screws are missing and that there are no spaces between
the cover and equipment.
006-259-03
PM-34

Using a tester, measure each DC output voltage. If outside the specification, 1Y
adjust with the adjusting volume on the power supply unit.
CAUTION
Observe the following to prevent electrical hazards.
• Use the tester lead to prevent short-circuiting.
• Do not touch the voltage terminal and tester lead.
■ Procedure
(1) Pull the board attaching plate where MCT board can be seen.
#1
[Release] Clamp
#2
[Remove] BR3x8
FP7M0315.EPS
#3
[Release] Clamp
#4
[Remove] BR3x8
#5
[Pull] Board attaching plate
FP7M0316.EPS
006-259-03
PM-35
(2) Attach the interlock release jig to the front cover interlock (SK2/SK3).
(4) Measure the voltage at the voltage measuring points.
If the voltage differs from the specified value, turn the voltage adjusting volume in front
of the power supply unit and adjust.
(5) After checking/adjusting the DC voltage, turn OFF the power of the equipment,
and remove the interlock release jig.
(6) Reinstall the board attaching plate to its original position.
(7) Reinstall the lower front cover.
● Specified Voltage Values

Measurement Adjusting volume
Voltage Check Pin Specified value
board
+3.3V PRN board TP14 (+3.3V) – TP15 (GND) +3.3V ±2% +3.3V
(+3.23 to +3.37V)
+5V ±2%
+5V SNS board TP1 (+5V) – TP2 (GND) +5V 2
(+4.90 to +5.10V)
Power supply +5V ±2%
+5V – +5V 1
unit check pin (+4.90 to +5.10V)
Power supply +12VD ±2%
+12VD unit check pin – (+11.76 to +12.24V) +12VD
-12V SNS board TP4 (-12V) – TP2 (GND) -12V ±2% -12V
(-11.76 to -12.24V)
+12V SNS board TP3 (+12V) – TP2 (GND) +12V ±2% +12V
(+11.76 to +12.24V)
+5VS ±2%
+5VS MCT board TP2 (+5V) – TP1 (GND) +5VS
(+4.90 to +5.10V)
+24V ±2%
+24V DRV board TP1 (+24V) – TP2 (GND) +24V
(+23.52 to +24.48V)
TP7M0201.EPS
006-259-03
PM-36
● Voltage Measuring Point

• DRV Board/SNS Board
TP2
TP1
TP4 TP1 TP2

TP3
FP7M0317.EPS
006-259-03
PM-37
• PRN Board
TP15 TP14
FP7M0318.EPS
• MCT Board
TP2
TP1
FP7M0319.EPS
● Adjusting Volume
FP7M0314.EPS
006-259-03
PM-38
3.15 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images

After performing MD1 operations for Molykote applied to adhere to the 1Y
gears well, perform final operation check after completing preventive
maintenance by printing the grid pattern and 17-steps pattern, and
perform automatic density correction, and re-check the format of the
recorded image, density correction function, and check that there are no
unevenness on the image and scratches. Also check that the mechanism
and conveyor system are operating normally during film conveyance.
“3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images”
■ Procedure
● MD1 Operations for Molykote Applied to Adhere Well

(2) Start the M-utility during initialization.
(4) [Action]: [CW]
→ The MD1 drives.
(6) Run the entrance conveyance motor (MD1) for five minutes for Molykote (EM-
30L) applied to the gears adhere well.
● Printing Grid Pattern

Print grid pattern from each film tray, and check the operations of the mechanism
system, conveyor system, recorded image format, and also check for inconsistency
and lines on the images.
(3) [Copies]: “1” → [ENT]
(4) Check the following.
• If there are abnormal sounds and smell from the equipment.
• If film jam has occurred.
• If the format of the recorded image is correct.
• If there are unevenness on the images and scratches.
“3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images”
(6) [TOP]
→ Returns to the M-Utility top menu.
006-259-05
PM-39
● Density Correction
(1) [F.D.C.] → [AUTO F.D.C.]→ [TRAY 1] → [ENT]
→ The 24-steps pattern is printed, and automatic density correction is performed.
(2) [QUIT]
● 17-steps Pattern
Print 17-steps patterns from each film tray, and check the density according to tone
type (Dmax.).
(1) [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT]
(3) Check that the values is within the specified values shown below. If Dmax setting
is set to “4.0 : enable”, check that the density of the 17th step is above 4.0.
(4) [QUIT]

1 fog fog fog fog
4 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05
5 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05
6 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05
7 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05
8 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05
9 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05
10 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05
11 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05
12 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05
13 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05
14 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07
15 2.28 ±0.07 2.40 ±0.10 2.40 ±0.10 2.43 ±0.10
16 2.46 ±0.07 2.70 ±0.10 2.70 ±0.10 2.95 ±0.10
17 2.64 ±0.07 3.00 ±0.10 3.30 ±0.20 3.60 ±0.20
TP7B0701.EPS
006-259-06
PM-40
3.16 Setting Date and Time

Check the system date and time, and reset the date and time if incorrect. 1Y
■ Procedure
(1) [System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Date/time]
→ The current system date and time are displayed.
(2) If the date and time are wrong, change the date and time, then touch [TOP].
If the date and time are correct, touch [QUIT] to return to the top menu of M-Utility.
(3) End the M-utility, and turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(4) Clean the touch panel with a cloth moistened with absolute ethanol.
006-259-03
PM-41
3.17 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding

(1) Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire 1Y
connections are established in the same manner as for installation.

(2) Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are secured and
connected in the same manner as for installation.
(3) Check that the removed screws are properly tightened.
006-259-05
PM-42
3.18 Work Completion Report

After completing preventive maintenance, notify the user that the density tone curve
has changed because density correction was carried out.
006-259-04
PM-43
BLANK PAGE
006-259-04
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
INSTALLATION (IN)
IN-1
CONTROL SHEET

11/10/2002 01 Revised (FM3601) 1, 2, 4, 5, 8-133
04/01/2003 02 Revised (FM3978) 1, 16, 21, 26-29, 35, 37, 46, 53, 59,
68, 69, 71, 84, 85, 87, 88, 90, 91, 93,
98, 102-104, 106-109, 111, 113, 114,
116, 119-122, 124-135
09/20/2004 04 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 4, 9, 18, 21, 32, 44, 45, 86, 90, 92,
V4.1, V10.0 and V10.1, DPX7 PC Tool version 130
A08, etc.)(FM4447)
11/30/2005 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 4, 8, 9, 13, 18-22, 47, 49, 85,
V5.0 and V11.0, DI Tool version V2.0, etc.) 85.1-85.4, 86-91, 94, 96, 97, 106,
(FM4690) 109-113, 116, 118, 123, 129, 141
07/31/2006 06 Revised (DI-ML film)(FM4949) 1, 47, 85, 85.1, 97

02/15/2007 08 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 84, 85.1-85.4, 110, 112-117,
V7.0 and V13.0, DI Tool version V3.0, etc.) 119-123, 125-127, 129, 133-135, 139
(FM5077)
006-259-08
02.15.2007 FM5077 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual IN-1
IN-2
1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS
1.1 Equipment Dimensions and Weight

■ Dimensions
● DRYPIX 7000
735 mm x 680 mm x 1240 mm (W x D x H)
1240 mm
m
0m
68
73
5m
m
FP7I0302.EPS
● Sorter
385 mm x 590 mm x 1190 mm (W x D x H)
1190 mm
38 0 mm
5m 59
m
FP7I0303.EPS
006-259-03
IN-3
■ Weight
● DRYPIX 7000
Approximately 203 kg (including two trays)
● Sorter
Approximately 63 kg
1.2 Means to Move and Secure Equipment

■ Move
● DRYPIX 7000
Four wheel caster (omni-directional, with no brake)
● Sorter
Six wheel caster (Four are omni-directional, two are for preventing from turning
over, with no brake)
■ Securing
Adjustable feet x 2 (front) and fixtures x 4
006-259-03
IN-4
1.3 Environment Conditions

■ Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure
● Operating
Temperature/Relative humidity : 15 °C (40 to 70%RH) to 30 °C (15 to 70%RH)
Heat generation : 400 kcal/hr
[%]
70
Relative humdity
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5 10 15 20 25 30 [°C]
Temperature FP7I0301.EPS
● Non-operating
Temperature : 0 to 45 °C (No freezing)
● Transit or Storage
Temperature : -10 to 50 °C
■ Exhaust Air of Equipment
● Exhaust Air in Standby State

40 m3/hour
● Average Exhaust Air When Processing 100 films (35 x 43 cm size)

54 m3/hour per equipment
■ Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement

Frequency: 10 to 55 Hz
Amplitude: 0.0075 mm or less
■ Floor Levelness
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around
■ Floor Flatness
10 mm or less
■ Static Magnetic Field

DC 100 Gauss or less
006-259-05
IN-5
1.4 Electrical Specifications

■ Frequency
50/60 Hz ±3%
■ Line Voltage
200/ 220/ 230/ 240 VAC ±10% (By tap changing)
■ Capacity
2.2 kVA
■ Rated Current
11 A/ 10 A/ 9.5 A/ 9 A
■ Power Consumption
Maximum 2.2 kW
■ Electric Energy
Printing : 570 Wh
Standby : 320 Wh
Power save mode : 200 Wh
Sleep mode : 120 Wh
Remote standby mode : 20 Wh
■ Maximum Heat Generation

Printing : 580 W
Standby : 330 W
■ Overload Protection
15 A
1.5 Other Specifications

■ Noise
Idling : Approximately 45 dB
Printing : Approximately 53 dB
■ Start-up Time
Approximately 15 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 °C)
006-259-03
IN-6
1.6 Installing Space and Maintenance Work Space
1.6.1 Installation Space

20 or more
50 or more
50 or 20 or 50 or 350 or
more more more more

Unit: mm
FP7I0401.EPS

20 or more
80 or more
80 or 80 or 80 or 350 or
more more more more
Unit: mm
FP7I0402.EPS
006-259-03
IN-7
1.6.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work

<REMARKS>
To rotate the equipment, one side requires more than 1000 mm of space.

800 or
800 or more 800 or
800 or
more more more
Unit: mm
FP7I0403.EPS
● Space for Removing Fixtures

80 or more
80 or more
250 or 250 or 250 or 350 or

more more more more
Unit: mm
FP7I0404.EPS
● Maintenance Space after Removing Fixtures

The same space as “■ When Not Fixed with Fixtures” is required.
006-259-03
IN-8
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW

START
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION
3.1 Precautions on Installation
3.2 Preparing the DPX7 PC Tool
3.2.2 Installing and Uninstalling the DI Tool
3.2.4 Setting Grouping Symbol
3.3 Preparations
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
4.1 Unpacking and Unloading
4.2 Carrying
4.3 Temporary Placement
4.4 Checking Components
5. INSTALLATION
5.1 Removing External Packaging of the Equipment Main Body
5.2 Removing Covers
5.3 Removing Fixtures
A
FP7B0201.EPS
006-259-05
IN-9
5.4 Installing Separately Packaged Items
5.4.1 Installing the Cleaning Roller
5.4.2 Affixing the Caution Label for the Lever Operation of the Cleaning Roller Set
5.5 Changing the Film Size
5.5.1 Changing the Film Tray Size
5.5.2 Changing the Installed Position of the Barcode Reader
5.5.3 Affixing the Film Labels
5.6 Installing Options
6.1 Installing the Additional Removal Unit
6.1.1 Remove the Cushioning Materials, Changing the Film Tray Size
6.1.2 Installing the Barcode Reader
6.1.3 Installing the Removal Unit
6.1.4 Installing the Film Loading Unit
6.1.5 Installing the Conveyor Unit
6.1.6 Securing the Idle Gear
6.1.7 Internal Wiring
6.1.8 Inserting the Film Trays
B C
FP7B0202.EPS
006-259-05
IN-10
B C
6.2 Installing the 20 x 25 cm Size Suction Cup Arm Assembly
6.2.2 Removing the Film Loading Unit
6.2.3 Removing the Removal Unit
6.2.4 Replacing the Suction Cup Arm
6.2.5 Changing the Installed Position of the Film Release Plate
6.2.7 Reassembling the Equipment
D E
FP7B0203.EPS
006-259-03
IN-11
D E
6.3 Installing Additional Image Memory Boards
6.4 Installing Sorter
5.7 Connecting Interface Cables
5.7.1 Connecting Network Cable
5.7.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing
5.8 Setting the Power Supply
5.9 Connecting the Power Cable
5.10 Installing Covers
7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT
7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility
7.1.1 Power ON
7.1.2 Starting the M-Utility
7.2 System Settings
7.2.1 System Management/System Config.
7.2.2 System Management/Network/Set Network
7.2.3 System Management/Set Main Panel
7.3 Ending System Settings
F
FP7B0204.EPS
006-259-03
IN-12
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
8.1 MD1 Operation When Adding Expansion Film Trays
8.2 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
8.3 Checking Density
8.4 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and Scratches
8.5 Checking Conveyance and Scratches on Film Image When the Sorter is Connected
8.6.1 Checking the Jam Clear Cover Interlock
8.6.2 Checking the Front Cover Interlock
8.6.3 Checking the Film Tray Interlocks
8.6.4 Checking the Sorter Interlock
8.8 Settings for U-Utility
9. INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLE SETS
G FP7B0205.EPS
006-259-03
IN-13
10. SETTING CLIENTS
10.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network
10.2 Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool)/Connecting DPX7 PC Tool to this Equipment
10.2.2 Connecting DPX7 PC Tool to this Equipment
10.3 Importing Individual Data
10.4 Settings by Client
10.4.1 Registering Clients
10.4.2 Client Settings
10.4.3 Settings by Client
10.5 Adding and Registering Printers
10.6 Sending Data on Setting to the Equipment
10.8 Ending the DI Tool and the Equipment
H FP7B0206.EPS
006-259-05
IN-14
11. CHECKING NETWORK CONNECTION
11.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment
11.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
11.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
12. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT
12.1 Backing Up Individual Data
12.1.1 Saving Individual Data in the Equipment HD
12.1.2 Saving Individual Data in the PC for Servicing
12.1.3 Saving Individual Data on the FD
12.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
12.2.1 Checking the Error Log
12.2.2 Saving Error Logs
12.2.3 Deleting Error Logs
12.3 Installing the Equipment
12.3.2 Installing the Equipment Without Using Fixtures
12.4 Cleaning the Equipment
END
FP7B0207.EPS
006-259-03
IN-15
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
IN-16
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION
3.1 Precautions on Installation

The machine installation site must satisfy the “■ Installation Site Requirements” below.
Also be sure to complete procedures beforehand for necessary construction work,
electrical utility, and air-conditioning system installation.
■ Installation Site Requirements

Avoid the following installation sites.
• Places where the temperature drastically changes.
• Places near heat sources such as heaters.
• Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur.
• Places where the equipment may be exposed to any corrosive gas.
• Dusty places.
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
• Places which do not meet the following ventilation conditions:
Ventilation conditions:
The ventilation capacity of this equipment is 54 m3/hour. The room installing this
equipment must therefore have at least equivalent capacity as this equipment or
above. Generally any room allowing general ventilation is appropriate.
<REMARKS>
The approximate ventilation frequency of building rooms is 10 times/hour or above.
This means that ventilation equivalent to ten times the cubic capacity of the room is performed
every hour.
The ventilation frequency shall be conformed to the ASHRAE (American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers).
■ Power Supply and Grounding

Install a 250V/20A circuit breaker per equipment. Ground the equipment to the indoor
protective grounding.
■ Network Connection
As the equipment needs to be connected to the network, prepare network materials
and parts and complete constructions beforehand.
Prepare the network materials and accessories according to the place of installation as
they are not designated parts.
006-259-03
IN-17
■ Board and Optical Unit Handling Precautions

Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of boards and
optical unit.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
boards and optical unit.
■ Burying Anchor Nuts

To secure the equipment to the floor with fixtures, bury the anchor nuts beforehand.
006-259-03
IN-18
3.2 Preparing the DPX7 PC Tool

The service tool software DI Tool is required for setting clients (image output device)
connected to the network, sorter settings, and saving equipment data. Prior to
beginning installation, install the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool) in the PC for servicing and set
the FTP site directory.
Perform the following preparations beforehand on the Service Center, etc.
<NOTE>
• DI Tool is the Fuji Medical Dry Imager integrated service tool software containing “DPX7 PC
Tool” and “DPX PC Tools”. With this equipment, the functions of “DPX7 PC Tool” in DI Tool
are used.
• In this manual, “DI Tool” indicates the whole service tool software and “DPX7 PC Tool”
indicates the tool functions used in this equipment.
• The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX straight cable is required for connecting the PC for servicing.
<REMARKS>
This manual describes the procedure for connecting the PC for servicing to this equipment via
the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for servicing to this equipment
using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX crossing cable.

● OS
Microsoft Windows 2000 (SP4) or Windows XP (SP2)
● Accessories
CD-ROM drive
● Display
800 x 600 pixels or higher-resolution display
<NOTE>
Version A08 or later must be installed to use Windows XP.
006-259-05
IN-19
3.2.2 Installing and Uninstalling the DI Tool

■ Installing Procedure
Install the DI Tool as follows.
<NOTE>
If the DRYPIX Net Tool is already installed in the PC in which the DI Tool is to be installed,
uninstall the DRYPIX Net Tool first.
In this case, save the information set using the DRYPIX Net Tool before uninstalling it and use
this information when using the DRYPIX Net Tool on the PC again in the future.

<REMARKS>
The DI Tool will be saved in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm” directory.
(5) Click [Finish].

desktop.
006-259-05
IN-20
■ Uninstalling Procedure
To uninstall the DI Tool from the PC, perform the following procedure.
(3) Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] Æ [Control Panel].
(5) From the [Currently installed programs:] list, click [DPX7 PC Tool] and then
[Change/Remove].
→ The [Confirm File Deletion] dialog appears to confirm whether to uninstall the DI
Tool.
(6) Click [Yes].
→ The [Remove Programs From Your Computer] window appears to uninstall the DI
Tool.
(7) Upon completion, click [OK].
<NOTE>
If the message “Some elements could not be removed. ...” is displayed when deletion
completes, click [Details...] and note down the files and folders which could not be deleted.
After completing the following steps, delete the files and folders noted down.
006-259-05
IN-21

To perform transmission and reception of various data with the equipment, there is a
need to set the FTP site directory of the PC installed with the DI Tool.
Described here is the setting method for an example of Windows 2000.
The setting procedure is basically the same for Windows XP, however there are certain
precautions to be taken and additional settings to be made.
“APPENDIX 1 PRECAUTIONS AND SETTINGS IN THE USE OF Windows XP
PC FOR SERVICING”
<NOTE>
To set the FTP site directory of the PC, Internet Information Services (IIS) function (one of the
Windows components) is required.
This Internet Information Services (IIS) will not be installed in the standard installation of
Windows 2000. If not installed in the PC used, install it as follows.
■ Installing the Internet Information Services (IIS)

(3) Click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
(4) Select the checkbox of [Internet Information Services (IIS)] from the
[Components:] list, and click [Next].
(5) Follow the instructions of the [Windows Components Wizard] dialog to install the
Internet Information Services (IIS).
The message [Insert Disk] appears halfway through to prompt for the “Windows
2000 CD-ROM” to be inserted. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and
click [OK].
<REMARKS>
If the [Microsoft Windows 2000 CD] window appears upon inserting the “Windows 2000 CD-
ROM”, click [Exit] to close the window.
(6) After completing installation, click [Finish].

006-259-05
IN-22
■ Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC

(3) Double-click the [Internet Services Manager] icon.
(5) Check that [Default FTP Site] is set to [Running]. If set to [Stopped] or [Pause],
right-click [Default FTP Site] and select [Start].
(6) Right-click [Default FTP Site], and click [Properties] from the popup menu.
(7) Click the [Home Directory] tab.
(8) Note down the path set at [Local Path:]
<NOTE>
As Windows 2000 has only one home directory for all accounts, if another directory (folder
name) has already been specified for [Local Path:], other applications may be using it.
(9) Set the folder name installing the DI Tool (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX) at
[Local Path:] , and select the checkboxes of [Read], [Write], and [Log visits].
<NOTE>
If the directory of the FTP site is not set to the folder installing the DI Tool (C:\Program
Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX), the DI Tool will not operate properly. If using other applications on the
same PC, after using the DI Tool, return to the settings noted down at step (8).
In addition, “C:\inetpub\ftproot” is the default value of Windows 2000 and can be
changed.
006-259-05
IN-23
(10) Click [OK].

006-259-03
IN-24
3.2.4 Setting Grouping Symbols

When the [Regional Options] of the PC installing the DPX7 PC Tool is not English,
check the setting of the grouping symbol, and change it if different from below.
<NOTE>
If the setting differs, the formatter error “0005” will occur when files are transferred to this
equipment.
(2) Double-click the [Regional Options] icon.
(3) Click the [Numbers] tab.
(4) Check that [Decimal symbol] is “ . ” (period).
<NOTE>
If as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for [Digit grouping symbol]
and [Decimal symbol], change the symbol for [Digit grouping symbol].
(5) Click the [Time] tab.
006-259-03
IN-25
(6) Check that [Time separator] is “ : ” (colon).
(7) Click the [Date] tab.

(8) Check that [Date separator] is “ / ” (slash).
(9) Click [OK].

(10) Close the [Control Panel] window.
006-259-03
IN-26
3.3 Preparations
■ Tools used
This equipment can be installed using standard tools.
When installing the sorter, the spanner provided to the sorter can also be used.
BR4x10
Spanner
FP7B0532.EPS
006-259-03
IN-27
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
IN-28
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
4.1 Unpacking and Unloading

(1) Disassemble the wood boards covering the equipment.
Use the top board as a slope for lowering the equipment from the carrier pallet.
(2) Remove the separately packaged box.
(3) Cut the bottom of the protective material covering the equipment, and expose the
fixtures.
(4) Remove the four fixtures.
Equipment
Fixtures #1 [Remove] Fixtures #1 [Remove]

Bolt with #3 [Loosen] Bolt with
Equipment Equipment
hexagonal hole Nut hexagonal hole
#2 [Remove] #2 [Remove]
#3 [Remove] Nut Nut
Hexagonal bolt
Carrier pallet Carrier pallet

Adjustable foot
FP7B0403.EPS
006-259-03
IN-29
(5) Hook the top panel removed at step (1) to the carrier pallet.
Equipment
Top board
FP7B0405.EPS
(6) Lower the equipment from the carrier pallet.

<INSTRUCTIONS>
To avoid damage to the equipment, do not push the front cover (shaded portion in the
figure below).
FP7B0404.EPS
■ Sorter
(1) Remove the protective material covering the sorter and accessories.
(2) Remove the sorter from the base pad.
006-259-03
IN-30
4.2 Carrying
(1) Clear the delivery path of the equipment and carry the equipment to the
installation site.
To ensure that the equipment can be carried out safely to the installation site, move any
obstacle out of the way on the delivery entry, entry corridor, and corners. Also make sure
that the elevator is made available to move the equipment.
<NOTE>
• When delivering the equipment by means of its two-wheel casters, raise the adjustable feet
all the way up.
• When carrying the equipment, support it so that it does not turn over.
• When moving the equipment over any bump, slowly move it to avoid shock.
006-259-03
IN-31
4.3 Temporary Placement

(1) Ensure sufficient work space for installation.
“1.6 Installation Space and Maintenance Work Space”
(2) Lower the adjustable foot of the equipment to secure the equipment.
Equipment
[Rotate] Nut
Caster
Adjustable foot
FP3B0309.EPS
006-259-03
IN-32
4.4 Checking Components

In accordance with the PACKING LIST contained in each carton box, check to ensure
that the contents of the installation package comply with the LIST.
The service personnel should always retain the Inspection Data Sheet.

Name Qty. Remarks
Equipment main body 1

TP7B0401.EPS
■ Accessories
Name Qty. Remarks
Scanner data FD 1
Individual data FD 1
Software CD-R 1
Ferrite core 1 Connect to the network cable.
Tie band 1
Cleaning roller 1
Cutter 2
Label 1 *1 Label for positioning film pack
Label 8 *1 Film size label
Label 1 Caution label for the lever operation of the
cleaning roller set
Hexagonal head bolt (M12x25) 8 For securing equipment fixtures
Spring washer (SW12) 8
Flat washer (W12) 8
Anchor nut 8
Spacer 2
Clamp 2
Screw with cover (T4x16) 16 Replace with screws for securing cover in
installation.
Screw with cover (T4x25) 8
Stand 1 Jig for removing upper conveyor unit.
Inspection data sheet 1
Operation manual 1
Screw (BR4x8) 5
Guide 2 Guide pin for changing film size in tray
Shaft 2
Screw (T4x35) 2
Fuse 6 1A (2 pieces), 2A (2 pieces), 5A (2 pieces)
Guide plate 1 Guide plate for changing film size in tray
(2-tray or 3-tray models only)
*1: Quantity for 1-tray models. The quantity differs for 2-tray or 3-tray models. TP7B0402.EPS
006-259-04
IN-33
■ Options
Product Product Code Parts No. Remarks
Additional option tray DPX TRAY #/E 898Y0881 For 35x43 and 26x36 cm size
Additional option tray DPX TRAY 8x10 E 898Y0896 For 20x25 cm size
Suction cup arm DPX ARM 8x10 #/E 898Y0883 For 20x25 cm size
Optional sorter DPX SRT #/E 000Y5398
Expanded frame buffer memory DPX BASE FBM 256 #/E 113S0185 256MB
TP7B0409.EPS
● Additional Removal Unit (35 x 43 cm Size Specification)

Name Qty. Remarks
Film loading unit 1

Removal unit 1
Conveyor unit 1
Guide (Stopper) 2
Bracket 1
Barcode reader assembly 1
Bracket 1
Gear assembly (Idle gear) (large) 1 For conveyor section
Gear cover (Shield cover) 1
Gear assembly (Idle gear) (small) 1 For removal unit
Label 1 Label for positioning film pack
Label 8 Film size label
Screw (BR3x6) 4
Screw (BR3x8) 5
Screw (BR4x8) 16 There may be extras depending on film size setting
Screw (TP3x8) 2 For installing barcode reader
Shaft 2
Screw (T4x35) 2
TP7B0403.EPS
006-259-03
IN-34
● Additional Removal Unit (20 x 25 cm Size Specification)

Name Qty. Remarks
Film loading unit 1

Removal unit 1
Conveyor unit 1
Guide (Stopper) 2
Bracket 1
Barcode reader assembly 1
Bracket 1
Gear assembly (Idle gear) (large) 1 For conveyor section
Gear cover (Shield cover) 1
Gear assembly (Idle gear) (small) 1 For removal unit
Label 1 Label for positioning film pack
Label 8 Film size label
Screw (BR3x6) 4
Screw (BR3x8) 5
Screw (BR4x8) 16 There may be extras depending on film size setting
Screw (TP3x8) 2 For installing barcode reader
Shaft 2
Screw (T4x35) 2
TP7B0403.EPS
● 20 x 25 cm Size Suction Cup Arm Assembly

Name Qty. Remarks
20 x 25 cm size suction cup arm assembly 1

Screw (BR3x8) 4
Screw (DT3x6) 4
TP7B0404.EPS
006-259-03
IN-35
● Sorter
Name Qty. Remarks
Sorter unit 1
Docking plate (Front) 1
Docking plate (Rear) 1
Rail 1
Screw (BR4x8) 8
Tie band 2 For securing printer power cable (One is spare)
Bracket (Partition plate) 1
Bracket (Auxiliary plate) 1
Guide plate 1
Solenoid assembly 1
Extension spring 1
Screw (BR3x6) 5
Label 1 To warn against letting fingers get caught
Label 1 Label for filling in pin information
Operation manual 1
Inspection data sheet 1
Screw (TP4x8) 2
TP7B0405.EPS
● Expansion Memory Board

Name Qty. Remarks
Expansion memory board 1 256MB

TP7B0406.EPS
006-259-03
IN-36
5. INSTALLATION
5.1 Removing External Packaging of the Equipment Main

Body
<INSTRUCTIONS>
All fixing materials inside the equipment are tied together by several strings for the
clamp release guide to ensure that none is left unreleased. Remove the fixtures
according to these strings.
(1) Remove the vinyl covering the equipment.

(2) Remove the tape securing the cover.
[Remove] Tape
FP7B0501.EPS
[Remove] Tape
[Remove] Tape
[Remove] Tag
[Remove] Tape
FP7B0502.EPS
006-259-03
IN-37
5.2 Removing Covers

(1) Open the front cover and remove the right cover, rear cover, and left cover.
Left cover
Rear cover
Front cover
Right cover
FP7B0504.EPS
006-259-03
IN-38
5.3 Removing Fixtures

■ Removal Unit/Tray Loading Unit (Common Procedure for All Film Trays)
(1) Release the tray lock at the back of the equipment with your hand.
#2
[Push slightly] Tray
#1
[Release manually] Tray lock
FP7B0506.EPS
(2) Pull the tray, and remove the tape securing the tray and shutter.
(3) Pull out the shutter.
#1
[Remove] Tape
Form block
#2
[Remove] Shutter
FP7B0505.EPS
006-259-03
IN-39
(4) Remove the foam block of the tray and cushioning material of the lower
squeezing roller.
#2 #1
[Remove] [Remove] Form block
Cushioning material
FP7B0507.EPS
(5) Push in the film tray into the equipment.
■ Controller
(1) Remove the tape securing the filter.
[Remove] Tape
Filter
FP7B0508.EPS
006-259-03
IN-40
■ Upper Conveyor Unit/Middle Conveyor Unit

(1) Remove the tape securing the open/close guide, and remove the foam block.
[Remove]
Tape and foam block
FP7B0509.EPS
(2) Remove the tape securing the guide plates of the middle conveyor unit. (2-tray
models, 3-tray models only)
[Remove] Tape
[Remove] Tape
Lower conveyor unit
FP7B0535.EPS
006-259-03
IN-41
■ Sub-Scanning Unit
● Removing Fixture for Securing the Equipment in Transportation (Front of

Equipment)
(1) Remove the fixture for securing the equipment in transportation.
#1
[Remove] 4-TP4x8
#2
[Remove] Fixture
FP7B0510.EPS
(2) Rotate the fixture removed, and secure to the sub-scanning unit at the two round
holes.
(3) Insert the upper conveyor unit removing jig provided with the equipment below the
sub-scanning unit. Secure it with the removed screw.
To shield from light, attach the screw removed in the screw hole on the frame.
(2)#1
[Attach] Fixing plate
(3)#3
[Attach] TP4x8
(2)#2
[Secure] 2- TP4x8
(3)#2
[Secure] TP4x8
(3)#1
[Insert] Upper conveyor unit removing jig
FP7B0511.EPS
006-259-03
IN-42
● Removing Fixture for Securing the Equipment in Transportation (Rear of

Equipment)
(1) Remove the fixture for securing the equipment in transportation.
(2) Move the fixture until it touches the rear of the equipment, and secure it.
Sub-scanning motor #2
[Move] Fixture
#1
[Loosen] Two screws
#3
[Tighten] Two screws
FP7B0512.EPS
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Hold the sub-scanning unit side plate with the hand and shake the sub-scanning unit
gently with your hand, and check that there is no interference between the fixture and
sub-scanning unit frame. Do not hold the sub-scanning motor at this time.
006-259-03
IN-43
● Frame
(1) Remove the bracket from the rear of the equipment.
(2) Connect the connectors to CN14 and CN6 of the power supply unit.
<REMARKS>
• There is not need to reinstall the removed bracket because the bracket is intended for
protecting the equipment during transportation.
• Keep the bracket removed as it will be necessary when the equipment needs to be moved
again in the future.
(1)#1
[Remove] Screw x 4
(1)#2
[Remove] Bracket
(2)
[Connect] Connector CN14, CN6
FP7B0537.EPS
006-259-03
IN-44
5.4 Installing Separately Packaged Items
5.4.1 Installing the Cleaning Roller

<NOTE>
• The cleaning roller catches and removes dusts adhering to the film. Do not therefore touch
the adhesive face of the cleaning roller unnecessarily. Also handle it with care so that no
dusts adhere to the adhesive face.
• When holding the cleaning roller, hold the shafts at both ends.
(1) Attach the cleaning roller
#3
[Attach]
Cleaning roller
#2 #1
[Pull out] Holder [Lower] Lever
#5 #4
[Push in] Holder [Lower] Lever FP7B0513.EPS
5.4.2 Affixing the Caution Label for the Lever Operation of the
Cleaning Roller Set
(1) Affix the caution label for the lever operation of the cleaning roller set in the
language the user desires.
#1
[Affix] Caution label for the lever operation
of the cleaning roller set FP7B0585.EPS
006-259-04
IN-45
5.5 Changing the Film Size

To change the film size set at shipment, the attaching position of the guide plate in the
film tray and guide pin , as well as the attaching position of the barcode reader need to
be changed.
<REMARKS>
• At shipment, each film tray is set as follows;
• 1-tray model: tray 1/35 x 43 cm
• 2-tray model: tray 1/35 x 43 cm, tray 2/26 x 36 cm
• 3-tray model: tray 1/35 x 43 cm, tray 2/35 x 43 cm, tray 3/26 x 36 cm
• To use 20 x 25 cm films, the optional 20 x 25 cm size suction cup arm assembly or 20 x 25
cm size additional removal unit is required.
• Equipment with the following serial numbers can be used 25 x 30 cm size film.
• #21936, #22687, #23291 or later
Also, to use 25 x 30 cm size film, main unit software version A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0
or later is required.

(1) Change the installed position of the guide plate and guide pin in the film tray
according to the film size used.
35 x 43 cm size Guide plate 26 x 36 cm size
Guide pin
Film tray
20 x 25 cm size 25 x 30 cm size
FP7B0503.EPS
006-259-04
IN-46

Change the installed position of the barcode reader (BCR) according to the film size
used.
■ Installed Position
BCR BCR
FP7B0539.EPS
■ Changing Procedure
(1) Remove the BCR assembly.
BCR assembly
#3
[Remove] 2-TP3x8
#2
[Release] Clamp
#1
FP7B0541.EPS
006-259-03
IN-47
(2) Change the installed position of the BCR.
FP7B0542.EPS
(3) Reinstall the BCR assembly in the reverse order of removal.
5.5.3 Affixing the Film Labels

(1) Affix the film size label.
(2) Set the film pack of the film size used on the film tray, and affix the label for
positioning the film pack (arrow mark) facing the red label indicating the inserting
direction.
<NOTE>
Affix at the back for the 26 x 36 cm film size and on the guide plate for other sizes.
(3) If using DI-ML film, affix the base plate label.

#3 #2
[Affix] [Affix]
Base plate label Film pack positioning label
#1
[Affix]
Film size label FP7C0313.EPS
006-259-06
IN-48
5.6 Installing Options

If installing options, install here refer to the following.
“6. INSTALLING OPTIONS”.
006-259-03
IN-49
5.7 Connecting Interface Cables
5.7.1 Connecting Network Cable
CAUTION
• Do not connect telephone lines to the PC board connector. Only IEC60950/UL1950
specification cables are suitable for connection to this connector.
• At this time, do not connect to the network device.
When performing system settings of the equipment, prevent external intrusions
which may interfere with network security by rebooting only the equipment after
completing various settings and then connecting to the network equipment.
(1) Attach the ferrite core to the network cable.

<NOTE>
• Use the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable (UTP or STP) for the network cable.
• Attach the ferrite core at 200 to 210 mm from the cable connector.
• Tie the ferrite core to the cable with the tie band.
<REMARKS>
UTP: Unshielded type
STP: Shielded type
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable
#2
[Fix] Tie band
200 to 210 mm
#1
[Attach] Ferrite core FP7B0540.EPS
006-259-05
IN-50
(2) Connect the network cable to the PC board connector.

<NOTE>
When installing together with the sorter, secure the cable indicated at step #2 in the figure
shown below at the same time as the interface cable of the sorter.
“6.4 Installing the Sorter”
#1
[Insert]
Network cable
#2
[Fix] Tie band
FP7B0524.EPS
5.7.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing

(1) Connect the network cable for the PC for servicing to the network connecting this
equipment.
006-259-03
IN-51
5.8 Setting the Power Supply

Switch the tap of the power supply unit, and set the power supply of the equipment.
(1) Re-connect the terminal connected to 200 V to that of the input power supply.
CAUTION
Tighten the screws firmly.
#3
[Switch] Tap
CO
M
20
0V
20
8V
22
0V
23
0V
24
0V
#1
[Remove] Two screws
#2
[Remove] Resin cover
FP7B0520.EPS
(2) Install the resin cover of the power supply unit.
006-259-03
IN-52
5.9 Connecting the Power Cable

CAUTION
• Production/connection of power cables should only be done by persons certified to
handle electrical facility construction.
• Use a conduit to connect the power cable to the equipment. Connect properly and
make sure the power cable is not exposed.
• Use a power cable of the following specifications.
Size: AWG14
Temperature: 105 °C
<NOTE>
• Connect the power cable to the terminal block properly.
• To prevent deformation, tighten the terminal fixing screws while holding the terminal block
with the hand.
• Observe the power and connection regulations in the country of use.
#3
[Secure] Clamp
L
N
#1
L [Insert] Three power cable
N
PE
#2
[Tighten] Terminal fixing screws
Terminal block
FP7B0599.EPS
006-259-03
IN-53
<REMARKS>
Checking the Resistance of the Power Cable
(1) Set the main power switch on the equipment to ON position ( I ).
Main power switch
FP7B0601.EPS
(2) Measure the resistance between the following terminals of the power cable using a
tester.
∞Ω
(Reference)
1.7Ω ∞Ω
L N E
L N E
L N PE
FP7B0523.EPS
(3) Set the main power switch to OFF position (O).
5.10 Installing Covers

(1) Reinstall all covers removed.
At this time, use the screws with cover provided with the equipment.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Use the following screws when reinstalling covers.
• Left cover: 8-TP4x25
• Rear cover: 8-TP4x16
• Right cover: 8-TP4x16
006-259-03
IN-54
6. INSTALLING OPTIONS
The following options are available for this equipment.
Described below are the procedures for installing these options. Perform the necessary
procedure.
• Additional removal unit (expansion film tray)
• 20 x 25 cm size suction cup arm assembly
• Expansion image memory board
• Sorter
6.1 Installing the Additional Removal Unit

Perform the following procedure to install optional additional removal units.
<REMARKS>
Two types are available for the optional additional removal unit; one for 35 x 43 cm film size
and another for 20 x 25 cm film size.
6.1.1 Remove the Cushioning Materials, Changing the Film Tray

Size
(1) Remove the shutter and film tray from the optional film loading unit.
(2) Remove the cushioning material from the film tray.
(3) To change the film tray size, set the film tray size.
”5.5.1 Changing the Film Tray Size”.
6.1.2 Installing the Barcode Reader

Check that the installing position of the barcode reader (BCR) corresponds to the film
size used. If it does not, change the position of the BCR.
“5.5.2 Changing the Installed Position of the Barcode Reader”
FP7B0542.EPS
006-259-03
IN-55
6.1.3 Installing the Removal Unit

(1) Attach the film loading unit stopper.
2-BR3x8
#1
[Attach] Stopper x 2
FP7B0548.EPS
(2) Remove the tray cover and tray inside cover.
#2
[Remove] 4-TP4x8
#1
[Remove] 2-BR3x8 Tray inside cover
Tray cover
FP7B0545.EPS
(3) To use this additional removal unit for 25 x 30 cm size, change the attaching
position of the following parts referring to “REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.3.3
Changing Film Size to 25 x 30 cm”.
• Suction cup unit
• Removal conveyance roller (upper) assembly
• Film surface detection sensor
• Film release plate
006-259-03
IN-56
(4) Check that the suction cup arm is at the home position before installing.
Home position
Removal unit
FP7B0575.EPS
(5) Install the removal unit.

Insert the removal unit into the equipment with the left side facing down, and position it
horizontally while inserting the pin into the frame.
<NOTE>
• Make sure the removal unit does not touch the barcode reader assembly.
• Hold the removal unit with the hand until the screws have been secured.
#1
[Install] Removal unit
#2
[Fix] 4-BR4x8
Pin
FP7B0547.EPS
006-259-03
IN-57
6.1.4 Installing the Film Loading Unit

(1) Attach the bracket.
#1
[Secure] BR3x8
Bracket
FP7B0564.EPS
(2) Install the film loading unit.

<NOTE>
Push in until it hits the film loading unit stopper.
#1
[Connect] Connector
Film pack/shutter
detection sensor
#2
[Secure] 3-BR4x8 Film loading unit
FP7B0565.EPS
006-259-03
IN-58
(3) Bind the extra length of the sensor cable so that it does not come out of the tray
insertion portion.
Clamp
#1
[Bind] Cable
FP7B0552.EPS
(4) Attach the bracket.
#1
[Attach] Bracket
#2
[Secure] 2-BR4x8
FP7B0553.EPS
006-259-03
IN-59
6.1.5 Installing the Conveyor Unit

(1) Remove the tape securing the guide plate of the conveyor unit.
Install the conveyor unit.
<NOTE>
Do not secure the screws of the shield cover here yet.
#1
[Remove] Shield screw Pin
Pin
#2
[Install] Conveyor unit
#1
[Remove] Shield screw
Take note direction faced
#3
[Secure] 4-BR4x8
FP7B0544.EPS
6.1.6 Securing the idle gear

(1) Temporarily secure the idle gear (small) to the rear side of the removal unit.
Removal unit
Idle gear (small)
#1
[Temporarily secure] 2-BR3x6
FP7B0546.EPS
006-259-03
IN-60
(2) Temporarily secure the idle gear (large) to the middle conveyor unit.
• When film tray 2 is added
Idle gear (large)
#1
[Temporarily secure]
2-BR3x6
FP7B0558.EPS
• When film tray 3 is added

Idle gear (large)
#1
[Temporarily secure]
2-BR3x6
FP7B0559.EPS
006-259-03
IN-61
(3) While touching the flange of the temporarily secured idle gear against the gears
indicated by the arrows in the following figure, tighten the screws.
• When film tray 2 is added:

Secure gears A and B
• When film tray 3 is added:

Secure gears C and D
Middle removal unit

Gear A
Gear B
Gear C
Lower removal unit
Gear D
Lower conveyor unit
FP7B0554.EPS
006-259-03
IN-62
(4) Apply molykote (EM-30L) to the installed conveyor unit and removal unit gears as
shown in the figure.
Apply a drop of Molykote (EM-30L)
(2 mm dia) at the four points
indicated by the arrow.
#1
[Apply Molykote] Gear Middle removal unit
#1
[Apply Molykote] Gear Lower removal unit
Lower conveyor unit
FP7B0574.EPS
(5) Attach the shield cover.
#2 #1
[Secure] 2-BR3x8 [Attach] Shield cover
FP7B0555.EPS
006-259-03
IN-63
6.1.7 Internal Wiring

(1) Connect the connectors to the removal unit and film loading unit.
COM
NC
#1
[Connect]
Connector x 6
#2
[Secure] Clamp x 7
FP7B0556.EPS
(2) Disconnect the short connectors from CN4 and CN5 on the DRV board, and
connect the connectors of the internally wired cables to CN4 and CN5.
Connect CN5 when installing the additional film tray 2, and CN4 when installing the
additional film tray 3.
• For film tray 2: CN5

• For film tray 3: CN4
#2
[Connect] Wired cables
DR
V
#1
[Disconnect] Short connector
FP7B0557.EPS
006-259-03
IN-64
6.1.8 Inserting the Film Trays

(1) Reinstall the tray inside cover.
(2) Insert the film tray.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
If adding expansion film trays to the installed equipment, after adding the film trays, run
the entrance conveyance motor (MD1) for five minutes for the molykote applied to
adhere well.
“8.1 MD1 Operations When Adding Expansion Film Trays”
006-259-03
IN-65
6.2 Installing the 20 x 25 cm Size Suction Cup Arm Assembly

The following describes how to change the film size of the currently used film tray (35 x
43 cm, 26 x 36 cm, or 25 x 30 cm) to 20 x 25 cm.
<REMARKS>
When using 20 x 25 cm films, replace the suction cup arm assembly with the optional 20 x 25
cm suction cup arm assembly.

(1) Remove the tray, and referring to “5.5.1 Changing the Film Tray Size”, set the film
tray size.
6.2.2 Removing the Film Loading Unit

Tray inside cover
#1
[Remove] 4-TP3x8
FP7B0566.EPS
006-259-03
IN-66
(2) Remove the bracket, and remove the film loading unit.
COM
NC
#2
[Disconnect]
Connector x 4
#1
[Release] Clamp x 5
#1
[Release] Clamp
Bracket
#2
[Remove] 2-BR4x8
FP7B0567.EPS
#4
#3
[Release] Clamp x 2
Film pack/shutter
detection sensor
#5 Film loading unit

[Remove] 3-BR4x8
FP7B0568.EPS
006-259-03
IN-67
6.2.3 Removing the Removal Unit

(1) Remove the shield cover, and remove the removal unit.
<NOTE>
• Remove the screws (4-BR4x8) securing the removal unit while supporting the removal unit
with the hand.
• To remove the removal unit, slide it to the left until the pins dislocate from the frame, then tilt
the removal unit to remove. Make sure that the removal unit does not touch the BCR
assembly at this time.
#4
[Remove] 4-BR4x8
#3
[Disconnect]
Connector
#2
[Remove] Shield cover
Removal unit
#1
Shield cover [Remove] BR3x8
FP7B0569.EPS
006-259-03
IN-68
6.2.4 Replacing the Suction Cup Arm Assembly

(1) Move the suction cup arm to the film suction position.
Then remove the suction cup arm from the removal unit.
#3
[Remove] Suction cup arm
Removal unit
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector
#2
[Remove] 4-BR3x8 FP7B0560.EPS
(2) Install the optional 20 x 25 cm size suction cup arm assembly.

<NOTE>
Check that the connector is connected.
#1
[Install] 20 x 25 cm size suction
cup arm assembly
#3
[Connect] Connector
#2
[Secure] 4-BR3x8 FP7B0561.EPS
006-259-03
IN-69
6.2.5 Changing the Installed Position of the Film Release Plate

(1) Remove the film release plate from the removal unit.
(2) Attach the film release plate at the 20 x 25 cm size position (∆ mark).
#1
[Remove] 4-DT3x6
#3
[Secure] 4-DT3x6
Mark
#2
[Move] Film release plate x 2
FP7B0562.EPS
(3) Return the suction cup arm to the home position.
Home position
Removal unit
FP7B0575.EPS
006-259-03
IN-70

To change the film size used from 35 x 43 cm to 20 x 25 cm, change the installed
position of the barcode reader (BCR).
“5.5.2 Changing the Installed Position of the Barcode Reader”
FP7B0542.EPS
6.2.7 Reassembling the Equipment

(1) Reinstall the removal unit, film loading unit in the reverse order of the removal
procedure.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Bind the extra length of the sensor cable so that it does not come out of the tray
insertion portion.
Clamp
#1
[Bind] Cable
FP7B0552.EPS
(2) Reinstall the tray inside cover, and film tray.
006-259-03
IN-71
6.3 Installing Additional Image Memory Boards

At shipment, one image memory board (256 MB) is provided with the equipment. To
add another one to increase the memory to 512 MB, perform the following procedure.
(1) Remove the lower front cover.
Lower front cover

FP7B0517.EPS
006-259-03
IN-72
(2) Pull out the board attaching plate.
#1
[Disconnect]
Shaded connector x 6
#2
[Remove] BR3x8
FP7B0514.EPS
#3
[Release] Clamp
#3
[Release] Clamp
#4
[Remove] BR3x8
#5
[Pull] Board ataching plate
FP7B0515.EPS
006-259-03
IN-73
(3) Insert the image memory board in the PC board slot (CN15).
<NOTE>
• Take note of the direction of inserting the image memory board.
• Push in the image memory board until it is secured by the hooks on each side of the slot.
[Insert] Image memory board
Hook
FP7B0516.EPS
(4) Return the board attaching plate to its original position.

(5) Attach the lower front cover.
006-259-03
IN-74
6.4 Installing Sorter

(1) Remove the jam clear cover, upper left cover, upper right cover, and side ejection
cover.
Upper left cover 2-T4x12
Operation panel
Jam clear cover
fixing screws
2-T4x12
Upper right cover
Side ejection cover
2-T4x8
BR3x12
3-BR3x8
FP7B0518.EPS
(2) Remove the screw for fixing the changeover guide.

(3) Attach the solenoid and auxiliary plate, and connect the connector.
(3)#1
[Attach] Solenoid
Film changeover
guide #3
BR3x6 [Remove]
Connector housing
(3)#4
[Connect] Connector
(3)#2 2-BR3x6 (2) SOLJ1
[Attach] Auxiliary plate [Remove] B3x14 FP7B0528.EPS
006-259-03
IN-75
(4) Install the partition plate and guide plate.

(5) Hook the spring to the film changeover guide.
Film changeover
guide
2-TP4x8
(4) #2
[Install] Guide plate
(5) (4) #1
[Attach] Spring 2-BR3x6 [Install] Partition plate
FP7B0536.EPS
(6) Remove the cap from the right side cover of the printer.
Push out the cap from the back of the right side cover.
(7) Attach the brackets to the upper right side cover.
#1
[Remove] Four caps
Right cover
#2
[Attach] Bracket (Rear)
2-BR4x8
2-BR4x8
#2
[Attach] Bracket (Front)
FP7B0529.EPS
(8) Reinstall the right cover which has been attached to the brackets using the
screws (8-T4x16) with cover provided with the printer. Reinstall upper right cover,
upper left cover, and jam clear cover to the printer.
006-259-03
IN-76
(9) Paste the “Watch out hand” caution label on the right cover as shown in the figure.
Watch out hand label
FP7B0563.EPS
(10) Adjust the height of the bottom of the printer from the ground so that it is 65 ±2
mm.
<REMARKS>
At shipment, the height of the sorter is 65 mm.
(11) Connect the sorter to the bracket of the printer.
FP7B0530.EPS
006-259-03
IN-77
(12) Check that the height from the ground to the printer and that to the sorter are the
same in the connected state.
(13) Check the clearance between the sorter and printer.
Check that the sorter is within the specified range shown in the following diagram
in respect to the printer.
If outside the specified range, proceed to step (14) to adjust the position.
A A ≤ 30mm
B ≤ 30mm
l A-B l ≤ 10mm
B
Casters FP7B0531.EPS
(14) To adjust, rotate the caster height adjusting nut of the sorter using the spanner,
and adjust the sorter within the specified range.
BR4x10
Spanner
FP7B0532.EPS
(15) Separate the sorter from the printer, and return the spanner to its original position.
006-259-03
IN-78
(16) Attach the rail.
2-BR4x8
Rail
FP7B0533.EPS
(17) Connect the sorter to the bracket of the printer, and secure the sorter to the rail.
#3
[Fix] Tie band
#1 [Remove] 2-BR4x8
#2 [Tighten] 2-BR4x8
FP7B0534.EPS
006-259-03
IN-79
(18) Separate the sorter from the printer, and remove the sorter rear cover and control
board cover.
Sorter rear cover
Control board cover

FP7B0570.EPS
(19) Connect the cables to the sorter, and tighten the connector fixing screws.
#1
[Connect] Connector
#2
[Secure] Tie band
FP7B0573.EPS
006-259-03
IN-80
(20) Connect the cables to the printer, and tighten the connector fixing screws.
<NOTE>
Secure the cables indicated at step #3 in the figure shown below at the same time as the
network interface cable.
“5.7.1 Connecting Network Cable”
#2
[Connect] Connector
Power supply unit CN17
#1
[Connect] Connector
MCT board CN6
#3
[Secure] Tie band
FP7B0572.EPS
(21) Reinstall the control board cover and sorter rear cover.
006-259-03
IN-81
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
IN-82
7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT
7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility
7.1.1 Power ON
Start the equipment and start the M-Utility.
(1) Set the breaker of the switch-board to ON.
(2) Set the main power switch on the equipment to ON position ( I ).
→ The POWER LED on the operation panel lights up. The equipment will not have
started up at this point.
<NOTE>
Normally, use the power ON switch to turn ON/OFF the power of the equipment. Leave the
main power switch at ON.
Main power switch
FP7B0601.EPS
006-259-03
IN-83
(3) Press the power ON switch on the operation panel.

→ The startup screen appears on the touch panel.
<REMARKS>
The power ON switch of this equipment is a software switch whose ON/OFF state cannot be
distinguished from the outside.
POWER LED
Power ON switch
FP7B0602.EPS
006-259-03
IN-84
7.1.2 Starting the M-Utility

When installing the equipment, the date and system parameters need to be set.
Use the M-Utility to set these.
<NOTE>
In the procedure described below, system settings of this equipment are performed using the
M-Utility. System settings can also be performed using the DPX7 PC Tool, but as the DPX7 PC
Tool cannot be connected unless this equipment is in the standby state, there is a need to wait
for this equipment to start to connect it.
■ Starting the M-Utility During Initialization

(1) After turning ON the power of the equipment, the startup screen will be displayed
for about 1 minute and 30 seconds, after which the software version number will
be displayed for about 15 seconds.
Start-up the M-Utility while this software version number is displayed.
<NOTE>
Touching the touch panel after the software version number disappears is invalid. If the M-
Utility cannot be started during initialization, wait until the equipment has completed starting up
or restart the equipment.
#1
[Touch] #2
Top left of screen [Touch within a second]
UTILITY button
Version display
FP7B0603.EPS
006-259-08
IN-85
7.2 System Settings

Using the M-Utility, perform the following system settings of the equipment. Skip items
which can be left at their default values when operating the equipment.
7.2.1 System Management/System Config.

■ Set Date/time
Set the system date and time.
(1) [System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Date/time]
→ The current system date and time are displayed.
(2) If the system date and time are correct, touch [QUIT]. To change the system date
and time, enter the desired values using the numerical keys.
The changes made will be effective from the time they were made.
■ Set Tray
Set the film used for each film tray.
(1) [System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Set Tray]
(2) Touch [TRAY 1].
Select the film size and film base color used in film tray 1.
<NOTE>
• Do not select [14x14 (35x35 cm)].
• [Blue base/ML] is available from main unit software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 and later.
If [Blue base/ML] is selected, perform [Set ML Dmax] next.
(3) [ENT] → [QUIT]

(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) and set the film used in film trays 2 and 3.
(5) Touch [QUIT] continuously to return to the [Set Parameters] menu.
006-259-06
IN-85.1
■ Set ML Dmax
If there is a film tray for which [Blue base/ML] is selected for the film base color, set
whether or not to print by the Dmax of the image sent.
<NOTE>
• This menu is provided in main unit software version V5.0 or later, or V11.0 or later.
(1) [System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Set ML Dmax]

(2) If a printer request above Dmax 3.6 is received, select the maximum density value
for printing on the DI-ML film.
• [3.6] : Prints at Dmax 3.6
• [4.0] : Prints at Dmax 4.0
(3) If the print request is less than Dmax 3.6 and DI-HL film is run out, select whether to
use the DI-ML film.
• [Accept] : DI-ML film is used.
• [Reject] : DI-HL film is used.
If no DI-HL film, no film will be used.
(4) [ENT]
(5) Touch [QUIT] to return to the [Set Parameters] menu.
■ Sorter Setting
Set whether to use the sorter or not.
<DEFAULT>
[Disable]
(1) [System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Sorter

Setting] → [Sorter Connection]
(2) Select whether the sorter is used or not.
• [Enable] : Sorter is used
• [Disable] : Sorter is not used
(3) [ENT]
006-259-08
02.15.2007 FM5077 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual IN-85.1
IN-85.2
■ Option
Set software options as desired.
<DEFAULT>
• Automated F.D.C. : [By each film pack]
• 17-Steps Pattern : [Disable]
• User Settable : [Disable]
• Operation After Film Loading : [Enable]
• QC : [Disable]
• Spatial Resolution : [Disable]
• Warning at system start : [Enable]
• MammoQC : [Disable]
<NOTE>
[User Settable], [Operation After Film Loading], and [QC] are available from main unit software
A03, A04, V4.1 or later, or V10.0 or later.
[Spatial Resolution] and [Warning at system start] are available from main unit software V5.0
or later, or V11.0 or later.
[Mammo.QC] is available from main unit software version V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later.
(1) [System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Option]

(2) Select the timing for executing automatic density correction.
• Automated F.D.C.
• [By each film pack]
• [By each film lot No]
• [None]
(3) Set whether to enable selection of the 17-steps pattern at [TEST PATTERN] of
the U-Utility.
• 17-steps Pattern
• [Disable] : Not selectable
• [Enable] : Selectable
(4) Set whether to enable selection of the test print of “User Settable” at [TEST
PATTERN] of the U-Utility.
• User Settable
<NOTE>
To print the desired User Settable pattern, save the user settable image in the equipment
beforehand using DPX7 PC Tool.
“SERVICE MODE, 5.5 Setting Output of User Settable Images”
006-259-08
IN-85.3
(5) If a film pack different from the base color set is set, select whether to enable
resetting of the film.
• Operation After Film Loading
• [Disable] : Displays the warning window and using this film.
• [Enable] : Displays the warning window and enables resetting.
(6) [NEXT]
(7) Set the enable/disable of the image QC function.
• QC
• [Disable]
• [Enable]
<NOTE>
If set to [Enable], there is a need to register the user ID using DPX7 PC Tool.
“SERVICE MODE, 5.1 Registering User ID”
(8) Set whether to enable selection of “Spatial Resolution” at [TEST PATTERN] of

the U-Utility.
• Spatial Pattern
(9) In the case the shutter is inserted at the time the equipment is started, set whether
to warn the user to remove the shutter or to disable use of the film tray without
warning.
For the equipment with main unit software version V7.0 or later, or V13.0 or later,
the equipment can be started without disabling use of the film tray because the
shutter presence check can be skipped.
• Warning at system start
• [Disable] : Starts with the corresponding film tray in the disabled state without
warning
• [Enable] : Displays the warning screen to prompt the user to remove the
shutter
• [Ignore] : Ignore the shutter
<NOTE>
printing.
006-259-08
IN-85.4
(10) Set whether to enable the Mammo QC function of U-Utility. Also set the value
(NEMA/EUREF) when enabled.
• Mammo.QC
• [Disable] : Disable
• [NEMA] : National Electrical Manufacturers Association
• [EUREF] : European Reference Frame
<REMARKS>
Selecting NEMA, EUREF enables output of the mammo QC pattern complying with the
respective standards.
(11) [ENT]
006-259-08
IN-86
■ Select Dmax
Set the tone type (Dmax) selected with each command (film output, etc.) of the M-
Utility.
<DEFAULT>
[2.64/3.0/3.6]
(1) [System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Select Damx]

(2) Select three tone types from [2.64], [3.0], [3.3], or [3.6].
(3) [ENT]
(4) Touch [QUIT] continuously to return to the [System Management] menu.
006-259-05
IN-87
BLANK PAGE
006-259-05
IN-88
7.2.2 System Management/Network/Set Network
CAUTION
Perform Set Network menu settings after disconnecting the network cables. Re-
connect after completing settings and rebooting the equipment. If Set Network menu
settings have been performed, the security will be vulnerable temporarily.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network administrator of
the installation site.
■ AE-title
Set the name of the printer for 10 pix/mm recording used in the DICOM protocol.
<DEFAULT>
“DRYPIX”
(1) [System Management] → [Network] → [Set Network]

(2) [AE-title]
<REMARKS>
• Select the type of characters to change the screen.
• If less than 16 digits are entered, enter spaces to make up 16 digits.
• Characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh in the 1-byte
code table.
• All spaces
(4) [ENT]
→ Returns to the [Set Network] menu.
006-259-05
IN-89
■ Fine PRT AE-title

Set the name of the printer 20 pix/mm recording used in the DICOM protocol.
<DEFAULT>
“DRYPIXHIGH”
(1) [Fine PRT AE-title]

<REMARKS>
• If less than 16 digits are entered, enter spaces to make up 16 digits.
• Characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh in the 1-byte
code table.
• All spaces
(3) [ENT]
■ Port No.
Set the port number used for the network.
<DEFAULT>
“104”
(1) [Port No.]

(2) Enter the port number (decimal/5 digits).
<REMARKS>
(3) [ENT]
006-259-05
IN-90
■ IP Address
Set the IP address used for the network.
<NOTE>
If the main unit software version is V10.0 or V10.1, the network must be in the enabled state
(network cable is connected, and HUB power is ON) when the equipment is started after IP
address setting.
If the network is not enabled when the equipment is started, communication will not be
possible even though the same display as normal start is displayed. In this case, enable use of
the network and then start up the equipment again.
<DEFAULT>
“172.016.001.040”
(1) [IP Address]

<REMARKS>
• Values cannot be entered in the following way.
• “000.000.000.000”
• “255.255.255.255”
(3) [ENT]
(4) [NEXT]
→ The next display of the [Set Network] menu appears.
■ SubnetMask
Set the subnet mask used for the network.
(1) [SubnetMask]
<REMARKS>
• If no value is entered, it will be set as “000.000.000.000”.
(3) [ENT]
006-259-05
IN-91
■ Gateway
Set the gateway address used for the network.
<DEFAULT>
“000.000.000.000”
(1) [Gateway]
(2) Enter the gateway address (decimal).
<REMARKS>
• Invalid input: “255.255.255.255”
• If no value is entered or “000.000.000.000” is entered, it will be taken as incomplete setting.
(3) [ENT]
■ Hostname
Set the host name used for the network.
<DEFAULT>
“fujiprinter”
(1) [Hostname]
<REMARKS>
• Characters which can be entered for the host name include alphabets (upper and lower
case), numerals, and hyphen “-”.
• Space
(3) [ENT]
(4) [QUIT] → [QUIT]
→ Returns to the [System Management] menu.
The settings made at [Set Network] will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
006-259-05
IN-92
7.2.3 System Management/Set Main Panel

■ Size Information
Set the type of film size displayed on the operation panel.
<DEFAULT>
[inch]
(1) [System Management] → [Set Main Panel] → [Size Information]

(2) Select the type to be displayed.
• [inch] : Film type will be displayed in inches.
• [cm] : Film type will be displayed in cm.
• [Japanese] : Film type will be displayed in Japanese.
(3) [ENT] → [QUIT]
→ Returns to the [Set Main Panel] menu.
■ Set Alarm
Set the alarm type.
<DEFAULT>
Alarm: [ON], Volume: [HIGH]
(1) [Set Alarm]

(2) Select the alarm type and volume.
• Alarm:
• [ON] : Alarm is sounded.
• [PULSE] : Alarm sounds for about 3 seconds and then stops.
• [OFF] : No alarm is sounded.
• Volume:
• [HIGH] : Loud
• [MEDIUM] : Medium
• [LOW] : Low
(3) [ENT] → [QUIT]
→ Returns to the [Set Main Panel] menu.
006-259-04
IN-93
■ Select Language
Set the language of the operation panel.
<DEFAULT>
[English]
(1) [Select Language]

(2) Select the language.
• Japanese • English
• German • French
• Italian • Swedish
• Spanish • Danish
• Norwegian • Portuguese
• Greek • Finnish
• Dutch • Chinese (Simplified)
• Chinese (Traditional) • Korean
<NOTE>
with main unit software version A03 or later at shipment, or replace with an HDD installed with
these fonts (114Y5396101A03).
(3) [ENT] → [TOP]

→ Returns to the top menu of the M-Utility.
(4) [EXIT]
→ The M-Utility ends.
006-259-03
IN-94
7.3 Ending System Settings

Changes made in system settings will be effective when the equipment is started up
again.
(1) End the equipment by touch panel operations.
[SHUTDOWN] → [YES]
→ The equipment starts termination operation, and the power goes OFF.
(2) Wait for more than 5 seconds and then press the power ON switch.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
If the sorter is connected, check that the sorter initializes when the equipment starts up
and that the sorter motor (MT1) rotates.
(3) After rebooting the equipment, connect the network cable of the equipment to the
network.
006-259-05
IN-95
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
IN-96
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
8.1 MD1 Operations When Adding Expansion Film Trays

When adding the optional film tray, run the entrance conveyance motor (MD1) for five
minutes Molykote (EM-30L) to adhere to the gears well.
(1) Start the M-Utility during initialization when the equipment is started.
(3) [Action]: [CW]
→ The MD1 drives.
(5) Run the entrance conveyance motor (MD1) for five minutes for Molykote (EM-
30L) applied to the gears adhere well.
(8) [EXIT]
→ The M-Utility ends.
8.2 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance

Operations
Output the 24-steps pattern for each tray, and perform automatic density correction for
each tray according to the density data measured by the density measurement section.
At the same time, check that there are no problems in film conveyance from each tray.
(1) Check that the equipment is in the standby state, touch [UNLOCK TRAY] button
of the U-Utility, and pull out the film tray.
REMARKS>
When films are loaded incorrectly, error message detected by BCR is displayed.
(2) Load film, and push in the film tray.

(4) [F.D.C.] → [AUTO F.D.C.] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT]
→ The 24-steps pattern is printing on film, and automatic density correction is
performed.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
At the same time, check that film conveyance operations are normal.
(5) [QUIT]
006-259-05
IN-97
8.3 Checking Density

The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is
displayed on the operation panel. Check from this data that the density value is within
the specification.
(1) [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT].
(3) Check that the measured values is within the specified values shown below. If
Dmax setting is set to “4.0 : enable”, check that the density of the 17th step is
above 4.0.
(4) [QUIT]

1 fog fog fog fog
4 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05
5 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05
6 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05
7 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05
8 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05
9 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05
10 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05
11 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05
12 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05
13 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05
14 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07
15 2.28 ±0.07 2.40 ±0.10 2.40 ±0.10 2.43 ±0.10
16 2.46 ±0.07 2.70 ±0.10 2.70 ±0.10 2.95 ±0.10
17 2.64 ±0.07 3.00 ±0.10 3.30 ±0.20 3.60 ±0.20
TP7B0701.EPS
006-259-06
IN-98
8.4 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image

Unevenness and Scratches
Print grid patterns from each tray, and check that the recording image format is within
the specifications shown in the following figure. Also check that there are no
unevenness and scratches on the output film.
(3) [Copies]: “1” → [ENT]
(4) Measure the recording image format of the film.
<REMARKS>
If the recording image format is outside the specifications, perform “[4-3-1] Scanning Width”,
“[4-3-2] Scanning Position”, and “[5-2-3] Adjusting Subscanner” of “SERVICE MODE Volume”.
(5) Check that there are no problems in the output film image.
(6) [QUIT]
006-259-03
IN-99

20 direction 20 20 direction 20
B D C E A B D C E A
F G
257.5 ±1.0
F G
430.0 ±1.0
364.5 ±1.0
354.0 ±1.0

direction direction
20 20 20 20
B D C E A B D C E A
F G F G
252.0 ±1.0 252.0 ±1.0
201.0 ±1.0 303.0 ±1.0
(Unit: mm)
|A-B| ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤2.0 ≤1.2
C 300 ±1.2 300 ±1.2 200 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0
|D-E| ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.0 ±1.0 200 ±0.8
|F-G| ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
FP7B0705.EPS
006-259-03
IN-100
8.5 Checking Conveyance and Scratches on Film Image

When the Sorter is Connected
Output a cleaning film, and check that the film is conveyed normally, and there are no
scratches on the film image.
(1) [Output Film] → [Film out to Sorter]
(2) Select the maximum film size → [ENT]
(3) [First output Bin #]: “1” → [ENT]
(4) [Final output Bin #]: “10” → [ENT]
(5) [Copies]: “10” → [ENT]
→ Cleaning film is output to each bin.
<NOTE>
Check that the following.
• No abnormal noise or smell is produced from the sorter.
• No film has jammed.
• No scratches on the film image.
006-259-03
IN-101

An interlock is provided at the jam clear cover (SK1), front cover (SK2, SK3),
and each film loading unit (SA12, SA22, SA32).
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening a
cover while executing the M-Utility.
SA12 SK1
SA22
SK2
SA32
SK3
FP7B0701.EPS
8.6.1 Checking the Jam Clear Cover Interlock

(1) [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] → [MJ1]
(2) [Action]: [CW]
→ The MJ1 drives.
(4) Open the jam clear cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MJ1 stops.
(5) Close the jam clear cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MJ1 can be heard.
(7) [QUIT]
006-259-03
IN-102
8.6.2 Checking the Front Cover Interlock

❍ Driving System
(2) [Action]: [CW]
→ The MD1 drives.
Check that the operating sound of the MD1 stops.
Check that the operating sound of the MD1 can be heard.
❍ Scanner System
CAUTION
Do not place anything which reflects light (screwdriver, etc.) in the equipment when
checking interlock functions.
(1) [Check Scanner] → [Diagnosis] → [Initial Check]

The scanner self-diagnosis is executed, and if it ends normally, the
message “Completed.” will be displayed. (Takes about 30 seconds)
(2) [QUIT]
(4) [Initial Check]
The self-diagnosis of the scanner is executed, and the message “Failed”
appears with error code. This allows the interlock function to be checked if
it is normal. (Takes about 15 seconds)
(5) [Top]
006-259-03
IN-103
8.6.3 Checking the Film Tray Interlocks

<NOTE>
The procedure for checking the interlock function is the same for all film trays. For film tray 2,
replace [SOLA11] in the following procedure as [SOLA21], and for film tray 3, replace it as
[SOLA31]. Check the interlock of all film trays.

(2) [Check Mechanism] → [Other Actuators] → [SOLA11]
(4) Pull out the film tray.
(8) [Action]: [CW]
Check that no operating sound of the MD1 can be heard.
(10) Close the film tray.
Check that operating sound of the MD1 can be heard.
(12) pull out the shutter.
8.6.4 Checking the Sorter Interlock

Separate the sorter while executing the M-Utility, and check the interlock function.
(1) [Check Mechanism] → [Sorter Unit] → [Motor MT1]
→ The MT1starts driving.
(3) Pull the sorter release lever to release the sorter.
Check that the operating sound of MD1 stops.
(4) Connect the sorter to the printer.
006-259-03
IN-104

Altogether operations of five fans need to be checked.

(FANG1-3)
Power supply
unit fan
Ventilation fan
(FANK1)
FP7B0702.EPS
(1) [Heat-Developer] → [Temp. Control] → [OFF] → [ENT]

(2) [QUIT]
(3) [Fan Operation]
(4) [Group]: [Group A] → [ENT]
→ The FANG1 and FANG3 start rotating.
Check the operation and wind direction of the FANG1 and FANG3.
(7) [Group]: [Group B] → [ENT]

→ The FANG2 starts rotating.
Check the operations and wind direction of the FANG2.
(9) [Action]: [intermittent] → [ENT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT]
(10) [Temp. Control] → [ON] → [ENT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT]
006-259-03
IN-105
(11) [Check Mechanism] → [Other] → [Board FAN] → [ON]

→ The FANK1 starts rotating.
Check the operations and wind direction of the FANK1 and power supply
unit fan.
(14) End the M-Utility.

If the image QC function is set to “enable”, as well as additional removal unit is installed
or change the film tray size, enter the format baseline value of the image QC function.
“SERVICE MODE, 2. U-Utility [14-3-3] FORMAT”
<REMARKS>
Format baseline values by film size (Allowable range: 5%)
006-259-03
IN-106
9. INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLE SETS

To install multiple sets of this equipment, perform “5. INSTALLATION” to “8.
CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS” for each set and complete all settings and
operation checks of each set.
After completing these operations for all sets, perform “10. SETTING CLIENTS”
onwards and perform the settings of each client collectively for all sets using the DI Tool
(DPX7 PC Tool).
006-259-05
IN-107
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
IN-108
10. SETTING CLIENTS

■ Outline of Client Setting
Client 1 Client 2
Hospital network
DPX7 PC Tool (1) (2)
PC for servicing
DRYPIX DRYPIX
(1) Connecting the PC for servicing to the network

(2) Connecting DPX7 PC Tool to the equipment
FP7B0801.EPS
PC for servicing (DPX7 PC Tool) DRYPIX

HDD
“Indv” folder (5)
(3)
(4)
(3) Importing individual data

(4) Client settings
(5) Sending individual data to the equipment FP7B0903.EPS
006-259-03
IN-109
10.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network

To connect the PC for servicing to the network, set the IP address and subnet mask of
<NOTE>
Before performing the following settings, install the DI Tool in the PC for servicing, and check
that the FTP site directory settings have been completed.
“3.2 Preparing the DPX7 PC Tool”
(1) Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.

(2) From the Windows taskbar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].
(3) Double-click [Network and Dial-up Connections] → Right-click [Local Area
Connection] → [Properties] → [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)].
(4) Set [IP Address] and [Subnet Mask].
<NOTE>
Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network administrator of the
installation site.
(5) [OK] → [OK]

(6) Close all windows.
006-259-05
IN-110
10.2 Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool)/Connecting DPX7 PC

Tool to the Equipment
Start the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool) and complete connections for communicating with
this equipment.

(1) Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar → [Program] → [Fujifilm] → [DI Tool].
→ The DI Tool main screen appears.
(2) Click [NET] of the “DRYPIX 7000/DRYPIX 5000/DRYPIX 4000”.

→ The DPX7 PC Tool starts, then the DPX7 PC Tool screen appears.
006-259-08
IN-111
<NOTE>
From DPX7 PC Tool version A09, the “Soft Ver.Up” function button display has been changed
to “Upgrading”, however some parts of this manual still uses the old name.
006-259-05
IN-112
10.2.2 Connecting DPX7 PC Tool to the Equipment

(2) Right-click [Hospital Name] → [Add].
#1 [Right-click]
[Hospital Name] #2
FP7B0A20.EPS
→ The screen for entering the printer name (Host Name) to be registered appears.
(3) Enter the Host Name set for the equipment connected.
(4) Select [DRYPIX 7000/5000] for [Model].
(5) [OK].
006-259-08
IN-113
(6) [Network].
#1
FP7B0A05.EPS
→ The [HostInformation] screen appears.
Host Name set at step (3)
Default value of DPX7 PC Tool
FP7B0A06.EPS
(7) Enter the IP address and the subnet mask entered on this equipment at “7.2.2
System Management/Set Network”, and click [OK].
→ This completes preparations for enabling communications between this equipment
and DPX7 PC Tool.
(8) Click the function button (ex. [Control] button) at the top of the DPX7 PC Tool
screen.
→ Communication with this equipment starts. When all connections with this equipment
have completed, the operation panel of this equipment switches to the following
screen, activating the various commands from DPX7 PC Tool.
PC-UTL
Executing
<NOTE>
If communications become disabled, the [LOGIN Failure] message appears.
006-259-08
IN-114
10.3 Importing Individual Data

Import individual data into the DPX7 PC Tool, and change the various parameters of
the data as necessary.
(1) “Printer name importing individual data” → [Control] → [File Save/Load] → [Save
→ Reading of individual data starts.
#1 #3 #2
#4 #5 FP7B0A07.EPS
→ After import ends, the [File transfer is completed.] message appears, and the data is
saved in the HD in the PC for servicing.
(2) [OK]
→ The [Control] screen is returned.
006-259-08
IN-115
<REMARKS>
To change the system settings set using the M-Utility, perform the following procedure.
(1) “Printer name importing individual data” → [Setting] → [Config] → change
parameters → [Update]
#2 #1 #3
#4 [Change] Parameters
#5 FP7B0A12.EPS
→ The corrected settings are saved in the HD in the PC for servicing
006-259-08
IN-116
10.4 Settings by Client
10.4.1 Registering Clients

Register the clients (image output device) connected to this equipment with the DPX7
PC Tool.
<CAUTION>
The [Clients:] list is registered with a client named “WatchDRYPIXLink”. Because this is
the internal AE Title used for communications if the DRYPIX Link is a client, do not
change it. Changing it will disable communication when DRYPIX Link and this
equipment are connected.
<NOTE>
For equipment with main unit software version V7.0 or later/V13.0 or later at shipment,
<REMARKS>
FCR-CSL: Settings provided for connecting CR-IR346CL (console for FCR XG-1) and
CR-IR348CL (console for FCR5000 series). This settings is applied to the
clients of named “FCR-CSL”.
default: Settings for clients other than the above.
MammoQCTest: Name of default client (AE Title) used in U-Utility Mammo QC test pattern
output.
006-259-08
IN-117
(1) [Setting] → “printer name” → [Add]

#1 #2
#3 [Clients:] list FP7B0A08.EPS
→ The screen for entering the client name (AE Title) to be registered appears.
(2) Enter the client name → [OK]
→ The new client is added to the [Clients:] list.
<NOTE>
Up to 16 characters can be entered for the AE Title.
006-259-08
IN-118
■ Deleting Clients
Perform the following procedure to delete registered clients.
(1) Click the name of the client to be deleted from the [Clients:] list.
(2) Click [Delete] at the bottom of the [Clients:] list.
→ A message to confirm the deletion of the client selected appears.
(3) [OK].
→ The selected client is deleted.
■ Correcting the Client Name

Perform the following procedure to correct the name of registered clients.
(1) Double-click the name of the client to be changed from the [Clients:] list.
→ The [ProtocolInformation] dialog of the client selected appears.
(2) Change the name of the client
(3) [OK]
→ The name of the client selected changes.
006-259-05
IN-119
10.4.2 Client Settings

Set parameters for the registered client.
Set the following items according to the corresponding client settings in “Modality
Connection List”.
<NOTE>
The default values of the parameters of newly registered clients differ from the default values
of parameters set at “default”.
(1) “Printer name” → “Registered client name”

#1 #2 Screen for setting parameters
FP7B0A09.EPS
→ The screen for setting client parameters appears.
006-259-08
IN-120
(2) Set parameters according to the list of client settings below. For details of each
function, refer to “SERVICE MODE, [PC1-3] Clients”
Item Function Value
Protocol
Attribute List Error Send error message for unexpected data 0: not indicated
(0107H Warning) received or ignore warning. 1: indicated
Attribute Value Out of Range Send error message for out-of-range data 0: not indicated
(0116H Warning) received or ignore warning. 1: indicated
Image Size is Larger than Imagebox Notify that images have been reduced if too 0: not indicated
(B604H Warning) large to fit image frame, or ignore warning. 1: indicated
N-Event-ReportRQ Send event report or not. 0: disabled
1: enabled
Use Extension format Use expansion format or not. 0: No
1: Yes
ID ID for differentiating EV (Philips Easy Vision)
HM (Hitachi DR2000/Clavis view)
CR (XG-1/CR-Console)
CR (Synapse)
SM (Siemens)
Use Default Annotation Use Annotation or not. 0: No
1: Yes
Change Film Change film or not.
Enables film change. Can set whether to 0: 0116H[W]
send details of error.
Details of errors are sent to the client, 272: 0110H[F]
without changing film.
Details of errors (unique values for 21317: 5345H[F]
FUJIFILM systems) are sent to the client,
without changing the film.
Use System Timeout Set timeout of reception from client or not. 0: No
1: Yes
Presentation LUT Use LUT information sent from client or not. 0: No
1: Yes
Precede Picking Up Use precedent removal function or not. 0: No
1: Yes
Use Max/Min Density Use minimum density value or maximum 0: printer
density value. 1: modality
Logging Client DICOM communication log filtering setting 0: No
1: Yes
Reprint Use reprint function or not 0: No
1: Yes
TP7B0801.EPS
006-259-08
IN-121
Item Function Value
Magnify
Procedure Selection of enlargement/reduction 0:A-VR
processing 1: SSM
Default Smoothing Type Selection of smoothing type 1: SHARP
2: MEDIUM
3: SMOOTH
Adjustment Parameter
SHARP
Edge detection Perform enlargement/reduction processing 0: OFF
for edge or not. 1: ON
Detection level Edge detection level setting 1 – 1023
Sharpness Sharpness adjustment parameter setting -70 – 300
Character color Character color setting 0: White
1: Black
MEDIUM
1: Black
SMOOTH
1: Black
Default Requested Decimate/Crop Magnification/reduction setting if client 1: DECIMATE
Behavior does not send information when images 2: CROP
are reduced. 3: FAIL
TP7B0802.EPS
006-259-08
IN-122
Item Function Value
LUT
Procedure Selection of tone processing method 0: SAR
1: BAR
Default LUT Selection of LUT number used as default 1–8
Adjustment Parameter
LUT1 – LUT8 Setting of LUT1 to LUT8
γ Table No. Selection of γ table number of LUT 11 – 99 (BAR: 1 – 10) *1
Max. Density Maximum density value 0 – 300, 330, 360
(x100 for SAR, BAR is % value) (BAR: 0 – 100) *2
Min. Density Minimum density value 0 – 300
(x100 for SAR, No setting for BAR)
Contrast Contrast setting (BAR: 10 – 400)
(x100, No setting for SAR)
Number of Tuning Points No. of fine adjustment points for SAR 0–5
Point1 – Point5 Setting of fine adjustment points 1 to 5
Density Setting of x100 of density value to be finely 1 – 300
adjusted
Shift Setting of x100 value of movement density -100 – 100
value
Contrast Setting of x 100 of contrast of points to be 10 – 400
finely adjusted
Dmax 3.6 Setting of gradation type for Dmax 3.6 0: Standard
*1: Up to 20 can be entered for BAR but enter between 1 and 10.
*2: When entering density exceeding 300, enter 330 or 360.
TP7B0803.EPS
006-259-08
IN-123
Item Function Value
Output Format
Border Density Background density (x100 of actual value) 0 – 300
Polarity (Pos./Neg.) Reverse the black/white of the image 1: normal (Pos.)
2: reverse (Neg.)
Trim Density Image trim density 0 – 300
(x100 of actual value)
Trim Whether there is image trim 0: OFF
1: ON
Trim Width Width of the trim (pixels) 1–9
Number of Copies Default no. of prints 1 – 99
Margin between Image Setting of image frame intervals (Unit: pixel) 0 – 50
Image Layout Setting of image layout method
Positioning to film center 0: concentration
Center of remaining segment set with 1: spread
frame interval value
Film Size Setting of default film size 1: 8IN*10IN
2: 10IN*14IN
3: 14IN*14IN
4: 14IN*17IN
Medium Type (base color) Setting of default film base color 1: blue
2: clear
Film Orientation Setting of film orientation 1: PORTRAIT
2: LANDSCAPE
Mirror Setting of film back/front 0: OFF (Normal)
1: ON (Mirror)
Processing Type Setting of density processing calculation 0: Type1
method 1: Type2
Film Destination Setting of film destination
UpperTray Discharge to upper trays 0: not use
1: use
Bin No 1 – Bin No 10 Discharge to specified bins 0: not use
1: use
Annotation
Annotation Height Setting of magnification degree of 1–4
annotation printing area along character
height
Annotation Font Setting of font type of annotation System: System
Annotation Size Setting of font size of annotation 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20,
22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72
Upper Left/Upper Center/ Setting of annotation position, and entering
Upper Right/Lower Left/
Lower Center/Lower Right
TP7B0804.EPS
006-259-08
IN-124
(3) To set the sorter, perform steps (4) and (5) below.
(4) [Output format] → [Film Destination]
#1
FP7B0A10.EPS
#2
FP7B0A11.EPS
(5) Set the film destination.

• [0: not use]: The destination is not set from the corresponding client.
• [1: use]: The destination is set from the corresponding client.
<REMARKS>
When [Upper Tray] is set as the film destination, the film is discharged to the upper tray. Bins
cannot be specified as the destination here.
(6) [Update]
→ The changed settings are saved in the HD in the PC for servicing.
<NOTE>
Sorter related parameters set here are applied if no bin number is specified for the image data
sent from the client. If a bin number is specified by the client, priority will be given to that bin.
006-259-03
IN-125
10.4.3 Settings by Client

(1) If connecting several clients to this equipment, repeat the “10.4.1 Registering
Clients” procedure and register all clients connected to this equipment.
<NOTE>
It is not possible to register clients with the same name on one printer. Clients with the same
name can be registered on different printers, however if these printers exist within the same
establishment, the settings of additional clients registered will be the same as existing clients.
Changing the name and settings of one client will make the same changes in the other clients
as well.
“SERVICE MODE, 4.5 Registering and Deleting Clients”
<REMARKS>
Up to 32 clients can be registered.
(2) Perform “10.4.2 Client Settings” for all clients registered.
10.4.4 Setting Client [MammoQCTest]

Perform the following procedure to use the mammo QC function.
<NOTE>
• This function is effective for equipment whose main unit software version is V7.0/V13.0 or
later.
• Added client [MammoQCTest] cannot be deleted.
• To use the mammo QC function in equipment whose main unit software version has been
upgraded from V6.0/V12.0 or earlier to V7.0/V13.0 or later, add the client [MammoQCTest]
beforehand.
“SERVICE MODE, 5.14 Settings for Using MammoQC Function After Upgrading Main
Unit Software Version from V6.0/V12.0 or Earlier to V7.0/V13.0”

(2) Set LUT2 to 8 of client [MammoQCTest].
For LUT2, set the same value as the LUT of the mammo system used in the hospital. If
there are several mammo systems in the hospital, set the LUT value of one of these
systems to LUT2, and those of the other systems to LUT3 to LUT8 respectively.
006-259-08
IN-126
10.5 Adding and Registering Printers

To install several sets of this equipment within one establishment, register all sets, and
perform “10.3 Importing Individual Data” and “10.4 Settings by Client” for each set.
<REMARKS>
Up to 32 printers can be registered for one establishment.
(1) Right-click [Hospital Name] → [Add]

#1 [Right-click]
[Hospital Name] #2
FP7B0A13.EPS
→ The screen for entering printer name (HostName) to be registered appears.

<NOTE>
Printer can also be added and registered by right-clicking printer name which have already
been registered, and selecting [Copy] and [Paste]. The clients registered with this printer are
also copy-registered at the same time.

<NOTE>
Names already registered with the establishment, names exceeding 16 characters, blanks,
names starting with a number, and names consisting of 2-byte characters only cannot be
registered.
→ The new printer is registered at [Equipment list].

(3) Perform “10.3 Importing Individual Data” and “10.4 Settings by Client” for each
set.
006-259-08
IN-127
10.6 Sending Data on Setting to the Equipment

Send individual data set using the DPX7 PC Tool to the HD of the equipment.
(1) “Printer name to send data” → [Control] → [File Save/Load] → [Load to the
printer] → [Execute]
#1 #3 #2
#4 #5 FP7B0A14.EPS
→ The individual data set using the DPX7 PC Tool is sent to the selected printer.
After transfer of individual data ends, the [File transfer is completed] message
appears, and the individual data is saved in the HD of the equipment.
(2) Send each individual data to all printers registered.
006-259-08
IN-128

If the following U-Utility functions have been enabled, perform the settings
corresponding to each function.
■ Image QC function
Register user ID.
“SERVICE MODE, 5.1 Registering User ID”
■ Reprint function
Register user ID, and set macro (%REPRINT%) in annotation settings.
“SERVICE MODE, 5.3 Setting Reprint”
■ User settable image output function

Transfer user settable image to the equipment.
“SERVICE MODE, 5.5 Setting Output of User Settable Image”
006-259-03
IN-129
10.8 Ending the DI Tool and the Equipment

(1) Reboot the equipment for the transferred individual data to be valid.
“Printer name” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Reboot] → [Power OFF] →
[Reset]
#1 #3 #2 #5
#4 #6 FP7B0A21.EPS
→ The equipment starts termination operation, and the power goes OFF.
(2) End the DPX7 PC Tool by clicking the [Exit] button.
(3) End the DI Tool by clicking the [EXIT] button of DI Tool main screen.
006-259-08
IN-130
11. CHECKING NETWORK CONNECTION
11.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment

(1) Press the power ON switch on the operation panel.
(2) Check that the equipment starts up.
11.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected

Equipment
(1) Ask the user to output images from a device on the network connected to this
equipment, and check that films are output normally.
Check the following.
• Images are output without errors.
• Images are normal.
11.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment

(1) Shutdown the equipment by touch panel operation.
(2) Check that the equipment starts termination operations and its power goes OFF.
006-259-04
IN-131
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
IN-132
12. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT
12.1 Backing Up Individual Data

■ Flow of Data When Backing Up Iindividual Data

HDD MCT board
“Indv” folder
Back-up FD
FP7B0901.EPS
006-259-03
IN-133
12.1.1 Saving Individual Data in the Equipment HD

After completing the various system settings, save them as system settings
immediately after installation in the HD of the equipment.
(1) Start the DPX7 PC Tool.
(2) “Printer name saving individual data” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Save
Config.] → [Recover] → [Memory]
#1 #3 #2 #5
#4 #6 FP7B0A23.EPS
→ The current system settings are saved in the HD of the equipment.
006-259-08
IN-134
12.1.2 Saving Individual Data in the PC for Servicing

Save the individual data saved inside the equipment as backup data in the PC for
servicing.
(1) “Printer name saving individual data” → [Control] → [File Save/Load] → [Save
#1 #3 #2
#4 #5 FP7B0A15.EPS
→ Individual data is sent to the PC for servicing and saved in the HD.
When the data transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] message appears.
<REMARKS>
The individual data is saved in the “Indv” folder of the registered printer name folder in the
“C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers” folder.
In the above example, the individual data is saved in the “C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\
Printers\Hospital Name_fujiprinter1\Indv” folder.
006-259-08
IN-135
12.1.3 Saving Individual Data on the FD

Save the individual data saved in the PC for servicing to a backup FD.
(1) Insert a backup FD to the FDD of the PC for servicing.
(2) “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Backup]
#1 #2 #4 #3
#5 FP7B0A24.EPS
→ The [Backup] window for selecting the folder for saving the individual data appears.
006-259-08
IN-136
(3) Select “Drive A” → [OK]

#1
#2 FP7B0A25.EPS
→ The individual data is copied to the FD. When the data copy is completed, the [File
transfer is completed.] message appears.
(4) Remove the FD.
006-259-03
IN-137
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
IN-138
12.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur

at Installation
Check if errors have occurred during installation using the DPX7 PC Tool, then save
the errors in the HD of the equipment and HD of the PC for servicing as necessary, and
delete then error logs.
■ Flow of Data When Saving Error Logs

HDD MCT board
“AppEvt.txt”
“LOG” folder
FD
FP7B0902.EPS
006-259-03
IN-139
12.2.1 Checking the Error Log

(1) “Printer name confirming error logs” → [Control] → [File Save/Load] → [Display
Error Log] → [Execute]
#1 #3 #2
#4 #5 FP7B0A16.EPS
→ The error log display screen appears.

(2) Refer to each error code displayed to confirm if serious errors have occurred.
(3) Close the error log display by clicking [OK].
006-259-08
IN-140
12.2.2 Saving Error Logs

(1) [Save IOT Log] → [Execute]
#1 #2 FP7B0A17.EPS
→ The data for analysis is saved in the HD of the equipment.

When the data is saved, the [Save IOT Log completed.] message appears.
(2) [Transfer Analysis Log] → [Execute]
#1 #2 FP7B0A18.EPS
→ The data for analysis saved is sent to the PC for servicing, and saved on the HD.
When the data transfer is completed, the [Transfer Analysis Log completed.] message
appears.
<REMARKS>
• The error log data is saved under the filename “AppEvt.txt”.
• The analysis data is saved in the “LOG” folder of the registered printer name folder in the
“C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers” folder.
(3) To copy only the data of the error log from the PC for servicing to the FD, open the
above “LOG” folder, and copy “AppEvt.txt”.
006-259-03
IN-141
12.2.3 Deleting Error Logs

(1) [Clear Error Log] → [Execute]
#1 #2 FP7B0A19.EPS
→ All log data inside the equipment are cleared.

(2) End the DPX7 PC Tool by clicking the [Exit] button.
(3) End the DI Tool by clicking the [EXIT] button of DI Tool main screen.
settings.
“3.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC”
006-259-05
IN-142

Move the equipment to the place of installation to enable use by the user.
12.3.1 Installing the Equipment and Securing with Fixtures

(1) Move the equipment to the place of installation.
(2) Clamp the upper double nut of the adjustable foot onto the front side fixture.
(3) Attach the spacer and fixture to the base (rear) of the equipment using the bolt
removed from the equipment, and insert the fixture.
(4) Secure the fixture to the buried anchor nut.
(5) Perform the following check and adjustment when connecting the sorter.
• If the casters of the sorter rises off the ground, adjust the height of the casters.
• Connect the sorter to the equipment, and check that the respective heights from
the ground to the base of the sorter and that to the base of the equipment are the
same.
• Check that the clearance between the equipment and sorter is within the specified
range.
006-259-03
IN-143
12.3.2 Installing the Equipment Without Using Fixtures

(1) Ensure the required installation space around the equipment.
(2) Rotate the two adjustable foots of the equipment with the hand and ground to the
floor.
(3) Rotate the lower nut of the adjustable foot with a spanner and adjust the height.
Rotate the two nuts equally. Adjust the amount the nut is adjusted so that even
load is applied to the adjustable foot.
<NOTE>
Lift the equipment until the casters rise above ground.
(4) Rotate the double nut of the adjustable foot and push against the equipment to
secure.
Equipment
[Rotate] Double nut
[Rotate] Nut
Caster
Adjustable foot
FP3B0703.EPS
(5) Perform the following check and adjustment when connecting the sorter.
• If the casters of the sorter rise off the ground at the place of installation, adjust the
height of the casters.
• Connect the sorter to the equipment, and check that the respective heights from
the ground to the base of the sorter and that to the base of the equipment are the
same.
• Check that the clearance between the equipment and sorter is within the specified
range.
006-259-03
IN-144
12.4 Cleaning the Equipment

(1) Clean all covers with a moist cloth.
(2) Hook the shutter to the hooks of the left side cover and rear cover.
006-259-03
IN-145
BLANK PAGE
006-259-03
DRYPIX 7000
SERVICE MANUAL
PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

PC-1
CONTROL SHEET

11/30/2005 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 1, 5
(FM4690)
006-259-05
11.30.2005 FM4690 DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual PC-1
PC-2
INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX 7000 - Checklist

The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps preformed and record the values
determined at the time a DRYPIX 7000 is installed at a site. This document is not intended to
replace the installation checklist located in the DRYPIX 7000 Service Manual but to be
followed concurrently.
Before passing over this equipment to the customer, check the system connection and
output image (from section 8 on) after service as well as at installation.
Installation Information
Serial Number: ____________________ Software Ver.: ____________________
Site Name: ____________________ Installed by: ____________________
Site Number: ____________________ Signature: ____________________
Room Number: ____________________ Date Completed: ____________________
Checklist
❐ 3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION
❐ 4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
❐ 4.4 Checking Components
❐ 5. INSTALLATION
❐ 5.1 Removing External Packaging of the Equipment Main Body
❐ 5.2 Removing Covers
❐ 5.3 Removing Fixtures
❐ 5.4 Installing Separately Packaged Items
❐ 5.5 Changing the Film Size
❐ 5.6 Installing Options
❐ 6.1 Installing the Additional Removal Unit
❐ 6.2 Installing the 20 x 25 cm Size Suction Cup Arm Assembly
❐ 6.3 Installing Additional Image Memory Boards
❐ 6.4 Installing Sorter
❐ 5.7 Connecting Interface Cables
❐ 5.8 Setting the Power Supply
006-259-00
PC-3
❐ 5.9 Connecting the Power Cable

• Record resistance value measured:
Resistance between L and E: ________Ω
Resistance between N and E: ________Ω
Resistance between L and N: ________Ω
❐ 5.10 Installing Covers
❐ 7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT

❐ 7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility
❐ 7.2 System Settings
❐ 7.2.1 System Management/System Config.
❐ 7.2.2 System Management/Network/Set Network
❐ 7.2.3 System Management/Set Main Panel
❐ 7.3 Ending System Settings
❐ 8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS

❐ 8.1 MD1 Operations When Adding Expansion Film Trays
❐ 8.2 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
• Check for film jamming (tray 1) ❐ Pass ❐ Fail
006-259-00
PC-4
❐ 8.3 Checking Density

• Record density value displayed:
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3
Standard value displayed value displayed value displayed value
Step
Dmax 2.64 Dmax 3.0 Dmax 3.3 Dmax 3.6 Dmax
1 fog fog fog fog
4 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05 0.30 ±0.05
5 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05 0.48 ±0.05
6 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05 0.66 ±0.05
7 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05 0.84 ±0.05
8 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05 1.02 ±0.05
9 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05 1.20 ±0.05
10 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05 1.38 ±0.05
11 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05 1.56 ±0.05
12 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05 1.74 ±0.05
13 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05 1.92 ±0.05
14 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07 2.10 ±0.07
15 2.28 ±0.07 2.40 ±0.10 2.40 ±0.10 2.43 ±0.10
16 2.46 ±0.07 2.70 ±0.10 2.70 ±0.10 2.95 ±0.10
17 2.64 ±0.07 3.00 ±0.10 3.30 ±0.20 3.60 ±0.20
❐ 8.4 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and
Scratches
• Check for image unevenness and scratches
❐ Pass ❐ Fail
• Measure recording image format:
20 20
D E
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 B C A
Film size
A
B
C
D
F G
E
F
G
|A–B|
|D–E|
|F–G|
006-259-00
PC-5
❐ 8.5 Checking Conveyance and Scratches on Film Image When the Sorter is
Connected
• Check for abnormal sounds and smell ❐ Pass ❐ Fail
• Check for film jamming ❐ Pass ❐ Fail
• Check for scratches ❐ Pass ❐ Fail
❐ 8.6 Checking the Interlock Function
❐ 8.6.1 Checking the Jam Clear Cover Interlock
❐ 8.6.2 Checking the Front Cover Interlock
❐ Driving System
❐ Scanner System
❐ 8.6.3 Checking the Film Tray Interlocks
❐ Tray 1
❐ Tray 2
❐ Tray 3
❐ 8.6.4 Checking the Sorter Interlock
❐ 8.7 Checking Fan Operations
❐ 8.8 Setting for U-Utility
❐ 9. INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLE SETS
❐ 10. SETTING CLIENTS

❐ 10.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network
❐ 10.2 Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool)/Connecting DPX7 PC Tool to the
Equipment
❐ 10.3 Importing Individual Data
❐ 10.4 Settings by Client
❐ 10.5 Adding and Registering Printers
❐ 10.6 Sending Data on Setting to the Equipment
❐ 10.7 Setting for U-Utility
❐ 10.8 Ending the DI Tool and the Equipment
❐ 11. CHECKING NETWORK CONNECTION

❐ 11.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment
❐ 11.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
❐ 11.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
006-259-05
PC-6
❐ 12. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT

❐ 12.1 Backing Up Individual Data
❐ 12.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
❐ 12.3 Installing the Equipment
❐ 12.4 Cleaning the Equipment
Summary Test ❐ Pass ❐ Fail
❐ Leave the final film at the customer site.

Test equipment: ________, Model: ________, S/N: ________, Calibration Due: ________
006-259-00
PC-7
BLANK PAGE
006-259-00

No.11 6) DRYPIX7000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

No.11 6) DRYPIX7000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FUJI MEDICAL DRY LASER IMAGER

Document No. 006-259-08

Copyright © 2002-2007 by FUJIFILM Corporation

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,

1. HANDLING THIS SERVICE MANUAL

1.1 About This Service Manual

Notation of Unit Symbols

Notation of Cautions, Warning, etc.

Used to indicate the relevant reference.

1.2 Service Manual Appropriations

1.3 Software Version in This Manual

DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)

4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL ........................................... MD-56

0238 ...................................................................................... MT-106

0291 ...................................................................................... MT-146

3. ABNORMAL IMAGES .............................................................................. MT-234

REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

5.6 Film Positioning Motor (Upper) (MD5) ........................................ MC-72

10. CONTROLLER ......................................................................................... MC-136

SERVICE MODE (MU)

[12] REPRINT ........................................................................... MU-19

3. M-UTILITY (MAINTENANCE UTILITY)...................................................... MU-28

[1-4] Network .......................................................................... MU-44

[3] F.D.C. .................................................................................. MU-61

[5-4] Other Actuators .............................................................. MU-82

4. DPX7 PC Tool .......................................................................................... MU-100

4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Command Details .............................................. MU-136

[PC1-2-9-16] MammoQC .............................................. MU-148

[PC1-3-4-7] Margin between Image ............................ MU-167

[PC7] F.D.C. ................................................................................ MU-210

[PC8-2-3-5] Inter Board Test ....................................... MU-248

5. SETTING METHOD BY PURPOSE ......................................................... MU-276

SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

12 CABLE .......................................................................................... SP7-72

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5.6 Installing Options ........................................................................... IN-48

7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT .................................................................. IN-82

10.4 Settings by Client ......................................................................... IN-116

PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

10/15/2002 00 New release (FM3343) All pages

1.1 General Precautions

■ Drive Section Inspection

■ Adjustable Foot Anchorage

■ Optical Parts Handling Precautions

■ Heat Development Unit Handling Precautions

■ Ventilation of Installation Site

■ Other General Precautions

■ Interlock Release Jig

Jam clear cover

1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation

■ How to Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure

● Steps Requiring Precautions Against Laser Radiation Exposure

● Periodical Maintenance for Keeping Equipment Conditions Compliant with

● Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure

■ Front Cover Interlock

2.1 Laser Caution Labels

HHS certification and

● Scanning Optics Unit

■ List of Laser Caution Labels

● HHS Certification and Identification Label

❍ Old Label ❍ New Label

● IEC/EN60825-1:2001 Class 1 Product Label

● IEC/EN60825-1:2001 Class 3B Panel Label #1

● IEC/EN60825-1:2001 Class 3B Panel Label #2